{"http:\/\/dx.doi.org\/10.14288\/1.0308194":{"http:\/\/www.europeana.eu\/schemas\/edm\/dataProvider":[{"value":"CONTENTdm","type":"literal","lang":"en"}],"http:\/\/purl.org\/dc\/terms\/alternative":[{"value":"Captain Cook's voyages round the world","type":"literal","lang":"en"}],"http:\/\/purl.org\/dc\/terms\/isReferencedBy":[{"value":"http:\/\/resolve.library.ubc.ca\/cgi-bin\/catsearch?bid=379368","type":"literal","lang":"en"}],"http:\/\/purl.org\/dc\/terms\/isPartOf":[{"value":"British Columbia Historical Books Collection","type":"literal","lang":"en"}],"http:\/\/purl.org\/dc\/terms\/creator":[{"value":"Kippis, Andrew, 1725-1795","type":"literal","lang":"en"}],"http:\/\/purl.org\/dc\/terms\/issued":[{"value":"2016-05-26","type":"literal","lang":"en"},{"value":"1878","type":"literal","lang":"en"}],"http:\/\/purl.org\/dc\/terms\/description":[{"value":"\"This, the first biography of Cook, is in some respects disappointing. It contains no particulars of his private life ... Places Cook in a number of ships in which he never served. 'The account of Cook's death is derived from David Samwell': - Holmes. Reprinted in numerous complete and abridged editions and a French, a German and a Spanish translation. Most later abridgements have title: 'A narrative of the voyages round the world, performed by Captain James Cook with an account of his life during the previous and intervening periods.'\" -- Strathern, G. M., & Edwards, M. H. (1970). Navigations, traffiques & discoveries, 1774-1848: A guide to publications relating to the area now British Columbia. Victoria, BC: University of Victoria, p. 154-155.","type":"literal","lang":"en"},{"value":"","type":"literal","lang":"en"}],"http:\/\/www.europeana.eu\/schemas\/edm\/aggregatedCHO":[{"value":"https:\/\/open.library.ubc.ca\/collections\/bcbooks\/items\/1.0308194\/source.json","type":"literal","lang":"en"}],"http:\/\/purl.org\/dc\/terms\/extent":[{"value":"x, 404, 16 pages : illustrations, advertisements ; 22 cm","type":"literal","lang":"en"}],"http:\/\/purl.org\/dc\/elements\/1.1\/format":[{"value":"application\/pdf","type":"literal","lang":"en"}],"http:\/\/www.w3.org\/2009\/08\/skos-reference\/skos.html#note":[{"value":" m\n 1^ ^^5^fe^ -u) A\nwwm&k\noi?*4jl\nCAPTAIN COOK'S VOYAGES ROUND\nTHE WORLD.\n^^\n A NARRATIVE OF THE\nVOYAGES ROUND\nTHE WORLD,\nPERFORMED BY\nCAPTAIN JAMES COOK.\nWITH AN ACCOUNT OF HIS LIFE, DURING THE\nPREVIOUS AND INTERVENING\nPERIODS.\nBY A. KIPPIS, D.D., F.R.S., AND S.A.\nWITH TWELVE ILLUSTRATIONS REPRODUCED IN EXACT\nFACSIMILE, FROM DRAWINGS MADE\nDURING THE VOYAGES.\nLONDON:\nBICKERS AND SON, I, LEICESTER SQUARE.\n1878.\n TO THE KING.\nfjIR,\u2014I esteem myself highly honoured in being\npermitted to dedicate and present my Narrative\nof the Life and Actions of Captain James Cook to\nyour Majesty. It was owing to your Majesty's\nroyal patronage and bounty that this illustrious\nnavigator was enabled to execute those vast undertakings, and\nto make those extraordinary discoveries which have contributed\nso much to the reputation of the British Empire, and have\nreflected such peculiar glory on your Majesty's reign. Without\nyour Majesty's munificence and encouragement the world would\nhave remained destitute of that immense light which has been\nthrown on geography, navigation, and the most important\nsciences. To your Majesty, therefore, a work like the present\nis with particular propriety addressed.\nIt is impossible on this occasion to avoid extending my\nthoughts to the other noble instances in which your Majesty's\nliberal protection of science and literature has been displayed.\nYour Majesty began your reign in a career so glorious to princes,\nand wonderful has been the increase of knowledge and taste in\nthis country. The improvements in philosophical science, and\nparticularly in astronomy, the exertions of experimental and\nchemical inquiry, the advancement of natural history, the progress and perfection of the polite arts, and the valuable compositions that have been produced in every department of learning, have corresponded with your Majesty's gracious wishes and\nencouragement, and have rendered the name of Britain famous\nin every quarter of the globe. If there be any persons who, in\nthese respects, would depreciate the present times in compari-\n DEDICA TION.\nson with those which have preceded them, it may safely be\nasserted that such persons have not duly attended to the history\nof literature. The course of my studies has enabled me to\nspeak with some confidence on the subject, and to say that\nyour Majesty's reign is eminently distinguished by one of the\ngreatest glories that can belong to a monarch.\nKnowledge and virtue constitute the chief happiness of a\nnation, and it is devoutly to be wished that the virtue of this\ncountry were equal to its knowledge. If it be not so, this does\nnot arise from the want of an illustrious example in the person\nof your Majesty and that of your royal Consort. The pattern\nwhich is set by the King and Queen of Great Britain of those\nqualities which are the truest ornaments and felicities of life,\naffords a strong incitement to the imitation of the same excellences, and cannot fail of contributing to the more extensive prevalence of that moral conduct on which the welfare of society\nso greatly depends.\nThat your Majesty may possess every felicity in your royal\nperson and family, and enjoy a long and prosperous reign over\nan enlightened, a free, and a happy people, is the sincere and\nardent prayer of,\nSir,\nYour Majesty's most faithful,\nand most obedient,\nsubject and servant,\nAndrew Kippis.\nLondon, June 13, 1788.\n PREFACE.\nALTHOUGH I have often appeared before the\npublic as a writer, I never did it with so much\ndiffidence and anxiety as on the present occasion.\nThis arises from the peculiar nature of the work\nin which I am now engaged. A narrative of the\nLife and Actions of Captain Cook must principally consist of\nthe voyages and discoveries he made, and the difficulties and\ndangers to which he was exposed. The private incidents concerning him, though collected with the utmost diligence, can\nnever compare, either in number or importance, with his public\ntransactions. His public transactions are the things that mark\nthe man, that display his mind and his character, and therefore\nthey are the grand objects to which the attention of his\nbiographer must be directed. However, the right conduct of\nthis business is a point of no small difficulty and embarrassment. The question will frequently arise, How far the detail\nshould be extended ? There is a danger, on the one hand, of\nbeing carried to an undue length, and of enlarging more than\nis needful on facts which may be thought already sufficiently\nknown; and, on the other hand, of giving such a jejune account, and such a slight enumeration of important events, as\nshall disappoint the wishes and expectations of the reader. Of\nthe two extremes the last seems to be that which should most\nbe avoided; for, unless what Captain Cook performed and\nwhat he encountered be related somewhat at large, his Life and\nActions would be imperfectly represented to the world. The\nproper medium appears to be to bring forward the things in\n PREFACE.\nwhich he was personally concerned, and to pass slightly over\nother matters. Even here it is scarcely possible, nor would it\nbe desirable, to avoid the introduction of some of the most\nstriking circumstances which relate to the new countries and inhabitants that were visited by our great navigator I since these\nconstitute a part of the knowledge and benefit derived from his\nundertakings. . Whether I have been so happy as to preserve\nthe due medium, I presume not to determine. I have been\nanxious to do it, without always being able fully to satisfy my\nown mind that I have succeeded; on which account I shall not\nbe surprised if different opinions should be formed on the subject. In that case, all that I can offer in my own defence will\nbe, that I have acted to the best of my judgment. At any\nrate, I flatter myself with the hope of having presented to the\npublic a work not wholly uninteresting or unentertaining.\nThose who are best acquainted with Captain Cook's expeditions may be pleased with reviewing them in a more compendious form, and with having his actions placed in a closer point\nof view, in consequence of their being divested of the minute\nnautical and other details which were essentially necessary in\nthe voyages at large. As to those persons, if there be any, who\nhave hitherto obtained but an imperfect knowledge of what\nwas done and discovered by this illustrious man, they will not\nbe offended with the length of the following narrative.\nIn various respects, new information will be found in the\npresent performance, and other things, which were less perfectly known before, are set in a clearer and fuller light. This,\nI trust, will appear in the first, third, fifth, and seventh chapters.\nIt may be observed, likewise, that the fresh matter now communicated is of the most authentic kind, and derived from the\nmost respectable sources. My obligations of this nature are,\nindeed, very great, and call for my warmest gratitude. The\ndates and facts relative to Captain Cook's different promotions\nare taken from the books of the Admiralty, by the direction of\nthe noble lord who is at the head of that Board and the favour\nof Mr. Stephens. I embrace with pleasure this opportunity of\nmentioning that in the course of my life I have experienced in\nseveral instances Lord Howe's condescending and favourable\n attention. To Mr. Stephens I am indebted for other communications besides those which concern the times of Captain\nCook's preferments, and for his general readiness in forwarding\nthe design of the present work. The Earl of Sandwich, the\ngreat patron of our navigator and the principal mover in his\nmighty undertakings, has honoured me with some important\ninformation concerning him, especially with regard to the circumstances which preceded his last voyage. To Sir Hugh\nPalliser's zeal for the memory of his friend I stand particularly\nobliged. From a large communication with which he was so\ngood as to favour me, I have derived very material intelligence,\nas will appear in the course of the narrative, and especially in\nthe first chapter. In the same chapter are some facts which I\nreceived from Admiral Graves, through the hands of the Rev.\nDr. Douglas, now Bishop of Carlisle (whose admirable Introduction to the Voyage to the Pacific Ocean must be of the\nmost essential service to every writer of the Life of Captain\nCook). The Captain's amiable and worthy Widow, who is\nheld in just esteem by all his friends, has given me an\naccount of several domestic circumstances. I should be deficient in gratitude were I here to omit the name of Mr. Sam-\nwell ; for, though what is inserted from him in this work has already been laid before the public, it should be remembered\nthat, through the interposition of our common friend the Rev.\nMr. Gregory, it was originally written for my use, and freely\nconsigned to my disposal; and that it was at my particular instance and request that it was separately printed. My obligations to other gentlemen will be mentioned in their proper\nplaces.\nBut my acknowledgments are, above all, due to Sir Joseph\nBanks, President of the Royal Society, for the interest he has\ntaken in the present publication. It was in consequence of his\nadvice that it was given to the world in the form which it now\nbears; and his assistance has been invariable through every\npart of the undertaking. To him the inspection of the whole\nhas been submitted, and to him it is owing that the work is, in\nmany respects, far more complete than it would otherwise have\nbeen. The exertions of zeal and friendship I have been so\n x PREFACE.\nhappy as to experience from him in writing the account of\nCaptain Cook, have corresponded with that ardour which Sir\nJoseph Banks is always ready to display in promoting whatever\nhe judges to be subservient to the cause of science and literature.\nhi 11\n CONTENTS.\nCHAPTER I.\nCCOUNT of Captain Cook previous to his First Voyage\nRound the World\t\nCHAPTER II.\nNarrative of Captain Cook's First Voyage Round the\n\"World in the years 1768, 1769, 1770, and 1771 .... 9\nCHAPTER III.\nAccount of Captain Cook during the Period between his First and\nSecond Voyage .......... 131\nCHAPTER IV.\nNarrative of Captain Cook's Second Voyage Round the World in the\nyears 1772, 1773, 1774, and 1775 137\nCHAPTER V.\nAccount of Captain Cook during the Period between his Second and\nThird Voyage 226\nCHAPTER VI.\nNarrative of Captain Cook's Third Voyage in the years 1776, 1777,\n1778, and 1779, to the Period of his Death ..... 241\nCHAPTER VII.\nCharacter of Captain Cook.\u2014Effects of his Voyages.\u2014Testimonies of\nApplause.\u2014Commemorations of his Services.\u2014Regard paid to his\nFamily.\u2014Conclusion 349\nAppendix . 377\n COOK'S VOYAGES.\nCHAPTER I\nACCOUNT OF CAPTAIN COOK, PREVIOUS TO HIS FIRST VOYAGE\nROUND THE WORLD.\nAPTAIN JAMES COOK had no claim to distinction on account of the lustre of his birth, or the\ndignity of his ancestors. His father, James Cook,\nwho from his dialect is supposed to have been a\nNorthumbrian, was in the humble station of a\nservant in husbandry, and married a woman of the same rank\nwith himself, whose christian name was Grace. Both of them\nwere noted in their neighbourhood for their honesty, sobriety,\n\u25a0 and diligence. They first lived at a village called Morton, and\nthen removed to Marton, another village in the North-riding of\nYorkshire, situated in the high road from Gisborough, in Cleveland, to Stockton-upon-Tees, in the county of Durham, at the\ndistance of six miles from each of these towns. At Morton,\nCaptain Cook was born, on the 27th of October, 1728;x and,\nagreeably to the custom of the vicar of the parish, whose practice it was to baptize infants soon after their birth, he was\nbaptized on the 3rd of November following. He was one of nine\n1 The mud house in which Captain Cook drew his first breath is pulled\ndown, and no vestiges of it are now remaining.\nB\n COOK'S VOYAGES.\nchildren, all of whom are now dead, excepting a daughter, who\nmarried a fisherman at Redcar. The first rudiments of young\nCook's education were received by him at Marton, where he\nwas taught to read by dame Walker, the schoolmistress of the\nvillage. When he was eight years of age, his father, in \u25a0 consequence of the character he had obtained for industry, frugality,\nand skill in husbandry, had a little promotion bestowed upon\nhim, which was that of being appointed head-serva#t, or hind,1\nto a farm belonging to the late Thomas Skottow, Esq., called\nAiry Holme, near Great Ay ton. To this place, therefore, he\nremoved with his family;2 and his son James, at Mr. Skottow's\nexpense, was put to a day-school in. Ayton, where he was\ninstructed in writing, and in a few of the first rules of arithmetic.\nBefore he was thirteen years of age, he was bound an apprentice to Mr. William Sanderson, a haberdasher, or shopkeeper,\nat Straiths, a considerable fishing town, about ten miles north\nof Whitby. This employment, however, was very unsuitable\nto young Cook's disposition. The sea was the object of his\ninclination; and his passion for it could not avoid being\nstrengthened by the situation of the town in which he was\nplaced, and the manner of life of the persons with whom he\nmust frequently converse. Some disagreement having happened between him and his master, he obtained his discharge,\nand soon after bound himself for seven years to Messrs. John\nand Henry Walker, of Whitby, Quakers by religious profession,\nand principal owners of the ship Freelove, and of another\nvessel, both of which were constantly employed in the coal\ntrade. The greatest part of his apprenticeship was spent on\nboard the Freelove. After he was out of his time, he continued to serve in the coal and other branches of trade (though\nchiefly in the former) in the capacity of a common sailor; till,\nat length, he was raised to be mate of one of Mr. John Walker's\nships. During this period it is not recollected that he exhibited\n1 This is the name which, in that part of the country, is given to the head-\nservant, or bailiff, of a farm.\n2 Mr. Cook, senior, spent the close of his life with his daughter, at Red-\ncar, and is supposed to have been about eighty-five years of age when he\ndied.\n COOJTS VOYAGES. 3\nanything very peculiar, either in his abilities or his conduct;\nthough there can be no* doubt but that he had gained a considerable degree of knowledge in the practical part of navigation, and that his attentive and sagacious mind was laying up a\nstore of observations which would be useful to him in future life.\nIn the spring of- the year 1755, when hostilities broke out\nbetween England and France, and there was a hot press for seamen, Mr. Cook happened to be in the river Thames with the\nship to which he belonged. At first he concealed himsplfj\nto avoid being pressed; but reflecting that it might be difficult,\nnotwithstanding all his vigilance, to elude discovery or escape\npursuit, he determined, upon farther consideration, to enter\nvoluntarily into his majesty's service, and to take his future\nfortune in the royal navy. Perhaps he had some presage in\nhis own mind, that by his activity and exertions he might rise\nconsiderably above his present situation. Accordingly, he went\nto a rendezvous at Wapping, and entered with an officer of the\nEagle man-of-war, a ship of sixty guns, at that time commanded\nby Captain Hamer. To this ship Captain (afterwards Sir Hugh)\nPalliser was appointed, in the month of October, 1755; and\nwhen he took the command, found in her James Cook, whom\nhe soon distinguished to be an able, active, and diligent seaman.\nAll the officers spoke highly in his favour, and the Captain was\nso well pleased with his behaviour, that he gave him every\nencouragement which lay in his power.\nIn the course of some time, Captain Palliser received a letter\nfrom Mr. Osbaldeston, men member of Parliament for Scarborough, acquainting him that several neighbours of his had\nsolicited him to write in favour of one Cook, on board the captain's ship. They had heard that Captain Palliser had taken\nnotice of him, and they requested, if he thought Cook deserving\nof it, that he would point out in what manner Mr. Osbaldeston\nmight best contribute his assistance towards forwarding the\nyoung man's promotion. The captain, in his reply, did justice\nto Cook's merit; but, as he had been only a short time in the\nnavy, informed Mr. Osbaldeston that he could not be promoted\nas a commission officer. A master's warrant, Captain Palliser\nadded, might perhaps be procured for Mr. Cook, by which he\n 4 COOK'S VOYAGES.\n\u25a0 would be raised to a station that he was well qualified to discharge with ability and credit.\nSuch a warrant he obtained on the ioth of May, 1759, for the\nGrampus sloop; but the proper master having unexpectedly\nreturned to her, the appointment did not take place. Four\ndays after he was made master of the Garland; when, upon\ninquiry, it was found that he could not join her, as the ship\nhad already sailed. On the next day, the 15th of May, he was\nappointed to the Mercury. These quick and successive appointments show that his interest was strong, and that the intention\nto serve him was real and effectual.\nThe destination of the Mercury was to North America, where\nshe joined the fleet under the command of Sir Charles Saunders,\nwhich, in conjunction with the land forces under General Wolfe,\nwas engaged in the famous siege of Quebec. During that siege\na difficult and dangerous service was necessary to be performed.\nThis was to take the soundings in the channel of the river St.\nLawrence, between the island of Orleans and the north shore,\ndirectly in the front of the French fortified camp at Montmorency\nand Beauport, in order to enable the admiral to place ships\nagainst the enemy's batteries, and to cover our army on a\ngeneral attack which the heroic Wolfe intended to make on the\ncamp. Captain Palliser, in consequence of his acquaintance\nwith Mr. Cook's sagacity and resolution, recommended\nhim to the service; and he performed it in the most complete\nmanner. In this business he was employed during the nighttime for several nights together. At length he was discovered\nby the enemy, who collected a great number of Indians and\ncanoes in a wood near the waterside, which were launched in the\nnight, for the purpose of surrounding him, and cutting him off.\nOn this occasion he had a very narrow escape. He was obliged\nto run for it, and pushed on shore on the island of Orleans,\nnear the guard of the English hospital. Some of the Indians\nentered at the stern of the boat as Mr. Cook leaped out at the\nbow; and the boat, which was a barge belonging to one of the\nships of war, was carried away in triumph. However, he furnished the admiral with as correct and complete a draught of\nthe channel and soundings as could have been made after our\nI\n COOK'S VOYAGES.\ncountrymen were in possession of Quebec. Sir Hugh Palliser\nhad good reason to believe that before this time Mr. Cook had\nscarcely ever used a pencil, and that he knew nothing of drawing.\nBut such was his capacity, that he speedily made himself master\nof every object to which he applied his attention.\nAnother important service was performed by Mr. Cook while\nthe fleet continued in the river of St. Lawrence. The navigation\nof that river is exceedingly difficult and hazardous. It was particularly so to the English, who were then in a great measure\nstrangers to this part of North America, and who had no chart,\non the correctness of which they could depend. It was therefore ordered by the admiral that Mr. Cook should be employed\nto survey those parts of the river, below Quebec, which navigators had experienced to be attended with peculiar difficulty\nand danger; and he executed the business with the same\ndiligence and skill of which he had already afforded so happy\na specimen. When he had finished the undertaking, his chart\nof the river St. Lawrence was published, with soundings, and\ndirections for sailing in that river. Of the accuracy and utility\nof this chart, it is sufficient to say that it hath never since been\nfound necessary to publish any other. One which has appeared\nin France is only a copy of our author's, on a reduced scale.\nAfter the expedition at Quebec Mr. Cook, by warrant from\nLord Colvill, was appointed, on the 22nd of September, 1759,\nmaster of the Northumberland man-of-war, the ship in which\nhis lordship staid, in the following winter, as commodore, with\nthe command of a squadron at Halifax. In this station Mr.\nCook's behaviour did not fail to gain him the esteem and friendship of his commander. During the leisure which the season\nof winter afforded him he employed his time in the acquisition\nof such knowledge as eminently qualified him for future service.\nIt was at Halifax that he first read Euclid, and applied himself\nto the study of astronomy and other branches of science. The\nbooks of which he had the assistance were few in number: but\nhis industry enabled him to supply many defects, and to make\na progress far superior to what could be expected from the advantages he enjoyed.\nWhile Mr. Cook was master of the Northumberland, under\n COOK'S VOYAGES.\nLord Colvill, that ship came to Newfoundland, in September,\n1762, to assist in the recapture of the island from the French,\nby the forces under the command of Lieutenant-colonel Amherst.\nWhen the island was recovered, the English fleet staid some\ndays at Placentia, in order to put it in a more complete state of\ndefence. During this time Mr. Cook manifested a diligence in\nsurveying the harbour and heights of the place, which arrested\nthe notice of Captain (now Admiral) Graves, commander of the\nAntelope, and governor of Newfoundland. The governor was\nhence induced to ask Cook a variety of questions, from the answers to which he was led to entertain a very favourable opinion\nof his abilities. This opinion was increased the more he saw\nof Mr. Cook's conduct; who, wherever they went, continued to\ndisplay the most unremitting attention to every object that\nrelated to the knowledge of the coast, and was calculated to\nfacilitate the practice of navigation. The esteem which Captain\nGraves had conceived for him was confirmed by the testimonies to his character that were given by all the officers under\nwhom he served.\nIn the latter end of 1762 Mr. Cook returned to England;\nand, on the 21st of December, in the same year, married, at\nBarking, in Essex, Miss Elizabeth Batts, an amiable and deserving woman, who was justly entitled to, and enjoyed, his tender-\nest regard and affection. But his station in life, and the high\nduties to which he was called, did not permit him to partake of\nmatrimonial felicity without many and very long interruptions.\nEarly in the year 1763, after the peace with France and Spain\nwas concluded, it was determined that Captain Graves should\ngo out again as governor of Newfoundland. As the country\nwas very valuable in a commercial view, and had been an object\nof great contention between the English and the French, the captain obtained an establishment for the survey of its coasts; which,\nhowever, he procured with some difficulty, because the matter\nwas not sufficiently understood by government at home. In\nconsidering the execution of the plan, Mr. Cook appeared to\nCaptain Graves to be a proper person for the purpose; and\nproposals were made to him, to which, notwithstanding his recent marriage, he readily and prudently acceded. Accordingly,\n COOK'S VOYAGES.\nhe went out with the Captain as surveyor; and was first employed to survey Miquelon and St. Pierre, which had been ceded\nby the treaty to the French, who, by order of administration,\nwere to take possession of them at a certain period, even though\nthe English commander should not happen to be arrived in the\ncountry. When Captain Graves had reached that part of the\nworld, he found there the governor who had been sent from\nFrance (Mons. D'Anjac), with all the settlers and his own family, on board a frigate and some transports. It was contrived,\nhowever, to keep them in that disagreeable situation for a whole\nmonth, which was the time taken by Mr. Cook to complete his\nsurvey. When the business was finished, the French were put\ninto possession of the two islands, and left in the quiet enjoyment\nof them, with every profession of civility.\nAt the end of the season Mr. Cook returned to England, but\ndid not long continue at home. In the beginning of the year\n1764, his old and constant friend and patron, Sir Hugh Palliser,\nwas appointed governor and commodore of Newfoundland and\nLabradore; upon which occasion he was glad to take Mr. Cook\nwith him, in the same capacity that he had sustained under Captain Graves. Indeed, no man could have been found who was\nbetter qualified for finishing the design which had been begun\nin the preceding year. The charts of the coasts, in that part of\nNorth America, were very erroneous; and it was highly necessary\nto the trade and navigation of his majesty's subjects that new\nones should be formed, which would be more correct and useful.\nAccordingly, under the orders of Commodore Palliser, Mr. Cook\nwas appointed, on the 18th of April, 1764, marine surveyor of\nNewfoundland and Labradore ; and he had a vessel, the Gren-\nville schooner, to attend him for that purpose. How well he\nexecuted his commission is known to every man acquainted with\nnavigation. The charts which he afterwards published of the\ndifferent surveys he had made reflected great credit on his abilities and character; and the utility of them is universally acknowledged. It is understood that, so far as Newfoundland is concerned, they were of considerable service to the king's ministers\nin settling the terms of the last peace. Mr. Cook explored the\ninland parts of this island in a much completer manner than had\n 8 COOK'S VOYAGES.\never been done before. By penetrating further into the middle\nof the country than any man had hitherto attempted, he discovered several large lakes, which are indicated upon the general\nchart. In these services Mr. Cook appears to have been em--\nployed, with the intervals of occasionally returning to England\nfor the winter season, till the year 1767, which was the last time\nthat he went out upon his station of marine surveyor of Newfoundland. It must not be omitted that while he occupied this\npost he had an opportunity of exhibiting to the Royal Society a\nproof .of his progress in the study of astronomy. A short paper\nwas written by him, and inserted in the fifty-seventh volume of\nthe Philosophical Transactions, entitled, | An Observation of an\nEclipse of the Sun at the Island of Newfoundland, August 5,\n1766, with the Longitude of the place of Observation deduced\nfrom it.\" The observation was made at one of the Burgeo\nislands, near Cape Ray, in latitude 470 36' 19\", on the southwest extremity of Newfoundland. Mr. Cook's paper having\nbeen communicated by Dr. Bevis to Mr. Witchell, the latter\ngentleman compared it with an observation at Oxford, by the\nRev. Mr. Hornsby, on the same eclipse, and thence computed\nthe difference of longitude respecting the places of observation,\nmaking due allowance for the effect of parallax, and the prolate\nspheroidal figure of the earth. It appears from the Transactions\nthat our navigator had already obtained the character of being\nan able mathematician.\n CHAPTER II.\nNARRATIVE OF CAPTAIN COOK'S FIRST VOYAGE ROUND THE WORLD.\nHERE is scarcely anything from which the natural\ncuriosity of man receives a higher gratification\nthan from the accounts of distant countries and\nnations. Nor is it curiosity only that is gratified\nby such accounts; for the sphere of human knowledge is hereby enlarged, and various objects are brought into\nview, an acquaintance with which greatly contributes to the improvement of life and the benefit of the world. With regard to\ninformation of this kind, the moderns have eminently the advantage over the ancients. The ancients could neither pursue their\ninquiries with the same accuracy, nor carry them on to the same\nextent. Travelling by land was much more inconvenient and\ndangerous than it hath been in later times; and, as navigation\nwas principally confined to coasting, it must necessarily have been\ncircumscribed within very narrow limits.\nThe invention of the compass, seconded by the ardent and\nenterprising spirit of several able men, was followed by wonderful discoveries. Vasco di Gama doubled the Cape of Good\nHope ; and a new way being thus found out to the East Indies,\nthe countries in that part of the earth became more accurately\nand extensively known. Another world was discovered by Columbus ; and, at length, Magalhaens accomplished the arduous\nand hitherto unattempted task of sailing round the globe. At\ndifferent periods he was succeeded by other circumnavigators,\nof whom it is no part of the present narrative to give an account.\nThe spirit of discovery which was so vigorous during the\n COOK'S VOYAGES.\nlatter end of the fifteenth and through the whole of the sixteenth\ncentury, began soon after the commencement of the seventeenth\ncentury to decline. Great navigations were only occasionally\nundertaken, and more from the immediate views of avarice or\nwar than from any noble and generous principles. But of late\nyears they have been revived, with the enlarged and benevolent\ndesign of promoting the happiness of the human species.\nA beginning of this kind was made in the reign of George the\nSecond, during which two voyages were performed: the first\nunder the command of Captain Middleton, and the next under\nthe direction of Captains Smith and More, in order to discover\na north-west passage through Hudson's Bay. It was reserved,\nhowever, for the glory of the present reign to carry the spirit of\ndiscovery to its height, and to conduct it on the noblest principles ; not for the purposes of covetousness or ambition; not\nto plunder or destroy the inhabitants of newly explored countries;\nbut to improve their condition, to instruct them in the arts of\nlife, and to extend the boundaries of science.\nNo sooner was peace restored, in 1763, than these laudable\ndesigns engaged his majesty's patronage; and two voyages round\nthe world had been undertaken before Mr. Cook set out on his\nfirst command. The conductors of these voyages were the Captains Byron, Wallis, and Carteret,1 by whom several discoveries\nwere made, which contributed, in no small degree, to increase\nthe knowledge of geography and navigation. Nevertheless, as\nthe purpose for which they were sent out appears to have had a\nprincipal reference to a particular object in the South Atlantic,\nthe direct track they were obliged to hold, on their way homeward by the East Indies, prevented them from doing so much as\nmight otherwise have been expected towards giving the world a\ncomplete view of that immense expanse of ocean which the\nSouth Pacific comprehends.\nBefore Captain Wallis and Captain Carteret had returned to\nGreat Britain, another voyage was resolved upon, for which the\n1 The Captains Wallis and Carteret went out together upon the same\nexpedition; but the vessels they commanded having accidentally parted\ncompany, they proceeded and returned by a different route. Hence their\nvoyages are distinctly related by Dr. Hawkesworth.\n COOK'S VOYAGES.\nimprovement of astronomical science afforded the immediate\noccasion. It having been calculated by astronomers that a\ntransit of Venus over the sun's disk would happen in 1769, it\nwas judged that the best place for observing it would be in some\npart of the South Sea, either at the Marquesas, or at one of those\nislands which Tasman had called Amsterdam, Rotterdam, and\nMiddleburg, and which are now better known under the appellation of the Friendly Islands. This being a matter of eminent\nconsequence in astronomy, and which excited the attention of\nforeign nations as well as of our own, the affair was taken up by\nthe Royal Society, with the zeal which has always been displayed\nby that learned body for the advancement of every branch of\nphilosophical science. Accordingly, a long memorial was addressed to his majesty, dated the 15th of February, 1768, representing the great importance of the object, together with the regard which had been paid to it by the principal courts of Europe;\nand entreating, among other things, that a vessel might be\nordered, at the expense of government, for the conveyance of\nsuitable persons, to make the observation of the transit of Venus,\nat one of the places before mentioned. This memorial having\nbeen laid before the king by the Earl of Shelburne (now the\nMarquess of Lansdown), one of the principal secretaries of state,\nhis majesty graciously signified his pleasure to the lords commissioners of the Admiralty, that they should provide a ship for\ncarrying over such observers as the Royal Society should judge\nproper to send to the South Seas ; and, on the 3rd of April, Mr.\nStephens informed the society that a bark had been taken up for\nthe purpose.\nThe gentleman who had originally been fixed upon to take\nthe direction of the expedition was Alexander Dalrymple, Esq.,\nan eminent member of the Royal Society, and who, besides\npossessing an accurate knowledge of astronomy, had distinguished himself by his inquiries into the geography of the\nSouthern Oceans, and by the collection he had published of\nseveral voyages to those parts of the world. Mr. Dalrymple\nbeing sensible of the difficulty, or rather of the impossibility, of\ncarrying a ship through unknown seas, the crew of which were\nnot subject to the military discipline of his majesty's navy, he\n COOK'S VOYAGES.\nmade it the condition of his going, that he should have a brevet\ncommission, as captain of the vessel, in the same manner as\nsuch a commission had been granted to Dr. Halley, in his\nvoyage of discovery. To this demand Sir Edward Hawke,\nwho was then at the head of the Admiralty, and who possessed\nmore of the spirit of his profession than either of education or\nscience, absolutely refused to accede. He said, at the board,\nthat his conscience would not allow him to trust any ship of\nhis majesty's to a person who had not regularly been bred a\nseaman. On being further pressed upon the subject, Sir\nEdward declared that he would suffer his right hand to be cut\noff before he would sign any such commission. In this he was\nin some degree justified by the mutinous behaviour of Halley's\ncrew, who refused to acknowledge the legal authority of their\ncommander, and involved him in a dispute which was attended\nwith pernicious consequences. Mr. Dalrymple, on the other\nhand, was equally steady in requiring a compliance with the\nterms he had proposed. Such was the state of things when\nMr. Stephens, secretary to the Admiralty\u2014whose discrimination\nof the numerous characters with which by his station he is conversant reflects as much credit .on his understanding as his\nupright and able conduct does on the office he has filled for so\nmany years, and under so many administrations, with honour\nto himself and advantage to the public\u2014observed to the board,\nthat since Sir Edward Hawke and Mr. Dalrymple were equally\ninflexible, no method remained but that of finding out another\nperson capable of the service. He knew, he said, a Mr. Cook,\nwho had been employed as marine surveyor of Newfoundland,\nwho had been regularly educated in the navy, in which he was\na master, and whom he judged to be fully qualified for the direction of the present undertaking. Mr. Stephens, at the same time,\nrecommended it to the board to take the opinion of Sir Hugh\nPalliser, who had lately been governor of Newfoundland, and\nwas intimately acquainted with Cook's character. Sir Hugh rejoiced in the opportunity of serving his friend. He strengthened\nMr. Stephens's recommendation to the utmost of his power;\nand added many things in Mr. Cook's favour, arising from the\nparticular knowledge which he had of his abilities and merit.\n COOK'S VOYAGES.\nAccordingly, Mr. Cook was appointed to the command of the\nexpedition by the lords of the Admiralty; and on this occasion\nhe was promoted to the rank of a lieutenant in the royal navy,\nhis commission bearing date on the 25th of May, 1768. Ejp*\nWhen the appointment had taken place, the firs\u00a3 object was\nto provide a vessel adapted to the purposes of the voyage. This\nbusiness was committed to Sir Hugh Palliser, who took Lieutenant Cook to his assistance, and they examined together a\ngreat number of the ships which then lay in the river Thames.\nAt length they fixed upon one of three hundred and seventy\ntons, to which was given the name of the Endeavour.\nWhile preparations were making for Lieutenant Cook's expedition, Captain Wallis returned from his voyage round the\nworld. The Earl of Morton, president of the Royal Society,\nhad recommended it to this gentleman, on his going out, to fix\nupon a proper place for observing the transit of Venus. He kept,\naccordingly, the object in view; and having discovered, in the\ncourse of his enterprise, an island, called by him George's Island,\nbut which has since been found to bear the name of Otaheite,\nhe judged that Port Royal harbour in this island would afford\nan eligible situation for the purpose. Having, immediately on\nhis return to England, signified his opinion to the Earl of\nMorton, the captain's idea was adopted by the society, and an\nanswer conformable to it was sent to the commissioners of the\nAdmiralty, who had applied for directions to what place the\nobservers should be sent.\nMr. Charles Green, a gentleman who had long been assistant\nto Dr. Bradley at the royal observatory at Greenwich, was united\nwith Lieutenant Cook in conducting the astronomical part of\nthe voyage; and, soon after their appointment, they received\nample instructions from the. council Of the Royal Society with\nregard to the method of carrying on their inquiries. The lieutenant was also accompanied by Joseph Banks, Esq. (now Sir\nJoseph Banks, Bart.), and Dr. Solander, who, in the prime of\nlife, and the first of them at great expense to himself, quitted all\nthe gratifications of polished society, and engaged in a very\ntedious, fatiguing, and hazardous navigation, with the laudable\nviews of acquiring knowledge in general, of promoting natural\n 14\nCOOK'S VOYAGES.\nknowledge in particular, and of contributing something to the\nimprovement and the happiness of the rude inhabitants of the\nearth.\nThough it was the principal, it was not the sole object of\nLieutenant Cook's voyage to observe the transit of Venus. A\nmore accurate examination of the Pacific Ocean was committed\nto him, although in subserviency to his main design : and, when\nhis chief business was accomplished, he was directed to proceed\nin making farther discoveries in the great Southern Seas.\nThe complement of Lieutenant Cook's ship consisted of eighty-\nfour persons besides the commander. Her victualling was for\neighteen months; and there was put on board of her ten carriage\nand ten swivel guns, together with an ample store of ammunition\nand other necessaries.\nOn the 25th of May, 1768, Lieutenant Cook was appointed\nby the lords of the Admiralty to the command of the Endeavour, in consequence of which he went on board on the 27th and\ntook charge of the ship. She then lay in the basin in Deptford\nYard, where she continued to lie till she was completely fitted\nfor sea. On the 30th of July she sailed down the river, and on\nthe 13th of August anchored in Plymouth Sound. The wind\nbecoming fair on the 26th of that month, our navigators got\nunder sail, and on the 13th of September anchored in Funchiale\nRoad, in the Island of Madeira.\nWhile Lieutenant Cook and his company were in this island,\nthey were treated with the utmost kindness and liberality by\nMr. Cheap, the English consul there, and one of the most considerable merchants in the town of Funchiale. He insisted upon\ntheir taking possession of his house, and furnished them with\nevery possible accommodation during their stay at Madeira.\nThey received likewise great marks of attention and civility\nfrom Dr. Thomas Heberden, the principal physician of the\nisland, and brother to the excellent and learned Dr. William\nHeberden of London. Dr. Thomas Heberden afforded all the\nassistance in his power to Mr. Banks and Dr. Solander in their\nbotanical inquiries.\nIt was not solely from the English that the lieutenant and his\nfriends experienced a kind reception. The fathers of the Fran-\n COOK'S VOYAGES.\nciscan convent displayed a liberality of sentiment towards them\nwhich might not have been expected from Portuguese friars; and,\nin a visit which they paid to a convent of nuns, the ladies expressed a particular pleasure in seeing them. At this visit the\ngood nuns gave an amusing proof of the progress they had made\nin the cultivation of their understandings. Having heard that\nthere were great philosophers among the English gentlemen,\nthey asked them a variety of questions; one of which was,\nwhen it would thunder; and another, whether a spring of fresh\nwater, which was \u2022 much wanted, was anywhere to be found\nwithin the walls of the convent. Eminent as our philosophers\nwere, they were puzzled by these questions.\nLieutenant Cook, having laid in a fresh stock of beef, water,\nand wine, set sail from the island of Madeira, in the night of the\n18th of September, and proceeded on his voyage. By the 7th\nof November several articles of the ship's provisions began to\nfall short; for which reason the lieutenant determined to put\ninto Rio de Janeiro. This place he preferred to any other port\nin Brazil or to Falkland's Islands, because he could there be\nbetter supplied with what he wanted, and had no doubt of meet--\ning with a friendly reception.\nDuring the run between Madeira and Rio de Janeiro Lieutenant Cook and the gentlemen in the Endeavour had an opportunity of determining a philosophical question. On the evening\nof the 29th of October they observed that luminous appearance\nof the sea which hath so often been mentioned by navigators,\nand which has been ascribed to such a variety of causes.\nFlashes of light appeared to be emitted, exactly resembling those\nof lightning, though without being so considerable; and such\nwas the frequency of them, that sometimes eight or ten were\nvisible almost at the same moment. It was the opinion of Mr.\nCook and the other gentlemen that these flashes proceeded from\nsome luminous animal; and their opinion was confirmed by experiment.\nAt Rio de Janeiro, in the port of which Lieutenant Cook came\nto an anchor on the 13th of November, he did not meet with\nthe polite reception that, perhaps, he had too sanguinely expected. His stay was spent in continual altercations with the\n CO-OK'S VOYAGES.\n1!\nI\nviceroy, who appeared not a little jealous of the designs of the\nEnglish: nor were all the attempts of the lieutenant to set the\nmatter right capable of producing any effect. The viceroy was\nby no means distinguished either by his knowledge or his love\nof science; and the grand object of Mr. Cook's expedition was\nquite beyond his comprehension. When he was told that the\nEnglish were bound to the southward, by the order of his\nBritannic majesty, to observe a transit of the planet Venus over\nthe sun, an astronomical phenomenon of great importance to\nnavigation, he could form no other conception of the matter\nthan that it was the passing of the North star through the South\nPole.\nDuring the whole of the contest with the viceroy Lieutenant\nCook behaved with equal spirit and discretion. A supply of\nwater and other necessaries could not be refused him, and these\nwere gotten on board by the ist of December. On that day the\nlieutenant sent to the viceroy for a pilot to carry the Endeavour\nto sea; but the wind preventing the ship from getting out, she\nwas obliged to continue some time longer in the harbour. A\nSpanish packet having arrived at Rio de Janeiro on the 2nd of\nDecember, with despatches from Buenos Ayres for Spain, the\ncommander, Don Antonio de Monte Negro y Velasco, offered,\nwith great politeness, to convey the letters of the English to\nEurope. This favour Lieutenant Cook accepted, and gave Don\nAntonio a packet for the secretary of the Admiralty, containing\ncopies of all the papers that had passed between himself and the\nviceroy. He left also duplicates with the viceroy, that he might\nforward them, if he thought proper, to Lisbon.\nOn the 5th of December, it being a dead calm, our navigators\nweighed anchor, and towed down the Bay; but, to their great\nastonishment, two shots were fired at them when they had gotten\nabreast of Santa Cruz, the principal fortification of the harbour.\nLieutenant Cook immediately cast anchor, and sent to the fort\nto demand the reason of this conduct; the answer to which was\nthat the commandant had received no order from the viceroy\nto let the ship pass; and that, without such an order, no vessel\nwas ever suffered to go below the fort. It now became necessary\nto send to the viceroy to inquire why the order had not been\n COOK'S VOYAGES.\n17\ngiven; and his behaviour appeared the more extraordinary as\nnotice had been transmitted to him of the departure of the English, and he had thought proper to write a polite letter to Mr.\nCook wishing him a good voyage. The lieutenant's messenger\nsoon returned, with the information that the order had been\nwritten several days, and that its not having been sent had arisen\nfrom some unaccountable negligence. It was not till the 7th of\nDecember that the Endeavour got under sail.\nIn the account which Lieutenant Cook has given of Rio de\nJaneiro, and the country round it, one circumstance is recorded\nwhich cannot be otherwise than very painful to humanity. It\nis the horrid expense of life at which the gold mines are wrought.\nNo less than forty thousand negroes are annually imported for\nthis purpose on the King of Portugal's account; and the English\nwere credibly informed that in the year 1766 this number fell\nso short that twenty thousand more were drafted from the town\nof Rio.\nFrom Rio de Janeiro Lieutenant Cook pursued his voyage,\nand, on the 14th January, 1769, entered the Strait of Le Maire,\nat which time the tide drove the ship out with so much\nviolence, and raised such a sea off Cape St. Diego, that she\nfrequently pitched so that the bowsprit was under water. On\nthe next day the lieutenant anchored, first before a small cove,\nwhich was understood to be Port Maurice, and afterwards in the\nBay of Good Success. While the Endeavour was in this\nstation happened the memorable adventure of Mr. Banks, Dr.\nSolander, Mr. Monkhouse the surgeon, and Mr. Green the astronomer, together with their attendants and servants, and two\nseamen, in ascending a mountain to search for plants. In this\nexpedition they were all of them exposed to the utmost extremity of danger and of cold : Dr. Solander was seized with a\ntorpor which had nearly proved fatal to his life; and two black\nservants actually died. When the gentlemen had at -length, on\nthe second day of their adventure, gotten back to the ship, they\ncongratulated each other on their safety with a joy that can\nonly be felt by those who have experienced equal perils; and\nMr. Cook was relieved from a very painful anxiety. It was a\ndreadful testimony of the severity of the climate that this event\nc\n COOK'S VOYAGES.\ntook place when it was the midst of summer in that part of the\nworld, and at the close of a day the beginning of which was as\nmild and warm as the month of May usually is in England.\nIn the passage through the Strait of Le Maire, Lieutenant\nCook and his ingenious associates had an opportunity of\ngaining a considerable degree of acquaintance with the inhabitants of the adjoining country. Here it was that they saw\nhuman nature in its lowest form. The natives appeared to be\nthe most destitute and forlorn, as well as the most stupid, of\nthe children of men. Their lives are spent in wandering about\nthe dreary wastes that surround them; and their dwellings are\nno other than wretched hovels of sticks and grass, which\nnot only admit the wind, but the snow and the rain. They are\nalmost naked, and so devoid are they of every convenience\nwhich is furnished by the rudest art, that they have not so\nmuch as an implement to dress their food. Nevertheless, they\nseemed to have no wish for acquiring-more than they possessed;\nnor did anything that was offered them by the English appear\nacceptable but beads, as an ornamental superfluity of life. A\nconclusion is hence drawn by Dr. Hawkesworth, that these\npeople may be upon a level with ourselves in respect to\nthe happiness they enjoy. This, however, is a position which\nought not hastily to be admitted. It is, indeed, a beautiful\ncircumstance, in the order of Divine Providence, that the\nrudest inhabitants of the earth, and those who are situated\nin the most unfavourable climates, should not be sensible\nof their disadvantages. But still it must be allowed that their\nhappiness is greatly inferior, both in kind and degree, to that\nintellectual, social, and moral felicity which is capable of being\nattained in a highly cultivated state of society.\nIn voyages to the South Pacific Ocean, the determination of\nthe best passage from the Atlantic is a point of peculiar importance. It is well known what prodigious difficulties were\nexperienced in this respect by former navigators. The doubling of Cape Horn in particular was so much dreaded, that in\nthe general opinion it was far more eligible to pass through the\nStrait of Magalhaens. Lieutenant Cook hath fully ascertained\nthe erroneousness of this opinion. He was but three-and-\n COOK'S VOYAGES.\nthirty days in coming round the land of Terra del Fuego, from\nthe east entrance of the Strait of Le Maire, till he had advanced about twelve degrees to the westward, and three and a\nhalf to the northward of the Strait of Magalhaens ; and during\nthis time the ship scarcely received any damage. Whereas if\nhe had come into the Pacific Ocean by that passage, he would\nnot have been able to accomplish it in less than three months ;\nbesides which, his people would have been fatigued, and. the\nanchors, cables, sails, and rigging of the vessel much injured.\nBy the course he pursued none of these inconveniences ^were\nsuffered. In short, Lieutenant Cook, by his own example in\ndoubling Cape Horn, by his accurate ascertainment of the\nlatitude and longitude of the places he came to, and by his\ninstructions to future voyagers, performed the most essential\nservices to this part of navigation.\nIt was on the 26th of January that the Endeavour took her\ndeparture from Cape Horn; and it appeared that from that\ntime to the 1st of March, during a run of six hundred and sixty\nleagues, there was no current which affected the ship. Hence\nit was highly probable that our navigators had been near no\nland of any considerable extent, currents being always found\nwhen land is not remote.\nIn the prosecution of Lieutenant Cook's voyage from Cape\nHorn to Otaheite several islands were discovered, to which the\nnames were given of Lagoon Island, Thrump-cap, Bow Island,\nThe Groups, Bird Island, and Chain Island. It appeared that\nmost of these islands were inhabited; and the verdure and\ngroves of palm-trees which were visible upon some of them,\ngave them the aspect of a terrestrial paradise to men who, excepting the dreary hills of Terra del Fuego, had seen nothing\nfor a long time but sky and water.\nOn the nth of April, the Endeavour arrived in sight of\nOtaheite, and on the 13th she came to an anchor in Port Royal\nBay, which is called Matavia by the natives. As the stay of\nthe English in the island was not likely to be very short, and\nmuch depended on the manner in which traffic should be carried on with the inhabitants, Lieutenant Cook, with great good\nsense and humanity, drew up a set of regulations for the be-\n 20 COOK'S VOYAGES.-\nhaviour of his people, and gave it in command that they should\npunctually be observed.1\nOne of the first things that occupied the lieutenant's attention,\nafter his arrival at Otaheite, was to prepare for the execution of\nhis grand commission. For this purpose, as in an excursion to\nthe westward he had not found any more convenient harbour\nthan that in which the Endeavour lay, he determined to go on\nshore and fix upon some spot, commanded by the guns of the\nship, where he might throw up a small fort for defence, and get\neverything ready for making the astronomical observation.\nAccordingly, he took a party of men and landed, being accompanied by Mr. Banks, Dr. Solander, and Mr. Green. They\nsoon fixed upon a place very proper for their design, and which\nwas at a considerable distance from any habitation of the natives.\nWhile the gentlemen were marking out the ground which they\nintended to occupy, and seeing a small tent erected that belonged to Mr. Banks, a great number of the people of the\ncountry gathered gradually around them, but with no hostile\nappearance, as there was not among the Indians a single weapon\nof any kind. Mr. Cook, however, intimated that none of them\nwere to come within the line he had drawn, excepting one, who\nappeared to be a chief, and Owhaw, a native who had attached\nhimself to the English, both in Captain Wallis's expedition and\n1 The rules were as follow: \" I. To endeavour, by every fair means, to\ncultivate a friendship with the natives : and to treat them with all imaginable\nhumanity. 2. A proper person or persons will be appointed to trade with\nthe natives for all manner of provisions, fruit, and other productions of the\nearth; and no officer or seaman, or other person belonging to the ship excepting such as are so appointed, shall trade, or offer to trade for any sort\nof provision, fruit, or other productions of the earth, unless they have leave\nso to do. 3. Every person employed on shore, on any duty whatsoever, is\nstrictly to attend to the same; and if by any neglect he loseth any of his\narms, or working tools, or suffers them to be stolen, the full value thereof\nwill be charged against his pay, according to the custom of the navy in such\ncases, and he shall receive such further punishment as the nature of the\noffence may deserve. 4. The same penalty will be inflicted on every person\nwho is found to embezzle, trade, or offer to trade, with any part of the ship's\nstores of what nature soever. 5. No sort of iron, or anything that is made\nof iron, or any sort of cloth, or other useful or necessary articles, are to be\ngiven in exchange for anything but provision. \"J. Cook.\"\n COOK'S VOYAGES.\nin the present voyage. The lieutenant endeavoured to make\nthese two persons understand that the ground which had been\nmarked out was only wanted to sleep upon for a certain number\nof nights, and that then it would be quitted. Whether his meaning\nwas comprehended or not, he could not certainly determine;\nbut the people behaved with a deference and respect that could\nscarcely have been expected, and which were highly pleasing.\nThey sat down without the circle, peaceably and uninterruptedly\nattending to the progress of the business, which was upwards of\ntwo hours in completing.\nThis matter being finished, and Mr. Cook having appointed\nthirteen marines and a petty officer to guard the tent, he and\nthe gentlemen with him set out upon a little excursion into the\nwoods of the country. They had not, however, gone far before\nthey were brought back by a very disagreeable event. One of\nthe Indians, who remained about the tent after the lieutenant\nand his friends had left it, watched an opportunity of taking the\nsentry at unawares and snatched away his musket. Upon this,\nthe petty officer who commanded the party, and who was a midshipman, ordered the marines to fire. With equal want of consideration, and perhaps with equal inhumanity, the men immediately discharged their pieces among the thickest of the flying\ncrowd, who consisted of more than a hundred. It being observed\nthat the thief did not fall, he was pursued, and shot dead. From\nsubsequent information it happily appeared, that none of the\nnatives besides were either killed or wounded.\nLieutenant Cook, who was highly displeased with the conduct\nof the petty officer, used every method in his power to dispel the\nterrors and apprehensions of the Indians, but not immediately\nwith effect. The next morning but few of the inhabitants were\nseen upon the beach, and not one of them came off to the ship.\nWhat added particularly to the regret of the English, was that\neven Owhaw, who had hitherto been so constant in his attachment, and who the day before had been remarkably active in\nendeavouring to renew the peace which had been broken, did\nnot now make his appearance. In the evening, however, when\nthe lieutenant went on shore with only a boat's crew and some\nof the gentlemen, between thirty and forty of the natives gathered\n COOK'S VOYAGES.\naround them and trafficked with them, in a friendly manner, for\ncocoa-nuts and other fruit.\nOn the 17th Mr. Cook and Mr. Green set up a tent on shore,\nand spent the night there, in order to observe an eclipse of the\nfirst satellite of Jupiter; but they met with a disappointment in\nconsequence of the weather's becoming cloudy. The next day\nthe lieutenant, with as many of his people as could possibly be\nspared from the ship, began to erect the fort. While the English\nwere employed in this business, many of the Indians were so far\nfrom hindering, that they voluntarily assisted them, and with great\nalacrity brought the pickets and facines from the wood where\nthey had been cut. Indeed, so scrupulous had Mr. Cook been\nof invading their property, that every stake which was used was\npurchased, and not a tree was cut down till their consent had\nfirst been obtained.\nOn the 26th the lieutenant mounted six swivel guns upon the\nfort; on which occasion he saw with concern that the natives\nwere alarmed and terrified. Some fishermen, who lived upon\nthe point, removed to a greater distance; and Owhaw informed\nthe English by signs of his expectation that in four days they\nwould fire their great guns.\nThe lieutenant, on the succeeding day gave a striking proof of\nhis regard to justice, and of his care to preserve the inhabitants\nfrom injury and violence, by the punishment he inflicted on the\nbutcher of the Endeavour, who was accused of having threatened,\nor attempted, the life of a woman that was the wife of Tubourai\nTamaide, a chief remarkable for his attachment to our navigators.\nThe butcher wanted to purchase of her a stone hatchet for a\nnail. To this bargain she absolutely refused to accede : upon\nwhich the fellow catched up the hatchet and threw down the nail,\nthreatening, at the same time, that if she made any resistance\nhe would cut her throat with a reaping-hook which he had in\nhis hand. The charge was so fully proved in the presence of Mr.\nBanks, and the butcher had so little to say in exculpation of himself, that not the least doubt remained of his guilt. The affair\nbeing reported by Mr. Banks to Lieutenant Cook, he took an\nopportunity when the chief and his women, with others of the\nnatives, were on board the ship, to call up the offender, and, after\n COOK'S VOYAGES.\nrecapitulating the accusation and the proof of it, to give orders\nfor his immediate punishment. While the butcher was stripped,\nand tied up to the rigging, the Indians preserved a fixed attention,\nand waited for the event in silent suspense. But as soon as the\nfirst stroke was inflicted, such was the humanity of these people\nthat they interfered with great agitation, and earnestly entreated\nthat the rest of the punishment might be remitted. To this, however, the lieutenant, for various reasons, could not grant his consent : and when they found that their intercessions were ineffectual they manifested their compassion by tears.\nOn the i st of May the observatory was set up, and the\nastronomical quadrant, together with some other instruments?\nwas taken on shore. When, on the next morning, Mr. Cook\nand Mr. Green landed for the purpose of fixing the quadrant\nin a situation for use, to their inexpressible surprise and concern it was not to be found. It had been deposited in a tent\nreserved for the lieutenant's use, where no one had slept; it\nhad never been taken out of the packing-case, and the whole\nwas of considerable weight: none of the other instruments\nwere missing; and a sentinel had been posted the whole night\nwithin five yards of the tent. These circumstances induced a\nsuspicion that the robbery might have been committed by some\nof our own people, who having seen a deal box, and not knowing the contents, might imagine that it contained nails or other\narticles for traffic with the natives. The most diligent search,\ntherefore, was made, and a large reward was offered for the\nfinding of the quadrant, but with no degree of success. In this\nexigency Mr. Banks was of eminent service. As this gentleman had more influence over the Indians than any other person\non board the Endeavour, and as there could be little doubt of\nthe quadrant's having been conveyed away by some of the natives, he determined to go in search of it into the woods ; and\nit was recovered in consequence of his judicious and spirited\nexertions. The pleasure with which it was brought back was\nequal to the importance of the event; for. the grand object\nof the voyage could not otherwise have been accomplished.\nAnother embarrassment, though not of so serious a nature,\nwas occasioned, on the very same day, by one of our officers\n 24 COOK'S VOYAGES.\nhaving inadvertently taken into custody Tootahah, a chief who\nhad connected himself in the most friendly manner with the\nEnglish. Lieutenant Cook, who had given express orders that\nnone of the Indians should be confined, and who, therefore,\nwas equally surprised and concerned at this transaction, instantly set Tootahah at liberty. So strongly had this Indian\nbeen possessed with the notion that it was intended to put him\nto death, that he could not be persuaded to the contrary till he\nwas led out of the fort. His joy at his deliverance was so\ngreat, that it displayed itself in a liberality which our people\nwere very unwilling to partake of, from a consciousness that on\nthis occasion they had no claim to the reception of favours.\nThe impression, however, of the confinement of the chief\noperated with such force upon the minds of the natives that\nfew of them appeared ; and the market was so ill supplied that\nthe English were in want of necessaries. At length, by the\nprudent exertions of Lieutenant Cook, Mr. Banks, and Dr.\nSolander, the friendship of Tootahah was completely recovered,\nand the reconciliation worked upon the Indians like a charm;\nfor it was no sooner known that he had gone voluntarily on\nboard the Endeavour than bread-fruit, cocoa-nuts, and other\nprovisions were brought to the fort in great plenty.\n. The lieutenant and the rest of the gentlemen had hitherto,\nwith a laudable discretion, bartered only beads for the articles\nof food now mentioned. But the market becoming slack, they\nwere obliged, for the first time, on the 8th of May to bring out\ntheir nails; and such was the effect of this new commodity,\nthat one of the smallest size, which was about four inches long,\nprocured twenty cocoa-nuts, and bread-fruit in proportion.\nIt was not till the ioth of the month that our voyagers\nlearned that the Indian name of the Island was Otaheite, by\nwhich name it hath since been always distinguished.\nOn Sunday, the 14th, an instance was exhibited of the inattention of the natives to our modes of religion. The lieutenant\nhad directed that divine service should be performed at the\nfort: and he was desirous that some of the principal Indians\nshould be present. Mr. Banks secured the attendance of\nTubourai Tamaide and his wife Tomio, hoping that it would\n COOK'S VOYAGES.\n25\ngive occasion to some inquiries on their part, and to some instruction in return. During the whole service they very attentively observed Mr. Banks's behaviour, and stood, sat, or kneeled\nas they saw him do; and they appeared to be sensible that it\nwas a serious and important employment in'which the English\nwere engaged. But when the worship was ended, neither of\nthem asked any questions, nor would they attend to any explanations which were attempted to be given of what had been\nperformed.\nAs the day approached for executing the grand purpose of\nthe voyage, Lieutenant Cook determined, in consequence of\nsome hints which he had received from the Earl of Morton, to\nsend out two parties to observe the transit of Venus from other\nsituations. By this means he hoped that the success of the observation would be secured, if there should happen to be any\nfailure at Otaheite. Accordingly, on Thursday, the 1st of June,\nhe despatched Mr. Gore in the long-boat to Eimeo, a neighbouring island, together with Mr. Monkhouse and Mr. Sporing,\na gentleman belonging to Mr. Banks. They were furnished by\nMr. Green with proper instruments. Mr. Banks himself chose\nto go upon this expedition, in which he was accompanied by\nTubourai Tamaide and Tomio, and by others of the natives.\nEarly the next morning the lieutenant sent Mr. Hicks in the\npinnace, with Mr. Clerk and Mr. Pickersgill, and Mr. Saunders,\none of the midshipmen, ordering them to fix upon some convenient spot to the eastward, at a distance from the principal\nobservatory, where they also might employ the instruments they\nwere provided with for observing the transit.\nThe anxiety for such weather as would be favourable to the\nsuccess of the experiment was powerfully felt by all the parties\nconcerned. They could not sleep in peace the preceding night;\nbut their apprehensions were happily removed by the sun's\nrising on the morning of the 3rd of June without a cloud. The\nweather continued with equal clearness through the whole of\nthe day; so that the observation was successfully made in every\nquarter. At the fort where Lieutenant Cook, Mr. Green, and\nDr. Solander were stationed, the whole passage of the planet\nVenus over the sun's disk was observed with great advantage.\n COOK'S VOYAGES.\nThe magnifying power of Dr. Solander's telescope was superior\nto that of those which belonged to the lieutenant and to Mr.\nGreen. They all saw an atmosphere or dusky cloud round\nthe body of the planet, which much disturbed the times of the\ncontact, and especially of the internal ones; and, in their\naccounts of these times, they differed from each other in a\ngreater degree than might have been expected.\nMr. Green:\u2014\nThe first external contact, or first appearance\nof Venus on the sun, was\nThe first internal contact, or total immersion, was\t\nAccording to\nMorning.\nh. min. sec.\n9 25 42\n9 44 4\nAfternoon.\n;of\n14\nThe second internal contact, or beginning\nthe emersion, was .....\nThe second internal contact, or total emer^\nsion, was . . . . . . 3 32 10\nThe latitude of the observatory was found to be 170 29' 15\"\nand the longitude 1490 32' 30\" west of Greenwich.\nI\nA more particular account of this great astronomical event, the\nproviding for the accurate observation of which reflects so much\nhonour on his majesty's munificent patronage of science, may\nbe seen in the sixty-first volume of the Philosophical Transactions.\nThe pleasure which Lieutenant Cook and his friends derived\nfrom having thus successfully accomplished the first grand object of the voyage, was not a little abated by the conduct of some\nof the ship's company, who, while the attention of the officers\nwas engrossed by the transit of Venus, broke into one of the\nstore-rooms and stole a quantity of spike nails, amounting to\nno less than a hundredweight. This was an evil of a public and\nserious nature ; for these nails, if injudiciously circulated among\nthe Indians, would be productive of irreparable injury to the\nEnglish, by reducing the value of iron, their staple commodity.\nOne of the thieves, from whom only seven nails were recovered,\nwas detected; but though the punishment of two dozen lashes\n COOK'S VOYAGES.\nwas inflicted upon him, he would not impeach any of his accomplices.\nUpon account of the absence of the two parties who had\nbeen sent out to observe the transit, the king's birthday was\ncelebrated on the 5th, instead of the 4th of June; and the festivity of the day must have been greatly heightened by the happy\nsuccess with which his majesty's liberality had been crowned.\nOn the 12 th Lieutenant Cook was again reduced to the necessity of exercising the severity of discipline. Complaint having\nbeen made to him, by certain of the natives, that two of the\nseamen had taken from them several bows and arrows, and some\nstrings of platted hair, and the charge being fully supported, he\npunished each of the criminals with two dozen of lashes.\nOn the same day it was discovered that Otaheite, like other\ncountries in a certain period of society, has its bards and its minstrels. Mr. Banks, in his morning's walk, had met with a number\nof natives who appeared, upon inquiry, to be travelling musicians;\nand, having learned where they were to be at night, all the\ngentlemen of the Endeavour repaired to the place. The band\nconsisted of two flutes and three drums; and the drummers accompanied the music with their voices. To the surprise of the\nEnglish gentlemen, they found that themselves were generally\nthe subject of the song, which was unpremeditated. These minstrels were continually going about from place to place; and they\nwere rewarded, by the master of the house and the audience,\nwith such things as they wanted.\nThe repeated thefts which were committed by the inhabitants\nof Otaheite brought our voyagers into frequent difficulties, and\nit required all the wisdom of Lieutenant Cook to conduct himself in a proper manner, j His sentiments on the subject displayed the liberality of his mind. He thought it of consequence\nto put an end, if possible, to thievish practices at once, by doing\nsomething that should engage the natives in general to prevent\nthem, from a regard to their common interest. Strict orders\nhad been given by him that they should not be fired upon,\neven when they were detected in attempting to steal any of the\nEnglish property. For this the lieutenant had many reasons.\nThe common sentinels were in no degree fit to be entrusted\n 28\nCOOK'S VOYAGES.\nwith a power of life and death; neither did Mr. Cook think\nthat the thefts committed by the Otaheitans deserved so severe\na punishment. They were not born under the law of England;\nnor was it one of the conditions under which they claimed the\nbenefits of civil society, that their lives should be forfeited\nunless they abstained from theft. As the lieutenant was not\nwilling that the natives should be exposed to fire-arms loaded\nwith shot, neither did he approve of firing only with powder,\nwhich, if repeatedly found to be harmless, would at length be\ndespised. At a time when a considerable robbery had been committed, an accident furnished him with what he hoped would\nbe a happy expedient for preventing future attempts of the same\nkind. Above twenty of the sailing canoes of the inhabitants\ncame in with a supply of fish. Upon these Lieutenant Cook\nimmediately seized, and, having brought them into the river\nbehind the fort, gave notice that unless the things which had\nbeen stolen were returned the canoes should be burnt. This\nmenace, without designing to put it into execution, he ventured\nto publish, from a full conviction that, as restitution was thus\nmade a common cause, the stolen goods would all of them\nspeedily be brought back. In this, however, he was mistaken.\nAn iron coal-rake, indeed, was restored; upon which great solicitation was made for the release of the canoes; but he still\ninsisted on his original condition. When the next day came\nhe was much surprised to find that nothing further had been\nreturned; and, as the people were in the utmost distress for the\nfish, which would in a short time be spoiled, he was reduced to\nthe disagreeable alternative either of releasing the canoes, contrary to what he had solemnly and publicly declared, or of detaining them, to the great damage of those who were innocent.\nAs a temporary expedient he permitted the natives to take the\nfish, but still detained the canoes. So far was this measure from\nbeing attended with advantage, that it was productive of new\nconfusion and injury ; for as it was not easy at once to distinguish to what particular persons the several lots of fish belonged,\nthe canoes were plundered by those who had no right to any\npart of their cargo. At length, most pressing instances being\nstill made for the restoration of the canoes, and Lieutenant\n COOK'S VOYAGES.\nCook having reason to believe either that the things for which\nhe detained them were not in the island, or that those who\nsuffered by their detention were absolutely incapable of prevailing upon the thieves to relinquish their booty, he determined,\nthough not immediately, to comply with the solicitations of the\nnatives. Our commander was, however, not a little mortified\nat the ill success of his project.\nAbout the same time another accident occurred, which, notwithstanding all the caution of our principal voyagers, was very\nnear embroiling them with the Indians. The lieutenant having\nsent a boat on shore to get ballast for the ship, the officer, not\nimmediately finding stones suitable to the purpose, began to\npull down some part of ari enclosure in which the inhabitants\nhad deposited the bones of their dead. This action a number\nof the natives violently opposed; and a messenger came down\nto the tents, to acquaint the gentlemen that no such thing\nwould be suffered. Mr. Banks directly repaired to the place,\nand soon put an amicable end to the contest, by sending the\nboat's crew to the river, where a sufficient quantity of stones\nmight be gathered without a possibility of giving offence.\nThese Indians appeared to be much more alarmed at any\ninjury which they apprehended to be done to the dead than to\nthe living. This was the only measure in which they ventured\nto oppose the English : and the only insult that was ever offered\nto any individual belonging to the Endeavour was upon a\nsimilar occasion. It should undoubtedly be the concern of all\nvoyagers to abstain from wantonly offending the religious prejudices of the people among whom they come.\nTo extend the knowledge of navigation and the sphere of\ndiscovery, objects which we need not say that Lieutenant Cook\nkept always steadily in view, he set out, in the pinnace, on the\n26th of June, accompanied by Mr. Banks, to make the circuit\nof the island; during which the lieutenant and his companions\nwere thrown into great alarm by the apprehended loss of the\nboat. By this expedition Mr. Cook obtained an acquaintance\nwith the several districts of Otaheite, the chiefs who presided\nover them, and a variety of curious circumstances respecting the\nmanners and customs of the inhabitants. On the 1st of July\n 30\nCOOK'S VOYAGES.\nhe got back to the fort at Matavai, having found the circuit of\nthe island, including the two peninsulas of which it consisted,\nto be about thirty leagues.\nThe circumnavigation of Otaheite was followed by an expedition of Mr. Banks's to trace the river up the valley from which\nit issues, and examine how far its banks were inhabited. During\nthis excursion he discerned many traces of subterraneous fire.\nThe stones, like those of Madeira, displayed evident tokens of\nhaving been burnt; and the very clay upon the hills had the\nsame appearance.\nAnother valuable employment of Mr. Banks was the planting\nof a great quantity of the seeds of water-melons, oranges, lemons,\nlimes, and other plants and trees, which he had collected at Rio\nde Janeiro. For these he prepared ground on each side of the\nfort, and selected as many varieties of soil as could be found.\nHe gave also liberally of these seeds to the natives, and\nplanted many of them in the woods.\nLieutenant Cook now began to prepare for his departure.\nOn the 7 th of July the carpenters were employed in taking\ndown the gates and palisadoes of the fortification; and it was\ncontinued to be dismantled during the two following days.\nOur commander and the rest of the gentlemen were in hopes\nthat they should quit Otaheite without giving or receiving any\nfurther offence; but in this respect they were unfortunately\ndisappointed. The lieutenant had prudently overlooked a\ndispute of a smaller nature between a couple of foreign seamen\nand some of the Indians, when he was immediately involved in\na quarrel which he greatly regretted, and which yet it was\ntotally out of his power to avoid. In the middle of the night,\nbetween the 8th and the 9th, Clement Webb and Samuel\nGibson, two of the marines, went privately from the fort. As\nthey were not to be found in the morning Mr. Cook was\napprehensive that they intended to stay behind; but, being\nunwilling to endanger the harmony and goodwill which at\npresent subsisted between our people and the natives, he determined to wait a day for the chance of the men's return. As, to\nthe great concern of the lieutenant, the marines were not come\nback on the morning of the 10th, inquiry was made after them\n COOK'S VOYAGES.\nof the Indians, who acknowledged that each of them had taken\na wife, and had resolved to become inhabitants of the country.\nAfter some deliberation, two of the natives undertook to conduct\nsuch persons to the place of the deserters' retreat as Mr. Cook\nshould think proper to send; and, accordingly, he despatched\nwith the guides a petty officer and the corporal of the marines.\nAs it was of the utmost importance to recover the men, and to\ndo it speedily, it was intimated to several of the chiefs who\nwere in the fort with the women, among whom were Tubourai\nTamaide, Tomio, and Oberea, that they would not be permitted\nto leave it till the fugitives were returned; and the lieutenant\nhad the pleasure of observing that they received the intimation\nwith very little indications of alarm, and with assurances that\nhis people should be secured and sent back as soon as possible.\nWhile this transaction took place at the fort, our commander\nsent Mr. Hicks in the pinnace to fetch Tootahah on board the\nship. Mr. Cook had reason to expect, if the Indian guides\nproved faithful, that the deserters, and those who went in search\nof them, would return before the evening. Being disappointed,\nhis suspicions increased, and thinking it not safe, when the\nnight approached, to let the persons whom he had detained as\nhostages continue at the fort, he ordered Tubourai Tamaide,\nOberea, and some others, to be taken on board the Endeavour;\na circumstance which excited so general an alarm, that several\nof them, and especially the women, expressed their apprehensions with great emotion and many tears. Webb, about nine\no'clock, was brought back by some of the natives, who declared\nthat Gibson, and the petty officer and corporal, would not be\nrestored till Tootahah should be set at liberty. Lieutenant\nCook now found that the tables were turned upon him: but,\nhaving proceeded too far to retreat, he immediately despatched\nMr. Hicks in the long-boat, with a strong party of men, to\nrescue the prisoners. Tootahah was, at the same time, informed that it behoved him to send some of his people with\nthem, for the purpose of affording them effectual assistance.\nWith this injunction he readily complied, and the prisoners\nwere restored without the least opposition. On the next day\nthey were brought back to the ship, upon which the chiefs were\n 32\nCOOK'S VOYAGES.\nreleased from their confinement. Thus ended an affair which\nhad given the lieutenant a great deal of trouble and concern.\nIt appears, however, that the measure which he pursued was\nthe result of an absolute necessity; since it was only by the\nseizure of the chiefs that he could have recovered his men.\nLove was the seducer of the two marines. So strong was the\nattachment which they had formed to a couple of girls, that it\nwas their design to conceal themselves till the ship had sailed,\nand to take up their residence in the island.\nTupia was one of the natives who had so particularly devoted\nhimself to the English, that he had scarcely ever been absent\nfrom them during the whole of their stay at Otaheite. He had\nbeen Oberea's first minister, while she was in the height of her\npower; and he was also chief priest of the country. To his\nknowledge of the religious principles and ceremonies of the\nIndians, he added great experience in navigation, and a particular acquaintance with the number and situation of the neighbouring islands. This man had often expressed a desire to go\nwith our navigators, and when they were ready to depart he\ncame on board, with a boy about thirteen years of age, and\nentreated that he might be permitted to proceed with them on\ntheir voyage. To have such a person in the Endeavour was\ndesirable on many accounts; and therefore Lieutenant Cook\ngladly acceded to his proposal.\nOn the 13th of July the English weighed anchor; and as\nsoon as the ship was under sail, the Indians on board took\ntheir leaves, and wept, with a decent and silent sorrow, in which\nthere was something very striking and tender. Tupia sustained\nhimself in this scene with a truly admirable firmness and resolution ; for, though he wept, the effort he made to conceal his\ntears concurred, with them, to do him honour.\nThe stay of our voyagers at Otaheite was three months, the\ngreater part of which time was spent in the most cordial friendship with the inhabitants, and a perpetual reciprocation of good\noffices. That any differences should happen was greatly regretted on the part of Lieutenant Cook and his friends, who\nwere studious to avoid them as much as possible. The principal\ncauses of them resulted from the peculiar situation and circum-\n COOK'S VOYAGES.\n33\nstances of the English and the Indians, and especially from the\ndisposition of the latter to theft. The effects of this disposition\ncould not always be submitted to or prevented. It was happy,\nhowever, that there was only a single instance in which the\ndifferences that arose were attended with any fatal consequence;\nand by that accident the lieutenant was instructed to take the\nmost effectual measures for the future prevention of similar\nevents. He had nothing so much at heart as that in no case\nthe intercourse of his people with the natives should be productive of bloodshed.\nThe traffic with the inhabitants for provisions and refreshments, which was chiefly under the management of Mr. Banks,\nwas carried on with as much order as in any well regulated\nmarket in Europe. Axes, hatchets, spikes, large nails, looking-\nglasses, knives, and beads were found to be the best articles to\ndeal in; and for some of these everything which the inhabitants\npossessed might be procured. They were, indeed, fond of fine\nlinen cloth, whether white or printed; but an axe worth half-\na-crown would fetch more than a piece of cloth of the value\nof twenty shillings.\nIt would deviate from the plan of this narrative to enter\ninto a minute account of the nature, productions, inhabitants,\ncustoms, and manners of the countries which were discovered\nor visited by Mr. Cook; or to give a particular detail of every\nnautical, geographical, and astronomical observation. It will\nbe sufficient here to take notice, that our commander did not\ndepart from Otaheite without accumulating a store of information and instruction for the enlargement of knowledge and the\nbenefit of navigation.\nWhile the Endeavour proceeded on her voyage under an\neasy sail, Tupia informed Lieutenant Cook that at four of the\nneighbouring islands, which he distinguished by the names of\nHuaheine, Ulietea, Otaha, and Bolabola, hogs, fowls, and other\nrefreshments, which had latterly been sparingly supplied at\nOtaheite, might be proem ed in great plenty. The lieutenant,\nhowever, was desirous of first examining an island that lay to\nthe northward, and was called Tethuroa. Accordingly, he\ncame near it; but having found it to be only a small low island,\nD\n 34\nCOOK'S VOYAGES.\nand being told, at the same time, that it had no settled inhabitants, he determined to drop any further examination of it, and\nto go in search of Huaheine and Ulietea, which were described\nto be well peopled and as large as Otaheite.\nOn the 15th of July, the weather being hazy, with light\nbreezes and calms succeeding each other, so that no land could\nbe seen and little way was made, Tupia afforded an amusing\nproof that, in the exercise of his priestly character, he knew\nhow to unite some degree of art with his superstition. He\noften prayed for a wind to his god Tane, and as often boasted\nof his success. This, indeed, he took a most effectual method\nto secure; for he never began his address to his divinity till\nhe perceived the breeze to be so near that he knew it must\napproach the ship before his supplication could well be brought\nto a conclusion.\nThe Endeavour, on the 16th, being close in with the northwest part of Huaheine, some canoes soon came off, in one of\nwhich was the king of the island and his wife. At first the\npeople seemed afraid; but, upon seeing Tupia, their apprehensions were in part dispersed, and, at length, in consequence\nof frequent and earnestly repeated assurances of friendship,\ntheir majesties, and several others, ventured on board the ship.\nTheir astonishment at everything which was shown them was\nvery great; and yet their curiosity did not extend to any\nobjects but what were particularly pointed out to their notice.\nWhen they had become more familiar, Mr. Cook was given to\nunderstand that the king was called Oree, and that he proposed, as a mark of amity, their making an exchange of their\nnames. To this our commander readily consented; and,\nduring the remainder of their being together, the lieutenant\nwas Oree, and his majesty was Cookee. In the afternoon, the\nEndeavour having come to an anchor, in a small but excellent\nharbour on the west side of the island, the name of which was\nOwharre, Mr. Cook, accompanied by Mr. Banks, Dr. Solander,\nMr. Monkhouse, Tupia, and the natives who had been on\nboard ever since the morning, immediately went on shore.\nThe English gentlemen repeated their excursions on the two\nfollowing days; in the course of which they found that the people\n COOK'S VOYAGES.\nof Huaheine had a very near resemblance to those of Otaheite in person, dress, lauguage, and every other circumstance;\nand that the productions of the country were exactly similar.\nIn trafficking with our people the inhabitants of Huaheine\ndisplayed a caution and hesitation which rendered the dealing\nwith them slow and tedious. On the 19th, therefore, the\nEnglish were obliged to bring out some hatchets, which it was\nat first hoped there would be no occasion for, in an island that\nhad never before been visited by any European. These procured three very large hogs ; and as it was proposed to sail in\nthe afternoon, Oree and several others came on board to take\ntheir leave. To the king Mr. Cook gave a small pewter plate,\non which was stamped this inscription: \" His Britannic Majesty's ship, Endeavour, Lieutenant James Cook, commander,\n16th July, 1769, Huaheine.\" Among other presents made to\nOree, were some medals or counters, resembling the coin of\nEngland, and struck in the year 1761; all of which, and particularly the plate, he promised carefully and inviolably to preserve. This the lieutenant thought to be as lasting a testimony\nas any he could well provide, that the English had first discovered the island; and having dismissed his visitors, who\nwere highly pleased with the treatment they had met with, he\nsailed for Ulietea, in a good harbour of which he anchored the\nnext day.\nTupia had expressed his apprehension that our navigators,\nif they landed upon the island, would be exposed to the\nattacks of the men of Bolabola, whom he represented as having\nlately conquered it, and of whom he entertained a very\nformidable idea. This, however, did not deter Mr. Cook, Mr.\nBanks, Dr. Solander, and the other gentlemen from going\nimmediately on shore. Tupia, who was of the party, introduced, them by performing some ceremonies which he had\npractised before at Huaheine. After this the lieutenant hoisted\nan English jack, and in the name of his Britannic majesty took\npossession of Ulietea and the three neighbouring islands,\nHuaheine, Otaha, and Bolabola, all of which were in sight.\nOn the 21 st the master was despatched in the long-boat to\nexamine the coast of the south part of the island; and one of\n 36\nCOOK'S VOYAGES.\nthe mates was sent in the yawl to sound the harbour where the\nEndeavour lay. At the same time Lieutenant Cook went\nhimself in the pinnace, to survey that part of Ulietea which\nlies to the north. Mr. Banks likewise and the gentlemen\nagain went on shore, and employed themselves in trading with\nthe natives, and in examining the productions and curiosities\nof the country; but they saw nothing worthy of notice, excepting some human jawbones which, like scalps among the\nIndians of North America, were trophies of war, and had\nprobably been hung up, by the warriors of Bolabola, as a\nmemorial of their conquest.\nThe weather being hazy on the 22nd and 23rd, with strong\ngales, the lieutenant did not venture to put to sea; but, on the\n24th, though the wind continued to be variable, he got under\nsail, and plied to the northward within the reef, purposing to\nget out at a wider opening than that by which he had entered\nthe harbour. However, in doing this he was in imminent\ndanger of striking on the rock. The master, who by his order\nhad kept continually sounding in the chains, suddenly called\nout \"two fathom.\" Though our commander knew that the\nship drew at least fourteen feet, and consequently that the\nshoal could not possibly be under her keel, he was nevertheless\njustly alarmed. Happily, the master was either mistaken or\nthe Endeavour went along the edge of a coral rock, many of\nwhich, in the neighbourhood of these islands, are as steep as a\nwall.\nAfter a tedious navigation of some days, during which several\nsmall islands were seen, and the long-boat landed at Otaha,\nLieutenant Cook returned to Ulietea, but to a different part of\nit from that which he had visited before. In a harbour belonging to the west side of the island, he came to an anchor on\nthe 1 st of August. This measure was necessary, in order to\nstop a leak which the ship had sprung in the powder-room, and\nto take in more ballast, as she was found too light to carrry\nsail upon a wind. The place where the Endeavour was secured\nwas conveniently situated for the lieutenant's purpose of obtaining ballast and water.\nMr. Banks, Dr. Solander, and the gentlemen who went on\n COOK'S VOYAGES.\nshore this day, spent their time much to their satisfaction.\nThe reception they met was respectful in the highest degree,\nand the behaviour of the Indians to the English indicated a\nfear of them, mixed with a confidence that they had no propensity to commit any kind of injury. In an intercourse which\nthe lieutenant and his friends carried on, for several days, with\nthe inhabitants of this part of the island, it appeared that the\nterrors which Tupia had expressed of the Bolabola conquerors\nwere wholly groundless. Even Opoony, the formidable king\nof Bolabola, treated our navigators with respect. Being at\nUlietea on the 5th of August, he sent Mr. Cook a present of\nthree hogs, some fowls, and several pieces of cloth of uncommon length, together with a considerable quantity of plantains,\ncocoa-nuts, and other refreshments. This present was accom-\n* panied with a message that, on the next.day, he intended to\npay our commander a visit. Accordingly, on the 6th the\nlieutenant and the rest of the gentlemen all staid at home, in\nexpectation of this important visitor; who did not, however,\nmake his appearance, but sent three very pretty girls as his\nmessengers, to demand something in return for his present. In\nthe afternoon, as the great king would not go to the English,\nthe English determined to go to the great king. From the\naccount which had been given of him, as lord of the Bolabola\nmen, who were the conquerors of Ulietea, and the terror of all\nthe other islands, Lieutenant Cook and his companions expected to see a young and vigorous chief, with an intelligent\ncountenance, and the marks of an enterprising spirit; instead\nof which they found a feeble wretch, withered and decrepit,\nhalf blind with age, and so sluggish and stupid that he scarcely\nappeared to be possessed even of a common degree of understanding. Otaha being the principal place of Opoony's residence, he went with our navigators to that island on the next\nday; and they were in hopes of deriving some advantage from\nhis influence, in obtaining such provision as they wanted. In\nthis respect, however, they were disappointed; for though they\nhad presented him with an axe, as an inducement to him to\nencourage his subjects in dealing with them, they were obliged\nto leave him without having procured a single article.\n I II\n\u00a71\n1\n1\ni\nThe time which the carpenters had taken up in stopping the\nleak of the ship having detained our voyagers longer at Ulietea\nthan they would otherwise have staid, Lieutenant Cook determined to give up the design of going on shore at Bolabola,\nespecially as it appeared to be difficult of access. The principal\nislands, about which the English had now spent somewhat\nmore than three weeks, were six in number: Ulietea, Otaha,\nBolabola, Huaheine, Tubai, and Maurua. As they lie contiguous to each other, the lieutenant gave them the general\nappellation of the Society Islands; but did not think proper to\ndistinguish them separately by any other names than those by\nwhich they were called by the natives.\nOn the 9th of August, the leak of the vessel having been\nstopped, and the fresh stock that had been purchased being\nbrought on board, our commander took the opportunity of a\nbreeze which sprang up at east, and sailed out of the harbour.\nAs he was sailing away, Tupia strongly urged him to fire a shot\ntowards Bolabola; and though that island was at seven leagues\ndistance, the lieutenant obliged him by complying with his\nrequest. Tupia's views probably were to display a mark of his\nresentment and to show the power of his new allies.\nOur voyagers pursued their course, without meeting with any\nevent worthy of notice, till the 13th, when land was discovered\nbearing south-east, and which Tupia informed them to be an\nisland called Oheteroa. On the next day Mr. Cook sent Mr.\nGore, one of his lieutenants, in the pinnace, with orders that\nhe should endeavour to get on shore and learn from the natives whether there was anchorage in a bay then in sight, and\nwhat land lay further to the southward. Mr. Gore was accompanied in this expedition by Mr. Banks, Dr. Solander, and\nTupia, who used every method, but in vain, to conciliate the\nminds of the inhabitants, and to engage them in a friendly\nintercourse. As upon making the circuit of the island neither\nharbour nor anchorage could be found upon it, and at the same\ntime the disposition of the people was so hostile that landing\nwould be rendered impracticable without bloodshed, Mr. Cook\ndetermined, with equal wisdom and humanity, not to attempt\nit, having no motive that could justify the risk of life.\n COOK'S VOYAGES.\n39\nFrom Tupia our navigators learned that there were various\nislands lying at different distances and in different directions\nfrom Oheteroa, between the south and the north-west; and\nthat to the north-east there was an island called Manua, Bird\nIsland. This he represented as being at the distance of three\ndays' sail; but he seemed most desirous that Lieutenant Cook\nshould proceed to the westward, and described several islands\nin that situation, which he said he had visited. It appeared\nfrom his description of them that these were probably Bos-\ncawen and Keppel's Islands, which were discovered by Captain\nWallis. The furthest island that Tupia knew of to the southward, lay, he said, at the distance of about two days' sail from\nOheteroa, and was called Montou. But he added, that his\nfather had informed him of there being islands still more to the\nsouth. Upon the whole, our commander determined to stand\nsouthward in search of a continent, and to lose no time in\nattempting to discover any other islands than such as he might\nhappen to fall in with during his course.\nOn the 15th of August our voyagers sailed from Oheteroa;\nand on the 25th of the same month was celebrated the anniversary of their departure from England. The comet was seen\non the 30th. It was a little above the horizon, in the eastern\npart of the heavens, at one in the morning; and at about half-\nan-hour after four it passed the meridian, and its tail subtended\nan angle of forty-two degrees. Tupia, who was among others\nthat observed the comet, instantly cried out that as soon as it\nshould be seen by the people of Bolabola they would attack\nthe inhabitants of Ulietea, who would be obliged to endeavour\nto preserve their lives by fleeing with the utmost precipitation\nto the mountains.\nOn the 6th of October land was discovered, which appeared\nto be large. When, on the next day, it was more distinctly\nvisible, it assumed a still larger appearance, and displayed four\nor five ranges of hills, rising one over the other, above all which\nwas a chain of mountains of an enormous height. This land\nnaturally became the subject of much eager conversation; and\nthe general opinion of the gentlemen on board the Endeavour\nwas that they had found the Terra australis incognita. In fact,\n COOK'S VOYAGES.\nit was a part of New Zealand, where the first adventures the\nEnglish met with were very unpleasant, on account of the hostile\ndisposition of the inhabitants.\nLieutenant Cook having anchored, on the 8th, in a bay at\nthe entrance of a small river, went on shore in the evening, with\nthe pinnace and yawl, accompanied by Mr. Banks and Dr.\nSolander, and attended with a party of men. Being desirous\nof conversing with some natives, whom he had observed on the\nopposite side of the river from that on which he had landed,\nhe ordered the yawl in, to carry himself and his companions\nover, and left the pinnace at the entrance. When they came\nnear the place where the Indians were assembled, the latter all\nran away; and. the gentlemen, having left four boys to take\ncare of the yawl, walked up to several huts, which were about\ntwo or three hundred yards from the water-side. They had\nnot gone very far when four men, armed with long lances,\nrushed out of the woods, and, running up to attack the boat,\nwould certainly have cut her off if they had not been discovered\nby the people in the pinnace, who called to the boys to drop\ndown the stream. The boys instantly obeyed; but being\nclosely pursued by the natives, the cockswain of the pinnace, to\nwhom the charge of the boats was committed, fired a musket\nover their heads. At this they stopped and looked around\nthem; but their alarm speedily subsiding, they brandished their\nlances in a threatening manner, and in a few minutes renewed\nthe pursuit. The firing of a second musket over their heads\ndid not draw from them any kind of notice. At last, one of\nthem having lifted up his spear to dart it at the boat, another\npiece was fired, by which he was shot dead. At the fall of their\nassociate, the three remaining Indians stood for awhile motionless, and seemed petrified with astonishment. No sooner had\nthey recovered themselves, than they went back, dragging after\nthem the dead body, which, however, they were obliged to\nleave, that it might not retard their flight. Lieutenant Cook\nand his friends, who had straggled to a little distance from each\nother, were drawn together upon the report of the first musket,\nand returned speedily to the boat, in which having crossed the\nriver, they soon beheld the Indian lying dead upon the ground.\n COOK'S VOYAGES.\nAfter their return to the ship, they could hear the people on\nshore talking with great earnestness, and in a very loud tone of\nvoice.\nNotwithstanding this disaster, the lieutenant, being desirous\nof establishing an intercourse with the natives, ordered, on the\nfollowing day, three boats to be manned with seamen and\nmarines, and proceeded towards the shore, accompanied by\nMr. Banks, Dr. Solander, the other gentlemen, and Tupia.\nAbout fifty of the inhabitants seemed to wait for their landing,\nhaving seated themselves upon the ground, on the opposite side\nof the river. This being regarded as a sign of fear, Mr. Cook,\nwith only Mr. Banks, Dr. Solander, and Tupia, advanced towards them; but they had not gone many paces before all the\nIndians started up, and every man produced either a long pike\nor a small weapon of green talk. Though Tupia called to them\nin the language of Otaheite, they only answered by flourishing\ntheir weapons, and making signs for the gentlemen to depart.\nOn a musket's being fired wide of them, they desisted from\ntheir threats; and our commander, who had prudently retreated\ntill the marines could be landed, again advanced towards them,\nwith Mr. Banks, Dr. Solander, and Tupia, to whom were now\nadded Mr. Green and Mr. Monkhouse. Tupia was a second\ntime directed to speak to them, and it was perceived with great\npleasure that he was perfectly understood, his and their language being the same, excepting only in a diversity of dialect.\nHe informed them that our voyagers only wanted provisions\nand water in exchange for iron, the properties of which he\nexplained as far as he was able. Though the natives seemed\nwilling to trade, Tupia was sensible, during the course of his\nconversation with them, that their intentions were unfriendly;\nand of this he repeatedly warned the English gentlemen. At\nlength, twenty or thirty of the Indians were induced to cross\nthe river, upon which presents were made them of iron and\nbeads. On these they appeared to set little value, and particularly on the iron, not having the least conception of its use, so\nthat nothing was obtained in return excepting a few feathers.\nTheir arms, indeed, they offered to exchange for those of our\nvoyagers, and this being refused, they made various attempts\n I\n42 COOK'S VOYAGES.\nto snatch them out of their hands. Tupia was now instructed\nto acquaint the Indians that our gentlemen would be obliged\nto kill them if they proceeded to any further violence; notwithstanding which, one of them, while Mr. Green happened to\nturn about, seized his hanger, and retired to a little distance,\nwith a shout of exultation. The others, at the same time, began\nto be extremely insolent, and more of the natives were seen\ncoming to join them from the opposite side of the river. It\nbeing, therefore, necessary to repress them, Mr. Banks fired\nwith small shot, at the distance of about fifteen yards, upon the\nman who had taken the hanger. Though he was struck he\ndid not return the hanger, but continued to wave it round his\nhead while he slowly made his retreat. Mr. Monkhouse then\nfired at him with ball, and he instantly dropped. So far, however, were the Indians from being sufficiently terrified, that the\nmain body of them, who upon the first discharge had retired\nto a rock in the middle of the river, began to return, and it was\nwith no small difficulty that Mr. Monkhouse secured the hanger.\nThe whole number of them continuing to advance, three of the\nEnglish party discharged their pieces at them, loaded only with\nsmall shot, upon which they swam back for the shore, and it\nappeared upon their landing that two or three of them were\nwounded. While they retired slowly up the country, Lieutenant\nCook and his companions re-embarked in their boats.\nAs the lieutenant had unhappily experienced that nothing at\nthis place could be done with these people, and found that the\nwater in the river was salt, he proceeded in the boats round\nthe head of the bay in search of fresh water. Beside this, he\nhad formed a design of surprising some of the natives, and\ntaking them on board, that by kind treatment and presents he\nmight obtain their friendship, and render them the instruments\nof establishing for him an amicable intercourse with their countrymen. While, upon account of a dangerous surf which everywhere beat upon the shore, the boats were prevented from\nlanding, our commander saw two canoes coming in from the\nsea, one under sail and the other worked with paddles. This\nhe thought to be a favourable opportunity for executing his\npurpose. Accordingly, the boats were disposed in such a\n COOJCS VOYAGES. 43\nmanner as appeared most likely to be successful in intercepting\nthe canoes. Notwithstanding this, the Indians in the canoe\nwhich was paddled exerted themselves with so much vigour at\nthe first apprehension of danger, that they escaped to the nearest\nland. The other canoe sailed on without discerning the English\ntill she was in the midst of them; but no sooner had she discovered them than the people on board struck their sail, and\nplied their paddles so briskly, as to outrun the boat by which\nthey were pursued. Being within hearing. Tupia called to them\nto come alongside, with assurances that they should not in any\ndegree be hurt or injured. They trusted, however, more to\ntheir own paddles than to Tupia's promises, and continued to\nflee from our navigators with all their power. Mr. Cook, as the\nleast exceptionable expedient of accomplishing his design,\nordered a musket to be fired over their heads. This he hoped\nwould either make them surrender or leap into the water, but\nit produced a contrary effect. The Indians, who were seven in\nnumber, immediately formed a resolution not to fly but to fight.\nWhen therefore the boat came up, they began to attack with\ntheir paddles and with stones and other offensive weapons;\nand they carried it on with so much vigour and violence that\nthe English thought themselves obliged to fire upon them in\nwere unhappily killed. The other three, who were boys, the\neldest about nineteen and the youngest about eleven, instantly\nleaped into the water, and endeavoured to make their escape;\nbut being with some difficulty overpowered by our people, they\nwere brought into the boat.\nIt is impossible to reflect upon this part of Lieutenant Cook's\nconduct with any degree of satisfaction. He himself, upon a\ncalm review, did not approve of it; and he was sensible that it\nwould be censured by the feelings of every reader of humanity.\nIt is probable that his mind was so far irritated by the disagreeable preceding events of this unfortunate day, and by the unexpected violence of the Indians in the canoe, as to lose somewhat of that self-possession by which his character in general\nwas eminently distinguished. Candour, however, requires that\nI should relate what he hath offered in extenuation, not in de-\n 44\nCOOK'S VOYAGES.\nfence, of the transaction; and this shall be done in his own\nwords. \" These people certainly did not deserve death for not\nchoosing to confide in my promises, or not consenting to come\non board my boat, even if they had apprehended no danger.\nBut the nature of my service required me to obtain a knowledge\nof their country, which I could no otherwise effect than by\nforcing my way into it in a hostile manner, or gaining admission\nthrough the confidence and goodwill of the people. I had already tried the power of presents without effect; and I was now\nprompted, by my desire to avoid further hostilities, to get some\nof them on board, as the only method left of convincing them\nthat we intended them no harm,' and had it in our power to contribute to their gratification and convenience. Thus far my intentions certainly were not criminal; and though in the contest\nwhich I had not the least reason to expect, our victory might\nhave been complete without so great an expense of life; yet in\nsuch situations, when the command to fire has been given, no\nman can restrain its excess, or prescribe its effect.\"\nOur voyagers were successful in conciliating the minds of the\nthree boys, to which Tupia particularly contributed. When\ntheir fears were allayed and their cheerfulness returned, they\nsang a song with a degree of taste that surprised the English\ngentlemen. The tune, like those of our psalms, was solemn\nand slow, containing many notes and semitones.\nSome further attempts were made to establish an intercourse\nwith the natives, and Mr. Cook and his friends, on the. ioth,\nwent on shore for that purpose; but being unsuccessful in their\nendeavours, they resolved to re-embark lest their stay should\nembroil them in another quarrel, and cost more of the Indians\ntheir lives. On the next day the lieutenant weighed anchor,\nand stood away from this unfortunate and inhospitable place.\nAs it had not afforded a single article that was wanted excepting wood, he gave it the name of Poverty Bay. By the inhabitants it is called Taoneroa, or Long Sand. I shall not regularly\npursue the course of our commander round New Zealand. In\nthis course he spent nearly six months, and made large additions\nto the knowledge of navigation and geography. By making\nalmost the whole circuit of New Zealand, he ascertained it to\nHii\n COOK'S VOYAGES.\nbe two islands, with a strength of evidence which no prejudice\ncould gainsay or resist. He obtained likewise a full acquaintance with the inhabitants of the different parts of the country,\nwith regard to whom it was clearly proved that they are eaters-\nof human flesh. Omitting a number of minute circumstances,\nI shall only select a few things which mark Mr. Cook's personal\nconduct, and relate to his intercourse with the natives.\nThe good usage the three boys had met with, and the friendly\narid generous manner in which they were dismissed to their own\nhomes, had some effect in softening the dispositions of the\nneighbouring Indians. Several of them, who had come on\nboard while the ship lay becalmed in the afternoon, manifested\nevery sign of friendship, and cordially invited the English to go\nback to their old bay, or to a cove which was not quite so far\noff. But Lieutenant Cook choose rather to prosecute his discoveries, having reason to hope that he should find a better-\nharbour than any he had yet seen.\nWhile the ship was hauling round to the south end of a small\nisland, which the lieutenant had named Portland, from its very\ngreat resemblance to Portland in the British Channel, she\nsuddenly fell into shoal water and broken ground. The soundings were never twice the same, jumping at once from seven\nfathom to eleven. However, they were always seven fathom\nor more ; and in a short time the Endeavour got clear of danger,\nand again sailed in deep water. While the ship was in apparent distress, the inhabitants of the island, who in vast numbers\nsat on its white cliffs, and could not avoid perceiving some appearance of confusion on board, and some irregularity in the\nworking of the vessel, were desirous of taking advantage of her\ncritical situation. Accordingly, five canoes full of men, and\nwell armed, were put off with the utmost expedition; and they\ncame so near, and showed so hostile a disposition by shouting,\nbrandishing their lances, and using threatening gestures, that\nthe lieutenant was in pain for his small boat, which was still\nemployed in sounding. By a musket which he ordered to be-\nfired over them, they were rather provoked than intimidated.\nThe firing of a four-pounder loaded with grape shot, though\npurposely discharged wide of them, produced a better effect-\n 46\nCOOKS VOYAGES.\n11\nUpon the report of the piece the Indians all rose up and\nshouted; but instead of continuing the chase, they collected\nthemselves together, and after a short consultation went quietly\naway.\nOn the 14th of October, Lieutenant Cook having hoisted out\nhis pinnace and long-boat to search for water, just as they were\nabout to set off several boats full of the New Zealand people\nwere seen coming from the shore. After some time five of these\nboats, having on board between eighty and ninety men, made\ntowards the ship; and four more followed at no great distance,\nas if to sustain the attack. When the first five had gotten within\nabout a hundred yards of the Endeavour, they began to sing\ntheir war song, and brandishing their pikes prepared for an\nengagement. As the lieutenant was extremely desirous of avoiding the unhappy necessity of using fire-arms against the natives,\nTupia was ordered to acquaint them that our voyagers had\nweapons which, like thunder, would destroy them in a moment;\nthat they would immediately convince them of their power by\ndirecting their effect so that they should not be hurt; but that\nif they persisted in any hostile attempt they would be exposed\nto the direct attack of these formidable weapons. A four-\npounder, loaded with grape shot, was then fired wide of them;\nand this expedient was fortunately attended with success. The\nreport, the flash, and, above all, the shot, which spread very far\nin the water, terrified the Indians to such a degree that they\nbegan to paddle away with all their might. At the instance,\nhowever, of Tupia, the people of one of the boats were induced\nto lay aside their arms, and to come under the stern of the\nEndeavour: in consequence of which they received a variety\nof presents.\nOn the next day a circumstance occurred which showed how\nready one of the inhabitants of New Zealand was to take an\nadvantage of our navigators. In a large armed canoe, which\ncame boldly alongside of the ship, was a man who had a black\nskin thrown over him, somewhat like that of a bear. Mr. Cook\nbeing desirous of knowing to what animal it originally belonged,\noffered the Indian for it a piece of red baize. With this bargain he seemed to be greatly pleased, immediately pulling off\nH\n COOK'S VOYAGES.\nthe skin and holding it up in the boat. He would not, however, part with it till he had the cloth in his possession ; and as\nthere could be no transfer of property if equal caution should\nbe exercised on both sides, the lieutenant ordered the baize to\nbe delivered into his hands. Upon this, instead of sending up\nthe skin, he began with amazing coolness to pack up both that\nand the cloth, which he had received as the purchase of it, in a\nbasket: nor did he pay the least regard to Mr. Cook's demand\nor remonstrances, but soon after put off from the English\nvessel. Our commander was too generous to revenge this insult by any act of severity.\nDuring the course of a traffic which was carrying on for some\nfish, little Tayeto, Tupia's boy, was placed among others over\nthe ship's side, to hand up what was purchased. While he was\nthus employed, one of the New Zealanders, watching his opportunity, suddenly seized him and dragged him into a canoe.\nTwo of the natives then held him down in the fore part of it,\nand the others, with great activity, paddled her off with all possible celerity. An action so violent rendered it indispensably\nnecessary that the marines, who were in arms upon the deck,\nshould be ordered to fire. Though the shot was directed to that\npart of the canoe which was furthest from the boy, and somewhat\nwide of her, it being thought favourable rather to miss the rowers\nthan to run the hazard of hurting Tayeto, it happened that one\nman dropped. This occasioned the Indians to quit their hold\nof the youth, who instantly leaped into the water, and swam towards the ship. In the meanwhile, the largest of the canoes\npulled round and followed him; and till some muskets and a\ngreat gun were fired at her, did not desist from the pursuit.\nThe ship being brought to, a boat was lowered, and the poor\nboy was taken up unhurt. Some of the gentlemen, who with\ntheir glasses traced the canoes to shore, agreed in asserting that\nthey saw three men carried up the beach, who appeared to be\neither dead, or wholly disabled by their wounds.\nWhile, on the 18th, the Endeavour lay abreast of a peninsula\nwithin Portland Island, called Terakako, two of the natives,\nwho were judged to be chiefs, placed an extraordinary degree of\nconfidence in Mr. Cook. They were so well pleased with the\n 48 COOK'S VOYAGES.\nkindness which had been shown' them in a visit to the ship,\nthat they determined not to go on shore till the next morning.\nThis was a circumstance by no means agreeable to the lieutenant, and he remonstrated against it; but as they persisted in\ntheir resolution, he agreed to comply with it, provided their\nservants were also taken on board, and their canoe hoisted\ninto the ship. The countenance of one of these two chiefs was\nthe most open and ingenuous that our commander had ever\nseen, so that he soon gave up every suspicion of his entertaining any sinister design. When the guests were put on shore\nthe next morning, they expressed some surprise at seeing themselves so far from their habitations.\nOn Monday, the 23rd, while the ship.was in Tegadoo Bay,\nLieutenant Cook went on shore to examine the watering place,\nand found everything agreeable to his wishes. The boat landed\nin the cove, without the least surf; the water was excellent, and\nconveniently situated; there was plenty of wood close to the\nhigh-water mark, and the disposition of the people was as\nfavourable in all respects as could be desired. Early the next\nmorning our commander sent Lieutenant Gore to superintend\nthe cutting of wood and filling of water, with a sufficient number\nof men for both purposes, and all the marines as a guard.\nSoon after he went on shore himself, and continued there during\nthe whole day. Mr. Banks and Dr. Solander, who had landed\non the same day, found in their walks several things worthy of\nnotice. As they were advancing in some of the valleys, the\nhills on each side of which were very steep, they were suddenly\nstruck with the sight of an extraordinary natural curiosity. It\nwas a rock, perforated through its whole substance, so as to\nform a rude but stupendous arch or cavern, opening directly to\nthe sea. This aperture was seventy-five feet long, twenty-seven\nbroad, and five and forty feet high, commanding a view of the\nbay and the hills on the other side, which were seen through it;\nand opening at once upon the view, produced an effect far superior to any of the contrivances of art.\nWhen on the 28th, the gentlemen of the Endeavour went on\nshore upon an island which lies to the left hand of the entrance\nof Tolaga Bay, they saw there the largest canoe they had yet\n COOK'S VOYAGES.\n49\"\nmet with; her length being sixty-eight feet and a half, her\nbreadth five feet, and her height three feet six inches. In the\nsame island was a larger house than any they had hitherto seen,\nbut it was in an unfinished state and full of chips.\nWhile the ship was in Hicks's Bay the inhabitants of the adjoining coast were found to be very hostile. This gave much\nuneasiness to our navigators, and was, indeed, contrary to their\nexpectation; for they had hoped that the report of their power\nand clemency had spread to a greater extent. At daybreak\non the ist of November they counted no less than five and\nforty canoes that were coming from the shore towards the Endeavour ; and these were followed by several more from another\nplace. Some of the Indians traded fairly; but others of them\ntook what was handed down to them without making any return,\nand added derision to fraud. The insolence of one of them\nwas very remarkable. Some linen hanging over the ship's side\nto dry, this man without any ceremony untied it and put it up\nin his bundle. Being immediately called to, and required to\nreturn it, instead of doing so he let his canoe drop astern and\nlaughed at the English. A musket, which was fired over his\nhead, did not put a stop to his mirth. From a second musket,\nwhich was loaded with small shot, he shrunk a little when the\nshot struck him upon his back; but he regarded it no more\nthan one of our men would have done the stroke of a rattan,\nand continued with great composure to pack up the linen\nwhich he had stolen. All the canoes now dropped astern, and\nset up their song of defiance, which lasted till they were at\nabout four hundred yards' distance from the ship. As they did\nnot appear to have a design of attacking our voyagers, Lieutenant Cook was unwilling to do them any hurt; and yet he\nthought that their going off in a bravado might have a bad\neffect when it should be reported on shore. To convince\nthem therefore that they were still in his power, though far\nbeyond the reach of any missile weapon with which they were\nacquainted, he ordered a four-pounder to be fired in such\na manner as to pass near them. As the shot happened to\nstrike the water and to rise several times at a great distance\nbeyond the canoes, the Indians were so much terrified that\nE\n without once looking behind them they paddled away as fast\nas they were able.\nIn standing westward from a small island called Mowtohora,\nthe Endeavour suddenly shoaled her water from seventeen to\nten fathom. As the lieutenant knew that she was not far oft\nfrom some small islands and rocks, which had been seen before\nit was dark, and which he had intended to have passed that\nevening, he thought it more prudent to tack and to spend the\nnight under Mowtohora, where he was certain that there was\nno danger. It was happy for himself and for all our voyagers\nthat he formed this resolution. In the morning they discovered\nahead of them several rocks, some of which were level with\nthe surface of the water and some below it; and the striking\nagainst which could not, in the hour of darkness, have been\navoided. In passing between these rocks and the main, the\nship had only from ten to seven fathom water.\nWhile Mr. Cook was near an island which he called the\nMayor, the inhabitants of the neighbouring coast displayed\nmany instances of hostility, and in their traffic with our navigators committed various acts of fraud and robbery. As the\nlieutenant intended to continue in the place five or six days, in\norder to make an observation of the transit of Mercury, it was\nabsolutely necessary for the prevention of future mischief to\nconvince these people that the English were not to be ill-\ntreated with impunity. Accordingly, some small shot were fired\nat a thief of uncommon insolence, and a musket ball was discharged through the bottom of his boat. Upon this it was\npaddled to about a hundred yards' distance; and to the surprise of Mr. Cook and his friends, the Indians in the other\ncanoes took not the least notice of their wounded companion,\nthough he bled very much, but returned to the ship and continued to trade with the most perfect indifference and unconcern.\nFor a considerable time they dealt fairly. At last, however,\none of them thought fit to move off with two different pieces of\ncloth which had been given for the same weapon. When he\nhad gotten to such a distance that he thought himself secure\nof his prizes, a musket was fired after him, which fortunately\nstruck the boat just at the water's edge, and made two holes in\n COOK'S VOYAGES.\nher side. This excited such an alarm that not only the people\nwho were shot at, but all the rest of the canoes, made off with\nthe utmost expedition. As the last proof of superiority, our\ncommander ordered a round shot to be fired over them, and\nnot a boat stopped till they got to land.\nAfter an early breakfast on the 9th of November, Lieutenant\nCook went on shore, with Mr. Green, and proper instruments,\nto observe the transit of Mercury. Mr. Banks and Dr. Solander\nwere of the party. The weather had for some time been very\nthick, with much rain; but this day proved so favourable that\nnot a cloud intervened during the. whole transit. The observation of the ingress was made by Mr. Green alone, Mr. Cook\nbeing employed in taking the sun's altitude to ascertain the\ntime.\nWhile the gentlemen were thus engaged on shore, they were\nalarmed by the firing of a great gun from the ship: and on\ntheir return received the following account of the transaction\nfrom Mr. Gore, the second lieutenant, who had been left commanding officer on board. During the carrying on of a trade\nwith some small canoes, two very large ones came up full of\nmen. In one of the canoes were forty-seven persons, all of\nwhom were armed with pikes, stones, and darts, and assumed\nthe appearance of a hostile intention. However, after a little\ntime they began to traffic, some of them offering their arms,\nand one of them a square piece of cloth, which makes a part\nof their dress, called haabow. Mr. Gore having agreed for it,\nsent down the price, which was a piece of British cloth, and\nexpected his purchase. But as soon as the Indian had gotten\nMr. Gore's cloth in his possession, he refused to part with his\nown, and put off his canoe. Upon being threatened for his\nfraud, he and his companions began to sing their war song in\ndefiance, and shook their paddles. Though their insolence did\nnot proceed to an attack, and only defied Mr. Gore to take any\nremedy in his power, he was so provoked that he levelled a\nmusket, loaded with ball, at the offender, while he was holding\nthe cloth in his hand, and shot him dead. When the Indian\nfell, all the canoes put off to some distance, but continued to\nkeep together in such a manner that it was apprehended they\n 52\nCOOKS VOYAGES.\nmight still meditate an attack. To secure, therefore, a safe\npassage for the boat of the Endeavour, which was wanted on\nshore, a round shot was fired with so much effect over their\nheads as to make them all flee with the utmost precipitation.\nIt was matter of regret to Lieutenant Cook that Mr. Gore had\nnot, in the case of the offending Indian, tried the experiment\nof a few small shot, which had been successful in former instances of robbery.\nOn Friday, the ioth, our commander, accompanied by Mr.\nBanks and the other gentlemen, went with two boats to examine a large river that empties itself into the head of Mercury\nBay. As the situation they were now in abounded with conveniences, the lieutenant has taken care to point them out, for\nthe benefit of future navigators. If any occasion should ever\nrender it necessary for a ship either to winter here, or to stay\nfor a considerable length of time, tents might be built on a\nhigh point or peninsula in this place, upon ground sufficiently\nspacious for the purpose; and they might easily be made impregnable to the whole force of the country. Indeed, the most\nskilful engineer in Europe could not choose a situation better\nadapted to enable a small number to defend themselves against\na greater. Among other accommodations which the Endeavour's company met with in Mercury Bay, they derived an\nagreeable refreshment from some oyster beds, which they had\nfortunately discovered. The oysters, which were as good as\never came from Colchester, and about the same size, were so\nplentiful, that not the boat only, but the ship itself, might have\nbeen loaded in one tide.\nOn Wednesday, the 15th, Lieutenant Cook sailed out of\nMercury Bay. This name had been given to it on account of\nthe observation which had there been made of the transit of\nthat planet over the sun. The river where oysters had been so\nplentifully found he called Oyster River. There is another river\nat the head of the Bay, which is the best and safest place for a\nship that wants to stay any length of time. From the number of\nmangroves about it, the lieutenant named it Mangrove River.\nIn several parts of Mercury Bay, our voyagers saw, thrown\nupon the shore, great quantities of iron sand, which is brought\n COOK'S VOYAGES.\n53\ndown by every little rivulet of fresh water that finds its way\nfrom the country. This is a demonstration, that there is ore of\nthat metal not far inland; and yet none of the inhabitants of\nNew Zealand who had yet been seen knew the use of iron, or\nset upon it the least degree of value. They had all of them\npreferred the most worthless and useless trifle not only to a\nnail, but to any tool of that metal. Before the Endeavour left\nthe Bay, the ship's name and that of the commander were cut\nupon one of the trees near the watering-place, together with\nthe date of the year and month when our navigators were there.\nBesides this, Mr. Cook, after displaying the ^English colours,\ntook formal possession of the place in the name of his Britannic\nMajesty, King George the Third.\nIn the range from Mercury Bay, several canoes, on the 18th,\nput off from different places, and advanced towards the Endeavour. When two of them, in which there might be about sixty\nmen, came within the reach of the human voice, the Indians sung\ntheir war song; but seeing that little notice was taken of them,\nthey threw a few stones at the English and then rowed off towards the shore. In a short time, however, they returned, as if\nwith a fixed resolution to provoke our voyagers to a battle,\nanimating themselves by their song as they had done before.\nTupia, without any directions from the gentlemen of the Endeavour, began to expostulate with the natives, and told them\nthat our people had weapons which could destroy them in a\nmoment. Their answer to this expostulation was, in their own\nlanguage, \" Come on shore, and we will kill you all.\" \" Well,\"\nreplied Tupia, \" but why should you molest us while we are at\nsea? As we do riot wish to fight, we shall not accept your\nchallenge to come on shore; and here there is no pretence for\na quarrel, the sea being no more your property than the ship.\"\nThis eloquence, which greatly surprised Lieutenant Cook and\nhis friends, as they had not suggested to Tupia any of the\narguments he made use of, produced no effect upon the minds\nof the Indians, who soon renewed their attack. The oratory of\na musket, which was fired through one of their boats, quelled\ntheir courage, and sent them instantly away.\nWhile our commander was in the Bay of Islands he had a\n 54\nCOOK'S VOYAGES.\nfavourable opportunity of examining the interior part of the\ncountry and its produce. At day-break, therefore, on the 30th\nof the month, he set out in the pinnace and long-boat accompanied by Mr. Banks, Dr. Solander, and Tupia, and found the\ninlet, at which they entered, end in a river about nine miles\nabove the ship. Up this river, to which was given the name\nof the Thames, they proceeded till near noon, when they were\nfourteen miles within its entrance. As the gentlemen then found\nthe face of the country to continue nearly the same, without\nany alteration in the course of the stream, and had no hope of\ntracing it to its source, they landed on the west side to take a\nview of the lofty trees which everywhere adorned its banks.\nThe trees were of a kind which they had seen before, both\nin Poverty Bay and Hawke's Bay, though only at a distance.\nThey had not walked a hundred yards into the woods, when\nthey met with one of the trees which, at the height of six feet\nabove the ground, was nineteen feet eight inches in the girt.\nLieutenant Cook, having a quadrant with him, measured its\nheight from the root to the first branch, and found it to be\neighty-nine feet. It was as straight as an arrow, and tapered\nbut very little in proportion to its height; so that, in the lieutenant's judgment, there must have been three hundred and\nfifty-six feet of solid timber in it, exclusive of the branches. As\nthe party advanced, they saw many other trees, which were still\nlarger. A young one they cut down, the wood of which was\nheavy and solid, not fit for masts, but such as would make the\nfinest plank in the world. The carpenter of the ship, who was\nwith the party, said that the timber resembled that of the pitch-\npine, which is lightened by tapping. If it should appear that\nsome such method would be successful in lightening these trees,\nthey would then furnish masts superior to those of any country\nin Europe. As the wood was swampy, the gentlemen could\nnot range far; but they found many stout trees of other kinds,\nwith which they were totally unacquainted, and specimens of\nwhich they brought away.\nOn the 22nd, another instance occurred, in which the commanding officer left on board did not know how to exercise\nhis power with the good sense and moderation of Mr. Cook.\n COOKS VOYAGES.\nWhile some of the natives were in the ship below with Mr.\nBanks, a young man, who was upon the deck, stole a half-\nminute glass, and was detected just as he was carrying it off.\nMr. Hicks, in his indignation against the offender, was pleased\nto order that he should be punished, by giving him twelve\nlashes with a cat-o'-nine tails. When the other Indians, who\nwere on board, saw him seized for the purpose, they attempted\nto rescue him; and being resisted, they called for their arms,\nwhich were handed from the canoes. At the same time, the\npeople of one of the canoes attempted to come up the side of\nthe Endeavour. The tumult having called up Mr. Banks and\nTupia, the natives ran to the latter, and solicited his interposition. All, however, which he could do, as Mr. Hicks continued inexorable, was to assure them that nothing was intended\nagainst the life of their companion, and that it was necessary\nthat he should suffer some punishment for his offence. With\nthis explanation they appeared to be satisfied; and when the\npunishment had been inflicted, an old man among the spectators, who was supposed to be the criminal's father, gave him\na severe beating, and sent him down into his canoe. Notwithstanding this, the Indians were far from being reconciled to the\ntreatment which their countryman had received. Their cheerful\nconfidence was gone; and though they promised, at their departure, to return with some fish, the English saw them no\nmore.\nOn the 29th of November, Lieutenant Cook, Mr. Banks,\nDr. Solander, and others with them, were in a situation somewhat critical and alarming. Having landed upon an island in\nthe neighbourhood of Cape Bret, they were in a few minutes\nsurrounded by two or three hundred people. Though the\nIndians were all armed, they came on in so confused and\nstraggling a manner, that it did not appear that any injury was\nintended by them; and the English gentlemen were determined\nthat hostilities should not begin on their part. At first the\nnatives continued quiet; but their weapons were held ready to\nstrike, and they seemed to be rather irresolute than peaceable.\nWhile the lieutenant and his friends remained in a state of\nsuspense, another party of Indians came up ; and the boldness\n 56\nCOOK'S VOYAGES.\nof the whole body being increased by the augmentation of their\nnumbers, they began the dance and song, which are their preludes to a battle. An attempt, that was made by a number of\nthem, to seize the two boats which had brought our voyagers\nto land, appeared to be the signal for a general attack. It now\nbecame necessary for Mr. Cook to exert himself with vigour.\nAccordingly, he discharged his musket, which was loaded with\nsmall shot, at one of the forwardest of the assailants, and Mr.\nBanks, and two of our men, fired immediately afterward.\nThough this made the natives fall back in some confusion,\nnevertheless, one of the chiefs, who was at the distance of\nabout twenty yards, had the courage to rally them, and, calling\nloudly to his companions, led them on to the charge. Dr.\nSolander instantly discharged his piece at this champion, who,\nupon feeling the shot, stopped short, and then ran away with\nthe rest of his countrymen. Still, however, they did not disperse, but got upon rising ground, and seemed only to want\nsome leader of resolution to renew their assault. As they were\nnow gotten beyond the reach of small shot, the English fired\nwith ball, none of which taking place, the Indians continued\ntogether in a body. While our people were in this doubtful\nsituation, which lasted about a quarter of an hour, the ship,\nfrom which a much greater number of natives were seen than\ncould be discovered on shore, brought her broadside to bear,\nand entirely dispersed them, by firing a few shot over their\nheads. In this skirmish, only two of them were hurt with the\nsmall shot, and not a single life was lost; a case which ,would\nnot have happened if Lieutenant Cook had not restrained his\nmen, who either from fear or the love of mischief, showed as\nmuch impatience to destroy the Indians, as a sportsman to kill\nhis game. Such was the difference between the disposition of\nthe common seamen and marines, and that of their humane\nand judicious commander.\nOn the same day Mr. Cook displayed a very exemplary act\nof discipline. Some of the ship's people, who, when the natives\nwere to be punished for a fraud, assumed the inexorable justice\nof a Lycurgus, thought fit to break into one of their plantations,\nand to dig up a quantity of potatoes. For this the lieutenant\nMi II\n COOKS VOYAGES.\nordered each of them to receive twelve lashes, after which two\nof them were discharged. But the third, in a singular strain of\nmorality, insisted upon it, that it was no crime in an Englishman\nto plunder an Indian plantation. The method taken by our\ncommander to refute his casuistry, was to send him back to his\nconfinement, and not to permit him to be released, till he had\nbeen punished with six lashes more.\nThe Endeavour, on the 5 th of December, was in the most\nimminent danger of being wrecked. At four o'clock in the\nmorning of that day our voyagers weighed, with a light breeze;\nbut it being variable with frequent calms, they made little way.\nFrom that time till the afternoon they kept turning out of the\nbay, and about ten at night were suddenly becalmed, so that\nthe ship could neither wear nor exactly keep her station. The\ntide or current setting strong, she drove toward land so fast,\nthat before any measures could be taken for her security, she\nwas within a cable's length of the breakers. Though our people\nhad thirteen fathom water, the ground was so foul, that they\ndid not dare to drop their anchor. In this crisis, the pinnace\nbeing immediately hoisted out to take the ship in tow, and the\nmen, sensible of their danger, exerting themselves to the utmost,'\na faint breeze sprang up off the land, and our navigators perceived, with unspeakable joy, that the vessel made headway.\nSo near was she to the shore, that Tupia, who was ignorant of\nthe hair's breadth escape the company had experienced, was at\nthis very time conversing with the Indians upon the beach,\nwhose voices were distinctly heard, notwithstanding the roar of\nthe breakers. Mr. Cook and his friends now thought that all\ndanger was over; but about an hour afterward, just as the man\nin the chains had cried \"seventeen fathom,\" the ship struck.\nThe shock threw them into the utmost consternation; and\nalmost instantly the man in the chains cried out \"five fathom.\"\nBy this time, the rock on which the ship had struck being to\nthe windward, she went off without having received the least\ndamage; and the water very soon deepening to twenty fathom,\nshe again sailed in security.\nThe inhabitants in the Bay of Islands were found to be far\nmore numerous than in any other part of New Zealand which\n 58\nCOOK'S VOYAGES.\nIll\nLieutenant Cook had hitherto visited. It did not appear that\nthey were united under one head; and, though their towns\nwere fortified, they seemed to live together in perfect amity.\nThe Endeavour, on the 9th of December, lying becalmed in\nDoubtless Bay, an opportunity was taken to inquire of the\nnatives concerning their country; and our navigators learnt\nfrom them, by the help of Tupia, that at the distance of three\ndays' rowing in their canoes, at a place called Moore-Whennua,\nthe land would take a short turn to the southward, and thence\nextend no more to the west. This place the English gentlemen\nconcluded to be the land discovered by Tasman, and which had\nbeen named by him Cape Maria van Diemen. The lieutenant,\nfinding the inhabitants so intelligent, inquired further, if they\nknew of any country besides their own. To this they answered,\nthat they had never visited any other : but that their ancestors\nhad told them, that there was a country of great extent, to the\nnorth-west by north, or north-north west, called Ulimaroa, to\nwhich some people had sailed in a very large canoe; and that\nonly a part of them had returned, who reported, that, after a\npassage of a month, they had seen a country where the people\neat hogs.\nOn the 30th of December, our navigators saw the land, which\nthey judged to be Cape Maria van Diemen, and which corresponded with the account that had been given of it by the\nIndians. The next day, from the appearance of Mount Camel,\nthey had a demonstration that, where they now were, the\nbreadth of New Zealand could not be more than two or three\nmiles from sea to sea. During this part of the navigation, two\nparticulars occurred which are very remarkable. In latitude\n350 S. and in the midst of summer, Lieutenant Cook met with\na gale of wind, which, from its strength and continuance, was\nsuch as he had scarcely ever been m before; and he was three\nweeks in getting ten leagues to the westward, and five weeks in\ngetting fifty leagues; for at this time, being the 1st of January,\n1770, it was so long since he had passed Cape Bret. While\nthe gale lasted, our voyagers were happily at a considerable distance from the land; since, otherwise, it was highly probable\nthat they would never have returned to relate their adventures.\n COOK'S VOYAGES.\nThe shore at Queen Charlotte's Sound, where the English\nhad arrived on the 14th of January, seemed to form several\nbays, into one of which the lieutenant proposed to carry the\nship, which was now become very foul, in order to careen her,\nto repair some defects, and to obtain a recruit of wood and\nwater. At daybreak the next morning, he stood in for an\ninlet, and at eight got within the entrance. At nine o'clock,\nthere being little wind, and what there was being variable, the\nEndeavour was carried by the tide or current within two cables'\nlength of the north-west shore, where she had fifty-four fathom\nwater. By the help of the boats she was gotten clear; and\nabout two, our people anchored in a very safe and convenient\ncove. Soon after, Mr. Cook, with most of the gentlemen,\nlanded upon the coast, where they found a fine stream of\nexcellent water and wood in the greatest plenty. Indeed, the\nland, in this part of the country, was one forest of vast extent.\nAs the gentlemen had brought the seine with them, it was\nhauled once or twice; and with such success, that different\nsorts of fish were caught, amounting nearly to three hundredweight. The equal distribution of these among the ship's company furnished them with a very agreeable refreshment.\nWhen Lieutenant Cook, Mr. Banks, Dr. Solander, Tupia,\nand some others, landed on the 16th, they met with an Indian family, among whom they found horrid and indisputable\nproofs of the custom of eating human flesh. Not to resume\nso disagreeable a subject, it may here be observed once for\nall, that evidences of the same custom appeared on various\noccasions.\nOn the next day a delightful object engaged the attention of\nour voyagers. The ship lying at the distance of somewhat\nless than a quarter of a mile from the shore, they were awakened\nby the singing of an incredible number of birds, who seemed to\nstrain their throats in emulation of each other. This wild\nmelody was infinitely superior to any they had ever heard of\nthe same kind, and seemed to be like small bells, most exquisitely tuned. It is probable that the distance, and the water\nbetween, might be of no small advantage to the sound. Upon\ninquiry, the gentlemen were informed that the birds here always\n COOKS VOYAGES.\nbegan to sing about two hours after midnight; and that, continuing their music till sunrise, they were silent the rest of the\n-day. In this last respect they resembled the nightingales of\nour own country.\nOn the 18th, Lieutenant Cook went out in the pinnace to\n. take a view of the bay in which the ship was now at anchor;\nand found it to be of great extent, consisting of numberless\nsmall harbours and coves, in every direction. The lieutenant\nconfined his excursion to the western side, and the coast where\nhe landed being an impenetrable forest, nothing could be seen\nworthy of notice. As our commander and his friends were\nreturning, they saw a single man in a canoe fishing : rowing up\nto him, to their great surprise, he took not the least notice of\nthem; and even when they were alongside of him, continued\nto follow his occupation, without adverting to them any more\nthan if they had been invisible. This behaviour was not, however, the result either of sullenless or stupidity; for upon being\nrequested to draw up his net, that it might be examined, he\nreadily complied. He showed likewise to our people his mode\nof fishing, which was simple and ingenious.\nWhen, on the 19th, the armourer's forge was set up, and all\nhands on board were busy in careening, and in other necessary\noperations about the vessel, some Indians, who had brought\nplenty of fish, exchanged them for nails, of which they had\nnow began to perceive the use and value. This may be considered as one instance in which they were enlightened and\nbenefited by their intercourse with our navigators.\nWhile, on the 22nd, Mr. Banks and Dr. Solander employed\nthemselves in botanizing near the beach, our commander, taking\na seaman with him, ascended one of the hills of the country.\nUpon reaching its summit, he found the view of the inlet, the\nhead of which he had a little before in vain attempted to discover in the pinnace, intercepted by hills still higher than that\non which he stood, and which were rendered inaccessible by\nimpenetrable woods. He was, however, amply rewarded for\nhis labour; for he saw the sea on the eastern side of the country,\nand a passage leading from it to that on the west, a little to the\neastward of the entrance of the inlet where the ship lay. The\n COOK'S VOYAGES.\nmainland, which was on the south-east side of this inlet, appeared to be a narrow ridge of very high hills, and to form\npart of the south-west side of the strait. On the opposite side,\nthe land trended away east as far as the eye could reach; and\nto the south-east there was discerned an opening to the sea,\nwhich washed the eastern coast. The lieutenant saw also, on\nthe east side of the inlet, some islands which he had before\ntaken to be part of the mainland. In returning to the ship,\nhe examined the harbours and coves that lie behind the islands-\nwhich he had seen from the hills. The next day was employed\nby him in further surveys and discoveries.\nDuring a visit to the Indians on the 24th, Tupia being of the\nparty, they were observed to be continually talking of guns and\nshooting people. For this subject of their conversation, the\nEnglish gentlemen could not at all account. But after perplexing themselves with various conjectures, they at length learned\nthat on the 21st one of the officers, urider the pretence of\ngoing out to fish, had rowed up to a hippah, or village, on the\ncoast. When he had done so, two or three canoes coming off\ntowards his boat, his fears suggested that an attack was intended, in consequence of which three muskets were fired,\none with small shot and two with ball, at the Indians, who\nretired with the utmost precipitation. It is highly probable\nthat they had come out with friendly intentions, for such intentions were expressed by their behaviour, both before and\nafterward. This action of the officer exhibited a fresh instance how little some of the people under Lieutenant Cook\nhad imbibed of the wise, discreet, and humane spirit of their\ncommander.\nOn the morning of the 26th the lieutenant went again out in\nthe boat, with Mr. Banks and Dr. Solander, and entered one of\nthe bays which lie on the east side of the inlet, in order to obtain another sight of the strait which passed between the eastern\nand western seas. Having landed for this purpose, at a convenient place, they climbed a hill of very considerable height,,\nfrom which they had a full view of the strait, with the land on\nthe opposite shore, which they judged to be about four leagues-\ndistant. As it was hazy in the horizon they could not see far\n 62 COOK'S VOYAGES.\nto the south-east; but Mr. Cook saw enough to determine him\nto search the passage with the ship as soon as he should put\nto sea. The gentlemen found on the top of the hill a parcel of\nloose stones, with which they erected a pyramid, and left in it\nsome musket balls, small shot, beads and such other things\nwhich they happened to have about them, as were likely to\nstand the test of time. These, not being of Indian workmanship, would convince any European who should come to the\nplace and pull it down, that natives of Europe had been there\nbefore. After this the lieutenant and his friends went to a\ntown of which the Indians had informed them, and which, like\none they had already seen, was built upon a small island or\nrock, so difficult of access that they gratified their curiosity at\nthe risk of their lives. Here, as had been the case in former\nvisits to the inhabitants of that part of the country near which\nthe ship now lay, they were received with open arms, carried\nthrough the whole of the place, and shown all that it contained.\nThe town consisted of between eighty and a hundred houses,\nand had only one fighting stage. Mr. Cook, Mr. Banks, and\nDr. Solander happened to have with them a few nails and\nribands, and some paper, with which the people were so highly\ngratified, that when the gentlemen \u00a3went away they filled the\nEnglish boat with dried fish, of which it appeared that they had\nlaid up large quantities.\nA report was spread that one of the men that had been so\nrashly fired upon by the officer who had visited the hippah,\nunder the pretence of fishing, was dead of his wounds. But\non the 29th the lieutenant had the great consolation of discovering that this report was groundless. On the same day he\nwent again on shore, upon the western point of the inlet, and\nfrom a hill of considerable height had a view of the coast to\nthe north-west. The furthest land he could see in that quarter,\nwas an island at the distance of about ten leagues, lying not far\nfrom the main. Between this island and the place where he\nstood he discovered, close under the shore, several other islands,\nforming many bays in which there appeared to be good anchorage for shipping. After he had set off the different points for\nhis survey he erected another pile of stones, in which he left a\n COOK'S VOYAGES.\n63\npiece of silver coin, with some musket balls and beads, and a\nfragment of an old pendant flying at the top.\nOn the 30th of January the ceremony was performed of\ngiving name to the inlet where our voyagers now lay, and of\nerecting a memorial of the visit which they had made to this\nplace. The carpenter having prepared two posts for the purpose, our commander ordered them to be inscribed with the\nship's name and the dates of the year and the month. One of\nthese he set up at the watering-place, hoisting the union flag\nupon the top of it; and the other he carried over to the island\nthat lies nearest the sea, and which is called by the natives\nMotuara. He went first, accompanied by Mr. Monkhouse and\nTupia, to the neighbouring village or hippah, where he met\nwith an old man, who had maintained a friendly intercourse\nwith the English. To this old man and several Indians besides,\nthe lieutenant by means of Tupia explained his design, which\nhe informed them was to erect a mark upon the island in\norder to show to any other ship which should happen to come\nthither that our navigators had been there before. To this the\ninhabitants readily consented, and promised that they would\nnever pull it down. He then gave something to every one\npresent, and to the old man a silver threepence, and some spike\nnails with the king's broad arrow cut deep upon them. These\nwere things which Mr. Cook thought were the most likely to be\nlong preserved. After this he conveyed the post to the highest\npart of the island; and having fixed it firmly in the ground,\nhoisted upon it the union flag, and honoured the inlet with the\nname of Queen Charlotte's Sound. At the same time he took\nformal possession of this and the adjacent country, in the name\nand for the use of his Majesty King George the Third. The\nceremony was concluded by the gentlemen's drinking a bottle\nof wine to her majesty's health; and the bottle being given to\nthe old man, who had attended them up the hill, he was highly\ndelighted with his present.\nA philosopher, perhaps, might inquire on what ground\nLieutenant Cook could take formal possession of this part\nof New Zealand, in the name and for the use of the King of\nGreat Britain, when the country was already inhabited, and of\n 64\nCOOK'S VOYAGES.\ncourse belonged to those by whom it was occupied, and whose\nancestors might have resided in it for many preceding ages.\nTo this the best answer seems to be, that the lieutenant, in the\nceremony performed by him, had no reference to the original\ninhabitants, or any intention to deprive them of their natural\nrights, but only to preclude the claims of future European navigators, who, under the auspices and for the benefit of their respective States or kingdoms, might form pretensions, to which\nthey were not entitled by prior discovery.\nOn the 31st, our voyagers having completed their wooding,\nand filled their water casks, Mr. Cook sent out two parties, one\nto cut and make brooms, and another to catch fish. In the\nevening there was a strong gale from the north-west, with such\na heavy rain, that the little wild musicians on shore suspended\ntheir song, which till now had been constantly heard during\nthe night with a pleasure that it was impossible to lose without\nregret. The gale, on the 1 st of February, increased to a storm,\nwith heavy gusts from the high land, one of which broke the\nhawser, that had been fastened to the shore, and induced the\nnecessity of letting go another anchor. Though, towards midnight, the gale became more moderate, the rain continued with\nso much violence, that the brook, which supplied the ship with\nwater, overflowed its banks ; in consequence of which ten small\ncasks, that had been filled the day before, were carried away,\nand, notwithstanding the most diligent search for them, could\nnot be recovered.\nThe Endeavour, on Monday the 5th, got under sail; but\nthe wind soon failing, our commander was obliged again to\ncome to anchor, a little above Motuara. As he was desirous\nof making still further inquiries whether any memory of Tas-\nman had been preserved in New Zealand, he directed Tupia to\nask of the old man before mentioned, who had come on board\nto take his leave of the English gentlemen, whether he had\never heard that such a vessel as theirs had before visited the\ncountry. To this he replied in the negative ; but said, that his\nancestors had told him, that there once had arrived a small\nvessel from a distant land, called Ulimaroa, in which were four\nmen, who upon their reaching the shore were all killed. On\n COOKS VOYAGES.\n65\nbeing asked where this country lay, he pointed to the northward. Of Ulimaroa, Lieutenant Cook had heard something\nbefore, from the people about the Bay of Islands, who said\nthat it had been visited by their ancestors. Tupia had also\nsome confused traditionary notions concerning it; but no certain conclusion could be drawn either from his account or\nthat of the old Indian.\nSoon after the ship came to anchor the second time, Mr.\nBanks and Dr. Solander, who had gone on shore to see if any\ngleanings of natural knowledge remained, fell in, by accident,\nwith the most agreeable Indian family they had yet seen,\nand which afforded them a better opportunity of remarking the\npersonal subordination among the natives, than had before\noffered. The whole behaviour of this family was affable,\nobliging, and unsuspicious. It was matter of sincere regret to\nthe two gentlemen, that they had not sooner met with these\npeople, as a better acquaintance with the manners and disposition of the inhabitants of the country might hence have been\nobtained in a day, than had been acquired during the whole\nstay of the English upon the coast.\nWhen, on the 6th of February, Lieutenant Cook had gotten\nout of the sound, he stood over to the eastward, in order to get\nthe strait well open before the tide of ebb approached. At\nseven in the evening, two small islands, which lie off Cape\nKoamaroo, at the south-east head of Queen Charlotte's Sound,\nbore east, at the distance of about four miles. It was nearly\ncalm, and the tide of ebb setting out, the Endeavour, in a very\nshort time, was carried by the rapidity of the stream close upon\none of the islands, which was a rock rising almost perpendicularly out of the sea. The danger increased every moment, and\nthere was but one expedient to prevent the ship's being dashed\nto pieces, the success of which a few moments would determine.\nShe was now within little more than a cable's length of the\nrock, and had above seventy-five fathom water. But, upon\ndropping an anchor, and veering above one hundred and fifty\nfathom of cable, she was happily brought up. This, however,\nwould not have saved our navigators, if the tide, which set\nsouth by east, had not, upon meeting with the island, changed\nF\n 66 COOK'S VOYAGES.\nits direction to south-east, and carried them beyond the first\npoint. In this situation they were not above two cables' length\nfrom the rocks; and here they remained in the strength of the\ntide, which set to the south-east, after the rate of at least five\nmiles an hour, from a little after seven till midnight, when the\ntide abated, and the vessel began to heave. By three in the\nmorning, a light breeze at north-west having sprung up, our\nvoyagers sailed for the eastern shore; though they made but\nlittle way, in consequence of the tide being against them. The\nwind, however, having afterward freshened, and come to north\nand north-east, with this, and the tide of ebb, they were in a\nshort time hurried through the narrowest part of the strait, and\nthen stood away for the southernmost land they had in prospect.\nThere appeared, over this land, a mountain of stupendous\nheight, which was covered with snow. The narrowest part of\nthe strait, through which the Endeavour had been driven\nwith such rapidity, lies between Cape Tierawitte, on the coast\nof Eaheinomauwe, and Cape Koamaroo; the distance between\nwhich our commander judged to be four or five leagues. Notwithstanding the difficulties arising from this tide, now its\nstrength is known, the strait may be passed without danger.\nSome of the officers started a notion that Eaheinomauwe\nwas not an island, and that the land might stretch away to the\nsouth-east, from between Cape Turnagain and Cape Palliser,\nthere being a space of between twelve and fifteen leagues\nwhich had not yet been seen. Though Lieutenant Cook, from\nwhat he had observed the first time he discovered the strait,\nand from many other concurrent circumstances, had the strongest conviction that they were mistaken, he nevertheless resolved to leave no possibility of doubt with respect to an\nobject of so much importance. For this purpose he gave such\na direction to the navigation of the ship as would most effectually tend to determine the matter. After a course of two\ndays he called the officers upon deck, and asked them whether\nthey Were not now satisfied that Eaheinomauwe was an island.\nTo this question they readily answered in the affirmative; and\nall doubts being removed, the lieutenant proceeded to farther\nresearches.\nill\n COOK'S VOYAGES.\n67\nDuring Mr. Cook's long and minute examination of the\ncoast of New Zealand, he gave names to the bays, capes, promontories, islands, and rivers, and other places which were\nseen or visited by him; excepting in those cases where their\noriginal appellations were learned from the natives. The names\nhe fixed upon were either derived from certain characteristic\nor adventitious circumstances, or were conferred in honour of\nhis friends and acquaintance, chiefly those of the naval line.\nSuch of the readers of the present work as desire to be particularly informed concerning them, will naturally have recourse\nto the indications of them in the several maps on which they\nare described.\nThe ascertaining of New Zealand to be an island did not\nconclude Lieutenant Cook's examination of the nature, situation, and extent of the country. After this he completed his\ncircumnavigation, by ranging from Cape Turnagain southward\nalong the eastern coast of Poenammoo, round Cape South,\nand back to the western entrance of the strait he had passed,'\nand which was very properly named Cook's Strait. This range,\nwhich commenced on the 9th of February, I shall not minutely\nand regularly pursue; but content myself, as in the former\ncourse, with mentioning such circumstances as are more\ndirectly adapted to my immediate design.\nIn the afternoon of the 14th, when Mr. Banks was out in\nthe boat -a shooting, our voyagers saw, with their glasses, four\ndouble canoes put off from the shore towards him, having on\nboard fifty-seven men. The lieutenant, being alarmed for the\nsafety of his friend, immediately ordered signals to be made\nfor his return; but he was prevented from seeing them by the\nsituation of the sun with regard to the ship. However, it was\nsoon with pleasure observed that his boat was in motion; and\nhe was taken on board before the Indians, who perhaps had\nnot discerned him, came up. Their attention seemed to be\nwholly fixed upon the ship. They came within about a stone's\ncast of her, and then stopped, gazing at the English with a look\nof vacant astonishment. Tupia in vain exerted his eloquence\nto prevail upon them to make a nearer approach. After surveying our navigators some time, they left them, and made\n COOK'S VOYAGES.\n11\ntowards the shore. The gentlemen could not help remarking,\non this occasion, the different dispositions and behaviour of\nthe different inhabitants of the country, at the first sight of the\nEndeavour. The people now seen kept aloof with a mixture\nof timidity and wonder; others had immediately commenced\nhostilities; the man who was found fishing alone in his canoe\nappeared to regard our voyagers as totally unworthy of notice;\nand some had come on board almost without invitation, and\nwith an air of perfect confidence and goodwill. From the\nconduct of the last visitors, Lieutenant Cook gave the land\nfrom which they had put off, and which had the appearance of\nan island, the name of Lookers-on.\nWhen an island, which lies about five leagues from the coast\nof Tovy-Poenammoo, and which was named Banks's Island,\nwas first discovered in the direction of south by west, some\npersons on board were of opinion that they saw land bearing\nsouth-south-east and south-east by east. Our commander,\nwho was himself upon the deck at the time, told them that in\nhis judgment it was no more than a cloud, which as the sun\nrose would dissipate and vanish. Being, however, determined\nto leave no subject for disputation which experiment could\nremove, he ordered the ship to steer in the direction which the\nsupposed country was said to bear. Having gone in this direction eight and twenty miles, without discovering any signs of\nland, the Endeavour resumed her intended course to the southward, it being the particular view of the lieutenant to ascertain\nwhether Poenammoo was an island or a continent.\nIn passing some rocks on the 9th of March, in the night, it\nappeared in the morning that the ship had been in the most\nimminent danger. Her escape was indeed critical in the\nhighest degree. To these rocks therefore, which from their\nsituation are so well adapted to catch unwary strangers, Mr.\nCook gave the name of the Traps. On the same day he\nreached a point of land which he called the South Cape, and\nwhich he supposed, as proved in fact to be the case, the\nsouthern extremity of the country.\nIn sailing, on Wednesday the 14th, the Endeavour passed a\nsmall narrow opening in the land, where there seemed to be a\n COOK'S VOYAGES.\nvery safe and convenient harbour, formed by an island which\nlay eastward in the middle of the opening. On the land, behind\nthe opening, are mountains, the summits of which were covered\nwith snow, that appeared to have recently fallen. Indeed, our\nvoyagers, for two days past, had found the weather extremely\ncold. On each side the entrance of the opening the land\nrises almost perpendicularly from the sea to a stupendous\nheight. For this reason Lieutenant Cook did not choose to\ncarry the ship into the harbour. He was sensible that no wind\ncould blow there but right in or right out: and he did not think\nit by any means advisable to put into a place whence he could\nnot have gotten out but with a wind which, experience had\ntaught him, did not- blow more than one day in a month. Sagacious as this determination of our commander was, it did not\ngive universal satisfaction. He acted in it contrary to the\nopinion of some persons on board, who expressed in strong\nterms their desire of coming to harbour; not sufficiently considering that present convenience ought not to be purchased\nat the expense of incurring great future disadvantages.\nBy the 27th of March Mr. Cook had circumnavigated the\nwhole country of Tovy-Poenammoo, and arrived within sight\nof the island formerly mentioned, which lies at the distance of\nnine leagues from the entrance of Queen Charlotte's Sound.\nHaving at this time thirty tons of empty water-casks on board,\nit was necessary to fill them before he finally proceeded on his\nvoyage. For this purpose he hauled round the island, and\nentered a bay, situated between that and Queen Charlotte's\nSound, and to which the name was given of Admiralty Bay.\nThe business of wooding and watering having been completed on the 30th, and the ship being ready for the sea, the\npoint now to be determined, was what route should be pursued in returning home that would be of most advantage to\nthe public service. Upon this subject the lieutenant thought\nproper to take the opinion of his officers. He had himself a\nstrong desire to return by Cape Horn, because that would\nhave enabled him to determine whether there is or is not a\nsouthern continent. But against this scheme it was a sufficient\nobjection that our navigators must have kept in a high southern\n 70 COOK'S VOYAGES.\nlatitude, in the very depth of winter, and in a vessel which was\nnot thought to be in a condition fit for the undertaking. The\nsame reason was urged, with still greater force, against their\nproceeding directly for the Cape of Good Hope, because no\ndiscovery of moment could be expected in that route. It was,\ntherefore, resolved that they should return by the East Indies;\nand that, with this view, they should steer westward till they\nshould fall in with the east coast of New Holland, and then\nfollow the direction of that coast to the northward till they\nshould arrive at its northern extremity. If that should be\nfound impracticable, it was farther resolved that they should\nendeavour to fall in with the land, or islands, said to have been\ndiscovered by Quiros.\nIn the six months which Lieutenant Cook had spent in the\nexamination of New Zealand, he made very large additions to\nthe knowledge of geography and navigation. That country\nwas first discovered in the year 1642, by Abel Jansen Tasman,\na Dutch navigator. He traversed the eastern coast from latitude 340 43', and entered the strait now called Cook's Strait;\nbut being attacked by the natives soon after he came to an\nanchor, in the place which he named Murderer's Bay, he never\nwent on shore. Nevertheless, he assumed a kind of claim to\nthe country, by calling it Staaten Land, or the Land of the\nStates, in honour of the States-General. It is now usually\ndistinguished in maps and charts by the name of New Zealand.\nThe whole of the country, excepting that part of the coast\nwhich was seen by Tasman from on board his ship, continued\nfrom his time to the voyage of the Endeavour altogether\nunknown. By many persons it has been supposed to constitute\na part of a southern continent; but it was now ascertained by\nMr. Cook to consist of two large islands, divided from each\nother by a strait or passage, which is about four or five leagues\nbroad. These islands are situated between the latitudes of\n340 and 480 south, and between the longitudes of 1810 and\n1940 west; a matter which Mr. Green determined with uncommon exactness, from innumerable observations of the sun and\nmoon, and one of the transits of Mercury. The northernmost\nof these islands is called by the natives Eaheinomauwe, and\niff\n COOK'S VOYAGES.\nthe southernmost Tovy, or Tavai Poenammoo. It is not,\nhowever, certain whether the whole southern island, or only\npart of it, is comprehended under the latter name.\nTovy Poenammoo is principally a mountainous, and to all\nappearance a barren country. The only inhabitants and signs\nof inhabitants that were discovered upon all the islands, were\nthe people whom our voyagers saw in Queen Charlotte's Sound,\nsome that came off to them under the snowy mountains, and\nseveral fires which were discerned to the west of Cape Saunders. Eaheinomauwe has a much better appearance. Though\nit is not only hilly but mountainous, even the hills and mountains are covered with wood, and every valley has a rivulet of\nwater. The soil in these valleys and in the plains, many of\nwhich are not overgrown with wood, is in general light but\nfertile. It was the opinion of Mr. Banks and Dr. Solander, as\nwell as of the other gentlemen on board, that all kinds of\nEuropean grain, plants, and fruit would flourish here in the\nutmost luxuriance. There is reason to conclude, from the\nvegetables which our navigators found in Eaheinomauwe, that\nthe winters are milder than those in England; and the summer\nwas experienced not to be hotter, though it was more equally\nwarm. If this country, therefore, should be settled by people\nfrom Europe, they might, with a little industry, very soon be\nsupplied in great abundance, not merely with the necessaries,\nbut even with the luxuries of life.\nIn Eaheinomauwe there are no quadrupeds but dogs and\nrats. At least, no other were seen by our voyagers; and the\nrats are so scarce that they wholly escaped the notice of many\non board. Of birds the species are not numerous; and of these\nno one kind, excepting perhaps the gannet, is exactly the same\nwith those of Europe. Insects are not in greater plenty than\nbirds. The sea makes abundant recompense for this scarcity\nof animals upon the land. Every creek swarms with fish, which\nare not only wholesome, but equally delicious with those in our\npart of the world. The Endeavour seldom anchored in any\nstation, or with a light gale passed any place, that did not afford\nenough, with hook and line, to serve the whole ship's company.\nIf the seine was made use of, it seldom failed of producing a\n COOK'S VOYAGES.\nstill more ample supply. The highest luxury of this kind with\nwhich the English were gratified was the lobster, or sea crayfish. Among the vegetable productions of the country the\ntrees claim a principal place; there being forests of vast, extent\nfull of the straightest, the cleanest, and the largest timber Mr.\nCook and his friends had ever seen. Mr. Banks and Dr.\nSolander were gratified by the novelty, if not by the variety of\nthe plants. Out of about four hundred species there were not\nmany which had hitherto been described by botanists. There\nis one plant that serves the natives instead of hemp and flax,\nand which excels all that are applied to the same purposes in\nother countries.\nIf the settling of New Zealand should ever be deemed an\nobject deserving the attention of Great Britain, our commander\nthought that the best place for establishing a colony would\neither be on the banks of the Thames, or in the territory adjoining to the Bay of Islands. Each of these places possesses\nthe advantage of an excellent harbour. By means of the river,\nsettlements might be extended, and a communication established with the inland parts of the country. Vessels might likewise be built of the fine timber which is everywhere to be met\nwith, at very little trouble and expense.\nBut I am in danger of forgetting myself and of running into\na detail which may be thought rather to exceed the intentions\nof the present narrative. It is difficult to restrain the pen\nwhen such a variety of curious and entertaining matter lies before it; and I must entreat the indulgence of my readers while\nI mention two or three further particulars. One circumstance\npeculiarly worthy of notice is the perfect and uninterrupted\nhealth of the inhabitants of New Zealand. In all the visits\nmade to their towns, where old and young, men and women,\ncrowded about our voyagers, they never observed a single person who appeared to have any bodily complaint; nor among\nthe numbers that were seen naked was once perceived the\nslightest eruption upon the skin, or the least mark which indicated that such an eruption had formerly existed. Another\nproof of the health of these people is the facility with which the\nwounds they at any time receive are healed. In the man who\n COOKS VOYAGES. 73\ni had been shot with a musket ball through the fleshy part of his\narm, the Wound seemed to be so well digested, and in so fair a\nway of being perfectly healed, that if Mr. Cook had not known\nthat no application had been made to it, he declared that he\nshould certainly have inquired, with a very interested curiosity,\nafter the vulnerary herbs and surgical art of the country. An\nadditional evidence of human nature's being untainted with disease in New Zealand, is the great number of old men with\nwhom it abounds. Many of them, by the loss of their hair and\nteeth, appeared to be very ancient, and yet none of them were\ndecrepit. Although they were not equal to the young in muscular strength, they did not come in the least behind them with\nregard to cheerfulness and vivacity. Water, as far as our navigators could discover, is the universal and only liquor of the\nNew Zealanders. It is greatly to be wished that their happiness in this respect may never be destroyed by such a connection\nwith the European nations as shall introduce that fondness for\nspirituous liquors, which hath been so fatal to the Indians of\nNorth America.\nFrom the observations which Lieutenant Cook and his friends\nmade on the people of New Zealand, and from the similitude\nwhich was discerned between them and the inhabitants of the\nSouth Sea Islands, a strong proof arose that both of them had\none common origin; and this proof was rendered indubitable\nby the conformity of their language. When Tupia addressed\nhimself to the natives of Eaheinomauwe and Poenammoo, he\nwas perfectly understood. Indeed, it did not appear that the\nlanguage of Otaheite differed more from that of New Zealand\nthan the language of the two islands, into which it is divided,\ndid from each other.\nHitherto the navigation of Lieutenant Cook had. been unfavourable to the notion of a southern continent, having swept\naway at least three-fourths of the positions upon which that\nnotion had been founded. The track of the Endeavour had\ndemonstrated that the land seen by Tasman, Juan Fernandes,\nHermite, the commander of a Dutch squadron, Quiros, and\nRoggewein, was not, as they had supposed, part of such a continent. It had also totally destroyed the theoretical arguments\n 74\nCOOK'S VOYAGES.\nin favour of a southern continent, which had been drawn from\nthe necessity of it to preserve an equilibrium between the two\nhemispheres. As, however, Mr. Cook's discoveries, so far as\nhe had already proceeded, extended only to the northward of\nforty degrees, south latitude, he could not therefore give an\nopinion concerning what land might lie farther to the southward. This was a matter, therefore, which he earnestly wished\nto be examined; and to him was at length reserved the honour,\nas we shall hereafter see, of putting a final end to the question.\nOn Saturday, the 31st of March, our commander sailed from\nCape Farewell in New Zealand, and pursued his voyage to the\nwestward. New Holland, or as it is now called New South\nWales, came in sight on the 19th of April; and on the 28th of\nthat month the ship anchored in Botany Bay. On the preceding day, in consequence of its falling calm when the vessel\nwas not more than a mile and a half from the shore and within\nsome breakers, our navigators had been in a very disagreeable\nsituation; but happily a light breeze had sprung from the land,\nand carried them out of danger.\nIn the afternoon the boats were manned; and Lieutenant\nCook and his friends, having Tupia of their party, set out from\nthe Endeavour. They intended to land where they had seen\nsome Indians, and began to hope that as these Indians had\npaid no regard to the ship when she came into the bay, they\nwould be as inattentive to the advances of the English towards\nthe shore. In this, however, the gentlemen were disappointed :\nfor as soon as they approached the rocks, two of the men\ncame down upon them to dispute their landing, and the rest\nran away. These champions, who were armed with lances\nabout ten feet long, called to our navigators in a very loud\ntone, and in a harsh dissonant language, of which even Tupia\ndid not understand a single word. At the same time they\nbrandished their weapons, and seemed resolved to defend their\ncoast to the utmost, though they were but two to forty. The\nlieutenant, who could not but admire their courage, and who\nwas unwilling that hostilities should commence with such\ninequality of force on their side, ordered his boat to lie upon\nher oars. He and the other gentlemen then parlied with them\n COOK'S VOYAGES.\nby signs; and to obtain their goodwill he threw them nails,\nbeads, and several trifles besides, with which they appeared to\nbe well pleased. After this our commander endeavoured to\nmake them understand that he wanted water, and attempted\nto convince them, by all the .methods in his power, that he had\nno injurious design against them. Being willing to interpret\nthe waving of their hands as an invitation to proceed, the boat\nput in to the shore; but no sooner was this perceived than it\nwas opposed by the two Indians, one of whom seemed to be a\nyouth about nineteen or twenty years old, and the other a man\nof middle age. The only resource now left for Mr. Cook was\nto fire a musket between them, which being done, the youngest\nof them brought a bundle of lances on the rock, but recollecting himself in an instant, he snatched them up again in great\nhaste. A stone was then thrown at the English, upon which\nthe lieutenant ordered a musket to be fired with small shot.\nThis struck the eldest upon the legs, and he immediately ran\nto one of the houses, which was at about a hundred yards'\ndistance. Mr. Cook, who now hoped that the contest was\nover, instantly landed with his party; but they had scarcely\nquitted the boat when the Indian returned, having only left\nthe rock to fetch a shield or target for his defence. As soon\nas he came up, he and his comrade threw each of them a lance\nin the midst of our people, but happily without hurting a\nsingle person. At the firing of a third musket, one of the two\nmen darted another lance, and then both of them ran away.\nAfter this the gentlemen repaired to the huts, and threw into\nthe house where the children were some beads, ribbons, pieces\nof cloth, and other presents. These they hoped would procure\nthem the goodwill of the inhabitants. When, however, the\nlieutenant and his companions returned the next day, they had\nthe mortification of finding that the beads and ribbons which\nthey had left the night before had not been removed from\ntheir places, and that not an Indian was to be seen.\nSeveral of the natives of the country came in sight on the\n30th, but they could not be engaged to begin an intercourse\nwith our people. They approached within a certain distance\nof them, and, after shouting several times, went back into the\n 76\nCOOKS VOYAGES.\nIll:'\nwoods. Having done this once more, Mr. Cook followed\nthem himself, alone and unarmed, a considerable way along\nthe shore, but without prevailing upon them to stop.\nOn the i st of May he resolved to make an excursion into\nthe country. Accordingly, our commander, Mr. Banks, Dr.\nSolander, and seven others, all of them properly accoutred for\nthe expedition, set out, and repaired first to the huts near the\nwatering-place, whither some of the Indians continued every\nday to resort. Though the little presents which had been left\nthere before had not yet been taken away, our gentlemen\nadded others of still greater value, consisting of cloth, beads,\ncombs, and looking-glasses. After this they went up into the\ncountry, the face of which is finely diversified by wood and\nlawn. The soil they found to be either swamp or light sand.1\nIn cultivating the ground there would be no obstruction\nfrom the trees, which are tall, straight, and without underwood,\nand stand at a sufficient distance from each other. Between\nthe trees the land is abundantly covered with grass. Our\nvoyagers saw many houses of the inhabitants, but met with\nonly one of the people, who ran away as soon as he discovered\nthe English. At every place where they went they left presents,\nhoping that at length they might procure the confidence and\ngoodwill of the Indians. They perceived some traces of\nanimals; and the trees over their heads abounded with birds of\nvarious kinds, among which were many of exquisite beauty.\nLoriquets and cockatoos in particular were so numerous, that\nthey flew in flocks of several scores together.\nWhile the lieutenant and his friends were upon this excursion, Mr. Gore, who had been sent out in the morning to\ndredge for oysters, having performed that service, dismissed\nhis boat, and taking a midshipman with him set out to join\nthe waterers by land. In his way he fell in with a body of\ntwo and twenty Indians, who followed him, and were often at\nno greater distance than that of twenty yards. When he perceived them so near, he stopped and faced about, upon which\n1 In a part of the country that was afterward examined, the soil was\nfound to be much richer; being a deep black mould, which the lieutenant\nthought very fit for the production of grain of any kind.\n COOK'S VOYAGES.\nthey likewise stopped; and when he went on again they continued their pursuit. But though they were all armed with\nlances, they did not attack Mr. Gore; so that he and the midshipman: got in safety to the watering-place. When the natives\ncame in sight of the main body of the English, they halted at\nabout the distance of a quarter of a mile, and stood still. By\nthis Mr. Monkhouse and two or three of the waterers were\nencouraged to march up to them; but seeing the Indians keep\ntheir ground, they were seized with a sudden fear, which is not\nuncommon to the rash and foolhardy, and made a hasty retreat.\nThis step increased the danger which it was intended to avoid.\nFour of the Indians immediately ran forward, and discharged\ntheir lances at the fugitives with such force that they went\nbeyond them. Our people recovering their spirits, stopped to\ncollect the lances, upon which the natives, in their turn, began\nto retire. At this time Mr. Cook came up, with Mr. Banks,\nDr. Solander, and Tupia; and being desirous of convincing\nthe Indians that they were neither afraid of them, nor designed\nto do them any injury, they advanced towards them, endeavouring, by signs of expostulation and treaty, to engage them\nto an intercourse, but without effect.\nFrom the boldness which the natives discovered on the first\nlanding of our voyagers, and the terror that afterward seized\nthem at the sight of the English, it appears that they were\nsufficiently intimidated by our fire-arms. There was not, indeed,\nthe least reason to believe that any of them had been much\nhurt by the small shot which had been fired at them when they\nattacked our people on their coming out of the boat. Nevertheless, they had probably seen, from their lurking places, the\neffects which the muskets had upon the birds. Tupia, who\nwas become a good marksman, frequently strayed abroad to\nshoot parrots; and while he was thus employed he once met\nwith nine Indians, who, as soon as they perceived that he saw\ntherh, ran from him in great alarm and confusion.\nWhile, on the 3rd of May, Mr. Banks was gathering plants\nnear the watering-place, Lieutenant Cook went with Dr.\nSolander and Mr. Monkhouse to the head of the bay, for the\npurpose of examining that part of the country and of making\n I\n78 COOKS VOYAGES.\nfurther attempts to form some connections with the natives. In\nthis excursion they acquired additional knowledge concerning\nthe nature of the soil and its capacities for cultivation, but had\nno success in their endeavours to engage the inhabitants in\ncoming to a friendly intercourse. Several parties that were sent\ninto the country on the next day, with the same view, were equally\nunsuccessful. In the afternoon our commander himself, with a\nnumber of attendants, made an excursion to the north shore,\nwhich he found to be without wood, and to resemble in some\ndegree our moors in England. The surface of the ground\nwas, however, covered with a thin brush of plants, rising to\nabout the height of the knee. Near the coast the hills are low,\nbut there are others behind them which gradually ascend to a\nconsiderable distance, and are intersected with marshes and\nmorasses. Among the articles of fish which at different times\nwere caught, were large stingrays. One of them, when his entrails were taken out, weighed three hundred and thirty-six\npounds.\nIt was upon account of the great quantity of plants which\nMr. Banks and Dr. Solander collected in this place, that Lieutenant Cook was induced to give it the name of Botany Bay.\nIt is situated in the latitude of 340 south, and in the longitude\nof 2080 37' west; and affords a capacious, safe, and convenient\nshelter for shipping. The Endeavour anchored near the south\nshore, about a mile within the entrance, for the convenience of\nsailing with a southerly wind, and because the lieutenant thought\nit the best situation for watering. But afterward he found a very\nfine stream on the north shore, where was a sandy cove in\nwhich a ship might lie almost landlocked, and procure wood\nand water in the greatest abundance. Though wood is everywhere plentiful, our commander saw only two species of it that\ncould be considered as timber. Not only the inhabitants who\nwere first discovered, but all who afterward came in sight were\nentirely naked. Of their mode of life our voyagers could know\nbut little, as not the least connection could be formed with them;\nbut it did not appear that they were numerous, or that they\nlived in societies. They seemed, like other animals, to be\nscattered about along the coast, and in the woods. Not a\n COOKS VOYAGES.\nsingle article was touched by them of all that were left at their\nhuts, or at the places which they frequented; so little sense\nhad they of those small conveniences and ornaments which\nare generally very alluring to the uncivilized tribes of the globe.\nDuring Mr. Cook's stay at this place he caused the English\ncolours to be displayed every day on shore, and took care that\nthe ship's name, and the date of the year, should be inscribed\nupon one of the trees near the watering-place.\nAt daybreak, on Sunday the 6th of May, our navigators sailed\nfrom Botany Bay; and as they proceeded on their voyage the\nlieutenant gave the names that are indicated upon the map to\nthe bays, capes, points, and remarkable hills which successively\nappeared in sight. On the 14th, as the Endeavour advanced\nto the northward, being then in latitude 300 22' south, and\nlongitude 2060 39' west, the land gradually increased in height,\nso that it may be called a hilly country. Between this latitude\nand Botany Bay it exhibits a pleasing variety of ridges, hills,\nvalleys, and plains, all clothed with wood of the same appearance with that which has been mentioned before. The land\nnear the shore is in general low and sandy, excepting the points,\nwhich are rocky, and over many of which are high hills, that,\nat their first rising out of the water, have the semblance of\nislands. On the next day, the vessel being about a league from\nthe shore, our voyagers discovered smoke in many places, and\nhaving recourse to their glasses, they saw about twenty of the\nnatives, who had each of them a large bundle upon his back.\nThe bundles our people conjectured to be palm leaves for\ncovering the houses of the Indians, and continued to observe\nthem above an hour, during which they walked upon the beach,\nand up a path that led over a hill of gentle ascent. It was\nremarkable that not one of them was seen to stop and look\ntowards the Endeavour. They marched along without the\nleast apparent emotion either of curiosity or surprise, though\nit was impossible that they should not have discerned the ship,\nby some casual glance, as they went along the shore, and\nthough she must have been the most stupendous and unaccountable object they had ever beheld.\nWhile, on the 17th, our navigators were in a bay, to which\n COOK'S VOYAGES.\nLieutenant Cook had given the name of Moreton's Bay, and at\na place where the land was not at that time visible, some on\nboard, having observed that the sea looked paler than usual,\nwere of opinion that the bottom of the bay opened into a river.\nThe lieutenant was sensible that there was no real ground for\nthis supposition. As the Endeavour had here thirty-four fathom\nwater, and a fine sandy bottom, these circumstances alone were\nsufficient to produce the change which had been noticed in the\ncolour of the sea. Nor was it by any means' necessary to\nsuppose a river, in order to account for the land at the bottom\nof the bay not being visible. If the land there was as low as it\nhad been experienced to be in a hundred other parts of the\ncoast, it would be impossible to see it from the station of the\nship. Our commander would, however, have brought the matter\nto the test of experiment if the wind had been favourable to\nsuch a purpose. Should any future navigator be disposed to\ndetermine the question whether there is or is not a river in this\nplace, Mr. Cook has taken care to leave the best directions for\nfinding its situation.\nOn the 22nd, as our voyagers were pursuing their course from\nHarvey's Bay, they discovered with their glasses that the land\nwas covered with palm-nut trees, which they had not seen from\nthe time of their leaving the islands within the tropic. They\nsaw also two men walking along the shore, who paid them as\nlittle attention as they had met with on former occasions. At\neight o'clock in the evening of this day the ship came to an\nanchor in five fathom, with a fine sandy bottom. Early in the\nmorning of the next day the lieutenant, accompanied by Mr.\nBanks, Dr. Solander, the other gentlemen, Tupia, and a party\nof men, went on shore, in order to examine the country. The\nwind blew fresh, and the weather was so cold that, being at a\nconsiderable distance from land, they took their cloaks as a\nnecessary equipment for the voyage. When they landed they\nfound a channel leading into a large lagoon. Both the channel\nand the lagoon were examined by our commander with his\nusual accuracy. There is in the place a small river of fresh\nwater and room for a few ships to lie in great security. Near\nthe lagoon grows the true mangrove, such as exists in the West\n COOK'S VOYAGES.\nIndia islands, and the first of the kind that had been yet met\nwith by our navigators. Among the shoals and sand-banks of\nthe coast, they saw many large birds, and some in particular of\nthe same kind which they had seen in Botany Bay. These\nthey judged to be pelicans, but they were so shy as never to\ncome within reach of a musket. On the shore was found a\nspecies of the bustard, one of which was shot that was equal in\nsize to a turkey, weighing seventeen pounds and a half. All\nthe gentlemen agreed that this was the best bird they had eaten\nsince they left England; and in honour of it they called the\ninlet Bustard Bay. Upon the mud banks, and under the mangroves, were innumerable oysters of various kinds, and among\nothers the hammer oyster, with a large proportion of small\npearl oysters. If in deeper water there should be equal plenty\nof such oysters at their full growth, Mr. Cook was of opinion\nthat a pearl fishery might be established here to very great\nadvantage.\nThe people who were left on board the ship asserted, that,\nwhile the gentlemen were in the woods, about twenty of the\nnatives came down to the beach, abreast of the Endeavour, and,\nafter having looked at her for some time, went away. Not a\nsingle Indian was seen by the gentlemen themselves, though\nthey found various proofs, in smoke, fires, and the fragments\nof recent meals, that the country was inhabited. The place\nseemed to be much trodden, and yet not a house, or the\nremains of a house, could be discerned. Hence the lieutenant\nand his friends were disposed to believe, that the people were\ndestitute of dwellings, as well as of clothes; and that, like the\nother commoners of nature, they spent their nights in the open\nair. Tupia himself was struck with their apparently unhappy\ncondition ; and shaking his head, with an air of superiority and\ncompassion, said that they were 1 taata enos,\" | poor wretches.\"\nOn the 25th, our voyagers, at the distance of one mile from\nthe land, were abreast of a point, which Mr. Cook found to lie\ndirectly under the tropic of Capricorn; and for this reason he\ncalled it Cape Capricorn. In the night of the next day, when\nthe ship had anchored at a place which was distant four leagues\nfrom Cape Capricorn, the tide rose and fell near seven feet;\nG\n 82\nCOOKS VOYAGES.\nand the flood set to the westward, and the ebb to the eastward.\nThis circumstance was just the reverse of what had been experienced when the Endeavour was at anchor to the eastward of\nBustard Bay.\nWhile our people were under sail, on the 26th, and were\nsurrounded with islands, which lay at different distances from\nthe mainland, they suddenly fell into three fathom of water.\nUpon this the lieutenant anchored, and sent away the master to\nsound a channel, which lay between the northernmost island\nand the main. Though the channel appeared to have a considerable breadth, our commander suspected it -to be shallow,\nand such was in fact the case. The master reported, at his\nreturn, that he had only two fathom and a half in many places;\nand where the vessel lay at anchor, she had only sixteen feet,\nwhich was not two feet more than she drew. Mr. Banks, who,\nwhile the master was sounding the channel, tried to fish from\nthe cabin window with hook and line, was successful in catching\ntwo sorts of crabs, both of them such as our navigators had not\nseen before. One of them was adorned with a most beautiful\nblue, in every respect equal to the ultramarine. With this blue\nall his claws and joints were deeply tinged; while the under\npart of him was white, and so exquisitely polished, that in colour\nand brightness it bore an exact resemblance to the white of old\nchina. The other crab was also marked, though somewhat\nmore sparingly, with the ultramarine on his joints and his toes;\nand on his back were three brown spots of a singular appearance.\nEarly the next morning, Lieutenant Cook, having found the\npassage between the islands, sailed to the northward, and, on\nthe evening of the succeeding day, anchored at about two miles'\ndistance from the main. At this time a great number of islands,\nlying a long way without the ship, were in sight. On the 29th,\nthe lieutenant sent away the master with two boats to sound\nthe entrance of an inlet, which lay to the west, and into which\nhe intended to go with the vessel, that he might wait a few days\nfor the moon's increase, and have an opportunity of examining\nthe country. As the tide was observed to ebb and flow considerably, when the Endeavour had anchored within the inlet,\n COOKS VOYAGES.\nour commander judged it to be a river that might run pretty\nfar up into land. Thinking that this might afford a commodious situation for laying the ship ashore, and cleaning her\nbottom, he landed with the master, in search of a proper place\nfor the purpose. He was accompanied in the excursion by\nMr. Banks and Dr. Solander; and they found walking exceedingly troublesome, in consequence of the ground's being covered\nwith a kind of grass, the seeds of which were very sharp and\nbearded. Whenever these seeds stuck into their clothes, which\nhappened at every step, they worked forward by means of the\nbeard, till they got at the flesh. Another disagreeable circumstance was, that the gentlemen were incessantly tormented with\nthe stings of a cloud of musquitos. They soon met with several\nplaces where the ship might conveniently be laid ashore ; but\nwere much disappointed in not being able to find any fresh\nwater. In proceeding up the country they found gum trees, the\ngum upon which existed only in very small quantities. Gum\ntrees of a similar kind, and as little productive, had occurred in\nother parts of the coast of New South Wales. Upon the\nbranches of the trees were ants' nests, made of clay, as big as a\nbushel. The ants themselves, by which the nests were inhabited,\nwere small, and their bodies white. Upon another species of\nthe gum tree, was found a small black ant, which perforated all\nthe twigs, and, having worked out the pith, occupied the pipe\nin which it had been contained. Notwithstanding this, the\nparts in which these insects, to an amazing number, had formed\na lodgment, bore leaves and flowers, and appeared to be entirely\nin a flourishing state. Butterflies were found in such multitudes,\nthat the account of them seems almost to be incredible. The\nair was so crowded with them, for the space of three or four\nacres, that millions might be seen in every direction; and the\nbranches and twigs of the trees were at the same time covered\nwith others that were not upon the wing. A small fish of a\nsingular kind was likewise met with in this place. Its size was\nabout that of a minnow, and it had two very strong breast-fins.\nIt was found in places which were quite dry, and where it might\nbe supposed that it had been left by the tide; and yet it did\nnot appear to have become languid from that circumstance:\n 84\nCOOKS VOYAGES.\nfor when it was approached, it leaped away as nimbly as a frog.\nIndeed, it did not seem to prefer water to land.\nThough the curiosity of Mr. Cook and his friends was gratified\nby the sight of these various objects, they were disappointed in\nthe attainment of their main purpose, the discovery of fresh\nwater; and a second excursion, which was made by them on\nthe afternoon of the same day, was equally unsuccessful. The\nfailure of the lieutenant's hopes determined him to make but a\nshort stay in the place. Having, however, observed from an\neminence, that the inlet penetrated a considerable way into the\ncountry, he formed a resolution of tracing it in the morning.\nAccordingly, at sunrise, on Wednesday the 30th of May, he\nwent on shore, and took a view of the coast and the islands that\nlie off it, with their bearings. For this purpose he had with him\nan azimuth compass; but he found that the needle differed\nvery considerably in its position, even to thirty degrees; the\nvariation being in some places more, in others less. Once the\nneedle varied from itself no less than two points in the distance\nof fourteen feet. Mr. Cook having taken up some of the loose\nstones which lay upon the ground, applied them to the needle,\nbut they produced no effect; whence he concluded that in the\nhills there was iron ore, traces of which he had remarked both\nhere and in the neighbouring parts. After he had made his\nobservations upon the hill, he proceeded with Dr. Solander up\nthe inlet. He set out with the first of the flood, and had\nadvanced above eight leagues, long before it was high water.\nThe breadth of the inlet, thus far, was from two to five miles,\nupon a direction southrwest by south ; but here it opened every\nway, and formed a large lake, which to the north-west communicated with the sea. Our commander not only saw the sea in\nthis direction, but found the tide of flood coming strongly in\nfrom that point. He observed, also, an arm of this lake extending to the eastward. Hence he thought it not improbable, that\nit might communicate with the sea in the bottom of the bay,\nwhich lies to the westward of the Cape, that on the chart is\ndesignated by the name of Cape Townshend. On the south\nside of the lake is a ridge of hills which the lieutenant was\ndesirous of climbing. As, however, it was high water, and the\n COOK'S VOYAGES.\n85\nday was far spent; and as the weather, in particular, was dark\nand rainy, he was afraid of being bewildered among the shoals\nin the night, and therefore was obliged to give up his inclination,\nand to make the best of his way to the ship. Two people only\nwere seen by him, who followed the boat along the shore a good\nway at some distance; but he could not prudently wait for them,\nas the tide ran strongly in his favour. Several fires in one\ndirection, and smoke in another, exhibited farther proofs of the\ncountry's being in a certain degree inhabited.\nWhile Mr. Cook, with Dr. Solander, was tracing the inlet,\nMr. Banks and a party with him engaged in a separate excursion,\nin which they had not proceeded far within land, before their\ncourse was obstructed by a swamp, covered with mangroves.\nThis, however, they determined to pass; and having done it\nwith great difficulty, they came up to a place where there had\nbeen four small fires, near to which lay some shells and bones\nof fish, that had been roasted. Heaps of grass were also found\nlying together, on which four or five people appeared to have\nslept. Mr. Gore, in another place, observed the track of a large\nanimal. Some bustards were likewise seen, but not any other\nbird, excepting a few beautiful loriquets, of the same kind with\nthose which had been noticed in Botany Bay. The country in\ngeneral, in this part of New South Wales, appeared sandy and\nbarren, and destitute of the accommodations which could fit it\nfor being possessed by settled inhabitants. From the ill success\nthat attended the searching for fresh water, Lieutenant Cook\ncalled the inlet in which the ship lay Thirsty Sound. No\nrefreshment of any other sort was here procured by our voyagers.\nOur commander, not having a single inducement to stay\nlonger in this place, weighed anchor in the morning of the\n31st, and put to sea. In the prosecution of the voyage, when\nthe Endeavour was close under Cape Upstart, the variation of\nthe needle, at sunset, on the 4th of June, was 90 east, and at\nsunrise the next day it was no more than-50 35'. Hence the\nlieutenant concluded that it had been influenced by iron ore,\nor by some other magnetical matter contained under the surface of the earth. In the afternoon of the 7th, our navigators\n COOK'S VOYAGES.\nsaw upon one of the islands what had the appearance of cocoa-\nnut trees; and as a few nuts would at this time have been very\nacceptable, Mr. Cook sent Lieutenant Hicks ashore to see if he\ncould procure any refreshment. He was accompanied by Mr.\nBanks and Dr. Solander; and in the evening the gentlemen\nreturned, with an account that what had been taken for cocoa-\nnut trees were a small kind of cabbage-palm, and that, excepting about fourteen or fifteen plants, nothing could be obtained\nwhich was worth bringing away. On the 8th, when the Endeavour was in the midst of a cluster of small islands, our voyagers\ndiscerned, With their glasses, upon one of the nearest of these\nislands, about thirty of the natives, men, women, and children,\nall standing together, and looking with great attention at the\nship. This was the first instance of curiosity that had been observed among the people of the country. The present Indian\nspectators were entirely naked. Their hair was short, and their\ncomplexion the same with that of such of the inhabitants as had\nbeen seen before.\nIn navigating the coast of New South Wales, where the sea\nin all parts conceals shoals which suddenly project from the\nshore, and rocks that rise abruptly like a pyramid from the\nbottom, our commander had hitherto conducted his vessel in\nsafety for an extent of two and twenty degrees of latitude, being\nmore than one thousand three hundred miles. But on the ioth\nof June, as he was pursuing his course from a bay to which he\nhad given the name of Trinity Bay, the Endeavour fell into a\nsituation as critical and dangerous as any that is recorded in'\nthe history of navigation, a history which abounds with perilous\nadventures and almost miraculous escapes. Our voyagers were\nnow near the latitude assigned to the islands that were discovered by Quiros, and which, without sufficient reason, some\ngeographers have thought proper to join to this land. The\nship had the advantage of a fine breeze and a clear moonlight\nnight, and in standing off from six till near nine o'clock, she\nhad deepened her water from fourteen to twenty-one fathom.\nBut while our navigators were at supper it suddenly shoaled,\nand they fell into twelve, ten, and eight fathom within the\ncompass of a few minutes. Mr. Cook immediately ordered\n COOK'S VOYAGES.\nevery man to his station, and all was ready to put about and\ncome to an anchor, when deep water being met with again at\nthe next cast of the lead, it was concluded that the vessel had\ngone over the tail of the shoals which had been seen at sunset,\nand that the danger was now over. The idea of security was\nnow confirmed by the water's. continuing to deepen to twenty\nand twenty-one fathom, so that the gentlemen left the deck in\ngreat tranquillity, and went to bed. However, a little before\neleven, the water shoaled at once from twenty to seventeen\nfathom, and before the lead could be cast again the ship struck,\nand remained immovable, excepting so far as she was influenced\nby the heaving of the surge, that beat her against the crags of\nthe rock upon which she lay. A few moments brought every\nperson upon deck, with countenances suited to the horrors of\nthe situation. As our people knew, from the breeze which they\nhad in the evening, that they could not be very near the shore,\nthere was too much reason to conclude that they were on a\nrock of coral, which, on account of the sharpness of its points\nand the roughness of its surface, is more fatal than any other.\nOn examining the depth of water round the ship, it was speedily\ndiscovered that the misfortune of our voyagers was equal to\ntheir apprehensions. The vessel had been lifted over a ledge\nof the rock and lay in a hollow within it, in some places of\nwhich hollow there were from three to four fathom, and in\nothers not so many feet of water. To complete the scene of\ndistress, it appeared from the light of the moon that the sheathing boards from the bottom of the ship were floating away all\nround her, and at last her false keel, so that every moment was\nmaking way for the whole company's being swallowed up by the\nrushing in of the sea. There was now no chance but to lighten\nher, and the opportunity had unhappily been lost of doing it to\nthe best advantage; for as the Endeavour had gone ashore\njust at high water, and by this time it had considerably fallen,\nshe would when lightened be but in the same situation as at\nfirst. The only alleviation of this circumstance was, that as\nthe tide ebbed the vessel settled to the rocks, and was not\nbeaten against them with so much violence. Our people had,\nindeed, some hope from the next tide, though it was doubtful\n COOK'S VOYAGES.\nwhether the ship would hold together so long, especially as the\nrock kept grating part of her bottom with such force as to be\nheard in the fore store-room. No effort, however, was remitted\nfrom despair Of success. That no time might be. lost, the\nwater was immediately started in the hold and pumped up; six\nguns, being all that were upon the deck, a quantity of iron and\nstone ballast, casks, hoop-staves, oil jars, decayed stores, and a\nvariety of things besides, were thrown overboard with the utmost expedition. Every one exerted himself not only without\nmurmuring and discontent, but even with an alacrity which\nalmost approached to cheerfulness. So sensible, at the same\ntime, were the men of the awfulness of their situation, that not\nan oath was heard among them, the detestable habit of profane\nswearing being instantly subdued by the dread of incurring\nguilt when a speedy death was in view.\nWhen Lieutenant Cook and all the people about him were\nthus employed, the opening of the morning of the nth of June\npresented them with a fuller prospect of their danger. The\nland was seen by them at about eight leagues' distance, without -\nany island in the intermediate space, upon which, if the ship had\ngone to pieces, they might have been set ashore by the boats,\nand carried thence by different turns'to the main. Gradually,\nhowever, the wind died away, and, early in the forenoon, it became a dead calm : a circumstance this, peculiarly happy in the\norder of Divine Providence ; for if it had blown hard, the vessel\nmust inevitably have been destroyed. High water being expected at eleven in the morning, and everything being made\nready to heave her off if she should float; to the inexpressible\nsurprise and concern of our navigators, so much did the day\ntide fall short of that of the night, that though they had lightened the ship nearly fifty ton, she did not float by a foot and a\nhalf. Hence it became necessary to lighten her still more, and\neverything was thrown overboard that could possibly be spared.\nHitherto the Endeavour had not admitted much water; but as\nthe tide fell, it rushed in so fast, that she could scarcely be kept\nfree, though two pumps were incessantly worked. There were\nnow no hopes but from the tide at midnight; to prepare for\ntaking the advantage of which the most vigorous efforts were\n COOK'S VOYAGES.\nexerted. About five o'clock in the afternoon the tide began to\nrise, but, at the same time, the leak increased to a most alarming degree. Two more pumps, therefore, were manned, one of\nwhich unhappily would not work. Three pumps, however,\nwere kept going, and at nine o'clock the ship righted. Nevertheless, the leak had gained so considerably upon her, that it\nwas imagined that she must go to the bottom, as soon as she\nceased to be supported by the rock. It was, indeed, a dreadful\ncircumstance to our commander and his people, that they were\nobliged to anticipate the floating of the vessel, not as an earnest\nof their deliverance, but as an event which probably would precipitate their destruction. They knew that their boats were not\ncapable of carrying the whole of them on shore, and that when\nthe dreadful crisis should arrive, all command and subordination\nbeing at an end, a contest for preference might be expected,\nwhich would increase even the horrors of shipwreck, and turn\ntheir rage against each other. Some of them were sensible that\nif they should escape to the mainland, they were likely to suffer\nmore upon the whole, than those who would be left on board\nto perish in the. waves. The latter would only be exposed to\ninstant death; whereas the former, when they got on shore,\nwould have no lasting or effectual defence against the natives,\nin a part of the country where even nets and fire-arms could\nscarcely furnish them with food. But supposing that they\nshould find the means of subsistence; how horrible must be\ntheir state, to be condemned to languish out the remainder of\ntheir lives in a desolate wilderness without the possession or\nhope of domestic comfort; and to be cut off from all commerce\nwith mankind, excepting that of the naked savages, who prowl\nthe desert, and who perhaps are some of the most rude and uncivilized inhabitants of the earth.\nThe dreadful moment which was to determine the fate of our\nvoyagers now drew on; and every one saw, in the countenances\nof his companions, the picture of his own sensations. Not, however, giving way to despair, the lieutenant ordered the capstan\nand windlass to be manned with as many hands as could be\nspared from the pumps, and the ship having floated about twenty\nminutes after ten o'clock, the grand effort was made, and she\n COOK'S VOYAGES.\nwas heaved into deep water. It was no small consolation to\nfind, that she did not now admit of more water than she had\ndone when upon the rock. By the gaining, indeed, of the leak\nupon the pumps, three feet and nine inches of water were in the\nhold; notwithstanding which, the men did not relinquish their\nlabour. Thus they held the water as it were at bay : but having endured excessive fatigue of body, and agitation of mind, for\nmore than twenty-four hours, and all this being attended with\nlittle hope of final success, they began, at length, to flag. None\nof them could work at the pump above five or six minutes together, after which, being totally exhausted, they threw themselves down upon the deck, though a stream of water, between\nthree or four inches deep, was running over it from the pumps.\nWhen those who succeeded them had worked their time, and in\ntheir turn were exhausted, they threw themselves down in the\nsame manner, and the others started up again, to renew their\nlabour. While thus they were employed in relieving each other,\nan accident was very nearly putting an immediate end to all\ntheir efforts. The planking which lines the ship's bottom is\ncalled the ceiling, between which and the outside planking\nthere is a space of about eighteen inches. From this ceiling\nonly, the man who had hitherto attended the well had taken\nthe depth of the water, and had given the measure accordingly.\nBut, upon his being relieved, the person who came in his room\nreckoned the depth to the outside planking, which had the appearance of the leak's having gained upon the pumps eighteen\ninches in a few minutes. The mistake, however, was soon\ndetected; and the accident, which in its commencement was\nvery formidable to them, became, in fact, highly advantageous.\nSuch was the joy which every man felt, at finding his situation\nbetter than his fears had suggested, that it operated with wonderful energy, and seemed to possess him w7ith a strong persuasion\nthat scarcely any real danger remained. New confidence and\nnew hope inspired fresh vigour; and the efforts of the men were\nexerted with so much alacrity and spirit, that before eight o'clock\nin the morning the pumps had gained considerably upon the\nleak. All the conversation now turned upon carrying the ship\ninto some harbour, as a thing not to be doubted ; and as hands\n1\nI\n1\nIf\n1\n COOK'S VOYAGES.\n9i\ncould be spared from the pumps, they were employed in getting\nup the anchors. It being found impossible to save the little\nbower anchor, it was cut away at a whole cable, and the cable\nof the stream anchor was lost among the rocks; but, in the\nsituation of our people, these were trifles which scarcely attracted\ntheir notice. The fore-topmast and fore-yard were next erected,\nand there being a breeze from the sea, the Endeavour, at eleven\no'clock, got once more under sail, and stood for the land.\nNotwithstanding these favourable circumstances, our voyagers\nwere still very far from being in a state of safety. It was not\npossible long to continue the labour by which the pumps had\nbeen made to gain upon the leak; and as the exact place of it\ncould not be discovered, there was no hope of stopping it within.\nAt this crisis, Mr. Monkhouse, one of the midshipmen, came to\nLieutenant Cook, and proposed an expedient he had once seen\nused on board a merchant ship, which had sprung a leak that\nadmitted more than four feet water in an hour, and which by this\nmeans had been safely brought from Virginia to London. To\nMr. Monkhouse, therefore, the care of the expedient, which is\ncalled fothering the ship, was, with proper assistance, committed;\nand his method of proceeding was as follows. He took a lower\nstudding sail, and having mixed together a large quantity of\noakum and wool, he stitched it down as lightly as possible, in\nhandfuls upon the sail, and spread over it the dung of the sheep\nof the vessel, and other filth. The sail being thus prepared, it\nwas hauled under the ship's bottom by ropes, which kept it extended. When it came under the leak, the suction that carried\nin the water, carried in with it the oakum and wool from the surface of the sail. In other parts the water was not sufficiently\nagitated to wash off the oakum and the wool. The success of\nthe expedient was answerable to the warmest expectations; for\nhereby the leak was so far reduced, that, instead of gaining upon\nthree pumps, it was easily kept under with one. Here was such\na new source of confidence and comfort, that our people could\nscarcely have expressed more joy, if they had been already in\n-port. It had lately been the utmost object of their hope, to run\nthe ship ashore in some harbour, either of an island or the main,\nand to build a vessel out of her materials, to carry them to the\n ill\n92 COOK'S VOYAGES.\nEast Indies. Nothing, however, was now thought of but to\nrange along the coast in search*of a convenient place to repair\nthe damage the Endeavour had sustained, and then to prosecute\nthe voyage upon the same plan as if no impediment had happened. In justice and gratitude to the ship's company, and the\ngentlemen on board, Mr. Cook has recorded, that although in\nthe midst of their distress all of them seemed to have a just\nsense of their danger, no man gave way to passionate exclamations, or frantic gestures. \"Every one appeared to have the\nperfect possession of his mind, and every one exerted himself\nto the utmost, with a quiet and patient perseverance, equally\ndistant from the tumultuous violence of terror, and the gloomy\ninactivity of despair.\" Though the lieutenant hath said nothing\nof himself, it is well known that his own composure, fortitude,\nand activity, were equal to the greatness of the occasion.\nTo complete the history of this wonderful preservation, it is\nnecessary to bring forward a circumstance which could not be\ndiscovered till the ship was laid down to be repaired. It was\nthen found that one of her holes, which was large enough to\nhave sunk our navigators, if they had had eight pumps instead of\nfour, and had been able to keep them incessantly going, was in\na great measure filled up by a fragment of the rock, upon which\nthe Endeavour had struck. To this singular event, therefore,\nit was owing that the water did not pour in with a violence,\nwhich must speedily have involved the Endeavour and all her\ncompany in inevitable destruction.\nHitherto none of the names by which our commander had\ndistinguished the several parts of the country seen by him, were\nmemorials of distress. But the anxiety and danger which he\nand his people had now experienced induced him to call the\npoint in sight, which lay to the northward, Cape Tribulation.\nThe next object after this event was to look out for a harbour\nwhere the defects of the ship might be repaired, and the vessel\nput into proper order for future navigation. On the 14th a\nsmall harbour was happily discovered, which was excellently\nadapted to the purpose. It was, indeed, remarkable, that\nduring the whole course of the voyage our people had seen no\nplace which, in their present circumstances, could have afforded\n COOK'S VOYAGES.\nthem the same relief. They could not, however, immediately\nget into it; and in the midst of all their joy for their unexpected\ndeliverance, they had not forgotten that there was nothing but\na lock of wool between them and destruction.\nAt this time the scurvy, with many formidable symptoms,\nbegan to make its appearance among our navigators. Tupia,\nin particular, was so grievously affected with the disease, that\nall the remedies prescribed by the surgeon could not retard its\nprogress. Mr. Green, the astronomer, was also upon the\ndecline. These and other circumstances embittered the delay\nwhich prevented our commander and his companions from\ngetting on shore. In the morning of the 17th, though the\nwind was still fresh, the lieutenant ventured to weigh, and to\nput in for the harbour, the entrance into which was by a very\nnarrow channel. In making the attempt the ship was twice run\naground. At the first time she went off without any trouble,\nbut the second time she stuck fast. Nevertheless, by proper\nexertions in conjunction with the rising of the tide, she floated\nabout one o'clock in the afternoon, and was soon warped into\nthe harbour. The succeeding day was employed in erecting\ntwo tents, in landing the provisions and stores, and in making\nevery preparation for repairing the damages which the Endeavour had sustained. In the meanwhile, Mr. Cook, who had\nascended one of the highest hills that overlooked the harbour,\nwas by no means entertained with a comfortable prospect; the\nlow land near the river being wholly overrun with mangroves,\namong which the salt water flows at every tide, and the high\nland appearing to be altogether stony and barren. Mr. Banks\nalso took a walk up the country, and met with the frames of\nseveral old Indian houses, and places where the natives, though\nnot recently, had dressed shell fish. The boat, which had this\nday been despatched to haul the seine, with a view of procuring\nsome fish for the refreshment of the sick, returned without\nsuccess. Tupia was more fortunate. Having employed himself\nin angling, and lived entirely upon what he caught, he recovered\nin a surprising degree. Mr. Green, to the regret of his friends,\nexhibited no symptons of returning health.\nOn the 19th, Mr. Banks crossed the river to take a farther\n 94\nCOOK'S VOYAGES.\nill\nI\nview of the country, which he found to consist principally of\nsand hills. Some Indian houses were seen by him, that appeared to have been very lately inhabited; and in his walk he\nmet with large flocks of pigeons and crows. The pigeons were\nexceedingly beautiful. Of these he shot several; but the crows,\nwhich were exactly like those in England, were so shy, that\nthey never came within the reach of his gun.\nIt was not till the 22 nd that the tide so far left the Endeavour\nas to give our people an opportunity of examining her leak. In\nthe place where it was found the rocks had made their way\nthrough four planks, and even into the timbers. Three more\nplanks were greatly damaged, and there was something very\nextraordinary in the appearance of the breaches. Not a splinter\nwas to be seen, but all was as smooth as if the whole had been\ncut away by an instrument. It was a peculiarly happy circumstance that the timbers were here very close, since otherwise the\nship could not possibly have been saved. Now, also, it was\nthat the fragment of the rock was discovered, which, by sticking\nin the leak of the vessel, had been such a providential instrument of her preservation.\nOn the same day some of the people who had been sent to\nshoot pigeons for the sick, and who had discovered many Indian\nhouses and a fine stream of fresh water, reported at their return\nthat they had seen an animal as large as a greyhound, of a\nslender make, of a mouse colour, and extremely swift. As the\nlieutenant was walking on the morning of the 24th, at a little\ndistance from the ship, he had an opportunity of seeing an\nanimal of the same kind. From the description he gave of it,\nand from an imperfect view which occurred to Mr. Banks, the\nlatter gentleman was of opinion that its species was hitherto\nunknown.\nThe position of the vessel, while she was refitting for sea,\nwas very near depriving the world of that botanical knowledge,\nwhich Mr. Banks had procured at the expense of so much\nlabour, and such various perils. For the greater security of\nthe curious collection of plants which he had made during the\nwhole voyage, he had removed them into the bread-room.\nThis room is in the after part of the ship, the head of which,\n COOK'S VOYAGES.\n95\nfor the purpose of repairing her, was laid much higher than the\nstern. No one having thought of the danger to which this\ncircumstance might expose the plants, they were found to be\nunder water. However, by the exercise of unremitting care\nand attention, the larger part of them were restored to a state\nof preservation.\nOn the 29th of June, at two o'clock in the morning, Mr.\nCook, in conjunction with Mr. Green, observed an emersion\nof Jupiter's first satellite. The time here was 2h 18' 53\", which\ngave the longitude of the place at 2140 42' 30\" west: its latitude is 150 26' south. The next morning the lieutenant sent\nsome of the young gentlemen to take a plan of the harbour,\nwhilst he himself ascended a hill, that he might gain a full\nprospect of the sea : and it was a prospect which presented him\nwith a lively view of the difficulties of his situation. To his\ngreat concern he saw innumerable sand-banks and shoals,\nlying in every direction of the coast. Some of them extended\nas far as he could discern with his glass, and many of them did\nbut just rise above water. To the northward there was an\nappearance of a passage, and this was the only direction in\nwhich our commander could hope to get clear, in the prosecution of his voyage; for, as the wind blew constantly from the\nsouth-east, to return by the southward would have been\nextremely difficult, if not absolutely impossible. On this, and\nthe preceding day, our people had been very successful in\nhauling the seine. The supply of fish was so great, that the\nlieutenant was now able to distribute two pounds and a half to\neach man. A quantity of greens having likewise been gathered,\nhe ordered them to be boiled with the peas. Hence an\nexcellent mess was produced, which, in conjunction with the\nfish, afforded an unspeakable refreshment to the whole of the\nship's company.\nEarly in the morning of the 2nd of July, Lieutenant Cook\nsent the master out of the harbour, in the-pinnace, to sound\nabout the shoals, and to search for a channel to the northward.\nA second attempt, which was made this day, to heave off the\nship, was as unsuccessful as a former one had'been. The next\nday the master returned, and reported that he had found a\n 96\nCOOK'S VOYAGES.\npassage out to sea, between the shoals. On one of these\nshoals, which consisted of coral rocks, many of which were dry\nat low water, he had landed, and found there cockles, of so\nenormous a size, that a single cockle was more than two men\ncould eat. At the same place he met with a great variety of\nother shell fish, and brought back with him a plentiful supply\nfor the use of his fellow voyagers. At high water, this day,\nanother effort was made to float the ship, which happily\nsucceeded; but it being found, that she had sprung a plank\nbetween decks, it became.necessary to lay her ashore a second\ntime. The lieutenant, being anxious to attain a perfect\nknowledge of the state of the vessel, got one of the carpenter's\ncrew, a man in whom he could confide, to dive, on the 5th, to\nher bottom, that he might examine the place where the sheathing had been rubbed off. His report, which was, that three\nstreaks of the sheathing, about eight feet long, were wanting,\nand that the main plank had been a little rubbed, was perfectly\nagreeable to the account that had been given before by the\nmaster and others, who had made the same examination; and\nour commander had the consolation of finding, that, in the\nopinion of the carpenter, this matter would be of little consequence. The other damage, therefore, being repaired, the\nship was again floated at high water, and all hands were\nemployed in taking the stores on board, and in putting her\ninto a condition for proceeding on her voyage. To the harbour in which she was refitted for the sea, Mr. Cook gave the\nname of the Endeavour River.\nOn the morning of the 6th, Mr. Banks, accompanied by\nLieutenant Gore, and three men, set out in a small boat up the\nriver, with a view of spending a few days in examining the\ncountry. In this expedition nothing escaped his notice, which\nrelated either to the natural history or the inhabitants of the'\nplaces he visited. Though he met with undoubted proofs, that\nseveral of the natives were at no great distance, none of them\ncame within sight. Having found, upon the whole, that the\ncountry did not promise much advantage from a farther search,\nhe and his party re-embarked in their boat, and returned, on\nthe 8th, to the ship. During their excursion, they had slept\n COOK'S VOYAGES.\n97\nupon the ground in perfect security, and without once reflecting\nupon the danger they would have incurred, if, in that situation,\nthey had been discovered by the Indians.\nLieutenant Cook had not been satisfied with the account which\nthe master had given of his having traced a passage between the\nshoals, into the sea. He sent him out, therefore, a second time,\nupon the same business; and, on his return, he made a different\nreport. Having been seven leagues out at sea, the master was\nnow of opinion, that there was no such passage as he had before\nimagined. His expedition, however, though in this respect unsuccessful, was not wholly without its advantage. On the very\nrock where he had seen the large cockles, he met with a great\nnumber of turtle; and though he had no better an instrument\nthan a boat-hook, three of them were caught, which together\nweighed seven hundred and ninety-one pounds. An attempt,\nwhich, by order of the lieutenant, was made the next morning\nto obtain some more turtle, failed, through the misconduct of\nthe same officer, who had been so fortunate on the preceding\nday.\nHitherto the natives of this part of the country had eagerly\navoided holding any intercourse with our people: but at length\ntheir minds, through the good management of Mr. Cook, became\nmore favourably disposed. Four of them having appeared, on\nthe i crh, in a small canoe, and seeming to be busily employed\nin striking fish, some of the ship's company were for going over\nto them in a boat. This, however, the lieutenant would not\npermit, repeated experience having convinced him that it was\nalongside the ship, without expressing any fear or distrust The\nconference was carried on, by signs, with the utmost cordiality\ntill dinner-time, when, being invited by our people to go with\nthem and partake of their provision, they declined it, and went\naway in their canoe. One of these Indians was somewhat above\nthe middle age ; the three others were young. Their stature was\n COOK'S VOYAGES.\nof the common size, but their limbs were remarkably small.\nThe colour of their skin was a dark chocolate. Their hair was\nblack but not woolly; and their features were far from being\ndisagreeable. They had lively eyes, and their teeth were even\nand white. The tones of their voices were soft and musical, and\nthere was a flexibility in their organs of speech, which enabled\nthem to repeat with great facility many of the words pronounced\nby the English.\nOn the next morning, our voyagers had another visit from four\nof the natives. Three of them were the same who had appeared\nthe day before, but the fourth was a stranger, to whom his companions gave the name of Yaparico. He was distinguished by\na very peculiar ornament. This was the bone of a bird, nearly\nas thick as a man's finger, and five or six inches long, which he\nhad thrust into a hole, made in the gristle that divides the nostrils. An instance of the like kind, and only one, had been seen\nin New Zealand. It was found, however, that among all these\npeople the same part of the nose was perforated; that they had\nholes in their ears : and that they had bracelets, made of plaited\nhair, upon the upper part of their arms. Thus the love of ornament takes place among them though they are absolutely destitute of apparel.\nThree Indians, on the 12th, ventured down to Tupia's tent, and\nwere so well pleased with their reception, that one of them went\nwith his canoe to fetch two others, who had never been seen by\nthe English. On his return, he introduced the strangers by\nname, a ceremony which was never omitted upon such occasions.\nFrom a farther acquaintance with the natives, it was found, that\nthe colour of their skins was not so dark as had at first been\napprehended, and that all of them were remarkably clean-limbed\nand extremely active and nimble. Their language appeared to\nbe more harsh than that of the islanders in the South Sea.\nOn the 14th, Mr. Gore had the good fortune to kill one of the\nanimals before mentioned, and which had been the subject of\nmuch speculation. It is called by the natives Kanguroo; and\nwhen dressed proved most excellent meat. Indeed, our navigators might nowr be said to fare sumptuously every day; for\nthey had turtle in great plenty, and it was agreed that these were\n COOK'S VOYAGES.\nfar superior to any which our people had ever tasted in England.\nThis the gentlemen justly imputed to their being eaten fresh\nfrom the sea, before their natural fat had been wasted, or their\njuices changed, by the situation and diet they are exposed to\nwhen kept in tubs. Most of the turtle here caught were of the\nkind call green turtle, and their weight was from two to three\nhundred pounds.\nIn the morning of the 16th, while the men were engaged in\ntheir usual employment of getting the ship ready for the sea,\nour commander climbed one of the heights on the north side\nof the river, and obtained from it an extensive view of the\ninland country, which he found agreeably diversified by hills,\nvalleys, and large plains, that in many places were richly\ncovered with wood. This evening, the lieutenant and Mr.\nGreen observed an emersion of the first satellite of Jupiter,\nwhich gave 2140 53' 45\" of longitude. The observation taken\non the 29th of June had given 2140 48' 30\"; and the mean\nwas 2140 48' 7i\", being the longitude of the place west of\nGreenwich.\nOn the 17th, Mr. Cook sent the master and one of the mates\nin the pinnace, to search for a channel northward ; after which,\naccompanied by Mr. Banks and Dr. Solander, he went into the\nwoods on the other side of the water. In this excursion,\nthe gentlemen had a farther opportunity of improving their\nacquaintance with the Indians, who by degrees became so\nfamiliar, that several of them the next day ventured on board\nthe ship. There the lieutenant left them, apparently much\nentertained, that he might go with Mr. Banks to take a farther\nsurvey of the country, and especially to indulge an anxious\ncuriosity they had of looking round about them upon the sea;\nof which they earnestly wished, but scarcely dared to hope, that\nthey might obtain a favourable and encouraging prospect.\nWhen after having walked along the shore seven or eight miles\nto the northward, they ascended a very high hill, the view which\npresented itself to them inspired nothing but melancholy\napprehensions. In every direction they saw rocks and shoals\nwithout number; and there appeared to be no passage out to\nsea, but through the winding channels between them, the navi-\n COOK'S VOYAGES.\n1\ngation of which could not be accomplished without the utmost\ndegree of difficulty and danger. The spirits of the two gentlemen were not raised by this excursion.\nOn the 19th, our voyagers were visited by ten of the natives,\nand six or seven more were seen at a distance, chiefly women,\nwho were as naked as the male inhabitants of the country.\nThere being at that time a number of turtles on the deck of the\nship, the Indians who came on board were determined to get\none of them; and expressed great disappointment and anger,\nwhen our people refused to comply with their wishes. Several\nattempts were made by them to secure what they wanted by\nforce; but all their efforts proving unsuccessful, they suddenly\nleaped into their canoes in a transport of rage, and paddled\ntowards the shore. The lieutenant, with Mr. Banks, and five\nor six of the ship's crew, immediately went into the boat, and\ngot ashore, where many of the English were engaged in various\nemployments. As soon as the natives reached the land, they\nseized their arms, which had been laid up in a tree, and having\nsnatched a brand from under a pitch-kettle that was boiling,\nmade a circuit to the windward of the few things our people\nhad on shore, and with surprising quickness and dexterity set\nfire to the grass in their way. The grass, which was as dry as\nstubble, and five or six feet high, burned with surprising fury;\nand a tent of Mr. Banks's would have been destroyed if that\ngentleman had not immediately got some of the men to save it\nby hauling it down upon the beach. Every part of the smith's\nforge that would burn was consumed. This. transaction was\nfollowed by another of the same nature. In spite of threats and\nentreaties, the Indians went to a different place, where several\nof the Endeavour's crew were washing, and where the seine, the\nother nets and a large quantity of linen were laid out to dry, and\nagain set fire to the grass. The audacity of this fresh attack\nrendered it necessary that a musket, loaded with small shot,\nshould be discharged at one of them; who being wounded at\nthe distance of about forty yards, they all betook themselves to\nflight. In the last instance the fire was extinguished before it\nhad made any considerable progress; but where it had first\nbegan, it spread far into the woods. The natives being still in\n COOK'S VOYAGES. 101\nsight, Mr. Cook, to convince them that they had not yet gotten\nout of his reach, fired a musket, charged with ball, abreast\nof them among the mangroves, upon which they quickened\ntheir pace, and were soon out of view. It was now expected\nthat they would have given our navigators no farther trouble ;\nbut in a little time their voices were heard in the woods, and it\nwas perceived that they came nearer and nearer. The lieutenant\ntherefore, together with Mr. Banks, and three or four more persons, set out to meet them ; and the result of the interview, in\nconsequence of the prudent and lenient conduct of our\ncommander and his friends, was a complete reconciliation.\nSoon after the Indians went away, the woods were seen to be\non fire at a distance of about two miles. This accident, if it\nhad happened a little sooner, might have produced dreadful\neffects; for the powder had been but a few days on board, and\nit was not many hours that the store tent, with all the valuable\nthings contained in it, had been removed. From the fury with\nwhich the grass would burn in this hot climate, and the difficulty of extinguishing the fire, our voyagers determined never to\nexpose themselves to the like danger, but to clear the ground\naround them, if ever again they should be under the necessity\nof pitching their tents in such a situation.\nIn the evening of this day, when everything was gotten on\nboard the ship, and she was nearly ready for sailing, the\nmaster returned with the disagreeable account that there was\nno passage for her to the northward. The next morning the\nlieutenant himself sounded and buoyed the bar. At this time\nall the hills for many miles round were on fire, and the appearance they assumed at night was eminently striking and\nsplendid.\nIn an excursion which was made by Mr. Banks, on the 23rd,\nto gather plants, he found the greatest part of the cloth that\"\nhad been given to the Indians lying in a heap together. This,\nas well as the trinkets which had been bestowed upon them,\nthey probably regarded as useless lumber. Indeed, they\nseemed to set little value on anything possessed by our people\nexcepting their turtle, and that was a comm'odity which could\nnot be spared.\n COOK'S VOYAGES.\nAs Lieutenant Cook was prevented by blowing weather\nfrom attempting to get out to sea, Mr. Banks and Dr. Solander\nseized another opportunity on the 24th of pursuing their\nbotanical researches. Having traversed the woods the greater\npart of the day without success, as they were returning through\na deep valley, they discovered lying upon the ground several\nmarking nuts, anacardiam orientale. Animated with the hope\nof meeting the tree that bore them\u2014a tree which perhaps no\nEuropean botanist had ever seen\u2014they sought for it with great\ndiligence and labour, but to no purpose. While Mr. Banks\nwas again gleaning the country, on the 26th, to .enlarge his\ntreasure of natural history, he had the good fortune to take an\nanimal of the opossum tribe, together with two young ones.\nIt was a female, and, though not exactly of the same species,\nmuch resembled the remarkable animal which Mons. de Buffon\nhath described by the name of phalanger.\nOn the morning of the 29th, the weather becoming calm, and\na light breeze having sprung up by land, Lieutenant Cook sent\na boat to see what water was upon the bar, and all things were\nmade ready for putting to sea. But, on the return of the boat,\nthe officer reported that there were only thirteen feet of water\non the bar. As the ship drew thirteen feet six inches, and the\nsea breeze set in again in the evening, all hope of sailing on\nthat day was given up. The weather being more moderate on\nthe 31st, the lieutenant had thoughts of trying to warp the vessel\nout of the harbour 1 but upon going out himself in the boat he\nfound that the wind still blew so fresh that it would not be\nproper to make the attempt. A disagreeable piece of intelligence occurred on the succeeding day. The carpenter, who had\nexamined the pumps, reported that they were all of them in a\nstate of decay. One of them was so rotten, that when hoisted\nup it dropped to pieces, and the rest were not in a much better\ncondition. The chief confidence, therefore, of our navigators\nwas now in the soundness of the ship, and it was a happy circumstance that she did not admit more than one inch of water\nin an hour.\nEarly on the 3rd of August another unsuccessful'attempt was\nmade to warp the vessel out of the harbour : but in the morn-\n COOK'S VOYAGES.\ning of the next day the efforts of our voyagers were more prosperous, and the Endeavour got once more under sail with\na light air from the land, which soon died away, and was\nfollowed by sea breezes from south-east by south. With these\nbreezes the ship stood off to sea, east by north, having the\npinnace ahead, which was ordered to keep sounding without\nintermission. A little before noon the lieutenant anchored in\nfifteen fathom water, with a sandy bottom; the reason of which\nwas, that he did not think it safe to run in among the shoals till,\nby taking a view of them from the masthead at low water, he\nmight be able to form some judgment which way it would be\nproper for him to steer. This was a matter of nice and arduous\ndetermination. As yet Mr. Cook was in doubt whether he\nshould beat back to the southward, round all the shoals, or\nseek a passage to the eastward or the northward: nor was it\npossible to say whether each of these courses might not be\nattended with equal difficulty and danger.\nThe impartiality and humanity of Lieutenant Cook's conduct\nin the distribution of provisions ought not to pass unnoticed.\nWhatever turtle or other fish were caught, they were always\nequally divided among the whole ship's crew, the meanest person on board having the same share with the lieutenant himself.\nHe hath justly observed that this is a rule which every commander will find it his interest to follow in any voyage of a\nsimilar nature.\nGreat difficulties occurred in the navigation from the Endeavour river. On the 5th of August, the lieutenant had not kept\nhis course long before shoals were discovered in every quarter,\nwhich obliged him as night approached to come to an anchor.\nIn the morning of the 6th there was so strong a gale that our\nvoyagers were prevented from weighing. When it was low\nwater, Mr. Cook, with several of his officers, kept a look-out at\nthe masthead to see if any passage could be discovered between\nthe shoals. Nothing, however, was in view excepting breakers,\nwhich extended from the south round by the east as far as to\nthe north-west, and reached out to sea beyond the sight of any\nof the gentlemen. It did not appear that \"these breakers were\ncaused by one continual shoal, but by several, which lay de-\n COOK'S VOYAGES.\ntached from each other. On that which was farthest to the\neastward the sea broke very high, so that the lieutenant was induced to think that it was the outermost shoal. He was now\nconvinced that there was no passage to sea but through the\nlabyrinth formed by these shoals; and, at the same time, he\nwas wholly at a loss what course to steer when the weather\n\u2022should permit the vessel to sail. The master's opinion was\nthat our navigators should beat back the way they came ; but as\nthe wind blew strongly, and almost without intermission, from\nthat quarter, this would have been an endless labour : and yet,\nif a passage could not be found to the northward, there was no\nother alternative. Amidst these anxious deliberations the gale\nincreased, and continued with little remission till the morning\nof the ioth, when the weather becoming more moderate our\ncommander weighed and stood in for the land. He had now\ncome to a final determination of seeking a passage along the\nshore to the northward.\nIn pursuance of this resolution, the Endeavour proceeded in\nher course, and at noon came between the farthermost headland that lay in sight and three islands which were four or five\nleagues to the north of it out at sea. Here our navigators\nthought they saw a clear opening before them, and began to\nhope that they were once more out of danger. Of this hope,\nhowever, they were soon deprived; on which account, the lieutenant gave to the headland the name of Cape Flattery. After\nhe had steered some time along the shore, for what was believed\nto be the open channel, the petty officer at the masthead cried\naloud, that he saw land ahead, which extended quite round to\nthe three islands, and that between the ship and them there was\na large reef. Mr. Cook, upon this, ran up the masthead himself, and plainly discerned the reef, which was so far to the wind-.\nward, that it could not be weathered. As to the land which the\npetty officer had supposed to be the main, our commander was\nof opinion, that it was only a cluster of small islands. The master,\nand some others, who went up the masthead after the lieutenant,\nwere entirely of a different opinion. All of them were positive that\nthe land in sight did not consist of islands, but that it was a\npart of the main: and they rendered their report still more\n COOKS VOYAGES.\nio5\nalarming, by adding, that they saw breakers around them on every\nside. In a situation so critical and doubtful, Mr. Cook thought\nproper to come to an anchor, under a high point, which he\nimmediately ascended, that he might have a farther view of the\nsea and the country. The prospect he had from this place,\nwhich he called Point Look-out, clearly confirmed him in his\nformer opinion; the justness of which displayed one of the\nnumerous instances, wherein it was manifest, how much he exceeded the people about him in the sagacity of his judgment\nconcerning matters of navigation.\nThe lieutenant, being anxious to discover more distinctly the\nsituation of the shoals, and the channel between them, determined to visit the northernmost and largest of the three islands\nbefore mentioned; which, from its height, and its lying five\nleagues out to sea, was peculiarly adapted to his purpose.\nAccordingly, in company with Mr. Banks, whose fortitude and\ncuriosity stimulated him to take a share in every undertaking,\nhe set out in the pinnace, on the morning of the nth, upon\nthis expedition. He sent, at the same time, the master in the\nyawl, to sound between the low islands and the mainland.\nAbout one o'clock the gentlemen reached the place of their\ndestination, and immediately, with a mixture of hope and fear,\nproportioned to the importance of the business, and the uncertainty of the event, ascended the highest hill they could find.\nWhen the lieutenant took a survey of the prospect around him,\nhe discovered, on the outside of the islands, and at the distance\nof two or three leagues from them, a reef of rocks, upon which\nthe sea broke in a dreadful surf, and which extended farther\nthan his sight could reach. Hence, however, he collected, that\nthere was no shoals beyond them; and, as he perceived several\nbreaks or openings in the reef, and deep water between that\nand the islands, he entertained hopes of getting without the rocks.\nBut though he saw reason to indulge, in some degree, this\nexpectation, the haziness of the weather prevented him from\nobtaining that satisfactory intelligence which he ardently desired.\nHe determined, therefore, by staying all night upon the island,\nto try whether the next day would not afford him a more distinct\nand comprehensive prospect. Accordingly, the gentlemen took\n 106 COOK'S VOYAGES.\nup their lodging under the shelter of a bush, which grew upon\nthe beach. Not many hours were devoted by them to sleep;\nfor, at three in the morning, Mr. Cook mounted the hill a second\ntime, but had the mortification of finding the weather much\nmore hazy than it had been on the preceding day. He had\nearly sent the pinnace, with one of the mates, to sound between\nthe island and the reefs, and to examine what appeared to be a\nchannel through them. The mate, in consequence of its blowing\nhard, did not dare to venture into the channel, which he reported\nto be very narrow. Nevertheless, our commander, who judged,\nfrom the description of the place, that it had been seen to disadvantage, was not discouraged by this account.\nWhile the lieutenant was engaged in his survey, Mr. Banks,\nalways attentive to the great object of natural history, collected\nsome plants which he had never met with before. No animals\nwere perceived upon the place,.excepting lizards, for which reason\nthe gentlemen gave it the name of Lizard Island. In their return\nto the ship, they landed on a low sandy island, that had trees\nupon it, and which abounded with an incredible number of birds,\nprincipally sea-fowl. Here they found the nest of an eagle, and\nthe nest of some other bird, of what species they could not distinguish ; but it must certainly be one of the largest kinds that\nexist. This was apparent from the enormous size of the nest,\nwhich was built with sticks upon the ground, and was no less\nthan six and twenty feet in circumference, and two feet eight\ninches in height. The spot which the gentlemen were now upon\nthey called Eagle Island.\nWhen Lieutenant Cook got on board, he entered into a very\nserious deliberation concerning the course he should pursue.\nAfter considering what he had seen himself and the master's report, he was of opinion, that by keeping in with the mainland,\nhe should run the risk of being locked in by the great reef, and\nof being compelled at last to return, back in search of another\npassage. By the delay that would hence be occasioned, our\nnavigators would almost certainly be prevented from getting\nin time to the East Indies, which was a matter of the utmost\nimportance, and indeed of absolute necessity; for they had now\nnot much more than three months' provision on board, at short\n COOK'S VOYAGES.\nallowance. The judgment the lieutenant had formed, together\nwith the facts and appearances on which it was grounded, he\nstated to his officers, by whom it was unanimously agreed, that\nthe best thing they could do would be to quit the coast entirely,\ntill they could approach it again with less danger.\nIn pursuance of this resolution, the Endeavour, early in the\nmorning of the 13th, got under sail, and successfully passed\nthrough one of the channels or openings in the outer reef,\nwhich Mr. Cook had seen from the island. When the ship had\ngotten without the breakers, there was no ground within one\nhundred and fifty fathom, and our people found a large sea rolling in upon them from the south-east. This was a certain sign\nthat neither land nor shoals were near them in that direction.\nSo happy a change in the situation of our voyagers was sensibly felt in every breast, and was visible in every countenance.\nThey had been little less than three months in a state that perpetually threatened them with destruction. Frequently had they\npassed their nights at anchor within hearing of the surge, that\nbroke over the shoals and rocks; and they knew, that, if by any\naccident the anchors should not hold against an almost continual\ntempest, they must in a few minutes inevitably perish. They\nhad sailed three hundred arid sixty leagues, without once, even\nfor a moment, having a man out of the chains heaving the lead.\nThis was a circumstance which perhaps never had happened to\nany other vessel. But now our navigators found themselves in\nan open sea with deep water ; and the joy they experienced was\nproportioned to their late danger, and their present security.\nNevertheless, the very waves, which proved by their swell that\nour people had no rocks or shoals to fear, convinced them, at the\nsame time, that they could not put a confidence in the ship equal\nto what they had done before she struck. So far were her leaks\nwidened by the blows she received from the waves, that she admitted no less than nine inches of water in an hour. If the\ncompany had not been lately in so much more imminent danger,\nthis fact, considering the state of the pumps, and the navigation\nwhich was still in view, would have been a matter of very serious\nconcern.\nThe passage or channel, through which the Endeavour passed\n COOK'S VOYAGES.\nIll\nJ\nlilt\n111 i\ni\ninto the open sea beyond the reef, lies in latitude 140 32' south.\nIt may always be known by the three high islands within it, to\nwhich, on account of the use they may be of in guiding the way\nof future voyagers, our commander gave the appellation of the\nIslands of Direction.\nIt was not a long time that our navigators enjoyed the satisfaction of being free from the alarm of danger. As they were\npursuing their course in the night of the 15th, they sounded frequently, but had no bottom with one hundred and forty fathom,\nnor any ground with the same length of line. Nevertheless, at\nfour in the morning of the 16th, they plainly heard the roaring\nof the surf, and at break of day saw it foaming to a vast height,\nat not more than the distance of a mile. The waves, which\nrolled in upon the reef, carried the vessel towards it with great\nrapidity; and at the same time, our people could reach no ground\nwith an anchor, and had not a breath of wind for the sail. In\na situation so dreadful there was no resource but in the boats ;\nand, most unhappily, the pinnace was under repair. By the\nhelp, however, of the long-boat and the yawl, which were sent\nahead to tow, the ship's head was got round to the northward,\na circumstance which might delay, if it could not prevent\ndestruction. This was not effected till six o'clock, and our\nvoyagers were not then a hundred yards from the rock, upon\nwhich the same billow that washed the side of the vessel broke\nto a tremendous height the very next time it rose. There was\nonly, therefore, a dreary valley between the English and destruction, a valley no wider than the base of one wave, while\nthe sea under them was unfathomable. The carpenter in the\nmeanwhile having hastily patched up the pinnace, she was\nhoisted out and sent ahead to tow in aid of the other boats.\nBut all these efforts would have been ineffectual if a light air of\nwind had not sprung up just at the crisis of our people's fate.\nIt was so light an air, that at any other time it would not have\nbeen observed : but it was sufficient to turn the scale in favour\nof our navigators ; and in conjunction with the assistance which\nwas afforded by the boats, it gave the ship a perceptible motion\nobliquely from the reef. The hopes of the company now revived : but in less than ten minutes a dead calm succeeded, and\n COOK'S VOYAGES.\nthe vessel was again driven towards the breakers, which were\nnot at the distance of two hundred yards. However, before the\nground was lost which had already been gained, the same light\nbreeze returned, and lasted ten minutes more. During this\ntime a small opening, about a quarter of a mile distant, was\ndiscovered in the reef; upon which Mr. Cook immediately sent\none of the mates to examine it, who reported that its breadth\nwas not more than the length of the ship, but that within it there\nwas smooth water. This discovery presented the prospect of a\npossibility of escape by pushing the vessel through the opening.\nAccordingly the attempt was made, but it failed of success ; for\nwhen our people, by the joint assistance of their boats and the\nbreeze, had reached the opening, they found that it had become\nhigh water; and to their great surprise they met the tide of ebb\nrunning out like a mill-stream. In direct contrariety to their\nexpectations, some advantage was gained by this event. Though\nit was impossible to go through the opening, the stream, which\nprevented the Endeavour from doing it, carried her out about\na quarter of a mile, and the boats were so much assisted in towing her by the tide of ebb, that at noon she had gained the distance of nearly two miles. However, there was yet too much\nreason to despair of deliverance. For even if the breeze, which\nhad now died away, had revived, our navigators were still embayed in the reef, and the tide of ebb being spent, the tide of\nflood, notwithstanding their utmost efforts, drove the ship back\nagain into her former perilous situation. Happily, about this\ntime, another opening was perceived, nearly a mile to the westward. Our commander immediately sent Mr. Hicks, the first\nlieutenant, to examine it; and in the meanwhile the Endeavour\nstruggled hard with the flood, sometimes gaining, and sometimes losing ground. During this severe service every man did\nhis duty with as much calmness and regularity as if no danger\nhad been near. At length Mr. Hicks returned with the intelligence that the opening, though narrow and hazardous, was\ncapable of being passed. The bare possibility of passing it was\n. encouragement sufficient to make the attempt; and indeed all\ndanger was less to be dreaded by our people than that of continuing in their present situation. A light breeze having fortu-\n no COOK'S VOYAGES.\nnately sprung up, this, in conjunction with the aid of the boats,\nand the very tide of flood that would otherwise have been their\ndestruction, enabled them to enter the opening, through which\nthey were hurried with amazing rapidity. Such was the force\nof the torrent by which they were carried along, that they were\nkept from driving against either side of the channel, which in\nbreadth was not more than a quarter of a mile. While they\nwere shooting this gulf their soundings were remarkably irregular, varying from thirty to seven fathom, and the ground at\nbottom was foul.\nAs soon as our navigators had gotten within the reef they\ncame to an anchor; and their joy was exceedingly great at\nhaving regained a situation which, three days before, they had\nquitted with the utmost pleasure and transport. . Rocks and\nshoals, which are always dangerous to the mariner, even when\nthey are previously known and marked, are peculiarly dangerous\nin seas which have never been navigated before; and in this\npart of the globe they are more perilous than in any other.\nHere they consist of reefs of coral rock, which rise like a wall\nalmost perpendicularly out of the deep, and are always overflowed at high water. Here, too, the enormous waves of the\nvast southern ocean, meeting with so abrupt a resistance, break\nwith inconceivable violence in a surf which cannot be produced\nby any rocks or storms in the northern hemisphere. A crazy\nship, shortness of provision, and a want of every necessary,\ngreatly increased the danger to our present voyagers of navigating in this ocean. Nevertheless, such is the ardour of the\nhuman mind, and so flattering is the distinction of a first discoverer, that Lieutenant Cook and his companions cheerfully\nencountered every peril, and submitted to every inconvenience.\nThey chose rather to incur the charge of imprudence and\ntemerity, than to leave a country unexplored which they had\ndiscovered, or to afford the least colour for its being said that\nthey were deficient in perseverance and fortitude. It scarcely\nneeds to be added, that it was the high and magnanimous\nspirit of our commander in particular which inspired his people\nwith so much resolution and vigour.\nThe lieutenant, having now gotten within the reef, determined\n COOK'S VOYAGES.\nwhatever might be the consequence, to keep the mainland on\nboard in his future route to the northward. His reason for this\ndetermination was, that if he had gone without the reef again\nhe might have been carried by it so far from the coast, as to\nprevent his being able to ascertain whether this country did or\ndid not join to New Guinea; a question which he had fixed\nupon resolving from the first moment that he had come within\nsight of land. To the opening through which the Endeavour\nhad passed, our commander, with a proper sense of gratitude to\nthe Supreme Being, gave the name of Providential Channel.\nIn the morning of the 17th, the boats had been sent out to see\nwhat refreshments could be procured, and returned in the afternoon with two hundred and forty pounds of the meat of shellfish, chiefly of cockles. Some of the cockles were as much as\ntwo men could move, and contained twenty pounds of good\nmeat. Mr. Banks, who had gone out in his little boat, accompanied by Dr. Solander, brought back a variety of curious shells\nand many species of corals.\nIn the prosecution of the voyage, our people, on the 19th,\nwere encompassed on every side with rocks and shoals ; but, as\nthey had lately been exposed to much greater danger, and these\nobjects were now become familiar, they began to regard them\ncomparatively with little concern. On the 21st, there being\ntwo points in view between which our navigators could see no\nland, they conceived hopes of having at last found a passage\ninto the Indian Sea. Mr. Cook, however, that he might be able\nto determine the matter with greater certainty, resolved to land \\\nupon an island which lies at the south-east point of the passage.\nAccordingly he went into the boat with a party of men, accompanied by Mr. Banks and Dr. Solander. As they were getting\nto shore, some of the natives seemed inclined to oppose their\nlanding, but soon walked leisurely away. The gentlemen immediately climbed the highest hill, from which no land could\nbe seen between the south-west and west-south-west; so that\nthe lieutenant had not the least doubt of finding a channel\nthrough which he could pass to New Guinea. As he was now\nabout to quit the coast of New Holland, which he had traced\nfrom latitude thirty-eight to this place, and which he was cer-\n H2 COOK'S VOYAGES.\ntain no European had ever seen before, he once more hoisted\nEnglish colours. He had, indeed, already taken possession of\nseveral particular parts of the country. But he now took possession of the whole eastern coast, with all the bays, harbours,\nrivers, and islands situated upon it, from latitude 38\u00b0 to latitude\nio\u00b0 jjj south, in right of His Majesty King George the Third,\nand by the name of New South Wales. The party then fired\nthree volleys of small arms, which were answered by the same\nnumber from the ship. When the gentlemen had performed\nthis ceremony upon the island, which they called Possession\nIsland, they re-embarked in their boat, and, in consequence of\na rapid ebb tide, had a very difficult and tedious return to the\nvessel.\nOn the 23rd, the wind had come round to the south-west;\nand though it was but a gentle breeze, yet it was accompanied\nby a swell from the same quarter, which, in conjunction with\nother circumstances, confirmed Mr. Cook in his opinion, that\nhe had arrived to the northern extremity of New Holland, and\nthat he had now an open sea to the westward. These circumstances afforded him peculiar satisfaction, not only because the\ndangers and fatigues of the voyage were drawing to a conclusion,\nbut because it could no longer be doubted whether New Holland\nand New Guinea were two separate islands. The north-east\nentrance of the strait lies in the latitude of io\u00b0 39' south, and\nin the longitude of 218\u00b0 36' west; and the passage is formed by\nthe mainland, and by a congeries of islands, to the north-west,\ncalled by the lieutenant the Prince of Wales's Islands, and\nwhich may probably extend as far as to New Guinea. Their\ndifference is very great, both in height and circuit, and many\nseemed to be well covered with herbage and wood : nor was\nthere any doubt of their being inhabited. Our commander was\npersuaded, that among these islands as good passages might be\nfound, as that through which the vessel came, and the access to\nwhich might be less perilous. The determination of this matter\nhe would not have left to future navigators, if he had been less\nharassed by danger and fatigue, and had possessed a ship in\nbetter condition for the purpose. To the channel through which\nhe passed, he gave the name of Endeavour Straits.\n COOK'S VOYAGES.\nNew Holland, or, as the eastern part of it was called by Lieutenant Cook, New South Wales, is the largest country in the\nknown world, which does not bear the name of a continent. The\nlength of coast along which our people sailed, when reduced to\na straight line, was no less than twenty-seven degrees of latitude,\namounting nearly to two thousand miles. In fact, the square\nsurface of the island is much more than equal to the whole of\nEurope. We may observe, with regard to the natives, that\ntheir number bears no proportion to the extent of their territory.\nSo many as thirty of them had never been seen together but\nonce, and that was at Botany Bay. Even when they appeared\ndetermined to engage the English, they could not muster above\nfourteen or fifteen fighting men : and it was manifest, that their\nsheds and houses did not lie so close together, as to be capable\nof accommodating a larger party. Indeed our navigators saw\nonly the sea-coast on the eastern side; between which and the\nwestern shore there is an immense tract of land, that is wholly\nunexplored. But it is evident, from the totally uncultivated\nstate of the country which was seen by our people, that this immense tract must either be altogether desolate, or at least more\nthinly inhabited than the parts which were visited. Of traffic,\nthe natives had no idea, nor could any be communicated to\nthem. The things which were given them they received, but\ndid not appear to understand the signs' of the English requiring\na return. There was no reason to believe that they eat animal\nfood raw. As they have no vessel in which water can be boiled,\nthey either broil their meat upon the coals, or bake in a hole\nby the help of hot stones, agreeably to the custom of the inhabitants of the South Sea islands. Fire is produced by them\nwith great facility, and they spread it in a surprising manner.\nFor producing it, they take two pieces of soft wood, one of\nwhich is a stick about eight or nine inches long, while the other\npiece is flat. The stick they shape into an obtuse point at one\nend, and pressing it upon the flat wood, turn it nimbly by holding it between both their hands. In doing this, they often shift\ntheir hands up, and then move them down, with a view of increasing the pressure as much as possible. By this process they\nobtain fire in less than two minutes, and from the smallest spark\n COOK'S VOYAGES.\nthey carry it to any height or extent with great speed and dexterity.\nIt was not possible, considering the limited intercourse which\nour navigators had with the natives of New South Wales, that\nmuch could be learned with regard to their language. Nevertheless, as this is an object of no small curiosity to be learned,\nand is, indeed, of peculiar importance in searching into the origin\nof the various nations that have been discovered, Mr. Cook\nand his friends took some pains to collect such a specimen of\nit as might, in a certain degree, answer the purpose. Our commander did not quit the country without making such observations, relative to the currents and tides upon the coast, as, while\nthey increase the general knowledge of navigation, may be of\nservice to future voyagers. The irregularity of the tides is an\nobject worthy of notice.\nFrom the coast of New South Wales, the lieutenant steered,\non the 23rd of August, for the coast of New Guinea, and on the\n25 th, fell upon a dangerous shoal. The ship was in six fathom,\nbut scarcely two were found, upon sounding round her, at the\ndistance of half a cable's length. This shoal was of such an\nextent, reaching from the east round by the north and west to\nthe south-west, that there was no method for the vessel to get\n. clear of it, but by her going back the way in which she came.\nHere was another hair's breadth escape; for it was nearly high\nwater, and there ran a short cockling sea, which if the ship had\nstruck, must very soon have bulged her. So dangerous was her\nsituation, that, if her direction had been half a cable's length\nmore, either to the right or left, she must have struck, before the\nsignal for the shoal could have been made.\nIt had been Lieutenant Cook's intention to steer north-west\ntill he had made the south coast of New Guinea, and it was his\npurpose to touch upon it, if that could be found practicable.\nBut in consequence of the shoals he met with, he altered his\ncourse, in the hope of finding a clearer channel, and deeper\nwater. His hope was agreeably verified; for by noon, on the\n26th, the depth of water was gradually increased to seventeen\nfathom. On the 28th, our voyagers found the sea to be in many\nplaces covered with a brown scum, such as the sailors usually\n COOK'S VOYAGES.\n\"5\ncall spawn. When the lieutenant first saw it he was alarmed,\nfearing, that the ship was again among shoals ; but the depth of\nwater, upon sounding, was discovered to be equal to what it was\nin other places. The same appearance had been observed upon\nthe coasts of Brazil and New Holland, in which cases it was at\nno great distance from the shore. Mr. Banks and Dr. Solander\nexamined the scum, but could not determine what it was, any\nfarther than as they saw reason to suppose that it belonged to\nthe vegetable kingdom. The sailors, upon meeting with more\nof it, gave up the notion of its being spawn, and finding a new\nname for it, called it sea sawdust.\nAt daybreak, on the 3rd of September, our navigators came\nin sight of New Guinea, and stood in for it, with a fresh gale,\ntill nine o'clock, when they brought to, being in three fathom\nwater and within about three or four miles of land. Upon this\nthe pinnace was hoisted, and the lieutenant set off from the ship .\nwith the boat's crew, accompanied by Mr. Banks, Dr. Solander,\nand Mr. Banks's servants, being in all twelve persons well armed.\nAs soon as they came ashore, they discovered the prints of human\nfeet, wrhich could not long have been impressed upon the sand.\nConcluding, therefore, that the natives were at no great distance,\nand there being a thick wood which reached to within a hundred\nyards of the water, the gentlemen thought it necessary to proceed\nwith caution, lest their retreat to the boat should be cut off.\nWhen they had walked some way along the skirts of the wood,\nthey came to a grove of cocoa-nut trees, at the fruit of which\nthey looked very wishfully; but not thinking it safe to climb,\nthey were obliged to leave it without tasting a single nut. After\nthey had advanced about a quarter of a mile from the boat, three\nIndians rushed out of the wood with a hideous shout, and, as\nthey ran towards the English, the foremost threw something out\nof his hand, which flew on one side of him, and burned exactly\nlike gunpowder, though without making any report. The two\nother natives having at the same instant discharged their arrows,\nthe lieutenant and his party were under the necessity of firing,\nfirst with small shot, and a second time with ball. Upon this,\nthe three Indians ran away with great agility. As Mr. Cook had\nno disposition forcibly to invade this country, either to gratify\n COOK'S VOYAGES.\nII! II\nI\n11\nthe appetites or the curiosity of his people, and was convinced\nthat nothing was to be done upon friendly terms, he and his\ncompanions returned with all expedition towards their boat.\nWhen they were aboard, they rowed abreast of the natives, who\nhad come down to the shore in aid of their countrymen, and\nwhose number now amounted to between sixty and a hundred.\nTheir appearance was much the same as that of the New Hollanders ; they nearly resembled them in stature, and in having\ntheir hair short and cropped. Like them, also, they were absolutely naked; but the colour of their skin did not seem quite\nso dark, which, however, might be owing to their being less\ndirty. While the English gentlemen were viewing them, they .\nwere shouting defiance, and letting off their fires by four or five\nat a time. Our people could not imagine what these fires were,\nor what purposes they were intended to answer. Those who\ndischarged them had in their hands a short piece of stick, which\nthey swung sideways from them, and immediately there issued\nfire and smoke, exactly resembling those of a musket, and of as\nshort a duration. The men on board the ship, who observed\nthis surprising phenomenon, were so far deceived by it, as to\nbelieve that the Indians had fire-arms. To the persons in the\nboat, it had the appearance of the firing of volleys without a\nreport.\nThe place where this transaction happened lies in the latitude\nof 6\u00b0 15' south, and is about sixty-five leagues to the north-east\nof Port Saint Augustine, or Walche Caep, and is near what is\ncalled in the charts C. de la Colta de St. Bonaventura. In every\npart of the coast, the land is covered with a vast luxuriance of\nwood and herbage. The cocoa-nut, the bread-fruit, and the\nplantain-tree, flourish here in the highest perfection; besides\nwhich, the country abounds with most of the trees, shrubs, and\nplants, that are common to the South Sea islands, New Zealand,\nand New Holland.\nSoon after Mr. Cook and his party had returned to the ship,\nour voyagers made sail to the westward, the lieutenant having\nresolved to spend no more time upon this coast; a resolution\nwhich was greatly to the satisfaction of a very considerable\nmajority of his people. Some of the officers indeed were parti-\n COOK'S VOYAGES.\n117\ncularly urgent that a number of men might be sent ashore, to\ncut down cocoa-nut trees for the sake of their fruit. This, however, our commander absolutely refused, as equally unjust and\ncruel. It was morally certain, from the preceding behaviour of\nthe natives, that if their property had been invaded, they would\nhave made a vigorous effort to defend it; in which case, the lives\nof many of them must have been sacrificed ; and perhaps, too,\nseveral of the English would have fallen in the contest. The\nnecessity of a quarrel with the Indians would have been regretted\nby the lieutenant, even if he had been impelled to it by a want\nof the necessaries of life ; but to engage in it for the transient\ngratification that would arise from obtaining two or three hundred green cocoa-nuts, appeared in his view highly criminal.\nThe same calamity, at least with regard to the natives, would\nprobably have occurred, if he had sought for any other place on\nthe coast, to the northward and westward, where the ship might\nhave lain so near the shore, as to cover his people with the guns\nwhen they had landed. Besides, there was cause to believe,\nthat before such a place could have been found, our navigators\nwould have been carried so far to the westward, as to be obliged\nto go to Batavia, on the north side of Java. This, in Mr\nCook's opinion, would not have been so safe a passage, as that\nto the south of Java, through the straits of Sunda. Another\nreason for his making the best of his way to Batavia, was the\nleakiness of the vessel, which rendered it doubtful, whether it\nwould not be necessary to heave her down when she arrived at\nthat port. Our commander's resolution was farther confirmed\nby the consideration, that no discovery could be expected in\nseas which had already been navigated, and where the coasts\nhad been sufficiently described both by Spanish and Dutch geographers, and especially by the latter. The only merit claimed\nby the lieutenant, in this part of his voyage, was the having established it as a fact beyond all controversy, that New Holland\nand New Guinea are distinct countries.\nWithout staying, therefore, on the coast of New Guinea, the\nEndeavour, on the same day, directed her course to the westward,\nin pursuing which, Mr. Cook had an opportunity of rectifying\nthe errors of former navigators. Very early in the morning of\n n8 COOK'S VOYAGES.\nthe 6th of September, our voyagers passed a small island, which\nlay to the north-north-west; and at daybreak they discovered\nanother low island, extending from that quarter to north-northeast. Upon the last island, which appeared to be of considerable extent, the lieutenant would have landed to examine its\nproduce, if the wind had not blown so fresh, as to render his\ndesign impracticable. Unless these two islands belong to the\nArrou islands, they have no place in the charts ; and if they do\nbelong to the Arrou islands, they are laid down at too great a\ndistance from New Guinea. Some other land which was seen\nthis day ought, by its distance from New Guinea, to have been\npart of the Arrou islands; but if any dependence can be placed\non former charts, it lies a degree farther to the south.\nOn the 7th, when the ship was in latitude 90 30' south, and\nlongitude 2290 34' west, our people ought to have been in sight\nof the Weasel Isles, which, in the charts, are laid down at the\ndistance of twenty or twenty-five leagues from the coast of New\nHolland. But as our commander saw nothing of them, he concluded that they must have been placed erroneously. Nor will\nthis be deemed surprising, when it is considered, that not only\nthese islands, but the coast which bounds this sea, have been\nexplored at different times, and by different persons, who had\nnot ail the requisites for keeping accurate journals which are\nnow possessed; and whose various discoveries have been delineated upon charts by others, perhaps at the distance of more\nthan a century after such discoveries had been made.\nIn pursuing their course, our navigators passed the islands of\nTimor, Timor-lavet, Rotte, and Seman. While they were near\nthe two latter islands, they observed, about ten o'clock at night,\non the 16th of the month, a phenomenon in the heavens, which\nin many particulars resembled the Aurora Borealis, though in\nothers it was very different. It consisted of a dull reddish light,\nwhich reached about twenty degrees above the horizon; and\nthough its extent, at times, varied much, it never comprehended\nless than eight or ten points of the compass. Through, and out\nof the general appearance, there passed rays of light of a brighter\ncolour, which vanished, and were renewed, nearly in the same\nmanner as those of the Aurora Borealis, but entirely without the\nHe\n COOK'S VOYAGES.\n119\ntremulous or vibratory motion which is seen in that phenomenon.\nThe body of this light bore south-south-east from the ship, and\ncontinued, without any diminution of its brightness, till twelve\no'clock, and probably a longer time, as the gentlemen were prevented from observing it farther, hy their retiring to sleep.\nBy the 16th, Lieutenant Cook had gotten clear of all the\nislands which had then been- laid down in the maps as situated\nbetween Timor and Java, and did not expect to meet with any\nother in that quarter. But the next morning an island was seen\nbearing west-south-west, and at first he believed that he had made\na new discovery. As soon as our voyagers had come close in\nwith the north side of it, they had the pleasing prospect of houses\nand cocoa-nut trees, and of what still more agreeably surprised\nthem, numerous flocks of sheep. Many of the people on board\nwere at this time in a bad state of health, and no small number\nof them had been dissatisfied with the lieutenant for not having\ntouched at Timor. He readily embraced, therefore, the opportunity of landing at a place which appeared so well calculated to\nsupply the necessities of the company, and to remove both the\nsickness and the discontent which had spread among them.\nThis place proved to be the island of Savu, where a settlement\nhad lately been made by the Dutch.\nThe great design of our commander was to obtain provisions,\nwhich, after some difficulty, and some jealousy on the part of\nMr. Lange, the Dutch resident, were procured. These provisions\nwere nine buffaloes, six sheep, three hogs, thirty dozen of fowls,\nmany dozen of eggs, some cocoa-nuts, a few limes, a little garlic,\nand several hundred gallons of palm-syrup. In obtaining these\nrefreshments at a reasonable price, the English were not a little\nassisted by an old Indian, who appeared to be a person of considerable authority under the king of the country. The lieutenant\nand his friends were one day very hospitably entertained by\nthe king himself, though the royal etiquette did not permit his\nmajesty to partake of the banquet.\nSo little, in general, had the island of Savu been known, that\nMr. Cook had never seen a map or chart in which it is clearly\nor accurately laid down. The middle of it lies in about the\nlatitude of io\u00b0 35' south, and longitude 2370 30' west: and from\n COOK'S VOYAGES.\nthe ship it presented a prospect, than which nothing can be\nmore beautiful. This prospect, from the verdure and culture of\nthe country, from the hills, richly clothed, which rise in a gentle\nand regular ascent, and from the stateliness and beauty of the\ntrees, is delightful to a degree that can scarcely be conceived by\nthe most lively imagination. With regard to the productions\nand natives of the island, the account which our navigators were\nenabled to give them, and which is copious and entertaining,\nwas, in a great measure, derived from the information of Mr.\nLange.\nAn extraordinary relation is given of the morals of the people\nof this island, and which, if true, must fill every virtuous mind\nwith pleasure. Their characters and conduct are represented as\nirreproachable, even upon the principles of Christianity. Though\nno man is permitted to have more than one wife, an illicit commerce between the sexes is scarcely known among them. Instances of theft are very rare ; and so far are they from revenging\na supposed injury by murder, that when any difference arises\nbetween them, they immediately and implicitly refer it to the\ndetermination of their king. They will not so much as make it\nthe subject of private debate, lest they should hence be provoked\nto resentment and ill-will. Their delicacy and cleanliness are\nsuited to the purity of their morals. From the specimen which\nis given of the language of Savu, it appears to have some affinity\nwith that of the South Sea islands. Many of the words are exactly the same, and the terms of numbers are derived from the\nsame origin.\nOn the 21 st of September our navigators got under sail, and\nhaving pursued their voyage till the ist of October, on that day\nthey came within sight of the island of Java. During their\ncourse from Savu, Lieutenant Cook allowed twenty minutes\na-day for the westerly current, which he concluded must run\nstrong at this time, especially on the coast of Java; and, accordingly, he found that this allowance was exactly equivalent\nto the effect of the current upon the ship. Such was the sagacity of our commander's judgment in whatever related to navigation.\nOn the 2nd, two Dutch ships being seen to lie off Anger Point,\n COOK'S VOYAGES\nthe lieutenant sent Mr. Hicks on board one of them to inquire\nnews concerning England, from which our people had so long\nbeen absent Mr. Hicks brought back the agreeable intelligence that the Swallow, commanded by Captain Carteret, had\nbeen at Batavia two years before. In the morning of the 5 th,\na prow came alongside of the Endeavour with a Dutch officer,\nwho sent down to Mr. Cook a printed paper in English, duplicates of which he had in other languages. This paper was regularly signed, in the name of the governor and council of the\nIndies, by their secretary, and contained nine questions, very\nill expressed, two of which only the lieutenant thought proper\nto answer. These were what regarded the nation and name of\nhis vessel, and whither she was bound. On the 9th our voyagers\nstood in for Batavia road, where they found the Haicourt India-\nman from England, two English private traders, and a number of\nDutch ships. Immediately a boat came on board the Endeavour, and the officer who commanded having inquired who our\npeople were, and whence they came, instantly returned with\nsuch answers as were given him. In the mean time Mr. Cook\nsent a lieutenant ashore to acquaint the governor of his arrival,\nand to make an apology for not having saluted: a ceremony he\nhad judged better to omit, as he could only make use of three\nguns, excepting the swivels, which he was of opinion would not\nbe heard.\nIt being universally agreed that the ship could not safely proceed to Europe without an examination of her bottom, our commander determined to apply for leave to heave her down at\nBatavia: and for this purpose he drew up a request in writing,\nwhich, after he had waited first upon the governor-general and\nthen upon the council., was readily complied with, and he was\ntold that he should have everything he wanted.\nIn the evening of the 10th there was a dreadful storm of\nthunder, lightning, and rain, during which the mainmast of one\nof the Dutch East Indiamen was split, and carried away by the\ndeck, and the maintopmast and topgallant-mast were shivered\nto pieces. The stroke was probably directed by an iron spindle\nwhich was at the maintop-gallantmast head. As this ship lay\nvery near the Endeavour, she could scarcely have avoided\n 122 COOK'S VOYAGES.\nsharing the same fate had it not been for the conducting chain,\nwhich fortunately had been just gotten up, and which conveyed\nthe lightning over the side of the vessel. But though she escaped\nthe lightning, the explosion shook her like an earthquake; and\nthe chain, at the same time, appeared like a line of fire. Mr.\nCook has embraced this occasion of earnestly recommending\nsimilar chains to every ship ; and hath expressed his hope that\nall who read his narrative will be warned against having an iron\nspindle at the masthead.\nThe English gentlemen had taken up their lodging and boarding at an hotel, or kind of inn, kept by the order of government.\nHere they met with those impositions, in point of expense and\ntreatment, which are too common to admit of much surprise. It\nwas not long, however, that they submitted to ill usage. By a\nfarther acquaintance with the manner of dealing with their host,\nand by spirited remonstrances, they procured a better furnished\ntable. Mr. Banks, in a few days, hired a small house for himself and his party ; and as soon as he was settled in his new\nhabitation, sent for Tupia, who had hitherto continued on\nboard on account of sickness. When he quitted the ship, and\nafter he came into the boat, he was exceedingly lifeless and dejected ; but no sooner did he enter the town, than he appeared\nto be inspired with another soul. A scene so entirely new and\nextraordinary filled him with amazement. The houses, carriages,\nstreets, people, and a multiplicity of other objects, rushing upon\nhim at once, produced an effect similar to what is ascribed to\nenchantment. His boy, Tayeto, expressed his wonder and\ndelight in a still more rapturous manner. He danced along the\nstreets in a kind of ecstasy, examining every object with a restless and eager curiosity, which was excited and gratified\nevery moment. Tupia's attention was particularly excited by\nthe various dresses of the passing multitude; and when he was\ninformed that at Batavia every one wore the dress of his own\ncountry, he expressed his desire of appearing in the garb of\nOtaheite. Accordingly, South Sea cloth being sent for from the\nship, he equipped himself with great expedition and dexterity.\nLieutenant Cook imagined that at Batavia he should find it\neasy to take up. what money he might want for repairing and\n COOK'S VOYAGES.\nrefitting the Endeavour; but in this he was mistaken. No private\nperson could be found who had ability and inclination to furnish the sum which was necessary. In this exigency, the lieutenant had recourse, by a written request, to the governor, from\nwhom he obtained an order for being supplied out of the Dutch\ncompany's treasury.\nWhen our voyagers had been only nine days at Batavia, they\nbegan to feel the fatal effects of the climate and situation.\nTupia, after his first flow of spirits had subsided, grew every\nday worse and worse; and Tayeto was seized with an inflammation upon his lungs. Mr. Banks and Dr. Solander were attacked\nby fevers, and, in a little time, almost every person, both on\nboard and on shore, was sick. The distress of our people was\nindeed very great, and the prospect before them discouraging\nin the highest degree. Tupia, being desirous of breathing a\nfreer air than among the numerous houses that obstructed it\nashore, had a tent erected for him on Cooper's island, to which\nhe was accompanied by Mr. Banks, who attended this poor\nIndian with the greatest humanity, till he was rendered incapable of doing it by the violent increase of his own disorder.\nOn the 5th of November, Mr. Monkhouse, the surgeon of the\nship, a sensible, skilful man, whose loss was not a little aggravated by the situation of the English, fell the first sacrifice to\nthis fatal country. Tayeto died on the 9th, and Tupia, who\nloved him with the tenderness of a parent, sunk at once after\nthe loss of the boy, and survived him only a few days. The\ndisorders of Mr. Banks and Dr. Solander grew to such a height,\nthat the physician declared they had no chance of preserving\ntheir lives but by removing into the country. Accordingly a\nhouse was hired for them at the distance of about two miles\nfrom the town, where, in consequence of enjoying a purer air,\nand being better nursed by two Malayan women, whom they\nhad bought, they recovered by slow degrees. At length Lieutenant Cook was himself taken ill, and out of the whole ship's\ncompany not more than ten were able to do duty.\nIn the midst of these distresses, our commander was diligently\nand vigorously attentive to the repair of his vessel. When her\nbottom came to be examined, she was found to be in a worse\n 124\nCOOK'S VOYAGES.\ncondition than had been apprehended. Her false keel and main\nkeel were both of them greatly injured; a large quantity of the\nsheathing was torn off; and among several planks which were\nmuch damaged, two of them, and the half of a third, were so\nworn for the length of six feet, that they were not above the\neighth part of an inch in thickness; and here the worms had\nmade way quite into the timbers. In this state the Endeavour\nhad sailed many hundred leagues, in a quarter of the globe where\nnavigation is dangerous in the highest degree. It was happy for\nour voyagers, that they were ignorant of their perilous situation;\nfor it must have deeply affected them, to have known, that a considerable part of the bottom of the vessel was thinner than the\nsole of a shoe, and that all their lives depended upon so slight\nand fragile a barrier between them and the unfathomable ocean.\nThe repair of the Endeavour was carried on very much to\nMr. Cook's satisfaction. In justice to the Dutch officers and\nworkmen, he hath declared, that, in his opinion, there is not a\nmarine yard in the world, where a ship can be laid with more\nconvenience, safety, and despatch, or repaired with greater\ndiligence and skill. He was particularly pleased with the\nmanner of heaving down by two masts, and gives it a decided\npreference to the method which had hitherto been practised by\nthe English. The lieutenant was not one of those on whom\nthe bigotry could be charged of adhering to old customs, in\nopposition to the dictates of reason and experience.\nBy the 8th of December, the Endeavour was perfectly refitted.\nFrom that time to the 24th, our people were employed in completing her stock of water, provisions, and stores, in erecting\nsome new pumps, and in various other necessary operations.\nAll this business would have been effected much sooner, if it\nhad not been retarded by the general sickness of the men.\nIn the afternoon of the 24th, our commander took leave of\nthe governor of Batavia, and of several other gentlemen belonging to the place, with whom he had formed connections, and to\nwhom he had been greatly obliged for their civilities and\nassistance. In the meanwhile, an accident intervened, which\nmight have been attended with disagreeable effects. A seaman,\nwho had run away from one of the Dutch ships in the road,\n COOK'S VOYAGES\n\\ Dane, he should be delivered\nentered on board the Endeavour,\nas a subject of Holland, Mr. Cook,\nthat if the man appeared to be a Di\nbe delivered up. When, however,\nHicks, who commanded on board,\nseaman, alleging, that he was a sul\nin Ireland. In this conduct, Mr. Hicks acted in perfect conformity to the lieutenant's intention and directions. The\ncaptain of the Dutch vessel, in the next place, by a message\nfrom the governor-general, demanded the man as a subject of\nDenmark. To this Mr. Cook replied, that there must be some\nmistake in the general's message, since he would never demand\nof him a Danish seaman, whose only crime was that of preferring the English to the Dutch service. At the same time the\nlieutenant added, that to show the sincerity of his desire to\navoid disputes, if the man\nup as a courtesy; but that, if he a\nsubject, he should be kept at all ev\nwas brought from Mr. Hicks, confc\nthat the seaman in question was a\nmajesty. This letter Mr. Cook sent\nassurance to his excellency, that he\nman on any terms. A conduct so fi]\nthe desired effect, no more being hea\nIn the evening of the 25th, our cc\ntogether with Mr. Banks and the\nwho had resided constantly on shore\nconsiderably better, were fax from being perfectly recovered.\nA t this time, the sick persons in the ship amounted to forty, and\nthe rest of the company were in a very feeble condition. It was\nremarkable, that every individual had been ill excepting the sailr\nmaker, who was an old man between seventy and eighty years\nof age, and who was drunk every day during the residence of\nour people at Batavia. Three seamen and Mr. Green's servant\ndied, besides the surgeon, Tupia and Tayeto. Tupia did not\nentirely rail a sacrifice to the unwholesome, stagnant, and putrid\nair of the country. As he had been accustomed from his birth\nto subsist chiefly upon vegetable food, and particularly on ripe\n i\n1111\n126 COOK'S VOYAGES.\nfruit, he soon contracted the disorders which are incident to a\nsea life, and would probably have sunk under them before the\nvoyage of the English could have been completed, even if they\nhad not been obliged to go to Batavia to refit their vessel.\nOur navigators did not stay at this place without gaining an\nextensive acquaintance with the productions of the country, and\nthe manners and customs of the inhabitants. The information which was obtained on these heads, will be found to constitute a very valuable addition to what was heretofore known\nupon the subject.\nOn Thursday the 27th of December, the Endeavour stood\nout to sea; and on the 5th of January, 1771, she came to an\nanchor, under the south-east side of Prince's Island. The design\nof this was to obtain a recruit of wood and water, and to procure\nsome refreshments for the sick, many of whom had become much\nworse than they were when they left Batavia. As soon as the\nvessel was secured, the lieutenant, Mr. Banks, and Dr. Solander\nwent on shore, and were conducted by some Indians they met\nwith to a person who was represented to be the king of the\ncountry. After exchanging a few compliments with his majesty,\nthe gentlemen proceeded to business, but could not immediately\ncome to a settlement with him in respect to the price of turtle.\nThey were more successful in their search of a watering place,\nhaving found water conveniently situated, and which they had\nreason to believe would prove good. As they were going off,\nsome of the natives sold them three turtle, under a promise that\nthe king should not be informed of the transaction.\nOn the next day a traffic was established with the Indians,\nupon such terms as were offered by the English; so that by\nnight our people had plenty of turtle. The three which\nhad been purchased the evening before were in the meantime\ndressed for the ship's company, who, excepting on the preceding day, had not, for nearly the space of four months, been once\nserved with salt provisions. Mr. Banks, in the evening, paid his\nrespects to the king at his palace, which was situated in the\nmiddle of a rice field. His majesty was busily employed in\ndressing his own supper; but this did not prevent him from\nreceiving his visitant in a very gracious manner. During the\n COOK'S VOYAGES.\n127\nfollowing days the commerce with the natives for provisions\nwas coutinued; in the course of which they brought down to\nthe trading place, not only a quantity of turtle, but fowls, fish,\nmonkeys, small deer, and some vegetables.\nOn the evening of the nth, when Mr. Cook went on shore to\nsee how those of his people conducted their business, who were\nemployed in wooding and watering, he was informed that an axe\nhad been stolen. As it was a matter of consequence to prevent\nothers from being encouraged to commit thefts of the like kind,\nhe resolved not to pass over the offence, but to insist upon redress\nfrom the king. Accordingly, after some altercation, his majesty\npromised that the axe should be restored in the morning, and\nthe promise was faithfully performed.\nOn the 15th, our commander weighed, and stood out for sea.\nPrince's Island, where he lay about ten days, was formerly much\nfrequented by the India ships of many nations, and especially\nthose of England, but it had lately been forsaken, on account of\nthe supposed badness of its water. This supposition, however,\narose from a want of duly examining the brook by which the\nwater is supplied. It is, indeed, brackish, at the lower part of\nthe brook, but higher up it will be found excellent. The lieutenant, therefore, was clearly of opinion, that Prince's Island was\na more eligible place for ships to touch at, than either at North\nIsland, or New Bay; from neither of which places any considerable quantity of other refreshments can be procured.\nAs the Endeavour proceeded on her voyage to the Cape of\nGood Hope, the seeds of disease, which had been received at\nBatavia, appeared with the most threatening symptoms, and reduced our navigators to a very melancholy situation. The ship\nwas, in fact, nothing better than an hospital, in which those who\ncould go about were not sufficient for a due attendance upon those\nwho were sick. Lest the water which had been taken in at\nPrince's Island should have had any share in adding to the disorder of the men, the lieutenant ordered it to be purified with\nlime: and, as a farther remedy against infection, he directed all\nthe parts of the vessel between the decks to be washed with\nvinegar. The malady had taken too deep root to be speedily\neradicated. Mr. Banks was reduced so low by it, that for some\n 128 COOK'S VOYAGES.\ntime there was no hope of his life; and so fatal was the disease\nto many others, that almost every night a dead body was committed to the sea. There were buried, in the course of about six\nweeks, Mr. Sporing, a gentleman who was one of Mr. Banks's\nassistants; Mr. Parkinson, his natural history painter, Mr. Green,\nthe astronomer; the boatswain, the carpenter, and his mate; Mr.\nMonkhouse the midshipman, another midshipman, the old jolly\nsailmaker and his assistant, the ship's cook, the corporal of the\nmarines, two of the carpenter's crew, and nine seamen. In all,\nthe loss amounted to three and twenty persons, besides the seven\nwho died at Batavia. It is probable that these calamitous events,\nwhich could not fail of making a powerful impression on the\nmind of Lieutenant Cook, might give occasion to his turning his\nthoughts more zealously to those methods of preserving the\nhealth of seamen, which he afterward pursued with such remarkable success.\nOn Friday the 15th of March, the Endeavour arrived off the\nCape of Good Hope; and as soon as she was brought to an\nanchor, our commander waited upon the governor, from whom\nhe received assurances that he should be furnished with every\nsupply which the country could afford. His first care was to\nprovide a proper place for the sick, whose number was not small;\nand a house was speedily found, where it was agreed that they\nshould be lodged and boarded at the rate of two shillings a day\nfor each person.\nThe run from Java Head to the Cape of Good Hope did not\nfurnish many subjects of remark, that could be of any great use\nto future voyagers. Such observations, however, as occurred to\nhim, the lieutenant has been careful to record, not being willing\nto omit the least circumstance that may contribute to the safety\nand facility of navigation.\nThe lieutenant, having lain at the Cape to recover the sick,\nto procure stores, and to refit his vessel, till the 14th of April,\nthen stood out of the bay, and proceeded on his voyage homeward. In the morning of the 29th, he crossed his first meridian,\nhaving circumnavigated the globe in the direction from east to\nwest. The consequence of which was, that he lost a day, an\nallowance for which had been made at Batavia. -On the 1st of\n COOK'S VOYAGES.\nMay he arrived at St. Helena, where he staid till the 4th to\nrefresh; during which time Mr. Banks employed himself in making the complete circuit of the island, and in visiting the places\nmost worthy of observation.\nThe manner in which slaves are described as being treated in\nthis island, must be mentioned with indignation. According to\nour commander's representation, while every kind of labour is\nperformed by them, they are not furnished either with horses or\nwith any of the various machines which art has invented to\nfacilitate their task. Carts might conveniently be used in some\nparts, and where the ground is too steep for them, wheelbarrows\nmight be employed to great advantage; and yet there is not a\nwheelbarrow in the whole island. Though everything which is\nconveyed from place to place is done by slaves alone, they have\nnot the simple convenience of a porter's knot, but carry their\nburden upon their heads. They appeared to be a miserable race,\nworn out by the united operation of excessive labour and ill-\nusage ; and Mr. Cook was sorry to observe, and to say, that instances of wanton cruelty were much more frequent among his\ncountrymen at St. Helena, than among the Dutch, who are\ngenerally reproached with want of humanity, both at Batavia and\nthe Cape of Good Hope. It is impossible for a feeling mind to\navoid being concerned that such an account should be given of\nthe conduct of any who are entitled to the name of Britons.\nThe lieutenant's reproof, if just, hath, it may be hoped, long before this reached the place, and produced some good effect.1\nIf slavery, that disgrace to religion, to humanity, and, I will add,\nto sound policy, must still be continued, everything ought to be\ndone which can tend to soften its horrors.\nWhen our commander departed from St. Helena, on the 4th,\nit was in company with the Portland man-of-war, and twelve\n1 Near the conclusion of Captain Cook's second voyage there is the following short note:\u2014m In the account given of St. Helena, in the narrative\nof my former voyage, I find some mistakes. Its inhabitants are far from\nexercising a wanton cruelty over their slaves ; and they have had wheel-\ncarriages and porters' knots for many years.\" This note I insert with\npleasure. Nevertheless I cannot think that the lieutenant could have given\nso strong a representation of things, if at the time in which it was written it\nhad been wholly without foundation.\nK\n m\nCOOK'S VOYAGES.\nIndiamen. With this fleet he continued to sail till the ioth,\nwhen, perceiving that the Endeavour proceeded much more\nheavily than any of the other vessels, and that she was not likely\nto get home as soon as the rest, he made a signal to speak with\nthe Portland. Upon this Captain Elliot himself came on board,\nand Mr. Cook delivered to him the common log-books of his\nship, and the journals of some of the officers. The Endeavour,\nhowever, kept in company with the fleet till the morning of the\n23rd, at which time there was not a single vessel in sight.\nOn that day died Mr. Hicks, and in the evening his body was\ncommitted to the sea, with the usual ceremonies. Mr. Charles\nClerke, a young man extremely well qualified for the station, and\nwhose name will hereafter frequently occur, received an order\nfrom Mr. Cook to act as lieutenant in Mr. Hicks's room.\nThe rigging and sails of the ship were now become so bad,\nthat something was continually giving way. Nevertheless, our\ncommander pursued his course in safety; and on the ioth of\nJune, land, which proved to be the Lizard, was discovered by\nNicholas Young, the boy who had first seen New Zealand. On\nthe nth, the lieutenant ran up the Channel. At six the next\nmorning he passed Beachy Head; and in the afternoon of the\nsame day, he came to an anchor in the Downs, and went on\nshore at Deal.\nThus ended Mr. Cook's first voyage round the world, in which\nhe had gone through so many dangers, explored so many countries, and exhibited the strongest proofs of his possessing an\neminently sagacious and active mind; a mind that was equal to\nevery perilous enterprise, and to the boldest and most successful\nefforts of navigation and discovery.\n [HE manner in which Lieutenant Cook had performed his circumnavigation of the globe justly\nentitled him to the protection of government and\nthe favour of his sovereign. Accordingly, he was\npromoted to be a commander in his majesty's\nnavy, by commission bearing date on the 29th of August, 1771.\nMr. Cook, on this occasion, from a certain consciousness of his\nown merit, wished to have been appointed a post-captain. But\nthe Earl of Sandwich, who was now at the head of the Admiralty board, though he had the greatest regard for our navigator,\ncould not concede to his request, because a compliance with it\nwould have been inconsistent with the order of the naval service. The difference was in point of rank only, and not of advantage. A commander has the same pay as a post-captain,\nand his authority is the same when he is in actual employment.\nThe distinction is a necessary step in the progress to the higher\nhonours of the profession.\nIt cannot be doubted, but that the president and council of\nthe Royal Society were highly satisfied with the manner in which\nthe transit of Venus had been observed. The papers of Mr.\nCook and Mr. Green, relative to this subject, were put into the\nhands of the astronomer royal, to be by him digested, and that\nhe might deduce from them the important consequences to\nscience which resulted from the observation. This was done\nby him with an accuracy and ability becoming his high know-\n 132\nCOOK'S VOYAGES.\nledge and character. On the 21st of May, 1772, Captain Cook\ncommunicated to the Royal Society, in a letter addressed to\nDr. Maskelyne, an | Account of the flowing of the Tides in the\nSouth Sea, as observed on board his Majesty's Bark, the Endeavour.\"\nThe reputation our navigator had acquired by his late voyage\nwas deservedly great; and the desire of the public, to be acquainted with the new scenes and new objects which were now\nbrought to light, was ardently excited. It is not surprising, therefore, that different attempts were made to satisfy the general\ncuriosity. There soon appeared a publication, entitled, \"A\nJournal of a Voyage round the World.\" This was the production of some person who had been upon the expedition; and\nthough his account was dry and imperfect, it served, in a certain\ndegree, to relieve the eagerness of inquiry. The journal of\nSidney Parkinson, draftsman to Sir Joseph Banks, to whom it\nbelonged by ample purchase, was likewise printed, from a copy\nsurreptitiously obtained; but an injunction from the Court of\nChancery for some time prevented its appearance. This work,\nthough dishonestly given to the world, was recommended by\nplates. But it was Dr. Hawkesworth's account of Lieutenant\nCook's voyage which completely gratified the public curiosity.\nThis account, which was written by authority, was drawn up\nfrom the journal of the lieutenant, and the papers of Sir Joseph\nBanks; and, besides the merit of the composition, derived an\nextraordinary advantage from the number and excellence of its\ncharts and engravings, which were furnished at the expense of\ngovernment. The large price given by the booksellers for this\nwork, and the avidity with which it was read, displayed, in the\nstrongest light, the anxiety of the nation to be fully informed in\neverything that belonged to the late navigation and discoveries.\nCaptain Cook, during his voyage, had sailed over the Pacific\nOcean in many of those latitudes, in which a southern continent\nhad been expected to lie. He had ascertained, that neither\nNew Zealand nor New Holland were parts of such a continent.\nBut the general question concerning its existence had not been\ndetermined by him, nor did he go out for that purpose, though\nsome of the reasons on which the notion of it had been adopted\n.1111\n COOK'S VOYAGES.\n*33\nwere dispelled in the course of his navigation. It is well known\nhow fondly the idea of a Terra Australia incognita had for nearly\ntwo centuries been entertained. Many plausible philosophical\narguments have been urged in its support, and many facts alleged\nin its favour. The writer of this narrative fully remembers how\nmuch his imagination was captivated, in the more early part of\nhis life, with the hypothesis of a southern continent He has\noften dwelt upon it with rapture, and been highly delighted with\nthe authors who contended for its existence, and displayed the\nmighty consequences which would result from its being discovered- Though his knowledge was infinitely exceeded by\nthat of some able men who paid a particular attention to the\nsubject, he did not come behind them in the sanguineness of\nhis hopes and expectation. Everything, however, which relates\nto science must be separated from fancy, and brought to the\ntest of experiment: and here was an experiment richly deserving to be tried- The object, indeed, was of peculiar magnitude,\nand worthy to be pursued by a great prince, and a great nation.\nof the most important scientific designs. A regard to matters\ntofore been too much neglected even by some of the best of our\nprinces. Our present sovereign had already distinguished his\nreign by his patronage of science and literature; but the beginnings which had hitherto been made were only the pledges of\nfuture munificence. With respect to the object now in view,\nthe gracious dispositions of his majesty were ardently seconded\nby the noble lord who had been placed at the head of the board\nof admiralty. The Earl of Sandwich was possessed of a mind,\nenlarged views and schemes with regard to navigation and discovery. Accordingly, it was by his particular recommendation\nthat a resolution was formed for the appointment of an expedition, finally to determine the question concerning the\nexistence of a southern continent. Quiros seems to have been\nthe first person, who had any idea that such a continent existed,\nand he was the first that was sent out for the sole purpose of\nascertaining the fact. He did not succeed in the attempt: and\n 134\nCOOK'S VOYAGES.\nthe attempts of various navigators down to the present century,\nwere equally unsuccessful.\nWhen the design of accomplishing this great object was\nresolved upon, it did not admit of any hesitation by whom\nit was to be carried into execution. No person was esteemed\nequally qualified with Captain Cook, for conducting an enterprise, the view of which was to give the utmost possible extent\nto the geography of the globe, and the knowledge of navigation. For the greater advantage of the undertaking, it was\ndetermined that two ships should be employed; and much\nattention was paid to the choice of them, and to their equipment for the service. After mature deliberation by the navy\nboard, during which particular regard was had to the captain's\nwisdom and experience, it was agreed, that no vessels were so\nproper for discoveries in distant unknown parts, as those which\nwere constructed like the Endeavour. This opinion concurring\nwith that of the Earl of Sandwich, the admiralty came to a resolution that two ships should be provided of a similar construction. Accordingly, two vessels, both of which had been built\nat Whitby, by the same person who built the Endeavour, were\npurchased of Captain William Hammond, of Hull. They were\nabout fourteen or sixteen months old at the time when they\nwere bought, and, in Captain Cook's judgment, were as well\nadapted to the intended service as if they had been expressly\nconstructed for that purpose. The largest of the two, which\nconsisted of four hundred and sixty-two tons burden, was named\nthe Resolution. To the other, which was three hundred and\nthirty-six tons burden, was given the name of the Adventure.\nOn the 28th of November, 1771, Captain Cook was appointed\nto the command of the former; and, about the same time, Mr.\nTobias Furneaux was promoted to the command of the latter.\nThe complement of the Resolution, including officers and men,\nwas fixed at a hundred and twelve persons; and that of the Adventure, at eighty-one. In the equipment of these ships, every\ncircumstance was attended to that could contribute to the comfort and success of the voyage. They were fitted in the most\ncomplete manner, and supplied with every extraordinary article\nwhich was suggested to be necessary or useful. Lord Sandwich,\n COOK'S VOYAGES.\nwhose zeal was indefatigable upon this occasion, visited the\nvessels from time to time, to be assured that the whole equipment\nwas agreeable to his wishes, and to the satisfaction of those\nwho were to engage in the expedition. Nor were the navy and\nvictualling boards wanting in procuring for the ships the very\nbest of stores and provisions, with some alterations in the\nspecies of them, that were adapted to the nature of the enterprise : besides which, there was an ample supply of antiscorbutic\narticles, such as malt, sour krout, salted cabbage, portable broth,\nsaloup, mustard, marmalade of carrots, and inspissated juice of\nwort and beer.\nNo less attention was paid to the cause of science in general.\nThe admiralty engaged Mr. William Hodges, an excellent landscape painter, to embark in the voyage, in order to make\ndrawings and paintings of such objects, as could not so well be\ncomprehended from written descriptions. Mr. John Reinhold\nForster and his son were fixed upon to explore and collect the\nnatural history of the countries which might be visited, and an\nample sum was granted by parliament for the purpose. That\nnothing might be wanting to accomplish the scientific views of\nthe expedition, the board of longitude agreed with Mr. William\nWales and Mr. William Bayley, to make astronomical observations. Mr. Wales was stationed in the Resolution, and Mr.\nBayley in the Adventure. By the same board they were furnished with the best of instruments, and particularly with four\ntime-pieces, three constructed by .Arnold, and one by Mr. Kendal, on Mr. Harrison's principles.\nThough Captain Cook had been appointed to the command\nof the Resolution on the 28th of November, 1771, such were\nthe preparations necessary for so long and irhportant a voyage,\nand the impediments which occasionally and unavoidably occurred, that the ship did not sail from Deptford till the 9th of\nApril following, nor did she leave Long Reach till the ioth of\nMay. In plying down the river it was found necessary to put\ninto Sheerness, in order to make some alterations in her upper\nworks. These the officers of the yard were directed immediately\nto take in hand; and Lord Sandwich and Sir Hugh Palliser\ncame down to see them executed in the most effectual manner.\n \u00a7\n136\nCOOK'S VOYAGES.\nIll \u2022\nThe ship being again completed for sea by the 22nd of June,\nCaptain Cook on that day sailed from Sheerness, and on the 3rd\nof July joined the Adventure in Plymouth Sound. Lord Sandwich in his return from a visit to the dockyards, having met the\nResolution on the preceding evening, his lordship and Sir Hugh\nPalliser gave the last mark of their great attention to the object\nof the voyage by coming on board to assure themselves that\neverything was done which was agreeable to our commander's\nwishes, and that his vessel was equipped entirely to his satisfaction.\nAt Plymouth Captain Cook received his instructions; with\nregard to which, without entering into a minute detail of them,\nit is sufficient to say that he was sent out upon the most enlarged plan of discovery, that is known in the history of navigation. He was instructed not only to circumnavigate the\nwhole globe, but to circumnavigate it in high southern latitudes,\nmaking such traverses, from time to time, into every corner of\nthe Pacific Ocean, not before examined, as might finally and\neffectually resolve the much agitated question about the existence of a southern continent, in any part of the southern hemisphere, to which access could be had by the efforts of the\nboldest and most skilful navigators.\n CHAPTER IV.\nNARRATIVE OF CAPTAIN COOK'S SECOND VOYAGE ROUND THE\nWORLD.\nN the 13th of July, Captain Cook sailed from Plymouth, and on the 29th of the same month\nanchored in Funchiale Road in the island of\nMadeira. Having obtained a supply of water, wine,\nand other necessaries at that island, he left it on\nthe 1 st of August, and sailed to the southward. As he proceeded\nin his voyage, he made three puncheons of beer of the inspissated juice of malt; and the liquor produced was very brisk and\ndrinkable. The heat of the weather and the agitation of the\nship had hitherto withstood all the endeavours of our people\nto prevent this juice from being in a high state of fermentation.\nIf it could be kept from fermenting, it would be a most valuable\narticle at sea.\nThe captain having found that his stock of water would not\nlast to the Cape of Good Hope, without putting his men to a\nscanty allowance, resolved to stop at St. Jago, one of the Cape\nde Verd islands for a supply. At Port Praya in this island, he\nanchored on the ioth of August, and by the 14th had completed his water and procured some other refreshments, upon\nwhich he set sail and prosecuted his course. He embraced the\noccasion which his touching at St. Jago afforded him of giving\nsuch a delineation and description of Port Praya, and of the\nsupplies there to be obtained, as might be of service to future\nnavigators.\nOn the 20th of the month, the rain poured down upon our\n 138\nCOOK'S VOYAGES.\nvoyagers, not in drops but in streams; and the wind at the\nsame time being variable and rough, the people were obliged\nto attend so constantly upon the decks, that few of them escaped\nbeing completely soaked. This circumstance is mentioned to\nshow the method that was taken by Captain Cook to preserve\nhis men from the evil consequences of the wet to which they\nhad been exposed. He had everything to fear from the rain,\nwhich is a great promoter of sickness in hot climates. But to\nguard against this effect, he pursued some hints that had been\nsuggested to him by Sir Hugh Palliser and Captain Campbell,\nand took care that the ship should be aired and dried with fires,\nmade between the decks, and that the damp places of the vessel\nshould be smoked; beside which, the people were ordered to\nair their bedding, and to wash and dry their clothes, whenever\nthere was an opportunity. The result of these precautions was\nthat there was not one sick person on board the Resolution.\nCaptain Cook, on the 8th of September, crossed the line in\nthe longitude of S\u00b0 west, and proceeded without meeting anything remarkable till the nth of October, when at 6h. 24m. 12s.\nby Mr. Kendal's watch, the moon rose about four digits eclipsed;\nsoon after which the gentlemen prepared to observe the end\nof the eclipse. The observers were the captain himself, and\nMr. Forster, Mr. Wales, Mr. Pickersgill, Mr. Gilbert, and Mr.\nHarvey.\nOur commander had been informed before he left England,\nthat he sailed at an improper season of the year, and that he should\nmeet with much calm weather near and under the line. But\nthough such weather may happen in some years, it is not always,\nor even generally to be expected. So far was it from being the case\nwith Captain Cook, that he had a brisk south-west wind in those\nvery latitudes where the calms had been predicted : nor was he\nexposed to any of the tornadoes, which are so much spoken of\nby other navigators. On the 29th of the month, between eight\nand nine o'clock at night, when our voyagers were near the\nCape of Good Hope, the whole sea within the compass of their\nsight became at once as it were illuminated. The captain had\nbeen formerly convinced by Mr. Banks and Dr. Solander, that\nsuch appearances in the ocean were occasioned by insects.\n COOK'S VOYAGES.\n139\nMr. Forster, however, seemed disposed to adopt a different\nopinion. To determine the question, our commander ordered\nsome buckets of water to be drawn up from 'alongside the ship,\nwhich were found full of an innumerable quantity of small globular insects about the size of a common pin's head and quite transparent. Though no life was perceived in them, there could be\nno doubt of their being living animals when in their own proper\nelement, and Mr. Forster became now well satisfied that they\nwere the cause of the sea's illumination.\nOn the 30th the Resolution and Adventure anchored in\nTable Bay; soon after which Captain Cook went on shore and,\naccompanied by Captain Furneaux and the two Mr. Forsters,\nwaited on Baron Plettenberg, the governor of the Cape of Good\nHope, who received the gentlemen with great politeness, and\npromised them every assistance the place could afford. From\nhim our commander learned that two French ships from the\nMauritius, about eight months before had discovered land in\nthe latitude of 480 south, along which they sailed forty miles,\ntill they came to a bay, into which they were upon the point of\nentering, when they were driven off, and separated in a hard gale\nof wind. Previously to this misfortune they had lost some of\ntheir boats and people, that had been sent to sound the bay.\nCaptain Cook was also informed by Baron Plettenberg, that in\nthe month of March two other ships, from the island of Mauritius, had touched at the Cape in their way to the South Pacific\nOcean, where they were going to make discoveries under the\ncommand of M. Marion.\nFrom the healthy condition of the crews, both of the Resolution and Adventure, it was imagined by the captain that\nhis stay at the Cape would be very short. But the necessity of\nwaiting till the requisite provisions could be prepared and collected, kept him more than three weeks at this place; which\ntime was improved by him in ordering both the ships to be\ncaulked and painted, and in taking care that in every respect\ntheir condition should be as good as when they left England.\nOn the 22nd of November our commander sailed from the\nCape of Good Hope, and proceeded on his voyage in search of\na southern continent. Having gotten clear of the land he\n 140\nCOOK'S VOYAGES.\nII\n111\n1111 I\ndirected his course for Cape Circumcision; and, judging that\ncold weather would soon approach, he ordered slops to be\nserved to such of the people as were in want of them, and gave\nto each man the fear-nought jacket and trousers allowed by the\nadmiralty. On the 29th, the wind, which was west-north-west,\nincreased to a storm, that continued, with some few intervals\nof moderate weather, till the 6th of December. By this gale,\nwhich was attended with hail and rain, and which blew at times\nwith such violence that the ships could carry no sails, our\nvoyagers were driven far to the eastward of their intended course,\nand no hopes were left to the captain of reaching Cape Circumcision. A still greater misfortune was the loss of the principal\npart of the live stock on board, consisting of sheep, hogs, and\ngeese. At the same time the sudden transition from warm mild\nweather, to weather which was extremely cold and wet, was so\nseverely felt by our people, that it was necessary to make some\naddition to their allowance of spirits, by giving each of them a\ndram on particular occasions.\nOur navigators, on the ioth of December, began to meet\nwith islands of ice. One of these islands was so much concealed from them by the haziness of the weather, accompanied\nwith snow and sleet, that they were steering directly towards it,\nand did not see it till it was at a less distance than that of a\nmile. Captain Cook judged it to be about fifty feet high, and\nhalf a mile in circuit. It was flat at the top, and its sides rose\nin a perpendicular direction, against which the sea broke to a\ngreat height. The weather continuing to be hazy, the captain,\non account of the ice islands, was obliged to proceed with the\nutmost caution. Six of them were passed on the 12th, some\nof which were nearly two miles in circuit, and sixty feet high;\nnevertheless, such were the force and height of the waves, that\nthe sea broke quite over them. Hence was exhibited a view,\nthat for a few moments was pleasing to the eye; but the\npleasure was soon swallowed up in the horror which seized\nupon the mind, from the prospect of danger. For if a ship\nshould be so unfortunate as to get on the weather side of\none of these islands, she would be dashed to pieces in a\nmoment.\n COOK'S VOYAGES.\nThe vessels, on the 14th, were stopped by an immense field\nof low ice, to which no end could be seen, either to the east,\nwest, or south. In different parts of this field were islands or\nhills of ice, like those which our voyagers had found floating\nin the sea, and twenty of which had presented themselves to\nview the day before. Some of the people on board imagined\nthat they saw land over the ice, and Captain Cook himself at\nfirst entertained the same sentiment. But upon more narrowly\nvarious appearances\ns the\nexamining these ice hills, an\nmade when seen through the haze, he was induced to change\nhis opinion. On the 18th, though in the morning our navigators had been quite embayed, they were, notwithstanding, at\nlength enabled to get clear of the field of ice. They were,\nhowever, at the same time, carried in among the ice islands,\nwhich perpetually succeeded one another: which were almost\nequally dangerous; and the avoiding of which was a matter of\nthe greatest difficulty. But perilous as it is to sail in a thick\nfog^ among these floating rocks, as our commander properly\ncalled them, this is preferable to the being entangled with immense fields of ice under the same circumstances. In this\nlatter case the great danger to be apprehended is the getting\nfast in the ice, a situation which would be alarming in the\nhighest degree.\nIt had been a general!\nhath now been described i\nably to this supposition, <\nland was not far distant, a\nved opinion th;\nzd in bays andi\nto the east, and afterward to endeavour to get to the southward. If, in this attempt, he met with no land or other impediment, his design was to stretch behind the ice, and thus to\nbring the matter to a decision. The weather, at this time,\naffected the senses with a feeling of cold much greater than\nthat which was pointed out by the thermometer, so that the\nwhole crew complained. In order the better to enable them\nto sustain the severity of the cold, the captain directed the\n sleeves of their jackets to be lengthened with baize ; and had a\ncap made for each man of the same stuff, strengthened with\ncanvas. These precautions greatly contributed to their comfort and advantage. It is worthy of observation that, although\nthe weather was as sharp, on the 25th of December, as might\nhave been expected in the same month of the year in any part\nof England, this was the middle of summer with our navigators. Some of trie people now appearing to have symptoms of\nthe scurvy, fresh wort was given them every day, prepared\nunder the direction of the surgeons, from the malt which had\nbeen provided for the purpose.\nBy the 29th, it became sufficiently ascertained, from the\ncourse our commander had pursued, that the field of ice, along\nwhich the ships had sailed, did not join to any land, as had\nbeen conjectured. At this time Captain Cook came to a resolution, provided he met with no impediment, to run as far\nwest as the meridian of Cape Circumcision. While he was\nprosecuting this design a gale arose, on the 31st, which brought\nwith it such a sea as rendered it very dangerous for the vessels\nto remain among the ice, and the danger was increased by discovering an immense field to the north, which extended farther\nthan the eye could reach. As our voyagers were not above\ntwo or three miles from this field, and were surrounded by\nloose ice, there was no time to deliberate. They hauled to the\nsouth, and though they happily got clear, it was not till the\nships had received several hard knocks from the loose pieces,\nwhich were of the largest kind. On Friday, the 1st of January,\n1773, the gale abated; and on the next day, in the forenoon,\nour people had the felicity of enjoying the sight of the moon,\nthe face of which had not been seen by them but once since\nthey had departed from the Cape of Good Hope. Hence a\njudgment may be formed of the sort of weather they had been\nexposed to from the time of their leaving that place. The present opportunity was eagerly seized for making several observations of the sun and moon.\nCaptain Cook was now nearly in the same longitude which\nis assigned to Cape Circumcision, and about ninety-five leagues\nto the south of the latitude in which it is said to lie. At the\n COOK'S VOYAGES.\n143\nsame time the weather was so clear that land might have been\nseen at the distance of fourteen or fifteen leagues. He con- \u25a0\neluded it, therefore, to be very probable that what Bouvet took\nfor land was nothing but mountains of ice, surrounded by loose\nor field ice. Our present navigators had naturally been led\ninto a similar mistake. The conjecture that such ice as had\nlately been seen was joined to land, was a very plausible one,\nthough not founded on fact. Upon the whole, there was good\nreason to believe that no land was to be met with under this\nmeridian, between the latitude of fifty-five and fifty-nine, where\nsome had been supposed to exist.\nAmidst the obstructions Captain Cook was exposed to from\nthe ice islands which perpetually succeeded each other, he\nderived one advantage from them, and that was, a supply of\nfresh water. Though the melting and stowing away of the ice\ntakes up some time, and is, indeed, rather tedious, this method\nof watering is otherwise the most expeditious our commander\nhad ever known. The water produced was perfectly sweet and\nwell tasted. Upon the ice islands, penguins, albatrosses, and\nother birds were frequently seen. It had hitherto been the received opinion that such birds never go far from land, and that\nthe sight of them is a sure indication of its vicinity. That this\nopinion is not well founded, at least where ice islands exist,\nwas now evinced by multiplied experience.\nBy Sunday, the 17th of January, Captain Cook reached the\nlatitude of 670 15' south, when he could advance no farther.\nAt this time the ice was entirely closed to the south, in the\nwhole extent from east to west-south-west, without the least appearance of any opening. The captain, therefore, thought it\nno longer prudent to persevere in sailing southward, especially\nas the summer was already half spent, and there was little\nreason to hope that it would be found practicable to get round\nthe ice. Having taken this resolution, he determined to proceed directly in search of the land which had lately been discovered by the French, and as, in pursuing his purpose, the\nweather was clear at intervals, he spread the ships abreast four\nmiles from each other, in order the better to investigate anything that might lie in their way. On the 1st of February our\n 144\nCOOK'S VOYAGES.\nvoyagers were in the latitude of 480 30' south, and in longitude\n5 8\u00b0 7' east, nearly in the meridian of the island of St. Mauritius.\nThis was the situation in which the land said to have been discovered by the French was to be expected; but as no signs of\nit had appeared, our commander bore away to the east. Captain Furneaux, on the same day, informed Captain Cook that\nhe had just seen a large float of sea, or rock weed, and about it\nseveral of the birds called divers. These were certain signs of\nthe vicinity of land, though whether it lay to the east or west\ncould not possibly be known. Our commander, therefore,\nformed the design of proceeding in his present latitude four or\nfive degrees of longitude to the west of the meridian he was\nnow in, and then to pursue his researches eastward. The west\nand north-west winds, which had continued for some days, prevented him from carrying this purpose into execution. However, he was convinced, from the perpetual high sea he had\nlately met with, that there could be no great extent of land to\nthe west.\nWhile Captain Cook, on the next day, was steering eastward,\nCaptain Furneaux told him that he thought the land was to the\nnorth-west of them; as he had, at one time, observed the sea\nto be smooth when the wind blew in that direction. This\nobservation was by no means conformable to the remarks which\nhad been made by our commander himself. Nevertheless,\nsuch was his readiness to attend to every suggestion, that he\nresolved to clear up the point if the wind would admit of his\ngetting to the west in any reasonable time. The wind, by veering to the north, did admit of his pursuing the search; and the\nresult of it was, his conviction that if any land was near, it\ncould only be an island of no considerable extent.\nCaptain Cook and his philosophical friends, while they were\ntraversing this part of the southern ocean, paid particular\nattention to the variation of the compass, which they found to\nbe from 270 50' to 300 26' west. Probably the mean of the two\nextremes, viz. 290 4', was the nearest the truth, as it coincided\nwith the variation observed on board the Adventure. One unaccountable circumstance is worthy of notice, though it did not\nnow occur for the first time. It is, that when the sun was on\n COOK'S VOYAGES. 145\nthe starboard of the ship the variation was the least: and, when\non the larboard side, the greatest.\nOn the 8th, our commander, in consequence of no signals\nhaving been answered by the Adventure, had reason to apprehend that a separation had taken place. After waiting two\ndays, during which guns were kept discharging, and false fires\nwere burned in the night, the fact was confirmed: so that the\nResolution was obliged to proceed alone in her voyage. As\nshe pursued her course, penguins and other birds, from time to\ntime, appeared in great numbers: the meeting with which gave\nour navigators some hopes of finding land, and occasioned\nvarious speculations with regard to its situation. Experience,\nhowever, convinced them that no stress was to be laid on such\nhopes. They were so often deceived, that they could no longer\nlook upon any of the oceanic birds, which frequent high latitudes, as sure signs of the vicinity of land.\nIn the morning of the 17th, between midnight and three\nappearance beautiful. It was not perceived to have any particular direction. On the contrary, at various times, it was\nconspicuous in different parts of the heavens, and diffused its\nlight throughout the whole atmosphere.\nOn the 20th, our navigators imagined that they saw land to\nthe south-west Their conviction of its real existence was so\nstrong, that they had no doubt of the matter; and accordingly\nthey endeavoured to work up to it, in doing which the weather\nwas favourable to their purpose. However, what had been\ntaken for land proved only to be clouds, that in the evening\nentirely disappeared, and left a clear horizon, in which nothing\ncould be discerned but ice islands. At night the Aurora Aus-\ntralis was again seen, and the appearance it assumed was very\nbrilliant and luminous. It first discovered itself in the east,\nand in a short time spread over the whole heavens.\nL\n i46\nCOOKS VOYAGES.\nmm\nIII\nIn the night of the 23rd, when the ship was in latitude 6i\u00b0 52'\nsouth, and longitude 95\u00b0 2' east, the weather being exceedingly\nstormy, thick, and hazy, with sleet and snow, our voyagers were\non every side surrounded with danger. In such a situation, it\nwas natural for them to wish for daylight: but daylight, when\nit came, served only to increase their apprehensions, by exhibiting those huge mountains of ice to their view, which the\ndarkness had prevented them from seeing. These unfavourable\ncircumstances, at so advanced a season of the year, discouraged\nCaptain Cook from putting into execution a resolution he had\nformed, of once more crossing the antarctic circle. Accordingly,\nearly in the morning of the 24th, he stood to the north, with a\nvery hard gale, and a very high sea, which made great destruction among the ice islands. But so far was this incident from\nbeing of any advantage to our navigators, that it greatly increased the number of pieces they had to avoid.\" The large\npieces, which broke from the ice islands, were found to be much\nmore dangerous than the islands themselves. While the latter\nrose so high out of the water, that they could generally be seen,\nunless the weather was very thick and hazy, before our people\nnearly approached them, the others could not be discerned, in\nthe night, till they were under the ship's bows. These dangers,\nhowever, were now become so familiar to the captain and his\n\u2022company, that the apprehensions they caused were never of\nlong duration; and a compensation was, in some degree, made\nfor them, by the seasonable supplies of fresh water, which the\nice islands afforded, and by their very romantic appearance.\nThe foaming and dashing of the waves into the curious holes\nand caverns which were formed in many of them greatly\nheightened the scene; and the whole exhibited a view, that\nat once filled the mind with admiration and horror, and could\nonly be described by the hand of an able painter.\nIn sailing from the 25th to the 28th, the wind was accompanied with a large hollow sea, which rendered Captain Cook\ncertain, that no land, of any considerable extent, could lie\nwithin a hundred or a hundred and fifty leagues from east to\nsouth-west. Though this was still the summer season in that\npart of the world, and the weather was become somewhat\n COOK'S VOYAGES.\nH7\nwarmer than it had been before, yet such were the effects of the\ncold, that a sow having farrowed nine pigs in the morning, all\nof them, notwithstanding the utmost care to prevent it, were\nkilled before four o'clock in the afternoon. From the same\ncause, the captain himself and several of his people had their\nfingers and toes chilblained. For some days afterward, the cold\nconsiderably abated; but still it could not be said that there was\nsummer weather, according to our commander's ideas of summer\nin the northern hemisphere, as far as sixty degrees of latitude,\nwhich was nearly as far as he had then been.\nAs he proceeded on his voyage, from the 28th of February\nto the nth of March, he had ample reason to conclude, from\nthe swell of the sea and other circumstances, that there could\nbe no land to the south, but what must lie at a great distance.\nThe weather having been clear on the 13th and 14th, Mr.\nWales had an opportunity of getting some observations of the\nsun and moon; the results of which, reduced to noon, when\nthe latitude was 580 22' south, gave 1360 22' east longitude.\nMr. Kendal's and Mr. Arnold's watches gave each of them\n1340 42'; and this was the first and only time in which they\nhad pointed out the same longitude, since the ships had departed from England. The greatest difference, however, between them, since our voyagers had left the Cape, had not\nmuch exceeded two degrees.\nFrom the moderate, and what might almost be called pleasant\nweather, which had occurred for two or three days, Captain\nCook began to wish that he had been a few degrees of latitude\nfarther south; and he was even tempted to incline his course\nthat way. But he soon met with weather which convinced him\nthat he had proceeded full far enough; and that the time was\napproaching when these seas could not be navigated without\nenduring intense cold. As he advanced in his course, he became perfectly assured, from repeated proofs, that he had left\nno land behind him in the direction of west-south-west; and\nthat no land lay to the south on this side sixty degrees of\nlatitude. He came, therefore, to a resolution, on the 17th, to\nquit the high southern latitudes, and to proceed to New Zealand,\nwith a view of looking for the Adventure, and of refreshing his\n 1 I!!:\n148 COOK'S VOYAGES.\npeople. He had, also, some thoughts, and even a desire, of\nvisiting the east coast of Van Diemen's Land, in order to satisfy\nhimself whether it joined the coast of New South Wales. The\nwind, however, not permitting him to execute this part of his\ndesign, he shaped his course for New Zealand, in sight of which\nhe arrived on the 25th, and where he came to anchor on the\nday following, in Dusky Bay. He had now been a hundred\nand seventeen days at sea, during which time he had sailed\nthree thousand six hundred and sixty leagues without having\nonce come within sight of land.\nAfter so long a voyage, in a high southern latitude, it might\nreasonably have been expected, that many of Captain Cook's\npeople would be ill of the scurvy. This, however, was not the\ncase. So salutary were the effects of the sweet wort, and several\narticles of provision, and especially of the frequent airing and\nsweetening of the ship, that there was only one man on board\nwho could be said to be much afflicted with the disease; and\neven in that man, it was chiefly occasioned by a bad habit of\nbody, and a complication of other disorders.\nAs our commander did not like the place in which he had\nanchored, he sent Lieutenant Pickersgill over to the south-east\nside of the bay, in search of a better; and the lieutenant succeeded in finding a harbour that was in every respect desirable.\nIn the meanwhile, the fishing-boat was very successful; returning with fish sufficient for the whole crew's supper; and in.\nthe morning of the next day as many were caught as served\nfor dinner. Hence were derived certain hopes of being plentifully supplied with this article. Nor did the shores and woods\nappear more destitute of wild fowl; so that our people had the\nprospect of enjoying, with ease, what, in their situation, might\nbe called the luxuries of life. These agreeable circumstances\ndetermined Captain Cook to stay some time in the bay, in\norder to examine it thoroughly; as no one had ever landed\nbefore on any of the southern parts of New Zealand.\nOn the 27th, the ship entered Pickersgill Harbour; for so it\nwas called, from the name of the gentleman by whom it had\nfirst been discovered. Here wood, for fuel and other purposes,\nwas immediately at hand; and a fine stream of fresh water was\n COOK.\nVOYAGES\nM9\nthemse\nnot above a hundred yards from tl\nvoyagers, being thus advantageous!\nto prepare for their necessary occu|\nthe woods, in order to set up the as\nthe forge for the iron work, and\nmakers and coopers. They appli<\nbrewing of beer from the branches or leaves of a tree, \u25a0\ngreatly resembled the American black spruce. Captain\nwas persuaded, from the knowledge which he had of this\nand from the similarity it bore to the spruce, that, wit\naddition of inspissated juice of wort and molasses, it \\\nmake a very wholesome liquor, and supply the want of\ntables, of which the country was destitute. It appeared, t\nevent, that he was not mistaken in his judgment\nSeveral of the natives were seen on the 28th, who took\nnotice of the English, and were very shy of access: am\ncaptain did not choose to force an intercourse with them.\nhad been instructed, by former experience, that the best m\nof obtaining it was to leave the time and place to rhems\nWhile our commander continued in his present situatic\ntook every opportunity of examining the bay. As he wa\nsecuring his survey of it, on the 6th of April, his attentioi\ndirected to the north side, where he discovered a fine capa\ncove, in the bottom of which is a fresh-water river. On th(\nside are several beautiful cascades, and the shores are sosteq\nwater might be directly conveyed from them into the ship,\nteen ducks, besides other birds, having been shot in this pia\ngave it the name of Duck Cove. When he was returning i\nevening, he met with three of the natives, one man ant\nwomen, whose fears he soon dissipated, and whom he enj\nin a conversation, that was little understood on either side.\nyoungest of the women had a volubility of tongue that\nnot be exceeded; and she entertained Captain Cook, am\ngentlemen who accompanied him, with a dance.\nBy degrees, our commander obtained the goodwill and\nfidence of the Indians. His presents, however, were a\nreceived with much indifference, hatchets and spike-nai\ncepted. At a visit, on the 12th, from a family of the na\n ISO\nCOOK'S VOYAGES.\nthe captain, perceiving they approached the ship with great\ncaution, met them in a boat, which he quitted when he came\nnear them, and went into their canoe. After all, he could not\nprevail upon them to go on board the Resolution; but at length\nthey put on shore in a little creek, and seating themselves\nabreast of the English vessel, entered into familiar conversation\nwith several of the officers and seamen; in which they paid a\nmuch greater regard to some, whom they probably mistook for\nfemales, than to others. So well, indeed, were they now reconciled to our voyagers, that they took up their quarters nearly\nwithin the distance of a hundred yards from the ship's watering-\nplace. Captain Cook, in his interview with them, had caused\nthe bagpipes and fife to play, and the drum to beat. The two\nformer they heard with apparent insensibility; but the latter\nexcited in them a certain degree of attention.\nOn the 18th, a chief, with whom some connections had\nalready been formed, was induced, together with his daughter,\nto come on board the Resolution. Previously to his doing it,\nhe presented the captain with a piece of cloth and a green talk\nhatchet. He gave also a piece of cloth to Mr. Forster; and the\ngirl gave another to Mr. Hodges. Though this custom of\nmaking presents before any are received is common with the\nnatives of the South Sea isles, our commander had never till\nnow seen it practised in New Zealand. Another thing performed by the chief before he went on board was the taking\nof a small green branch in his hand, with which he struck the\nship's side several times, repeating a speech or prayer. This\nmanner, as it were, of making peace is likewise prevalent among\nall the nations of the South Seas. When the chief was carried\ninto the cabin, he viewed every part of it with some degree of\nsurprise; but it was not possible to fix his attention to any one\nobject for a single moment. The works of art appeared to him\nin the same light as those of nature, and were equally distant\nfrom his powers of comprehension. He 'and his daughter\nseemed to be the most struck with the number of the decks,\nand other parts of the ship.\nAs Captain Cook proceeded in examining Dusky Bay, he\noccasionally met with some few more of the natives, with re-\n COOKS VOYAGES. 151\ngard to whom he used every mode of conciliation. On the\n20th, the chief and his family, who had been more intimate\nwith our navigators than any of the rest of the Indians, went\naway, and never returned again. This was the more extraordinary, as in all his visits he had been gratified with presents.\nFrom different persons he had gotten nine or ten hatchets, and\nthree or four times that number of large spike-nails, besides\na variety of other articles. So far as these things might be\ndeemed riches in New Zealand, he was undoubtedly become\nby far the most wealthy man in the whole country.\nOne employment of our voyagers, while in Dusky Bay, consisted in seal hunting, an animal which was found serviceable\nfor three purposes. The skins were made use of for rigging,\nthe fat afforded oil for the lamps, and the flesh was eaten. On\nthe 24th, the captain, having five geese remaining of those he\nhad brought with him from the Cape of Good Hope, went and\nleft them at a place to which he gave the name of Goose Cove.\nThis place he fixed upon for two reasons: first, because there\nwere no inhabitants to disturb them; and, secondly, because\nhere was the greatest supply of proper food; so that he had no\ndoubt of their breeding, and hoped that in time they might\nspread over the whole country, to its eminent advantage.-\nSome days afterward, when everything belonging to the ship\nhad been removed from the shore, he set fire to the topwood\nin order to dry a piece of ground, which he dug up, and sowed\nwith several sorts of garden seeds. The soil, indeed, was not\nsuch as to promise much success to the planter; but it was the\nbest that could be discovered.\nThe 25th of April was the eighth fair day our people had\nsuccessively enjoyed; and there was reason to believe that\nsuch a circumstance was very uncommon in the place where\nthey now lay, and at that season of the year. This favourable\nweather afforded them the opportunity of more speedily completing their wood and water, and of putting the ship into a\ncondition for sea. On the evening of the 25th, it began to\nrain; and the weather was afterward extremely variable, being,\nat times, in a high degree wet, cold and stormy. Nothing,\nhowever, prevented Captain Cook from prosecuting, with his\n 152\nCOOK'S VOYAGES.\nusual sagacity and diligence, his search into every part of\nDusky Bay; and as there are few places in New Zealand where\nnecessary refreshments may be so plentifully obtained as in this\nbay, he hath taken care to give such a descripton of it, and of\nthe adjacent country, as may be of service to succeeding navigators. Although this country lies far remote from what-is\nnow the trading part of the world, yet, as he justly observes,\nwe can by no means tell what use future ages may derive from\nthe discoveries made in the present.\nThe various anchoring places are delineated on our corm\nmander's chart, and the most convenient of them he has particularly described. Not only about Dusky Bay, but through\nall the southern part of the western coast of Tavai-poenammo,\nthe country is exceedingly mountainous. A prospect more;\nrude and craggy is rarely to be met with; for, inland, there\nare only to be seen the summits of mountains of a tremendous\nheight, and consisting of rocks that are totally barren and\nnaked, excepting where they are covered with snow. But the\nland which borders on the sea-coast is thickly clothed with\nwood almost down to the water's edge; and this is the case\nwith regard to all the adjoining islands. The trees are of various kinds, and are fit for almost every possible use. Excepting in the river Thames, Captain Cook had not found finer\ntimber in all New Zealand; the most considerable species of\nwhich is the spruce tree; for that name he had given it from\nthe similarity of its foliage to the American spruce, though the\nwood is more ponderous, and bears a greater resemblance to\nthe pitch pine. Many of these trees are so large that they\nwould be able to furnish mainmasts for fifty-gun ships. Amidst\nthe variety of aromatic trees and shrubs which this part of\nNew Zealand produced, there was none which bore fruit fit to\nbe eaten. The country was not found so destitute of quadrupeds as was formerly imagined.\nAs Dusky Bay presented many advantages to our navigators, so it was attended with some disagreeable circumstances.\nThere were great numbers of small black sandflies, which were\ntroublesome to a degree that our commander had never experienced before. Another evil arose from the continual quantity\ntil\n COOKS VOYAGES. 153\nof rain that occurred in the bay. This might, indeed, in part,\nproceed from the season of the year: but it is probable that the\ncountry must at all times be subject to much wet weather, in\nconsequence of the vast height and vicinity of the mountains.\nIt was remarkable that the rain, though our people were perpetually exposed to it, was not productive of any evil consequences. On the contrary, such of the men as were sick and\ncomplaining when they entered the bay, recovered daily, and\nthe whole crew soon became strong and vigorous. So happy\na circumstance could only be attributed to the healthiness of\nthe place, and the fresh provisions it afforded : among which\nthe beer was a very material article.\nThe inhabitants of Dusky Bay are of the same race with the\nother natives of New Zealand, speak the same language, and\nadhere nearly to the same customs. Their mode of life appears\nto be a wandering one; and though they are few in number,\nno traces were remarked of their families being connected together in any close bonds of union or friendship.\nWhile the Resolution lay in the bay, Mr. Wales made a\nvariety of scientific observations relative to latitude and longitude, the variation of the compass, and the diversity of the\ntides.\nWhen Captain Cook left Dusky Bay he directed his course\nfor Queen Charlotte's Sound, where he expected to find the\nAdventure. This was on the 1 ith of May, and nothing remarkable occurred till the 17th, when the wind at once flattened\nto a calm, the sky became suddenly obscured by dark dense\nclouds, and there was-every prognostication of a tempest Soon\nafter six waterspouts were seen, tour of which rose and spent\nthemselves between the ship and the land; the fifth was at a\nconsiderable distance on the other side of the vessel: and the\nsixth, the progressive motion of which was not in a straight but\nin a crooked line, passed within fifty yards of the stem of the\nResolution, without producing any evil effect As the captain\nhad been informed that the firing of a gun would dissipate\nwaterspouts, he was sorry that he had not tried the experiment\nBut, though he was near enough and had a gun ready for the\npurpose, his mind was so deeply engaged in viewing these\n 154\nCOOK'S VOYAGES.\nIll\nIB I\nextraordinary meteors, that he forgot to give the necessary directions.\nOn the next day, the Resolution came within sight of Queen\nCharlotte's Sound, where Captain Cook had the satisfaction of\ndiscovering the Adventure; and both ships felt uncommon joy\nat thus meeting again after an absence of fourteen weeks. As\nthe events which happened to Captain Furneaux during the\nseparation of the two vessels, do not fall within the immediate\ndesign of the present narrative, it may be sufficient to observe\nthat he had an opportunity of examining with somewhat more\naccuracy than had hitherto been done, Van Diemen's Land;\nand his opinion was that there are no straits between this land\nand New Holland, but a very deep bay. He met, likewise,\nwith farther proofs that the natives of New Zealand are eaters\nof human flesh.\nThe morning after Captain Cook's arrival in Queen Charlotte's\nSound, he went himself at daybreak, to look for scurvy-grass,\ncelery, and other vegetables; and he had the good fortune to\nreturn with a boat-load in a very short space of time. Having\nfound that a sufficient quantity of these articles might be obtained\nfor the crews of both the ships, he gave orders that they should\nbe boiled with wheat and portable broth, every day for breakfast, and with peas and broth for dinner. Experience had\ntaught him that the vegetables now mentioned when thus\ndressed, are extremely beneficial to seamen, in removing the\nvarious scorbutic complaints to which they are subject.\nOur commander had entertained a desire of visiting Van Die-\nmen's Land, in order to inform himself whether it made a part\nof New Holland. But as this point had been in a great measure cleared up by Captain Furneaux, he came to a resolution\nto continue his researches to the east between the latitudes of\n410 and_46\u00b0, and he directed accordingly that the ships should\nbe gotten ready for putting to sea as soon as possible. On the\n20th he sent on shore the only ewe and ram that remained of\nthose which, with the intention of leaving them in this country,\nhe had brought from the Cape of Good Hope. Soon after he\nvisited several gardens, that by order of Captain Furneaux had\nbeen made and planted with various articles; all of which were\n|1|| I\n COOK'S VOYAGES.\n155\nin such a flourishing state that if duly attended to, they promised to be of great utility to the natives. The next day Captain Cook himself set some men to work to form a garden on\nLong Island, which he stocked with different seeds, and particularly with the roots of turnips, carrots, parsnips, and potatoes.\nThese were the vegetables that would be of the most real\nuse to the Indians, and of these it was easy to give them an\nidea by comparing them with such roots as they themselves\nknew. On the 22nd Captain Cook received the unpleasant\nintelligence that the ewe and ram, which with so much care and\ntrouble he had brought to this place, were both of them found\ndead. It was supposed that they had eaten some poisonous\nplant; and by this accident all the captain's hopes of stocking\nNew Zealand with a breed of sheep were instantly blasted.\nThe intercourse which our great navigator had with the inhabitants of the country, during this, his second visit to Queen\nCharlotte's Sound, was of a friendly nature. Two or three\nfamilies took up their abode near the ships, and employed themselves daily in fishing, and in supplying the English with the\nfruits of their labour. No small advantage hence accrued to\nour people, who were by no means such expert fishers as the\nnatives, nor were any of our methods of fishing equal to theirs.\nThus in almost every state of society particular arts of life are\ncarried to perfection; and there is something which the most\npolished nations may learn from the mos# barbarous.\nOn the 2nd of June, when the Resolution and Adventure\nwere almost ready to put to sea, Captain Cook sent on shore,\non the east side of the sound, two goats, a male and female;\nand Captain Furneaux left near Cannibal Cove a boar and two\nbreeding sows. The gentlemen had little doubt but that the\ncountry would in time be stocked with these animals, provided\nthey were not destroyed by the Indians before they became\nwild. Afterwards there would be no danger; and as the natives\nknew nothing of their being left behind, it was hoped that it\nmight be some time before they would be discovered.\nIt is remarkable that during Captain Cook's second visit to\nCharlotte Sound, he was not able to recollect the face of any\none person whom he had seen there three years before. Nor\n COOK'S VOYAGES.\ndid it once appear that even a single Indian had the least knowledge of our commander, or of any of our people who had been\nwith him in his last voyage. Hence he thought it highly probable\nthat the greatest part of the natives who inhabited this sound in\nthe beginning of the year 1770, had either since been driven out\nof it, or had removed of their own accord to some other situation.\nNot one-third of the inhabitants were there now that had been\nseen at that time. Their stronghold on the point of Motuara\nwas deserted, and in every part of the sound many forsaken\nhabitations were discovered. In the captain's opinion, there\nwas not any reason to believe that the place had ever been very\npopulous. From comparing the two voyages together, it may\nbe collected that the Indians of Eaheinomauwe are in somewhat of a more improved state of society than those of Tavai-\npoenammo.\nPart of the 4th of June was employed by Captain Cook in\nvisiting a chief and a whole tribe of the natives, consisting of\nbetween ninety and a hundred persons, including men, women,\nand children. After the captain had distributed some presents\namong these people, and shown to the chief the gardens which\nhad been made, he returned on board, and spent the remainder\nof the day in the celebration of his royal master's nativity. Captain Furneaux and all his officers were invited upon the occasion; and the seamen were enabled by a double allowance to\npartake of the generaLjoy.\nAs some might think it an extraordinary step in our commander to proceed in discoveries so far south as forty-six degrees of latitude, in the very depth of winter, he has recorded\nhis motives for this part of his conduct. Winter he acknowledges is by no means favourable for discoveries. Nevertheless,\nit appeared to him to be necessary that something should be\ndone in that season, in order to lessen the work in which he\nwas engaged; and lest he should not be able to finish the discovery of the southern part of the South Pacific Ocean in the\nensuing summer. Besides, if he should discover any land in\nhis route to the east, he would be ready to begin to explore it\nas soon as ever the season should be favourable. Independently of all these considerations, he had little to fear; having\n COOK'S VOYAGES.\n157\ntwo good ships well provided, and both the crews being healthy.\nWhere then could he better employ his time ? If he did nothing more, he was at least in hopes of being enabled to point\nout to posterity that these seas may be navigated, and that it is\npracticable to pursue discoveries even in the depth of winter.\nSuch was the ardour of our navigator for prosecuting the ends\nof his voyage in circumstances which would have induced most\nmen to act a more cautious part!\nDuring Captain Cook's stay in the sound, he had observed\nthat the second visit to this country had not mended the morals\nof the natives of either sex.\nOn the 7th of June Captain Cook put to sea from Queen\nCharlotte's Sound with the Adventure in company. I shall\nomit the nautical part of the route from New Zealand to Otaheite, which continued till the 15th of August; and shall only\nselect such circumstances as are more immediately suitable to\nthe design of the present narrative. It was found on the 29th\nof July, that the crew of the Adventure were in a sickly state.\nHer cook was dead, and about twenty of her best men were\nrendered incapable of duty by the scurvy and flux. At this\ntime no more than three men were on the sick list on board\nthe Resolution, and only one of these was attacked with the\nscurvy. Some others, however, began to discover the symptoms\nof it; and, accordingly, recourse was had to wort, marmalade\nof carrots, and the rob of lemons and oranges, with the usual\nsuccess.\nCaptain Cook could not account for the prevalence of the\nscurvy being so much greater in the Adventure than in the Resolution, unless it was owing to the crew of the former being\nmore scorbutic when they arrived in New Zealand than the crew\nof the latter, and to their eating few or no vegetables while they\n'lay in Queen Charlotte's Sound. This arose partly from their\nwant of knowing the right sorts, and partly from the dislike\nwhich seamen have to the introduction of a new diet. Their\naversion to any unusual change of food is so great, that it can only\nbe overcome by the steady and persevering example and authority of a commander. Many of Captain Cook's people, officers\nas well as common sailors, disliked the boiling of celery, scurvy-\n COOK'S VOYAGES.\ngrass, and other greens with peas and wheat: and by some the\nprovision thus prepared was refused to be eaten. But, as this\nhad no effect on the captain's conduct, their prejudice gradually subsided : they began to like their diet as much as the rest\nof their companions, and at length there was hardly a man in\nthe ship who did not attribute the freedom of the crew from\nthe scurvy to the beer and vegetables which had been made use\nof at New Zealand. Henceforward whenever the seamen came\nto a place where vegetables could be obtained, our commander\nseldom found it necessary to order them to be gathered; and\nif they were scarce, happy was the person who could lay hold\non them first.\nOn the i st of August, when the ships were in the latitude of\n25\u00b0 i', and the longitude of 1300 6' west, they were nearly in the\nsame situation with that which is assigned by Captain Carteret\nfor Pitcairn's Island, discovered by him in 1767. For this\nisland, therefore, our voyagers diligently looked, but saw nothing.\nAccording to the longitude in which he had placed it, Captain\nCook must have passed it fifteen leagues to the west. But as\nthis was uncertain, he did not think it prudent to lose any time\nin searching for it, as the sickly state of the Adventure's people\nrequired as speedy an arrival as possible at a place of refreshment. A sight of it, however, would have been of use in verifying or correcting not only the longitude of Pitcairn's Island,\nbut of the others discovered by Captain Carteret in that neighbourhood. It is a diminution of the value of that gentleman's\nvoyage, that his longitude was not confirmed by astronomical\nobservations, and that hence it was liable to errors, the correction of which was out of his power.\nAs Captain Cook had now gotten to the northward of Captain\nCarteret's tracks, he no longer entertained any hopes of discovering a continent. Islands were all that he could expect to\nfind, until he returned again to the south. In this and his former\nvoyage he had crossed the ocean in the latitude of 400 and upwards, without meeting anything which could in the least induce\nhim to believe that he should attain the great object of his\npursuit. Every circumstance concurred to convince him that\nbetween the meridian of America and New Zealand, there is no\n COOK'S VOYAGES.\nsouthern continent, and that there is no continent farther to\nthe south, unless in a very high latitude. This, however, was a\npoint too important to be left to opinions and conjectures. It\nwas to be determined by facts, and the ascertainment of it was\nappointed by our commander for the employment of the ensuing summer.\nIt was the 6th of August before the ships had the advantage\nof the trade wind. This they got at south-east, being at that\ntime in the latitude of 190 ^6' south, and the longitude of 1310\n32' west. As Captain Cook had obtained the south-east trade\nwind, he directed his course to the west-north-west, not only\nwith a view of keeping in with the strength of the wind, but also\nto get to the north of the islands discovered in his former voyage, that he might have a chance of meeting with any other\nislands which might lie in the way. It was in the track which\nhad been pursued by M. de Bougainville that our commander\nnow proceeded. He was sorry that he could not spare time to\nsail to the north of this track, but at present, on account of the\nsickly state of the Adventure's crew, the arriving at a place\nwhere refreshments could be procured was an object superior\nto that of discovery. To four of the islands which were passed\nby Captain Cook, he gave the names of Resolution Island,\nDoubtful Island, Furneaux Island, and Adventure Island.\nThey are supposed to be the same that were seen by M. de\nBougainville, and these, with several others which constitute a\ncluster of low and half drowned isles, that gentleman distinguished by the appellation of the Dangerous Archipelago. The\nsmoothness of the sea sufficiently convinced our navigators that\nthey were surrounded by them, and that it was highly necessary\nto proceed with the utmost caution, especially in the night.\nEarly in the morning, on the 15th of August, the ships came\nwithin sight of Osnaburg Island, or Maitea, which had been\ndiscovered by Captain Wallis. Soon after, Captain Cook acquainted Captain Furneaux, that it was his intention to put into\nOaiti-piah Bay, near the south-east end of Otaheite, for the\npurpose of procuring what refreshments he could from that part\nof the island, before he went down to Matavai. At six in the\nevening the island was seen bearing west; and our people con-\n COOKS VOYAGES.\ntinued to advance towards it till midnight, when they brought\nto, till four o'clock in the morning; after which, they sailed in\nfor the land with a fine breeze at east. At daybreak, they found\nthemselves within the distance of half a league from the reef;\nand, at the same time, the breeze began to fail them, and was\nat last succeeded by a calm. It now became necessary for the\nboats to be hoisted out, in order to tow off the ships; but all\nthe efforts of our voyagers, to keep them from being carried\nnear the reef, were insufficient for the purpose. As the calm\ncontinued, the situation of the vessels became still more dangerous. Captain Cook, however, entertained hopes of getting\nround the western point of the reef, and into the bay. But,\nabout two o'clock in the afternoon, when he came before an\nopening or break of the reef, through which he had flattered\nhimself that he might get with the ships, he found, on sending\nto examine it, that there was not a sufficient depth of water.\nNevertheless, this opening caused such an indraught of the tide\nof flood through it, as was very near proving fatal to the Resolution ; for as soon as the vessels got into the stream, they were\ncarried towards the reef with great impetuosity. The moment\nthe captain perceived this, he ordered one of the warping\nmachines, which was held in readiness, to be carried out with\nabout four hundred fathoms of rope; but it did not produce\nthe least effect; and our navigators had now in prospect the\nhorrors of shipwreck. They were not more than two cables'\nlength from the -breakers; and, though it was the only probable\nmethod which was left of saving the ships, they could find no\nbottom to anchor. An anchor, however, they did drop; but\nbefore it took hold, and brought them up, the Resolution was\nin less than three fathom water, and struck at every fall of. the\nsea, which broke close under her stern in a dreadful surf, and\nthreatened her crew every moment with destruction. Happily,\nthe Adventure brought up without striking. Presently, the\nResolution's people carried out two kedge anchors, with hawsers\nto each; and these found ground a little without the bower.\nBy heaving upon them, and cutting away the bower anchor, the\nship was gotten afloat, where Captain Cook and his men lay for\nsome time in the greatest anxiety, expecting every minute that\n COOK'S VOYAGES.\n161\neither the. kedges would come home, or the hawsers be cut in\ntwo by the rocks. At length, the tide ceased to act in the same\ndirection : upon which the captain ordered all the boats to try\nto tow off the vessel. Having found this to be practicable, the\ntwo kedges were hove up; and at that moment a light air came\noff from the land, by which the boats were so much assisted,\nthat the Resolution soon got clear of all danger. Our commander then ordered all the boats to assist the Adventure; but\nbefore they reached her, she was under sail with the land breeze,\nand in a little time joined her companion, leaving behind her\nthree anchors, her coasting cable, and two hawsers, which were\nnever recovered. Thus were our voyagers once more safe at\nsea, after narrowly escaping being wrecked on the very island,\nat which, but a few days before, they had most ardently wished\nto arrive. It was a peculiarly happy circumstance, that the calm\ncontinued, after bringing the ships into so dangerous a state;\nfor if the sea-breeze, as is usually the case, had set in, the\nResolution must inevitably have been lost, and probably the\nAdventure likewise.\nDuring the time in which the English were in this critical\nsituation, a number of the natives were either on board or near\nthe vessel in their canoes. Nevertheless, they seemed to be\ninsensible of our people's danger, showing not the least surprise,\njoy, or fear, when the ships were striking; and they went away\na little before sunset, quite unconcerned. Though most of them\nknew Captain Cook again, and many inquired for Mr. Banks\nand others who had been with the captain before, it was remarkable that not one of them asked for Tupia.\nOn the 17th the Resolution and Adventure anchored in\nOaiti-piha Bay, immediately upon which they were crowded\nwith the inhabitants of the country, who brought with them\ncocoa-nuts, plantains, bananas, apples, yams, and other roots,\nwhich were exchanged for nails and beads. To some, who\ncalled themselves chiefs, our commander made presents of\nshirts, axes, and several articles beside, in return for which they\npromised to bring him hogs and fowls; a promise which they\ndid not perform, and which, as might be judged from their\nconduct, they had never had the least intention of performing.\nM\n 162\nCOOKS VOYAGES.\nIn the afternoon of the same day, Captain Cook landed in\ncompany with Captain Furneaux, for the purpose of viewing the\nwatering-place, and of sounding the disposition of the natives.\nThe article of water, which was now much wanted on board, he\nfound might conveniently be obtained, and the inhabitants behaved with great civility. Notwithstanding this civility, nothing\nwas brought to market, the next day, but fruit and roots, though\nit was said that many hogs were seen about the houses in the\nneighbourhood. The cry was, that they belonged to Waheatoua,\nthe earee de hi, or king; who had not yet appeared, nor, indeed,\nany other chief of note. Among the Indians that came on board\nthe Resolution, and no small number of whom did not scruple\nto call themselves earees, there was one of this sort, who had\nbeen entertained in the cabin most of the day, and to all of\nwhose friends Captain Cook had made presents, as well as\nliberally to himself. At length, however, he was caught taking\nthings which did not belong to him, and handing them out of\nthe quarter gallery. Various complaints of the like nature being,\nat the same time, made against the natives who were on deck,\nour commander turned them all out of the ship. His cabin\nguest was very rapid in his retreat; and the captain was so\nexasperated at his behaviour, that after the earee had gotten to\nsome distance from the Resolution, he fired two muskets over\nhis head, by which he was so terrified, that he quitted his\ncanoe, and took to the water. Captain Cook then sent a boat\nto take the canoe; but when the boat approached the shore,\nthe people on land began to pelt her with stones. The captain,\ntherefore, being in some pain for her safety, as she was unarmed,\nwent himself in another boat to protect her, and ordered a great\ngun, loaded with ball, to be fired along the coast, which made\nall the Indians retire from the shore, and he was suffered to\nbring away two canoes without the least show of opposition.\nIn a few hours peace was restored, and the canoes were returned\nto the first person who came for them.\nIt was not till the evening of this day, that any one inquired\nafter Tupia, and then the inquiry was made by only two or three\nof the natives. When they learned the cause of his death, they\nwere perfectly satisfied; nor did it appear to our commander\n COOK'S VOYAGES.\n163\nthat they would have felt a moment's uneasiness, if Tupia's\ndecease had proceeded from any other cause than sickness.\nThey were as little concerned about Aotourou, the man who\nhad gone away with M. de Bougainville. But they were continually asking for Mr. Banks, and for several others who had\naccompanied Captain Cook in his former voyage.\nSince that voyage, very considerable changes had happened\nin the country. Toutaha, the regent of the greater peninsula of\nOtaheite, had been killed, in a battle which was fought between\nthe two kingdoms about five months before the Resolution's\narrival; and Otoo was now the reigning prince. Tubourai\nTamaide, and several more of the principal friends to the\nEnglish, had fallen in this battle, together with a large number\nof the common people. A peace subsisted, at present, between\nthe two grand divisions of the island.\nOn the 20th, one of the natives carried off a musket belonging\nto the guard on shore. Captain Cook, who was himself a witness of the transaction, sent out some of his people after him;\nbut this would have been to very little purpose, if the thief had\nnot been intercepted by several of his own countrymen, who\npursued him voluntarily, knocked him down, and returned the\nmusket to the English. This act of justice prevented our commander from being placed in a disagreeable situation. If the\nnatives had not given their immediate assistance, it would\nscarcely have been in his power to have recovered the musket,\nby any gentle means whatever; and if he had been obliged to\nhave recourse to other methods, he was sure of losing more than\nten times its value.\nThe fraud of one, who appeared as a chief, is, perhaps, not\nunworthy of notice. This man, in a visit to Captain Cook,\npresented him with a quantity of fruit; among which were a\nnumber of cocoa-nuts, that had already been exhausted of their\nliquor by our people, and afterward thrown overboard. These\nthe chief had picked up, and tied so artfully in bundles, that at\nfirst the deception was not perceived. When he was informed\nof it, without betraying the least emotion, and affecting a total\nignorance of the matter, he opened two or three of the nuts\nhimself, signified that he was satisfied of the fact, and then went\n 164\nCOOK'S VOYAGES.\non shore and sent off a quantity of plantains and bananas. The\ningenuity and the impudence of fraud are not solely the production of polished society.\nCaptain Cook, on the 23rd, had an interview with Waheatoua,\nthe result of which was that our navigators obtained this day as.\nmuch pork as furnished a meal to the crews of both the vessels.\nIn the captain's last voyage, Waheatoua, who was then little more\nthan a boy, was called Tearee; but having succeeded to his\nfather's authority, he had assumed his father's name.\nThe fruits which were procured at Oaiti-piha Bay contributed\ngreatly to the recovery of the sick people belonging to the\nAdventure. Many of them, who had been so ill as to be incapable of moving without assistance, were, in the compass of\na few days, so far recovered that they were able to walk about\nof themselves. When the Resolution entered the bay, she had\nbut one scorbutic man on board. A marine, who had long\nbeen sick, and who died, the second day after her arrival, of a\ncomplication of disorders, had not the least mixture of the\nscurvy.\nOn the 24th, the ships put to sea, and arrived the next\nevening in Matavai Bay. Before they could come to an anchor,\nthe decks were crowded with the natives, many of whom Captain\nCook knew, and by most of whom he was well remembered.\nAmong a large multitude of people who were collected together\nupon the shore, was Otoo, the king of the island. Our commander paid him a visit on the following day, at Oparree, the\nplace of his residence; and found him to be a fine, personable,\nwell-made man, six feet high, and about thirty years of age.\nThe qualities of his mind were not correspondent to his external\nappearance; for when Captain Cook endeavoured to obtain\nfrom him the promise of a visit on board, he acknowledged\nthat he was afraid of the guns, and, indeed, manifested in all\nhis actions that he was a prince of a timorous disposition.\nUpon the captain's return from Oparree, he found the tents,\nand the astronomer's observatories set up, on the same spot\nfrom which the transit of Venus had been observed in 1769.\nThe sick, being twenty in number from the Adventure, and one\nfrom the Resolution, all of whom were ill of the scurvy, he\n COOK'S VOYAGES.\n165\nordered to be landed; and he appointed a guard of marines on\nshore under the command of Lieutenant Edgcumbe.\nOn the 27th, Otoo was prevailed upon, with some degree of\nreluctance, to pay our commander a visit. He came attended\nwith a numerous train, and brought with him fruits, a hog, two\nlarge fish, and a quantity of cloth, for which he and all his\nretinue were gratified with suitable presents. When Captain\nCook conveyed his guests to land he was met by a venerable\nlady, the mother of the late Toutaha, who seized him by both\nhands, and burst into a flood of tears, saying, Toutaha tiyo no\ntoutee matty Toutaha; that is, \"Toutaha, your friend, or the\nfriend of Cook, is dead.\" He was so much affected with her\nbehaviour that it would have been impossible for him to have\nrefrained from mingling his tears with hers, had not Otoo, who\nwas displeased with the interview, taken him from her. It was\nwith difficulty that the captain could obtain permission to see\nher again, when he gave her an axe and some other articles.\nCaptain Furneaux, at this time, presented the king with two fine\ngoats, which, if no accident befell them, might be expected to\nmultiply.\nSeveral days had passed in a friendly intercourse with the\nnatives, and in the procuring provisions, when, in the evening,\nof the 30th, the gentlemen on board the Resolution were\nalarmed with the cry of murder, and with a great noise on\nshore, near the bottom of the bay, and at a distance from the\nEnglish encampment. Upon this, Captain Cook, who suspected that some of his own men were concerned in the affair,\nimmediately despatched an armed boat to know the cause of\nthe disturbance, and to bring off such of his people as should\nbe found in the place. He sent also to the Adventure, and to\nthe post on shore, to learn who were missing, for none but\nthose who were upon duty were absent from the Resolution.\nThe boats speedily returned with three marines and a seaman.\nSome others, likewise, were taken belonging to the Adventure;\nand all of them being put under confinement, our commander\nthe next morning ordered them to be punished according to\ntheir deserts. He did not find that any mischief had been\ndone, and the men would confess nothing. Some liberties\n 166 COOKS VOYAGES.\nwhich they had taken with the women had probably given occasion to the disturbance. To whatever cause it was owing, the\nnatives were so much alarmed that they fled from their habitations in the dead of night, and the alarm was spread many\nmiles along the coast. In the morning, when Captain Cook\nwent to visit Otoo, by appointment, he found that he had removed, or rather fled, to a great distance from the usual place\nof his abode. After arriving where he was, it was some hours\nbefore the captain could be admitted to the sight of him; and\nthen he complained of the riot of the preceding evening.\nThe sick being nearly recovered, the water completed, and\nthe necessary repairs of the ships finished, Captain Cook determined to put to sea without delay. Accordingly, on the ist of\nSeptember, he ordered everything to be removed from the\nshore, and the vessels to be unmoored, in which employment\nhis people were engaged the greater part of the day. In the\nafternoon of the same day Lieutenant Pickersgill returned from\nAttahourou, to which place he had been sent by the captain for\nthe purpose of procuring some hogs that had been promised.\nIn this expedition the lieutenant had seen the celebrated\nOberea, who has been so much the object of poetical fancy.\nHer situation was very humble compared with what it had formerly been. She was not only altered much for the worse in\nher person, but appeared to be poor, and of little or no consequence or authority in the island. In the evening, a favourable\nwind having sprung up, our commander put to sea, on which\noccasion he was obliged to dismiss his Otaheite friends sooner\nthan they wished to depart, but well satisfied with his kind and\nliberal treatment.\nFrom Matavai Bay Captain Cook directed his course for the\nIsland of Huaheine, where he intended to touch. This island\nhe reached the next day, and, early in the morning of the 3rd\nof September, made sail for the harbour of Owharre, in which\nhe soon came to an anchor. The Adventure, not happening\nto turn into the harbour with equal facility, got ashore on the\nnorth side of the channel, but, by the timely assistance which\nCaptain Cook had previously provided, in case such an accident should occur, she was gotten off again, without receiving\n COOKS VOYAGES.\n167\nany damage. As soon as both the ships were in safety, our\ncommander, together with Captain Furneaux, landed upon the\nisland, and was received by the natives with the utmost cordiality. A trade immediately commenced, so that our navigators had a fair prospect of being plentifully supplied with fresh\npork and fowls, which, to people in their situation, was a very\ndesirable circumstance. On the 4th Lieutenant Pickersgill\nsailed with the cutter, on a trading party, toward the south end\nof the isle. Another trading party was also sent on shore near\nthe ships, which party Captain Cook attended himself to see\nthat the business was properly conducted at the first setting\nout, this being a point of no small importance. Everything\nbeing settled to his mind, he went, accompanied by Captain\nFurneaux and Mr. Forster, to pay a visit to his old friend Oree,\nthe chief of the island. This visit was preceded by many preparatory ceremonies. Among other things the chief sent to\nour commander the inscription engraved on a small piece of\npewter which he had left with him in July, 1769. It was in\nthe bag that Captain Cook had made for it, together with a piece\nof counterfeit English coin and a few beads which had been\nput in at the same time, whence it was evident what particular\ncare had been taken of the whole. After the previous ceremonies had been discharged, the captain wanted to go to the\nking, but he was informed that the king would come to him.\nAccordingly, Oree went up to our commander, and fell on his\nneck and embraced him; nor was it a ceremonious embrace,\nfor the tears which trickled down the venerable old man's\ncheeks sufficiently bespoke the language of his heart. The\npresents which Captain Cook made to the chief on this occasion consisted of the most valuable articles he had, for he\nregarded him as a father. Oree in return gave the captain a\nhog and a quantity of cloth, promising that all the wants of the\nEnglish should be supplied, and it was a promise to which he\nfaithfully adhered. Indeed, he carried his kindness to Captain\nCook so far as not to fail sending him every day for his table\na plentiful supply of the very best of ready-dressed fruits and\nroots.\nHitherto all things had gone on in the most agreeable man-\n 168 COOKS VOYAGES.\nner, but on Monday, the 6th, several circumstances occurred\nwhich rendered it an unpleasant and troublesome day. When\nour commander went to the trading place he was informed that\none of the inhabitants had behaved with remarkable insolence.\nThe man was completely equipped in the war habit, had a club in\neach hand, and seemed bent upon mischief. Captain Cook took,\ntherefore, the clubs from him, broke them before his eyes, and\nwith some difficulty compelled him to retire. About the same\ntime Mr. Sparrman, who had imprudently gone out alone to\nbotanize, was assaulted by two men, who stripped him of everything which he had about him excepting his trousers, and\nstruck him again and again with his own hanger, though\nhappily without doing him any harm. When they had accomplished their purpose they made off, after which another of the\nnatives brought a piece of cloth to cover him, and conducted\nhim to the trading place, where the inhabitants in a large number were assembled. The instant that Mr. Sparrman appeared\nin the condition now described, they all fled with the utmost\nprecipitation. Captain Cook, having recalled a few of the\nIndians and convinced them that, he should take no step to\ninjure those who were innocent, went to Oree to complain of\nthe outrage. When the chief had heard the whole affair related\nhe wept aloud, and many other of the inhabitants did the same.\nAfter the first transports of his grief had subsided he began to\nexpostulate with his people, telling them (for so his language\nwas understood by the English) how well Captain Cook had\ntreated them both in this and his former voyage, and how base\nit was in them to commit such actions. He then took a\nminute account of the things of which Mr. Sparrman had been\nrobbed, and, after having promised to use his utmost endeavours for the recovery of them, desired to go into the captain's boat. At this the natives, apprehensive doubtless for\nthe safety of their prince, expressed the utmost alarm and used\nevery argument to dissuade him from so rash a measure. All\ntheir remonstrances, however, were in vain. He hastened into\nthe boat, and as soon as they saw that their beloved chief was\nwholly in our commander's power they set up a great outcry.\nIndeed, their grief was inexpressible; they prayed, entreated,\n COOK'S VOYAGES.\n169\nnay, attempted to pull him out of the boat, and every face was\nbedewed with tears. Even Captain Cook himself was so moved\nby their distress that he united his entreaties with theirs, but\nall to no purpose. Oree insisted upon the captain's coming\ninto the boat, which was no sooner done than he ordered it to\nbe put off. His sister was the only person among the Indians\nwho behaved with a becoming magnanimity on this occasion,\nfor, with a spirit equal to that of her royal brother, she alone did\nnot oppose his going. It was his design in coming into the boat\nof the English to proceed with them in search of the robbers.\nAccordingly, he went with Captain Cook as far as it was convenient by water, when they landed, entered the country, and\ntravelled some miles inland; in doing which the chief led the\nway, and inquired after the criminals of every person whom he\nsaw. In this search he would have gone to the very extremity\nof the island if our commander, who did not think the object\nworthy of so laborious a pursuit, had not refused to proceed\nany further. Besides, as he intended to sail the next morning,\nand all manner of trade was stopped in consequence of the\nalarm of the natives, it became the more necessary for him to\nreturn that he might restore things to their former state. It\nwas with great reluctance that Oree was prevailed upon to discontinue the search, and to content himself with sending, at\nCaptain Cook's request, some of his people for the things which\nhad been carried off. When he and the captain had gotten\nback to the boat they found there the chief's sister and several\nother persons, who had travelled by land to the place. The\nEnglish gentlemen immediately stepped into their boat in order\nto return on board, without so much as asking Oree to accompany them, notwithstanding which he insisted upon doing it, nor\ncould the opposition and entreaties of those who were about\nhim induce him to desist from his purpose. His sister followed his example, uninfluenced on this occasion by the supplications and tears of her daughter. Captain Cook amply rewarded the chief and his sister for the confidence they had\nplaced in him, and, after dinner, conveyed them both on shore,\nwhere some hundreds of people waited to receive them, many\nof whom embraced Oree with tears of joy. All was now peace\n 170 COOK'S VOYAGES\nand gladness; the inhabitants crowded in from every part with\nsuch a plentiful supply of hogs, fowls, and vegetable productions, that the English presently filled two boats, and the\nchief himself presented the captain with a large hog and a\nquantity of fruit. Mr. Sparrman's hanger, the only thing of\nvalue which he had lost, was brought back, together with part\nof his coat, and our navigators were told that the remaining\narticles should be restored the next day. Some things which\nhad been stolen from a party of officers who had gone out a\nshooting were returned in like manner.\nThe transactions of this day have been the more particularly\nrelated, as they show the high opinion which the chief had\nformed of our commander, and the unreserved confidence that\nhe placed in his integrity and honour. Oree had entered into\na solemn friendship with Captain Cook, according to all the\nforms which were customary in the country; and he seemed to\nthink that this friendship could not be broken by the act of any\nother persons. It is justly observed by the captain that another\nchief may never be found, who, under similar circumstances,\nwill act in the same manner. Oree, indeed, had nothing to fear:\nfor it was not our commander's intention to hurt a hair of his\nhead, or to detain him a moment longer than was agreeable to\nhis own desire. But of this how could he and his people be\nassured ? They were not ignorant, that when he was once in\nCaptain Cook's power, the whole force of the island would not\nbe sufficient to recover him, and that they must have complied\nwith any demands, however great, for his ransom. The apprehensions, therefore, of the inhabitants, for their chiefs and their\nown safety, had a reasonable foundation.\nEarly on the 7th, while the ships were unmooring, the captain went to pay his farewell visit to Oree, and took with him\nsuch presents as had not only a fancied value, but a real utility.\nHe left, also, with the chief the inscription plate, that had before\nbeen in his possession, and another small copper-plate, on\nwhich were engraved these words : | Anchored here, his Britannic Majesty's ships, Resolution and Adventure, September,\n1773.\" These plates, together with some medals, were put up\nin a bag; of which Oree promised to take care, and to produce\nM\n COOK'S VOYAGES.\n171\nthem to the first ship or ships that should arrive at the island.\nHaving, in return, given a hog to Captain Cook, and loaded his\nboat with fruit, they took leave of each other, when the good\nold chief embraced our commander with tears in his eyes.\nNothing was mentioned, at this interview, concerning the remainder of Mr. Sparrman's property. As it was early in the\nmorning, the captain judged that it had not been brought in,\nand he was not willing to speak of it to Oree, lest he should\ngive him pain about things which there had not been time to\nrecover. The robbers having soon afterward been taken, Oree\ncame on board again, to request that our commander would go\non shore, either to punish them, or to be present at their\npunishment; but this not being convenient to him, he left them\nto the correction of their own chief. It was from the island of\nHuaheine that Captain Furneaux received into his ship a\nyoung man named Omai, a native of Ulietea, of whom so much\nhath since been known and written. This choice Captain Cook\nat first disapproved, as thinking that the youth was not a proper\nsample of the inhabitants of the Society Islands; being inferior\nto many of them in birth and acquired rank, and not having\nany peculiar advantage in point of shape, figure, or complexion.\nThe captain afterward found reason to be better satisfied with\nOmai's having accompanied our navigators to England.\nDuring the short stay of the vessels at Huaheine, our people\nwere very successful in obtaining supplies of provisions. No\nless than three hundred hogs, besides fowls and. fruit, were procured ; and had the ships continued longer at the place, the\nquantity might have been greatly increased. Such was the fertility of this small island, that none of these articles of refreshment were seemingly diminished, but appeared to be as plentiful as ever.\nFrom Huaheine our navigators sailed for Ulietea; where\ntrade was carried on in the usual manner, and a most friendly\nintercourse renewed between Captain Cook and Oreo, the chief\nof the island. Here Tupia was inquired after with particular\neagerness, and the inquirers were perfectly satisfied with the\naccount which was given of the occasion of that Indian's\ndecease.\n COOKS VOYAGES.\nOn the morning of the 15th, the English were surprised at\nfinding that none of the inhabitants of Ulietea came off to the\nships, as had hitherto been customary. As two men belonging\nto the Adventure had stayed on shore all night, contrary to\norders, Captain Cook's first conjectures were, that the natives\nhad stripped them, and were afraid of the revenge which would\nbe taken of the insult. This, however, was not the case. The\nmen had been treated with great civility, and could assign no\ncause for the precipitate flight of the Indians. All that the\ncaptain could learn was, that several were killed, and others\nwounded by the guns of the English. This information alarmed\nhim for the safety of some of our people, who had been sent\nout in two boats to the island of Otaha. He determined, therefore, if possible, to see the chief himself. When he came up to\nhim, Oreo threw his arms around our commander's neck and\nburst into tears; in which he was accompanied by all the\nwomen, and some of the men; so that the lamentation became\ngeneral. Astonishment alone kept Captain Cook from joining\nin their grief. At last, the whole which he could collect from\nhis inquiries was, that the natives had been alarmed on account\nof the absence of the English boats, and imagined that the\ncaptain, upon the supposition of the desertion of his men,\nwould use violent means for the recovery of his loss. When\nthe matter was explained, it was acknowledged that not a single\ninhabitant, or a single Englishman, had been hurt. This\ngroundless consternation displayed in a strong light the timorous disposition of the people of the Society islands.\nOur navigators were as successful in procuring provisions at\nUlietea as they had been at Huaheine. Captain Cook judged\nthat the number of hogs obtained amounted to four hundred or\nupwards: many of them, indeed, were only roasters, while\nothers exceeded a hundred pounds in weight; but the general\nrun was from forty to sixty. A larger quantity was offered than\nthe ships could contain; so that our countrymen were enabled\nto proceed on their voyage with no small degree of comfort and\nadvantage.\nOur commander, by his second visit to the Society islands,\ngained a farther knowledge of their general state, and of the\n COOK'S VOYAGES.\n173\ncustoms of the inhabitants. It appeared, that a Spanish ship\nhad been lately at Otaheite, and the natives complained, that a\ndisease had been communicated to them by the people of this\nvessel, which, according to their account, affected the head, the\nthroat, and the stomach, and at length ended in death. With\nregard to a certain disorder, the effects of which have so fatally\nbeen felt in the latter ages of the world, Captain Cook's inquiries\ncould not absolutely determine whether it was known to the\nislanders before they were visited by the Europeans. If it was\nof recent origin, the introduction of it was, without a dissentient\nvoice, ascribed to the voyage of M. de Bougainville.\nOne thing which our commander was solicitous to ascertain,\nwas, whether human sacrifices constituted a part of the religious\ncustoms of these people. The man of whom he made his inquiries, and several other natives, took some pains to explain\nthe matter; but, from our people's ignorance of the language\nof the country, their explication could not be understood. Captain Cook afterward learned from Omai that the inhabitants of\nthe Society islands offer human sacrifices to the Supreme Being.\nWhat relates to funeral ceremonies excepted, all the knowledge\nhe could obtain concerning their religion was very imperfect\nand defective.\nThe captain had an opportunity, in this voyage, of rectifying\nthe great injustice which had been done to the women of Otaheite and the neighbouring isles. They had been represented\nas ready, without exception, to grant the last favour to any man\nwho would come up to their price : but our commander found\nthat this was by no means the case. The favours both of the\nmarried women and of the unmarried, of the better sort, were\nas difficult to be obtained in the Society islands as in any other\ncountry whatever. Even with respect to the unmarried females\nof the lower class, the charge was not indiscriminately true.\nThere were many of these who would not admit of indecent\nfamiliarities. The setting this subject in a proper light must be\nconsidered as one of the agreeable effects of Captain Cook's\nsecond voyage. Every enlightened mind will rejoice at what\nconduces to the honour of human nature in general, and of the\nfemale sex in particular. Chastity is so eminently the glory of\n Ill il 1.1 il\n1\n!\n174 COOKS VOYAGES.\nthat sex, and, indeed, is so essentially connected with the good\norder of society, that it must be a satisfaction to reflect, that\nthere is no country, however ignorant or barbarous, in which\nthis virtue is not regarded as an object of moral obligation.\nThis voyage enabled our commander to gain some farther\nknowledge concerning the geography of the Society isles; and\nhe found it highly probable, that Otaheite is of greater extent\nthan he had computed it in his former estimation. The astronomers did not neglect to set up their observatories, and to\nmake observations suited to their purpose.\nOn the 17th of September, Captain Cook sailed from Ulietea,\ndirecting his course to the west, with an inclination to the south.\nLand was discovered on the 23rd of the month, to which he\ngave the name of Harvey's Island. On the 1st of October, he\nreached the island of Middleburg. While he was looking about\nfor a landing place, two canoes, each of them conducted by two\nor three men, came boldly alongside the ship, and some of the\npeople entered it without hesitation. This mark of confidence\ninspired our commander with so -good an opinion of the inhabitants, that he determined, if possible, to pay them a visit,\nwhich he did the next day. Scarcely had the vessels gotten to\nan anchor, before they were surrounded by a great number of\ncanoes, full of the natives, who brought with them cloth, and\nvarious curiosities, which they exchanged for nails, and such\nother articles as were adapted to their fancy. Among those\nwho came on board, was a chief, named Tioony. whose friendship Captain Cook immediately gained by proper presents, consisting principally of a hatchet and some spike-nails. A party\nof our navigators, with the captain at the head of them, having\nembarked in two boats, proceeded to the shore, where they\nfound an immense crowd of people, who welcomed them to the\nisland with loud acclamations. There was not so much as a\nstick, or any other weapon, in the hands of a single native, so\npacific were their dispositions and intentions. They seemed to\nbe more desirous of giving than receiving; and many of them,\nwho could not approach near to the boats, threw into them,\nover the heads of others, whole bales of cloth, and then retired,\nwithout either asking or waiting for anything in return. The\nWlj\n COOKS VOYAGES.\n175\nwhole day was spent by our navigators in the most agreeable\nmanner. When they returned on board in the evening, every\none expressed how much he was delighted with the country,\nand the very obliging behaviour of the inhabitants, who seemed\nto vie with each other in their endeavours to give pleasure to\nour people. All this conduct appeared to be the result of the\nmost pure good nature, perhaps without being accompanied with\nmuch sentiment or feeling; for when Captain Cook signified to\nthe chief his intention of quitting the island, he did not seem to\nbe in the least moved. Among other articles presented by the\ncaptain to Tioony, he left him an assortment of garden seeds,\nwhich, if properly used, might be of great future benefit to the\ncountry.\nFrom Middleburg, the ships sailed down to Amsterdam, the\nnatives of which island were equally ready with those of the\nformer place to maintain a friendly intercourse with the English.\nLike the people of Middleburg, they brought nothing with them\nbut cloth, matting, and such other articles as could be of little\nservice; and for these our seamen were so simple as to barter\naway their clothes. To put a stop, therefore, to so injurious a\ntraffic, and to obtain the necessary refreshments, the captain\ngave orders, that no sort of curiosities should be purchased by\nany person whatever. This injunction produced the desired\neffect. When the inhabitants saw that the English would deal\nwith them for nothing but eatables, they brought off bananas and\ncocoa-nuts in abundance, together with some fowls and pigs; all\nof which they exchanged for small nails and pieces of cloth. Even\na few old rags were sufficient for the purchase of a pig or a fowl.\nThe method of carrying on trade being settled, and proper\nOncers having been appointed to prevent disputes, our commander's next object was to obtain as complete a knowledge as\npossible of the island of Amsterdam. In this he was much\nfacilitated by a friendship which he had formed with Attago,\none of the chiefs of the country. Captain Cook was struck\nwith admiration, when he surveyed the beauty and cultivation\nof the island. He thought himself transported into the most\nfertile plains of Europe. There was not an inch of waste\nground. The roads occupied no larger a space than was abso-\n 176\nCOOKS VOYAGES.\nlutely necessary, and the fences did not take up above four\ninches each. Even such a small portion of ground was not\nwholly lost; for many of the fences themselves contained useful trees or plants. The scene was everywhere the same; and\nnature, assisted by a little art, nowhere assumes a more splendid appearance than in this island.\nFriendly as were the natives of Amsterdam, they were not\nentirely free from the thievish disposition which hath so often\nbeen remarked in the islanders of the Southern Ocean. The\ninstances, however, of this kind, which occurred, were not of\nsuch a nature as to produce any extraordinary degree of trouble,\nor to involve our people in a quarrel with the inhabitants.\nCaptain Cook's introduction to the king of the island afforded\na scene somewhat remarkable. His majesty was seated with so\nmuch sullen and stupid gravity, that the captain took him for\nan idiot, whom the Indians, from some superstitious reasons,\nwere ready to worship. When our commander saluted and\nspoke to him, he neither answered nor took the least notice of\nhim; nor did he alter a single feature of his countenance. Even\nthe presents which were made to him could not induce him to\nresign a bit of his gravity, or to speak one word, or to turn\nhis head either to the right hand or to the left. As he was in\nthe prime of life, it was possible that a false sense of dignity\nmight engage him to assume so solemn a stupidity of appearance. In the history of mankind instances might probably be\nfound which would confirm this supposition.\nIt is observable, that the two islands of Middleburg and\nAmsterdam are guarded from the sea by a reef of coral rocks,\nwhich extend out from the shore about one hundred fathoms.\nOn this reef the force of the sea is spent before it reaches the\nland. The same, indeed, is, in a great measure, the situation\nof all the tropical isles which our commander had seen in that\npart of the globe; and hence arises an evidence of the wisdom\nand goodness of Providence; as by such a provision, nature\nhas effectually secured them from the encroachments of the\nsea, though many of them are mere points when compared with\nthe vast ocean by which they are surrounded.\nIn Amsterdam, Mr. Forster not only found the same plants\n COOKS VOYAGES.\n177\nthat are at Otaheite and the neighbouring islands, but several\nothers which are not to be met with in those places. Captain\nCook took care, by a proper assortment of garden-seeds and\npulse, to increase the vegetable stock of the inhabitants.\nHogs and fowls were the only domestic animals that were\nseen in these islands. The former are of the same sort with\nthose which have been met with in other parts of the Southern\nOcean; but the latter are far superior, being as large as any in\nEurope, and equal, if not preferable, with respect to the goodness of their flesh.\nBoth men and women are of a common size with Europeans.\nTheir colour is that of a lightish copper, and with a greater\nuniformity than occurs among the natives of Otaheite and the\nSociety Isles. Some of the English gentlemen were of opinion\nthat the inhabitants of Middleburg and Amsterdam were a\nmuch handsomer race; while others, with whom Captain Cook\nconcurred, maintained a contrary sentiment. However this\nmay be, their shape is good, their features regular, and they\nare active, brisk, and lively. The women, in particular, are the\nmerriest creatures our commander had ever met with; and,\nprovided any person seemed pleased with them, they would\nkeep chattering by his side without the least invitation, or considering whether they were understood. They appeared in\ngeneral, to be modest, though there were several amongst them\nof a different character. As there were yet on board some\ncomplaints of a certain disorder, the captain took all possible\ncare to prevent its communication. Our navigators were frequently entertained by the women with songs, and this in a\nmanner which was by no means disagreeable. They had a\nmethod of keeping time by snapping their fingers. Their music\nwas harmonious as well as their voices, and there was a considerable degree of compass in their notes.\nA singular custom was found to prevail in these islands.\nThe greater part of the people were observed to have lost one\nor both of their little fingers; and this was not peculiar to\nrank, age, or sex; nor was the amputation restricted to any\nspecific period of life. Our navigators endeavoured in vain to\ndiscover the reason of so extraordinary a practice.\nN\n 178\nCOOKS VOYAGES.\nA very extensive knowledge of the language of Middleburg\nand Amsterdam could not be obtained during the short stay\nwhich was made there by the English. However, the more they\ninquired into it, the more they found that it was, in general,\nthe same with that which is spoken at Otaheite arid the Society\nisles. The difference is not greater than what frequently occurs\nbetwixt the most northern and western parts of England.\nOn the 7 th of October, Captain Cook proceeded on his\nvoyage. His intention was to sail directly to Queen Charlotte's\nSound, in New Zealand, for the purpose of taking in wood and\nwater, after which he was to pursue his discoveries to the south\nand the east. The day after he quitted Amsterdam, he passed\nthe island of Pilstart; an island which had been discovered by\nTasman.\nOn the 21st, he made the land of New Zealand, at the\ndistance of eight or ten leagues from Table Cape. As our\ncommander was very desirous of leaving in the country such\nan assortment of animals and vegetables as might greatly contribute to the future benefit of the inhabitants, one of the first\nthings which he did was to give to a chief, who had come off\nin a canoe, two boars, two sows, four hens, and two cocks, together with a quantity of seeds. The seeds were of the most\nuseful kind; such as wheat, French and kidney beans, peas,\ncabbage, turnips, onions, carrots, parsnips, and yams. The\nman to whom these several articles were presented, though he\nwas much more enraptured with a spike-nail half the length of\nhis arm, promised, however, to take care of them, and, in particular, not to kill any of the animals. If he adhered to his\npromise, they would be sufficient, in a due course of time, to\nstock the whole island.\nIt was the 3rd of November before Captain Cook brought\nthe Resolution into Ship Cove, in Queen Charlotte's Sound.\nHe had been beating about the island from the 21st of October,\nduring which time his vessel was exposed to a variety of tempestuous weather. In one instance he had been driven off the\nland by a furious storm, which lasted two days, and which\nwould have been dangerous in the highest degree, had it not\nfortunately happened that it was fair overhead, and that there\n was no reason to be apprehensive of a lee-shore,\nof the bad weather which succeeded this storm,\nwas separated from the Resolution, and was neve\nof through the whole remainder of the voyage.\nThe first object of our commander's atten\narrival in Queen Charlotte's Sound, was to p\nrepair of his ship, which had suffered in variou\nespecially in her sails and rigging. Another matti\nfor his notice was the stato\nand he had the mortification of finding, that a large quantity of\nit was damaged. To repair this loss in the best manner he was\nable, he ordered all the casks to be opened, the bread to be\npicked, and such parcels of it to be baked, in the copper oven,\nas could by that means be recovered. Notwithstanding this\ncare, four thousand two hundred and ninety-two pounds were\nfound totally unfit for use: and about three thousand pounds\nmore could only be eaten by people in the situation of our\nnavigators.\nCaptain Cook was early in his inquiries concerning the\nanimals which had been left at New Zealand, in the former\npart of his voyage. He saw the youngest of the two sows that\nCaptain Furneaux had put on shore in Ca\nwas in good condition, and very tame. The boar and other\nsow, if our commander was rightly informed, were taken away\nand separated, but not killed. He was told that the two goats,\nwhich he had landed up the Sour\nrascally native of the name of Goubiah; so that the captain\nhad the grief of discovering that all his benevolent endeavours\nto stock the country with useful animals were likely to be\nfrustrated by the very people whom he was anxious to serve.\nThe gardens had met with a better rate. Everything in them,\nexcepting potatoes, the inhabitants had left entirely to nature,\nwho had so well performed her part, that most of the articles\nwere in a flourishing condition.\nNotwithstanding the inattention and folly of the New Zea-\nlanders, Captain Cook still continued his zeal for their benefit\nTo the inhabitants who resided at the Cove, he gave a boar, a\nyoung sow, two cocks, and two 1\n COOKS VOYAGES.\nfrom the Society islands. At the bottom of the West Bay, he\nordered to be landed, without the knowledge of the Indians,\nfour hogs, being three sows and one boar, together with two\ncocks and two hens. They were carried a little way into the\nwoods, and as much food was left them as would serve them\nfor ten or twelve days; which was done to prevent their coming\ndown to the shore in search of sustenance, and by that means\nbeing discovered by the natives. The captain was desirous of\nreplacing the two goats which Goubiah was understood to have\nkilled, by leaving behind him the only two that yet remained\nin his possession. But he had the misfortune, soon after his\narrival at Queen Charlotte's Sound, to lose the ram; and this in\na manner for which it was not easy to assign the cause. Whether\nit was owing to anything he had eaten, or to his being stung\nwith nettles, which were very plentiful in the place, he was\nseized with fits that bordered upon madness. In one of these\nfits, he was supposed to have run into the sea, and to have\nbeen drowned: and thus every method which our commander\nhad taken to stock the country with sheep and goats, proved\nineffectual He hoped t\u00a9 be more successful with respect to\nthe boars and sows, and the cocks and hens, which he left in\nthe island.\nWhile the boatswain, one day, and a party of men were\nemployed in cutting broom, some of them stole several things\nfrom a private hut of the natives, in which was deposited most\nof the treasures they had received from the English as well as\nproperty of their own. Complaint being made by the Indians\nto Captain Cook, and a particular man of the boatswain's party\nhaving been pointed out to the captain, as the person who had\ncommitted the theft, he ordered him to be punished in then-\npresence. With this they went away seemingly satisfied,\nalthough they did not recover any of the articles which they\nhad lost. It was always a maxim with our commander, to\npunish the least crimes which any of his people were guilty of\nwith regard to uncivilized nations. Their robbing us with\nimpunity he by no means considered as a reason for our treating them in the same manner. Addicted as the New Zea-\nanders were, in a certain degree, to stealing, a disposition\n COOKS VOYAGES. 181\nwhich must have been very much increased by the novelty and\nallurement of the objects presented to their view; they had,\nnevertheless, when injured themselves, such a sense of justice\nas to apply to Captain Cook for redress. The best method, in\nhis opinion, of preserving a good understanding with the inhabitants of countries in this state of society, is, first, to convince\nthem of the superiority we have over them in consequence of\nour fire-arms, and then to be always upon our guard. Such a'\nconduct, united with strict honesty and gentle treatment, will\nconvince them, that it is their interest not to disturb us, and\nprevent them from forming any general plan of attack.\nIn this second visit of our navigators to New Zealand, they\nmet with indubitable evidence that the natives were eaters of\nhuman flesh. The proofs of this fact had a most powerful\ninfluence on the mind of Oedidee, a youth of Bolabola, whom\nCaptain Cook had brought in the Resolution from Ulietea.\nHe was so affected, that he became perfectly motionless, and\nexhibited such a picture of horror, that it would have been impossible for art to describe that passion with half the force with\nwhich it appeared in his countenance. When he was roused\nfrom this state by some of the English, he burst into tears;\ncontinued to weep and scold by turns; told the New Zealanders\nthat they were vile men; and assured them, that he would not\nbe any longer their friend. He would not so much as permit\nthem to come near him; and he refused to accept or even to\ntouch the knife by which some human flesh had been cut off.\nSuch was Oedidee's indignation against the abominable custom;\nand our commander has justly remarked, that it was an indignation worthy to be imitated by every rational being. The\nconduct of this young man, upon the present occasion, strongly\npoints out the difference which had taken place, in the progress\nof civilization, between the inhabitants of the Society islands\nand those of New Zealand. It was our commander's firm\nopinion, that the only human flesh which was eaten by these\npeople was that of their enemies, who had been slain in\nbattle.\nDuring the stay of our voyagers in Queen Charlotte's Sound,.\nthey were plentifully supplied with fish, procured from the\n COOK'S VOYAGES.\nnatives at a very easy rate; and, besides the vegetables afforded\nby their own gardens, they everywhere found plenty of scurvy-\ngrass and celery. These Captain Cook ordered to be dressed\nevery day for all his hands. By the attention which he paid to\nhis men in the article of provisions, they had for three months\nlived principally on a fresh diet, and, at this time, there was not\na sick or scorbutic person on board.\nThe morning before the captain sailed, he wrote a memorandum, containing such information as he thought necessary for\nCaptain Furneaux, in case he should put into the sound. This\nmemorandum was buried in a bottle under the root of a tree in\nthe garden; and in such a manner, that it could not avoid being\ndiscovered, if either Captain Furneaux, or any other European,\nshould chance to arrive at the cove.\nOur commander did not leave New Zealand without making\nsuch remarks on the coast between Cape Teerawhitte and Cape\nPalliser as may be of service to future navigators. It being\nnow the unanimous opinion that the Adventure was nowhere\nupon the island, Captain Cook gave up all expectations of seeing\nher any more during the voyage. This circumstance, however,\ndid not discourage him from fully exploring the southern parts\nof the Pacific ocean, in the doing of which he intended to\nemploy the whole of the ensuing season. When he quitted the\ncoast, he had the satisfaction to find that not a man of the crew\nwas dejected, or thought that the dangers they had yet to go\nthrough, were in the least augmented by their being alone.\nSuch was the confidence they placed in their commander, that\nthey were as ready to proceed cheerfully to the south, or wherever he might lead them, as if the Adventure, or even a larger\nnumber of ships had been in company.\nOn the 26th of November, Captain Cook sailed from New\nZealand in search of a continent, and steered to the south,\ninclining to the east. Some days after this, our navigators\nreckoned themselves to be antipodes to their friends in London,\nand consequently were at as great a distance from them as\npossible. The first ice island was seen on the 12th of December, farther south than the first ice which had been met with\nafter leaving the Cape of Good Hope in the preceding year.\n COOK'S VOYAGES.\n183\nIn the progress of the voyage, ice islands continually occurred,\nand the navigation became more and more difficult and\ndangerous. When our people were in the latitude of 670 5'\nsouth, they all at once got within such a cluster of these islands,\ntogether with a large quantity of loose pieces, that to keep clear\nof them was a matter of the utmost difficulty. On the 22nd of\nthe month, the Resolution was in the highest latitude she had\nyet reached; and circumstances now became so unfavourable,\nthat our commander thought of returning more to the north.\nHere there was no probability of finding any land, or a possibility of getting farther south. To have proceeded, therefore,\nto the east in this latitude, must have been improper, not only\non account of the ice, but because a vast space of sea to the\nnorth must have been left unexplored, in which there might lie\na large tract of country. It was only by visiting those parts,\nthat it could be determined whether such a supposition was well\nfounded. As our navigators advanced to the north-east on the\n24th, the ice islands increased so fast upon them, that, at noon,\nthey could see nearly a hundred around them, besides an immense number of small pieces. In this situation they spent\nChristmas-day, much in the same manner as they had done in\nthe former year. Happily our people had continued daylight,\nand clear weather, for had it been as foggy as it was on some\npreceding days, nothing less than a miracle could have saved\nthem from being dashed to pieces.\nWhile the Resolution was in the high latitudes, many of her\ncompany were attacked with a slight fever, occasioned by colds.\nThe disorder, however, yielded to the simplest remedies, and\nwas generally removed in a few days. On the 5th of January,\n1774, the ship not being then in much more than fifty degrees\nof latitude, there were only one or two persons on the sick list.\nAfter Captain Cook, agreeably to his late resolution, had\ntraversed a large extent of ocean, without discovering land, he\nagain directed his course to the southward. By the 30th of the\nmonth, through obstructions and difficulties, which, from their\nsimilar nature to those already mentioned, it would be tedious\nto repeat, he reached to the seventy-first degree of latitude.\nThus far had he gone; but to have proceeded farther would\n 11\nil\n184 COOK'S VOYAGES.\nhave been the height of folly and madness. It would have\nbeen exposing himself, his men, and his ship, to the utmost\ndanger, and perhaps to destruction, without the least prospect\nof advantage. The captain was of opinion, as indeed were\nmost of the gentlemen on board, that the ice now in sight\nextended quite to the pole, or might join to some land, to which\nit might be fixed from the earliest time. If, however, there be\nsuch land, it can afford no better retreat for birds, or any other\nanimals, than the ice itself, with which it must be wholly covered.\nThough our commander had not only the ambition of going\nfarther than any one had done before, but of proceeding as far\nas it was possible for man to go, he was the less dissatisfied with\nthe interruption he now met with, as it shortened the dangers\nand hardships inseparable from the navigation of the southern\npolar regions. In fact, he was impelled by inevitable necessity\nto tack, and stand back to the north.\nThe determination which Captain Cook now formed was to\nspend the ensuing winter within the tropic, if he met with no\nemployment before he came there. He was well satisfied, that\nno continent was to be found in this ocean, but what must lie\nso far to the south, as to be wholly inaccessible on account of\nice. If there existed a continent in the Southern Atlantic\nOcean, he was sensible that he could not explore it, without\nhaving the whole summer before him. Upon a supposition, on\nthe other hand, that there is no land there, he might undoubtedly have reached the Cape of Good Hope by April. In that\ncase, he would have put an end to the finding of a continent;\nwhich was indeed the first object of the voyage. But this could\nnot satisfy the extensive and magnanimous mind of our commander. He had a good ship, expressly sent out on discoveries,\na healthy crew, and was not in want either of stores or of provisions. In such circumstances, to have quitted this Southern\nPacific Ocean, would, he thought, have been betraying not only\na want of perseverance, but of judgment, in supposing it to have\nbeen so well explored, that nothing farther could be done.\nAlthough he had proved that there was no continent but what\nmust lie far to the south, there remained, nevertheless, room\nfor very large islands in places wholly unexamined. Many,\n COOK'S VOYAGES.\n185\nlikewise, of those which had formerly been discovered had been\nbut imperfectly explored, and their situations were as imperfectly known. He was almost persuaded, that his continuing\nsome time longer in this sea would be productive of improvements in navigation and geography, as well as in other sciences.\nIn consequence of these views, it was Captain Cook's\nintention first to go in search of the land said to have been\ndiscovered by Juan Fernandez, in the last century. If he\nshould fail in finding this land, he proposed to direct his course\nin quest of Easter Island, or Davis's Land, the situation of\nwhich was known with so little certainty, that none of the attempts lately made for its discovery had been successful. He\nnext intended to get within the tropic, and then to proceed to\nthe west, touching at, and settling the situations of such islands\nas he might meet with till he arrived at Otaheite, where it was\nnecessary for him to stop, to look for the Adventure. It was\nalso in his contemplation to run as far west as the Tierra Austral\ndel Espiritu Santo, which was discovered by Quiros, and to\nwhich M. de Bougainville has given the name of the Great\nCyclades. From this land, it was the captain's plan to steer to\nthe south, and so back to the east, between the latitudes of\nfifty and sixty. In the execution of this plan, it was his purpose, if possible, to attain the length of Cape Horn in the\nensuing November, when he should have the best part of the\nsummer before him, to explore the southern part of the Atlantic\nOcean. Great as was this design, our commander thought it\ncapable of being carried into execution; and when he communicated it to his officers, he had the satisfaction of finding\nthat it received their zealous and cheerful concurrence. They\ndisplayed the utmost readiness for executing, in the most\neffectual manner, every measure he thought proper to adopt.\nWith such good examples to direct them, the seamen were\nalways obedient and alert; and on the present occasion, so far\nwere they from wishing the voyage to be concluded, that they\nrejoiced at the prospect of its being prolonged another year,\n-and of soon enjoying the benefits of a milder climate.\nIn pursuing his course to the north, Captain Cook became\nwell assured that the discovery of Juan Fernandez, if any such\n COOK'S VOYAGES.\nwas ever made, could be nothing more than a small island. At\nthis time, the captain was attacked by a bilious colic, the violence of which confined him to his bed. The management of\nthe ship upon this occasion, was left to Mr. Cooper, the first\nofficer, who conducted her entirely to his commander's satisfaction. It was several days before the most dangerous symptoms\nof Captain Cook's disorder were removed; during which time,\nMr. Patten the surgeon, in attending upon him, manifested not\nonly the skilfulness of a physician, but the tenderness of a nurse.\nWhen the captain began to recover, a favourite dog, belonging\nto Mr. Forster, fell a sacrifice to his tender stomach. There\nwas no other fresh meat whatever on board, and he could eat\nnot only of the broth which was made of it, but of the flesh\nitself, when there was nothing else that he was capable of\ntasting. Thus did he derive nourishment and strength from\nfood which to most people in Europe, would have been in the\nhighest degree disgusting, and productive of sickness. The\nnecessity of the case overcame every feeling of dislike.\nOn the nth of March, our navigators came within sight of\nEaster Island, or Davis's Land; their transactions at which\nplace were of too little moment to deserve a particular recital.\nThe inhabitants are, in general, a slender race. In colour,\nfeatures, and language, they bear such an affinity to the people\nof the more western isles, that there can be no doubt of their\nhaving been descended from one common original. It is indeed\nextraordinary, that the same nation should have spread themselves to so wide an extent, as to take in almost a fourth part of\nthe circumference of the globe. With regard to the disposition\nof the natives of Easter Island, it is friendly and hospitable;\nbut they are as much addicted to stealing as any of their neighbours. The island itself hath so little to recommend it, that\nno nation need to contend for the honour of its discovery. So\nsparing has nature been of her favours to this spot, that there\nis in it no safe anchorage, no wood for fuel, no fresh water\nworth taking on board. The most remarkable objects in the\ncountry are some surprising gigantic statues, which were first\nseen by Roggewein.\nIt' was with pleasure that our commander quitted a place\n COOK'S VOYAGES.\nwhich could afford such slender accommodations to voyagers,\nand directed his course for the Marquesas Islands. He had\nnot been long at sea before he was again attacked by his bilious\ndisorder. The attack, however, was not so violent as the former\none had been. He had reason to believe that the return of his\ndisease was owing to his having exposed and fatigued himself\ntoo much at Easter Island.\nOn the 6th and 7th of April, our navigators came within\nsight of four islands, which they knew to be the Marquesas.\nTo one of them, which was a new discovery, Captain Cook\ngave the name of Hood's Island, after that of the young gentleman by whom it was first seen. As soon as the ship was\nbrought to an anchor in Madre de Dios, or Resolution Bay, in\nthe Island of St. Christina, a traffic commenced, in the course\nof which the natives would frequently keep our goods, without\nmaking any return. At last the captain was obliged to fire a\nmusket-ball over one man who had several times treated the\nEnglish in this manner. This produced only a temporary effect.\nToo many of the Indians having come on board, our commander,\nwho was going in a boat to find a convenient place for mooring\nthe ship, said to the officers, 1 You must look well after these\npeople, or they will certainly carry off something or other.\"\nScarcely had he gotten into the boat, when he was informed\nthat they had stolen an iron stanchion from the opposite gangway, and were carrying it off. Upon this he ordered his men\nto fire over the canoe, till he could get round in the boat, but\nnot to kill any one. Such, however, was the noise made by the\nnatives, that the order was not heard; and the unhappy thief\nwas killed at the first shot. All the Indians having retired with\nprecipitation, in consequence of this unfortunate accident,\nCaptain Cook followed them into the bay, prevailed upon some\nof them to come alongside his boat, and, by suitable presents,\nso far conciliated their minds that their fears seemed to be in a\ngreat measure allayed. The death of their countryman did not\ncure them of their thievish disposition; but, at length, it was\nsomewhat restrained by their conviction that no distance secured\nthem from the reach of our muskets. Several smaller instances\nof their talent at stealing, the captain thought proper to overlook.\n 188 COOK'S VOYAGES.\nThe provisions obtained at St. Christina were yams, plantains,\nbread-fruit, a few cocoa-nuts, fowls, and small pigs. For a time,\nthe trade was carried on upon reasonable terms: but the market\nwas at last ruined by the indiscretion of some young gentlemen,\nwho gave away in exchange various articles which the inhabitants had not seen before, and which captivated their fancy\nabove nails, or more useful iron tools. One of the gentlemen\nhad given for a pig a very large quantity of red feathers which\nhe had gotten at Amsterdam. The effect of this was particularly fatal. It was not possible to support the trade in the\nmanner in which it was now begun, even for a single day.\nWhen, therefore, our commander found that he was not likely\nto be supplied on any conditions, with sufficient refreshments,\nand that the island was neither very convenient for taking in\nwood and water, nor for affording the necessary repairs of the\nship, he determined to proceed immediately to some other place,\nwhere the wants of his people could be effectually relieved.\nAfter having been nineteen weeks at sea, and having lived all\nthat time upon salt diet, a change in their food could not avoid\nbeing peculiarly desirable; and yet, on their arrival at St.\nChristina, it could scarcely be asserted that a single man was\nsick; and there were but a few who had the least complaint of\nany kind. \" This,\" says Captain Cook, | was undoubtedly\nowing to the many antiscorbutic articles we had on board, and\nto the great attention of the surgeon, who was remarkably careful to apply them in time.\" It may justly be added that this\nwas likewise owing to the singular care of the captain himself, and to the exertions of his authority in enforcing the excellent regulations which his wisdom and humanity had\nadopted.\nThe chief reason for our commander's touching at the Marquesas Islands, was to fix their situation; that being the only\ncircumstance in which the nautical account of them, given in\nMr. Dalrymple's collection, is deficient. It was farther desirable\nto settle this point, as it would lead to a more accurate knowledge of Mendana's other discoveries. Accordingly, Captain\nCook has marked the situation of the Marquesas with his usual\ncorrectness. He has also taken care to describe the particular\n COOK'S VOYAGES.\ncove in Resolution Bay, in the Island of St. Christina, which is\nmost convenient for obtaining wood and water.\nIt is remarkable, with respect to the inhabitants of the Marquesas Islands, that collectively taken, they are, without exception, the finest race of people in this sea. Perhaps they surpass\nall other nations in symmetry of form, and regularity of features.\nIt is plain, however, from the affinity of their language to that\nof Otaheite and the Society Isles, that they are of the same\norigin. Of this affinity the English were fully sensible, though\nthey could not converse with them; but Oedidee was capable\nof doing it tolerably well.\nFrom the Marquesas, Captain Cook steered for Otaheite,\nwith a view of falling in with some of the islands discovered by\nformer navigators, and especially by the Dutch, the situation of\nwhich had not been accurately determined. In the course of\nthe voyage, he passed a number of low islots, connected\ntogether by reefs of coral rocks. One of the islands, on which\nLieutenant Cooper went ashore with two boats well armed, was\ncalled by the natives Tiookea. It had been discovered and\nvisited by Captain Byron. The inhabitants of Tiookea are of a\nmuch darker colour than those of the higher islands, and\nappeared to be more fierce in their dispositions. This may be\nowing to their manner of gaining their subsistence, which is\nchiefly from the sea, and to their being much exposed to the\nsun and the weather. Our voyagers observed that they were\nstout well-made men, and that they had marked on their bodies\nthe figure of a fish, which was a good emblem of their profession.\nBesides passing by St. George's Islands, which had been so\nnamed by Captain Byron, our commander made the discovery\nof four others. These he called Palliser's Isles, in honour of\nhis particular friend, Sir Hugh Palliser. The inhabitants\nseemed to be the same sort of people as those of Tiookea, and,\nlike them, were armed with long pikes. Captain Cook could\nnot determine, with any degree of certainty, whether the group\nof isles he had lately seen, were, or were not, any of those that\nhad been discovered by the Dutch navigators. This was owing\nto the neglect of recording, with sufficient accuracy, the situation\nof their discoveries. Our commander hath, in general, observed,\n 190\nCOOKS VOYAGES.\nwith regard to this part of the ocean, that, from the latitude of\ntwenty down to fourteen *or twelve, and from the meridian of a\nhundred and thirty-eight to a hundred and forty-eight or a hundred and fifty west, it is so strewed with low isles that a navigator cannot proceed with too much caution.\nOn the 22nd of April, Captain Cook reached the Island of\nOtaheite, and anchored in Matavia Bay. As his chief reason\nfor putting in at this place was to give Mr. Wales an opportunity of ascertaining the error of the watch by the known\nlongitude, and to determine anew her rate of going, the first\nobject was to land the instruments, and to erect tents for the\nreception of a guard and such other people as it was necessary\nto have on shore. Sick there were none; for the refreshments\nwhich had been obtained at the Marquesas had removed every\ncomplaint of that kind.\nFrom the quantity of provisions which, contrary to expectation, our commander now found at Otaheite, he determined to\nmake a longer stay in the island than he had at first intended.\nAccordingly, he took measures for the repairs of the ship, which\nthe high southern latitudes had rendered indispensably necessary.\nDuring Captain Cook's stay at Otaheite, he maintained a\nmost friendly connection with the inhabitants; and a continual\ninterchange of visits was preserved between him and Otoo,\nTowha, and other chiefs of the country. His traffic with them\nwas greatly facilitated by his having fortunately brought with\nhim some red parrot feathers from the island of Amsterdam.\nThese were jewels of high value in the eyes of the Otaheitans.\nThe captain's stock-in-trade was by this time greatly exhausted;\nso that, if it had not been for the feathers, he would have found\nit difficult to have supplied the ship with the necessary refreshments.\nAmong other entertainments which our commander and the\nrest of the English gentlemen met with at Otaheite, one was a\ngrand naval review. The vessels of war consisted of a hundred\nand sixty large double canoes, well equipped, manned, and\narmed. They were decorated with flags and streamers; and\nthe chiefs, together with all those who were on the fighting\nstages, were dressed in their war habits. The whole fleet made\n a noble appearance; such as our voyagers had never seen\nin this sea, or could ever have expected. Besides the i\nof war, there were a hundred and seventy sail of smaller <\ncanoes, which seemed to be designed for transports\ntuallers. Upon each of them was a little house; and they\nwere rigged with mast and sail, which was not the case with\nthe war canoes. Captain Cook guessed that there were no less\nthan seven thousand seven hundred and sixty men in the whole\nfleet. He was not able to obtain full information concerning\nthe design of this armament\nNotwithstanding the agreeable intercourse that was in general\nmaintained between our commander and the people of Otaheite, circumstances occasionally happened which called for\npeculiar exertions of his prudence and resolution. One of the\nnatives, who had attempted t<\nwatering-place, was caught in th\nin irons. In this situation he\nother chiefs. Captain Cook ha^\ncrime of their countryman, Otoo\nat liberty. This the captain however refused, alleging, that since\nhe punished his own people when they committed the least\noffence against Otoo's, it was but just that this man should also\nbe punished. As Captain Cook knew that Otoo would not\npunish him, he resolved to do it himself. Accordingly, he\ndirected the criminal to be carried on shore to the tents, and\nhaving himself followed with the chiefs and other Otaheitans,\nhe ordered the guard out, under arms, and commanded the\nman to be tied up to a post Otoo again solicited the culprit's\nrelease, and in this he was seconded by his sister, but in vain.\nThe captain expostulated with him on the conduct of the man\nand of the Indians in general; telling him, that neither he nor\nany of the ship's company took the smallest matter of property\nfrom them without first paying for it: enumerating the articles\nwhich the English had given in exchange for such and such\nthings; and urging that it was wrong in them to steal from\nthose who were their friends. He added, that the punishing of\nthe guilty person would be the means of saving the lives of\nseveral of Otoo's people, by deterring them from committing\n COOKS VOYAGES.\ncrimes of the like nature, and thus preventing them from the\ndanger of being shot to death, which would certainly happen,\nat one time or other, if they persisted in their robberies. With\nthese arguments the king appeared to be satisfied, and only desired that the man might not be killed. Captain Cook then\ndirected that the crowd, which was very great, should be kept\nat a proper distance, and in the presence of them all, ordered\nthe fellow two dozen of lashes with a cat-o'-nine-tails. This\npunishment the man sustained with great firmness, after which\nhe was set at liberty. When the natives were going away,\nTowha called them back, and, with much gracefulness of action,\naddressed them in a speech of nearly half-an-hour in length,\nthe design of which was to condemn their present conduct, and\nto recommend a different one for the future. To make a farther impression upon the minds of the inhabitants, our commander ordered his marines to go through their exercises, and\nto load and fire in volleys with ball. As they were very quick\nin their manoeuvres, it is more easy to conceive than to describe\nthe amazement which possessed the Indians during the whole\ntime, and especially those of them who had not seen anything\nof the kind before.\nThe judicious will discern with regard to this narrative that\nit throws peculiar light on Captain Cook's character. Nor is it\nan uncurious circumstance in the history of human society,\nthat a stranger should thus exercise jurisdiction over the natives\nof a country, in the presence of the prince of that country,\nwithout his authority, and even contrary to his solicitations.\nAnother disagreeable altercation with the inhabitants of\nOtaheite arose from the negligence of one of the English sentinels on shore. Having either slept or quitted his post, an\nIndian seized the opportunity of carrying off his musket. When\nany extraordinary theft was committed, it immediately excited\nsuch an alarm among the natives in general, from their fear of\nCaptain Cook's resentment, that they fled from their habitations, and a stop was put to the traffic for provisions. On the\npresent occasion the captain had no small degree of trouble;\nbut, by his prudent conduct, the musket was recovered, peace\nrestored, and commerce again opened. In the differences\n COOK'S VOYAGES. 193\nwhich happened with the several people he met with in his\nvoyages, it was a rule with him never to touch the least article\nof their property, any farther than to detain their canoes for a\nwhile when it became absolutely necessary. He always chose\nthe most mild and equitable methods of bringing them to\nreason; and in this he not only succeeded, but frequently put\nthings upon a better footing than if no contention had taken\nplace.\nDuring this visit to Otaheite, fruit and other refreshments\nwere obtained in great plenty. The relief arising from them\nwas the more agreeable and salutary, as the bread of the ship\nwas in a bad condition. Though the biscuit had been aired\nand picked at New Zealand, it was now in such a state of decay\nthat it was necessary for it to undergo another airing and\ncleaning, in which much of it was found wholly rotten and unfit to be eaten. This decay was judged to be owing to the ice\nour navigators had frequently taken in when to the southward,\nwhich made the hold of the vessel cold and damp, and to the\ngreat heat that succeeded when they came to the north. Whatever was the cause, the loss was so considerable that the men\nwere put to a scanty allowance in this article, with the additional\nmortification of the bread's being bad that could be used.\nTwo goats that had been given by Captain Furneaux to\nOtoo, in the former part of the voyage, seemed to promise fair\nfor answering the purposes for which they were left upon the\nisland. The ewe soon after had two female kids, which were\nnow so far grown as to be almost ready to propagate. At the\nsame time, the old ewe was again with kid. The people were\nvery fond of them, and they were in excellent condition. From\nthese circumstances Captain Cook entertained a hope that, in\na course of years, they would multiply so much as to be extended over all the isles of the Southern Ocean. The like success did not attend the sheep which had been left in the\ncountry. \u2022 These speedily died, one excepted, which was said\nto be yet alive. Our navigators also furnished the natives with\ncats, having given away no less than twenty at Otaheite, besides some which had been made presents of at Ulietea and\nHuaheine.\n COOKS VOYAGES.\nill\nWith regard to the number of the inhabitants of Otaheite,\nour commander collected from comparing several facts together,\nthat, including women and children, there could not be less in\nthe whole island than two hundred and four thousand. This\nnumber, at first sight, exceeded his belief. But when he came\nto reflect on the vast swarms of people that appeared wherever\nhe went, he was convinced that the estimate was agreeable to\ntruth.\nSuch was the friendly treatment which our voyagers met with\nat Otaheite, that one of the gunner's mates was induced to form\na plan for remaining in the country. As he knew that he could\nnot execute his scheme with success while the Resolution continued in Matavai Bay, he took the opportunity, when she was\nready to quit it, and the sails were set for that purpose, to slip\noverboard. Being a good swimmer, he had no doubt of getting\nsafe to a canoe, which was at some distance ready to receive\nhim; for his design was concerted with the natives, and had\neven been encouraged by Otoo. However,, he was discovered\nbefore he had gotten clear of the ship, and a boat being presently hoisted out, he was taken up, and brought back to the\nvessel. When our commander reflected on this man's situation,\nhe did not think him very culpable, or his desire of staying in\nthe island so extraordinary, as might at first view be imagined.\nHe was a native of Ireland, and had sailed in the Dutch service. Captain Cook, on his return from his former voyage,\nhad picked him up at Batavia, and had kept him in his employment ever since. It did not appear that he had either friends\nor connections which could bind him to any particular part of\nthe world. All nations being alike to him, where could he be\nmore happy than at Otaheite? Here, in one of the finest\nclimates of the globe, he could enjoy not only the necessaries,\nbut the luxuries of life, in ease and plenty. The captain seems\nto think that if the man had applied to him in time he might\nhave given his consent to his remaining in the country.\nOn the 15th of May, Captain Cook anchored in O'Wharro\nHarbour, in the island of Huaheine. He was immediately\nvisited by his friend Oree, and the same agreeable intercourse\nsubsisted between the captain and this good old chief, which\nill:\n COOKS VOYAGES.\n195\nhad formerly taken place. Red feathers were not here in such\nestimation as they had been at Otaheite; the natives of Huaheine\nhaving the good sense to give a preference to the more useful\narticles of nails and axes. During the stay of our voyagers in\nthe island, some alarms were occasioned by the thievish disposition of several of the inhabitants; but matters subsided\nwithout any material consequences. A solemn march, which\nour commander made through part of the country at the head\nof forty-eight men, tended to impress the Indians with a sense\nof his power arid authority. In fact, their attempts at stealing\nhad been too much invited by the indiscretion of some of the\nEnglish, who unguardedly separated themselves in the woods\nfor the purpose of killing birds, and who managed their muskets\nso unskilfully as to render them less formidable in the eyes of\nthe natives.\nI cannot persuade myself to omit a dramatic entertainment,\n.at which several of the gentlemen belonging to the Resolution\nattended one evening. The piece represented a girl as running\naway with our navigators from Otaheite; and the story was\npartly founded in truth; for a young woman had taken a passage in the ship down to Ulietea. She happened to be present\nat the representation of her own adventures; which had such\nan effect upon her, that it was with great difficulty that she\ncould be prevailed upon by the English gentlemen to see the\nplay out, or to refrain from tears while it was acting. The piece\nconcluded with the reception which she was supposed to meet\nwith from her friends at her return; and it was a reception that\nwas by no means favourable. As these people, when they see\noccasion, can add little extempore pieces to their entertainments,\nit is reasonable to imagine, that the representation now described\nwas intended as a satire against the girl, and to discourage others\nfrom following her steps. Such is the sense which they entertain of the propriety of female decorum.\nDuring Captain Cook's stay at Huaheine, bread-fruit, cocoa-\nnuts, and other vegetable productions were procured in abundance, but not a sufficiency of hogs to supply the daily expense\nof the ship. This was partly owing to a want of proper articles\nfor traffic. The captain was obliged, therefore, to set the smiths\n 196\nCOOKS VOYAGES.\n1\nat work to make different sorts of nails, iron tools, and instruments, in order to enable him to obtain refreshments at the\nislands he was yet to visit, and to support his credit and influence among the natives.\nWhen our commander was ready to sail from Huaheine, Oree\nwas the last man that went out of the vessel. At parting,\nCaptain Cook told him that they should meet each other no\nmore; at which he wept, and said, | Let your sons come, we\nwill treat them well.\"\nAt Ulietea, to which the captain next directed his course,\nthe events that occurred were nearly similar to those which have\nalready been related. He had always been received by the\npeople of this island in the most hospitable manner, and they\nwere justly entitled to everything which it was in his power to\ngrant. They expressed the deepest concern at his departure,\nand were continually importuning him to return. Oreo the\nchief, and his wife and daughter, but especially the two latter,\nscarcely ever ceased weeping. Their grief was so excessive,\nthat it might, perhaps, be doubted whether it was entirely\nsincere and unaffected; but our commander was of opinion\nthat it was real. At length, when he was ready to sail, they\ntook a most affectionate leave. Oreo's last request to Captain\nCook was, that he would return; and when he could not obtain\na promise to that effect, he asked the name of his burying-place.\nTo this strange question the captain answered, without hesitation,\nthat it was Stepney; that being the parish in which he lived\nwhen in London. Mr. Forster, to whom the same question\nwas proposed, replied with greater wisdom and recollection, that\nno man who used the sea, could say where he should be buried.\nAs our commander could not promise, or even then suppose,\nthat more English ships would be sent to the southern isles,\nOedidee, who for so many months had been the faithful companion of our navigators, chose to remain in bis native country.\nBut he left them with a regret fully demonstrative of his esteem\nand affection, nor could anything have torn him from them,\nbut the fear of never returning. When Oreo pressed so ardently\nCaptain Cook's return, he sometimes gave such answers as left\nroom for hope. At these answers Oedidee would eagerly catch,\n COOKS VOYAGES. W\ntake him on one side, and ask him over again. The captain\ndeclares that he had not words to describe the anguish which\nappeared in this young man's breast when he went away. He\nlooked up at the ship, burst into tears, and then sunk down\ninto the canoe. Oedidee was a youth of good parts, and of a\ndocile, gentle, and humane disposition; but as he was almost\nwholly ignorant of the religion, government, manners, customs,\nand traditions of his countrymen, and the neighbouring islands,\nno material knowledge could have been collected from him,\nhad our commander brought him away. He would, however,\nin every respect, have been a better specimen of the nation\nthan Omai.\nWhen Captain Cook first came to these islands, he had some\nthoughts of visiting Tupia's famous Bolabola. But having\nobtained a plentiful supply of refreshments, and the route he\nhad in view allowing him no time to spare, he laid this design\naside, and directed his course to the west. Thus did he take\nhis leave, as he then thought, for ever of these happy isles, on\nwhich benevolent nature has spread her luxuriant sweets with a\nlavish hand; and in which the natives, copying the bounty of\nProvidence, are equally liberal, being ready to contribute plentifully and cheerfully to the wants of navigators.1\nOn the 6th of June, the day after our voyagers left Ulietea,\nthey saw land, which they found to be a low reef island, about\nfour leagues in compass, and of a circular form. This was\nHowe Island, which had been discovered by Captain Wallis.\nNothing remarkable occurred from this day to the 16th, when\nland was again seen. It was another reef island, and being a\nnew discovery, Captain Cook gave it the name of Palmerston\nIsland, in honour of Lord Palmerston. On the 20th fresh\nland appeared, which was perceived to be inhabited. This\ninduced our commander to go on shore with a party of gentlemen ; but the natives were found to be fierce and untractable.\nAll endeavours to bring them to a parley were to no purpose,\n1 From Mr. Wales's observations it appeared that, during five months in\nwhich the watch had passed through the extremes of heat and cold, it went\nbetter in the cold than in the hot climates.\n 198 COOKS VOYAGES.\nfor they came on with the ferocity of wild boars, and instantly\nthrew their darts. Two or three muskets discharged in the air\ndid not prevent one of them from advancing still farther, and\nthrowing another. dart, or rather a spear, which passed close\nover Captain Cook's shoulder. The courage of this man had\nnearly cost him his life. When he threw his spear he was not\nfive paces from the captain, who had resolved to shoot him for\nhis own preservation: It happened, however, that his musket\nmissed fire; a circumstance on which he afterward reflected\nwith pleasure. When he joined his party and tried his musket\nin the air it went off perfectly well. This island, from the disposition and behaviour of the natives, with whom no intercourse\ncould be established, and from whom no -benefit could be\nreceived, was called by our commander Savage Island. It is\nabout eleven leagues in circuit; is of a round form and good\nheight, and has deep waters close to its shores. Among its\nother disadvantages it is not furnished with a harbour.\nIn pursuing his course to the west-south-west, Captain Cook\npassed by a number of small islands, and on the 26th anchored\non the north side of Anamocka, or Rotterdam. A traffic\nimmediately commenced with the natives, who brought what\nprovisions they had, being chiefly yams and shaddocks, which\nthey exchanged for nails, beads, and other small articles.\nHere, as in many former cases, the captain was put to some\ntrouble on account of the thievish disposition of the inhabitants.\nAs they had gotten possession of an adze and two muskets, he\nfound it necessary to exert himself with peculiar vigour, in\norder to oblige them to make restitution. For this purpose he\ncommanded all the marines to be armed and sent on shore;\nand the result of this measure was, that the things which had\nbeen stolen were restored. In the contest Captain Cook was\nunder the necessity of firing some small shot at a native, who\nhad distinguished himself ,by his resistance. His countrymen\nafterward reported that he was dead; but he was only wounded,\nand that not in a dangerous manner. Though his sufferings\nwere the effects of his own misbehaviour, the captain endeavoured to soften them by making him a present, and directing\nhis wounds to be dressed by the surgeon of the ship.\n COOKS VOYAGES.\n199\nThe first time that our commander landed at Anamocka, an\nold lady presented him with a girl, and gave him to understand\nthat she was at his service. Miss, who had previously been\ninstructed, wanted a spikenail or a shirt, neither of which he\nhad to give her; and he flattered himself that, by making the\ntwo women sensible of his poverty, he should easily get clear\nof their importunities. In' this, however, he was mistaken.\nThe favours of the young lady were offered upon credit, and on\nhis declining the proposal, the old woman began to argue with\nhim, and then to abuse him. As far as he could collect from\nher countenance and her actions, the design of her speech was\nboth to ridicule and reproach him for refusing to entertain so\nfine a young woman. Indeed, the girl was by no means destitute\nof beauty; but Captain Cook found it more easy to withstand\nher allurements than the abuses of the ancient matron, and\nand therefore hastened into his boat.\nWhile the captain was on shore at Anamocka he got the\nnames of twenty islands which lie between the north-west and\nnorth-east. Some of them were in sight, and two of them,\nwhich are most to the west, are remarkable on account of their\ngreat height. These are Amattafoa and Oghao. From a continual column of smoke which was seen daily ascending from\nthe middle of Amattafoa, it, was judged that there was a volcano\nin that island.\nAnamocka was first discovered by Tasman, and by him was\nnamed Rotterdam. It is of a triangular form, and each side\nextends about three and a half or four miles. From the northwest to the south of the island, round by the east and north,\nit is encompassed by a number of small isles, sand-banks, and\nbreakers. An end could not be seen to their extent to the\nnorth, and they may possibly reach as far to the south as\nAmsterdam or Tongataboo. Together with Middleburg, or\nEaoowe, and Pilsart, these form a group, containing about\nthree degrees of latitude and two of longitude. To this group\nCaptain Cook had given the name of the Friendly Isles or\nArchipelago, from the firm alliance and friendship which\nseemed to subsist among their inhabitants, and from their\ncourteous behaviour to strangers. The same group may perhaps\n COOKS VOYAGES.\nbe extended much farther, even down to Boscawen and Keppel's\nIsles, which were discovered by Captain Wallis, and lie nearly\nin the same meridian.\nWhilst our commander was at Anamocka he was particularly\nassiduous to prevent the introduction of a certain disorder.\nAs some of his people brought with them the remains of this\ndisease from the Society Isles, he prohibited them from having\nany female intercourse, and he had reason to believe that his\nendeavours were successful.\nThe productions of Rotterdam, and the persons, manners,\nand customs of its inhabitants are similar to those of Amsterdam.\nIt is not, however, equally plentiful in its fruits, nor is every\npart of it in so high a state of cultivation. Neither hath it\narisen to the same degree of wealth, with regard to cloth,\nmatting, ornaments, and other articles, which constitute the\nchief riches of the islanders of the Southern Ocean.\nPursuing their course to the west, our navigators discovered\nland on the ist of July; and, upon a nearer approach, found it\nto be a small island, to which, on account of the number of turtle\nthat were seen upon the coast, Captain Cook gave the name of\nTurtle Isle. On the 16th high land was seen bearing south-west,\nwhich no one doubted to be the Australis del Espirito Santo\nof Quiros, and which is called by M. de Bougainville the\nGreat Cyclades. After exploring the coast for some days,\nthe captain came to an anchor, in a harbour in the island of\nMallicollo. One of his first objects was to commence a friendly\nintercourse with the natives, but while he was thus employed\nan accident occurred which threw all into confusion, though in\nthe end it was rather advantageous than hurtful to the English.\nA fellow in a canoe, having been refused admittance into one\nof our boats, bent his bow to shoot a poisoned arrow at the\nboatkeeper. Some of his countrymen having prevented his\ndoing it that instant, time was given to acquaint our commander\nwith the transaction, who immediately ran upon deck. At this\nminute the Indian had directed his bow to the boatkeeper,\nbut upon being called to by Captain Cook he pointed it at\nhim. Happily the captain had a musket in his hand loaded\nwith small shot, and gave him the contents. By this, however,\n COOKS VOYAGES.\nhe was only staggered for a moment, for he still held his bow\nin the attitude of shooting. A second discharge of the same\nnature made him drop it, and obliged him, together with the\nother natives who were in the canoe, to paddle off with all\npossible celerity. At this time some of the inhabitants began\nto shoot arrows from another quarter. A musket discharged\nin the air had no effect upon them, but no sooner was a four-\npound ball shot over their heads than they fled in the utmost\nconfusion.\nA few hours after these transactions, the English put off in\ntwo boats and landed in the face of four or five hundred people\nwho were assembled on the shore, and who, though they were\nall armed with bows and arrows, clubs and spears, made not the\nleast opposition. On the contrary, when they saw Captain Cook\nadvance with nothing but a green branch in his hand, one of\nthem, who appeared to be a chief, giving his bow and arrows to\nanother, met the captain in the water, bearing also a green\nbranch. These being mutually exchanged in token of friendship, the chief led our commander to the crowd, to whom he\nimmediately distributed presents. The marines, in the meantime were drawn up on the beach. Captain Cook then acquainted the Indians, by signs, that he wanted wood; and in\nthe same manner permission was granted him to cut down the\ntrees.\nMuch traffic could not be carried on with these people, because they set no value on nails or iron tools, or, indeed, on\nany articles which our navigators could furnish. In such exchanges as they did make, and which were principally of\narrows for pieces of cloth, they distinguished themselves by\ntheir honesty. When the ship had begun to sail from the\nisland, and they might easily, in consequence of their canoes\ndropping astern, have avoided delivering the things they had\nbeen paid for, they used their utmost efforts to get up with her,\nthat they might discharge their obligations. One man in particular followed the Resolution a considerable time, and did\nnot reach her till the object which brought him was forgotten.\nAs soon as he came alongside the vessel he held up the thing\nwhich had been purchased; and, though several of the crew\n 202 COOK'S VOYAGES.\noffered to buy it, he insisted upon delivering it to the person to\nwhom it had been sold. That person, not knowing him again,\nwould have given something in return; but this he refused, and\nshowed him what he had before received. There was only a\nsingle instance in which the natives took, or even attempted to\ntake, anything from our voyagers, by any means whatever; and\nin that case restitution was immediately made, without trouble\nand without altercation.\nThe inhabitants of Mallicollo, in general, are the most ugly\nand ill-proportioned people that Captain Cook had ever seen,\nand are in every respect different from all the nations which had\nbeen met with in the Southern Ocean. They are a very dark-\ncoloured and rather a diminutive race, with long heads, flat faces,\nand countenances which have some resemblance to that of the\nmonkey. Their hair, which is mostly black or brown, is short\nand curly, but not altogether so soft and woolly as that of a\nnegro. The difference of this people from any whom our commander had yet visited, appeared not only in their persons but\ntheir language. Of about eighty words which were collected by\nMr. Forster, scarcely one was found to bear any affinity to the\nlanguage spoken in any country or island hitherto described. It\nwas observed by Captain Cook that the natives could pronounce\nmost of the English words with great ease. They had not so\nmuch as a name for a dog, and knew nothing of that animal,\nfor which reason the captain left them a dog and a bitch; and\nas they were very fond of them, it was highly probable that the\nbreed would be fostered and increased.\nTo the harbour in which our commander anchored while he\nlay at Mallicollo, he gave the name of Port Sandwich. It has\nmany advantages with regard to depth of water, shelter from\nwinds, and lying so near the shore as to be a cover to those of\na ship's company who may be carrying on any necessary operations at land.\nSoon after our navigators had gotten to sea, which was on the\n23rd of July, they discovered three or four small islands, that\nbefore had appeared to be connected. At this time the Resolution was not far from the Isle of Ambrym, the Isle of Paoom,\nand the Isle of Apee. On the next morning several more islands\nHit\n COOK'S VOYAGES.\n203\nwere discovered, lying off the south-east point of Apee, and constituting a group, which Captain Cook called Shepherd's Isles,\nin honour of his learned and valuable friend, Dr. Shepherd,\nPlumian professor of Astronomy at Cambridge. The ship was\nthis day in some danger. It suddenly fell calm, and our\nvoyagers, were left to the mercy of the current, close by the\nisles, where no sounding could be found with a line of a\nhundred and eighty fathoms. The lands or islands which lay\naround the vessel in every direction were so numerous that they\ncould not be counted. At this crisis a breeze sprung up, which\nhappily relieved the captain and his company from the anxiety\nthe calm had occasioned.\nAmidst the number of islands that were continually seen by\nour navigators, there was only one on which no inhabitants were\ndiscerned. This consisted chiefly of a remarkable peaked rock\nwhich was only accessible to birds, and which obtained the\nname of the Monument.\nIn the farther course of the ship to the southward, our navigators drew near to certain lands which they found to consist of\none large island, the southern and western extremities of which\nextended beyond their sight. Three or four smaller ones lay off\nits north side. To the two principal of these Captain Cook\ngave the name of Montagu and Hinchinbrook; and the large\nisland he named Sandwich, in honour of his noble patron, the\nEarl of Sandwich. This island, which was spotted with woods\nand lawns agreeably diversified over the whole surface, and which\nhad a gentle slope from the hills down to the sea coast, exhibited\na most beautiful and delightful prospect. The examination of\nit was not, however, so much an object with our commander as\nto proceed to the south, in order to find the southern extremity\nof the Archipelago.\nPursuing his discoveries, Captain Cook came in sight of an\nisland, which was afterward known to be called by the natives\nErromango. After coasting it for three days, he brought his\nvessel to anchor in a bay there on the 3rd of August. The next\nday he went with two boats to examine the coast, and to look\nfor a proper landing-place, that he might obtain a supply of\nwood and water. At this time the inhabitants began to assemble\n 204\nCOOK'S VOYAGES.\non the shore, and by signs to invite our people to land. Their\nbehaviour was apparently so friendly, that the captain was\ncharmed with it; and the only thing which could give him the\nleast suspicion was that most of them were armed with clubs,\nspears, darts, and bows and arrows. He did not, therefore, remit his vigilance, but kept his eye continually upon the chief,\nwatching his looks as well as his actions. It soon was evident\nthat the intentions of the Indians were totally hostile. They\nmade a violent attempt to seize upon one of the boats; and\nthough, on our commander's pointing a musket at them, they\nin some measure desisted, yet they returned in an instant, seemingly determined to carry their design into execution. At the\nhead of the party was the chief; while others, who could not\ncome at the boat, stood behind with darts, stones, and bows\nand arrows in hand, ready to support their countrymen. As\nsigns and threats had no effect, the safety of Captain Cook and\nhis people became the only object of consideration ; and yet he\nwas unwilling to fire on the multitude. He resolved, therefore,\nto make the chief alone the victim of his own treachery, and\naccordingly aimed his musket at him; but at this critical\nmoment it missed fire. This circumstance encouraged the\nnatives to despise our weapons, and to show the superiority of\ntheir own, by throwing stones and darts, and by shooting arrows.\nHence it became absolutely necessary for the captain to give\norders to his men to fire upon the assailants. The first discharge threw them into confusion; but a second was scarcely\nsufficient to drive them off the beach. In consequence of this\nskirmish, four of the Indians lay, to all appearance, dead on the\nshore. However, two of them were afterward perceived to\ncrawl into the bushes; and it was happy for these people that\nnot half of the muskets of the English would go off, since otherwise many more must have fallen. The inhabitants were, at\nlength, so terrified as to make no farther appearance; and two\noars which had been lost in the conflict were left standing up\nagainst the bushes.\nIt was observed of these islanders, that they seemed of a\ndifferent race from those of Mallicollo, and that they spoke a\ndifferent language. They are of a middle size, with\n COOK'S VOYAGES.\n205\nshape and tolerable features. Their colour is very dark; and\ntheir aspect is not mended by a custom they have of painting\ntheir faces, some with a black and others with a red pigment.\nAs to their hair it is curly and crisp, and somewhat woolly.\nThe few women who were seen, and who appeared to be ugly,\nwore a kind of petticoat, made either of palm leaves, or of a\nplant similar in its nature; but the men, like those of Mallicollo,\nwere almost entirely naked. On account of the treacherous\nbehaviour of the inhabitants of Erromango, Captain Cook called\na promontory or peninsula near which the skirmish happened,\nTraitor's Head.\nFrom this place the captain sailed for an island which had\nbeen discovered before, at a distance, and at which, on account\nof his wanting a large quantity of wood and water, he was resolved to make some stay. At first the natives were disposed\nto be very hostile; but our commander, with equal wisdom and\nhumanity, contrived to terrify them without danger to their lives.\nThis was principally effected by firing a few great guns, at which\nthey were so much alarmed as afterward to be brought to\ntolerable order. Among these islanders, many were inclined\nto be on friendly terms with our navigators, and especially the\nold people ; whilst most of the younger were daring and insolent,\nand obliged the English to keep to their arms. It was natural\nenough that age should be prudent and cautious, and youth bold\nand impetuous; and yet this distinction, with regard to the\nbehaviour of the various nations which had been visited by\nCaptain Cook, had not occurred before.\nThe island where the captain now stayed was found, upon\ninquiry, to be called by the inhabitants Tanna; and three\nothers in its neighbourhood, and which could be seen from it,\nwere distinguished by the names of Immer, Erronan or Footoona,\nand Annatom.\nFrom such information of the natives, as our commander\ncould see no reason to doubt, it appeared that circumcision was\npractised among them, and that they were eaters of human\nflesh. Concerning the latter subject, he should never have\nthought of asking them a single question if they had not introduced it themselves, by inquiring whether the English had the\n 206 COOK'S VOYAGES.\nsame custom. It hath been argued that necessity alone could\nbe the origin of this horrid practice. But as the people of Tanna\nare possessed of fine pork and fowls, together with an abundance of roots and fruits, the plea of necessity cannot be urged\nin their behalf. In fact, no instance was seen of their eating\nhuman flesh; and, therefore, there might perhaps be some\nreason to hesitate in pronouncing them to be cannibals.\nBy degrees the inhabitants grew so courteous and civil, as to\npermit the English gentlemen to ramble about in the skirts of\nthe woods and to shoot in them, without affording them the\nleast molestation, or showing any dislike. One day, some boys\nof the island having gotten behind thickets, and thrown two or\nthree stones at our people who were cutting wood, they were\nfired at by the petty officers on duty. Captain Cook, who was\nthen on shore, was alarmed at the report of the muskets ; and,\nwhen he was informed of the cause, was much displeased that\nso wanton a use should be made of our fire-arms. Proper\nmeasures were taken by him to prevent such conduct for the\nfuture.\nIn the island of Tanna was a volcano, which sometimes made\na dreadful noise, and at each explosion, which happened every\nthree or four minutes, threw up fire and smoke in prodigious\ncolumns. At one time great stones were seen high in the air.\nAt the foot of the hill were several hot springs; and on the side\nof it Mr. Forster found some places whence smoke of a sulphureous smell issued through cracks or fissures of the earth.\nA thermometer that was placed in a little hole made in one of\nthem, and which in the open air stood only at eighty, rose to a\nhundred and seventy. In another instance the mercury rose\nto a hundred and ninety-one. Our commander, being desirous\nof getting a near and good view of the volcano, set out with a\nparty for that purpose. But the gentlemen met with so many\nobstructions from the inhabitants, who were jealous of their\npenetrating far into the country, that they thought proper to\nreturn.\nIt is observable, with respect to the volcano of Tanna, that it\nis not on the ridge of the hill to which it belongs, but on its side.\nNor is that hill the highest in the country, for there are others\n COOK'S VOYAGES.-\nnear it of more than double its height. It was in moist and wet\nweather that the volcano was most violent.\nWhen our commander was ready to sail from Tanna, an event\nhappened which gave him much concern. Just as our people\nwere getting some logs into the boat, four or five of the natives\nstepped forward to see what they were doing. In consequence\nof the Indians not being allowed to come within certain limits,\nthe sentinel ordered them back, upon which they readily complied. At this time Captain Cook, who had his eyes fixed upon\nthem, observed the sentry present his piece to the men. The\ncaptain was going to reprove him for his action, when, to his inexpressible astonishment, the sentry fired. An attack so causeless and extraordinary naturally threw the natives into great\nconfusion. Most of them fled, and it was with difficulty that\nour commander could prevail upon a few of them to remain.\nAs they ran off he perceived one of them to fall, who was immediately lifted up by two others, who took him into the water,\nwashed his wound, and then led him off. The wounded person\nnot being carried far, Captain Cook sent for the surgeon of the\nship, and accompanied him to the man, whom they found\nexpiring. The rascal that had fired pretended that an Indian\nhad laid an arrow across his bow, and was going to shoot at\nhim; so that he apprehended himself to be in danger. This,\nhowever, was no more than what the islanders had always done,\nto show that they were armed as well as our voyagers. What\nrendered the present incident the more unfortunate was, that it\nwas not the man who bent the bow, but one who stood near\nhim, that was shot by the sentry.\nThe harbour where the captain anchored, during his stay .at\nTanna, was called by him Port Resolution, after the name of\nthe ship, she being the first vessel by which it was ever entered.\nNo place can exceed it in its convenience for taking in wood\nand water, which are both close to the shore. The inhabitant\nof the island, with whom our commander had the most frequent\nand friendly connections, was named Poawang.\nVery little trade could be carried on with the people of Tanna.\nThey had not the least knowledge of iron; and consequently\nnails, tools, and other articles made of that metal, and which are so\n 208\nCOOK'S VOYAGES.\ngreedily sought for in the more eastern isles, were here of no consideration. Cloth could be of no service to persons who go naked.\nAmong the productions of the island, there is reason to believe\nthat the nutmeg-tree might be mentioned. This is collected\nfrom the circumstance of Mr. Forster's having shot a pigeon, in\nthe craw of which a wild nutmeg was discovered. However,\nthough he took some pains to find the tree, his endeavours were\nnot attended with success.\nIt was at first thought by our navigators that the inhabitants\nof Tanna were a race between the natives of the Friendly Islands\nand those of Mallicollo; but by a short acquaintance with them\nthey were convinced that they had little or no affinity to either,\nexcepting in their hair. Some few men, women, and children\nwere seen whose hair resembled that of the English. With\nregard, however, to these persons, it was obvious that they were\nof another nation; and it was understood that they came from\nErronan. Two languages were found to be spoken in Tanna.\nOne of them, which appeared to have been introduced from\nErronan, is nearly, if not exactly, the same with that of the\nFriendly Islands. The other, which is the proper language of\nthe country, and which is judged to be peculiar to Tanna,\nErromango, and Annatom, is different from any that had hitherto been met with by our voyagers.\nThe people of Tanna are of the middle size, and for the most\npart slender. There are few tall or stout men among them. In\ngeneral, they have good features and agreeable countenances.\nLike all the tropical race, they are active and nimble; and seem\nto excel in the use of arms, but not to be fond of labour. With\nrespect to the management of their weapons, Mr. Wales hath\nmade an observation so honourable to Homer, that were I to\nomit it, I should not be forgiven by my classical readers. \" I\nmust confess,\" says Mr. Wales, \"I have often been led to think\nthe feats which Homer represents his heroes as performing with\ntheir spears, a little too much of the marvellous to be admitted\ninto an heroic poem : I mean when confined within the strait\nstays of Aristotle. Nay, even so great an advocate for him as\nMr. Pope, acknowledges them to be surprising. But since I\nhave seen what these people can do with their wooden spears,\n COOK'S VOYAGES.\n209\nand them badly pointed and not of a hard nature, I have not\nthe least exception to any one passage in that great poet on this\naccount. But if I see fewer exceptions, I can find infinitely\nmore beauties in him; as he has, I think, scarcely an action,\ncircumstance, or description of any kind whatever, relating to a\nspear, which I have not seen and recognized among these people;\nas their whirling motion, and whistling noise, as they fly; their\nquivering motion, as they stick in the ground when they fall;\ntheir meditating their aim, when they are going to throw; and\ntheir shaking them in their hand, as they go along.\"\nOn the 20th of August, Captain Cook sailed from Tanna, and\nemployed all the remainder of the month in a farther examination\nof the islands around him. He had now finished his survey of\nthe whole Archipelago, and had gained a knowledge of it infinitely superior to what had ever been attained before. The\nnorthern islands of this Archipelago were first discovered in\n1606, by that eminent navigator Quiros, who considered them as\npart of the southern continent, which at that time, and till very\nlately, was supposed to exist. M. de Bougainville was the next\nperson by whom they were visited, in 1768. This gentleman,\nhowever, besides landing in the Isle of Lepers, only made the\ndiscovery that the country was not connected but composed of\nislands, which he called the Great Cyclades. Captain Cook,\nbesides ascertaining the situation and extent of these islands,\nadded to them several new ones which had hitherto been unknown, and explored the whole. He thought therefore that he\nhad obtained a right to name them; and accordingly he bestowed\nupon them the appellation of the New Hebrides. His title to\nthis honour will not be disputed in any part of Europe, and\ncertainly not by so enlightened and liberal a people as the French\nnation.\nThe season of the year now rendered it necessary for our commander to return to the south, while he had yet some time to\nexplore any land he might meet with between the New Hebrides\nand New Zealand; at which last place he intended to touch,\nthat he might refresh his people, and renew his stock of wood\nand water for another southern course. With this view, he\nsailed on the 1st of September, and on the 4th land was dis-\n COOK'S VOYAGES.\ncovered ; in a harbour belonging to which the Resolution came\nto an anchor the next day. The design of Captain Cook was\nnot only to visit the country, but to have an opportunity of\nobserving an eclipse of the sun, which was soon to happen. An\nintercourse immediately commenced with the inhabitants, who,\nduring the whole of the captain's stay, behaved in a very civil\nand friendly manner. In return, he was solicitous to render\nthem every service in his power. To Teabooma the chief, he\nsent, among other articles, a dog and a bitch, both young but\nnearly full grown. It was some time before Teabooma could\nbelieve that the two animals were intended for him ; but when\nhe was convinced of it, he was lost in an excess of joy. Another,\nand still more valuable present, was that of a young boar and\nsow ; which, on account of the absence of the chief when they\nwere brought to land, were received with great hesitation and\nceremony.\nThe last time that our commander went on shore at this\nplace, he ordered an inscription to be cut on a large tree,\nsetting forth the name of the ship, the date of the year, and\nother circumstances, which testified that the English were the\nfirst discoverers of the country. This he had before done,\nwherever such a ceremony seemed necessary. How the island\nwas called by the natives our voyagers could never learn: and\ntherefore Captain Cook gave it the name of New Caledonia.\nThe inhabitants are strong, robust, active, and well made.\nWith regard to the origin of the nation, the captain judged\nthem to be a race between the people of Tanna and the Friendly\nIsles; or between those of Tanna and the New Zealanders; or\nall three. Their language is in some respects a mixture of them\nall. In their disposition they are courteous and obliging; and\nthey are not in the least addicted to pilfering, which is more\nthan can be asserted concerning any other nation in this sea.\nThe women of New Caledonia, and those likewise of Tanna,\nwere found to be much chaster than the females of the more\neastern islands. Our commander never heard that the least\nfavour was obtained from them by any one of his company.\nSometimes, indeed, the women would exercise a little coquetry,\nbut they went no farther.\n COOK'S VOYAGES.\nThe botanists of the ship did not here complain for want of\nemployment. They were diligent in their researches, and their\nlabours were amply rewarded. Every day brought some new\naccession to botanical knowledge, or that of other branches of\nnatural history.\nEverything being ready to put to sea, Captain Cook weighed\nanchor on the 13th of September, with the purpose of examining\nthe coast of New Caledonia. In pursuing this object, by\nwhich he was enabled to add greatly to nautical and geographical knowledge, the Resolution was more than once in\ndanger of being lost; and particularly in the night of the 28th\nof the month she had a narrow escape. Our navigators, on\nthis occasion, were much alarmed; and daylight showed that\ntheir fears had not been ill founded. Indeed, breakers had\nbeen continually under their lee, and at a small distance from\nthem; so that they were in the most imminent danger. | We\nowed our safety,\" says the captain, \"to the interposition of\nProvidence, a good look-out, and the very brisk manner in\nwhich the ship was managed.\"\nOur commander now began to be tired of a coast which he\nCould no longer explore but at the risk of losing the vessel, and\nruining the whole voyage. He determined, however, not to\nleave it, till he knew of what kind some groves of trees were,\nwhich, by their uncommon appearance, had occasioned much\nspeculation, and had been mistaken, by several of the gentlemen, for bisaltes. Captain Cook was the more solicitous to\nascertain the point, as these trees appeared to be of a sort\nwhich might be useful to shipping, and had not been seen anywhere but in the southern parts of New Caledonia. They\nproved to be a species of spruce pine, very proper for spars,\nwhich were then wanted. The discovery was valuable, as,\nexcepting New Zealand, there was not an island known, in the\nSouth Pacific Ocean, where the ship could supply herself with\na mast or yard, to whatever distress she might be reduced. It\nwas the opinion of the carpenter of the Resolution, who was a\nmastmaker as well as a shipwright, that very good masts might\nbe made from the trees in question. The wood of them, which\nis white, close-grained, tough, and light, is well adapted to that\n COOK'S VOYAGES.\npurpose. One of the small islands where the trees were found,\nwas called by the captain the Isle of Pines. To another, on\naccount of its affording sufficient employment to the botanists,\nduring the little time they stayed upon it, he gave the name of\nBotany Isle.\nCaptain Cook now took into serious consideration what was\nfarther to be done. He had pretty well determined the extent\nof the south-west coast of New Caledonia, and would gladly\nhave proceeded to a more accurate survey of the whole, had he\nnot been deterred, not only by the dangers he must encounter,\nbut by the time required for the undertaking, and which he\ncould not possibly spare. Indeed, when he considered the\nvast ocean he had to explore to the south; the state and condition of the ship; the near approach of summer; and that any\nmaterial accident might detain him in this sea even for another\nyear, he did not think it advisable to make New Caledonia any\nlonger the object of his attention. But though he was thus\nobliged, by necessity, for the first time, to leave a coast which\nhe had discovered, before it was fully surveyed, he did not quit\nit till he had ascertained the extent of the country, and proved\nthat, excepting New Zealand, it was perhaps the largest island\nin the South Pacific Ocean.\nAs the Resolution pursued her course from New Caledonia,\nland was discovered, which, on a nearer approach, was found\nto be an island, of good height, and five leagues in circuit.\nCaptain Cook named it Norfolk Isle, in honour of the noble\nfamily of Howard. It was uninhabited; and the first persons\nthat ever set foot on it were unquestionably our English navigators. Various trees and plants were observed that are common\nat New Zealand; and, in particular, the flax plant, which is\nrather more luxuriant here than in any part of that country.\nThe chief produce of the island is a kind of spruce pine,\nexceedingly straight and tall, which grows in great abundance.\nSuch is the size of many of the trees that, breast high, they are\nas thick as two men can fathom. Among the vegetables of the\nplace, the palm-cabbage afforded both a wholesome and palatable refreshment; and, indeed, proved the most agreeable repast that our people had for a considerable time enjoyed. In\n COOK'S VOl\n213\naddition to this gratification, they had the pleasure of procuring\nsome excellent fish.\nFrom Norfolk Isle our commander steered for New Zealand,\nit being his intention to touch at Queen Charlotte's Sound,\nthat he might refresh his crew, and put the ship in a condition\nto encounter the southern latitudes. On the 18th of October,\nhe anchored before Ship Cove in that sound; and the first\nthing he did, after landing, was to look for the bottle he had\nleft on the shore, in which was a memorandum. It was taken\naway; and it soon appeared, from indubitable circumstances,\nthat the Adventure had been in the cove after it was quitted\nby the Resolution.\nUpon visiting the gardens which had been formed at Motuara,\nthey were found almost in a state of nature, having been wholly\nneglected by the inhabitants. Many, however, of the articles\nwere in a flourishing condition, and showed how well they\nliked the soil in which they were planted. It was several days\nbefore any of the natives made their appearance; but when\nthey did so, and recognized Captain Cook and his friends, joy\nsucceeded to fear. They hurried in numbers out of the woods,\nand embraced the English over and over again, leaping and\nskipping about like madmen. Amidst all this extravagance of\njoy, they were careful to preserve the honour of their females;\nfor they would not permit some women, who were seen at a\ndistance, to come near our people. The captain's whole intercourse with, the New Zealanders, during this his third visit to\nQueen Charlotte's Sound, was peaceable and friendly; and one\nof them, a man apparently of consequence, whose name was\nPedro, presented him with a staff of honour, such as the chiefs\ngenerally cany. In return, our commander dressed Pedro,\nwho had a fine person, and a good presence, in a suit of old\nclothes, of which he was not a little proud.\nCaptain Cook still continued his solicitude to stock the\nisland with useful animals; and accordingly, in addition to\nwhat he had formerly done, he ordered two pigs, a boar\nand sow, to be put on shore. There was reason to believe that some of the cocks and hens which had formerly\nbeen left here still existed. None of them, indeed, were\n I\n214 COOK'S VOYAGES.\nseen; but a hen's egg was found, which had not long been\nlaid.\nMr. Wales had now an opportunity of completing his observations with regard to Queen Charlotte's Sound, so as to\nascertain its latitude and longitude with the utmost accuracy.\nIn the captain's former voyage there had been an error in this\nrespect. Such were Mr. Wales's abilities and assiduity, that\nthe same correctness was maintained by him, in determining\nthe situations of all the other places which were visited by our\nnavigators.\nOn the ioth of November, Captain Cook took his departure\nfrom New Zealand, in farther pursuit of his great object, the\ndetermination of the question concerning the existence of a\nsouthern continent. Having sailed till the 27th in different\ndegrees of latitude, extending from 43 to 550 48' south, he gave\nup all hopes of finding any more land in this ocean. He came,\ntherefore, to the resolution of steering directly for the west entrance of the Straits of Magalhaens, with a view of coasting the\nsouth side of Terra del Fuego, round Cape Horn, to the Strait\nLe Maire. As the world had hitherto obtained but a very imperfect knowledge of this shore, the captain thought that the full\nsurvey of it would be more advantageous, both to navigation\nand geography, than anything he could expect to find in a higher\nlatitude.\nIn the prosecution of his voyage, our commander on the 17 th\nof December reached the west coast of Terra del Fuego; and\nhaving continued to range it till the 20th, he came to an anchor\nin a place to which he afterward gave the name of Christmas\nSound. Through the whole course of his various navigations\nhe had never seen so desolate a coast. It seems to be entirely\ncomposed of rocky mountains without the least appearance of\nvegetation. These mountains terminate in horrible precipices,\nthe craggy summits of which spire up to a vast height; so that\nscarcely anything in nature can appear with a more barren and\nsavage aspect than the whole of the country.\nThe run which Captain Cook had made directly across the\nocean in a high southern latitude, was believed by him to be the\nfirst of the kind that had ever been carried into execution. He\n COOK'S VOYAGES.\n215\nwas, therefore, somewhat particular in remarking every circumstance which seemed to be in the least material. However, he\ncould not but observe, that he had never made a passage anywhere of such length, or even of a much shorter extent, in which\nso few things occurred that were of an interesting nature. Excepting the variation of the compass, he knew of nothing else\nthat was worthy of notice. The captain had now done with the\nSouthern Pacific Ocean ; and he had explored it in such a manner that it would be impossible for any one to think that more\ncould be performed in a single voyage, towards obtaining that\nend, than had actually been accomplished.\nBarren and dreary as the land is about Christmas Sound, it\nwas not wholly destitute of some accommodations which could\nnot fail of being agreeable to our navigators. Near every harbour\nthey found fresh water and wood for fuel. The country abounds\nlikewise with wild fowl, and particularly with geese; which afforded a refreshment to the whole crew, that was the more acceptable on account of the approaching festival. Had not Providence thus happily provided for them, their Christmas cheer\nmust have been salt beef and pork. Some Madeira wine, the\nonly article of provision that was mended by keeping, was still\nleft. This, in conjunction with the geese, which were cooked\nin every variety of method, enabled our people to celebrate\nChristmas as cheerfully as perhaps was done by their friends in\nEngland.\nThe inhabitants of Terra del Fuego, Captain Cook found to\nbe of the same nation that he had formerly seen in Success Bay;\nand the same whom M. de Bougainville has distinguished by the\nname of Pecharas. They are a little, ugly, half-starved, beardless\nrace, and go almost naked. It is their own fault that they are\nnot better clothed, nature having furnished them with ample\nmaterials for that purpose. By lining their seal-skin cloaks with\nthe skins and feathers of aquatic birds; by making the cloaks\nthemselves larger; and by applying the same materials to different parts of clothing, they might render their dress much more\nwarm and comfortable. But while they are doomed to exist in\none of the most inhospitable climates in the globe, they have not\nsagacity enough to avail themselves of those means of adding to\n 1\n'2i6 COOK'S VOYAGES.\nthe conveniences of life which Providence has put into their\npower. In short, the captain, after having been a witness to so\nmany varieties of the human race, hath pronounced that, of all\nthe nations he had seen, the Pecharas are the most wretched.\nNotwithstanding the barrenness of the country, it abounds\nwith a variety of unknown plants, and gave sufficient employment to the botanists of the Resolution. \"Almost every\nplant,\" says Mr. Forster, \" which we gathered \" on the rocks,\n\"was newr to us, and some species were remarkable for the\nbeauty of their flowers, or their smell.\"\nOn the 28th of December, our commander sailed from\nChristmas Sound, and proceeded on his voyage, round Cape\nHorn, through Strait Le Maire, to Staten Land. This famous\nCape was passed by him on the next day, when he entered the\nSouthern Atlantic Ocean. In some charts, Cape Horn is laid\ndown as belonging to a small island; but this was neither confirmed, nor could it be contradicted by our navigators; for\nseveral breakers appeared in the coast, both to the east and\nwest of it, and the hazy weather rendered every object very\nindistinct. Though the summits of some of the hills were\nrocky, the sides and valleys seemed covered with a green turf,\nand wooded in tufts.\nIn ranging Staten Island, a good port was found, situated\nthree leagues to the westward of St. John, and in a northern\ndirection. Upon account of the day on which the discovery of\nthis port was made (being the 1st of January), Captain Cook\ngave it the name of New Year's Harbour. The knowledge of\nit may be of service to future navigators. Indeed, it would be\nmore convenient for ships bound to the west, or round Cape\nHorn, if its situation would permit them to put to sea with an\neasterly or northerly wind. But this inconvenience is not\nof great consequence, since these winds are seldom known to\nbe of long duration. The captain, however, has declared, that\n\u2022if he were on a voyage round Cape Horn to the west, and not\nin want of wood or water, or any other thing which might make\nit necessary to put into port, he would not approach the land\nat all. By keeping out at sea, the currents would be avoided,\nwhich, he was satisfied, would lose their force at ten or twelve\n COOK'S VOYAGES.\nleagues from land, and be totally without influence at a greater\ndistance.\nThe extent of Terra del Fuego, and consequently that of the\nStraits of Magalhaens, our commander ascertained to be less\nthan has been laid down by the generality of navigators. Nor\nwas the coast, upon the whole, found to be so dangerous as has\noften been represented. The weather, at the same time, was\nremarkably temperate.\nIn one of the little isles near Staten Land, and which had\nbeen called by Captain Cook New Year's Isles, there was\nobserved a harmony between trie different animals of ttie place\nwhich is too curious to be omitted. It seemed as if they had\nentered into a league not to disturb each other's tranquillity.\nThe greater part of the sea-coast is occupied by the sea-lions;\nthe sea-bears take up their abode in the isle; the shags are\nposted on the highest cliffs; the penguins fix their quarters\nwhere there is the most easy communication to and from the\nsea; and the rest of the birds choose more retired places. All\nthese animals were occasionally seen to mix together, like\ndomestic cattle and poultry in a farm-yard, without one\nattempting to molest the other. Nay, the captain had often\nobserved the eagles and vultures sitting on the hills among the\nshags, while none of the latter, whether old or young, appeared\nto be in the least disturbed at their presence. It may be\nasked, then, how do these birds of prey live ? This question\nour commander hath answered, by supposing that they feed on\nthe carcasses of seals and birds which die by various causes.\nIt is probable, from the immense quantity of animals with\nwhich this isle abounds, that such carcasses exist in great\nnumbers.\nFrom Staten Island, Captain Cook sailed on the 4th of\nJanuary, with a view, in the first place, of discovering that\nextensive coast laid down by Mr. Dalrymple in his chart,\nin which is the gulf of St. Sebastian. In order to have all other\nparts before him, the captain designed to make the western\npoint of that gulf. As he had some doubt of the existence of\nsuch a coast, this appeared to him the best route for determining the matter, and for exploring the southern part of this\n COOK'S VOYAGES.\nocean. When he came to the situations assigned to the different\npoints of the gulf of St. Sebastian, neither land nor any unequivocal signs of land were discovered. On the contrary, it was\nevident that there could npt be any extensive tract of country\nin the direction which had been supposed.\nProceeding in his voyage, land was seen on the 14th, which was\nat first mistaken for an island of ice. It was in a manner wholly\ncovered with snow. From the person by whom it was first discovered, it obtained the name of Wallis's Island. It is a high\nrock, of no great extent, near to which are some rocky islets.\nAnother island, of a larger compass, on account of the vast\nnumber of birds which were upon it, was called Bird Isle. A\nmore extensive range of country had been seen for some time,\nwhich Captain Cook reached on the 17th, and where he landed,\non the same day, in three different places. The head of the bay,\nin which he came to shore, was terminated by particular ice cliffs,\nof considerable height. Pieces were continually breaking off, and\nfloating out to sea; and while our navigators were in the bay, a\ngreat fall happened, which made a noise like a cannon. No\nless savage and horrible were the inner parts of the country.\nThe wild rocks raised their summits till they were lost in the\nclouds, and the valleys lay covered with everlasting snow. There\nwas not a tree to be seen, or a shrub found, that was even big\nenough to make a tooth-pick. The only vegetation that was met\nwith, was a coarse strong-bladed grass, growing in tufts, wild\nburnet, and a plant like moss, which sprang from the rocks.\nWhen our commander landed in the bay, he displayed the\nEnglish colours ; and, under a discharge of small arms, took\npossession of the country in his majesty's name. It was not,\nhowever, a discovery which was ever likely to be productive of\nany considerable benefit. In his return to the ship, Captain Cook\nbrought with him a quantity of seals and penguins, which were\nan acceptable present to the crew; not from the want of provisions,\nwhich were plentiful in every kind, but from a change of diet.\nAny sort of fresh meat was preferred by most on board to salt.\nThe captain himself was now, for the first time, tired of the salted\nmeats of the ship; and though the flesh of the penguins could\nscarcely vie with bullock's liver, its freshness was sufficient to\n COOKS VOYAGES.\nrender it comparatively agreeable to the palate. To the bay\nin which he had been, he gave the name of Possession Bay.\nThe land in which this bay lies, was at first judged by our\nnavigators to be part of a great continent. But, upon coasting\nround the whole country, it was proved to a demonstration that\nit was only an island of seventy leagues in circuit. In honour\nof his majesty, Captain Cook called it the Isle of Georgia. It\ncould scarcely have been thought that an island of no greater\nextent than this, situated between the latitude of fifty-four and\nfifty-five, should, in a manner, be wholly covered, many fathoms\ndeep, with frozen snow in the height of summer. The sides\nand summits of the lofty mountains were cased with snow and\nice; and an incredible quantity lay in the valleys. So immense\nwas the quantity that our commander did not think that it could\nbe the produce of the island. Some land, therefore, which he\nhad seen at a distance, induced him to believe that it might belong to an extensive tract, and gave him hopes of discovering a\ncontinent. In this respect, however, he was disappointed; but\nthe disappointment did not sit heavy upon him; since, to judge\nof the bulk by the apprehended sample, it would not have been\nworth the discovery. It was remarkable, that our voyagers did\nnot see a river, or a stream of fresh water, on the whole coast of\nthe Isle of Georgia. Captain Cook judged it to be highly probable, that there are no perennial springs in the country; and that\nthe interior parts, in consequence of their being much elevated,\nnever enjoy heat enough to melt the snow in sufficient quantities\nto produce a river or stream of water. In sailing round the\nisland, our navigators were almost continually involved in a\nthick mist; so that, for anything they knew to the contrary, they\nmight be surrounded with dangerous rocks.\nThe captain, on the 25th of the month, steered from the Isle\nof Georgia, and, on the 27th, computed that he was in latitude\nsixty, south. Farther than this he did not intend to go, unless\nsome certain signs of soon meeting with land should be discovered. There was now a long hollow swell from the west,\nwhich was a strong indication that no land was to be met with\nin that direction; and hence arose an additional proof of what\nhas already been remarked, that the extensive coast laid down\n COOK'S VOYAGES.\nin Mr. Dalrymple's chart of the ocean between Africa and\nAmerica and the Gulf of St. Sebastian, doth not exist. Not to\nmention the various islands which were seen in the prosecution\nof the voyage, and the names that were given to them, I shall\nonly advert to a few of the more material circumstances. On an\nelevated coast, which appeared in sight upon the 31st, our commander bestowed the appellation of the Southern Thule. The\nreason of his giving it this name, was that it is the most southern land that had ever yet been discovered. It is everywhere\ncovered with snow, and displays a surface of vast height. On\nthis day, our voyagers were in no small danger from a great westerly swell, which set right upon the shore, and threatened to\ncarry them on the most horrible coast in the world. Happily,\nthe discovery of a point to the north, beyond which no land\ncould be seen, relieved them from their apprehensions. To the\nmore distinguished tracts of country, which were discovered from\nthe 31 st of January to the 6th of February, Captain Cook gave\nthe names of Cape Bristol, Cape Montagu, Saunder's Isle, Candlemas Isles, and Sandwich's Land. The last is either a group of .\nislands, or else a point of the continent. For that there is a tract\nof land near the pole, which is the source of most of the ice that\nis spread over this vast Southern Ocean, was the captain's firm\nopinion. He also thought it probable that this land must extend\nfarthest to the north, where it is opposite to the Southern Atlantic\nand Indian Oceans. Ice had always been found by him farther\nto the north in these oceans than anywhere else, and this he\njudged could not be the case, if there were not land of considerable extent to the south. However, the greatest part of this southern continent, if it actually exists, must lie within the polar\ncircle, where the sea is so encumbered with ice that the land is\nrendered inaccessible. So great is the risk which is run in examining a coast in these unknown and icy seas, that our commander, writh a modest and well-grounded boldness, could assert\nthat no man would ever venture farther than he had done; and\nthat the lands which may lie to the south will never be explored.\nThick fogs, snow storms, intense cold, and everything beside\nthat can render navigation dangerous, must be encountered ; all\nwhich difficulties are greatly heightened by the inexpressibly\nmm\n COOK'S VOYAGES.\nhorrid aspect of the country. It is a country doomed by\nnature never once to feel the warmth of the sun's rays, but to\nlie buried in everlasting snow and ice. Whatever ports there\nmay be on the coast, they are almost entirely covered with frozen\nsnow of a vast thickness. If, however, any one of them should\nbe so far open as to invite a ship into it, she would run the risk\nof being fixed there for ever, or of coming out in an ice island.\nTo this it may be added, that the islands and floats on the coast,\nthe great falls from the ice cliffs in the port, or a heavy snow\nstorm, attended with a sharp frost, might be equally fatal.\nNothing could exceed the inclination of Captain Cook, if it\nhad been practicable, to penetrate farther to the south; but\ndifficulties like these were not to be surmounted. If he had\nrisked all that had been done during the voyage, for the sake of\ndiscovering and exploring a coast which when discovered and\nexplored would have answered no end whatever, or have been\nof the least use either to navigation or geography, or indeed to\nany other science, he would justly have been charged with inexcusable temerity. He determined therefore to alter his course\nto the east, and to sail in quest of Bouvet's Land, the existence\nof which was yet to be settled. Accordingly this was the principal object of his pursuit, from the 6th to the 22nd of the month.\nBy that day he had run down thirteen degrees of longitude, in the\nvery latitude assigned for Bouvet's Land. No such land, how.\never, was discovered; nor did any proofs occur of the existence\nof Cape Circumcision. Our commander was at this time no\nmore than two degrees of longitude from the route he had taken\nto the south, when he left the Cape of Good Hope. It would\ntherefore have been to no purpose to proceed any farther to the\neast in this parallel. But being desirous of determining the\nquestion concerning some land that was supposed to have been\nseen more to the south, he directed his course for the situation\nin which the discovery of it might be expected. Two days were\nspent by him in this pursuit, to no effectual purpose. After having\nrun over the place where the land was imagined to lie without\nmeeting with the least signs of any, it became certain that the\nice islands had deceived our navigators, as well as Mr. Bouvet.\nCaptain Cook had now made the circuit of the southern ocean\n in a high latitude, and traversed it in such a manner as to leave\nnot the least room for the possibility of there being a continent,\nunless near the pole, and out of the reach of navigation. By\ntwice visiting the tropical sea, he had not only settled the situation\nof some old discoveries, but made many new ones; and, indeed,\neven in that part, had left little more to be accomplished. The intention of the voyage had, in every respect, been fully answered,\nand the southern hemisphere sufficiently explored. A final end\nwas hereby put to the searching after a southern continent, which\nfor nearly two centuries past had occasionally engrossed the attention of some of the maritime powers, and had been urged with\ngreat ardour by philosophers and geographers in different ages.\nThe great purpose of his navigation round the globe being\nthus completed, the captain began to direct his views towards\nEngland. He had indeed some thoughts of protracting his course\na little longer, for the sake of revisiting the place where the French\ndiscovery is said to be situated. But, upon mature deliberation,\nhe determined to lay aside his intention. He considered that if\nthis discovery had really been made, the end would be as fully\nanswered as if it had been done by himself. It could only be\nan island; and if a judgment might be formed from the degree\nof cold which our voyagers had experienced in that latitude, it\ncould not be a fertile one. Besides, our commander would\nhereby have been kept two months longer at sea, and that in a\ntempestuous latitude, with which the ship was not in a condition\nto struggle. Her sails and rigging were so much worn, that\nsomething was giving way every hour : and there was nothing\nleft, either to repair or to replace them. The provisions of the\nvessel were in such a state of decay, that they afforded little\nnourishment, and the company had been long without refreshments. Indeed, the crew were yet healthy, and would cheerfully\nhave gone wherever the captain judged it proper to lead them;\nbut he was fearful, lest the scurvy should lay hold of them at a time\nwhen none of the remedies were left by which it could be removed.\nHe thought likewise that it would have been cruel in him to have\ncontinued the fatigues and hardships they were perpetually exposed to longer than was absolutely necessary. Throughout the\nwhole voyage they had merited by their behaviour every indul.\n COOK'S VOYAGES 223\ngence which it was in his power to bestow. Animated by the\nconduct of the officers, they had shown that no difficulties or\ndangers which came in their way were incapable of being surmounted ; nor had their activity, courage, and cheerfulness been\nin the least abated by the separation from them of their consort\nthe Adventure.\nFrom all these considerations, which were evidently the dictates of wisdom and humanity, Captain Cook was induced to\nspend no longer time in searching for the French discoveries, but\nto steer for the Cape of Good Hope. He determined, however,\nto direct his course in such a manner as to look for the Isles of\nDenia and Marseveen, which are laid down in Dr. Halley's\nvariation chart. After sailing in the proper latitudes from the\n25th of February to the 13th of March, no such islands were\ndiscovered. Nothing indeed had been seen that could encourage our voyagers to persevere in a search after them; and\nmuch time could not now be spared, either for the purpose of finding them, or of proving their non-existence. Every one on board\nwas for good reasons impatient to get into port The captain,\ntherefore, could no longer avoid yielding to the general wishes,\nand resolving to proceed to the Cape without further delay.\nSoon after our commander had come to this determination,\nhe demanded of the officers and petty officers, in pursuance of\nhis instructions, the log books and journals they had kept; which\nwere delivered to him accordingly, and sealed up for the inspection of the Admiralty. He enjoined them also, and the whole\ncrew, not to divulge where they had been, till they were permitted to do so by their lordships ; an injunction, a compliance\nwith which might probably be rendered somewhat difficult from\nthe natural tendency there is in men to relate the extraordinary\nenterprises and adventures wherein they have been concerned.\nAs the Resolution approached towards the Cape of Good\nHope, she fell in first with a Dutch East Indiaman from Bengal,\ncommanded by Captain Bosch; and next with an English India-\nman, being the True Briton, from China, of which Captain\nBroadly was the commander. Mr. Bosch very obligingly offered\nto our navigators sugar, arrack, and whatever he had to spare ;\nand Captain Broadly, with the most ready generosity, sent them\n 224 COOK'S VOYAGES.\nfresh provisions, tea, and various articles which could not fail of\nbeing peculiarly acceptable to people in their situation. Even\na parcel of old newspapers furnished no slight gratification to\npersons who had so long been deprived of obtaining any intelligence concerning their country and the state of Europe. From\nthese vessels Captain Cook received some information with regard to what had happened to the Adventure after her separation from the Resolution.\nOn Wednesday, the 22nd of March,1 he anchored in Table\nBay, where he found several Dutch ships, some French, and the\nCeres, an English East Indiaman, bound directly for England,\nunder the command of Captain Newte. By this gentleman he\nsent a copy of the preceding part of his journal, some charts,\nand other drawings, to the Admiralty.\nDuring the circumnavigation of the globe, from the period of\nour commander's leaving the Cape of Good Hope to his return\nto it again, he had sailed no less than twenty thousand leagues.\nThis was an extent of voyage nearly equal to three times the\nequatorial circumference of the earth, and which had never been\naccomplished before by any ship in the same compass of duration. In such a case, it could not be a matter of surprise that\nthe rigging and sails of the Resolution should be essentially\ndamaged, and even worn out: and yet, in all this great run,\nwhich had been made in every latitude between nine and\nseventy-one, she did not spring either lowmast, topmast, lower\nor topsail yard ; nor did she so much as break a lower or topmast shroud. These happy circumstances were owing to the\ngood properties of the vessel, and the singular care and abilities of her officers.\nOn the remainder of the voyage it is not necessary to enlarge.\nThough it was conducted with the same attention to navigation\nand geography, and with the same sagacity in marking whatever\nwas worthy of observation, nevertheless as it was not employed\nin traversing unknown seas, or in discovering countries that had\nnot been heard of before, it may be sufficient briefly to mention\nthe places at which Captain Cook touched before his arrival in\n1 With our navigators, who had sailed round the world, it was Wednesday,\nthe 22nd of March; but at the Cape of Good Hope it was Tuesday, the 21st.\nwm\n COOKS VOYAGES.\nEngland. The repairs of the ship having been completed, and\nthe necessary stores gotten on board, together with a fresh\nsupply of provisions and water, he left the Cape of Good Hope\non the 27th of April, and reached the Island of St. Helena on\nthe 15th of May. Here he staid till the 21st, when he sailed\nfor the Island of Ascension, where he anchored on the 28th.\nFrom this place he directed his course, on the 31st, for the\nIsland of Fernando de Noronha, at which he arrived on the 9th\nof June.\nIn the progress of the voyage our commander made an experiment upon the still for procuring fresh water ; and the result of the trial was that the invention is useful upon the whole,\nbut that to trust entirely to it would by no means be advisable.\nIndeed, provided there is not a scarcity of fuel, and the coppers\nare good, as much water may be obtained as will support life;\nbut no efforts will be able to procure a quantity sufficient for the\npreservation of health, especially in hot climates. Captain\nCook was convinced, by experience, that nothing contributes\nmore to the health of seamen than having plenty of water.\nOn the 14th of July, the captain came to an anchor in the\nBay of Fayal, one of the Azores Islands. His sole design in\nstopping here was to give Mr. Wales an opportunity of finding\nthe rate of the watch, that hereby he might be enabled to fix the\nlongitude of these islands with the greater degree of certainty.\nNo sooner, therefore, had our commander anchored, than he\nsent an officer to wait on the English consul, and to acquaint\nthe governor with the arrival of our navigators, requesting his\npermission for Mr. Wales to make observations on shore for the\npurpose now mentioned. Mr. Dent, who then acted as consul,\nnot only obtained this permission, but accommodated Mr.\nWales with a convenient place in his garden to set up his instruments.\nThis object being accomplished, Captain Cook proceeded on\nthe 19th with all expedition for England. On the 30th of the\nsame month he anchored at Spithead and landed at Portsmouth;\nhaving been absent from Great Britain three years and eighteen\ndays, in which time, and under all changes of climate, he had\nlost but four men, and only one of them by sickness.\nQ\n CHAPTER V.\nACCOUNT OF CAPTAIN COOK DURING THE PERIOD BETWEEN HIS\nSECOND VOYAGE AND HIS VOYAGE TO THE PACIFIC OCEAN.\nHE able manner in which Captain Cook had conducted the preceding voyage, the discoveries he\nhad made, and his complete determination of the\ngrand point he had been sent to ascertain, justly\nand powerfully recommended him to the protection\nand encouragement of all those who had patronized the undertaking. No alterations had occurred, during his absence, in the\npresidency of the admiralty department. The noble lord, whose\nextensive views had taken such a lead in the plans of navigation\nand discovery, still continued at the head of that board; and it\ncould not be otherwise than a high satisfaction to him, that so\nextraordinary a degree of success had attended his designs for\nthe enlargement of science. His lordship lost no time in representing Captain Cook's merits to the king; nor did his\nmajesty stand in need of solicitations to show favour to a man\nwho had so eminently fulfilled his royal and munificent intentions. Accordingly, our navigator, on the 9th of August, was\nraised to the rank of a post-captain. Three days afterward, he\nreceived a more distinguished and substantial mark of the approbation of government: for he was then appointed a captain\nin Greenwich Hospital; a situation which was intended to afford\nhim a pleasing and honourable reward for his illustrious labours\nand services.\nIt will easily be supposed, that the lovers of science would,\nin general, be peculiarly attentive to the effects resulting from\n COOK'S VOYAGES.\nCaptain Cook's discoveries. The additions he had made to the\nknowledge of geography, navigation, and astronomy, and the\nnew views he had opened of the diversified state of human life\nand manners, could not avoid commanding their esteem and\nexciting their admiration. With many persons of philosophic\nliterature he was in the habits of intimacy and friendship; he\nwas particularly acquainted with Sir John Pringle, at that time\npresident of the Royal Society. It was natural, therefore, that\nhis scientific friends should wish him to become a member of\nthis learned body; the consequence of which was that, in the\nlatter end of the year 1775, he was proposed as a candidate for\nelection. On the 29th of February, 1776, he was unanimously\nchosen; and he was admitted on the 7th of March. That same\nevening a paper was read, which he had addressed to Sir John\nPringle, containing an account of the method he had taken to\npreserve the health of the crew of his majesty's ship the Resolution, during her voyage round the world. Another paper, at\nthe request of the president, was communicated by him on the\n18th of April, relative to the tides in the South Seas. The tides\nparticularly considered were those in the Endeavour River, on\nthe east coast of New Holland.\nA still greater honour was in reserve for Captain Cook, than\nthe election of him to be a common member of the Royal\nSociety. It was resolved by Sir John Pringle and the council\nof the society to bestow upon him the estimable prize of the\ngold . medal, for the best experimental paper of the year; and\nno determination could be founded in greater wisdom and\njustice. If Captain Cook had made no important discoveries,\nif he had not determined the question concerning a southern\ncontinent, his name would have been entitled to immortality on\naccount of his humane attention to, and his unparalleled success\nin preserving the lives and health of his seamen.\nHe had good reason, upon this head, to assume the pleasurable but modest language with which he has concluded his\nnarrative of his second navigation round the globe: \" Whatever,\" he says, \"may be the public judgment about other\nmatters, it is with real satisfaction, and without claiming any\nmerit but that of attention to my duty, that I can conclude this\n COOK'S VOYAGES.\naccount with an observation, which facts enable us to make,\nthat our having discovered the possibility of preserving health\namong a numerous ship's company, for such a length of time,\nin such varieties of climate, and amidst such continued hardships and fatigues, will make this voyage remarkable, in the\nopinion of every benevolent person, when the disputes about\nthe southern continent shall have ceased to engage the attention\nand to divide'the judgment of philosophers.\"\nIt was the custom of Sir John Pringle, at the delivery of Sir\nGodfrey Copley's annual medal, to give an elaborate discourse,\ncontaining the history of that part of science for the improvement of which the medal was conferred. Upon the present\noccasion, the president had a subject to enlarge upon, which\nwas perfectly congenial to his disposition and studies. His own\nlife had been much employed in pointing out the means which\ntended not only to cure, but to prevent, the diseases of mankind ; and, therefore, it was with peculiar pleasure and affection\nthat he celebrated the conduct of his friend, who, by precautions\nequally wise and simple, had rendered the circumnavigation of\nthe globe, so far as health is concerned, quite a harmless undertaking. Towards the beginning of his discourse, Sir John justly\nasks, I What inquiry can be so useful as that which hath for its\nobject the saving the lives of men? and when shall we find one\nmore successful than that before us? Here,\" adds the president, I are no vain boastings of the empiric, nor ingenious and\ndelusive theories of the dogmatist; but a concise and artless,\nand an incontested relation of the means by which, under\nDivine favour, Captain Cook, with a company of a hundred\nand eighteen men, performed a voyage of three years and\neighteen days, throughout all the climates, from fifty-two degrees\nnorth to seventy-one degrees south, with the loss of only one\nman by sickness.\u2014I would now inquire,\" proceeds Sir John\nPringle, 1 of the most conversant in the study of bills of mortality, whether, in the most healthful climate, and in the best\ncondition of life, they have ever found so small a number of\ndeaths within that space of time ? How great and agreeable,\nthen, must our surprise be, after perusing the histories of long\nnavigations in former days, when so many perished by marine\n COOK'S VOYAGES.\nOne circumstance alone was wanting to complete the pleasure\nand celebrity arising from the assignment of Sir Godfrey Copley's\nAn ounce of this to each man, or such other proportion as circumstances\npointed out, was boiled in their peas three days in the week ; and when we\nwere in places where vegetables were to be got it was boiled with them, and\nwheat or oatmeal eveiy morning for breakfast; and also with peas and\nvegetables for dinner. It enabled us to make several nourishing and wholesome messes, and was the means of making the people eat a greater quantity\nof vegetables than they would otherwise have done.\nI Rob of lemon and orange is an antiscorbutic we were not without. The\nsurgeon made use of it in many cases with great success.\n1 Amongst the articles of victualling, we were supplied with sugar in the\nroom of oil, and with wheat for a part of our oatmeal; and were certainly\ngainers by the exchange. Sugar, I apprehend, is a very good antiscorbutic;\nwhereas oil (such as the navy is usually supplied with), I am of opinion has\nthe contrary effect.\n\" But the introduction of the most salutary articles, either as provisions or\nmedicines, will generally prove unsuccessful, unless supported by certain\nregulations. On this principle many years' experience, together with some\nhints I had from Sir Hugh Palliser, Captains Campbell, Wallis, and other\nintelligent officers, enabled me to lay a plan whereby all was to be governed.\n\"The crew were at three watches, except upon some extraordinary occasions. By this means they were not so much exposed to the weather as\nif they had been at watch and watch, and had generally dry clothes to shift\nthemselves when they happened to get wet. Care was also taken to expose\nthem as little to wet weather as possible.\n| Proper methods were used to keep their persons, hammocks, bedding,\nclothes, &c. constantly clean and dry. Equal care was taken to keep the\nship clean and dry betwixt decks. Once or twice a week she was aired with\nfires ; and when this could not be done she was smoked with gunpowder\nmixed with vinegar and water. I had also, frequently, a fire made in an\niron pot at the bottom of the well, which was of great use in purifying the\nair in the lower parts of the ship. To this, and to cleanliness as well in the\nship as amongst the people, too great attention cannot be paid; the least\nneglect occasions a putrid and disagreeable smell below, which nothing but\nfires will remove.\n| Proper attention was paid to the ship's coppers, so that they were kept\nconstantly clean.\n\"The fat which boiled out of the salt beef and pork, I never suffered to\nbe given to the people, being of opinion that it promotes the scurvy.\n\" I was careful to take in water wherever it was to be got, even though we\ndid not want it. Because I look upon fresh water from the shore to be more\nwholesome than that which has been kept some time on board a ship. Of\nthis essential article we were never at an allowance, but had always plenty\n COOKS VOYAGES. 231\nmedal. Captain Cook was not himself present to hear the discourse of the president, and to receive the honour conferred\nupon him. Some months before the anniversary of St. Andrew's\nday be had sailed on his last expedition. The medal, therefore, was delivered into the hands of Mrs. Cook, whose satisfaction at being entrusted with so valuable a pledge of her husband's\nreputation cannot be questioned. Neither can it be doubted\nbut that the captain, before his departure from England, was\nfully apprised of the mark.of distinction which was intended for\nhim by the Royal Society.\nCaptain Cook, after the conclusion of his second voyage, was\ncalled upon to appear in the world in the character of an author.\nIn the account that was published, by authority, of his former\ncircumnavigation of the globe, as well as of those which had been\nperformed by the Captains Byron, Carteret, and Wallis, it was\nthought requisite to procure the assistance of a professed literary\nman, whose business it should be to draw up a narrative from\nfor every necessary purpose. Navigators in general cannot indeed expect,\nnor would they wish to meet with such advantages in this respect as fell to\nmy lot. The nature of our voyage carried us into very high latitudes. But\nthe hardships and dangers inseparable from that situation, were in some degree compensated by the singular felicity we enjoyed of extracting inexhaustible supplies of fresh water from an ocean strewed with ice.\n\" We came to few places where either the art of man or the bounty of\nnature had not provided some sort of refreshment or other, either in the\nanimal or vegetable way. It was my first care to procure whatever of any\nkind could be met with, by every means in my power, and to oblige our\npeople to make use thereof, both by my example and authority; but the\nbenefits arising from refreshments of any kind soon became so obvious, that\nI had little occasion to recommend the one or to exert the other.\"\nIn a letter which Captain Cook wrote to Sir John Pringle, just before he\nembarked on his last voyage, dated Plymouth Sound, July 7, 1776, he expressed himself as follows : \" I entirely agree with you, that the dearness\nof the rob of lemons and of oranges will hinder them from being furnished\nin large quantities. But I do not think this so necessary : for, though they\nmay assist other things, I have no great opinion of them alone. Nor have I a\nhigher opinion of vinegar; my people had it very sparingly during the late\nvoyage, and, towards the latter part none at all, and yet we experienced no\nill effect from 'the want of it. The custom of washing the inside of the ship\nwith vinegar I seldom observed, thinking that fire and smoke answered the\npurpose much better.\"\n 232 COOKS VOYAGES.\nthe several journals of these commanders. Accordingly, Dr.\nHawkesworth, as is universally known, was employed for the\npurpose. In the present case it was not esteemed necessary to\nhave recourse to such an expedient. Captain Cook was justly\nregarded as sufficiently qualified to relate his own story. His\njournal only required to be divided into chapters, and perhaps to be amended by a few verbal corrections. It is not\nspeaking extravagantly to say, that in point of composition his\nhistory of his voyage reflects upon him no small degree of\ncredit. His style is natural, clear, and manly; being well\nadapted to the subject and to his own character; and it is possible\nthat a pen of more studied elegance would not have given any\nadditional advantage to the narration. It was not till some time\nafter Captain Cook's leaving England that the work was published; but, in the meanwhile, the superintendence of it was\nundertaken by his learned and valuable friend Dr. Douglas,\nwhose late promotion to the mitre hath afforded pleasure to\nevery literary man of every denomination. When the Voyage\nappeared it came recommended by the accuracy and excellence\nof its charts, and by a great variety of engravings from the curious\nand beautiful drawings of Mr. Hodges. This work was followed\nby the publication of the original astronomical observations,\nwhich had been made by Mr. Wales in the Resolution, and by\nMr. Bayley in the Adventure. It was at the expense of the\ncommissioners of longitude that these observations were made,\nand it was by their order that they were printed. The book of\nMr. Wales and Mr. Bayley displays in the strongest light the\nscientific use and value of Captain Cook's voyage.\nSome of the circumstances which have now been mentioned\nhave designedly been brought forward more early in point of\ntime than should otherwise have been done in order to prevent any interruption in the course of the subsequent narrative.\nThough Captain Cook was expected to sit down in repose\nafter his toils and labours, the design of farther discoveries was\nnot laid aside. The illusion indeed of a Terra Australis incognita to any purposes of commerce, colonization, and utility\nhad been dispelled; but there was another grand question which\n COOK'S VOYAGES.\n233\nremained to be determined, and that was the practicability of a\nnorthern passage to the Pacific Ocean.\nIt had long been a favourite object with navigators, and particularly with the English, to discover a shorter, a more commodious, and a more profitable course of sailing to Japan and\nChina, and, indeed, to the East Indies in general, than by\nmaking the tedious circuit of the Cape of Good Hope. To find\na western passage round North America had been attempted\nby several bold adventurers, from Frobisher's first voyage in\n1576, to those of James and of Fox in 1631. By these expeditions a large addition was made to the knowledge of the\nnorthern extent of America, and Hudson's and Baffin's Bays\nwere discovered. But the wished-for passage on that side into\nthe Pacific Ocean was still unattained. Nor were the various\nattempts of our countrymen, and of the Dutch, to find such a\npassage by sailing round the north of Asia, in an eastern direction, attended with better success. Wood's failure in 1676 appears to have concluded the long list of unfortunate expeditions\nin that century. The discovery, if not absolutely despaired of,\nhad been unsuccessful in such a number of instances, that it\nceased for many years to be an object of pursuit.\nThe question was again revived in the present century. Mr.\nDobbs, a warm advocate for the probability of a north-west passage through Hudson's Bay, once more recalled the attention\nof this country to that undertaking. In consequence of the\nspirit by him excited, Captain * Middleton was sent out by government in 1741, and Captains Smith and More, in 1746. But\nthough an act of Parliament had been passed which secured a\nreward of twenty thousand pounds to the discovery of a passage, the accomplishment of this favourite object continued at\nas great a distance as ever.\nTo ascertain a matter of such importance and magnitude in\nnavigation, was reserved to be another glory of his present\nmajesty's reign. The idea was peculiarly suited to the enlightened mind of the noble lord at the head of the admiralty,\nand he adopted it with ardour. Preparatory to the execution\nof the design Lord Mulgrave sailed with two ships to determine\nhow far navigation was practicable towards the north pole. In\n i\n234\n'COOK'S VOYAGES.\nthis expedition his lordship met with the same insuperable\ndifficulties which had been experienced by former voyagers.\nNevertheless, the expectation of opening a communication between the Pacific and Atlantic Oceans, by a northerly course,\nwas not abandoned, and it was resolved that a voyage should be\nundertaken for that purpose.\nFor the conduct of an enterprise, the operations of which\nwere intended to be so new, so extensive, and so various, it was\nevident that great ability, skill, and experience were indispensably necessary. That Captain Cook was of all men the best\nqualified for carrying it into execution was a matter that could\nnot be called into question. But, however ardently it might\nbe wished that he would take upon him the command of the\nservice, no one (not even his friend and patron, Lord Sandwich\nhimself) presumed to solicit him upon the subject. The benefits he had already conferred on science and navigation, and\nthe labours and dangers he had gone through were so many and\ngreat, that it was not deemed reasonable to ask him to engage\nin fresh perils. At the same time, nothing could be more natural\nthan to consult him upon everything relative to the business;\nand his advice was particularly requested with regard to the\nproperest person for conducting the voyage. To determine this\npoint, the captain, Sir Hugh Palliser, and Mr. Stephens were\ninvited to Lord Sandwich's to dinner. Here, besides taking\ninto consideration what officer should be recommended to his\nmajesty for accomplishing the purposes in view, many things\nwere said concerning the nature of the design. Its grandeur\nand dignity, the consequences of it to navigation and science,\nand the completion it would give to the whole system of discoveries, were enlarged upon in the course of the conversation.\nCaptain Cook was so fired with the contemplation and representation of the object, that he started up and declared that he\nhimself would undertake the direction of the enterprise. It is\neasy to suppose with what pleasure the noble lord and the other\ngentlemen received a proposal which was so agreeable to their\nsecret wishes, and which they thought of the highest importance\ntowards attaining the ends of the voyage. No time was lost by\nthe Earl of Sandwich in laying the matter before the king, and\n COOK'S VOYAGES.\n235\nCaptain Cook was appointed to the command of the expedition\non the ioth of February, 1776. At the same time it was agreed\nthat on his return to England, he should be restored to his situation at Greenwich: and if no vacancy occurred during the\ninterval, the officer who succeeded him was to resign in his\nfavour.\nThe command and the direction of the enterprise being thus\nhappily settled, it became an object of great importance to determine what might be the best course that could be given to\nthe voyage. All former navigators round the globe had returned to Europe by the Cape of Good Hope, but to Captain\nCook the arduous task was now assigned of attempting it by\nreaching the high northern latitudes between Asia and America,\nand the adoption of this resolution was, I believe, the result of\nhis own reflections upon the subject. The usual plan, therefore,\nof discovery was reversed, so that, instead of a passage from the\nAtlantic to the Pacific, one from the latter into the former was\nto be tried. Whatever openings or inlets there might be on the\neast side of America, that lie in a direction which could afford\nany hopes of a passage, it was wisely foreseen that the ultimate\nsuccess of the expedition would depend upon there being an\nopen sea between the west side of that continent and the extremities of Asia. Accordingly, Captain Cook was ordered to\nproceed into the Pacific Ocean, through the chain of the new\nislands which had been visited by him in the southern tropic.\nAfter having crossed the equator into the northern parts of that\nocean, he was then to hold such a course as might probably fix\nmany interesting points in geography, and produce intermediate\ndiscoveries in his progress northward to the principal scene of\nhis operations. With regard to his grand object, it was determined for the wisest reasons, and after the most mature deliberation and inquiry, that upon his arrival on the coast of New\nAlbion, he should proceed northward as far as the latitude of 650,\nand not lose any time in exploring rivers or inlets, or upon\nany other account, until he had gotten into that latitude.\nTo give every possible encouragement to the prosecution of\nthe great design in view, the motives of interest were added to\nthe obligations of duty. In the act of parliament which passed\n 236\nCOOK'S VOYAGES.\nin 1745, the reward of twenty thousand pounds had been only\nheld out to the ships belonging to any of his majesty's subjects,\nwhile his majesty's own ships were excluded. Another and\nmore capital defect in this act was, that it confined the reward\nto such ships alone as should discover a passage through Hudson's Bay. By a new law, which passed in 1776, both these\ndeficiencies were effectually remedied. It was now enacted,\n\" That if any ship, belonging to any of his majesty's subjects, or\nto his majesty, shall find out, and sail through any passage by\nsea, between the Atlantic and Pacific Oceans, in any direction\nor parallel of the northern hemisphere, to the northward of the\n5 20 of northern latitude, the owners of such ships, if belonging\nto any of his majesty's subjects, or the commander, officers, and\nseamen of such ship belonging to his majesty, shall receive, as\na reward for such discovery, the sum of twenty thousand\npounds.\"\nThat everything might be done which could facilitate the\nsuccess of the grand expedition, Lieutenant Pickersgill was\nsent out, in 1776, with directions to explore the coast of Baffin's\nBay; and in the next year Lieutenant Young was commissioned\nnot only to examine the western parts of that bay, but to endeavour to find a passage on that side from the Atlantic to the\nPacific Ocean. Nothing was performed by either of these\ngentlemen that promoted the purposes of Captain Cook's\nvoyage.\nTwo vessels were fixed upon by government for the intended\nservice, the Resolution and the Discovery. The command of\nthe former was given to Captain Cook, and of the other to\nCaptain Clerke. To the Resolution was assigned the same\ncomplement of officers and men which she had during her preceding voyage; and the only difference in the establishment\nof the Discovery from that of the Adventure was in the single\ninstance of her having no marine officer on board.\nFrom the time of the two ships being put into commission,\nthe greatest degree of attention and zeal was exerted by the\nEarl of Sandwich and the rest of the board of admiralty, to\nhave them equipped in the most complete manner. Both the\nvessels were supplied with as much of every necessary article\n COOKS VOYAGES.\nas could conveniently be stowed, and with the best of each\nkind that could be procured. Whatever likewise the experience of the former voyages had shown to be of any utility in\npreserving the health of seamen, was provided in a large abundance. That some permanent benefit might be conveyed to\nthe inhabitants of Otaheite, and of the other islands of the\nPacific Ocean, whom our navigators might happen to visit, it\nwas graciously commanded by his majesty, that an assortment\nof useful animals should be carried out to those countries. Accordingly, a bull, two cows with their calves, and several sheep,\nwith hay and corn for their subsistence, were taken on board;\nand it was intended to add other serviceable animals to these,\nwhen Captain Cook should arrive at the Cape of Good Hope.\nWith the same benevolent purposes the captain was furnished\nwith a sufficient quantity of such of our European garden seeds\nas could not fail of being a valuable present to the newly discovered islands, by adding fresh supplies of food to their own\nvegetable productions. By order of the board of admiralty\nmany articles besides were delivered to our commander, which\nwere calculated in various ways to improve the condition of\nthe natives of the other hemisphere. Still farther to promote a\nfriendly intercourse with them, and to carry on a traffic that\nmight be profitable on both sides, an ample assortment was\nprovided of iron tools and trinkets. An attention no less\nhumane was extended to the wants of our own people. Some\nadditional clothing, adapted to a cold climate, was ordered for\nthe crews of the two ships; and nothing was denied to our\nnavigators that could be supposed to be in the least conducive\nto their health, or even to their convenience.\nIt was not to these things only that the extraordinary care\nof Lord Sandwich, and of the other gentlemen at the head of\nthe naval department, was confined. They were equally solicitous to afford every assistance that was calculated to render\nthe expedition of public utility. Several astronomical and nautical instruments were intrusted, by the board of longitude, to\n. Captain Cook, and Mr. King his second lieutenant, who had\nundertaken to make the necessary observations, during the\nvoyage, for the improvement of astronomy and navigation. It\n 238\nCOOK'S VOYAGES.\nI\nwas originally intended that a professed observator should be\nsent out in the Resolution; but the scientific abilities of the\ncaptain and his lieutenant rendered the appointment of such a\nperson absolutely unnecessary. The case was somewhat different with regard to the Discovery. Mr. William Bayley, who had\nalready given satisfactory proofs of his skill and diligence as an\nobservator while he was employed in Captain Furneaux's ship,\nduring the late voyage, was engaged a second time in that capacity, and appointed to sail on board Captain Clerke's vessel. The\ndepartment of natural history was assigned to Mr. Anderson,\nthe surgeon of the Resolution, who was as willing as he was well\nqualified to describe everything in that branch of science which\nshould occur worthy of notice. From the remarks of this gentleman Captain Cook had derived considerable assistance in his\nlast navigation, especially with regard to the very copious vocabulary of the language of Otaheite, and the comparative specimen of the languages of the other islands which had then\nbeen visited. There were several young men among our commander's sea-officers who, under his direction, could be usefully\nemployed in constructing charts, in taking views of the coasts\nand headlands near which our voyagers might pass, and in\ndrawing plans of the bays and harbours in which they should\nanchor. Without a constant attention to this object, the captain was sensible that his discoveries could not be rendered\nprofitable to future navigators. That he might go out with\nevery help which could serve to make the result of the voyage\nentertaining to the generality of readers, as well as instructive\nto the sailor and the scholar, Mr. Webber was fixed upon,\nand engaged to embark in the Resolution, for the express\npurpose of supplying the unavoidable imperfections of written\naccounts, by enabling our people to preserve and to bring\nhome such drawings of the most memorable scenes of their\ntransactions as could only be executed by a professed and skilful artist.\nAs the last mark of the extraordinary attention which the\nEarl of Sandwich, Sir Hugh Palliser, and others of the board\nof admiralty had uniformly shown to the preparations for the\nexpedition, they went down to Long Reach, and paid a visit to\n COOK'S VOYAGES.\nthe ships, on the 8th of June, to examine whether everything\nwas completed conformably to their intentions and orders, and\nto the satisfaction of all who were to embark in the voyage.\nHis Lordship and the rest of the admiralty board, together\nwith several noblemen and gentlemen of their acquaintance,\nhonoured Captain Cook on that day with their company at\ndinner. Both upon their coming on board and their going\nashore they were saluted with seventeen guns, and with three\ncheers.\nAs the ships were to touch at Otaheite and the Society\nIslands, it had been determined not to omit the only opportunity which might ever offer of carrying Omai back to his native\ncountry. Accordingly, he left London, on the 24th of June, in\ncompany with Captain Cook; and it was with a mixture of\nregret and satisfaction that he took his departure. When England, and those who during his stay had honoured him with\ntheir protection or friendship, were spoken of, his spirits were\nsensibly affected, and it was with difficulty that he could refrain\nfrom tears. But his eyes began to sparkle with joy as soon\nas ever the conversation was turned to his own islands. The\ngood treatment he received in England had made a deep impression upon his mind; and he entertained the highest ideas\nof the country and of the people. Nevertheless, the pleasing'\nprospect he now had before him of returning home loaded\nwith what he well knew would there be esteemed invaluable\ntreasures, and the flattering hope which the possession of\nthese afforded him of attaining to a distinguished superiority\namong his countrymen, were considerations which operated,\nby degrees, to suppress every uneasy sensation. By the time\nhe had gotten on board the ship he appeared to be quite\nhappy.\nHis majesty had furnished Omai with an ample provision of\nevery article which our English navigators, during their former\nintercourse with Otaheite and the Society Islands, had observed\nto be in any estimation there, either as useful or ornamental.\nMany presents, likewise, of the same nature, had been made\nhim by Lord Sandwich, Sir Joseph Banks, and several other\ngentlemen and ladies of his acquaintance. In short, both during\n 240 COOK'S VOYAGES.\nhis residence in England, and at his departure from it, no method\nhad been neglected which could be calculated to render him\nthe instrument of conveying to the inhabitants of the islands of\nthe Pacific Ocean, the most exalted ideas of the greatness and\ngenerosity of the British nation.\n NARRATIVE OF CAPTAIN\nTO THE\nif VERY prepared\nCaptain Cook\nPlymouth, and\ncommand. Ha\ndirections to C\nNore to the Downs, on the s\nsame month, he anchored in\ncovery was already arrived,\nour commander received his\nat the same time, he was ord\ntion to the Cape of Good :\ndetained in London by some\nto follow as soon as he should\nIn the evening of the 12 th.\nmouth Sound, and pursued hi\nwas very early that he began h\nserving the health of his crew:\nsmoked between the deck\nwere well aired. On the 30th, the moon being totally\nthe captain observed it with a night telescope. He had no\nthis occasion, an opportunity of making many obsera\nThe reason was, that the moon was hidden behind the 1\nthe greater part of the time: and this was particularly th\nwhen the beginning and the end of total darkness, and th\ni ins snip.\nitain Cook stood\nof the eclipse happened,\n It being found that there was not hay and corn sufficient for\nthe subsistence of the stock of animals on board, till the arrival\nof our people at the Cape of Good Hope, Captain Cook determined to touch at Teneriffe. This island he thought better\nadapted to the purposes of procuring these articles, and other\nrefreshments, than Madeira. On the ist of August, he anchored\nin the road of Santa Cruz, and immediately despatched an officer\nto the governor, who, with the utmost politeness, granted everything which our commander requested.\nWere a judgment to be formed from the appearance of the\ncountry in the neighbourhood of Santa Cruz, it might be concluded that Teneriffe is so barren a spot, as to be insufficient\nfor the maintenance even of its own inhabitants. It was proved,\nhowever, by the ample supplies which our navigators received,\nthat the islanders had enough to spare for visitors. The\nnecessary articles of refreshment were procured at such moderate prices as to confirm Captain Cook in his opinion that\nTeneriffe is a more eligible place than Madeira, for ships to\ntouch at, which are bound on long voyages. Indeed, the wine\nof the latter island is far superior to that of the former; but\nthen it can only be purchased by a sum of money propor-\ntionably larger.\nDuring the short stay which the captain made at Teneriffe,\nhe continued with great assiduity his astronomical observations;\nand Mr. Anderson has not a little contributed to the farther\nknowledge of the country, by his remarks on its general state,\nits natural appearances, its productions, and its inhabitants. He\nlearned, from a sensible and well informed gentleman, who resided in the island, that a shrub is common there which agrees\nexactly with the description given by Tournefort and Linnaeus\nof the tea shrub, as growing in China and Japan. It is reckoned\na weed, and every year is rooted out in large quantities from the\nvineyards. The Spaniards, however, sometimes use it as tea,\nand ascribe to it all the qualities of that which is imported from\nChina. They give it also the name of tea, and say that it was\nfound in the country when the islands were first discovered.\nAnother botanical curiosity is called the impregnated lemon;\nwhich is a perfect and distinct lemon enclosed within another,\n COOKS VOYAGES.\n243\nand differing from the outer one only in being a little more\nglobular.\nThe air and climate of Teneriffe are, in general, remarkably\nhealthful, and particularly adapted to give relief in pulmonary\ncomplains. This the gentleman before mentioned endeavoured\nto account for, from its being always in a person's power to\nprocure a different temperature of the air, by residing at different\nheights in the island. He expressed, therefore, his surprise that\nthe physicians of England should never have thought of sending their consumptive patients to Teneriffe, instead of Nice or\nLisbon.\nAlthough it is not understood that there is any great similarity\nbetween the manners of the English and those of the Spaniards,\nit was observable that the difference between them was very\nlittle perceived by Omai. He only said, that the Spaniards did\nnot appear to be so friendly as the English: and that, in their\npersons, they approached to some resemblance of his own\ncountrymen.\nOn the 4th, Captain Cook sailed from Teneriffe, and proceeded on his voyage. Such was his attention, both to the discipline and the health of his company, that twice in the space of\nfive days, he exercised them at great guns and small arms, and\ncleared and smoked the ship below decks. On the evening of\nthe ioth, when the Resolution was at a small distance from the\nIsland of Bonavista. she ran so close upon a number of sunken\nrocks that she did but just weather the breakers. The situation\nof our voyagers, for a few minutes, was very alarming. In this\nsituation the captain, with the intrepid coolness which distinguished his character, did not choose to sound, as that, without any possibihty of lessening, might have heightened the\ndanger.\nWhile our commander was near the Cape de Verde Islands,\nhe had an opportunity of correcting an assertion of Mr. Nicholson's with regard to the manner of sailing by those islands,\nwhich, if implicitly trusted to, might prove of dangerous consequence. On the 13th, our navigators arrived before Port Praya,\nin the Island of St Jago; but as the Discovery was not there,\nand little water had been expended in the passage from Tene-\n COOK'S VOYAGES.\nriffe, Captain Cook did not think proper to go in; but stood to\nthe southward.\nIn the course of the voyage, between the latitudes of 120 and\n7\u00b0 north, the weather was generally dark and gloomy. The\nrains were frequent, and accompanied with that close and sultry\nweather which too often brings on sickness in this passage. At\nsuch a.time, the worst consequences are to be apprehended; and\ncommanders of ships cannot be too much upon their guard. It\nis necessary for them to purify the air between decks with fire\nand smoke, and to oblige their people to dry their clothes at\nevery opportunity. The constant observance of these precautions on board the Resolution was attended with such success, that the captain had now fewer sick men than on either of\nhis former voyages. This was the more remarkable as, in consequence of the seams of the vessel having opened so wide as\nto admit the rain when it fell, there was scarcely a man who\ncould lie dry in his bed; and the officers in the gun-room were\nall driven out of their cabins by the water that came through\nthe sides. When settled weather returned, the caulkers were\nemployed in repairing these defects, by caulking the decks and\ninside weather-works of the ship; for the humanity of our commander would not trust the workmen over the sides, while the\nResolution was at sea.\nOn the 1 st of September, our navigators crossed the equator.\nWhile, on the 8th, Captain Cook was near the eastern coast of\nBrazil, he was at considerable pains to settle its longitude,\nwhich, till some better astronomical observations are made on\nshore in that country, he concluded .to be thirty-five degrees\nand a half, or thirty-six degrees west, at most.\nAs our people proceeded on their voyage, they frequently\nsaw, in the night, those luminous marine animals which have\nformerly been mentioned and described. Some'of them appeared to be considerably larger than any which the captain\nhad met with before; and sometimes they were so numerous,\nthat hundreds of them were visible at the same moment.\nOn the 18th of October, the Resolution came to an anchor\nin Table Bay, at the Cape of Good Hope; and the usual compliments having been paid to Baron Plettenberg the governor,\n COOKS VOYAGES.\n245\nCaptain Cook immediately applied himself to his customary\noperations. Nothing remarkable occurred till the evening of\nthe 31st, when a tempest arose from the south-east, which lasted\nthree days, and which was so violent that the Resolution was\nthe only ship in the bay that rode out the gale without dragging\nher anchors. The effects of the storm were sensibly felt by\nour people on shore; for their tents and observatory were torn\nto pieces, and their astronomical quadrant narrowly escaped\nirreparable damage. On the 3rd of November the tempest\nceased, and the next day the English were enabled to resume\ntheir different employments.\nIt was not till the ioth of the month that Captain Cook had\nthe satisfaction of seeing the Discovery arrive in the bay and\neffect her junction with the Resolution. She had sailed from\nEngland on the 1st of August, and would have reached the\nCape of Good Hope a week sooner, if she had not been driven\nfrom the coast by the late storm. Every assistance was immediately given to put her into a proper condition for proceeding\non the voyage.\nWhile the necessary preparations for the future navigation\nwas completing, a disaster happened with regard to the cattle\nwhich had been carried out in the Resolution. They had been\nconveyed on shore for the purpose of grazing. The bull, and\ntwo cows, with their calves, had been sent to graze along with\nsome other cattle : but Captain Cook was advised to keep the\nsheep, which were sixteen in number, close to the tents, where\nthey were penned up every evening. During the night preceding the 14th, some dogs having gotten in among them,\nforced them out of the pen, killed four, and dispersed the rest.\nSix of them were recovered the next day; but the two rams\nand two of the finest ewes in the whole flock were amongst\nthose which were missing. Baron Plettenberg being at this\ntime in the country, our commander applied to Mr. Hemmy,\nthe lieutenant-governor, and to the fiscal, for redress; and both\nthese gentlemen promised to use their endeavours for the recovery of the lost sheep. It is the boast of the Dutch that the\npolice at the Cape is so carefully executed, that it is scarcely\npossible for a slave, with all his cunning and knowledge of the\n 246\nCOOK'S VOYAGES.\ncountry, to effectuate his escape. Nevertheless, Captain Cook's\nsheep evaded all the vigilance of the fiscal's officers and people.\nAt length, after much trouble and expense, by employing some\nof the meanest and lowest scoundrels in the place, he recovered\nall but the two ewes, of which he never could hear the least\ntidings. The character given of the fellows to whom the captain was obliged to have recourse, by the person who recommended their being applied to, was that for a ducatoon they\nwould cut their master's throat, burn the house over his head,\nand bury him and the whole family in the ashes.\nDuring the stay of our voyagers at the Cape, some of the\nofficers, accompanied by Mr. Anderson, made a short excursion\ninto the neighbouring country. This gentleman, as usual, was\nvery diligent in recording everything which appeared to him\nworthy of observation. His remarks, however, in the present\ncase, will be deemed of little consequence, compared with the\nfull, accurate, and curious account of the Cape of Good Hope\nwith which Dr. Sparrman hath lately favoured the literary\nworld.\n\u2022 With respect to Captain Cook, besides the unavoidable care\nwhich lay upon him, in providing his ships with whatever was\nrequisite for the commodious and successful prosecution of the\nvoyage, his attention was eminently directed to scientific objects. He was anxious to ascertain the currents, the variations\nof the compass, and the latitude and longitude of the places\nto which he came. The observations which he collected, and\nrecorded in his journal, while he was at the Cape of Good\nHope, will be esteemed of the greatest importance by judicious\nnavigators:\nAfter the disaster which had happened to the sheep, it may\nwell be supposed that our commander did not long trust on\nshore those which remained. Accordingly, he gave orders to\nhave them, and the other cattle, conveyed on board as fast as\npossible. He made an addition, also, to the original stock, by\nthe purchase of two young bulls, two heifers, two young stallions,\ntwo mares, two rams, several ewes and goats, and some rabbits\nand poultry. All 'these animals were intended for New Zealand,\nOtaheite, and the neighbouring islands; and, indeed, for any\n COOKS VOYAGES. 247\nother places in the course of the voyage, where the leaving of\nany of them might be of service to posterity.\nIn the supplies which were provided at the Cape, Captain\nCook paid a particular regard to the nature and extent of his\nundertaking. As it was impossible to tell when or where he\nmight meet with a place which could so amply contribute to his\nnecessities, he thought proper to lay in such a store of provisions for both ships as would be sufficient to last them for\ntwo years and upwards.\nOur commander having given a copy of his instructions to\nCaptain Clerke, and an order directing him how to proceed in\ncase of a separation, weighed from Table Bay on the 30th of\nNovember, though it was not till the 3rd of December that he\ngot clear of the land. On the 6th the ships passed through\nseveral spots of water nearly of a red colour. When some of\nthis was taken up, it was found to contain a large quantity of\nsmall animals of a reddish hue, and which the microscope discovered to resemble a cray-fish. As our navigators pursued\ntheir course to the south-east, a very strong gale, which they\nhad from the westward, was followed by a mountainous sea, in\nconsequence of which the Resolution rolled and tumbled so\nmuch that the cattle on board were preserved with the utmost\ndifficulty. Soon after several of the goats, especially the males,\ntogether with some sheep, died, notwithstanding all the care to\nprevent it that was exercised by our people. This misfortune\nwas chiefly owing to the coldness of the weather, which now\nbegan to be felt in the most sensible manner.\nOn the 12th land was seen, which, upon a nearer approach,\nwas found to consist of two islands. That which lies most to\nthe south, and is the largest, was judged by Captain Cook to\nbe about fifteen leagues in circuit. The northerly one is about\nnine leagues in circuit; and the two islands are at the distance\nof five leagues from each other. As the ships passed through\nthe channel between them, our voyagers could not discover,\nwith the assistance of their best glasses, either tree or shrub on\neither of them. They seemed to have a rocky and bold shore,\nand their surface is for the most part composed of barren\nmountains, the summits and sides of which were covered with\n COOK'S VOYAGES.\nsnow. These two islands, together with four others which lie\nfrom nine to twelve degrees of longitude more to the east, and\nnearly in the same latitude, had been discovered by Captains\nMarion du Fresne and Crozetj French navigators, in January,\n1772, on their passage, in two ships, from the Cape of Good\nHope to the Philippine Islands. As no names had been assigned to them in a chart of the Southern Ocean, which Captain\nCrozet communicated to Captain Cook in 1775, our commander\ndistinguished the two larger ones by calling them Prince\nEdward's Islands, after his majesty's fourth son. To the other\nfour, with a view of commemorating the discoverers, he gave\nthe name of Marion's and Crozet's Islands.\nThough it was now the middle of summer in this hemisphere,\nthe weather was not less severe than what is generally met with\nin England in the very depth of winter. Instead, however, of\nbeing discouraged by this circumstance, the captain shaped his\ncourse in such a manner as to pass to the southward of Marion's\nand Crozet's Islands, that he might get into the latitude of land\nwhich had been discovered by M. de Kerguelen, another French\nnavigator. It was part of our commander's instructions to\nexamine whether a good harbour might not here be found.\nAs our voyagers, on the 24th, were steering to the eastward,\na fog clearing up a little, which had involved them for some\ntime, and which had rendered their navigation both tedious and\ndangerous, land was seen, bearing south-south-east. Upon a\nnearer approach, it was found to be an island of considerable\nheight, and about three leagues in circuit. Another island, of\nthe same magnitude, was soon after discovered, and in a short\nspace a third, besides some smaller ones. At times, as the fog\nbroke away, there was the appearance of land over the small\nislands, and Captain Cook entertained thoughts of steering for\nit, by running in between them. But, on drawing nearer, he\nfound that so long as the weather continued foggy this would\nbe a perilous attempt. For if there should be no passage, or\nif our people should meet with any sudden danger, there was\nsuch a prodigious sea, breaking on all the shores in a frightful\nsurf, that it would have been impossible for the vessels to be\ngotten off. At the same time the captain saw another island,\n COOKS VOYAGES. 249\nand as he did not know how many more might succeed, he\njudged it prudent, in order to avoid getting entangled among\nunknown lands in a thick fog, to wait for clearer weather.\nThe island last mentioned is a high round rock, which was\nnamed Bligh's Cap. Our commander had received some very\nslight information concerning it at Teneriffe, and his sagacity in\ntracing it was such as immediately led him to determine that it\nwas the same that M. de Kerguelen had called the Isle of\nRendezvous. His reason for giving it that name is not very\napparent; for nothing can rendezvous upon it but fowls of the\nair, it being certainly inaccessible to every other animal. The\nweather beginning to clear up, Captain Cook steered in for the\nland, of which a faint view had been obtained in the morning.\nThis was Kerguelen's Land. No sooner had our navigators\ngotten off Cape Frangois than they observed the coast to the\nsouthward to be much indented by projecting points and bays,\nfrom which circumstance they were sure of finding a good\nharbour. Accordingly, such a harbour was speedily discovered,\nin which the ships came to an anchor on the 25th, being\nChristmas-day. Upon landing, our commander found the shore\nalmost- entirely covered with penguins and other birds, and with\nseals. The latter, which were not numerous, having been unaccustomed to visitors, were so insensible of fear, that as many\nas were wanted, for the purpose of making use of their fat or\nblubber, were killed without difficulty. Fresh water was so\nplentiful, that every gully afforded a large stream; but not a\nsingle tree or shrub, or the least sign of it, could be met with,\nand but very little herbage of any sort. Before Captain Cook\nreturned to his ship, he ascended the first ridge of rocks, that\nrise in a kind of amphitheatre, above one another, in hopes of\nobtaining a view of the country, in which, however, he was\ndisappointed; for previously to his reaching the top there\ncame on so thick a fog, that he could scarcely find his way\ndown again. In the evening, the seine was hauled at the head\nof the harbour, but only half a dozen small fish were caught.\nAs no better success attended a trial which was made the next\nday with hook and line, the only resource for fresh provision\nwas in birds, the store of which was inexhaustible.\n 250\nCOOKS VOYAGES.\nThe people having wrought hard for two days, and nearly\ncompleted their water, the captain allowed them the 27th, as a\nday of rest, to celebrate Christmas. Many of them, in consequence of this indulgence, went on shore, and made excursions,\nin different directions, into the country, which they found barren\nand desolate in the highest degree. One of them, in his ramble,\ndiscovered, and brought to our commander, in the evening, a\nquart bottle, fastened with some wire to a projecting rock on\nthe north side of the harbour. This bottle contained a piece of\nparchment, on which was written the following inscription :\nLudovico XV. Galliarum\nrege et d. de Boynes\nregi a Secretis ad Res\nmaritimas annis 1772 et\n1773-\nIt was clear, from this inscription, that our English navigators\nwere not the first who had been in the place. As a memorial\nof our people's having touched at the same harbour, Captain\nCook wrote as follows, on the other side of the parchment:\nNaves Resolution\net Discovery\nde Rege Magnce Britannia,\nDecembris, 1776.\nHe then put it again into a bottle, together with a silver twopenny piece of 1772. Having covered the mouth of the bottle\nwith a leaden cap, he placed it the next morning in a pile of\nstones, erected for the purpose, upon a little eminence on the\nnorth shore of the harbour, and near to the place where it was\nfirst found. In this position it cannot escape the notice of any\nEuropean, whom accident or design may bring into the port.\nHere the captain displayed the British flag, and named the place\nChristmas Harbour, from our voyagers having arrived in it on\nthat festival.\nAfter our commander had finished the business of the inscription, he went in his boat round the harbour, to examine what\nthe shore afforded. His more particular object was to look for\ndrift-wood; but he did not find a single piece throughout the\n COOKS VOYAGES.\nwhole extent of the place. On the same day, accompanied by\nMr. King, his second lieutenant, he went upon Cape Francois,\nwith the hope that, from this elevation, he might obtain a view\nof the sea-coast, and of the adjoining islands. But when he had\ngotten up, he found that every distant object below him was\nobscured in a thick fog. The land on the same plain, or of a\ngreater height, was sufficiently visible, and appeared naked and\ndesolate in the highest degree; some hills to the southward\nexcepted, which were covered with snow.\nOn the 29th, Captain Cook departed from Christmas Harbour, and proceeded to range along the coast, with a view of\ndiscovering its position and extent. In pursuing his course he\nmet with several promontories and bays, together with a peninsula, all of which he has described and named, chiefly in honour'\nof his various friends. Such was the danger of the navigation\nthat the ships had more than once a very narrow escape. On\nthe same day another harbour was discovered, in which the\nvessels came to an anchor for one night. Here the captain,\nMr. Gore, and Mr. Bayley went on shore to examine the country, which they found, if possible, more barren and desolate\nthan the land that lies about Christmas Harbour I and yet, if\nthe least fertility were anywhere to be expected, it ought to have\nexisted in this place, which is completely sheltered from the bleak\nand predominating southerly and westerly winds. Our commander observed with regret, that there was neither food nor\ncovering for cattle of any sort, and that if he left any, they must\ninevitably perish. Finding no encouragement to continue his\nresearches, he weighed anchor and put to sea on the 30th,\nhaving given to the harbour the name of Port Palliser. On the\nsame day he came to a point, which proved to be the very\neastern extremity of Kerguelen's Land. In a large bay, near\nthis point, there was a prodigious quantity of seaweed, some of\nwhich is of a most extraordinary length. It seemed to be the\nsame kind of vegetable production that Sir Joseph Banks had\nformerly distinguished by the appellation of fucus giganteus.\nAlthough the stem is not much thicker than a man's hand,\nCaptain Cook thought himself well warranted to say that part\nof it grows to the length of sixty fathoms and upward.\n 252\nCOOKS VOYAGES.\nThe result of the examination of Kerguelen's Land was that\nthe quantity of latitude which it occupies doth not much exceed\none degree and a quarter. Its extent, from east to west, still\nremains undecided. At its first discovery, it was probably supposed to belong to a southern continent; but, in fact, it is an\nisland, and that of no great extent. If our commander had not\nbeen unwilling to deprive M. Kerguelen of the honour of its\nbearing his name, he would have been disposed, from its sterility,\nto call it the Island of Desolation.\nIt should here be mentioned, that M. de Kerguelen made\ntwo visits to the coast of this country ; one in 1772, and another\nin 1773. With the first of these voyages Captain Cook had\nonly a very slight acquaintance, and to the second he was totally\na stranger; so that he scarcely had any opportunity of comparing his own discoveries with those of the French navigator.\nM. de Kerguelen was peculiarly unfortunate, in having done\nbut little to complete what he had begun ; for though he discovered a new land, he could not, in two expeditions to it,\nonce bring his ships to an anchor upon any part of its coasts.\nCaptain Cook had either fewer difficulties to struggle with, or\nwas more successful in surmounting them.\nDuring the short time in which our voyagers lay in Christmas\nHarbour, Mr. Anderson lost no opportunity of searching the\ncountry in every direction. Perhaps no place hitherto discovered under the same parallel of latitude, affords so scanty a\nfield for a natural historian. All that could be known in the\nspace of time allotted him, and probably all that will ever be\nworthy to be known, was collected by this gentleman. A verdure, which had been seen at a little distance from the shore,\ngave our people the flattering expectation of meeting with a\nvariety of herbage, but in this they were greatly deceived. On\nlanding it was perceived that the lively colour which had imposed\nupon them was occasioned only by one small plant, not unlike\nsome sorts of saxifrage. It grows in large spreading tufts, a\nconsiderable way up the hills. The whole catalogue of plants\ndoes not exceed sixteen or eighteen, including several kinds of\nmoss, and a beautiful species of lichen, which rises higher up\nfrom the rocks than the rest of the vegetable productions.\n COOK'S VOYAGES.\n253\nThere is not the appearance of a shrub in the whole country.\nNature has been somewhat more bountiful in furnishing it with\nanimals; though, strictly speaking, they are not inhabitants of\nthe place, being all of the marine kind. In general the land is\nonly used by them for breeding, and as a resting-place. Of\nthese animals the most considerable are seals, being of that sort\nwhich is called the ursine seal. The birds, which have already\nbeen mentioned as very numerous, chiefly consist of penguins,\nducks, petrels, albatrosses, shags, gulls, and sea swallows.\nPenguins, which are far superior in number to the rest, are of\nthree kinds, one of which had never been seen by any of our\nvoyagers before. The rocks, or foundations of the hills, are\nprincipally composed of that dark blue and very hard stone\nwhich seems to be one of the most universal productions of\nnature. Nothing was discovered that had the least appearance\nof ore or metal.\nFrom this desolate coast Captain Cook took his departure on\nthe 31st, intending agreeably to his instructions to touch next at\nNew Zealand, that he might obtain a recruit of water, take in\nwood, and make hay for the cattle. Their number was now\nconsiderably diminished, for two young bulls, one of the heifers,\ntwo rams, and several of the goats, had died while our navigators were employed in exploring Kerguelen's Land. For some\ntime they had fresh gales and tolerably clear weather. But on\nthe 3rd of January, 1777, the wind veered to the north, where it\ncontinued eight days, and was attended with so thick a fog,\nthat the ships ran above three hundred leagues in the dark.\nOccasionally the weather would clear up and give our people a\nsight of the sun, but this happened very seldom, and was always\nof short continuance. However, amidst all the darkness produced by the fog, the vessels, though they seldom saw each\nother, were so fortunate in consequence of frequently firing guns\nas signals, that they did not lose company. On the 12th, the\nnortherly winds ended in a calm. This was succeeded in a little\ntime by a wind from the southward, which brought on a rain\nthat continued for twenty-four hours. At the end of the rain\nthe wind freshened, and veering to the west and north-west, was\nfollowed by fair and clear weather.\n 254\nCOOK'S VOYAGES.\nNothing very remarkable occurred to our voyagers till the\n24th, when they discovered the coast of Van Diemen's Land;\nand, on the 26th, the ships came to an anchor in Adventure Bay.\nCaptain Cook, as soon as he had anchored, ordered the boats\nto be hoisted out, in one of which he went himself to look for\nthe most commodious place for obtaining the necessary supplies. Wood and water were found in abundance, and in places\nsufficiently convenient; but grass, which was most wanted, was\nscarce, and, at the same time, very coarse. Necessity, however,\nobliged our people to take up with such as could be procured.\nOn the 28th, the English, who were employed in cutting i\nwood, were agreeably surprised with a visit from some of the\nnatives. They consisted of eight men and a boy, who approached our voyagers, not only without fear, but with the most\nperfect confidence and freedom. There was only a single person\namong them who had anything which bore the least appearance\nof a weapon, and that was no more than a stick about two feet long\nand pointed at one end. These people were quite naked and\nwore no kind of ornaments, unless some large punctures or\nridges, raised in different parts of their bodies, either in straight\nor curved lines, may be considered in that light. Most of them\nhad their hair and beards smeared with a red ointment; and\nthe faces of some of them were painted with the same composition. Every present which Captain Cook made them, they\nreceived without the least appearance of satisfaction. Of bread\nand elephant fish, which were offered them, they refused to\ntaste, but showed that they were fond of birds as an article of\nfood. Two pigs which the captain had brought on shore,\nhaving come within their reach, they seized them by the ears as\na dog would have done, and would have carried them off immediately, apparently with no other intention than to kill them.\nOur commander being desirous of knowing the use of the stick\nwhich one of the Indians had in his hands, he signified by signs\nhis wishes to that purpose. His intimations so far succeeded,\nthat one of them set up a piece of wood as a mark, and threw at\nit at the distance of about twenty yards. There was but little reason to commend his dexterity, for after repeated trials, he was still\nvery wide from his object. Omai, to convince the natives how\n COOKS VOYAGES.\n255\nmuch our weapons were superior to theirs, then fired his musket\nat the mark, by which they were so greatly terrified, that notwithstanding all the endeavours of the English to quiet their\nminds, they ran instandy into the woods.\nAfter the retreat of the Indians, Captain Cook, judging that\ntheir fears would prevent their remaining near enough to observe what passed, ordered the two pigs, being a boar and\nsow, to be carried about a mile within the head of the bay, and\nsaw them left there by the side of a fresh-water brook. It was,\nat first, his benevolent intention to make an additional present\nto Van Diemen's Land, of a young bull and cow, together with\nsome sheep and goats. But upon reflection he laid aside his\ndesign, being persuaded that the natives would destroy them,\nfrom their incapacity of entering into his views with regard to\nthe improvement of their country. As pigs are animals which\nsoon become wild, and are fond of the thickest cover of the\nwoods, there was the greater probability of their being preserved.\nFor the accommodation of the other cattle, an open place must\nhave been chosen, in which situation they could not possibly\nhave been concealed many days.\nOn the 29th, about twenty of the inhabitants, men and boys,\njoined Captain Cook and such of his people as had landed with\nhim, without manifesting the least sign of fear or distrust It\nwas remarkable that one of the Indians was conspicuously deformed, nor was he more distinguished by the hump upon his\nback than by the drollery of his gestures, and the humour of his\nspeeches, which had the appearance of being intended for the\nentertainment of our voyagers. Unfortunately the language in\nwhich he spake to them was wholly unintelligible. To each of\nthe present group the captain gave a string of beads and a medal,\nwhich they seemed to receive with some satisfaction. On iron\nand iron tools they appeared to set no value. There was reason\nto believe that they were even ignorant of fish hooks, and yet\nit is difficult to suppose that a people who inhabit a sea-coast,\nand who were not observed to derive any part of their sustenance\nfrom the productions of the ground, should be unacquainted\nwith some^mode of catching fish. However, they were never\nseen to be thus employed, nor was any canoe or vessel dis-\n 256\nCOOKS VOYAGES.\ncovered by which they could go upon the water. Though they\nhad rejected the kind of fish which had been offered them, it\nwas evident that shell-fish made a part of their food.\nAfter Captain Cook had left the shore several women and\nchildren made their appearance, and were introduced to Lieutenant King by some of the men that attended them. These\nfemales (a kanguroo skin excepted, which was tied over their\nshoulders, and seemed to be intended to support their infants)\nwere as naked and as black as the men, and had their bodies\nmarked with scars in the same manner. Many of the children\nhad fine features and were thought to be pretty; but a less\nfavourable report was made of the women, and especially of\nthose who were advanced in years. Some of the gentlemen,\nhowever, belonging to the Discovery, as our commander was\ninformed, paid their addresses and made liberal offers of presents,\nwhich were rejected with great disdain. It is certain that this\ngallantry was not very agreeable to the men, for an elderly man,\nas soon as he observed it, ordered the women to retire. The\norder was obeyed, but on the part of some of the females with\nthe appearance of a little reluctance.\nOn the present occasion Captain Cook made some proper and\npertinent reflections, which I shall deliver in his own words.\n\"This conduct,\" says he, \"of Europeans among savages, to their\nwomen is highly blamable, as it creates a jealousy in their men\nthat may be attended with consequences fatal to the success of\nthe common enterprise, and to the whole body of adventurers,\nwithout advancing the private purpose of the individual, or enabling him to gain the object of his wishes. I believe it has\ngenerally been found amongst uncivilized people, that where\nthe women are easy of access, the men are the first to offer them\nto strangers, and that where this is not the case, neither the allurement of presents, nor the opportunity of privacy will be\nlikely to have the desired effect. This observation, I am sure,\nwill hold good throughout all the parts of the South Sea where\nI have been. Why then should men act so absurd a part as to\nrisk their own safety, and that of all their companions, in pursuit\nof a gratification which they have no probability of obtaining ? \"\nWhile our navigators were at Van Diemen's Land, they were\n COOK'S VOYAGES.\n257\nsuccessful in obtaining a plentiful crop of grass for their cattle,\nand such as was far more excellent than what they had met\nwith at their first going on shore. The quantity collected was\njudged by the captain to be sufficient to last till his arrival in\nNew Zealand.\nVan Diemen's Land had been visited twice before. That\nname had been given it by Tasman, who discovered it in 1642 ;\nfrom which time it had escaped all notice of European navigators till Captain Furneaux touched at it in 1773. It is well\nknown that it is the southern point of New Holland, which is\nby far the largest island in the world; indeed, so large an island\nas almost to deserve the appellation of a continent.\nWhile Captain Cook was at this country he neglected nothing\nwhich could promote the knowledge of science and navigation.\nHere, as everywhere else, he settled the latitude and longitude\nof places; marked the variations of the compass, and recorded\nthe nature of the tides. He corrected likewise an error of Captain Furneaux, with respect to the situation of Maria's Islands,\non which subject he hath candidly remarked, that his own idea\nis not the result of a more faithful but merely of a second\nexamination.\nMr. Anderson during the few days in which the ships remained\nin Adventure Bay, exerted his usual diligence in collecting as\nfull an account as could be obtained in so short a period of time,\nof the natural productions and the inhabitants of the country.\nLittle can be said concerning either the personal activity or\ngenius of the natives. The first, they do not seem to possess in\nany remarkable degree; and, to all appearance, they have less\nof the last than even the half animated inhabitants of Terra del\nFuego. Their not expressing that surprise which might have\nbeen expected from their seeing men so much unlike themselves,\nana things to which they had hitherto been utter strangers;\ntheir indifference for the presents of our people and their general\ninattention, were sufficient testimonies that they were not endued with any acuteness of understanding. What the ancient\npoets tell us of Fauns and Satyrs living in hollow trees, is realized\nat Van Diemen's Land. Some wretched constructions of sticks,\ncovered with bark, and which did not deserve the name of huts,\ns\n COOK'S VOYAGES.\nill I\nwere indeed found near the shore; but these seemed only to\nhave been erected for temporary purposes. The most comfortable habitations of the natives were afforded by the largest trees.\nThese had their trunks hollowed out by fire, to the height of six\nor seven feet; and there was room enough in them for three or\nfour persons to sit round a hearth, made of clay. At the same\ntime, these places of shelter are durable; for the people take\ncare to leave one side of the tree sound, which is sufficient to\nkeep it in luxuriant growth. The inhabitants of Van Diemen's\nLand are undoubtedly from the same stock with those of the\nnorthern parts of New Holland. Tneir language, indeed,\nappeared to be different; but how far the difference extended,\nour voyagers could not have an opportunity of determining.\nWith regard to the New Hollanders in general, there is reason\nto suppose that they originally came from the same place with\nall the Indians of the South Sea.\nOn the 30th of January, 1777, Captain Cook sailed from\nAdventure Bay, and on the 12 th of February came to an anchor\nat his old station of Queen Charlotte's Sound, in New Zealand.\nBeing unwilling to lose any time, he commenced his operations\nthat very afternoon. By his order several of the empty water\ncasks were immediately landed, and a place was begun to be\ncleared for setting up the two observatories and the erection of\ntents to accommodate a guard and the rest of the company, whose\nbusiness might require them to remain on shore. Our navigators\nhad not long been at anchor before a number of canoes filled\nwith natives came alongside of the ships. However, very few of\nthem would venture on board; which appeared the more extraordinary as the captain was well-known to them all, and they\ncould not be insensible how liberally he had behaved to them\non former occasions. There was one man in particular, whom\nhe had treated with remarkable kindness during the whole of his\nlast stay in this place; and yet neither professions of friendship\nnor presents could prevail upon him to enter the Resolution.\nThere was a real cause for this shyness on the part of the New\nZealanders. A dreadful event had happened to some of Captain Furneaux's crew, while he lay in Queen Charlotte's Sound,\nafter he had finally separated from Captain Cook, in the former\n COOK'S VOYAGES.\nvoyage. Ten men, who had been sent out in the large cutter to\ngather wild greens, for the ship's company, were killed in a\nslprmish with the natives. What was the cause of the quarrel\ncould not be ascertained, as not one of the company survived to\nrelate the story. Lieutenant Burney, who was ordered to go in\nsearch of them, found only some fragments of their bodies, from\nwhich it appeared that they had been converted into the food of\nthe inhabitants. It was the remembrance of this event, and the\nfear of its being revenged, which now rendered the New Zea-\nlanders so fearful of entering the English vessels. From the\nconversation of Omai, who was on board the Adventure when\nthe melancholy affair happened, they knew that it could not be\nunknown to Captain Cook. The captain, therefore, judged it\nnecessary to use every endeavour to assure them of the continuance of his friendship, and that he should not disturb them\non account of the catastrophe. It was most probably in consequence of this assurance, that they soon laid aside all manner of\nrestraint and distrust.\nIn the meanwhile the operations for refitting the ships, and\nfor obtaining provisions, were carried on with great vigour. For\nthe protection of the party on shore, our commander appointed\na guard of ten marines, and ordered arms for all the workmen,\nwith whom Mr. King, and two or three petty officers, constantly\nremained. A boat was never sent to a considerable distance\nwithout being armed or without being under the direction of such\nofficers as might be depended upon, and who were well acquainted with the natives. In Captain Cook's former visits to\nthis country, he had never made use of such precautions; nor\nwas he now convinced of their absolute necessity. But, after\nthe tragical fate of the crew of the Adventure's boat in this sound,\nand of Captain Marion du Fresne, and some of his people, in the\nBay of Islands (in 1772), it was impossible to free our navigators\nfrom all apprehensions of experiencing a similar calamity.\nWhatever suspicions the inhabitants might at first entertain\nthat their acts of barbarity would be revenged, they very speedily\nbecame so perfectly easy upon the subject as to take up their\nresidence close to our voyagers; and the advantage of their\ncoming to live with the English was not inconsiderable. Every\n COOK'S VOYAGES.\nday, when the weather would permit, some of them went out to\ncatch fish, and our people generally obtained, by exchanges, a\ngood share of the produce of their labours, in addition to the\nsupply which was afforded by our own nets and lines. Nor\nwas there a deficiency of vegetable refreshments ; to which was\nunited spruce beer for drink; so that if the seeds of the scurvy\nhad been contracted by any of the crew, they would speedily\nhave been removed by such a regimen. The fact, however,\nwas, that there was only two invalids upon the sick lists in both\nships.\nCuriosities, fish, and women were the articles of commerce\nsupplied by the New Zealanders. The two first always came to\na good market; but the latter did not happen, at this time, to\nbe an acceptable commodity. Our seamen had conceived a\ndislike to these people, and were either unwilling or afraid to\nassociate with them; the good effect of which was, that our\ncommander knew no instance of a man's quitting his station\nto go to the habitations of the Indians. A connection with\nwomen it was out of Captain Cook's power to prevent; but he\nnever encouraged it, and always was fearful of its consequences.\nMany, indeed, are of opinion that such an intercourse is a great\nsecurity among savages. But if this should ever be the case\nwith those who remain and settle among them, it is generally\notherwise with respect to travellers and transient visitors. In\nsuch a situation as was that of our navigators, a connection\nwith the women of the natives betrays more men than it saves.\n\" What else,\" says the captain, \" can reasonably be expected,\nsince all their views are selfish without the least mixture of regard or attachment ? My own experience, at least, which hath\nbeen pretty extensive, hath not pointed out to me one instance\nto the contrary.\"\nAmongst the persons who occasionally visited the English, was\na chief of the name of Kahoora, who, as Captain Cook was informed, had headed the party that cut off Captain Furneaux's\npeople, and had himself killed Mr. Rowe, the officer who commanded. This man our commander was strongly solicited to\nput to death, even by some of the natives; and Omai was perfectly eager and violent upon the subj ect. To these solicitations\n \u25a0Ne*\nCOOKS VC\nthe captain paid not the least d\nadmired Kahoora's courage, and\nthe confidence with which he ha\nKahoora had placed his whole s\nCaptain Cook had uniformly made\nwere, that he had always been a friend to them al\ntinue to be so, unless they gave him cause to aci\nas to their inhuman treatment of our people, he\nmore of it, the transaction having happened loi\nhe was not present; but that, if ever they made:\nof the same kind, they might rest assured of fe\nof his resentment.\nWhile our commander, on the 16th, was mal\nfor the purposes of coUecting food for his catt\nthe opportunity to inquire, as accurately as j\ncircumstances which had attended the melan<\nresented, no mischief would\nhave happened. KahcM\nMa's greatest\nenemies, and even the very i\nnen that had most eame\nstly solicited\nhis destruction, confessed, i\nit the same time, that h\ne had no in-\ntention of quarrelling with C\naptain Furneaux's peop\ne, and much\nless of killing any of them, t\nill the fray had actually <\n:ommenced.\nthe solicitude he had fc\nfuture service to the con\nmale and female, with i\nand a sow. Although h\nchiefs that they would i\nsen ted to them, he coui\nupon their assurances,\narrival in Queen Charlc\nand hogs, but sheep, to.\nThe accomplishment,\neither upon his findinsr\nanimals wnicn n;\nme to place any gri\n 262 COOK'S VOYAGES.\ntect and keep the cattle, or upon his meeting with a place where\nthere might be a probability of their being concealed from those\nwho would ignorantly attempt to destroy them. Neither of\nthese circumstances happened to be conformable to his wishes.\nAt different times he had left in New Zealand ten or a dozen\nhogs, besides those which had been put on shore by Captain\nFurneaux. It will, therefore, be a little extraordinary if this race\nof animals should not increase and be preserved, either in a wild\nor a domestic state, or in both. Our commander was informed\nthat Tiratou, a popular chief among the natives, had a number\nof cocks and hens, and one sow in his separate possession.\nWith regard to the gardens which had formerly been planted,\nthough they had almost entirely been neglected, and some of\nthem destroyed, they were not wholly unproductive. They were\nfound to contain cabbages, onions, leeks, purslain, radishes, mustard, and a few potatoes. The potatoes, which had first been\nbrought from the Cape of Good Hope, were greatly meliorated by\nchange of soil; and, with proper cultivation, would be superior to\nthose produced in most other countries.\nA great addition of knowledge was obtained, during this\nvoyage, with respect to the productions of New Zealand, and the\nmanners and customs of its inhabitants. The zeal of Captain\nCook upon the subject was admirably seconded by the sedulous\ndiligence of Mr. Anderson, who omitted no opportunity of collecting every kind and degree of information. I shall only so\nfar trespass on the patience of my readers as to mention a few\ncircumstances tending to delineate the character of the natives.\nThey seemed to be a people perfectly satisfied with the little they\nalready possess; nor are they remarkably curious either in their\nobservations or their inquiries. New objects are so far from\nstriking them with such a degree of surprise as might naturally\nbe expected, that they scarcely fix their attention even for a moment. In the arts with which they are acquainted, they show\nas much ingenuity, both in invention and execution, as any uncivilized nations under similar circumstances. Without the least\nuse of those tools which are formed of metal, they make everything that is necessary to procure their subsistence, clothing, and\nmilitary weapons; and all this is done by them with a neatness,\n COOK'S VOYAGES.\n263\na strength, and a convenience, that are well adapted to the accomplishment of the several purposes they have in view. No\npeople can have a quicker sense of an injury done to them than\nthe New Zealanders, or be more ready to resent it; and yet they\nwant one characteristic of true bravery; for they will take an opportunity of being insolent, when they think that there is no danger of their being punished. From the number of their weapons\nand their dexterity in using them, it appears that war is their\nprincipal profession. Indeed, their public contentions are so\nfrequent, or rather so perpetual, that they must live under continual apprehensions of being destroyed by each other. From\ntheir horrid custom of eating the flesh of their enemies, not only\nwithout reluctance, but with peculiar satisfaction, it would be\nnatural to suppose that they must be destitute of every humane\nfeeling, even with regard to their own party. This, however, is\nnot the case: for they lament the loss of their friends with a\nviolence of expression which argues the most tender remembrance of them. At a very early age the children are initiated\ninto all the practices, whether good or bad, of their fathers ; so\nthat a boy or girl, when only nine or ten years old, can perform\nthe motions, and imitate the frightful gestures, by which the\nmore aged are accustomed to inspire their enemies with terror.\nThey can keep likewise the strictest time in their song; and it\nis with some degree of melody that they sing the traditions of\ntheir forefathers, their actions in war, and other subjects. The\nmilitary achievements of their ancestors, the New Zealanders\ncelebrate with the highest pleasure, and spend much of their time\nin diversions of this sort, and in playing upon a musical instrument which partakes of the nature of a flute. With respect to\ntheir language, it is far from being harsh or disagreeable, though\nthe pronunciation of it is frequently guttural; nor, if we may\njudge from the melody of some kinds of their songs, is it destitute of those qualities which fit it to be associated with music.\nOf its identity with the languages of the other islands throughout\nthe South Sea, fresh proofs were exhibited during the present\nvoyage.\nAt the request of Omai, Captain Cook consented to take\nwith him two youths from New Zealand. That they might not\n 264\nCOOK'S VOYAGES.\nquit their native country under any deluding ideas of visiting it\nagain, the captain took care to inform their parents, in the\nstrongest terms, that they would never return. This declaration\nseemed, however, to make no kind of impression. The father\nof the youngest lad resigned him with an indifference which he\nwould scarcely have shown at parting with his dog, and even\nstripped the boy of the little clothing he possessed, delivering\nhim quite naked into the hands of our voyagers. This was not\nthe case with the mother of the other youth. She took her\nleave of him with all the marks of tender affection that might\nbe expected between a parent and a child on such an occasion;\nbut she soon resumed her cheerfulness, and went away wholly\nunconcerned.\nOn the 25th of the month, Captain Cook stood out of\nQueen Charlotte's Sound, and by the 27th got clear of New\nZealand. No sooner had the ships lost sight of the land than\nthe two young adventurers from that country, one of whom was\nnearly eighteen years of age, and the other about ten, began\ndeeply to repent of the*step they had taken. It was the experience of the sea-sickness which gave this turn to their reflections,\nand all the soothing encouragement the English could think of\nwas but of little avail. They wept both in public and in private, and made their lamentation in a kind of song that seemed\nto be expressive of the praises of their country and people,\nfrom which they were to be separated for ever. In this disposition they continued for many days; but as their sea-sickness wore off, and the tumult of their minds subsided, the fits\nof lamentation became less and less frequent, and at length\nentirely ceased. By degrees their native country and their\nfriends were forgotten, and they appeared to be as firmly attached to our navigators as if they had been born in England.\nIn the prosecution of the voyage, Captain Cook met with\nunfavourable winds, and it was not till the 29th of March that\nland was discovered. It was found to be an inhabited island,\nthe name of which, as was learned from two of the natives who\ncame off in a canoe, is Mangeea. Our commander examined\nthe coast with his boats, and had a short intercourse with some\nof the inhabitants. Not being able to find a proper harbour\n COOK'S VOYAGES.\n265\nfor bringing the ships to an anchorage, he was obliged to leave\nthe country unvisited, though it seemed capable of supplying\nall the wants of our voyagers. The island of Mangeea is full\nfive leagues in circuit, and of a moderate and pretty equal\nheight. It has, upon the whole, a pleasing aspect, and might\nbe made a beautiful spot by cultivation. The inhabitants, who\nappeared to be both numerous and well fed, seemed to resemble\nthose of Otaheite and the Marquesas in the beauty of their persons ; and the resemblance, as far as could be judged in so\nshort a compass of time, takes place with respect to their\ngeneral disposition and character.\nFrom the coast of Mangeea our commander sailed in the\nafternoon of the 30th, and on the next day land was again seen,\nwithin four leagues of which the ships arrived on the 1st of\nApril. -Our people could then pronounce it to be an island,\nnearly of the same appearance and extent with that which had\nso lately been left. Some of the natives speedily put off in their\ncanoes, and three of them were persuaded to come on board\nthe Resolution; on which occasion their whole behaviour\nmarked that they were quite at their ease, and felt no kind of\napprehension that they should be detained or ill-used. In a\nvisit from several others of the inhabitants, they manifested a\ndread of approaching near the cows and horses, nor could they\nform the least conception of their nature. But the sheep and\ngoats did not, in their opinion, surpass the limits of their ideas,\nfor they gave our navigators to understand that they knew them\nto be birds. As there is not the most distant resemblance between a sheep or goat and any winged animal, this may be\nthought to be almost an incredible example of human ignorance.\nBut it should be remembered that, excepting hogs, dogs, and\nbirds, these people were strangers to the existence of any other\nland animals.\nIn a farther intercourse with the natives, who had brought a\nhog, together with some plantains and cocoa-nuts, they demanded a dog from our voyagers, and refused everything besides which was offered in exchange. One of the gentlemen on\nboard happened to have a dog and a bitch, which were great\nnuisances in the ship, and these he might now have disposed of\n 266\nCOOK'S VOYAGES.\nin a manner that would have been of real future utility to the\nisland. But he had no such views in making them the companions of his voyage. Omai however, with a good nature that\nreflects honour upon him, parted with a favourite dog which he\nhad brought from England ; and with this acquisition the people\ndeparted highly satisfied.\nOn the 3rd of April Captain Cook despatched Mr. Gore, with\nthree boats, to endeavour to get upon the island. Mr. Gore\nhimself, Omai, Mr. Anderson and Mr. Burney, were the only\npersons that landed. The transactions of the day, of which\nMr. Anderson drew up an ingenious and entertaining account,\nadded to the stock of knowledge gained by our navigators, but\ndid not accomplish Captain Cook's principal object. Nothing\nwas procured by the gentlemen, from the island, that supplied\nthe wants of the ships. In this expedition Omai displayed that\nturn of exaggeration with which travellers have so frequently\nbeen charged. Being asked by the natives concerning the\nEnglish, their ships, their country, and the arms they made use\nof, his answers were not a little marvellous. He told these\npeople that our country had ships as large as their island, on\nboard which were instruments of war (describing our guns) of\nsuch dimensions that several persons might sit within them. At\nthe same time he assured the inhabitants that one of these guns\nwas sufficient to crush their whole island at a single shot.\nThough he was obliged to acknowledge that the guns on board\nthe vessels upon their coast were but small, he contrived, by an\nexplosion of gunpowder, to inspire them with a formidable idea\nof their nature and effect. It is probable that this representation of things contributed to the preservation of the gentlemen\nin their enterprise on shore, for a strong disposition to retain\nthem had been shown by the natives.\nIt seemed destined that this day should give Omai more\noccasions than one of bearing a principal part in its transactions.\nThe island, though never visited by Europeans before, happened\nto have other strangers residing in it; and it was entirely owing\nto Omai's having attended on the expedition, that a circumstance so curious came to the knowledge of the English.\nScarcely had he been landed upon the beach, when he found\n COOKS VOYAGES.\n267\namong the crowd which had assembled there three of his own\ncountrymen, natives of the Society Islands. That, at the distance of about two hundred leagues from those islands, an immense unknown ocean intervening, with the wretched boats\ntheir inhabitants are known to make use of, and fit only for a\npassage where sight of land is scarcely ever lost, such a meeting,\nat such a place so accidentally visited should occur, may well be\nregarded as one of those unexpected situations with which the\nwriters of feigned adventures love to surprise their readers.\nWhen events of this kind really happen in common life, they\ndeserve to be recorded for their singularity. It may easily be\nsupposed with what mutual surprise and satisfaction this interview of Omai with his countrymen was attended. Twelve years\nbefore, about twenty persons in number, of both sexes, had embarked on board a canoe at Otaheite, to cross over to the\nneighbouring island of Ulietea. A violent storm having arisen,\nwhich drove them out of their course, and their provisions\nbeing very scanty, they suffered incredible hardships, and the\ngreatest part of them perished by famine and fatigue. Four\nmen only survived when the boat overset, and then the destruction of this small remnant appeared to be inevitable. However,\nthey kept hanging by the side of the vessel, which they continued to do for some days, when they were providentially\nbrought within sight of the people of this island, who immediately sent out canoes and brought them on shore. The three\nmen who now survived expressed a strong sense of the kind\ntreatment they had received, and so well satisfied were they with\ntheir present situation, that they refused an offer which was\nmade them of being conveyed to their native country. A very\nimportant instruction may be derived from the preceding narrative. It will serve to explain, better than a thousand conjectures\nof speculative reasoners, how the detached parts of the earth,\nand in particular how the islands of the South Sea, though lying\nremote from any inhabited continent, or from each other, may\nhave originally been peopled. Similar adventures have occurred\nin the history of navigation and shipwrecks.\nThe island on which Mr. Gore, Mr. Anderson, Mr. Burney,\nand Omai had landed, is called Wateeoo by the natives, and is\n 268\nCOOKS VOYAGES.\na beautiful spot, having a surface composed of hills and plains,\nwhich are covered with a verdure rendered extremely pleasant\nby the diversity of its hues. Its inhabitants are very numerous,\nand many of the young men were perfect models in shape, besides which, they had complexions as delicate as those of the\nwomen, and appeared to be equally amiable in their dispositions.\nIn their manners, their general habits of life, and their religious\nceremonies and opinions, these islanders have a near resemblance to the people of Otaheite and its neighbouring isles ; and\ntheir language was well understood, both by Omai and the two\nNew Zealanders.\nThe next place visited by Captain Cook was a small island,\ncalled Wennooa-ette, or Otakootaia, to which Mr. Gore was\nsent, at the head of a party, who procured about a hundred\ncocoa-nuts for each ship, and some grass, together with a quantity of the leaves and branches of young trees for the cattle.\nThough at this time no inhabitants were found in Wennooa-ette,\nyet, as there remained indubitable marks of its being at least occasionally frequented, Mr. Gore left a hatchet and several nails,\nto the full value of what had been taken away.\nOn the 5th our commander directed his course for Harvey's\nIsland, which was only at the distance of fifteen leagues, and\nwhere he hoped to procure some refreshments. This island had\nbeen discovered by him in 1773, during his last voyage, when\nno traces were discerned of its having any inhabitants. It was\nnow experienced to be well peopled, and by a race of men who\nappeared to differ much, both in person and disposition, from\nthe natives of Wateeoo. Their behaviour was disorderly and\nclamorous, their colour was of a deeper cast, and several of them\nhad a fierce and rugged aspect. It was remarkable that not one\nof them had adopted the practice so generally prevalent among\nthe people of the Southern Ocean, of puncturing or tattooing\ntheir bodies. But, notwithstanding this singularity, the most\nunequivocal proofs were exhibited of their having the same\ncommon origin; and their language in particular approached\nstill nearer to the dialect of Otaheite than that of Wateeoo, or\nMangeea. No anchorage for the ships being found in Harvey's\nIsland, Captain Cook quitted it without delay.\n COOK'S VOYAGES.\n269\nThe captain being thus disappointed at all the islands he\nhad met with since his leaving New Zealand, and his progress\nhaving unavoidably been retarded by unfavourable winds and\nother unforeseen circumstances, it became impossible to think\nof doing anything this year in the high latitudes of the northern\nhemisphere, from which he was still at so great a distance,\nthough the season for his operations there was already begun.\nIn this situation, it was absolutely necessary, in the first place,\nto pursue such measures as were most likely to preserve the\ncattle that were on board. A still more capital object was to\nsave the stores and provisions of the ships, that he might the\nbetter be enabled to prosecute his discoveries to the north,\nwhich could not now be commenced till a year later than was\noriginally intended. If he had been so fortunate as to have\nprocured a supply of water, and of grass, at any of the islands\nhe had lately visited, it was his purpose to have stood back to\nthe south, till he had met with a westerly wind. But the certain\nconsequence of doing this, without such a supply, would have\nbeen the loss of all the cattle; while, at the same time, not a\nsingle advantage would have been gained, with regard to the\ngrand ends of the voyage. He determined, therefore, to bear\naway for the Friendly Islands, where he was sure of being\nabundantly provided.\nIn pursuing his course, agreeably to this resolution, our commander, on the 14th, reached Palmerston Island, where, and at\na neighbouring islet, both of which were uninhabited, some little\nrelief was obtained. The boats soon procured a load of scurvy-\ngrass and young cocoa-nut trees, which was a feast for the\ncattle; and the same feast, with the addition of palm cabbage,\nand the tender branches of the wharra tree, was continued for\nseveral days. On the 16th, Omai, being on shore with the\ncaptain, caught, with a scoop-net, in a very short time, as much\nfish as served the whole party for dinner, besides sending a\nquantity to both the ships. Birds too, and particularly men-of-\nwar and tropic birds, were plentifully obtained; so that our\nnavigators had sumptuous entertainment. Omai acted as cook\nupon the occasion. The fish and the birds he dressed with\nheated stones, after the manner of his country; and performed\n 270 COOK'S VOYAGES.\nthe operation with a dexterity and good humour which were\ngreatly to his credit. From the islet before mentioned twelve\nhundred cocoa-nuts were procured, which being equally divided\namong the crew, were of great use to them, both on account of\nthe juice and the kernel. There is no water in the islets which\nare comprehended under the name of Palmerston Island. If\nthat article could be obtained, and good anchorage could be\naccomplished within the reef, Captain Cook would prefer this\nisland to any of the uninhabited ones, for the mere purpose of\nrefreshment. The quantity of fish that might be caught would\nbe sufficient; and a ship's company could roam about unmolested by the petulance of the inhabitants.\nDifferent opinions have been entertained concerning the\nformation of the low islands in the great ocean. From the\nobservations which our commander now made, he was convinced that such islands are formed from shoals, or coral banks,\nand, consequently, that they are always increasing.\nAfter leaving Palmerston's Island, Captain Cook steered to\nthe west, with a view of making the best of his way to Anna-\nmooka. During his course the showers were so copious, that\nour navigators saved a considerable quantity of water. Finding\nthat a greater supply could be obtained by the rain in one hour\nthan could be gotten by distillation in a month, the captain\nlaid aside the still as a thing which was attended with more\ntrouble than profit. At this time, the united heat and moisture\nof the weather, in addition to the impossibility of keeping the\nships dry, threatened to be noxious to the health of our people.\nIt was, however, remarkable, that neither the constant use of\nsalt food, nor the vicissitudes of climate, were productive of any\nevil effects. Though the only material refreshment our voyagers\nhad received, since their leaving the Cape of Good Hope, was\nthat which they had procured at New Zealand, there was not,\nas yet, a single sick person on board. This happy situation of\nthings was undoubtedly owing to the unremitting attention of\nour commander, in seeing that no circumstance was neglected\nwhich could contribute to the preservation of the health of his\ncompany.\nOn the 28th of April, Captain Cook touched at the Island of\n COOK'S VOYAGES. 271\nKomango : and, on the 1st of May, he arrived at Annamooka.\nThe station he took was the very same which he had occupied\nwhen he visited the country three years before; and it was\nprobably almost in the same place where Tasman, the first discoverer of this and some of the neighbouring islands, anchored\nin 1643. A friendly intercourse was immediately opened with\nthe natives, and everything was settled to the captain's satisfaction. He received the greatest civilities from Toobou, the\nchief of Annamooka; and Taipa, a chief from the Island of\nKomango, attached himself to the English in so extraordinary\na manner, that, in order to be near them in the night, as well\nas in the day, he had a house brought on men's shoulders, a\nfull quarter of a mile, and placed close to the shed, which was\noccupied by our party on shore. On the 6th, our commander\nwas visited by a great chief from Tongataboo, whose name was\nFeenou, and who was falsely represented, by Taipa, to be the king\nof all the Friendly Isles. The only interruption to the harmony\nwhich subsisted between ourpeople and the nativesof Annamooka\narose from the thievish disposition of many of the inhabitants\nThey afforded frequent opportunities of remarking how expert\nthey were in the business of stealing. Even some of the chiefs\ndid not think the profession unbecoming their dignity. One of\nthem was detected in carrying a bolt out of the ship, concealed\nunder his clothes; for which Captain Cook sentenced him to\nreceive a dozen lashes, and kept him confined till he had paid\nor slaves, were still employed in the dirty work: and upon them\na flogging seemed to make no greater impression than it would\nhave done upon the mainmast. When any of them happened\nto be caught in the act, so far were their masters from interceding in their favour, that they often advised our gentlemen\nto kill them. This, however, being a punishment too severe to\nbe inflicted, they generally escaped without being punished at\nall; for of the shame, as well as of the pain of corporal chastisement, they appeared to be equally insensible. At length,\nCaptain Clerke invented a mode of treatment which was\nthought to be productive of some good effect He put the\n 272 COOK'S VOYAGES.\nthieves into the hands of the barber, and completely shaved\ntheir heads. In consequence of this operation, they became\nobjects of ridicule to their own countrymen; and our people,\nby keeping them at a distance, were enabled to deprive them of\nfuture opportunities for a repetition of their rogueries.\nThe island of Annamooka being exhausted of its articles of\nfood, Captain Cook proposed, on the nth, to proceed directly\nfor Tongataboo. From this resolution, however, he was diverted,\nat the instance of Feenou, who warmly recommended, in preference to it, an island, or rather a group of islands, called\nHapaee, lying to the north-east. There, he assured our voyagers,\nthey could be plentifully supplied with every refreshment, in the\neasiest manner; and he enforced his advice by engaging to\nattend them thither in person. Accordingly, Hapaee was made\nchoice of for the next station; and the examination of it became\nan object with the captain, as it had never been visited by any\nEuropean ships.\nOn the 17th, our commander arrived at Hapaee, where he\nmet with a most friendly reception from the inhabitants, and\nfrom Earoupa, the chief of the island. During the whole stay\nof our navigators, the time was spent in a reciprocation of\npresents, civilities, and solemnities. On the part of the natives\nwere displayed single combats with clubs, wrestling and boxing-\nmatches, female combatants, dances performed by men, and\nnight entertainments of singing and dancing. The English, on\nthe other hand, gave pleasure to the Indians by exercising the\nmarines, and excited their astonishment by the exhibition of\nfireworks. After curiosity had, on both sides, been sufficiently\ngratified, Captain Cook applied himself to the examination of\nHapaee, Lefooga, and other neighbouring islands. As the ships\nwere returning, on the 31st, from these islands to Annamooka,\nthe Resolution was very near running full upon a low sandy\nisle, called Pootoo Pootooa, surrounded with breakers. It\nfortunately happened, that the men had just been ordered upon\ndeck to put the vessel about, and were most of them at their\nstations; so that the necessary movements were executed not\nonly with judgment, but also with alertness. This alone saved\nthe ship and her company from destruction. \" Such hazardous\n COOK'S VOYAGES.\n273\nsituations,\" says the captain, \" are the unavoidable companions\nof the man who goes upon a voyage of discovery.\"\nDuring our commander's expedition to Hapaee, he was introduced to Poulaho, the real king of the Friendly Isles; in\nwhose presence it instantly appeared how groundless had been\nFeenou's pretensions to that character. Feenou, however, was\na chief of great note and influence. By Poulaho Captain Cook\nwas invited to pass over to Tongataboo, which request he complied with after he had touched, for two or three days, at Annamooka. In the passage, the Resolution was insensibly drawn\nupon a large flat, on which lay innumerable coral rocks of different depths below the surface of the water. Notwithstanding\nall the care and attention of our people to keep her clear of\nthem, they could not prevent her from striking on one of\nthese rocks. The same event happened to the Discovery; but\nfortunately, neither of the ships stuck fast, or received any\ndamage.\nOn the ioth of June Captain Cook arrived at Tongataboo,\nwhere the king was waiting for him upon the beach, and immediately conducted him to a small but neat house, which, he\nwas told, was at his service during his stay in the island. The\nhouse was situated a little within the skirts of the woods, and\nhad a fine large area before it; so that a more agreeable spot\ncould not have been provided. Our commander's arrival at\nTongataboo was followed by a succession of entertainments\nsimilar to those which had occurred at Hapaee, though somewhat diversified in circumstances and exhibited with additional\nsplendour. The pleasure, however, of the visit was occasionally\ninterrupted by the thieveries of many of the inhabitants. Nothing\ncould prevent their plundering our voyagers in every quarter;\nand they did it in the most daring and insolent manner. There\nwas scarcely anything which they did not attempt to steal; and\nyet, as the crowd was always great, the captain would not\npermit the sentinels to fire, lest the innocent should suffer with\nthe guilty.\nCaptain Cook, on the 19th, made a distribution of the animals\nwhich he had selected as presents for the principal men of the\nisland. To Poulaho, the king, he gave a young English bull and\nT\n 274\nCOOK'S VOYAGES.\na cow, together with three goats; to Mareewagee, a chief of\nconsequence, a Cape ram and two ewes; and to Feenou, a horse\nand a mare. He likewise left in the island a young boar and\nthree young sows of the English breed; and two rabbits, a buck\nand a doe. Omai, at the same time, was instructed to represent\nthe importance of these animals, and to explain, as far as he\nwas capable of doing it, the manner in which they should be\npreserved and treated. Even the generosity of the captain was\nnot without its inconveniences. It soon appeared that some\nwere dissatisfied with the allotment of the animals; for, next\nmorning, two kids and two turkey cocks were missing. As our\ncommander could not suppose that this was an accidental loss,\nhe determined to have them again. The first step he took was\nto seize on three canoes, that happened to be alongside the\nships; after which he went on shore, and having found the\nking, his brother, Feenou, and some other chiefs, he immediately put a guard over them, and gave them to understand that\nthey must remain under restraint till not only the kid and the\nturkeys, but the rest of the things which at different times had\nbeen stolen from our voyagers, should be restored. This bold\nstep of Captain Cook was attended with a very good effect.\nSome of the articles which had been lost were instantly brought\nback, and such good assurances were given with regard to the\nremainder, that in the afternoon the chiefs were released. It\nwas a happy circumstance, with respect to this transaction, that\nit did not abate the future confidence of Poulaho and his\nfriends in the captain's kind and generous treatment.\nOn the 5th of July was an eclipse of the sun, which, however,\nin consequence of unfavourable weather, was very imperfectly\nobserved. Happily, the disappointment was of little consequence, as the longitude was more than sufficiently determined\nby lunar observations.\nCaptain Cook sailed from Tongataboo on the ioth, and, two\ndays after, came to anchor at the island of Middleburg, or\nEooa, as it is called by the inhabitants. Here he was immediately\nvisited by Taoofa, the chief, with whom he had formerly been\nacquainted. The intercourse now renewed was friendly in the\nhighest degree, both with Taoofa and the rest of the natives;\n COOK'S VOYAGES.\nVTS\nand our commander endeavoured to meliorate tl\nby planting a pineapple and sowing the seeds of\nother vegetable, in the chiefs plantation. To th\ncouraged by a proof that his past endeavours 1\nwholly unsuccessful. He had one day served up\ndinner a dish of turnips, being the produce of the\nhe had left at Eooa in his last voyage.\nThe stay which Captain Cook made at the Fri\nwas between two and three months; during whic\naccidental differences excepted, there subsisted\ncordiality between the English and the natives\nferences were never attended with any fatal c\nwhich happy circumstance was principally owing\nmitring attention of the captain, who directed all\nwith a view to the prevention of such quarrels,\ninjurious either to the inhabitants or to his owe\nlong as our navigators staid at the islands, they e\nlittle of their sea provisions, subsisting, in gene\nproduce of the country, and carrying away with th<\nof refreshments, sufficient to last till their arriv\nstation, where they could depend upon a fresh su\na singular pleasure to our commander, that he\nopportunity of adding to the happiness of these s\nby the useful animals which he left among then\nwhole, the advantages of having touched at\nIslands were very great: and Captain Cook refle\nwith peculiar satisfaction, that these advantages s\nwithout retarding, for a single moment, the prose\ngreat object of his voyage; the season for proa\nnorth having been previously lost\nBesides the immediate benefits which both th\nthe English derived from their mutual intercourse <\noccasion, such a large addition was now made to the\nknowledge of this part of the Pacific Ocean, as n\nsmall service to future navigators. Under the dei\nthe Friendly Islands must be included not only\nHapaee, but all those islands that have been disc\nunder the same meridian, to the north, as well as\n 276\nCOOKS VOYAGES.\nwhich, though they have never hitherto been seen by any\nEuropean voyagers, are under the dominion of Tongataboo.\nFrom the information which our commander received, it appears that this archipelago is very extensive. Above one\nhundred and fifty islands were reckoned up by the natives, who\nmade use of bits of leaves to ascertain their number; and Mr.\nAnderson, with his usual diligence, procured all their names.\nFifteen of them are said to be high or hilly, and thirty-five of\nthem large. Concerning the size of the thirty-two which were\nunexplored, it can only be mentioned that they must be larger\nthan Annamooka, which was ranked amongst the smaller isles.\nSeveral, indeed, of those which belong to this latter denomination are mere spots without inhabitants. Captain Cook had\nnot the least doubt but that Prince William's Islands, discovered\nand so named by Tasman, were comprehended in the list furnished by the natives. He had also good authority for believing that Keppel's and Boscawen's Islands, two of Captain\nWallis's discoveries in 1765, were included in the same list;\nand that they were under the sovereign of Tongataboo, which\nis the grand seat of government. It must be left to future\nnavigators to extend the geography of this part of the South\nPacific Ocean, by ascertaining the exact situation and size of\nnearly a hundred islands, in the neighbourhood, which our\ncommander had no opportunity of exploring.\nDuring the present visit to the Friendly Islands large additions were made to the knowledge which was obtained in the\nlast voyage of the natural history and productions of the\ncountry, and the manners and customs of its inhabitants.\nThough it does not fall within the plan of this narrative to\nenter into a detail of the particulars recorded, I cannot help\ntaking notice of the explanation which Captain Cook has given\nof the thievish disposition of the natives. It is an explanation\nwhich reflects honour upon his sagacity, humanity, and candour,\nand therefore I shall relate it in his own words : \" The only\ndefect,\" says he, \" sullying their character that we know of, is a\npropensity to thieving, to which we found those of all ages, and\nboth sexes, addicted, and to an uncommon degree. It should,\nhowever, be considered that this exceptionable part of their\n COOKS VOYAGES.\n277\nconduct seemed to exist merely with respect to us, for, in their\ngeneral intercourse with one another, I had reason to be of\nopinion that thefts do not happen more frequently (perhaps\nless so) than in other countries, the dishonest practices of\nwhose worthless individuals are not supposed to authorize any\nindiscriminate censure on the whole body of the people.\nGreat allowances should be made for the foibles of these poor\nnatives of the Pacific Ocean, whose minds Were overpowered\nwith the glare of objects equally new to them as they were captivating. Stealing among the civilized nations of the world\nmay well be considered as denoting a character deeply stained\nwith moral turpitude, with avarice, unrestrained by the known\nrules of right, and with profligacy, producing extreme indigence, and neglecting the means of relieving it. But at the\nFriendly and other islands which we visited the thefts so frequently committed by the natives of what we had brought\nalong with us may be fairly traced to less culpable motives.\nThey seemed to arise solely from an intense curiosity or desire\nto possess something which they had not been accustomed to\nbefore, and belonging to a sort of people so different from\nthemselves. And perhaps if it were possible that a set of\nbeings, seemingly as superior in our judgment as we are in\ntheirs, should appear amongst us, it might be doubted whether\nour natural regard to justice would be able to restrain many\nfrom falling into the same error. That I have assigned the.\ntrue motive for their propensity to this practice appears from\ntheir stealing everything indiscriminately at first sight, before\nthey could have the least conception of converting their prize\nto any one useful purpose. But I believe with us no person\nwould forfeit his reputation or expose himself to punishment\nwithout knowing beforehand how to employ the stolen goods.\nUpon the whole, the pilfering disposition of these islanders,\nthough certainly disagreeable and troublesome to strangers, was\nthe means of affording us some information as to the quickness\nof their intellects.\"\nWith respect to the religion of these Indians, Mr. Anderson\nmaintains that they have very proper sentiments concerning\nthe immateriality and immortality of the soul; and thinks him-\n 278\nCOOK'S VOYAGES.\nself sufficiently authorized to assert that they do not worship\nanything which is the work of their own hands or any visible\npart of the creation. The language of the Friendly Islands has\nthe greatest imaginable conformity with that of New Zealand,\nof Wateeoo, and Mangeea. Several hundreds of the words of\nit were collected by Mr. Anderson, and amongst these are\nterms that express numbers reaching to a hundred thousand.\nBeyond this limit they never went, and probably were not able\nto go farther, for it was observed that when they had gotten\nthus far they commonly used a word which expresses an indefinite number.\nOn the 17 th of July our commander took his final leave of\nthe Friendly Islands, and resumed his voyage. An eclipse\nwas observed in the night between the 20th and the 21st, and\non the 8th of August land was discovered. Some of the inhabitants, who came off in canoes, seemed earnestly to invite\nour people to go on shore, but Captain Cook did not think\nproper to run the risk of losing the advantage of a fair wind,\nfor the sake of examining an island which appeared to be of\nlittle consequence. Its name, as was learned from the natives,\nwho spake the Otaheite language, is Toobonai.\nPursuing his course, the captain reached Otaheite on the\n12th, and steered for Oheitepeha Bay with an intention to\nanchor there, in order to draw what refreshments he could\nfrom the south-east part of the island before he went down to\nMatavai. Omai's first reception amongst his countrymen was\nnot entirely of a flattering nature. Though several persons\ncame on board who knew him, and one of them was his\nbrother-in-law, there was nothing remarkably tender or striking\nin their meeting. An interview which Omai had on the 13th\nwith his sister was agreeable to the feelings of nature, for their\nmeeting was marked with expressions of tender affection more\neasy to be conceived than described. In a visit, likewise,\nwhich he received from an aunt, the .old lady threw herself at\nhis feet and plentifully bedewed them with tears of joy.\nCaptain Cook was informed by the natives that since he was\nlast at the island, in 1774, two ships had been twice in Oheitepeha Bay, and had left animals in the country. These, on\n COOK'S VOYAGES. 279\nfarther inquiry, were found to be hogs, dogs, goats, one bull\nand a ram. That the vessels which had visited Otaheite were\nSpanish, was plain from an inscription that was cut upon a\nwooden cross standing at some distance from the front of a\nhouse which had been occupied by the strangers. On the\ntransverse part of the cross was inscribed,\nChrisms vindf.\nAnd on the perpendicular part,\nCard us III. imperat. 1774-\nOur commander took this occasion to preserve the memory of\nthe prior visits of the English by inscribing on the other side of\nthe post,\nGeorgius tertius Rex,\nAnnis 1767,\n1769, 1773, 1774, & 1777-\nWhatever might be the intentions of the Spaniards in their visit\nto the island, it ought to be remembered, to their honour, that\nthey behaved so well to the inhabitants as always to be spoken\nof in the strongest expressions of esteem and veneration.\nCaptain Cook had at this time an important affair to settle.\nAs he knew that he could now be furnished with a plentiful supply\nof cocoa-nuts, the liquor of which is an excellent and wholesome beverage, he was desirous of prevailing upon his people\nto consent to their being abridged, during their stay at Otaheite\nand the neighbouring islands, of their stated allowance of\nspirits to mix with water. But as this stoppage of a favourite\narticle, without assigning some reason for it, might occasion a\ngeneral murmur, he thought it most prudent to assemble the\nship's company and to make known to them the design of the\nvoyage and the extent of the future operations. To animate\nthem in undertaking with cheerfulness and perseverance what\nlay before them, he took notice of the rewards offered by Parliament to such of his majesty's subjects as should first discover\na communication between the Atlantic and Pacific Oceans, in\nany direction whatever, in the northern hemisphere, and also to\nsuch as should first penetrate beyond the eighty-ninth degree of\n 280 COOK'S VOYAGES.\nnorthern latitude. The captain made no doubt, he told them,\nthat he should find them willing to co-operate with him in attempting, as far as might be possible, to become entitled to one\nor both these rewards, but that, to give the best chance of success, it would be necessary to observe the utmost economy in\nthe expenditure of the stores and provisions, particularly the\nlatter, as there was no probability of getting a supply anywhere\nafter leaving these islands. He strengthened his argument by\nreminding them that, in consequence of the opportunities\nhaving been lost of getting to the north this summer, the\nvoyage must last at least a year longer than had originally been\nsupposed. He entreated them to consider the various obstructions and difficulties they might still meet with, and the aggravated hardships they would endure if it should be found\nnecessary to put them to short allowance of any species of provisions in a cold climate. For these very substantial reasons\nhe submitted to them whether it would not be better to be\nprudent in time, and, rather than to incur the hazard of having\nno spirits left when such a cordial would most be wanted, to\nconsent to give up their grog now, when so excellent a liquor\nas that of cocoa-nuts could be substituted in its place. In conclusion, our commander left the determination of the matter\nentirely to their owri choice.\nThis speech, which certainly partook much of the nature of\ntrue eloquence, if a discourse admirably calculated for persuasion be entitled to that character, produced its full effect on the\ngenerous minds of English seamen. Captain Cook had the\nsatisfaction of finding that his proposal did not remain a single\nmoment under consideration, being unanimously and immediately approved of without the least objection. By our\ncommander's order, Captain Clerke made the same proposal to\nhis people, to which they likewise agreed. Accordingly, grog\nwas no longer served, excepting on Saturday nights, when the\ncompanies of both ships had a full allowance of it, that they\nmight drink the healths of their friends in England.\nOn the 24th Captain Cook quitted the south-east part of Otaheite, and resumed his old station in Matavai Bay. Immediately\nupon his arrival he was visited by Otoo, the king of the whole\n COOKS VOYAC\n281\nisland, and their former friendship was renewed, a friendship\nwhich was continued without interruption and cemented by a\nperpetual succession of civilities, good offices, and entertainments. One of our commander's first objects was to dispose of\nall the European animals which were in the ships. Accordingly, he conveyed to Oparre, Otoo's place of residence, a\npeacock and hen, a turkey cock and hen, one gander and three\ngeese, a drake and four dudes. The geese and ducks began to\nbreed before our navigators left their present station. There\nwere already at Otoo's several goats and the Spanish bull,\nwhich was one of the finest animals of the kind that was ever\nseen. To the bull Captain Cook sent the three cows he had\non board, together with a bull of his own, to all which were\nI the sheep that had still ren\nined\nadded the horse and mare ;\nin the vessels.\nThe captain found himself lightened of a very heavy burden\nin having disposed of these passengers. It is not easy to conceive the trouble and vexation which had attended the conveyance of this living cargo through such various hazards, and to\nso immense a distance. But the satisfaction which our commander felt in having been so fortunate as to fulfil his\nmajesty's humane designs in sending such valuable animals to\nsupply the wants of the two worthy nations, afforded him an\nample recompense for the many anxious homes he had passed\nbefore this subordinate object of his voyage could be carried\ninto execution.\nAt this time a war was on the point of breaking out between\nthe inhabitants of Eimeo and those of Otaheite : and by the\nlatter Captain Cook was requested to take a part in their\nfavour. With this request, however, though enforced by\nfrequent and urgent solicitations, the captain, according to his\nusual wisdom, refused to comply. He alleged that, as he was\nnot thoroughly acquainted with the dispute, and the people of\nEimeo had never offended him, he could not think himself at\nliberty to engage in hostilities against them. With these\nreasons Otoo and most of the chiefs appeared to be satisfied;\nbut one of them, Towha, was so highly displeased that our\ncommander never afterward recovered his friendship.\n 282\nCOOK'S VOYAGES.\nUpon the present occasion Captain Cook had full and undeniable proof that the offering of human sacrifices forms a part\nof the religious institutions of Otaheite. Indeed, he was a\nwitness to a solemnity of this kind, the process of which he has\nparticularly described, and has related it with the just sentiments of indignation and abhorrence. The unhappy victim,\nwho was now offered to the object of worship, seemed to be a\nmiddle-aged man, and was said to be one of the lowest class of\nthe people. But the captain could not learn, after-all his inquiries, whether the wretch had been fixed upon on account of\nhis having committed any crime which was supposed to be deserving of death. It is certain that a choice is generally made,\neither of such guilty persons for the sacrifices or of common\nlow fellows who stroll about from place to place without any\nvisible methods of obtaining an honest subsistence. Those\nwho are devoted to suffer are never apprised of their fate till\nthe blow is given that puts an end to their being. Whenever\nupon any particular emergency one of the great chiefs considers a human sacrifice to be necessary, he pitches upon the\nvictim, and then orders him to be suddenly fallen upon and\nkilled, either with clubs or stones. Although it should be supposed that no more than one person is ever devoted to destruction on any single occasion at Otaheite, it will still be found\nthat these occurrences are so frequent as to cause a shocking\nwaste of the human race, for our commander counted no less\nthan forty-nine skulls of former victims lying before the Morai,\nwhere he had seen another added to the number. It was apparent, from the freshness of these skulls, that no great length\nof time had elapsed since the wretches to whom they belonged\nhad been offered upon the altar of blood.\nThere is reason to fear that this custom is as extensive as it\nis horrid. It is highly probable that it prevails throughout the\nwidely-diffused islands of the Pacific Ocean; and Captain Cook\nhad particular evidence of its subsisting at the Friendly Islands.\nTo what an extent the practice of human sacrifices was carried\nin the ancient world is not unknown to the learned. Scarcely\nany nation was free from it in a certain state of society; and,\nas religious reformation is one of the last efforts of the human\n m\n COOK'S VOYAGES.\n283\nmind, the practice may be continued even when the manners\nare otherwise far removed from savage life. It may have been\na long time before civilization has made such a progress as to\ndeprive superstition of its cruelty, and to divert it from barbarous rites to ceremonies which, though foolish enough, are\ncomparatively mild, gentle, and innocent.\nOn the 5th of September an accident happened which,\nthough slight in itself, was of some consequence from the situation of things. A young ram of the Cape breed, which had\nbeen lambed and brought up with great care on board the ship,\nwas killed by a dog. Desirous as Captain Cook was of propagating so useful a race among the Society Islands, the loss of a\nram was a serious misfortune. It was the only one he had of\nthat breed, and of the English breed a single ram was all that\nremained.\nCaptain Cook and Captain Clerke on the 14th, mounted on\nhorseback, and took a ride round the plain of Motavai, to the\ngreat surprise of a large number of the natives, who attended\nupon the occasion, and gazed upon the gentlemen with as\nmuch astonishment as if they had been Centaurs. What the\ntwo captains had begun was afterward repeated every day by\none and another of our people, notwithstanding which the\ncuriosity of the Otaheitans still continued unabated. They\nwere exceedingly delighted with these animals after they had\nseen the use which was made of them. Not all the novelties\nput together which European visitors had carried amongst the\ninhabitants inspired them with so high an idea of the greatness\nof distant nations.\nThough Captain Cook would not take a part in the quarrels\nbetween the islands, he was ready to protect his particular\nfriends when in danger of being injured. Towha, who commanded the expedition against Eimeo, had been obliged to\nsubmit to a disgraceful accommodation. Being full of resentment on account of his not having been properly supported, he\nwas said to have threatened that as soon as the captain should\nleave the island, he would join his forces to those of Tiaraboo\nand attack Otoo at Matavai or Oparre. This induced our\ncommander to declare, in the most public manner, that he was\n 284\nCOOK'S VOYAGES.\ndetermined to espouse the interest of his friend against any\nsuch combination, and that whoever presumed to assault him\nshould feel the weight of his heavy displeasure when he returned again to Otaheite. Captain Cook's declaration had\nprobably the desired effect, for if Towha had formed hostile intentions, no more was heard of the matter.\nThe manner in which our commander was freed from a\nrheumatic complaint, that consisted of a pain extending from\nthe hip to the foot, deserves to be recorded. Otoo's mother,\nhis three sisters, and eight other women went on board for the\nexpress purpose of undertaking the cure of his disorder. He\naccepted of their friendly offer, had a bed spread for them on\nthe cabin floor, and submitted himself to their directions.\nBeing desired to lay himself down amongst them, then as many\nof them as could get round him began to squeeze him with\nboth hands from head to foot, but more particularly in the part\nwhere the pain was lodged, till they made his bones crack and\nhis flesh became a perfect mummy. After undergoing this\ndiscipline about a quarter of an hour, he was glad to be released from the women. The operation, however, gave him\nimmediate relief, so that he was encouraged to submit to\nanother rubbing down before he went to bed; the consequence\nof which was that he was tolerably easy all the succeeding night.\nHis female physicians repeated their prescription the next\nmorning and again in the evening, after which his pains were\nentirely removed, and the cure was perfected. This operation,\nwhich is called romee, is universally practised among these\nislanders, being sometimes performed by the men, but more\ngenerally by the women.\nCaptain Cook, who now had come to the resolution of departing soon from Otaheite, accompanied, on the 27th, Otoo to\nOparre, and examined the cattle and poultry, which he had consigned to his friend's care at that place. Everything was in a\npromising way, and properly attended. The captain procured\nfrom Otoo four goats, two of which he designed to leave at\nUlietea, where none had as yet been introduced, and the other\ntwo he proposed to reserve for the use of any islands he might\nchance to meet with in his passage to the north. On the next\n COOK'S VOYAGES.\n285\nday Otoo came on board and informed our commander that he\nhad gotten a canoe, which he desired him to carry home as a\npresent to the Earee rahie no Pretane. This, he said, was the\nonly thing he could send which was worthy of his majesty's acceptance. Captain Cook was not a little pleased with Otoo for\nthis mark of his gratitude, and the more as the thought was entirely his own. Not one of our people had given him the least\nhint concerning it, and it showed that he was fully sensible to\nwhom he stood indebted for the most valuable presents that he\nhad received. As the canoe was too large to be taken on\nboard, the captain could only thank him for his good intentions ; biit it would have given him a much greater satisfaction\nif his present could have been accepted.\nDuring this visit of our voyagers to Otaheite such a cordial\nfriendship and confidence subsisted between them and the\nnatives as never once to be interrupted by any untoward accident. Our commander had made the chiefs fully sensible that\nit was'their interest to treat with him on fair and equitable\nterms, and to keep their people from plundering or stealing.\nSo great was Otoo's attachment to the English that he seemed\npleased with the idea of their having a permanent settlement at\nMatavai, not considering that from that time he would be deprived of his kingdom and the inhabitants of their liberties.\nCaptain Cook had too much gratitude and regard for these\nislanders to wish that such an event should ever take place.\nThough our occasional visits may, in some respects, have been\nof advantage to the natives, he was afraid that a durable establishment among them, conducted as most European establishments amongst Indian nations have unfortunately been, would\ngive them just cause to lament that they had been discovered\nby our navigators. It is not, indeed, likely that a measure of\nthis kind should at any time seriously be adopted, because it\ncannot serve either the purposes of public ambition or private\navarice; and, without such inducements, the captain has ventured to pronounce that it will never be undertaken.\nFrom Otaheite our voyagers sailed, on the 30th, to Eimeo,\nwhere they came to an anchor on the same day. At this island\nthe transactions which happened were, for the most part, very un-\n 286\nCOOK'S VOYAGES.\npleasant. A goat which was stolen was recovered without\nany extraordinary difficulty, and one of the thieves was at the\nsame time surrendered, being the first instance of the kind that\nour commander had met with in his connections with the\nSociety Islands. The stealing of another goat was attended\nwith an uncommon degree of perplexity and trouble. As the\nrecovery of it was a matter of no small importance, Captain\nCook was determined to effect this at any rate, and accordingly\nhe made an expedition across the island, in the course of which\nhe set fire to six or eight houses, and burned a number of\n'war canoes. At last, in consequence of a peremptory message\nto Maheine, the chief of Eimeo, that not a single canoe should\nbe left in the country, or an end be put to the contest, unless the\nanimal in his possession should be restored, the goat was\nbrought back. This quarrel was as much regretted on the part\nof the captain as it could be on that of the natives. It grieved\nhim to reflect that, after refusing the pressing solicitations of\nhis friends at Otaheite to favour their invasion of this island,\nhe should find himself so speedily reduced to the necessity of\nengaging in hostilities against its inhabitants, and in such hostilities as, perhaps, had been more injurious to them than\nTowha's expedition.\nOn the nth of October the ships departed from Eimeo, and\nthe next day arrived at Owharre harbour, on the west side of\nHuaheine. The grand business of our commander at this\nisland was the settlement of Omai. In order to obtain the\nconsent of the chiefs of the island, the affair was conducted\nwith great solemnity. Omai dressed himself very properly on\nthe occasion; brought with him a suitable assortment of presents;\nwent through a variety of religious ceremonies; and made a\nspeech, the topics of which had been dictated to him by our\ncommander. The result of the negotiation was, that a spot of\nground was assigned him, the extent of which, along the shore\nof the harbour, was about two hundred yards; and its depth to\nthe foot of the hill, somewhat more. A proportionable part of\nthe hill was included in the grant. This business having been\nadjusted in a satisfactory manner, the carpenters of both ships\nwere employed in building a small house for Omai, in which he\n COOKS VOYAGES.\n287\nmight secure his European commodities. At the same time,\nsome of the English made a garden for his use, in which they\nplanted shaddocks, vines, pineapples, melons, and the seeds of\nseveral other vegetable articles. All of these Captain Cook had\nthe satisfaction of seeing in a flourishing state before he left the\nisland.\nAt Huaheine, Omai found a brother, a sister, and a brother-in-\nlaw, by whom he was received with great regard and tenderness.\nBut though these people were faithful and affectionate in their\nattachment to him, the captain discovered, with concern, that\nthey were of too little consequence in the island to be capable\nof rendering him any positive service. They had not either\nauthority or influence to protect his person or property; and,\nin such a situation, there was reason to apprehend that he\nmight be in danger of being stripped of all his possessions as\nsoon as he should cease to be supported by the power of the\nEnglish. To prevent this evil, if possible, our commander advised him to conciliate the favour and engage the patronage\nand protection of two or three of the principal chiefs, by a\nproper distribution of some of his movables; with which advice\nhe prudently complied. Captain Cook, however, did not entirely trust to the operations of gratitude, but had recourse to\nthe more forcible motive of intimidation. With this view, he\ntook every opportunity of signifying to the inhabitants, that it\nwas his intention to return to the island again, after being absent\nthe usual time; and that, if he did not find Omai in the same\nstate of security in which he left him, all those whom he should\nthen discover to have been his enemies should feel the weight\nof his resentment. As the natives had now formed an opinion\nthat their country would be visited by the ships of England at\nstated periods, there was ground to hope that this threatening\ndeclaration would produce no inconsiderable effect.\nWhen Omai's house was nearly finished, and many of his\nmovables were carried ashore, a box of toys excited the admiration of the multitude in a much higher degree than articles\nof a more useful nature. With regard to his pots, kettles,\ndishes, plates, drinking mugs, glasses, and the whole train of\ndomestic accommodations, which in our estimation are so\n COOK'S VOYAGES.\nnecessary and important, scarcely any one of his countrymen\nwould condescend to look upon them. Omai himself, being\nsensible that these pieces of English furniture would be of no\ngreat consequence in his present situation, wisely sold a number\nof them, among the people of the ships, for hatchets, and other\niron tools, which had a more intrinsic value in this part of the\nworld, and would give him a more distinguished superiority\nover those with whom he was to pass the remainder of his\ndays.\nOmai's family, when he settled at Huaheine, consisted of\neight or ten persons, if that can be called a family to which a\nsingle female did not as yet belong, nor was likely to belong,\nunless its master should become less volatile. There was nothing in his present temper which seemed likely to dispose him\nto look out for a wife; and, perhaps, it is to be apprehended,\nthat his residence in England had not contributed to improve\nhis taste for the sober felicity of a domestic union with some\nwoman of his own country.\nThe European weapons of Omai consisted of a musket,\nbayonet, and cartouch-box; a fowling-piece, two pair of pistols,\nand two or three swords or cutlasses. With the possession of\nthese warlike implements he was highly delighted; and it was\nonly to gratify his eager desire for them that Captain Cook was\ninduced to make him such presents. The captain would otherwise have thought it happier for him to be without fire-arms, or\nany European weapons, lest an imprudent use of them (and\nprudence was not his most distinguished talent) should rather\nincrease his dangers than establish his superiority. Though it\nwas no small satisfaction to our commander to reflect that he\nhad brought Omai safe back to the very spot from which he had\nbeen taken, this satisfaction was, nevertheless, somewhat diminished by the consideration that his situation might now be\nless desirable than it was before his connection with the English.\nIt was to be feared that the advantages which he had derived\nfrom his visit to England would place him in a more hazardous\nstate with respect to his personal safety.\nWhatever faults belonged to Omai's character, they were\noverbalanced by his good nature and his gratitude. He had a\n 1\nilillll\n290 COOK'S VOYAGES.\nback with the axes and a couple of kids, male and female,\nwhich were spared for him out of the Discovery.\nThe fate of the two youths who had been brought from New\nZealand must not be forgotten. As they were extremely desirous of continuing with our people, Captain Cook would have\ncarried them to England with him if there had appeared the\nmost distant probability of their ever being restored to their\nown country. Tiarooa, the eldest of them, was a very well\ndisposed young man, with strong natural sense, and a capacity\nof receiving any instruction. He seemed to be fully convinced\nof the inferiority of New Zealand to these islands, and resigned\nhimself, though not without some degree of reluctance, to end\nhis days, in ease and plenty, in Huaheine. The other had\nformed so strong an attachment to our navigators that it was\nnecessary to take him out of the ship, and carry him ashore by\nforce. This necessity was the more painful as he was a witty,\nsmart boy; and, on that account, a great favourite on board.\nBoth these youths became a part of Omai's family.\nWhilst our voyagers were at Huaheine, the atrocious conduct\nof one particular thief occasioned so much trouble, that the\ncaptain punished him more severely than he had ever done any\nculprit before. Besides having his head and beard shaved, he\nordered both his ears to be cut off, and then dismissed him.\nIt can scarcely be reflected upon without regret, that our commander should have been compelled to such an act of severity.\nOn the 3rd of November the ships came to an anchor in the\nharbour of Ohamaneno, in the island of Ulietea. The observatories being set up on the 6th, and the necessary instruments\nhaving been carried on shore, the two following days were employed in making astronomical observations. In the night between the 12th and 13th, John Harrison, a marine, who was\nsentinel at the observatory, deserted, taking with him his arms\nand accoutrements. Captain Cook exerted himself on this occasion with his usual vigour. He went himself in pursuit of\nthe deserter, who, after some evasion on the part of the inhabitants, was surrendered. He was found sitting between two\nwomen, with the musket lying before him; and all the defence\nhe was able to make was, that he had been enticed away by the\n COOK'S VOYAGES.\n291\nnatives. As this account was probably the truth, and as it\nappeared besides that he had remained upon his post till within\nten minutes of the time when he was to have been relieved, the\npunishment which the captain inflicted upon him was not very\nsevere.\nSome days after a still more troublesome affair happened, of\nthe same nature. On the morning of the 24th the captain was\ninformed that a midshipman and a seamen, both belonging to\nthe Discovery, were missing; and it soon appeared that they\nhad gone away in a canoe in the preceding evening, and had\nnow reached the other end of the island. As the midshipman\nwas known to have expressed a desire of remaining at these\nislands, it was evident that he and his companion had gone off\nwith that intention. Though Captain Clerke immediately set\nout in quest of them with two armed boats, and a party of\nmarines, his expedition proved fruitless, the natives having\namused him the whole day with false intelligence. The next\nmorning an account was brought that the deserters were at\nOtaha. As they were not the only persons in the ships who\nwished to spend their days at these favourite islands, it became\nnecessary, for the purpose of preventing any farther desertion, to\nrecover them at all events. Captain Cook, therefore, in order\nto convince the inhabitants that he was in earnest, resolved to\ngo after the fugitives himself; to which measure he was determined from having observed, in repeated instances, that\nthe natives had seldom offered to deceive him with false information.\nAgreeably to this resolution, the captain set out the next\nmorning with two armed boats, being accompanied by Oreo,\nthe chief of Ulietea, and proceeded immediately to Otaha. But\nwhen he had gotten to the place where the deserters were expected to be found, he was acquainted that they were gone\nover to Bolabola. Thither our commander did not think proper\nto follow them, having determined to pursue another measure,\nwhich he judged would more effectually answer his purpose.\nThis measure was to put the chief's son, daughter, and son-in-\nlaw into confinement, and to detain them till the fugitives\nshould be restored. As to Oreo, he was informed that he was\n COOK'S VOYAGES.\nat liberty to leave the ship whenever he pleased, and to take such\nmethods as he esteemed best calculated to get our two men '\nback ; that if he succeeded, his friends should^ be released; if\nnot, that Captain Cook was resolved to carry them away with\nhim. The captain added, that the chiefs own conduct, as well\nas that of many of his people in assisting the runaways to escape,\nand in enticing others to follow them, would justify any step\nthat could be taken to put a stop to such proceedings. In consequence of this explanation of our commander's views and intentions, Oreo zealously exerted himself to recover the deserters,\nfor which purpose he despatched a canoe to Bolabola, with a\nmessage to Opoony, the sovereign of that island, acquainting\nhim with what had happened, and requesting him to seize the\ntwo fugitives and send them back. The messenger, who was\nno less a person than the father of Pootoe, Oreo's son-in-law,\ncame before he set out to Captain Cook, to receive his commands; which were not to return without the runaways, and\nto inform Opoony that, if they had left Bolabola, he must despatch canoes in pursuit of them till they should finally be restored. These vigorous measures were, at length, successful.\nOn the 28th the deserters were brought back, and, as soon as\nthey were on board, the three prisoners were released. Our\ncommander would not have acted so resolutely on the present\noccasion, had he not been peculiarly solicitous to save the son\nof a brother officer from being lost to his country.\nWhile this affair was in suspense, some of the natives, from\ntheir anxiety on account of the confinement of the chiefs relations, had formed a design of a very serious nature, which was\nno less than to seize upon the persons of Captain Clerke and\nCaptain Cook. With regard to Captain Clerke, they made no\nsecret of speaking of their scheme the day after it was discovered. But their first and grand plan of operations was to lay\nhold of Captain Cook. It was his custom to bathe, every evening,\nin fresh water; in doing which he frequently went alone, and always without arms. As the inhabitants expected him to go as\nusual on the evening of the 26th, they had determined at that\ntime to make him a prisoner. But he had thought it prudent,\nafter confining Oreo's family, to avoid putting himself in their\n COOKS VOYAGES.\n293\npower, and had cautioned Captain Clerke and the officers not\nto venture themselves far from the ships. In the course of the\nafternoon the chief asked Captain Cook, three several times,\nif he would not go to the bathing-place; and when he found at\nlast that the captain could not be prevailed upon, he went off,\nwith all his people. He was apprehensive, without doubt, that\nthe design was discovered ; though no suspicion of it was then\nentertained by our commander, who imagined that the natives\nwere seized with some sudden fright, from which as usual they\nwould quickly recover. On one occasion Captain. Clerke and\nMr. Gore were in particular danger. A party of the inhabitants,\narmed with clubs, advanced against them : and their safety was\nprincipally owing to Captain Clerke's walking with a pistol in\nhis hand, which he once fired. The discovery of the conspiracy,\nespecially so far as respected Captain Clerke and Mr. Gore,\nwas made by a girl, whom one of the officers had brought from\nHuaheine. On this account, those who were charged with the\nexecution of the design were so greatly offended with her, that\nthey threatened to take away her life as soon as our navigators\nshould leave the island: but proper methods were pursued for\nher security. It was a happy circumstance that the affair was\nbrought to light; since such a scheme could not have been\ncarried into effect without being in its consequences productive of much distress and calamity to the natives.\nWhilst Captain Cook was at Ulietea, he was visited by his\nold friend Oreo, who in the former voyages was chief, or rather\nregent of Huaheine. Notwithstanding his now being, in some\ndegree, reduced to the rank of a private person, he still preserved his consequence; never appeared without a numerous\nbody of attendants, and was always provided with such presents\nas indicated his wealth, and were highly acceptable.\nThe last of the Society Islands to which our commander\nsailed was Bolabola, where he arrived on the 8th of December.\nHis chief view in passing over to this island was to procure\nfrom its monarch, Opoony, an anchor which Monsieur de Bougainville had lost at Otaheite, and which had been conveyed to\nBolabola. It was not from a want of anchors that Captain\nCook was desirous of making the purchase, but to convert the\n COOK'S VOYAGES.\niron of which it consisted into a fresh assortment of trading\narticles, these being now very much exhausted. The captain\nsucceeded in his negotiation, and amply rewarded Opoony for\niving up the anchor.\nWhilst our commander was at Bolabola he received an account of those military expeditions of the people of this country, which he had heard much of in each of his three voyages,\nand which had ended in the complete conquest of Ulietea and\nOtaha. The Bolabola men, in consequence of these enterprises,\nwere in the highest reputation for their valour; and, indeed,\nwere deemed so invincible as to be the objects of terror to all\nthe neighbouring islands. It was an addition to their fame\nthat their country was of such small extent, being not more\nthan eight leagues in compass, and not half so large as Ulietea.\nCaptain Cook continued to the last his zeal for furnishing\nthe natives of the South Sea with useful animals. At Bolabola,\nwhere there was already a ram, which had originally been left by\nthe Spaniards at Otaheite, he carried ashore a ewe, that had been\nbrought from the Cape of Good Hope; and he rejoiced in the\nprospect of laying a foundation, by this present, for a breed of\nsheep in the island. He left also at Ulietea, under the care of\nOreo, an English boar and sow, and two goats. It may therefore\nbe regarded as certain, that not only Otaheite, but all the neighbouring islands will, in a few years, have their race of hogs\nconsiderably improved; and it is probable that they will be\nstocked with all the valuable animals which have been transported thither by their European visitors. When this shall be\naccomplished, no part of the world will equal these islands in\nthe variety and abundance of the refreshments which they will\nbe able to afford to navigators; nor did the captain know any\nplace that excelled them, even in their present state.\nIt is an observation of great importance, that the future felicity of the inhabitants of Otaheite, and the Society Islands, will\nnot a little depend on their continuing to be visited from Europe.\nOur commander could not avoid expressing it as his real opinion\nthat it would have been far better for these poor people never\nto have known our superiority in the accommodations and arts\nwhich render life comfortable, than after once knowing it, to\n COOKS VOYAGES.\nbe again left and abandoned to their original incapacity of\nimprovement. If the intercourse between them and us\nshould wholly be discontinued, they cannot be restored to that\nhappy mediocrity in which they lived before they were first\ndiscovered. It seemed to Captain Cook that it was become,\nin a manner, incumbent upon the Europeans to visit these\nislands once in three or four years, in order to supply the\nnatives with those conveniences which we have introduced\namong them, and for which we have given them a predilection.\nPerhaps they may heavily feel the want of such occasional supplies, when it may be too late to go back to their old and\nless perfect contrivances; contrivances which they now despise,\nand which they have discontinued since the introduction of\nours. It is, indeed, to be apprehended that by the time that\nthe iron tools of which they had become possessed are worn\nout, they will have almost lost the knowledge of their own. In\nthis last voyage of our commander, a stone hatchet was as rare\na thing among the inhabitants as an iron one was eight years\nbefore ; and a chisel of bone or stone was not to be seen.\nSpike nails had succeeded in their place ; and of spike nails the\nnatives were weak enough to imagine that they had gotten an\ninexhaustible store. Of all our commodities, axes and hatchets\nremained the most unrivalled ; and* they must ever be held in\nthe highest estimation through the whole of the islands. Iron\ntools are so strikingly useful, and are now become so necessary\nto the comfortable existence of the inhabitants, that, should\nthey cease to receive supplies of them, their situation, in consequence of their neither possessing the materials, nor being\ntrained up to the art of fabricating them, would be rendered\ncompletely miserable. It is impossible to reflect upon this\nrepresentation of things without strong feelings of sympathy\nand concern. Sincerely is it to be wished that such may be\nthe order of events, and such the intercourse carried on with\nthe southern islanders, that, instead of finally suffering by their\nacquaintance with us, they may rise to a higher state of civilization, and permanently enjoy blessings far superior to what\nthey had heretofore known.\nAmidst the various subordinate employments which engaged\n 296\nCOOK'S VOYAGES.\nthe attention of Captain Cook and his associates, the great\nobjects of their duty were never forgotten. No opportunity\nwas lost of making astronomical and nautical observations;\nthe consequence of which was, that the latitude and longitude\nof the places where the ships anchored, the variations of the\ncompass, the dips of the needle, and the state of the tides, were\nascertained with an accuracy that forms a valuable addition to\nphilosophical science, and will be of eminent service to future\nnavigators.\nOur commander was now going to take his final departure\nfrom Otaheite and the Society Islands. Frequently as they\nhad been visited, it might have been imagined that their religious, political, and domestic regulations, manners and customs,\nmust, by this time, be thoroughly understood. A great accession of knowledge was undoubtedly gained in the present\nvoyage; and yet it was confessed, both by Captain Cook and\nMr. Anderson, that their accounts of things were still imperfect\nin various respects; and that they continued strangers to many\nof the most important institutions which prevail among the\nnatives. There was one part of the character of several of\nthese people on which the well-regulated mind of the captain\nwould not permit him to enlarge. \"Too much,\" says he,\n\"seems to have been already known, and published in our\nformer relations, about some of the modes of life that made\nOtaheite so agreeable an abode to many on board our ships;\nand if I could now add any finishing strokes to a picture, the\noutlines of which have been already drawn with sufficient accuracy, I should still have hesitated to make this journal the place\nfor exhibiting a view of licentious manners, which could only\nserve to disgust those for whose information I write.\"\nFrom Mr. Anderson's account of the Otaheitans, it appears\nthat their religious system is extensive, and, in various instances,\nsingular. They do not seem to pay respect to one God as\npossessing pre-eminence, but believe in a plurality of divinities,\nall of whom are supposed to be very powerful. In different\nparts of the island, and in the neighbouring islands, the inhabitants choose those deities for the objects of their worship,\nwho, they think, are most likely to protect them, and to supply\n COOKS VOYAGES.\n297\nall their wants. If, however, they are disappointed in their\nexpectations, they deem it no impiety to change their divinity\nby having recourse to another, whom they hope to find more\npropitious and successful. In general, their notions concerning\nDeity are extravagantly absurd. With regard to the soul, they\nbelieve it, according to Mr. Anderson, to be both immaterial\nand immortal; but he acknowledges that they are far from\nentertaining those sublime expectations of future happiness\nwhich the Christian revelation affords, and which even reason\nalone, duly exercised, might teach us to expect.\nAlthough seventeen months had elapsed since Captain Cook's\ndeparture from England, during which time he had not, upon\nthe whole, been unprofitably employed, he was sensible that,\nwith respect to the principal object of his instructions, it was\nnow only the commencement of his voyage; and that, therefore, his attention was to be called anew to every circumstance\nwhich might contribute towards the safety of his people and the\nultimate success of the expedition. Accordingly, he had examined into the state of the provisions whilst he was at the\nSociety Islands, and, as soon as he had left them and had gotten\nbeyond the extent of his former discoveries, he ordered a survey\nto be taken of all the boatswain's and carpenter's stores which\nwere in the ships, that he might be fully informed of their quantity and condition; and, by that means, know how to use them\nto the greatest advantage.\nIt was on the 8th of December, the very day on which he\nhad touched there, that our commander sailed from Bolabola.\nIn the night between the 22nd and 23rd, he crossed the line, in\nthe longitude of 2030 15' east; and on the 24th land was discovered, which was found to be one of those low uninhabited\nislands that are so frequent in this ocean. Here our voyagers\nwere successful in catching a large quantity of turtle, which\nsupplied them with an agreeable refreshment; and here, on the\n28th, an eclipse of the sun was observed by Mr. Bayley, Mr.\nKing, and Captain Cook. On account of the season of the\nyear, the captain called the land where he now was, and which\nhe judged to be about fifteen or twenty leagues in circumference, Christmas Island. By his order several cocoa-nuts and\n COOK'S VOYAGES.\nyams were planted, and some melon seeds sown in proper\nplaces; and a bottle was left, containing this inscription :\nGeorgius Tertius, Rex, 31 Decembris, 1777.\nj Resolution, Jac. Cook, Pr.\n\\ Discovery, Car. Clerke, Pr.\nOn the 2nd of January, 1778, the ships resumed their course\nto the northward, and though several evidences occurred of the\nvicinity of land, none was discovered till the 18th, when an\nisland made its appearance, bearing north-east by east. Soon\nafter more land was seen, lying towards the north, and entirely\ndetached from the former. The succeeding day was distinguished by the discovery of a third island, in the direction of\nwest-north-west, and as far distant as the eye could reach. In\nsteering towards the second island our voyagers had some doubt\nwhether the land before them was inhabited; but this matter\nwas speedily cleared up by the putting off of some canoes from\nthe shore, containing from three to six men each. Upon their\napproach, the English were agreeably surprised to find that\nthey spoke the language of Otaheite and of the other countries\nwhich had lately been visited. These people were at first fearful\nof going on board; but when, on the 20th, some of them took\ncourage and ventured to do it, they expressed an astonishment\non entering the ship which Captain Cook had never experienced in the natives of any place during the whole course of\nhis several voyages. Their eyes continually flew from object\nto object; and, by the wildness of their looks and gestures,\nthey fully manifested their entire ignorance with relation to\neverything they saw, and strongly marked to our navigators,\nthat till this time they had never been visited by Europeans, or\nbeen acquainted with any of our commodities, excepting iron.\nEven with respect to iron, it was evident that they had only\nheard of it, or at most had known it in some small quantity,\nbrought to them at a distant period; for all they understood\nconcerning it was, that it was a substance much better adapted\nto the purposes of cutting, or boring of holes, than anything\ntheir own country produced. Their ceremonies on entering\nthe ship, their gestures and motions, and their manner of sing-\n 3oo\nCOOKS VOYAGES.\ntill after he had left the island; so that all his measures were\ndirected as if nothing of the kind had happened.\nWhen the ships were brought to an anchor, our commander\nwent on shore ; and at the very instant of his doing it, the collected body of the natives all fell flat upon their faces, and continued in that humble posture till, by expressive signs, he prevailed upon them to rise. Other ceremonies followed, and the\nnext day a trade was set on foot for hogs and potatoes, which\nthe people of the island gave in exchange for nails and pieces\nof iron, formed into something like chisels. So far was any obstruction from being met with in watering that, on the contrary,\nthe inhabitants assisted our men in rolling the casks to and\nfrom the pool, and readily performed whatever was required.\nAffairs thus going on to the captain's satisfaction, he made\nan excursion into the country, accompanied by Mr. Anderson\nand Mr. Webber, the former of whom was as well qualified to\ndescribe with the pen as the latter was to represent with his\npencil, whatever might occur worthy of observation. In this\nexcursion the gentlemen, among other objects that called for\ntheir attention, found a Morai. On the return of our commander he had the pleasure of finding that a brisk trade for\npigs, fowls, and roots was carrying on with the greatest good\norder, and without any attempt to cheat or steal on the part of\nthe natives. The rapacious disposition they at first displayed\nwas entirely corrected by their conviction that it could not be\nexercised with impunity. Among the articles which they\nbrought to barter, the most remarkable was a particular sort of\ncloak and cap, that might be reckoned elegant even in countries\nwhere dress is eminently the object of attention. The cloak\nwas richly adorned with red and yellow feathers, which in themselves were highly beautiful, and the newness and freshness of\nwhich added not a little to their beauty.\nOn the 22nd a circumstance occurred which gave the English\nroom to suspect that the people of the island are eaters of\nhuman flesh. Not, however, to rest the belief of the existence\nof so horrid a practice on the foundation of suspicion only,\nCaptain Cook was anxious to inquire into the truth of the fact,\nthe result of which was its being fully confirmed. An old man\n COOKS VOYAGES.\nin particular, who was asked upon the subject, answered in the\naffirmative, and seemed to laugh at the simplicity of such a\nquestion. His answer was equally affirmative on a repetition\nof the inquiry; and he added that the flesh of men was excellent food, or, as he \"expressed it, \"savoury eating.\" It is\nunderstood that enemies slain in battle are the sole objects of\nthis abominable custom.\nThe island at which our voyagers had now touched was\ncalled Atooi by the natives. Near it was another island, named\nOneeheow, where our commander came to an anchor on the\n29th of the month. The inhabitants were found to resemble\nthose of Atooi in their dispositions, manners, and customs, and\nproofs, too convincing, appeared that the horrid banquet of\nhuman flesh is here as much relished, amidst plenty, as it is in\nNew Zealand. From a desire of benefiting these people, by\nfurnishing them with additional articles of food, the captain\nleft them a ram, goat, and two ewes, a boar and sow pig of the\nEnglish breed, and the seeds of melons, pumpkins, and onions.\nThese benevolent presents would have been made to Atooi, the\nlarger island, had not our navigators been unexpectedly driven\nfrom it by stress of weather. Though the soil of Oneeheow\nseemed in general poor, it was observable that the ground was\ncovered with shrubs and plants, some of which perfumed the\nair with a more delicious fragrancy than what Captain Cook\nhad met with at any other of the countries that had been visited\nby him in this part of the world.\nIt is a curious circumstance with regard to the islands in the\nPacific Ocean which the late European voyages have added to\nthe geography of the globe, that they have generally been found\nto lie in groups or clusters. The single intermediate islands,\nwhich have as yet been discovered, are few in proportion to the\nothers, though there are probably many more of them that are\nstill unknown, and may serve as steps by which the several\nclusters are in some degree connected together. Of the archi-'\npelago now first visited, there were five only with which our\ncommander became at this time acquainted. The names of\nthese, as given by the natives, were Woahoo, Atooi, Oneeheow,\nOreehoua, and Tahoora. To the whole group Captain Cook\n 302\nCOOK'S VOYAGES.\ngave the appellation of Sandwich Islands, in honour of his great\nfriend and patron the Earl of Sandwich.\nConcerning the island of Atooi, which is the largest of the\nfive, and which was the principal scene of the captain's operations, he collected, in conjunction with Mr. Anderson, a considerable degree of information. The land, as to its general\nappearance, does not in the least resemble any of the islands\nthat our voyagers had hitherto visited within the tropic on the\nsouth side of the Equator, excepting so far as regards its hills\nnear the centre, which slope gently towards the sea. Hogs,\ndogs, and fowls were the only tame or domestic animals that\nwere here found, and these were of the same kind with those\nwhich exist in the countries of the South Pacific Ocean.\nAmong the inhabitants (who are of a middle stature and\nfirmly made), there is a more remarkable equality in the size,\ncolour, and figure of both sexes than our commander had observed in most other places. They appeared to be blessed\nwith a frank and cheerful disposition, and, in Captain Cook's\nopinion, they are equally free from the fickle levity which distinguishes the natives of Otaheite and the sedate cast discernible amongst many of those at Tongataboo. It is a very\npleasing circumstance in their character that they pay a particular attention to their women, and readily lend assistance to\ntheir wives in the tender offices of maternal duty. On all occasions they seemed to be deeply impressed with a consciousness\nof their own inferiority, being alike strangers to the preposterous\npride of the more polished Japanese, and of the ruder Green-\nlander. Contrary to the general practice of the countries that\nhad hitherto been discovered in the Pacific Ocean, the people\nof the Sandwich Islands have not their ears perforated, nor\nhave they the least idea of wearing ornaments in them, though\nin other respects they are sufficiently fond of adorning their\npersons. In everything manufactured by them there is an uncommon degree of neatness and ingenuity; and the elegant\nform and polish of some of their fishing-hooks could not be exceeded by any European artist, even if he should add all his\nknowledge in design to the number and convenience of his\ntools. From what was seen of their agriculture sufficient proofs\n COOKS VOYAGES. 30J\nwere afforded that they are not novices in that art, and that the\nquantity and goodness of their vegetable productions may as\nmuch be attributed to skilful culture as to natural fertility of\nsoiL Amidst all the resemblances between the natives of Atooi\nand those of Otaheite, the coincidence of their languages was\nthe most striking, being almost word for word the same. Had\nthe Sandwich Islands been discovered by the Spaniards at an\nearly period, they would undoubtedly have taken advantage of\nso excellent a situation and have made use of them as refreshing places for their ships, which sail annually from Acapulca\nfor Manilla. Happy, too, would it have been for Lord Anson\nif he had known that there existed a group of islands half way\nbetween America and Tinian, where all his wants could effectually have been supplied, and the different hardships to which\nhe was exposed have been avoided. .\nOn the 2nd of February our navigators pursued their course\nto the northward, during which the incidents they met with\nwere almost entirely of a nautical kind. The long-looked-for\ncoast of New Albion was seen on the 7th of March, the ships\nbeing then in the latitude of 44\u00b0 33' north, and in the longitude\nof 2 350 20' east As the vessels ranged along the west side of\nAmerica Captain Cook gave names to several capes and headlands which appeared in sight At length, on the 29th, the\ncaptain came to an anchor at an inlet, where the appearance of\nthe country differed much from what had been seen before,\nbeing full of mountains, the summits of which were covered\nwith snow, while the valleys between them, and the grounds on\nthe sea-coast, high as well as low, were covered to a considerable breadth with high, straight trees, which formed a beautiful\nprospect as of one vast forest It was immediately found that the\ncoast was inhabited, and there soon came off to the Resolution\nthree canoes, containing eighteen of the natives, who could not,\nhowever, be prevailed upon to venture themselves on board.\nNotwithstanding this, they displayed a peaceable disposition,\nshowed great readiness to part with anything they had in exchange for what was offered them, and expressed a stronger desire for iron than for any other of our commercial articles,\nappearing to be perfecdy acquainted with the use of that metal\n 304\nCOOKS VOYAGES.\nFrom these favourable circumstances our voyagers had reason\nto hope that they should find this a comfortable station to\nsupply all their wants, and to make them forget the hardships\nand delays which they had experienced during a constant succession of adverse winds and boisterous weather almost ever\nsince their arrival upon the coast of America.\nThe ships having happily found an excellent inlet, the coasts\nof which appeared to be inhabited by a race of people who were\ndisposed to maintain a friendly intercourse with strangers, Captain Cook's first object was to search for a commodious\nharbour, and he had little trouble in discovering what he\nwanted. A trade having immediately commenced, the articles which the inhabitants offered for sale were the skins of\nvarious animals, such as bears, wolves, foxes, deer, racoons,\npolecats, martins; and, in particular, of the sea-otters. To these\nwere added, besides the skins in their native shape, garments\nmade of them ; another sort of clothing formed from the bark of\na tree, and various different pieces of workmanship. But of all\nthe articles brought to market the most extraordinary were\nhuman skulls and hands not yet quite stripped of their flesh,\nsome of which had evident marks of their having been upon\nthe fire. The things which the natives took in exchange for\ntheir commodities were knives, chisels, pieces of iron and tin,\nnails, looking-glasses, buttons, or any kind of metal. Glass\nbeads did not strike their imaginations, and cloth of every sort\nthey rejected. Though commerce in general was carried on\nwith mutual honesty, there were some among these people who\nwere as much inclined to thievery as the islanders in the Southern\nOcean. They were, at the same time, far more dangerous\nthieves, for, possessing sharp iron instruments, they could cut a\nhook from a tackle, or any other piece of iron from a rope, the\nmoment that the backs of the English were turned. The dexterity with which they conducted their operations of this nature\nfrequently eluded the most cautious vigilance. Some slighter\ninstances of deception in the way of traffic Captain Cook\nthought it better to bear with than to make them the foundation\nof a quarrel; and to this he was the rather determined, as the\nEnglish articles were now reduced to objects of a trifling nature.\n COOKS VOYAGES.\n305\nIn the progress of the commerce the natives would deal for\nnothing but metal, and at length brass was so eagerly sought\nfor in preference to iron, that before our navigators quitted the\nplace scarcely a bit of it was left in the ships, excepting what\nbelonged to the necessary instruments. Whole suits of clothes\nwere stripped of every button, bureaus were deprived of their\nfurniture, copper kettles, tin canisters, candlesticks, and whatever of the like kind could be found, all went to wreck; so\nthat these Americans became possessors of a greater medley\nand variety of things from our people than any other nation that\nhad been visited in the course of the voyage.\nOf all the uncivilized tribes which our commander had met\nwith in his several navigations, he never found any who had\nsuch strict notions of their having a right to the exclusive property of everything which their country produces, as the inhabitants of the sound where he was now stationed. At first\nthey wanted to be paid for the wood and water that were carried on board; and had the captain been upon the spot when\nthese demands were made, he would certainly have complied\nwith them; but the workmen, in his absence, maintained a\ndifferent opinion, and refused to submit to any such claims.\nWhen some grass, which appeared to be of no use to the natives, was wanted to be cut, as food for the few goats and sheep\nwhich still remained on board, they insisted that it should be\npurchased, and were very unreasonable in their terms; notwithstanding which Captain Cook consented to gratify them as far\nas he was able. It was always a sacred rule with him never to\ntake any of the property of the people whom he visited without\nmaking them an ample compensation.\nThe grand operation of our navigators, in their present station, was to put the ships into a complete repair for the prosecution of the expedition. While this business was carrying\non our commander took the opportunity of examining every part\nof the sound; in the course of which he gained a farther knowledge of the inhabitants, who in general received him with great\ncivility. In one instance he met with a surly chief, who could\nnot be softened with presents, though he condescended to accept of them. The females of the place over which he pre-\nx\n COOKS VOYAGES.\nsided showed a more agreeable disposition; for some of the\nyoung women expeditiously dressed themselves in their best\napparel, and, assembling in a body, welcomed the English to\ntheir village, by joining in a song, which was far from being\nharsh or disagreeable. On another occasion, the captain\nwas entertained with singing. Being visited by a number of\nstrangers, on the 22nd of April, as they advanced towards the\nships they all stood up in their canoes and began to sing.\nSome of their songs, in which the whole body joined, were in\na slow, and others in a quicker time; and their notes were\naccompanied with the most regular motions of their hands, or\nwith beating in concert with their paddles on the sides of their\ncanoes; to which were added other very expressive gestures.\nAt the end of each song they continued silent for a few moments and then began again, sometimes pronouncing the word\nHooee! forcibly, as a chorus.\nAmong the natives of the country there was one chief who\nattached himself to our commander in a particular manner.\nCaptain Cook having, at parting, bestowed upon him a small\npresent, received, in return, a beaver skin, of much greater\nvalue. This called upon the captain to make some addition\nto his present, with which the chief was so much pleased that\nhe insisted on our commander's acceptance of the beaver-skin\ncloak which he then wore, and of which he was particularly\nfond. Admiring this instance of generosity, and desirous that\nhe should not suffer by his friendship, the captain gave him a\nnew broadsword, with a brass hilt, the possession of which\nrendered him completely happy.\nOn Captain Cook's first arrival in this inlet, he had honoured\nit with the name of King George's Sound; but he afterward\nfound that it is called Nootka by the natives. During his stay in\nthe place he displayed his usual sagacity and diligence, in conjunction with Mr.. Anderson, in collecting everything that could\nbe learned concerning the neighbouring country and its inhabitants ; and the account is interesting, as it exhibits a picture of\nproductions, people, and manners very different from\"what\nhad occurred in the Southern Ocean. I can only, as on former\noccasions, slightly advert to a few of the more leading circum-\n COOK'S VOYAGES.\n3\u00b07\nstances. The climate, so far as our navigators had experience\nof it, was found to be in an eminent degree milder than that\non the east coast of America in the same parallel of latitude;\nand it was remarkable that the thermometer, even in the night,\nnever fell lower than 420, while in the day it frequently rose to\n6o\u00b0. With regard to trees, those of which the woods are chiefly\ncomposed are the Canadian pine, the white cypress, and the\nwild pine, with two or three different sorts of pine that are less\ncommon. In the other vegetable productions there appeared\nbut little variety; but it is to be considered that, at so early\na season, several might not yet have sprung up, and that\nmany more might be concealed from our voyagers, in consequence of the narrow sphere of their researches. Of the land\nanimals, the most common were bears, deer, foxes, and wolves.\nThe sea animals which were seen off the coast were whales,\nporpoises, and seals. Birds, in general, are not only rare as to\nthe different species, but very scarce as to numbers; and the\nfew which are to be met with are so shy that, in all probability,\nthey are continually harassed by the natives, either to eat them\nas food or to get possession of their feathers, which are used\nas ornaments. Fish are more plentiful in quantity than birds,\nbut were not found in any great variety; and yet, from several\ncircumstances, there was reason to believe that the variety is\nconsiderably increased at certain seasons. The only animals\nthat were observed of the reptile kind were snakes and water-\nlizards ; but the insect tribe seemed to be more numerous.\nWith respect to the inhabitants of the country, their persons\nare generally under the common stature, but not slender in\nproportion, being usually pretty full or plump, though without\nbeing muscular. From their bringing to sale human skulls and\nbones, it may justly be inferred that they treat their enemies\nwith a degree of brutal cruelty; notwithstanding which, it does\nnot follow that they are to be reproached with any charge of\npeculiar inhumanity; for the circumstance now mentioned only\nmarks a general agreement of character with that of almost\nevery tribe of uncivilized men in every age and in every part\nof the globe. Our navigators had no reason to complain of\nthe disposition of the natives, who appeared to be a docile,\n 308\nCOOK'S VOYAGES.\ncourteous, good-natured people, rather phlegmatic in the usual'\ncast of their tempers, but quick in resenting what they apprehend to be an injury, and easily permitting their anger to-\nsubside. Their other passions, and especially their curiosity,\nseemed to lie in some measure dormant; one cause of which\nmay be found in the indolence that, for the most part, is prevalent amongst them. The chief employments of the men are\nthose of fishing and of killing land or sea animals for the sustenance of their families; while the women are occupied in\nmanufacturing their flaxen or woollen garments, or in other\ndomestic offices. It must be mentioned, to their honour, that\nthey were always properly clothed, and behaved with the utmost decorum, justly deserving all commendation for a bash-\nfulness and modesty becoming their sex; and this was the\nmore meritorious in them as the male inhabitants discovered\nno sense of shame. In their manufactures and mechanic arts\nthese people have arrived to a greater degree of extent and\ningenuity, both with regard to the design and the execution,\nthan could have been expected from their natural disposition\nand the little progress to which they have arrived in general\ncivilization. Their dexterity, in particular, with respect to\nworks of wood, must principally be ascribed to the assistance\nthey receive from iron tools, which are in universal use amongst\nthem, and in the application of which they are very dexterous.\nWhence they have derived their knowledge of iron was a matter\nof speculation with Captain Cook. The most probable opinion\nis that this and other metals may have been introduced by way\nof Hudson's Bay and Canada, and thus successively have been\nconveyed across the continent from tribe to tribe. Nor is it\nunreasonable to suppose that these metals may sometimes be\nbrought, in the same manner, from the north-western parts of\nMexico.1 The language of Nootka is by no means harsh or\ndisagreeable; for it abounds, upon the whole, rather with what\n1 Two silver spoons, of a construction similar to what may sometimes be\nseen in Flemish pictures of still life, were procured here by Mr. Gore, who\nbought them from a native, who wore them, tied together with a leathern\nthong, as an ornament round his neck. Mr. Gore gave the spoons to Sir\nJoseph Banks.\n1611\n COOKS VOYAGES.\n309\nmay be called labial and dental than with guttural sounds. A\nlarge vocabulary of it was collected by Mr. Anderson.\nWhilst Captain Cook was at Nootka Sound, great attention\nwas paid by him, as usual, to astronomical and nautical subjects.\nThe observations which he had an opportunity of making were,\nindeed, so numerous as to form a very considerable addition to\ngeographical and philosophical science.\nOn the 26th, the repairs of the ships having been completed,\neverything was ready for the captain's departure. When, in the\nafternoon of that day, the vessels were upon the point of sailing,\nthe mercury in the barometer fell unusually low; and there was\nevery other presage of an approaching storm, which might\nreasonably be expected to come from the southward. This circumstance induced our commander in some degree to hesitate,\nand especially as night was at hand, whether he should venture\nto sail, or wait till the next morning. But his anxious impatience to proceed upon the voyage, and the fear of losing the\npresent opportunity of getting out of the sound, made a greater\nimpression upon his mind than any apprehension of immediate\ndanger. He determined, therefore, to put to sea at all events;\nand accordingly carried his design into execution that evening.\nHe was not deceived in his expectations of a storm. Scarcely\nwere the vessels out of the sound before the wind increased to\na strong gale, with squalls and rain, accompanied by so dark a\nsky that the length of the ships could not be seen. Happily\nthe wind took a direction that blew our navigators from the\ncoast; and though, on the 27th, the tempest rose to a perfect\nhurricane, and the Resolution sprang a leak, no material damage\n*ensued.\nIn the prosecution of the voyage to the north, and back again\nto the Sandwich Islands, the facts that occurred were chiefly of\na nautical kind. Minutely to record these is not the purpose\nof the present work, and indeed would extend it to an unreasonable length.\nFrom this long and important navigation, I can only select\n.some few incidents, that may be accommodated to the taste\nand expectations of the generality of readers.\nOne thing it is not improper here to observe; which is, that\n 3io\nCOOKS VOYAGES.\nthe captain, in his passage along the coast of America, kept at\na distance from that coast, whenever the wind blew strongly\nupon it, and sailed on till he could approach it again with\nsafety. Hence several great gaps were left unexplored, and\nparticularly between the latitudes of 500 and 550. The exact\nsituation, for instance, of the supposed Straits of Anian was not\nascertained. Every one who is acquainted with the character\nof our commander will be sensible, that if he had lived to return\nagain to the north in 1779, ne would have endeavoured to explore the parts which he had left unexamined.\nThe first place at which Captain Cook landed, after his departure from Nootka Sound, was at an island, of eleven or twelve\nleagues in length, the south-west point of which lies in the\nlatitude of 590 49' north, and the longitude of 261\u00b0 58' east.\nHere, on the nth of May, at the foot of a tree, on a little\neminence not far from the shore, he left a bottle, with a paper\nin it, on which were inscribed the names of the ships and the\ndate of the discovery. Together with the bottle he enclosed\ntwo silver twopenny pieces of his majesty's coin, which had been\nstruck in 1772. These, with many others, had been given him\nby the Reverend Dr. Kaye, the present Dean of Lincoln; and\nour commander, as a mark of his esteem and regard for that\nlearned and respectable gentleman, named the island, after him,\nKaye's Island.\nAt an inlet, where the ships came to an anchor on the 12th,\nand to which . Captain Cook gave the appellation of Prince\nWilliam's Sound, he had an opportunity not only of stopping\nthe leak which the Resolution had sprung in the late storm, and\nof prosecuting his nautical and geographical discoveries, but of\nmaking considerable additions to his knowledge of the inhabitants of the American coast. From every observation\nwhich was made concerning the persons of the natives of this\npart of the coast, it appeared that they had a striking resemblance to those of the Esquimaux and Greenlanders. Their\ncanoes, their weapons, and their instruments for fishing and\nhunting, are likewise exactly the same, in point of materials and\nconstruction, that are used in Greenland. The animals in the\nneighbourhood of Prince William's Sound are, in general,\n COOK'S VOYAGES. 3\"\nsimilar to those which are found at Nootka. One of the most\nbeautiful skins here offered to sale, was, however, that of a small\nanimal which seemed to be peculiar to the place. Mr. Anderson\nwas inclined to think that it is the animal which is described by\nMr. Pennant, under the name of the casan marmot. Among\nthe birds seen in this country, were the white-headed eagle;\nthe shag; and the alcedo, or great kingfisher, the colours of\nwhich were very fine and bright. The humming-bird, also,\ncame frequently and flew about the ship, while at anchor; but\nit can scarcely be supposed that it can be able to subsist here\nduring the severity of the winter. Waterfowl, upon the whole,\nare in considerable plenty; and there is a species of diver, about\nthe size of a partridge, which seems peculiar to the place. Torsk\nand halibut were almost the only kinds of fish that were obtained\nby our voyagers. Vegetables, of.any sort, were few in number;\nand the trees were chiefly the Canadian and spruce pine, some\nof which were of a considerable height and thickness. The\nbeads and iron that were found among the people of the coast,\nmust undoubtedly have been derived from some civilized nation;\nand yet there was ample reason to believe that our English\nnavigators were the first Europeans with whom the natives had\never held a direct communication. From what quarter, then,\nhad they gotten our manufactures? Most probably, through\nthe intervention of the more inland tribes, from Hudson's Bay,\nor the settlements on the Canadian lakes. This, indeed, must\ncertainly have been the case, if iron was known, amongst the\ninhabitants of this part of the American coast, prior to the discovery of it by the Russians, and before there was any traffic\nwith them carried on from Kamtschatka. From what was seen\nof Prince William's Sound, Captain Cook judged that it occupied,\nat least, one degree and a half of latitude, and two of longitude,\nexclusively of the arms or branches, the extent of which is not\nknown.\nSome days after leaving this sound our navigators came to\nan inlet, from which great things were expected. Hopes were\nstrongly entertained that it would be found to communicate\neither with the sea to the north, or with Baffin's-or Hudson's\nBay to the east; and accordingly it became the object of very\n 312\nCOOKS VOYAGES.\naccurate and serious examination. The captain was soon persuaded that the expectations formed from it were groundless ;\nnotwithstanding which, he persisted in the search of a passage,\nmore, indeed, to satisfy other people than to confirm his own\nopinion. In consequence of a complete investigation of the\ninlet, indubitable marks occurred of its being a river. This\nriver, without seeing the least appearance of its source, was\ntraced by our voyagers as high as the latitude of 6i\u00b0 34', and\nthe longitude of 2100, being seventy leagues from its entrance.\nDuring the course of the navigation, on the 1st of June, Lieutenant King was ordered on shore, to display the royal flag, and\nto take possession of the country in his majesty's name. The\nlieutenant at the same time buried in the ground a bottle, containing some pieces of English coin of the year 1772, and a\npaper, on which the names of the ships were inscribed and the\ndate of the present discovery. The great river now discovered\npromises to vie with the most considerable ones already known;\n. and, by itself and its branches, lies open to a very extensive\ninland communication. If, therefore, the knowledge of it should\nbe of future service, the time which was spent in exploring it\nought the less to be regretted. But to Captain Cook, who had\na much greater object in view, the delay that was hence occasioned was a real loss, because the season was advancing\napace. It was, however, a satisfaction to him to reflect, that if\nhe had not examined this very considerable inlet, it would have\nbeen assumed, by speculative fabricators of geography, as a fact\nthat there was a passage through it to the North Sea, or to\nBaffin's or Hudson's Bay. Perhaps, too, it would have been\nmarked on future maps of the world with greater precision,\nand more certain signs of reality, than the invisible, because\nimaginary ^ Straits of de Fuca and de Fonte. In describing the\ninlet, our commander had left a blank which was not filled up\nwith any particular name : and, therefore, the Earl of Sandwich\ndirected, with the greatest propriety, that it should be called\nCook's River.\nAll the natives who were met with, during the examination of\nthis river, appeared from every mark of resemblance to be of\nthe same nation with the inhabitants of Prince William's Sound;\n COOK'S VOYAGES. 3*3\nbut from the people of Nootka, or King George's Sound, they\nessentially differed, both in their persons and their language.\nThe only things which were seen among them that were not of\ntheir own manufacture, were a few glass beads, the iron points\nof their spears, and knives of the same metal. Whencesoever\nthese articles might be derived, it was evident that they had\nnever had any immediate intercourse with the Russians ; since,\nif that had been the case, our voyagers would scarcely have\nfound them clothed in such valuable skins as those of the sea-\notter. A very beneficial fur-trade might undoubtedly be carried on with the inhabitants of this vast coast. But, without a\npracticable northern passage, the situation is too remote to render it probable that Great Britain should hence ever derive any\nmaterial advantage; though it is impossible to say with certainty\nhow far the spirit of commerce, for which the English nation is so\neminently distinguished, may extend. The most valuable, or\nrather the only valuable skins, which Captain Cook saw on the\nwest side of America, were those of the sea-otter; for as to the\nskins of all the other animals of the country, and especially of\nthe foxes and martins, they seemed to be of an inferior quality.\nIt was on the 6th of June that our navigators got clear of\nCook's River. Proceeding in the course of their discoveries,\nwhen they were sailing, on the 19th, amidst the group of islands\nwhich were called, by Beering, Schumagin's Islands, Captain\nClerke fired three guns and brought to, expressing by the\nproper signals that he wished to speak with Captain Cook. At\nthis our commander was not a little alarmed; and, as no apparent danger had been remarked in the passage through the\nchannel where the vessels now were, it was apprehended that\nsome accident, such as springing a leak, must have happened.\nOn Captain Clerke's coming on board the Resolution, he related\nthat several of the natives had followed his ship: that one of\nthem had made many signs, taking off his cap, and bowing after\nthe manner of Europeans : and that, at length, he had fastened\nto a rope which was handed down to him, a small thin wooden\ncase or box. Having delivered his parcel safe, and spoken\nsomething, accompanied with more signs, the canoes dropped\nastern, and left the Discovery. On opening the box, a piece of\n 3H\nCOOK'S VOYAGES.\nK\npaper was found, folded up carefully, upon which something\nwas written, that was reasonably supposed to be in the Russian\nlanguage. To the paper was prefixed the date 1778, and in the\nbody of the note there was a reference to the year 1776. Although no person on board was learned enough to decipher the\nalphabet of the writer, his numerals sufficiently marked that\nothers had preceded our voyagers in visiting this dreary part of\nthe globe; and the prospect of soon meeting with men, who\nwere united to them in ties somewhat closer than those of our\ncommon nature, and who were not strangers to the arts and commerce of civilized life, could not but afford a sensible satisfaction\nto people who, for such a length of time, had been conversant\nwith the savages of the Pacific Ocean, and of the North American continent. Captain Clerke was, at first, of opinion that\nsome Russians had been shipwrecked; but no such idea occurred\nto Captain Cook. He rather thought that the paper contained\na note of information, left by some Russian traders, to be\ndelivered to the next of their countrymen who should arrive;\nand that the natives, seeing the English pass, and supposing\nthem to be Russians, had resolved to bring off the note. Accordingly, our commander pursued his voyage, without inquiring\nfarther into the matter.\nOn the 21st, amongst some hills on the mainland, that\ntowered above the clouds to a most amazing height, one was. discovered to have a volcano, which continually threw up vast\ncolumns of black smoke. It doth not stand far from the coast;\nand it lies in the latitude of 540 48', and the longitude of 195\u00ae\n45'. This mountain was rendered remarkable by its figure,\nwhich is a complete cone, and the volcano is at the very summit.\nWhile, in the afternoon of the same day, during a calm of three\nhours, the English were fishing with great success for halibuts,\na small canoe, conducted by one man, came to them from an\nisland in the neighbourhood. On approaching the ship, he\ntook off his cap and bowed, as the native had done who had\nvisited the Discovery a day or two before. From the acquired\npoliteness of these people, as well as from the note already mentioned, it was evident that the Russians must have a communication and traffic with them : and of this a fresh proof occurred\n COOK'S VOYAGES. 315\nin the present visitor; for he wore a pair of green cloth breeches,\nand a jacket of black cloth, or stuff, under the gut-shirt or frock\nof his own country.\nIn the prosecution of the voyage, on the 26th, there was so\nthick a fog, that our navigators could not see a hundred yards\nbefore them; notwithstanding which, as the weather was moderate, the captain did not intermit his course. At length, however, being alarmed at the sound of breakers on one side of the\nship, he immediately brought her to, and came to an anchor;\nand the Discovery, by his order, did the same. A few hours\nafter, the fog having in some degree cleared away, it appeared\nthat both the vessels had escaped a very imminent danger.\nProvidence, in the dark, had conducted them between rocks\nwhich our commander would not have ventured to pass through\nin a clear day, and had conveyed them to an anchoring place as\ngood as he could possibly have fixed upon had the choice been\nentirely at his option.\nOn the 27th our voyagers reached an island that is known\nby the name of Oonalashka; the inhabitants of which behaved\nwith a degree of politeness uncommon to savage tribes. A\nyoung man, who had overset his canoe, being obliged by this\naccident to come on board the ship, went down into Captain\nCook's cabin, upon the first invitation, without expressing the\nleast reluctance or uneasiness. His own clothes being wet, the\ncaptain gave him others, in which he dressed himself with as\nmuch ease as any Englishman could have done. From the\nbehaviour of this youth, and that of some of the rest of the natives, it was evident that these people were no strangers to Europeans and to several of their customs. There was something,\nhowever, in the English ships that greatly excited their attention ; for such as could not come off in canoes, assembled on\nthe neighbouring hills to look at them. In one instance it was\napparent that the inhabitants were so far from having made any\nprogress in politeness, that they were still immersed in the most\nsavage manners. For as our commander was walking along the\nshore, on the 29th, he met with a group of them, of both sexes,\nwho were seated on the grass, at a repast, consisting of raw fish,\nwhich they seemed to eat with as much relish as persons in\n COOK'S VOYAGES.\ncivilized life would experience from a turbot, served up in the\nrichest sauce. Soon after the vessels had come to an anchor at\nOonalashka, a native of the island brought on board such\nanother note as had been given to Captain Clerke. He presented it to Captain Cook; but, as it was written in the Russian\nlanguage, and could be of no use to the English, though it might\nbe of consequence to others, the captain returned it to the\nbearer, and dismissed him with a few presents; for which he expressed his thanks by making several low bows as he retired.\nOn the 2nd of July our voyagers put to sea from Oonalashka;\nand pursuing their course of navigation and discovery, came, on\nthe 16th, within sight of a promontory, near which our commander ordered Lieutenant Williamson to land, that he might\nsee what direction the coast took beyond it, and what the country produced. Accordingly, Mr. Williamson went on shore,\nand reported on his return that having landed on the point,\nand climbed the highest hill, he found that the farthest part of\nthe coast in sight bore nearly north. At the same time, he\ntook possession of the country in his majesty's name, and left\na bottle, in which was enclosed a piece of paper containing an\ninscription of the names of the ships, together with the date of\nthe discovery. To the promontory he gave the name of Cape\nNewenham. The land, as far as Mr. Williamson could see,\nproduces neither tree nor shrub; but the lower grounds were\nnot destitute of grass, and of some other plants, very few of\nwhich were in flower.\nWhen our navigators, on the 3rd of August, had advanced to\nthe latitude of 620 34', a great loss was sustained by them in the\ndeath of Mr. Anderson, the surgeon of the Resolution, who had\nbeen lingering under a consumption for more than twelve\nmonths. He was a young man of a cultivated understanding\nand agreeable manners, and was well skilled in his own profession ; besides which he had acquired a considerable degree of\nknowledge in other branches of science. How useful an assistant he was to Captain Cook, hath often appeared in the present\nnarrative. Had his life been spared, the public would undoubtedly have received from him such communications, on\nvarious parts of the natural history of the several places that had\n COOK'S VOYAGES.\n317\nbeen visited, as would justly have entitled him to very high\ncommendation. The proofs of his abilities that now remain,\nwill hand down the name of Anderson, in conjunction with\nthat of Cook, to posterity. Soon after he had breathed his last,\nland having been seen at a distance, which was supposed to be\nan island, our commander honoured it with the appellation of\nAnderson's Island. ;The next day he removed Mr. Law, the\nsurgeon of the Discovery, into the Resolution, and appointed\nMr. Samwell, the surgeon's first mate of the Resolution, to be\nsurgeon of the Discovery.\nOn the 9th Captain Cook came to an anchor under a point\nof land to which he gave the name of Cape Prince of Wales,\nand which is remarkable by being the most western extremity\nof America hitherto explored. This extremity is distant from\nthe eastern Cape of Siberia only thirteen leagues : and thus our\ncommander had the glory of ascertaining the vicinity of the\ntwo continents, which had only been conjectured from the reports of the neighbouring Asiatic inhabitants, and the imperfect\nobservations of the Russian navigators.\nResuming his course on the ioth, Captain Cook anchored in\na bay, the land of which was at first supposed to be part of the\nisland of Alaschka, which is laid down in Mr. Stsehlin's map.\nBut, from the figure of the coast, from the situation of the\nopposite shore of America, and from the longitude, the captain\nsoon began to think that it was more probably the country of\nthe Tschutski, on the eastern extremity of Asia, which had been\nexplored by Beering in 1728. In the result it appeared that\nthis was in fact the case. Our commander became fully satisfied in the farther progress of his voyage, that Mr. Stsehlin's\nmap must be erroneous; and he had the honour of restoring\nthe American continent to that space which the geographer\nnow mentioned had occupied with his imaginary island of\nAlaschka.\nFrom the Bay of St. Lawrence, belonging to the country of\nthe Tschutski, our navigators steered, on the nth, to the east,\nin order to get nearer to the coast of America. After that,\nproceeding to the north, they reached on the 17th the latitude\nof 700 33'. On this day a brightness was perceived in the\n1\n 3i8\nCOOK'S VOYAGES.\nI\nI\nnorthern horizon, like that which is reflected from ice, and is\ncommonly called the blink. This was at first but little noticed,\nfrom a supposition that there was no probability of meeting\nwith ice so soon: and yet the sharpness of the air, and the\ngloominess of the weather, had for two or three days past\nseemed to indicate a sudden change. In about an hour's time,\nthe sight of a large field of ice left Captain Cook no longer in\ndoubt with regard to the cause of the brightness of the horizon.\nThe ships in the same afternoon, being then in the latitude of\n700 41', were close to the edge of the ice, and not able to stand\non any farther. On the 18 th, when the vessels were in the latitude of 700 44', the ice on the side of them was as compact as\na wall, and was judged to be at least ten or twelve feet in height.\nFarther to the north, it appeared to be much higher. Its surface was extremely rugged, and in different places there were\nseen upon it pools of water. A prodigious number of sea-horses\nlay upon the ice : and some of them, on the nineteenth, were\nprocured for food, there being at this time a want of fresh provisions. When the animals were brought to the vessels, it was\nno small disappointment to many of the seamen, who had\nfeasted their eyes for several days with the prospect of eating\nthem, to find that they were not sea-cows, as they had supposed,\nbut sea-horses. The disappointment would not have been\noccasioned, or the difference known, had there not happened\nto be one or two sailors on board who had been in Greenland,\nand who declared what these animals were, and that it never\nwas customary to eat of them. Such however was the anxiety\nfor a change of diet, as to overcome this prejudice. Our\nvoyagers lived upon the sea-horses as long as they lasted; and\nthere were few who did not prefer them to the salt meat.\nCaptain Cook continued to the 29th to traverse the Icy Sea\nbeyond Beering's Strait, in various directions, and through\nnumberless obstructions and difficulties. Every day the ice\nincreased, so as to preclude all hopes of attaining, at least during the present year, the grand object of the voyage. Indeed,\nthe season was now so far advanced, and the time in which the\nfrost was expected to set in was so near at hand, that it would\nhave been totally inconsistent with prudence to have made any\n COOK'S VOYAGES.\nfarther attempts, till the next summer, at finding a passage into\nthe Atlantic. The attention therefore of our commander was\nnow directed to other important and necessary concerns. It\nwas of great consequence to meet with a place where our navigators might be supplied with wood and water. But the point\nwhich principally occupied the captain's thoughts was, how he\nshould spend the winter, so as to make some improvements in\ngeography and navigation, and at the same time to be in a condition to return to the north, in farther search of a passage, in\nthe ensuing summer.\nBefore Captain Cook proceeded far to the south, he employed\na considerable time in examining the sea and coasts in the\nneighbourhood of Beering's Strait, both on the side of Asia and\nAmerica. In this examination he ascertained the accuracy of\nBeering, so far as he went; demonstrated the errors with which\nStaehlin's map of the New Northern Archipelago abounds ; and\nmade large additions to the geographical knowledge of this\npart of the world. \" It reflects,\" as Mr. Coxe justly observes,\n\" the highest honour, even on the British name, that our great\nnavigator extended his discoveries much farther in one expedition, and at so great a distance from the point of his departure,\nthan the Russians accomplished in a long series of years, and\nin parts belonging, or contiguous, to their own empire.\"\nOn the 2nd of October our voyagers came within sight of\nthe island of Oonalashka, and anchored the next day in Sam-\nganoodha harbour. Here the first concern was to put the ships\nunder the necessary repair; and while the carpenters were employed in this business, one third of the people had permission,\nby turns, to go and collect the berries with which the island\nabounds, and which, though now beginning to be in a state of\ndecay, did not a little contribute, in conjunction with spruce\nbeer, effectually to eradicate every seed of the scurvy that\nmight exist in either of the vessels. Such a supply of fish was\nlikewise procured, as not only served for present consumption,\nbut afforded a quantity to be carried out to sea; so that hence\na considerable saving was made of the provisions of the ships,\nwhich was at this time an object of no small importance.\nCaptain Cook, on the 8th, received by the hands of an\n COOK'S VOYAGES.\nOonalashka man, named Derramoushk, a very singular present,\nwhich was that of a rye loaf, or rather a pie in the form of a loaf,\nfor it enclosed some salmon, highly seasoned with pepper. This\nman had the like present for Captain Clerke, and a note for\neach of the two captains, written in a character which none on\nboard could understand. It was natural to suppose that the\npresents came from some Russians in the neighbourhood, and,\ntherefore, a few bottles of rum, wine, and porter were sent to\nthese unknown friends in return, it being rightly judged that\nsuch articles would be more acceptable than anything besides\nwhich it was in the power of our navigators to bestow. Corporal\nLediard, of the marines,1 an intelligent man, was at the same\ntime directed to accompany Derramoushk for the purpose of\ngaining farther information, and with orders, if he met with any\nRussians, that he should endeavour to make them understand\nthat our voyagers were Englishmen, and the friends and allies\nof their nation. On the ioth the corporal returned with three\nRussian seamen, or furriers, who, with several others, resided at\nEgoochshac, where they had a dwelling-house, some store-houses,\nand a sloop of about thirty tons burden. One of these men was\n1 This Corporal Lediard is an extraordinary man, something of whose\nhistory cannot fail of being entertaining to my readers. In the winter of\n1786 he set out on the singular undertaking of walking across the continent\nof America, for the accomplishment of which purpose he determined to\ntravel by the way of Siberia, and to procure a passage from that country to\nthe opposite American coast. Being an American by birth, and having no\nmeans of raising the money necessary for his expenses, a subscription was-\nraised for him by Sir Joseph Banks, and some other gentlemen, amounting\nin the whole to a little more than fifty pounds. With this sum he proceeded\nto Hamburgh, from which place he went to Copenhagen, and thence to\nPetersburgh, where he arrived in the beginning of March, 1787. ' In his\njourney from Copenhagen to Petersburgh, finding that the gulf of Bothnia\nwas not frozen over, he was obliged to walk round the whole of it, by\nTornseo. At Petersburgh he staid till the 21st of May, when he obtained\nleave to accompany a convoy of military stores, which at that time was proceeding to Mr. Billings, who had been his shipmate in Captain Cook's\nvoyage, and who was then employed by the Empress of Russia for the purpose of making discoveries in Siberia, and on the north-west coast of\nAmerica. With this convoy Mr. Lediard set out, and in August reached\nthe city of Irkutsk, in Siberia. After that he proceeded to the town of\nYakutsk, where he met with Captain Billings. From this place he went\n COOK'S VOYAGES.\n321\neither master or mate <\nvery good hand, and 1\nthem were sensible and\nto give Captain Cook\nThe great difficulty in t\ntelKgence arose from th\na Russian landed at (\nGregorioff Sin Ismylol\namong his countrymen\nconversations with Ism]\nassisted by figures and \\\nthe sight of two charts,\nof them were manuscrip\nThe first included the 1\ndown to the latitude of\nof Kamtschatka. But i\nanother of them wrote a\nwith figures : and all of\npersons, who were ready\ndegree of information,\nd communication of in-\niterpreter. On the 14th\ncharacters, he obtained from him\nvas permitted to copy them. Both\nid bore every mark of authenticity.\nlioskian Sea, the coast of Tartary\nhe Curil Islands, and the peninsula\n; the second chart that was the most\nfor it comprehended all the dis-\nis to the eastward of Kamtschatka,\nback to Irkutsk to spend a part of the winter, proposing, in the spring, to\nreturn to Yakutsk in order to proceed in the summer to Okotsk.\nHitherto Mr. Lediard had gone on prosperously, and flattered himself\nwith the hopes of succeeding in his undertaking. But in January last\n(1788), in consequence of an express from the empress, he was arrested, and,\nin half an hour's time, carried away under the guard of two soldiers and an\nofficer in a post sledge for Moscow, without his clothes, money, and papers.\nFrom Moscow he was conveyed to the city of Moialoff, in White Russia,\nand thence to the town of Tolochin, in Poland. There he was informed\nthat her majesty's orders were that he was never to enter her dominions\nagain without her express permission. During all this time he suffered the\ngreatest hardships from sickness, fatigue, and want of rest, so that he was\nalmost reduced to a skeleton. From Tolochin he made his way to Ko-\nnigsberg, having had, as he says, a miserable journey in a miserable country,\nin a miserable season, in miserable health, and a miserable purse, and disappointed of his darling enterprise. Mr. Lediard informs Sir Joseph Banks,\nto whom he sent from time to time a fall account of his transactions, that,\nthough he had been retarded in his pursuits by malice, he had not travelled\ntotally in vain, his observations in Asia being, perhaps, as complete as a\nlonger visit would have rendered them. From his last letter it appears\nthat he proposed to return as speedily as possible from Konigsberg to\nEngland.\n COOKS VOYAGES.\ntowards America, which, however, exclusively of the voyages of\nBeering and Tscherikoff, amounted to little or nothing. Indeed, all the people with whom the captain conversed at\nOonalashka agreed in assuring him, over and over again, that\nthey knew of no other islands besides those which were laid\ndown upon this chart, and that no Russian had ever seen any\npart of the continent of America to the northward, excepting\nthat which lies opposite to the country of the Tschutskis.\nWhen, on the 21st, Mr. Ismyloff took his final leave of the\nEnglish navigators, our commander intrusted to his care a letter\nto the lords commissioners of the Admiralty, in which was enclosed a chart of all the northern coasts the captain had visited.\nIt was expected that there would be an opportunity of sending\nthis letter in the ensuing spring to Kamtschatka or Okotsk, and\nthat it would reach Petersburgh during the following winter.\nMr. Ismyloff, who faithfully and successfully discharged the\ntrust our commander had reposed in him, seemed to possess\nabilities that might entitle him to a higher station in life than\nthat which he occupied. He had a considerable knowledge of\nastronomy, and was acquainted with the most useful branches\nof mathematics. Captain Cook made him a present of an\nHadley's octant, and though it was probably the first he had\never seen, he understood, in a very short time, the various uses\nto which that instrument can be applied.\nWhile the ships lay at Oonalashka our voyagers did not\nneglect to make a diligent inquiry into the productions of the\nisland, and the general manners of the inhabitants. On these,\nas being in a great measure similar to objects which have already\nbeen noticed, it is not necessary to enlarge. There is one circumstance, however, so honourable to the natives that it must\nnot be omitted. They are, to all appearance, the most peaceable and inoffensive people our commander had ever met with,\nand, with respect to honesty, they might serve as a pattern to\ncountries that are in the highest state of civilization. A doubt\nis suggested whether this disposition may not have been the\nconsequence of their present subjection to the Russians. From\nthe affinity which was found to subsist between the dialects of\nthe Greenlanders and Esquimaux, and those of the inhabitants\n COOK'S VOYAGES.\n323\nof Norton's Sound and Oonalashka, there is strong reason to\nbelieve that all these nations are of the same extraction, and, if\nthat be the case, the existence of a northern communication of\nsome kind, by sea, between the west side of America and the\neast side, through Baffin's Bay, can scarcely be doubted, which\ncommunication, nevertheless, may effectually be shut up against\nships by ice and other impediments.\nWhile the vessels lay in Samganoodha harbour, Captain Cook\nexerted his usual diligence in making nautical and astronomical\nobservations. All things on the 26th having been gotten ready\nfor his departure, he put to sea on that day and sailed for the\nSandwich Islands, it being his intention to spend a few months\nthere, and then to direct his course to Kamtschatka, so as to\nendeavour to reach that country by the middle of May in the\nensuing summer.\nOn the 26th of November, when the ships had proceeded\nsouthward till they came to the latitude of 200 55', land was\ndiscovered, which proved to be an island of the name of Mowee,\nthat had not hitherto been visited. It is one of the group of\nthe Sandwich Islands. As it was of the last importance to\nprocure a supply of provisions at these islands, and experience\nhad taught our commander that he could have had no chance\nof succeeding in his object if it were left to every man's dircre-\ntion to traffic for what he pleased, and in what manner he\npleased, the captain published an order prohibiting all persons\nfrom trading, excepting such as should be appointed by himself\nand Captain Clerke. Even these persons were enjoined to\ntrade only for provisions and refreshments. While our navigators lay off Mowee, which was for some days, a friendly intercourse was maintained with the inhabitants.\nAnother island was discovered on the 30th, which is called\nby the natives Owhyhee. As it appeared to be of greater extent\nand importance than any of the islands which had yet been\nvisited in this part of the world, Captain Cook spent nearly\nseven weeks in sailing round and examining its coast. Whilst\nhe was thus employed the inhabitants came off from time to time\nin their canoes, and readily engaged in traffic with our voyagers.\nIn the conduct of this business the behaviour of the islanders\n COOK'S VOYAGES.\nwas more entirely free from suspicion and reserve than our\ncommander had ever yet experienced. Not even the people of\nOtaheite itself, with whom he had been so intimately and\nrepeatedly connected, had displayed such a full confidence in\nthe integrity and good treatment of the English.\nAmong the articles procured from the natives was a quantity\nof sugar-cane. Upon a trial Captain Cook found that a strong\ndecoction of it produced a very palatable beer; on which account he ordered some more to be brewed for general use.\nWhen however the barrel was broached, not one of the crew\nwould taste of the liquor. As the captain had no motive in\npreparing this beverage but that of sparing the rum and other\nspirits for a colder climate, he did not exert either authority or\npersuasion to prevail upon the men to change their resolution ;\nfor he knew that there was no danger of the scurvy so long as\na plentiful supply could be obtained of different vegetables.\nNevertheless, that he might not be disappointed in his views, he\ngave orders that no grog should be served in the ships; and he\nhimself, together with the officers, continued to make use of the\nsugar-cane beer, which was much improved by the addition of\na few hops that chanced to be still on board. There could be\nno reasonable doubt of its being a very wholesome liquor; and\nyet the inconsiderate crew alleged that it would be injurious to\ntheir health. No people are more averse to every kind of innovation than seamen, and their prejudices are extremely difficult\nto be conquered. It was, however, by acting contrary to these\nprejudices, and by various deviations from established practice,\nthat Captain Cook had been enabled to preserve his men from\nthat dreadful distemper the scurvy, which perhaps has destroyed\nmore of our sailors in their peaceful voyages than have fallen\nby the enemy in military expeditions.\nAs the captain was pursuing his examination of the coast of\nOwhyhee, it having fallen calm at one o'clock in the morning\nof the 19th of December, the Resolution was left to the mercy\nof a north-easterly swell, which impelled her fast towards the\nland; so that long before daybreak lights were seen from the\nland, which was not more than a league distant. The night at\nthe same time was dark with thunder, lightning, and rain. As\n COOK'S VOYAGES. 3*5\nsoon as it was light a dreadful surf within half a league of the\nvessel appeared breaking from the shore; and it was evident\nthat our navigators had been in the most perilous situation:\nnor was the danger yet over; for in consequence of the veering\nof the wind, they were but just able to keep their distance from\nthe coast What rendered their situation more alarming, was\nthat a rope of the main-topsail having given way, this occasioned\nthe sail to be rent in two. In the same manner, the two topgallant sails gave way, though they were not half worn out.\nHowever, a favourable opportunity was seized of getting others\nto the yards; and the Resolution again proceeded in safety.\nOn the 16th of January, 1779, canoes arrived in such numbers from all parts that there were not fewer than a thousand\nabout the two ships, most of them crowded with people, and\nwell laden with hogs and other productions of the island. It\nwas a satisfactory proof of their friendly intentions that there\nwas not a single person amongst them who had with him a\nweapon of any kind, trade and curiosity alone appearing to be\nthe motives which actuated their conduct. Among 'such multitudes, however, as at times were on board, it will not be\ndeemed surprising that some should betray a thievish disposition. One of them took out of the Resolution a boat's rudder;\nand made off with it so speedily that it could not be recovered.\nCaptain Cook judged this to be a favourable opportunity of\nshowing to these people the use of fire-arms; and accordingly\nhe ordered two or three muskets, and as many four-pounders,\nto be fired over the canoe which carried off the rudder. It not\nbeing intended that any of the shot should take effect, the surrounding multitude of the natives seemed to be more surprised\nthan terrified.\nMr. Bligh, having been sent to examine a neighbouring bay,\nreported, on his return, that it had good anchorage and fresh\nwater, and that it was in an accessible situation. Into this bay,\ntherefore, the captain resolved to carry the ships, in order to\nrefit and to obtain every refreshment which the place could\nafford. As night approached the greater part of the Indians\nretired on shore, but numbers of them requested permission to\nsleep on board; in which request curiosity (at least with regard\n 326\nCOOK'S VOYAGES.\nto several of them) was not their sole motive ; for it was found\nthe next morning that various things were missing, on which\naccount our commander determined not to entertain so many\npersons another night.\nOn the 17th the ships came to an anchor in the bay which\nhad been examined by Mr. Bligh, and which is called Kara-\nkakooa by the inhabitants. At this time the vessels continued\nto be much crowded with natives, and were surrounded with a\nmultitude of canoes. Captain Cook, in the whole course of his\nvoyages, had never seen so numerous a body of people assembled in one place. For besides those who had come off to the\nEnglish in their canoes, all the shore of the bay was covered\nwith spectators, and many hundreds were swimming round the\nships like shoals of fish. Our navigators could not avoid being\ngreatly impressed with the singularity of this scene; and perhaps there were few on board that now lamented the want of\nsuccess which had attended the endeavours of getting homeward, the last summer, by a northern passaged \" To this disappointment,\" says the captain, g we owed our having it in our\npower to revisit the Sandwich Islands, and to enrich'our voyage\nwith a discovery which, though the last, seemed in many respects to be the most important that had hitherto been made\nby Europeans throughout the extent of the Pacific Ocean.\"\nSuch is the sentence that concludes our commander's journal:\nand the satisfaction with which this sentence appears to have\nbeen written, cannot fail of striking the mind of every reader.\nLittle did Captain Cook then imagine that a discovery which\npromised to add no small honour to his name, and to be productive of very agreeable consequences, should be so fatal in\nthe result. Little did he think that the island of Owhyhee was\ndestined to be the last scene of his exploits, and the cause of\nhis destruction.\nThe reception which the captain met with from the natives,\non his proceeding to anchor in Karakakooa Bay, was flattering\nin the highest degree. They came off from the shore in astonishing numbers, and expressed their joy by singing and\nshouting, and by exhibiting a variety of wild and extravagant\ngestures. Pareea, a young man of great authority, and Kaneena,\n COOKS VOYAGES.\n327\nanother chief, had already attached themselves to our commander, and were very useful in keeping their countrymen from\nbeing troublesome.\nDuring the long cruise of our navigators off the island of\nOwhyhee, the inhabitants had almost universally behaved with\ngreat fairness and honesty in their dealings, and had not shown\nthe slightest propensity to theft: and this was a fact the more\nextraordinary, as those with whom our people had hitherto\nmaintained any intercourse were of the lowest rank, being\neither servants or fishermen. But, after the arrival of the\nResolution and Discovery in Karakakooa Bay, the case was\ngreatly altered. The immense crowd of islanders that blocked\nup every part of the ships, not only afforded frequent opportunities of pilfering without risk of detection; but held out,\neven if they should be detected, \"a, prospect of escaping with\nimpunity, from the superiority of their numbers to that of the\nEnglish. Another circumstance, to which the alteration in the\nconduct of the natives might be ascribed, arose from the presence and encouragement of their chiefs, into whose possession\nthe booty might be traced, and whom there was reason to suspect of being the instigators of the depredations that were committed.\nSoon after the Resolution had gotten into her station,\nPareea and Kaneena brought on board a third chief, named\nKoah, who was represented as being a priest, and as having, in\nhis early youth, been a distinguished warrior. In the evening\nCaptain Cook, attended by Mr. Bayley and Mr. King, accompanied Koah on shore. Upon this occasion the captain was\nreceived with very peculiar and extraordinary ceremonies;\nwith ceremonies that indicated the highest respect on the part\nof the natives, and which, indeed, seemed to fall little short of\nadoration.\nOne of the principal objects that engaged our commander's\nattention at Owhyhee, was the salting of hogs for sea-store; in\nwhich his success was far more complete than had been attained\nin any former attempt of the same kind. It doth not appear\nthat experiments relative to this subject had been made by the\nnavigators of any nation before Captain Cook. His first trials\n COOKS VOYAGES.\nwere in 1774, during his second voyage round the world; when\nhis success, though very imperfect, was nevertheless sufficient\nto encourage his farther efforts in a matter of so much importance. As the present voyage was likely to be protracted a\nyear beyond the time for which the ships were victualled, he\nwas under a necessity of providing, by some such method, for\nthe subsistence of the crews, or of relinquishing the prosecution\nof his discoveries. Accordingly he lost no opportunity of renewing his atttempts, and the event answered his most sanguine\nexpectations. Captain King brought home with him some of\nthe pork, which was pickled at Owhyhee in January, 1779 ; and\nupon its being tasted by several persons in England about\nChristmas, 1780, it was found to be perfectly sound and wholesome. It seemed to be destined that in every instance Captain\nCook should excel all who had gone before him in promoting\nthe purposes of navigation.\nOn the 26th the captain had his first interview with Terree-\noboo, the king of the island. The meeting was conducted with\na variety of ceremonies, among which the custom of making an\nexchange of names, which amongst all the islanders of the\nPacific Ocean is the strongest pledge of friendship, was observed.\nWhen the formalities of the interview were over, our commander\ncarried Terreeoboo, and as many chiefs as the pinnace could\nhold, on board the Resolution. They were received, on this\nOccasion, with every mark of respect that could be shown them;\nand, in return for a beautiful and splendid feathered cloak which\nthe king had bestowed on Captain Cook, the captain put a\nlinen shirt on his majesty, and girt his own hanger round him.\nIn the progress of the intercourse which was maintained between our voyagers and the natives, the quiet and inoffensive\nbehaviour of the latter took away every apprehension of danger,\nso that the English trusted themselves among them at all times\nand in all situations. The instances of kindness and civility\nwhich our people experienced from them were so numerous that\nthey could not easily be recounted. A society of priests, in\nparticular, displayed a generosity and munificence of which no\nequal example had hitherto been given: for they furnished a\nconstant supply of hogs and vegetables to our navigators with-\n 33o\nCOOKS VOYAGES.\nwas a large herd of hogs. At the close of the visit, the greater\npart of the cloth and the whole of the hogs and vegetables were\ngiven by Terreeoboo to the captain and Mr. King; who were\nastonished at the value and magnificence of the present; for it\nfar exceeded everything of the kind which they had seen either\nat the Friendly or Society Islands. Mr. King had in so high a\ndegree conciliated the affections, and gained the esteem of the\ninhabitants of Owhyhee, that, with offers of the most flattering\nnature, he was strongly solicited to remain in the country.\nTerreeoboo and Kaoo waited upon Captain Cook, whose son\nthey supposed Mr. King to be, with a formal request that he\nmight be left behind. To avoid giving a positive refusal to an\noffer which was so kindly intended, the captain told them that\nhe could not part with Mr. King at that time, but that, on his\nreturn to the island in the next year, he would endeavour to\nsettle the matter to their satisfaction.\nEarly on the 4th the ships sailed out of Karakakooa Bay,\nbeing followed by a large number of canoes. It was our commander's design, before he visited the other islands, to finish\nthe survey of Owhyhee, in hopes of meeting with a road better\nsheltered than the bay he had just left. In case of not succeeding in this respect, he purposed to take a view of the southeast part of Mowee, where he was informed that he should find\nan excellent harbour.\nThe circumstances which brought Captain Cook back to\nKarakakooa Bay, and the unhappy consequences that followed,\nI shall give from Mr. Samwell's narrative of his death. This\nnarrative was, in the most obliging manner, communicated to\nme in manuscript by Mr. Samwell, with entire liberty to make\nsuch use of it as I should judge proper. Upon a perusal of it,\nits importance struck me in so strong a light that I wished to\nhave it separately laid before the world. Accordingly, with Mr.\nSamwell's concurrence, I procured its publication, that, if any\nobjections should be made to it, I might be able to notice them\nin my own work. As the narrative hath continued for more\nthan two years unimpeached and uncontradicted, I esteem myself fully authorized to insert it in this place, as containing the\nmost complete and authentic account of the melancholy cata-\n COOK'S VOYAGES.\n33i\nstrophe which, at Owhyhee, befell our illustrious navigator and\ncommander.\n\" On the 6th we were overtaken by a gale of wind; and the\nnext night the Resolution had the misfortune of springing the\nhead of her foremast, in such a dangerous manner that Captain\nCook was obliged to return to Keragegooah,1 in order to have\nit repaired; for we could find no other convenient harbour on\nthe island. The same gale had occasioned much distress\namong some canoes that had paid us a visit from the shore.\nOne of them, with two men and a child on board, was picked\nup by the Resolution, and rescued from destruction : the men,\nhaving toiled hard all night, in attempting to reach the land,\nwere so much exhausted that they could hardly mount the ship's\nside. When they got upon the quarter-deck, they burst into\ntears, and seemed much affected with the dangerous situation\nfrom which they had escaped; but the little child appeared\nlively and cheerful. One of the Resolution's boats was also so\nfortunate as to save a man and two women, whose canoe had\nbeen upset by the violence of the waves. They were brought\non board, and, with the others, partook of the kindness and\nhumanity of Captain Cook.\nI On the morning of Wednesday, the ioth, we were within a\nfew miles of the harbour, and were soon joined by several\ncanoes, in which appeared many of our old acquaintance, who\nseemed to have come to welcome us back. Among them was\nCoo, aha, a priest: he had brought a small pig, and some\ncocoa-nuts in his hand, which, after having chanted a few sentences, he presented to Captain Clerke. He then left us, and\nhastened on board the Resolution to perform the same friendly\nceremony before Captain Cook. Having but light winds all\nthat day we could not gain the harbour. In the afternoon, a\n1 It is proper to take notice that Mr. Samwell spells the names of several\npersons and places differently from what is done in the history of the voyage.\nFor instance,\nKarakakooa he calls Ke, rag, e, goo, ah,\nTerreeoboo ,, \u201e Kariopoo,\nKowrowa ,, ,, Kavaroah,\nKaneecab areea ,, ,, Kaneekapo, herei,\nMaiha maiha \u201e ,, Ka, mea, mea.\n 332\nCOOKS VOYAGES.\nchief of the first rank, and nearly related to Kariopoo, paid us\na visit on board the Discovery. His name was Ka, mea, mea:\nhe was dressed in a very rich feathered cloak, which he seemed\nto have brought for sale, but would part with it for nothing\nexcept iron daggers. These the chiefs, some time before our\ndeparture, had preferred to every other article; for, having\nreceived a plentful supply of hatchets and other tools, they\nbegan to collect a store of warlike instruments. Kameamea\nprocured nine daggers for his cloak; and, being pleased with\nhis reception, he and his attendants slept on board that night.\nI In the morning of the nth of February, the ships anchored\nagain in Keragegooah Bay, and preparation was immediately\nmade for landing the Resolution's foremast. We were visited\nbut by few of the Indians, because there were but few in the\nbay. On our departure, those belonging to other parts had\nrepaired to their several habitations, and were again to collect\nfrom various quarters, before we could expect to be surrounded\nby such multitudes as we had once seen in that harbour. In\nthe afternoon I walked about a mile into the country, to visit\nan Indian friend who had, a few days before, come near twenty\nmiles, in a small canoe, to see me, while the ship lay becalmed.\nAs the canoe had not left us long before a gale of wind came\non, I was alarmed for the consequence: however, I had the\npleasure to find that my friend had escaped unhurt, though not\nwithout some difficulties. I take notice of this short excursion\nmerely because it afforded me an opportunity of observing that\nthere appeared no change in the disposition or behaviour of\nthe inhabitants. I saw nothing that could induce me to think\nthat they were displeased with our return, or jealous of the intention of our second visit. On the contrary, that abundant\ngood nature which had always characterized them seemed\nstill to glow in every bosom and to animate every countenance.\nI The next day, February the 12th, the ships were put under\na taboo, by the chiefs: a solemnity, it seems, that was requisite to be observed before Kariopoo, the king, paid his first\nvisit to Captain Cook, after his return. He waited upon him\nthe same day, on board the Resolution, attended by a large\n COOKS VOYAGES.\n333\ntrain, some of which bore the presents designed for Captain\nCook, who received him in his usual friendly manner, and gave\nhim several articles in return. This amicable ceremony being\nsettled, the taboo was dissolved; matters went on in the usual\ntrain; and the next day, February the 13th, we were visited\nby the natives in great numbers; the Resolution's mast was\nlanded, and the astronomical observatories erected on their\nformer situation. I landed, with another gentleman, at the\ntown of Kavaroah, where we found a great number of canoes,\njust arrived from different parts of the island, and the Indians\nbusy in constructing temporary huts on the beach for their\nresidence during the stay of the ships. On our return on board\nthe Discovery, we learned that an Indian had been detected in\nstealing the armourer's tongs from the forge, for which he received a pretty severe flogging, and was sent out of the ship.\nNotwithstanding the example made of this man, in the afternoon another had the audacity to snatch the tongs and a chisel\nfrom the same place, with which he jumped overboard and\nswam for the shore. The master and a midshipman were in-\nsantly despatched after him, in the small cutter. The Indian,\nseeing himself pursued, made for a canoe; his countrymen\ntook him on board, and paddled as swift as they could towards\nthe shore. We fired several muskets at them, but to no effect,\nfor they soon got out of the reach of our shot. Pareah, one of\nthe chiefs, who was at that time on board the Discovery, understanding what had happened, immediately went ashore, promising to bring back the stolen goods. Our boat was so far\ndistanced, in chasing the canoe which had taken the thief on\nboard, that he had time to make his escape into the country.\nCaptain Cook, who was then ashore, endeavoured to intercept\nhis landing; but it seems that he was led out of the way by\nsome of the natives, who had officiously intruded themselves\nas guides. As the master was approaching near the landing-\nplace, he was met by some of the Indians in a canoe. They\nhad brought back the tongs and chisel, together with another\narticle that we had not missed, which happened to be the lid\nof the water-cask. Having recovered these things, he was returning on board, when he was met by the Resolution's pin-\n COOKS VOYAGES.\nnace with five men in her, who, without any orders, had come\nfrom the observatories to his assistance. Being thus unexpectedly reinforced, he thought himself strong enough to insist upon\nhaving the thief, or the canoe which took him in, delivered up\nas reprisals. With that view he turned back; and having found\nthe canoe on the beach, he was preparing to launch it into the\nwater when Pareah made his appearance, and insisted upon\nhis not taking it away, as it was his property. The officer not\nregarding him, the chief seized upon him, pinioned his arms\nbehind, and held him by the hair of his head; on which one\nof the sailors struck him with an oar. Pareah instantly quitted\nthe officer, snatched the oar out of the man's hand, and snapped\nit in two across his knee. At length the multitude began to\nattack our people with stones. They made some resistance,\nbut were soon overpowered, and obliged to swim for safety to\nthe small cutter, which lay farther out than the pinnace. The\nofficers, not being expert swimmers, retreated to a small rock\nin the water, where they were closely pursued by the Indians.\nOne man darted a broken oar at the master; but his foot slipping at the time, he missed him, which fortunately saved that\nofficer's life. At last Pareah interfered and put an end to their\nviolence. The gentlemen, knowing that his presence was their\nonly defence against the fury of the natives, entreated him to\nstay with them till they could get off in the boats; but that he\nrefused, and left them. The master went to seek assistance\nfrom the party at the observatories; but the midshipman chose\nto remain in the pinnace. He was very rudely treated by the\nmob, who plundered the boat of everything that was loose on\nboard, and then began to knock her to pieces for the sake of\nthe iron-work; but Pareah fortunately returned in time to prevent her destruction. He had met the other gentleman on his\nway to the observatories, and, suspecting his errand, had forced\nhim to return. He dispersed the crowd again, and desired the\ngentlemen to return on board: they represented that all the\noars had been taken out of the boat; on which he brought\nsome of them back, and the gentlemen were glad to get off\nwithout farther molestation. They had not proceeded far,\nbefore they were overtaken by Pareah, in a canoe : he delivered\n COOKS VOYAGES.\n335\nthe midshipman's cap, which had been taken from him in the\nscuffle, joined noses with them, in token of reconciliation, and\nwas anxious to know if Captain Cook would kill him for what\nhad happened. They assured him of the contrary, and made\nsigns of friendship to him in return. He then left them and\npaddled over to the town of Kavaroah, and that was the last\ntime we ever saw him. Captain Cook returned on board soon\nafter, much displeased with the whole of this disagreeable business, and the same night sent a lieutenant on board the Discovery to learn the particulars of it, as it had originated in that\nship.\nIt was remarkable that in the midst of the hurry and confusion attending this affair, Kanynah (a chief who had always\nbeen on terms particularly friendly with us) came from the spot\nwhere it happened, with a hog to sell on board the Discovery;\nit was of an extraordinary large size, and he demanded for it a\npahowa, or dagger, of an unusual length. He pointed to us\nthat it must be as long as his arm. Captain Clerke not having\none of that length, told him he would get one made for him by\nthe morning; with which being satisfied, he left the hog, and\nwent ashore without making any stay with us. It will not be\naltogether foreign to the subject to mention a circumstance\nthat happened to-day on board the Resolution. An Indian\nchief asked Captain Cook, at his table, if he was a Tata Toa;\nwhich means a fighting man, or a soldier. Being answered in\nthe affirmative, he desired to see his wounds. Captain Cook\n' held out his right hand, which had a scar upon it, dividing the\nthumb from the finger, the whole length of the metacarpal.\nbones. The Indian, being thus convinced of his being a Toa,\nput the same question to another gentleman present, but he\nhappened to have none of those distinguishing marks; the chief\nthen said that he himself was a Toa, and showed the scars of\nsome wounds he had received in battle. Those who were on\nduty at the observatories were disturbed during the night with\nshrill and melancholy sounds, issuing from the adjacent villages,\nwhich they took to be the lamentations of the women. Perhaps\nthe quarrel between us might have filled their minds with apprehensions for the safety of their husbands; but be that as it\n 336\nCOOKS VOYAGES.\nmay, their mournful cries struck the sentinels with unusual awe\nand terror.\nI To widen the breach between us, some of the Indians in\nthe night took away the Discovery's large cutter, which lay\nswamped at the buoy of one of her anchors: they had carried\nher off so quietly that we did not miss her till the morning,\nSunday, February the 14th. Captain Clerke lost no time in\nwaiting upon Captain Cook to acquaint him with the accident:\nhe returned on board with orders for the launch and small\ncutter to go, under the command of the second lieutenant,\nand lie off the east point of the bay, in order to intercept all\ncanoes that might attempt to get out; and, if he found it necessary, to fire upon them. At the same time the third lieutenant\nof the Resolution, with the launch and small cutter, was sent on\nthe same service to the opposite point of the bay; and the\nmaster was despatched in the large cutter in pursuit of a double\ncanoe, already under sail, making the best of her way out of\nthe harbour. He soon came up with her, and by firing a few\nmuskets drove her on shore, and the Indians left her: this\nhappened to be the canoe of Omea, a man who bore the title\nof Orono. He was on board himself, and it would have been\nfortunate if our people had secured him, for his person was\nheld as sacred as that of the king. During this time Captain\nCook was preparing to go ashore himself, at the town of\nKavaroah, in order to secure the person of Kariopoo, before he\nshould have time to withdraw himself to another part of the\nisland, out of our reach. This appeared the most effectual step\nthat could be taken, on the present occasion, for the recovery\nof the boat. It was the measure he had invariably pursued, in\nsimilar cases, at other islands in these seas, and it had always\nbeen attended with the desired success: in fact, it would be\ndifficult to point out any other mode of proceeding on these\nemergencies likely to attain the object in view: we had reason\nto suppose that the king and his attendants had fled when the\nalarm was first given: in that case, it was Captain Cook's intention to secure the large canoes which were hauled up on the\nbeach. He left the ship about seven o'clock, attended by the\nlieutenant of marines, a sergeant, corporal, and seven private\n COOKS VOYAGES 337\nmen : the pinnace's crew were also armed, and under the command of Mr. Roberts. As they rowed towards the shore, Captain\nCook ordered the launch to leave her station at the west point\nof the bay, in order to assist his own boat. This is a circumstance worthy of notice; for it clearly shows that he was not\nunapprehensive of meeting with resistance from the natives, or\nunmindful of the necessary preparation for the safety of himself\nand his people. I will venture to say that, from the appearance\nof things just at that time, there was not one beside himself\nwho judged that such precaution was absolutely requisite: so\nlittle did his conduct on the occasion bear the marks of rashness, or a precipitate selfconfideace! He landed, with the\nmarines, at the upper end of the town of Kavaroah: the Indians\nimmediately flocked round, as usual, and showed him the customary marks of respect, by prostrating themselves before him.\u2014\nThere were no signs of hostilities, or much alarm among them.\nCaptain Cook, however, did not seem willing to trust to appearances; but was particularly attentive to the disposition of the\nmarines, and to have them kept clear of the crowd. He first inquired for the king's sons, two youths who were much attached\nto him, and generally his companions on board. Messengers\nbeing sent for them, they soon came to him, and informing him\nthat their father was asleep at a house not far from them, he\naccompanied them thither, and took the marines along with\nthem. As he passed along the natives everywhere prostrated\nthemselves before him, and seemed to have lost no part of that\nrespect they had always shown to his person. He was joined\nby several chiefs, among whom was Kanynah, and his brother\nKoohowrooah. They kept the crowd in order, according to\ntheir usual custom; and, being ignorant of his intention in\ncoming on shore, frequently asked him if he wanted any hogs,\nor other provisions: he told them that he did not, and that his\nbusiness was to see the king. When he arrived at the house,\nhe ordered some of the Indians to go in and inform Kariopoo\nthat he waited without to speak with him. They came out two\nor three times, and instead of returning any answer from the\nking, presented some pieces of red cloth to him, which made\nCaptain Cook suspect that he was not in the house; he there-\nz\n COOK'S VOYAGES.\nfore desired the lieutenant of marines to go in. The lieutenant\nfound the old man just awaked from sleep, and seemingly\nalarmed at the message; but he came out without hesitation.\nCaptain Cook took him by the hand, and in a friendly manner\nasked him to go on board, to which he very readily consented.\nThus far matters appeared in a favourable train, and the natives\ndid not seem much alarmed or apprehensive of hostility on our\nside : at which Captain Cook expressed himself a little surprised,\nsaying that as the inhabitants of the town appeared innocent of\nstealing the cutter, he should not molest them, but that he must\nget the king on board. Kariopoo sat down before his door, and\nwas surrounded by a great crowd: Kanynah and his brother\nwere both very active in keeping order among them. In a little\ntime, however, the Indians were observed arming themselves\nwith long spears, clubs, and daggers, and putting on thick mats,\nwhich they use as armour. This hostile appearance increased,\nand became more alarming on the arrival of two men in a canoe\nfrom the opposite side of the bay, with the news of a chief\ncalled Kareemoo having been killed by one of the Discovery's\nboats. In their passage across they had also delivered this\naccount to each of the ships. Upon that information the\nwomen, who were sitting upon the beach at their breakfasts,\nand conversing familiarly with our people in the boats, retired,\nand a confused murmur spread through the crowd. An old\npriest came to Captain Cook, with a cocoa-nut in his hand,\nwhich he held out to him as a present, at the same time singing\nvery loud. He was often desired to be silent, but in vain : he\ncontinued importunate and troublesome, and there was no such\nthing as getting rid of him or his noise: it seemed as if he\nmeant to divert their attention from his countrymen, who were\ngrowing more tumultuous, and arming themselves in every\nquarter. Captain Cook, being at the same time surrounded by\na great crowd, thought his situation rather hazardous : he therefore ordered the lieutenant of marines to march his small party\nto the waterside, where the boats lay within a few yards of the\nshore : the Indians readily made a lane for them to pass, and\ndid not offer to interrupt them. The distance they had to go\nmight be about fifty or sixty yards; Captain Cook followed,\n COOK'S VOYAGES.\n339\nhaving hold of Kariopoo's hand, who accompanied him very\nwillingly: he was attended by his wife, two sons, and several\nchiefs. The troublesome old priest followed, making the same\nsavage noise. Keowa, the youngest son, went directly into the\npinnace, expecting his father to follow; but just as he arrived\nat the waterside, his wife threw her arms about his neck, and,\nwith the assistance of two chiefs, forced him to sit down by the\nside of a double canoe. Captain Cook expostulated with them,\nbut to no purpose : they would not suffer the king to proceed,\ntelling him that he would be put to death if he went on board\nthe ship. Kariopoo, whose conduct seemed entirely resigned\nto the will of others, hung down his head, and appeared much\ndistressed.\n\" While the king was in this situation, a chief, well known to\nus, of the name of Coho, was observed lurking near with an\niron dagger, partly concealed under his cloak, seemingly with\nthe intention of stabbing Captain Cook or the lieutenant of\nmarines. The latter proposed to fire at him, but Captain Cook\nwould not permit it. Coho closing upon them obliged the\nofficer to strike him with his piece, which made him retire.\nAnother Indian laid hold of the sergeant's musket and endeavoured to wrench it from him, but was prevented by the lieutenant's making a blow at him. Captain Cook, seeing the\ntumult increase arid the Indians growing more daring and\nresolute, observed that if he were to take the king off by force\nhe could not do it without sacrificing the lives of many of his\npeople. He then paused a little, and was on the point of giving\nhis orders to re-embark, when a man threw a stone at him;\nwhich he returned with a discharge of small shot (with which\none barrel of his double piece was loaded). The man, having\na thick mat before him, received little or no hurt: he brandished his spear and threatened to dart it at Captain Cook,\nwho, being still unwilling to take away his life, instead of firing\nwith ball knocked him down with his musket. He expostulated strongly with the most forward of the crowd upon their\nturbulent behaviour. He had given up all thoughts of getting\nthe king on board, as it appeared impracticable; and his care\nwas then only to act on the defensive, and to secure a safe\n COOKS VOYAGES.\nembarkation for his small party, which was closely pressed by\na body of several thousand people. Keowa, the king's son,\nwho was in the pinnace, being alarmed on hearing the first\nfiring, was, at his own entreaty, put on shore again; for even\nat that time Mr. Roberts, who commanded her, did not apprehend that Captain Cook's person was in any danger : otherwise\nhe would have detained the prince, which, no doubt, would\nhave been a great check on the Indians. One man was observed\nbehind a double canoe, in the action of darting his spear at\nCaptain Cook, who was forced to fire at him in his own defence,\nbut happened to kill another close to him, equally forward in\nthe tumult: the sergeant observing that he had missed the\nman he aimed at received orders to fire at him, which he did,\nand killed him. By this time the impetuosity of the Indians\nwas somewhat repressed; they fell back in a body and seemed\nstaggered: but being pushed on by those behind, they returned\nto the charge and poured a volley of stones among the marines,\nwho, without waiting for orders, returned it with a general discharge of musketry, which was instantly followed by a fire from\nthe boats. At this Captain Cook was heard to express his\nastonishment: he waved his hand to the boats, called to them\nto cease firing, and to come nearer in to receive the marines.\nMr. Roberts immediately brought the pinnace as close to the\nshore as he could, without grounding, notwithstanding the\nshowers of stones that fell among the people: but , the\nlieutenant, who commanded in the launch, instead of pulling\nin to the assistance of Captain Cook, withdrew his boat farther\noff, at the moment that everything seems to have depended\nupon the timely exertions of those in the boats. By his own\naccount he mistook the signal: but be that as it may, this circumstance appears to me to have decided the fatal turn of the\naffair, and to have removed every chance which remained with\nCaptain Cook of escaping with his life. The business of saving\nthe marines out of the water, in consequence of that, fell altogether upon the pinnace; which thereby became so much\ncrowded that the crew were, in a great measure, prevented\nfrom using their fire-arms, or giving what assistance they otherwise mig ht have done to Captain Cook; so that he seems,\n COOKS VOYAGES.\n341\nat the most critical point of time, to have wanted the assistance\nof both boats, owing to the removal of the launch. For notwithstanding that they kept up a fire on the crowd, from the\nsituation to which they removed in that boat, the fatal confusion which ensued on her being withdrawn, to say the least\nof it, must have prevented the full effect that the prompt cooperation of the two boats, according to Captain Cook's orders,\nmust have had towards the preservation of himself and his\npeople.1 At that time it was to the boats alone that Captain\nCook had to look for his safety; for when the marines had\nfired, the Indians rushed among them and forced them into\nthe water, where four of them were killed: their lieutenant was\nwounded, but fortunately escaped and was taken up by the\npinnace. Captain Cook was then the only one remaining on\nthe rock: he was observed making for the pinnace, holding his\nleft hand against the back of his head, to guard it from the\nstones, and carrying his musket under the other arm. An\nIndian was seen following him, but with caution and timidity;\nfor he stopped once or twice, as if undetermined to proceed.\nAt last he advanced upon him unawares, and with a large club,\nor common stake, gave him a blow on the back of the head,\nand then precipitately retreated. The stroke seemed to have\nstunned Captain Cook: he staggered a few paces, then fell on\nhis hand and one knee, and dropped his musket. As he was\nrising, and before he could recover his feet, another Indian\nstabbed him in the back of the neck with an iron dagger. He\nthen fell into a bit of water about knee deep, where others\ncrowded upon him and endeavoured to keep him under: but\nstruggling very strongly with them he got his head up, and\ncasting his look towards the pinnace, seemed to solicit assistance. Though the boat was not above five or six yards distant\nfrom him, yet from the crowded and confused state of the crew,\nit seems it was not in their power to save him. The Indians\n1 I have been informed on the best authority that, in the opinion of\nCaptain Philips, who commanded the marines, and whose judgment must\nbe of the greatest weight, it is extremely doubtful whether anything could\nsuccessfully have been done to preserve the life of Captain Cook, even if no\nmistake had been committed on the part of the launch.\n 342\nCOOKS VOYAGES.\ngot him under again, but in deeper water: he was, however,\nable to get his head up once more, and being almost spent in\nthe struggle, he naturally turned to the rock, and was endeavouring to support himself by it, when a savage gave him a\nblow with a club, and he was seen alive no more. They hauled\nhim up lifeless on the rocks, where they seemed to take a\nsavage pleasure in using every barbarity to his dead body,\nsnatching the daggers out of each other's hands, to have the\nhorrid satisfaction of piercing the fallen victim of their barbarous\nrage.\n\" I need make no reflection on the great loss we suffered on\nthis occasion, or attempt to describe what we felt. It is enough\nto say that no man was ever more beloved or admired: and it\nis truly painful to reflect that he seems to have fallen a sacrifice\nmerely for want of being properly supported; a fate singularly\nto be lamented as having fallen to his lot, who had ever been\nconspicuous for his care of those under his command, and who\nseemed, to the last, to pay as much attention to their preservation as to that of his own life.\n\" If anything could have added to the shame and indignation\nuniversally felt on this occasion, it was to find that his remains\nhad been deserted, and left exposed on the beach, although\nthey might have been brought off. It appears, from the information of four or five midshipmen, who arrived on the spot at\nthe conclusion of the fatal business, that the beach was then\nalmost entirely deserted by the Indians, who at length had\ngiven way to the fire of the boats, and dispersed through the\ntown: so that there seemed no great obstacle to prevent the\nrecovery of Captain Cook's body; but the lieutenant returned\non board without making the attempt. It is unnecessary to\ndwell longer on this painful subject, and to relate the complaints and censures that fell on the conduct of the lieutenant.\nIt will be sufficient to observe that they were so loud as to\noblige Captain Clerke publicly to notice them, and to take the\ndepositions of his accusers down in writing. The captain's bad\nstate of health and approaching dissolution, it is supposed,\ninduced him to destroy these papers a short time before his\ndeath.\n COOK'S VOYAGES.\n343\n\" It is a painful task to be obliged to notice circumstances\nwhich seem to reflect upon the character of any man. A strict\nregard to truth, however, compelled me to the insertion of these\nfacts, which I have offered merely as facts, without presuming\nto connect with them any comment of my own : esteeming it\nthe part of a faithful historian, ' to extenuate nothing, nor set\ndown aught in malice.'\n\" The fatal accident happened at eight o'clock in the morning, about an hour after Captain Cook landed. It did not\nseem that the king, or his sons, were witnesses to it: but it is\nsupposed that they withdrew in the midst of the tumult. The\nprincipal actors were the other chiefs, many of them the king's \u2022\nrelations and attendants: the man who stabbed him with the\ndagger was called Nooah. I happened to be the only one who\nrecollected his person, from having on a former occasion mentioned his name in the journal I kept. I was induced to take\nparticular notice of him, more from his personal appearance\nthan any other consideration, though he was of high rank, and\na near relation of the king : he was stout and tall, with a fierce\nlook and demeanour, and one who united in his figure the two\nqualities of strength and agility, in a greater degree than ever I\nremembered to have seen before in any other man. His age\nmight be about thirty, and by the white scurf on his skin, and\nhis sore eyes, he appeared to be a hard drinker of kava. He\nwas a constant companion of the king, with whom I first saw\nhim, when he paid a visit to Captain Clerke. The chief who\nfirst struck Captain Cook with the club was called Karimano,\ncraha, but I did not know him by his name. These circumstances I learned of honest Kaireekea, the priest; who added,\nthat they were both held in great esteem on account of that\naction: neither of them came near us afterward. When the\nboats left the shore, the Indians carried away the dead body of\nCaptain Cook and those of the marines, to the rising ground\nat the back of the town, where we could plainly see them with\nour glasses from the ships.\nThis most melancholy accident appears to have been altogether unexpected and unforeseen, as well on the part of the\nnatives as ourselves. I never saw sufficient reason to induce\n 344\nCOOK'S VOYAGES.\nme to believe that there was anything of design, or a preconcerted plan on their side, or that they purposely sought to\nquarrel with us: thieving, which gave rise to the whole, they\nwere equally guilty of in our first and second visits. It was the\ncause of every misunderstanding that happened between us :\ntheir petty thefts were generally overlooked, but sometimes\nslightly punished; the boat which they at last ventured to take\naway was an object of no small magnitude to people in our\nsituation, who could not possibly replace her, and therefore not\nslightly to be given up. We had no other chance of recovering\nher but by getting the person of the king into our possession:\non our attempting to do that the natives became alarmed for\nhis safety, and naturally opposed those whom they deemed his\nenemies. In the sudden conflict that ensued, we had the unspeakable misfortune of losing our excellent commander, in the\nmanner already related. It is in this light the affair has always\nappeared to me, as entirely accidental, and not in the least\nowing to any previous offence received, or jealousy of our second\nvisit entertained by the natives.\n\"Pareah seems to have been the principal instrument in\nbringing about this fatal disaster. We learned afterward that it\nwas he who had employed some people to steal the boat: the\nking did not seem to be privy to it, or even apprized of what\nhad happened, till Captain Cook landed.\n| It was generally remarked that at first the Indians showed\ngreat resolution in facing our fire-arms; but it was entirely\nowing to ignorance of their effect. They thought that their\nthick mats would defend them from a ball as well as from a\nstone; but being soon convinced of their error, yet still at a\nloss to account how such execution was done among them,\nthey had recourse to a stratagem which, though it answered no\nother purpose, served to show their ingenuity and quickness of\ninvention. Observing the flashes of the muskets, they naturally concluded that water would counteract their effect, and\ntherefore very sagaciously dipped their mats, or armour, in the\nsea, just as they came on to face our people: but finding this\nlast resource to fail them, they soon dispersed, and left the\nbeach entirely clear. It was an object they never neglected,\n COOKS VOYAGES.\n345\neven at the greatest hazard, to carry off their slain; a custom\nprobably owing to the barbarity with which they treat the dead\nbody of an enemy, and the trophies they make of his bones.\"\nIn consequence of this barbarity of disposition, the whole remains of Captain Cook could not be recovered. For though\nevery exertion was made for that purpose, though negotiations\nand threatenings were alternately employed, little more than\nthe principal part of his bones (and that with great difficulty)\ncould be procured. By the possession of them, our navigators\nwere enabled to perform the last offices to their eminent and\nunfortunate commander. The bones having been put into a\ncoffin, and the service being read over them, were committed\nto the deep, on the 21st, with the usual military honours. What\nwere the feelings of the companies of both the ships, on this\noccasion, must be left to the world to conceive; for those who\nwere present know that it is not in the power of any pen to express them.\nA promotion of officers followed the decease of Captain\nCook. Captain Clerke having succeeded of course to the\ncommand of the expedition, removed on board the Resolution.\nBy him Mr. Gore was appointed captain of the Discovery, and\nthe rest of the lieutenants obtained an addition of rank, in their\nproper order. Mr. Harvey, a midshipman, who had been in\nthe last as well as the present voyage, was promoted to the\nvacant lieutenancy.\nNot long after Captain Cook's death an event occurred in\nEurope which had a particular relation to the voyage of our\nnavigator, and which was so honourable to himself, and to the\ngreat nation from whom it proceeded, that it is no small pleasure to me to be able to lay the transaction somewhat at large\nbefore my readers. What I refer to is the letter which was\nissued, on the 19th of March, 1779, by M. Sartine, secretary of\nthe marine department at Paris, and sent to all the commanders\nof French ships. The rescript was as follows : \" Captain Cook,\nwho sailed from Plymouth in July, 1776, on board the Resolution, in company with the Discovery, Captain Clerke, in order\nto make some discoveries on the coasts, islands, and seas of\nJapan and California, being on the point of returning to Europe,\n 346\nCOOK'S VOYAGES.\nand such discoveries being of general utility to all nations, it is\nthe king's pleasure that Captain Cook shall be treated as a\ncommander of a neutral and allied power, and that all captains\nof armed vessels, &c, who may meet that famous navigator, shall\nmake him acquainted with the king's orders on this behalf, but\nat the same time let him know that on his part he must refrain\nfrom all hostilities.\" By the Marquis of Condorcet we are\ninformed that this measure originated in the liberal and enlightened mind of that excellent citizen and statesman, M.\nTurgot. \" When war,\" says the marquis, \" was declared between France and England, M. Turgot saw how honourable it\nwould be to the French nation that the vessel of Captain Cook\nshould be treated with respect at sea. He composed a memorial, in which he proved that honour, reason, and even interest, dictated this act of respect for humanity; and it was in\nconsequence of this memorial, the author of which was unknown\nduring his life, that an order was given not to treat as an enemy,\nthe common benefactor of every European nation.\"\nWhilst great praise is due to M. Turgot for having suggested\nthe adoption of a measure which hath contributed so much to\nthe reputation of the French government, it must not be forgotten that the first thought of such a plan of conduct was\nprobably owing to Dr. Benjamin Franklin. Thus much at\nleast is certain, that this eminent philosopher, when ambassador at Paris from the United States of America, preceded the\ncourt of France in issuing a similar requisition; a copy of which\ncannot fail of being acceptable to the reader.\n1 To all Captains and Commanders of armed Ships acting by\nCommission from the Congress of the United States of\nAmerica, now in war with Great Britain.\n\" Gentlemen,\n\"A ship having been fitted out from England before the\ncommencement of this war, to make discoveries of new countries in unknown seas, under the conduct of that most celebrated navigator and discoverer Captain Cook; an undertaking\ntruly laudable in itself, as the increase of geographical knowledge facilities the communication between distant nations, in\n COOK'S VOYAGES.\n347\nthe exchange of useful products and manufactures, and the\nextension of arts, whereby the common enjoyments of human\nlife are multiplied and augmented, and science of other kinds\nincreased, to the benefit of mankind in general\u2014This is therefore most earnestly to recommend to every one of you, that in\ncase the said ship, which is now expected to be soon in the\nEuropean seas on her return, should happen to fall into your\nhands, you would not consider her as an enemy, nor suffer any\nplunder to be made of the effects contained in her, nor obstruct\nher immediate return to England, by detaining her, or sending\nher into any other part of Europe, or to America; but that you\nwould treat the said Captain Cook and his people with all civility and kindness, affording them, as common friends to mankind, all the assistance in your power, which they may happen\nto stand in need of. In so doing you will not only gratify the\ngenerosity of your own dispositions, but there is no doubt of\nyour obtaining the approbation of the Congress, and your other\nAmerican owners.\n\" I have the honour to be, Gentlemen,\n\"Your most obedient, humble servant,\nB. Franklin,\n\" Minister Plenipotentiary from the Congress of\nthe United States, at the Court of France.\n\"At Passy, near Paris, this ioth day of March, 1779.\"\nIt is observable that as Dr. Franklin acted on his own authority, he could only earnestly recommend to the commanders\nof American armed vessels not to consider Captain Cook as an\nenemy; and it is somewhat remarkable that he mentions no\nmore than one ship; Captain Clerke not being noticed in the\nrequisition. In the confidence which the doctor expressed, with\nrespect to the approbation of Congress, he happened to be\nmistaken. As the members of that assembly, at least with regard\nto the greater part of them, were not possessed of minds equally\nenlightened with that of their ambassador, he was not supported\nby his masters in this noble act of humanity, of love to science\nand of liberal policy. The orders he had given were instantly\nreversed; and it was directed by Congress that especial care\n COOKS VOYAGES.\nshould be taken to seize Captain Cook, if an opportunity of\ndoing it occurred. All this proceeded from a false notion that\nit would be injurious to the United States for the English to\nobtain a knowledge of the opposite coast of America.\nThe conduct of the court of Spain was regulated by similar\nprinciples of jealousy. It was apprehended by that court, that\nthere was reason to be cautious of granting, too easily, an indulgence to Captain Cook; since it was not certain what mischiefs might ensue to the Spaniards from a northern passage to\ntheir American dominions. M. de Belluga, a Spanish gentleman\nand officer, of a liberal and a philosophical turn of mind, and\nwho was a member of the Royal Society of London, endeavoured\nto prevail upon the Count of Florida Blanca and M. d'Almo-\ndaver to grant an order of protection to the Resolution and\nDiscovery; and he flattered himself that the ministers of the\nKing of Spain would be prevailed upon to prefer the cause of\nscience to the partial views of interest: but the Spanish government was not capable of rising to so enlarged and magnanimous\na plan of policy. To the French nation alone, therefore, was\nreserved the honour of setting an example of wisdom and humanity which, I trust, will not hereafter be so uncommon in\nthe history of mankind.\nThe progress of the voyage, after the decease of Captain\nCook, doth not fall within the design of the present narrative.1\n1 The particulars of the voyage, after the death of Captain Cook, of\nwhich it did not fall under Dr. Kippis's plan to give a narrative, will be\nfound in the Appendix.\n CHAPTER VII.\nCHARACTER OF CAPTAIN COOK.\u2014EFFECTS OF HIS VOYAGES.\u2014TESTIMONIES OF APPLAUSE.\u2014COMMEMORATIONS OF HIS SERVICES.\u2014\nREGARD PAID TO HIS FAMILY.\u2014CONCLUSION.\nROM the relation that has been given of Captain\nCook's course of life, and of the important events\nin which he was engaged, my readers cannot be\nstrangers to his general character. This, therefore,\nmight be left to be collected from his actions,\nwhich are the best exhibitions of the great qualities of his mind.\nBut, perhaps, were I not to endeavour to afford a summary view\nof him in these respects, I might be thought to fail in that duty\nwhich I owe to the public on the present occasion.\nIt cannot, I think, be denied that genius belonged to Captain\nCook in an eminent degree. By genius I do not here understand imagination merely, or that power of culling the flowers\nof fancy which poetry delights in; but an inventive mind; a\nmind full of resources ; and which, by its own native vigour, can\nsuggest noble objects of pursuit, and the most effectual methods\nof attaining them. This faculty was possessed by our navigator\nin its full energy, as is evident from the uncommon sagacity and\npenetration which he discovered in a vast variety of critical and\ndifficult situations.\nTo genius Captain Cook added application, without which\nnothing very valuable or permanent can be accomplished, even\nby the brightest capacity. For an unremitting attention to whatever related to his profession he was distinguished in early life.\nIn every affair that was undertaken by him, his assiduity was\n 350\nCOOKS VOYAGES.\nwithout interruption and without abatement. Wherever he\ncame he suffered nothing, which was fit for a seamen to knOw\nor to practise, to pass unnoticed, or to escape his diligence.\nThe genius and application of Captain Cook were followed\nby a large extent of knowledge; a knowledge which, besides a\nconsummate acquaintance with, navigation, comprehended a\nnumber of other sciences. In this respect the ardour of his\nmind rose above the disadvantages of a very confined education.\nHis progress in the different branches of the mathematics, and\nparticularly in astronomy, became so eminent that, at length,\nhe was able to take the lead in making the necessary observations of this kind, in the course of his voyages. He attained\nlikewise to such a degree of proficiency in general learning, and\nthe art of composition, as to be able to express himself with a\nmanly clearness and propriety, and to become respectable as\nthe narrator, as well as the performer, of great actions.\nAnother thing strikingly conspicuous in Captain Cook, was\nthe perseverance with which he pursued the noble objects to\nwhich his life was devoted. This, indeed, was a most distinguished feature in his character: in this he scarcely ever had\nan equal, and never a superior. Nothing could divert him from\nthe points he aimed at; and he persisted in the prosecution of\nthem, through difficulties and obstructions, which would have\ndeterred minds of very considerable strength and firmness.\nWhat enabled him to persevere in all his mighty undertakings\nwas the invincible fortitude of his spirit. Of this instances\nwithout number occur in the accounts of his expeditions; two\nof which I shall take the liberty of recalling to the attention of my\nreaders. The first is the undaunted magnanimity with which he\nprosecuted his discoveries along the whole south-east coast of\nNew Holland. Surrounded as he was with the greatest possible\ndangers, arising from the perpetual succession of rocks, shoals,\nand breakers, and having a ship that was almost shaken to\npieces by repeated perils, his vigorous mind had a regard to\nnothing but what he thought was required of him by his duty\nto the public. It will not be easy to find, in the history of\nnavigation, a parallel example of courageous exertion. The\nother circumstance I would refer to is the boldness with which,\n!\n COOK'S VOYAGES. 351\nin his second voyage after he left the Cape of Good Hope, he\npushed forward into unknown seas, and penetrated through innumerable mountains and islands of ice, in the search of a southern\ncontinent It was like launching into chaos: all was obscurity,\nall was darkness before him; and no event can be compared\nwith it, excepting the sailing of Magelhaens, from the straits\nwhich bear his name, into the Pacific Ocean.\nThe fortitude of Captain Cook, being founded upon reason,\nand not upon instinct, was not an impetuous valour, but accompanied with complete self-possession. He was master of\nhimself on every trying occasion, and seemed to be the more\ncalm and collected the greater was the exigence of the case.\nIn the most perilous situations, when our commander had\ngiven the proper directions concerning what was to be done\nwhile he went to rest, he could sleep, during the hours he had\nallotted to himself, with perfect composure and soundness.\nNothing could be a surer indication of an elevated mind; of a\nmind that was entirely satisfied with itself and the measures it\nhad taken.\nTo all these great qualities Captain Cook added the most\namiable virtues. That it was impossible for any one to excel\nhim in humanity, is apparent from his treatment of his men\nthrough all his voyages, and from his behaviour to the natives\nof the countries which were discovered by him. The health,\nthe convenience, and, as far as it could be admitted, the enjoyment of the seamen, were the constant objects of his attention;\nand he was anxiously solicitous to ameliorate the condition\nvisited. With regard to their thieveries, he candidly apologized\nfor, and overlooked many offences which others would have\nsharply punished; and when he was laid under an indispensable necessity of proceeding to any acts of severity, he never\nexerted them without feeling much reluctance and concern.\nIn the private relations of life Captain Cook was entitled to\nhigh commendation. He was excellent as a husband and a\nfather, and sincere and steady in his friendships; and to this\nit may be added, that he possessed that general sobriety and\nvirtue of character which will always be found to constitute\n 352\nCOOKS VOYAGES.\nthe best security and ornament of every other moral qualification.\nWith the greatest benevolence and humanity of dispostion,\nCaptain Cook was occasionally subject to a hastiness of temper.\nThis, which has been exaggerated by the few (and they are\nindeed few) who are unfavourable to his memory, is acknowledged by his friends. It is mentioned both by Captain King\nand Mr. Samwell, in their delineations of his character. Mr.\nHayley, in one of his poems, calls him the mild Cook; but,\nperhaps, that is not the happiest epithet which could have been\napplied to him. Mere mildness can scarcely be considered as\nthe most prominent and distinctive feature in the mind of a\nman whose powers of understanding and of action were so\nstrong and elevated, who had such immense difficulties to\nstruggle with, and who must frequently have been called to the\nfirmest exertions of authority and command.\nLastly, Captain Cook was distinguished by a property which\nis almost universally the concomitant of truly great men, and\nthat is a simplicity of manners. In conversation he was unaffected and unassuming; rather backward in pushing discourse, but obliging and communicative in his answers to those\nwho addressed him for the purposes of information. It was\nnot possible that, in a mind constituted like his, such a paltry\nquality as vanity could find an existence.\nIn this imperfect delineation of Captain Cook's character I\nhave spoken of him in a manner which is fully justified by the\nwhole course of his life and actions, and which is perfectly\nagreeable to the sentiments of those who were the most nearly\nconnected with him in the habits of intimacy and friendship.\nThe pictures which some of them have drawn of him, though\nthey have already been presented to the public, cannot here\nwith propriety be omitted. Captain King has expressed himself concerning him in the following terms : \" The constitution\nof his body was robust, inured to labour, and capable of undergoing the severest hardships. His stomach bore, without difficulty, the coarsest and most ungrateful food; great was the\nindifference with which he submitted to every kind of self-\ndenial. The qualities of his mind were of the same hardy,\n COOK'S VOYAGES.\n353\nvigorous kind with those of his body. His understanding was\nstrong and perspicacious. His judgment, in whatever related\nto the services he was engaged in, quick and sure. His designs\nwere bold and manly, and, both in the conception and in the\nmode of execution, bore evident marks of a great original genius. His courage was cool and determined, and accompanied\nwith an admirable presence of mind in the moment of danger.\nHis temper might perhaps have been justly blamed, as subject\nto hastiness and passion, had not these been disarmed by a\ndisposition the most benevolent and humane.\n| Such were the outlines of Captain Cook's character; but\nits most distinguishing feature was that unremitting perseverance\nin the pursuit of his object, which was not only superior to the\nopposition of dangers and the pressure of hardships, but even\nexempt from the want of ordinary relaxation. During the long\nand tedious voyages in which he was engaged, his eagerness\nand activity were never in the least abated. No incidental\ntemptation could detain him for a moment; even those intervals of recreation which sometimes unavoidably occurred,\nand were looked for by us with a longing, that persons who\nhave experienced the fatigues of service will readily excuse,\nwere submitted to by him with a certain impatience, whenever\nthey could not be employed in making a farther provision for\nthe more effectual prosecution of his designs.\"\n\"The character of Captain Cook,\" says Mr. Samwell, \"will be\nbest exemplified by the services he has performed, which are\nuniversally known, and have ranked his name above that of\nany navigator of ancient or of modern times. Nature had endowed him with a mind vigorous and comprehensive, which in\nhis riper years he had cultivated with care and industry. His\ngeneral knowledge was extensive and various: in that of his\nown profession he was unequalled. With a clear judgment,\nstrong masculine sense, and the most determined resolution;\nwith a genius peculiarly turned for enterprise, he pursued his\nobject with unshaken perseverance:\u2014vigilant and active in an\neminent degree; cool and intrepid among dangers; patient\nand firm under difficulties and distress; fertile in expedients;\ngreat and original in all his designs; active and resolved in\nA a\n B\n354 CHARACTER OF\ncarrying them into execution. These qualities rendered him\nthe animating spirit of the expedition: in every situation he\nstood unrivalled and alone; on him all eyes were turned; he\nwas our leading star, which, at its setting, left us involved in\ndarkness and despair.\n\" His constitution was strong, his mode of living temperate.\nHe was a modest man, and rather bashful; of an agreeable,\nlively conversation, sensible and intelligent. In his temper he\nwas somewhat hasty, but of a disposition the most friendly,\nbenevolent, and humane. His person was above six feet high,\nand though a good-looking man, he was plain, both in address\nand appearance. His head was small; his hair, which was a\ndark brown, he wore tied behind. His face was full of expression ; his nose exceedingly well shaped; his eyes, which were\nsmall and of a brown cast, were quick and piercing; his eyebrows prominent, which gave his countenance altogether an air\nof austerity.\n\"He was beloved by his people, who looked up to him as\nto a father, and obeyed his commands with alacrity. The confidence we placed in him was unremitting; our admiration of\nhis great talents unbounded, our esteem for his good qualities\naffectionate and sincere.\t\nI He was remarkably distinguished for the activity of his\nmind; it was that which enabled him to pay an unwearied\nattention to every object of the service. The strict economy\nhe observed in the expenditure of the ship's stores, and the\nunremitting care he employed for the'preservation of the health\nof his people, were the causes that enabled him to prosecute\ndiscoveries in remote parts of the globe for such a length of\ntime as had been deemed impracticable by former navigators.\nThe method he discovered for preserving the health of seamen\nin long voyages will transmit his name to posterity as the\nfriend and benefactor of mankind : the success which attended\nit afforded this truly great man more satisfaction than the distinguished fame that attended his discoveries.\nI England has been unanimous in her tribute of applause to\nhis virtues, and all Europe has borne testimony to his merit.\nThere is hardly a corner of the earth, however remote and\n CAPTAIN COOK.\n355\nsavage, that will not long remember his benevolence and humanity. The grateful Indian, in time to come, pointing to the\nherds grazing his fertile plains, will relate to his children how\nthe first stock of them was introduced into the country; and\nthe name of Cook will be remembered among those benign\nspirits whom they worship as the source of every good, and the\nfountain of every blessing.\"\nAt the conclusion of the Introduction to the Voyage to the\nPacific Ocean is an eulogium on Captain Cook, drawn up by\none of his own profession, of whom it is said that he is not\nmore distinguished by the elevation of rank than by the dignity\nof private virtues. Though this excellent eulogium must be\nknown to many, and perhaps to most of my readers, they will\nnot be displeased at having the greater part of it brought to\ntheir recollection.\n\" Captain James Cook possessed,\" says the writer, \"in an\neminent degree, \u2022 all the qualifications requisite for his profession and great undertakings; together with the amiable and\nworthy qualities of the best men.\n\"Cool and deliberate in judging: sagacious in determining:\nactive in executing: steady and persevering in enterprising,\nfrom vigilance and unremitting caution: unsubdued by labour,\ndifficulties, and disappointments: fertile in expedients: never\nwanting presence of mind; always possessing himself, and the\nfull use of a sound understanding.\n\" Mild, just, but exact in discipline : he was a father to his\npeople, who were attached to him from affection, and obedient\nfrom confidence.\n\" His knowledge, his experience, his sagacity, rendered him\nso entirely master of his subject, that the greatest obstacles\nwere surmounted, and the most dangerous navigations became\neasy, and almost safe, under his direction.\n\" By his benevolent and unabating attention to the welfare\nof his ship's company, he discovered and introduced a system\nfor the preservation of the health of seamen in long voyages,\nwhich has proved wonderfully efficacious.\n\" The death of this eminent and valuable man was a loss to\nmankind in general; and particularly to be deplored by every\n CHARACTER OF\nnation that respects useful accomplishments, that honours science,\nand loves the benevolent and amiable affections of the heart.\nIt is still more to be deplored by this country, which may\njustly boast of having produced a man hitherto unequalled for\nnautical talents; and that sorrow is farther aggravated by the\nreflection that his country was deprived of this ornament by\nthe enmity of a people from whom, indeed, it might have been\ndreaded, but from whom it was not deserved. For, actuated\nalways by the most attentive care and tender compassion for\nthe savages in general, this excellent man was ever assiduously\nendeavouring, by kind treatment, to dissipate their fears and\ncourt their friendship; overlooking their thefts and treacheries,\nand frequently interposing, at the hazard of his life, to protect\nthem from the sudden resentment of his own injured people.\t\n\" Traveller! contemplate, admire, revere, and emulate this\ngreat master in his profession; whose skill and labours have\nenlarged natural philosophy; have extended nautical science;\nand have disclosed the long concealed and admirable arrangements of the Almighty in the formation of this globe, and, at\nthe same time, the arrogance of mortals, in presuming to\naccount, by their speculations, for the laws by which he was\npleased to create it. It is now discovered, beyond all doubt,\nthat the same great Being who created the universe by ~H.is fat,\nby the same ordained our earth to keep a just poise, without a\ncorresponding southern continent, and it does so. He stretches\nout the north over the empty place, and hangeth the earth upon\nJob xxvi. 7.\nI If the arduous but exact researches of this extraordinary\nman have not discovered a new world, they have discovered\nseas unnavigated and unknown before. They have made us\nacquainted with islands, people, and productions of which we\nhad no conception. And if he has not been so fortunate as\nAmericus, to give his name to a continent, his pretensions to\nsuch a distinction remain unrivalled; and he will be revered\nwhile there remains a page of his own modest account of his\nvoyages, and as long as mariners and geographers shall be\ninstructed, by his new map of the southern hemisphere, to trace\nthe various courses and discoveries he has made.\n CAPTAIN COOK.\n357\n\" If public services merit public acknowledgments; if the\nman who adorned and raised the fame of his country is deserving of honours, then Captain Cook deserves to have a\nmonument raised to his memory by a generous and grateful\nnation.\n\" f Virtutis uberrimum alimentum est honos.'\n\" Val. Maximus, lib. ii. cap. 6.\"\nThe last character I shall here insert of Captain Cook comes\nfrom a learned writer, who, in consequence of some disagreements which are understood to have subsisted between him and\nour great navigator, cannot be suspected of intending to celebrate him in the language of flattery. Dr. Reinhold Forster,\nhaving given a short account of the captain's death, adds as\nfollows : \" Thus fell this truly glorious and justly admired navigator. If we consider his extreme abilities, both natural and\nacquired, the firmness and constancy of his mind, his truly paternal care for the crew intrusted to him, the amiable manner\nwith which he knew how to gain the friendship of all the savage\nand uncultivated nations, and even his conduct towards his\nfriends and acquaintance, we must acknowledge him to have\nbeen one of the greatest men of his age, and that reason justifies the tear which friendship pays to his memory.\" After such\nan encomium on Captain Cook, less regard may justly be paid\nto the deductions from it, which are added by Dr. Forster.\nWhat he hath said concerning the captain's temper seems to\nhave received a tincture of exaggeration, from prejudice and\npersonal animosity; and the Doctor's insinuation that our\nnavigator obstructed Lieutenant PickersgilPs promotion, is, I\nhave good reason to believe, wholly groundless. There is another error which must not pass unnoticed. Dr. Forster puts\nin his caveat against giving the name of Cook's Straits to the\nStraits between Asia and America, discovered by Beering. But\nif the Doctor had read the Voyage to the Pacific Ocean, published by authority, he would have seen that there was no\ndesign of robbing Beering of the honour to which he was\nentitled.\nFrom a survey of Captain Cook's character, it is natural to\nextend our reflections to the effects of the several expeditions\n 358\nEFFECTS OF\nin. which he was engaged. These, indeed, must have largely\nappeared in the general history of his Life; and they have\nfinely been displayed by Dr. Douglas, in his admirable Introduction to the Voyage to the Pacific Ocean. Under the conduct of so able a guide, I shall subjoin a short view of the\nsubject.\nIt must, however, be observed that, with regard to the three\nprincipal consequences of our great navigator's transactions, I\nhave nothing further to offer. These are, his having dispelled\nthe illusion of a Terra Australis Incognita; his demonstration\nof the impracticability of a northern passage from the Pacific to\nthe Atlantic Ocean; and his having established a sure method\nof preserving the health of seamen in the longest voyages, and\nthrough every variety of latitude and climate. Concerning each\nof these capital objects, I have already so fully spoken, that it\nis not in my power to add to the impression of their importance, and of Captain Cook's merits in relation to them, which,\nI trust, is firmly fixed on the mind of every reader.\nIt is justly remarked, by Dr. Douglas, that one great advantage accruing to the world from our late surveys of the\nglobe, is that they have confuted fanciful theories, too likely to\ngive birth to impracticable undertakings. The ingenious reveries of speculative philosophers, which have so long amused\nthe learned and raised the most sanguine expectations, are now\nobliged to submit, perhaps with reluctance, to the sober dictates\nof truth and experience. Nor will it be only by discouraging\nfuture unprofitable searches, that the late voyages will be of\nservice to mankind, but also by lessening the dangers and\ndistresses formerly experienced in those seas which are within\nthe actual line of commerce and navigation. From the British\ndiscoveries many commercial improvements may be expected\nto arise in our own times; but, in future ages, such improvements may be extended to a degree of which, at present, we\nhave no conception. In the long chain of causes and effects,\nno one can tell how widely and beneficially the mutual intercourse of the various inhabitants of the earth may hereafter be\ncarried on, in consequence of the means of facilitating it which\nhave been explored and pointed out by Captain Cook.\n CAPTAIN COOK'S VOYAGES. 359\nThe interests of science, as well as of commerce, stand highly\nindebted to this illustrious navigator. That a knowledge of the\nglobe on which we live is a very desirable object, no one can\ncall in question. This is an object which, while it is ardently\npursued by the most enlightened philosophers, is sought for\nwith avidity even by those whose studies do not carry them\nbeyond the lowest rudiments of learning. It need not be said\nwhat gratification Captain Cook hath provided for the world in\nthis respect. Before the voyages of the present reign took place,\nnearly half the surface of the earth was hidden in obscurity and\nconfusion. From the discoveries of our navigator, geography\nhas assumed a new face, and become, in a great measure, a new\nscience; having attained to such a completion, as to leave only\nsome less important parts of the globe to be explored by future\nvoyagers.1\nHappily for the advancement of knowledge, acquisitions\ncannot be obtained in any one branch without leading to acquisitions in other branches, of equal, and perhaps of superior\nconsequence. New oceans cannot be traversed, or new countries visited, without presenting fresh objects of speculation and\ninquiry, and carrying the practice, as well as the theory, of\nphilosophy to a higher degree of perfection. Nautical astronomy,\nin particular, was in its infancy when the late voyages were first\nundertaken; but, during the prosecution of them, and especially\nin Captain Cook's last expedition, even many of the petty\nofficers could observe the distance of the moon from the sun,\nor a star, the most delicate of all observations, with sufficient\naccuracy. As for the officers of superior rank, they would have\nfelt themselves ashamed to have it thought that they did not\nknow how to observe for, and compute the time at sea; though\nsuch a thing had, a little before, scarcely been heard of among\nseamen. Nay, first-rate philosophers had doubted the possibility of doing it with the exactness that could be wished. It\nmust, however, be remembered, that a large share of praise is\ndue to the Board of Longitude for the proficiency of the gentle-\n1 Lieutenant Robert;\nlight\nechan\n 360\nEFFECTS OF\nmen of the navy in taking observations at sea. In consequence\nof the attention of that board to this important object, liberal\nrewards have been given to mathematicians for perfecting the\nlunar tables, and facilitating calculations; and artists have been\namply encouraged in the construction of instruments and watches\nmuch more accurately and completely adapted to the purposes\nof navigation than formerly existed.\nIt is needless to mention what a quantity of additional information has been gained with respect to the rise and times of\nthe flowing of the tides; the direction and force of currents at\nsea; and the cause and nature of the polarity of the needle, and\nthe theory of its variations. Natural knowledge has been increased by experiments on the effects of gravity in different and\nvery distant places; and from Captain Cook's having penetrated\nso far into the Southern Ocean, it is now ascertained that the\nphenomenon usually called the Aurora Borealis is not peculiar\nto high northern latitudes, but belongs equally to all cold climates, whether they be north or south.\nAmidst the different branches of science that have been promoted by the late expeditions, there is none, perhaps, that stands\nso highly indebted to them as the science of botany. At least\ntwelve hundred new plants have been added to the known\nsystem; and large accessions of intelligence have accrued with\nregard to every other part of natural history. This point has\nalready been evinced by the writings of Dr. Sparrman, of the\ntwo Forsters, father and son, and of Mr. Pennant; and this\npoint will illustriously be manifested, when the great work of\nSir Joseph Banks shall be accomplished, and given to the\nworld.\nIt is not to the enlargement of natural knowledge only that\nthe effects arising from Captain Cook's voyages are to be confined. Another important object of study has been opened by\nthem; and that is, the study of human nature, in situations\nvarious, interesting, and uncommon. The islands visited in the\ncentre of the South Pacific Ocean, and the principal scenes of\nthe operations of our discoverers, were untrodden ground. As\nthe inhabitants, so far as could be observed, had continued,\nfrom their original settlement, unmixed with any different tribe;\n CAPTAIN COOK'S VOYAGES.\n36i\nas they had been left entirely to their own powers for every art\nof life, and to their own remote traditions for every political or\nreligious custom or institution; as they were uninformed by\nscience, and unimproved by education, they could not but\nafford many subjects of speculation to an inquisitive and philosophical mind. Hence may be collected a variety of important\nfacts with respect to the state of man; with respect to his attainments and deficiencies, his virtues and vices, his employments and diversions, his feelings, manners, and customs, in a\ncertain period of society. Even the curiosities which have been\nbrought from the discovered islands, and which enrich the\nBritish Museum, and the late Sir Ashton Lever's repository,\nmay be considered as a valuable acquisition to this country;\nas supplying no small fund of information and entertainment.\nFew inquiries are more interesting than those which relate\nto the migrations of the various families or tribes that have\npeopled the earth. It was known in general that the Asiatic\nnation called Malayans possessed in former times much the\ngreatest trade in the Indies; and that they frequented, with\ntheir merchant ships, not only all the coasts of Asia, but ventured over even to the coasts of Africa, and particularly to the\ngreat island of Madagascar. But that from Madagascar to\nthe Marquesas and Easter Island, that is, nearly from the east\nside of Africa till we approach towards the west side of America,\na space including above half the circumference of the globe,\nthe same nation of the oriental world should have made their\nsettlements and founded colonies throughout almost every\nintermediate stage of this immense tract, in islands at amazing\ndistances from the mother continent, and the natives of which\nwere' ignorant of each other's existence\u2014is an historical fact\nthat, before Captain Cook's voyages, could be but very imperfectly known. He it is who hath discovered a vast number of\nnew spots of land lurking in the bosom of the South Pacific\nOcean, all the inhabitants of which display striking evidences\nof their having derived their descent from one common Asiatic\noriginal. Nor is this apparent solely from a similarity of customs and institutions, but is established by a proof which conveys irresistible conviction to the mind, and that is the affinity\n EFFECTS OP\nof language. The collections that have been made of the\nwords which are used in the widely diffused islands and countries\nthat have lately been visited, cannot fail, in the hands of such\nmen as a Bryant and a Marsden, to throw much light on the\norigin of nations and the peopling of the globe.\u2014From Mr.\nMarsden, in particular, who has devoted his attention, time,\nand study to this curious subject, the literary world may hereafter expect to be highly instructed and entertained.\nThere is another family of the earth, concerning which new\ninformation has been derived from the voyages of our British\nnavigators. That the Esquimaux, who had hitherto only been\nfound seated on the coasts of Labradore and Hudson's Bay,\nagreed with the Greenlanders in every circumstance of customs,\nmanners, and language, which could demonstrate an original\nidentity of nation, had already been ascertained. But that the\nsame tribe now actually inhabit the islands and coasts on the\nwest side of North America, opposite Kamtschatka, was a discovery the completion of which was reserved for Captain Cook.\nFrom his account it appears that these people have extended\ntheir migrations to Norton Sound, Oonalashka, and Prince\nWilliam's Sound; that is, to nearly the distance of fifteen hundred leagues from their stations in Greenland and the coast of\nLabradore. Nor does this curious fact rest merely on the\nevidence arising from similitude of manners \\ for it stands confirmed by a table of words, exhibiting such an affinity of language as will remove every doubt from the mind of the most\nscrupulous inquirer.\nOther questions there are, of a very important nature, the\nsolution of which will now be rendered more easy than hath\nheretofore been apprehended. From the full confirmation of\nthe vicinity of the two continents of Asia and America, it can\nno longer be represented as ridiculous to believe that the\nformer furnished inhabitants to the latter. By the facts recently\ndiscovered, a credibility is added to the Mosaic account of the\npeopling of the earth. That account will, I doubt not, stand\nthe test of the most learned and rigorous investigation. Indeed,\nI have long been convinced, after the closest meditation of\nwhich I am capable, that sound philosophy and genuine reve-\n CAPTAIN COOKS VOYAGES.\n-363\nlation never militate against each other. The rational friends\nof religion are so far from dreading the spirit of inquiry, that\nthey wish for nothing more than a candid, calm, and impartial\nexamination of the subject, according to all the lights which\nthe improved reason and the enlarged science of man can\nafford.\nOne great effect of the voyages made under the conduct of\nCaptain Cook, is their having excited a zeal for similar undertakings. Other princes and other nations are engaged in expeditions of navigation and discovery. By order of the French\ngovernment, Mess, de la Perouse and de Langle sailed from\nBrest, in August, 1785, in the frigates Boussole and Astroloobe,\non an enterprise the express purpose of which was the improvement of geography, astronomy, natural history, and philosophy,\nand to collect accounts of customs and manners. For the more\neffectual prosecution of the design, several gentlemen were\nappointed to go out upon the voyage who were known to excel\nin different departments of science and literature. M. Dagelet\nwent as astronomer; M. de la Martiniere, P. Recevour, and\nM. de la Fresne, as naturalists; and the Chevalier de Lamanon\nand M. Monges, junior, as natural philosophers. The officers\nof the Boussole were men of the best information and the\nfirmest resolution: and the crew contained a number of artificers in various kinds of mechanic employments. Marine\nwatches and other instruments were provided; and M. Dagelet\nwas particularly directed to make observations with M. Conda-\nmine's invariable pendulum, to determine the differences in\ngravity, and to ascertain the true proportion of the equatorial\nto the polar diameter of the earth. From some accounts which\nhave already been received of these voyages, it appears that\nthey have explored the coast of California; have adjusted the\nsituation of more than fifty places almost wholly unknown;\nand have visited Owhyhee and the rest of the Sandwich Islands.\nWhen the expedition shall be completed, the whole result of it\nwill doubtless be laid before the public.1\n1 An account of this voyage during the years 1785, 1786, 1787, and 1788,\nhas been published in France, from papers transmitted at different times by\nLa Perouse ; but nothing since the year 1788 has been received relative to\n 364\nEFFECTS OF\nAlthough Captain Cook has made such vast discoveries in\nthe Northern Ocean, on and between the east of Asia and the\nwest coast of America, Mr. Coxe has well shown that there is\nstill room for a farther investigation of that part of the world.\nAccordingly, the object has been taken up by the Empress of\nRussia, who has committed the conduct of the enterprise to\nCaptain Billings, an Englishman in her majesty's service. As\nCaptain Billings was with Captain Cook in his last voyage, he\nmay reasonably be supposed to be properly qualified for the\nbusiness he has undertaken. The design, with the execution\nof which he is intrusted, appears to be very extensive and important ; and, if it should be crowned with success, cannot fail\nof making considerable additions to the knowledge of geography\nand navigation.\nThere is one event at home which has evidently resulted\nfrom Captain Cook's discoveries, and which, therefore, must\nnot be omitted. What I refer to is the settlement of Botany\nBay. With the general policy of this measure the present narrative has not any concern. The plan, I doubt not, has been\nadopted with the best intentions, after the maturest deliberation, and perhaps with consummate wisdom. One evident\nadvantage arising from it is, that it will effectually prevent a\nnumber of unhappy wretches from returning to their former\nscenes of temptation and guilt, and may open to them the\nmeans of industrious subsistence and moral reformation. If it\nbe wisely and prudently begun and conducted, who can tell\nwhat beneficial consequences may spring from it in future ages?\nImmortal Rome is said to have risen from the refuse of mankind.\nWhile we are considering the advantages the discoverers have\nderived from the late navigations, a question naturally occurs,\nwhich is, What benefits have hence accrued to the discovered'?\nIt would be a source of the highest pleasure to be able to\nanswer this question to complete satisfaction. But it must be\nacknowledged that the subject is not wholly free from doubts\nand difficulties; and these doubts and difficulties might be\nthe progress of the voyage, or the fate of the voyagers, who are all supposed\nto have perished by shipwreck.\n CAPTAIN COOKS VOYAGES.\n365\nenlarged upon and exaggerated by an imagination which is\nrather disposed to contemplate and represent the dark than the\nluminous aspect of human affairs. In one respect Mr. Samwell\nhas endeavoured to show that the natives of the lately explored\nparts of the world, and especially so far as relates to the Sandwich Islands, were not injured by our people; and it was the\nconstant solicitude and care of Captain Cook that evil might\nnot be communicated in any one place to which he came. If he\nwas universally successful, the good which, in various cases, he\nwas instrumental in producing, will be reflected upon with the\nmore peculiar satisfaction.\nThere is an essential difference between the voyages that-\nhave lately been undertaken, and many which have been carried on in former times. None of my readers can be ignorant\nof the horrid cruelties that were exercised by the conquerors\nof Mexico and Peru; cruelties which can never be remembered\nwithout blushing for religion and human nature. But to undertake expeditions with a design of civilizing the world and meliorating its condition, is a noble object. The recesses of the\nglobe were investigated by Captain Cook, not to enlarge private '\ndominion, but to promote general knowledge; the new tribes\nof the earth were visited as friends; and an acquaintance with\ntheir existence was sought for in order to bring them within\nthe pale of the offices of humanity, and to relieve the wants\nof their imperfect state of society. Such were the benevolent\nviews which our navigator was commissioned by his Majesty to\ncarry into execution; and. there is reason to hope that they\nwill not be wholly unsuccessful. From the long-continued intercourse with the natives of the Friendly, Society, and Sandwich Islands, some rays of light must have darted on their\ninfant minds. The uncommon objects which have been presented to their observation and excited their surprise, will\nnaturally tend to enlarge their stock of ideas, and to furnish\nnew materials for the exercise of their reasonable faculties. It\nis no small addition to their comforts of life and their immediate enjoyments that will be derived from the introduction of\nour useful animals and vegetables ; and if the only benefit they\nshould ever receive from the visits of the English should be\n 366\nENCOMIUMS UPON\nthe having obtained fresh means of subsistence, that must be\nconsidered as a great acquisition.\nBut may not our hopes be extended to still nobler objects?\nThe connection which has been opened with these remote inhabitants of the world is the first step toward their improvement ; and consequences may flow from it which are far beyond\nour present conceptions. Perhaps our late voyages may be the\nmeans appointed by Providence of spreading, in due time, the\nblessings of civilization among the numerous tribes of the South\nPacific Ocean, and preparing them for holding an honourable\nrank among the nations of the earth. There cannot be a more\n'laudable attempt than that of endeavouring to rescue millions\nof our fellow-creatures from that state of humiliation in which\nthey now exist. Nothing can more essentially contribute to\nthe attainment of this great end than a wise and rational introduction of the Christian religion; an introduction of it in its\ngenuine simplicity, as holding out the worship of one God, inculcating the purest morality, and promising eternal life as the\nreward of obedience. These are views of things which are\nadapted to general comprehension, and calculated to produce\nthe noblest effects.\nConsidering the eminent abilities displayed by Captain Cook\nand the mighty actions performed by him, it is not surprising\nthat his memory should be held in the highest estimation, both\nat home and abroad. Perhaps, indeed, greater honour is paid\nto his name abroad than at home. Foreigners, I am informed,\nlook up to him with an admiration which is not equalled in\nthis country. A remarkable proof of it occurs in the eulogy of\nour navigator by Michael Angelo Gianetti, which was read at\nthe royal Florentine Academy, on the 9th of June, 1785, and\npublished at Florence in the same year. Not having seen it, I\nam deprived of the power of doing justice to its merit. If I\nam not mistaken in my recollection, one of the French literary\nacademies has proposed a prize for the best eulogium on Captain Cook; and there can be no doubt but that several candidates will appear upon the occasion, and exert the whole force\nof their eloquence on so interesting a subject.\nTo the applauses of our navigator which have already been\n 368 ENCOMIUMS UPON\nHad these possess'd, 0 Cook ! thy gentle mind,\nThy love of arts, thy love of humankind ;\nHad these pursued thy mild and lib'ral plan,\nDiscoveries had not been a curse to man !\nThen, bless'd Philanthropy ! thy social hands\nHad link'd dissever'd worlds in brothers' bands ;\nCareless, if colour, or if clime divide ;\nThen lov'd, and loving, man had liv'd, and died.\nSoon after the account arrived in England of Captain Cook's\ndecease, two poems were published in celebration of his memory, one Of which was an Ode by a Mr. Fitzgerald of Gray's\nInn. But the first, both in order of time and of merit, was an\nElegy by Miss Seward, whose poetical talents have been displayed in many beautiful instances to the public. This lady,\nin the beginning of her poem, has admirably represented the\nprinciple of humanity by which the captain was actuated in his\nundertakings:\u2014\nYe, who ere while for Cook's illustrious brow\nPluck'd the green laurel and the oaken bough,\nHung the gay garlands on the trophied oars,\nAnd pour'd his fame along a thousand shores,\nStrike the slow death-bell!\u2014weave the sacred verse,\nAnd strew the cypress o'er his honour'd hearse ;\nIn sad procession wander round the shrine,\nAnd weep him mortal, whom ye sung divine !\nSay first, what Pow'r inspir'd his dauntless breast\nWith scorn of danger, and inglorious rest,\nTo quit imperial London's gorgeous plains,\nWhere, rob'd in thousand tints, bright Pleasure reigns?\nWhat Pow'r inspir'd his dauntless breast to brave\nThe scorch'd Equator, and th' Antarctic wave ?\nClimes, where fierce suns in cloudless ardours shine,\nAnd pour the dazzling deluge round the Line ;\nThe realms of frost, where icy mountains rise,\n'Mid the pale summer of the polar skies ?\u2014\nIt was Humanity!\u2014on coasts unknown,\nThe shiv'ring natives of the frozen zone,\nAnd the swart Indian, as he faintly strays .\nI Where Cancer reddens in the solar blaze,\"\nShe bade him seek ;\u2014on each inclement shore\nPlant the rich seeds of her exhaustless store ;\nUnite the savage hearts, and hostile hands,\nIn the firm compact of her gentle bands ;\n CAPTAIN COOK.\nStrew her soft comforts o'er the barren plain,\nSing her sweet lays, and consecrate her fane.\nIt was Humanity !\u2014O Nymph divine !\nI see thy light step print the burning Line !\nThere thy bright eye the dubious pilot guides,\nThe faint oar struggling with the scalding tides\u2014\nOn as thou lead'st the bold, the glorious prow,\nMild, and more mild, the sloping sunbeams glow;\nNow weak and pale the lessen'd lustres play,\nAs round th' horizon rolls the timid day;\nBarb'd with the sleeted snow, the driving hail,\nRush the fierce arrows of the polar gale ;\nAnd through the dim, unvaried, ling'ring hours,\nWide o'er the waves incumbent horror lours.\n369\nCaptain Cook's endeavours to serve the inhabitants of New\nZealand, by the vegetables and animals he left among them, are\nthus described:\nTo these the hero leads his living store,\nAnd pours new wonders on th' uncultured shore ;\nThe silky fleece, fair fruit, and golden grain;\nAnd future herds and harvests bless the plain.\nO'er the green soil his kids exulting play,\nAnd sounds his clarion loud the bird of day;\nThe downy goose her ruffled bosom laves,\nTrims her white wing, and wantons in the waves ;\nStern moves the bull along th' affrighted shores,\nAnd countless nations tremble as he roars.\nI shall only add the pathetic and animated conclusion of this\nfine poem:\nBut ah !\u2014aloft on Albion's rocky steep,\nThat frowns incumbent o'er the boiling deep,\nSolicitous, and sad, a softer form\nEyes the lone flood, and deprecates the storm.\u2014\n111 fated matron !\u2014for, alas ! in vain\nThy eager glances wander o'er the main !\u2014\n'Tis the vex'd billows, that insurgent rave,\nTheir white foam silvers yonder distant wave,\n'Tis not his sails !\u2014thy husband comes no more !\nHis bones now whiten an accursed shore !\u2014\nRetire,\u2014for hark ! the seagull shrieking soars,\nThe lurid atmosphere portentous lours ;\nB B\n 370 COMMENDATIONS.\nNight's sullen spirit groans in every gale,\nAnd o'er the waters draws the darkling veil,\nSighs in thy hair, and chills thy throbbing breast\u2014\nGo, wretched mourner !\u2014weep thy griefs to rest !\nYet, though through life is lost each fond delight,\nThough set thy earthly son in dreary night,\nOh ! raise thy thoughts to yonder starry plain,\nAnd own thy sorrow selfish, weak, and vain :\nSince, while Britannia, to his virtues just,\nTwines the bright wreath, and rears th' immortal bust;\n' While on each wind of heaven his fame shall rise,\nIn endless incense to the smiling skies ;\nThe attendant Power, that bade his sails expand,\nAnd waft her blessings to each barren land,\nNow raptured bears him to th' immortal plains,\nWhere Mercy hails him with congenial strains ;\nWhere soars, on Joy's white plume, his spirit free,\nAnd angels choir him, while he waits for Thee.\nCaptain Cook's discoveries, among other effects, have opened\nnew scenes for a poetical fancy to range in, and presented new\nimages to the selection of genius and taste. The Morais, in\nparticular, of the inhabitants of the South Sea Islands, afford a\nfine subject for the exercise of a plaintive Muse. Such a Muse\nhath seized upon the subject; and, at the same time, has added\nanother wreath to the memory of our navigator. I refer to a\nlady, who hath already, in many passages of her \" Peru,\" in her\nI Ode on the Peace,\" and, above all, in her \" Irregular Fragment,\" amply proved to the world that she possesses not only\nthe talent of elegant and harmonious versification, but the spirit\nof true poetry. The poem which I have now the pleasure of\ngiving for the first time to the public, and which was written at\nmy request, will be found in the Appendix. It is somewhat remarkable that female poets have hitherto been the chief cele-\nbrators of Captain Cook in this country. Perhaps a subject\nwhich would furnish materials for as rich a production as Ca-\nmoen's Lusiad, and which would adorn the pen of a Hayley or\na Cowper, may hereafter call forth the genius of some poet of\nthe stronger sex.\nThe Royal Society of London could not lose such a member\nof their body as Captain Cook without being anxious to honour\n COMMEMORA TIONS.\n37i\nhis name and memory by a particular mark of respect, Accordingly, it was resolved to do this by a medal; and a voluntary\nsubscription was opened for the purpose. To such of the fellows of the society as subscribed twenty guineas, a gold medal\nwas appropriated: silver medals were assigned to those who\ncontributed a smaller sum; and to each of the other members\none in bronze was given. The subscribers of twenty guineas\nwere, Sir Joseph Banks, president; the Prince of Anspach, the\nDuke of Montagu, Lord Mulgrave, and Mr. Cavendish, Mr.\nPeachy, Mr. Perrin, Mr. Poli, and Mr. Shuttleworth. Many\ndesigns, as might be expected, were proposed on the occasion.\nThe medal which was actually struck contains, on one side, the\nhead of Captain Cook in profile, and round it, jac. cook oceani\ninvestigator acerrimus ; and on the exergue, reg. soc. lond.\nsocio suo. On the reverse is a representation of Britannia\nholding a globe. Round her is inscribed, nil intentatum\nnostri liquere ; and on the exergue, auspiciis georgii hi.\nOf the gold medals which were struck on this occasion, one\nwas presented to His Majesty, another to the Queen, and a\nthird to the Prince of Wales. Two were sent abroad : the first\nto the French king on account of the protection he had granted\nto the ships under the command of Captain Cook; and a\nsecond to the Empress of Russia, in whose dominions the same\nships had been received and treated with every degree of friendship and kindness. Both these presents were highly acceptable\nto the great personages to whom they were transmitted. The\nFrench king expressed his satisfaction in a very handsome letter\nto the Royal Society, signed by himself, and undersigned by the\nMarquis de Vergennes; and the Empress of Russia commissioned Count Osterman to signify to Mr. Fitzherbert the sense\nshe entertained of the value of the present, and that she had\ncaused it to be forthwith deposited in the Museum of the Imperial Academy of Sciences. As a farther testimony of the\npleasure she derived from it, the Empress presented to the\nRoyal Society a large and beautiful gold medal, containing on\none side the effigies of herself, and on the reverse a representation of the statue of Peter the Great.\nAfter the general assignment of the medals (which took place in\n 372\nREGARD PAID TO\nthe spring of thejear 1784), there being a surplus of money still\nremaining, the president and council resolved that an additional\nnumber should be struck off in gold, to be disposed of as presents to Mrs. Cook, the Earl of Sandwich, Dr. Benjamin Franklin, Dr. Cooke, provost of King's College, Cambridge, and Mr.\nPlanta. About the same time it was agreed, that Mr. Aubert\nshould be allowed to have a gold medal of Captain Cook, on\nhis paying for the gold and the expense of striking it; in consideration of his intention to present it to the King of Poland.\nDuring the two visits of the Resolution and Discovery at\nKamtschatka, it was from Colonel Behm, the. commandant of\nthat province, that the ships and the officers and men belonging to them had received every kind of assistance which it\nwas in his power to bestow. His liberal and hospitable behaviour to the English navigators is related at large in Captain\nKing's Voyage. Such was the sense entertained of it by the\nLords of the Admiralty, that they determined to make a present\nto the colonel of a magnificent piece of plate, with an inscription expressive of his humane and generous disposition and\nconduct. The elegant pen of Dr. Cooke was employed in\ndrawing up the inscription, which, after it had been subjected\nto the opinion and correction of some gentlemen of the first\neminence in classical taste, was as follows :\n1 Viro egregio magno de Behm ; qui Imperatricis Augus-\ntissimae Catherinse auspiciis, summaque animi benignitate, sseva,\nquibus pra3erat,*_Kamtschatka3 littora, navibus nautisque Britan-\nnicis, hospita prsebuit: eosque, in terminis, si qui essent Imperio\nRussico, frustra, explorandis, mala multa perpessos, iterata, vice\nexcepit, refecit, recreavit, et commeatu omni cumulate auctos\ndimisit; Rei navalis Britannic^ Septemviri in aliquam be-\nnevolentiae tam insignis memoriam, amicissimo, gratissimoque\nanimo, suo, patriseque nomine, D. D. D. m.dcc.lxxxi.\"\nSir Hugh Palliser, who through life manifested an invariable\nregard and friendship for Captain Cook, has displayed a signal\ninstance, since the Captain's decease, of the affection and esteem in which he holds his memory. At his estate in Buckinghamshire Sir Hugh hath constructed a small building, on which\n CAPTAIN COOK'S FAMILY.\n373\nhe has erected a pillar, containing the fine character of our\ngreat navigator that is given at the end of the Introduction to\nthe last Voyage, and the principal part of which has been inserted in the present work. This character was drawn up by a\nmost respectable gentleman, who has long been at the head of\nthe naval profession, the honourable Admiral Forbes, admiral\nof the fleet, and general of marines; to whom Captain Cook\nwas only known by his eminent merit and his extraordinary\nactions.\nAmidst the numerous testimonies of regard that have been\npaid to Captain Cook's merits and memory, the important object of providing for his family hath not been forgotten. Soon\nafter the intelligence arrived of his unfortunate decease, this\nmatter was taken up by the Lords of the Admiralty, with a zeal\nand an effect which the following authentic document will fully\ndisplay.\nfa At the Court at St. James's, the 2nd of February, 1780;\n. \"(L. S.) \"Present,\n\" The King's Most Excellent Majesty in Council.\n\"Whereas there was this day read, at the Board, a memorial\nfrom the Right Honourable the Lords Commissioners of the Admiralty, dated the 2 7th of last month, in the words following, viz:\n\" Having received an authentic account of the death of that\ngreat Navigator, Captain James Cook, who has had the\nhonour of being employed by Your Majesty, in three different voyages, for the discovery of unknown countries in\nthe most distant parts of the globe; we think it our duty\nhumbly to represent to Your Majesty, that this meritorious\nofficer, after having received from Your Majesty's gracious\nbenevolence, as a reward for his public services in two successful circumnavigations, a comfortable and honourable\nretreat, where he might have lived many years to benefit\nhis family, he voluntarily relinquished that ease and emolument to undertake another of these voyages of discovery, in\nwhich the life of a commander, who does his duty, must always be particularly exposed, and in which, in the execution\nof that duty, he fell, leaving his family, whom his public\n REGARD PAID TO\nspirit had led him to abandon, as a legacy to his country.\nWe do therefore humbly propose that Your Majesty will be\ngraciously pleased to order a pension of two hundred pounds\na year to be settled on the widow, and twenty-five pounds\na year upon each of the three sons of the said Captain James\nCook, and that the same be placed on the ordinary estimate\nof the navy.\n\" His Majesty, taking the said memorial into his Royal consideration, was pleased, with the advice of His Privy Council,\nto order, as it is hereby ordered, that a pension of two hundred\npounds a year be settled on the widow, and twenty-five pounds\na year upon each of the three sons of the said Captain James\nCook, and that the same be placed on the ordinary estimate of\nHis Majesty's navy; and the Lords Commissioners of the Admiralty are to give the necessary directions herein accordingly.\n\" W. Fawkener.\"\nThe preceding memorial to the king was signed by the Earl\nof Sandwich, Mr. Buller, the Earl of Lisburne, Mr. Penton,\nLord Mulgrave, and Mr. Mann; and the several officers of the\nBoard of Admiralty seconded the ardour of their superiors, by\nthe speed and generosity with which his Majesty's royal grant to\nCaptain Cook's widow and children passed through the usual\nforms.\nAnother occasion was afterward seized of conferring a substantial benefit on the captain's family. The charts and plates\nbelonging to the Voyage to the Pacific Ocean, were provided at\nthe expense of government; the consequence of which was that\na large profit accrued from the sale of the publication. Of this\nprofit, half was consigned, in trust, to Sir Hugh Palliser and\nMr. Stephens, to be applied to the use of Mrs. Cook, during her\nnatural life, and afterward to be divided between her children.\nHonour, as well as emolument, hath graciously been conferred by his Majesty upon the descendants of Captain Cook.\nOn the 3rd of September, 1785, a coat of arms was granted to\nthe family, of which a description will be given below.1\n1 Azure, between the two polar stars Or, a sphere on the plane of the\nmeridian, north pole elevated, circles of latitude for every ten degrees, and\n CAPTAIN COOK'S FAMILY. 375\nOur navigator had six children: James, Nathaniel, Elizabeth,\nJoseph, George, and Hugh. Of these, Joseph and George died\nsoon after their birth, and Elizabeth in the fifth year of her\nage. James, the eldest son, who was born at St. Paul's, Shad-\nWell, on the 13th of October, 1763, is now a lieutenant in his\nMajesty's navy. In a letter written by Admiral Sir Richard\nHughes, in 1785, from Grenada, to Mis. Cook, he is spoken\nof in terms of high approbation. Nathaniel, who was bom\non the 14th of December, 1764, at Mile-End Old Town, was\nbrought up likewise in the naval service, and was unfortunately\nlost on board his Majesty's ship Thunderer, Commodore Wal-\nsingham, in the hurricane which happened at Jamaica on the\n3rd of October, 1780. He is said to have been a most promising youth. Hugh, the youngest, was born on the 22nd of\nMay, 1776, and was so called after the name of his father's\ngreat friend, Sir Hugh Palliser.\nIt hath often been mentioned, in terms of no small regret,\nthat a monument hath not yet been erected to the memory of\nCaptain Cook in Westminster Abbey. The wish and the hope\nof such a monument are hinted at in the close of Dr. Douglas's\nIntroduction to the government edition of the last voyage; and\nthe same sentiment is expressed by the author of the Eulogium\nat the end of that Introduction. Sir Hugh Palliser has also\nspoken to the like purpose in a communication I received from\nhim. It would certainly redound to the honour of the nation\nto order a magnificent memorial of the abilities and services of\nour illustrious navigator; on which account a tribute of that\nkind may be regarded as a desirable thing. But a monument\nin Westminster Abbey would be of little consequence to the\nreputation of Captain Cook. His fame stands upon a wider\nof longitude for every fifteen, showing the Pacific Ocean between sixty and\ntwo hundred and forty west, bounded on one side by America, on the other\nby Asia and New Holland, in memory of the discoveries made by him in\nthat Ocean, so very far beyond all former navigators. His track thereon is\nmarked with red lines. And for crest, on a wreath of the colours, is an\narm imbowed, vested in a uniform of a captain of the royal navy. In the\nhand is the union jack, on a staff Proper. The arm is encircled by a wreath\nof palm and laurel.\n REGARD PAID TO CAPTAIN COOKS FAMILY.\nbase, and will survive the comparatively perishing materials of\nbrass, or stone, or marble. The name of Cook will be held in\nhonour, and recited with applause, so long as the records of\nhuman events shall continue in the earth; nor is it possible to\nsay what may be the influence and rewards which, in other\nworlds, shall be found to attend upon eminent examples of wisdom and of virtue.\n APPENDIX.\nIFTER the death of Captain Cook, and the events\nimmediately succeeding it, Captain Clerke, upon\nwhom the command of the expedition had devolved, proceeded from Owhyhee, and coasted\nseveral of the other islands of the group. The\nships anchored at Atooi to procure water; in doing this our\nvoyagers experienced some interruption from the natives, and\na slight conflict took place in which one of the islanders was\nwounded by a musket-shot. They were here told that at their\npreceding visit they had left a disorder amongst the women, of\nwhich several persons of both sexes had died; and as there\nwas not the slightest appearance of the disorder amongst the\nnatives at the first arrival of the vessels, there is too much\nreason to believe that some of the crew were the authors of\nthat irreparable mischief. Atooi was in a state of internal warfare; the quarrel had arisen about the goats Captain Cook had\nleft at Oneeheow the year before; the property of which was\ncontested by two different chiefs. The goats, which had increased to the number of six, and would probably in a few\nyears have stocked all these islands, were destroyed in the\ncontest.\nOur voyagers left the Sandwich Islands finally on the 15th\nof March, and stood to the south-west, in hopes of falling in\nwith the island of Modoopapappa, which they were told by\nthe natives lay in that direction, about five hours' sail from\nTaohora; but though the two vessels stretched asunder several\nmiles, they did not discover it. It is possible it might have\n 378\nAPPENDIX.\nbeen passed in the night, as the islanders described it to be\nsmall, sandy, and almost even with the surface of the sea.\nThe harbour of Saint Peter and Saint Paul, in Awatska Bay,\nwas appointed for the next rendezvous of the two vessels, in\ncase of separation. In the course of their navigation towards\nKamtschatka, they traversed that part of the Northern Pacific in\nwhich some islands and lands were first laid down in the charts,\nsuch.as the island of Reia de Plata in De ITsle's chart, and the\nland said to have been seen by John de Gama, in a voyage\nfrom China to New Spain, first delineated in a chart published\nby Texeira, a Portuguese geographer, in 1649; but though at\nsundry times they had various indications of land, they discovered none, and those islands and lands must therefore either\nbe of trifling extent, or wholly imaginary.\nA leak under the larboard bow of the Resolution, which had\nkept the people almost constantly at the pumps ever since\ntheir leaving the Sandwich Islands, occasioned a great alarm\non the 13th of April. The water, which had lodged in the\ncoal-hole, not finding a sufficient vent into the well, had forced\nup the platforms over it, and in a moment deluged the whole\nspace between decks. The coals would very soon choke up a\npump, and the number of bulky materials that were washed\nout of the gunner's store-room, and which, by the ship's motion,\nwere tossed violently from side to side, rendered it impracticable to bale the water out. No other method was therefore\nleft than to cut a hole through the bulkhead that separated the\ncoal-hole from the fore-hold. As soon as the passage was made,\nthe greatest part of the water was emptied into the well; but\nthe leak was now so much increased, that it was necessary to\nkeep one half of the people constantly pumping and baling till\nthe noon of the 15 th.\nOn the 23rd, at six in the morning, on the fog clearing away,\nthe land of Kamtschatka appeared in mountains covered with\nsnow. The weather was most severe; the ship appeared to\nbe a complete mass of ice, and the shrouds were so incrusted\nwith-it as to measure in circumference more than double their\nusual size. The crews suffered very severely from the cold,\nparticularly from having lately left the tropical climates; and,\n APPENDIX.\n379\nbut for the foresight and care of their officers, would indeed\nhave been in a deplorable state. It was natural to expect that\ntheir experience, during their voyage to the north the year\nbefore, would have made them sensible of the necessity of\npaying some attention to their clothing, as it was generally\nknown, in both ships, that they were to make another voyage\ntowards the pole; but, with the thoughtlessness of infants,\nupon their return to a warm climate, their fur jackets and the\nrest of their cold-country clothes, were kicked about the decks\nas things of no value. They were of course picked up by the\nofficers, and being put into casks, were in due season restored\nto their owners.\nOn the 25th, when off the entrance of Awatska Bay, the\nResolution lost sight of the Discovery, and on the 28th entered\nthe Bay. The officers of the Resolution examined every corner\nof it with their glasses, in search of the town of St. Peter and\nSt. Paul, which they had conceived to be a place of some\nstrength and consideration. At length they discovered, on a\nnarrow point of land, a few miserable loghouses, and some\nconical huts raised on poles, amounting in all to about thirty,\nwhich, from the situation, they were under the necessity of\nconcluding to be Petropaulowska. \" However,\" says Captain\nKing, \" in justice to the generous and hospitable treatment we\nfound here, I shall beg leave to anticipate the reader's curiosity\nby assuring him that our disappointment proved to be more of\na laughable than a serious nature; for in this wretched extremity of the earth, situated beyond everything that we conceived\nto be most barbarous and inhospitable, and, as it were, out of\nthe very reach of civilization, barricadoed with ice, and covered\nwith summer snow, in a poor, miserable port, far inferior to the\nmeanest of our fishing-towns, we met with feelings of humanity,\njoined to a greatness of mind and elevation of sentiment, which\nwould have done honour to any nation or climate.\"\nIn the morning of the 29th, Captain, then Lieutenant King,\nwas sent on shore; and after experiencing much difficulty from\nthe broken ice that extended nearly half a mile, across which\nhe was obliged to make the best of his way on foot, was received by the commander of the garrison at the head of his\n 38o\nAPPENDIX.\nmen, consisting of about thirty soldiers. They had not seen\nthe ship the preceding day, nor indeed that morning till the\nboats were pretty near the ice. Much panic ensued; the garrison was put under arms, and two field-pieces placed at the\nentrance of the commander's house. All, however, soon wore a\nfriendly aspect, and nothing could exceed the kindness and hospitality of the officer, a sergeant, who commanded the ostrog,\nand at whose house they were entertained. He furnished\nLieutenant King, who had fallen in between the disjointed ice,\nwith a complete suit of clothes of his own. The dinner that\nwas served up consisted of four courses; but the conversation,\nfrom the want of an interpreter, no other language being understood there but Russian and Kamtschatdale, was confined to\na few bows and other signs of mutual respect. The sergeant\nsent off an express to Bolcheretsk, where the governor of the\nprovince usually resided, and whence he had to look for orders\nwhat to do, as to the procurement of the supplies of provisions\nand naval stores which our people wanted.\nOn their return, a sledge drawn by five dogs, with a driver,\nwas provided for each of the party. The sailors were highly\ndelighted with this mode of conveyance, and what diverted them\nmost was that the two boathooks which they had brought had\nalso a sledge to themselves.\nOn the i st of May the Discovery entered the bay. On the\nday after, early in the morning, an answer was received from\nBolcheretsk. The despatches had been sent off on the 29th,\nabout noon, by a sledge drawn by dogs, so that they were only\na little more than three days and a half in performing a journey\nof two hundred and seventy miles; Bolcheretsk being about\none hundred and thirty-five miles from St. Peter and St. Paul.\nAs the whole stock of live cattle which the country about the\nbay could afford amounted only to two heifers, Captain Clerke\nfound it necessary to send to Bolcheretsk, and Captain Gore\nand Lieutenant King were fixed on for the excursion. They\nproceeded by boats up the Awatska river, then across part of\nthe country in sledges, and then down the Bolchoireka in\ncanoes.\nMajor Behm, the governor of Kamtschatka, received them\n APPENDIX.\n38i\nnot only with the utmost politeness, but with the most engaging\ncordiality; and all the principal people of the town vied with\neach other who should show the most civility to strangers from\nthe other extremity of the globe. A list of the naval stores, the\nnumber of cattle, and the quantity of flour wanted by the navigators^ was given to Major Behm, who insisted upon supplying\nall their wants; and when they desired to be made acquainted\nwith the price of the articles with which they were to be supplied, and proposed that Captain Clerke should give bills to\nthe-amount on the Victualling-office in London, the major\npositively refused, and whenever it was afterward urged,\nstopped them short by.saying, he was certain he could not\noblige his mistress, the empress, more than in giving every assistance in his power to her good friends and allies the English;\nand that it would be a particular satisfaction to her to hear\nthat, in so remote a part of the world, her dominions had afforded any relief to ships engaged in such services; that he\ncould not therefore act so contrary to the character of his empress as to accept of any bills; but that to accommodate the\nmatter, he would take a bare attestation of the particulars with\nwhich we might be furnished, and that this he would transmit\nto his court as a certificate of having performed his duty.\nThe town of Bolcheretsk consists of several rows of low\nbuildings, barracks for the Russian soldiers and Cossacks, a\ngood-looking church, and a court-room, with a great number of\nbalagans (summer habitations) belonging to the Kamtschatdales,\nat the end of the town. The inhabitants amount to between\nfive and six hundred.\nIt would exceed the bounds to which this sketch must necessarily be confined to enumerate one half of the instances of\ncivility and attention which Major Behm, his lady, the officers\nof the garrison, and the inhabitants of the town bestowed upon\nthe English travellers. One generous present cannot, however\nbe passed over m silence, both because it consisted of the\ngreatest part of their small store of the article, and because it\ncalled forth from the British seamen a corresponding generosity\nBeing informed of the privations the sailors had suffered from\nthe want of tobacco, Major Behm sent four bags of it, weighing\n 382 APPENDIX.\nupwards of one hundred pounds each, which he begged might\nbe presented, in the name of himself and the garrison under his\ncommand, to our sailors. When the seamen were told of it,\nthe crews of both ships desired, entirely of their own accord,\nthat their grog might be stopped, and their allowance of spirits\npresented, on their part, to the garrison of Bolcheretsk, as they\nhad reason to conclude that brandy was scarce in the country,\nand would be very acceptable, since the soldiers on shore had\noffered four roubles a bottle for it. When it is considered how\nmuch the sailors would feel from the stoppage of their allowance\nof grog, and that this offer would deprive them of it during the\ninclement season they had to expect on their ensuing expedition\nto the north, the sacrifice must be looked upon as generous and\nextraordinary; and, that they might not suffer by it, Captain\nClerke substituted, in the room of the very small quantity the\nmajor could be prevailed on to accept, the same quantity of\nrum.\nWhen the party returned to Petropaulowska, Major Behm\naccompanied them, and visited the ships. He had resigned the\ncommand of Kamtschatka, and was in a short time to return to\nSt. Petersburgh; our navigators therefore committed to his care\ndespatches for England, with the journals and charts of the\nvoyage so far.\nThey got about twenty head of cattle, about nine thousand\nweight of rye flour, and a variety of other provisions and refreshments here, especially fish, with which they were absolutely\noverpowered from every quarter; and, having completed their\nwater, they weighed anchor on the 13th of June, and on the\n16th cleared the bay. The volcano, situated to the north of\nthe harbour, was in a state of eruption at the time.\nOn the 5th of July our navigators passed through Beering's\nStraits, having run along the Asiatic coast; they then stretched\nover to that of America, with a view of exploring it between the\nlatitudes of 68\u00b0 and 690. But in this attempt they were disappointed, being stopped, on the 7th, by a large and compact\nfield of ice connected with the land. On the 9th they had\nsailed nearly forty leagues to the westward, along the edge of\nthe ice, without seeing any opening, and had therefore no pros-\n APPENDIX.\n383\npect of advancing farther north.\u2014Until the 27th, however, they\ncontinued to seek a passage, first on the American, and then\non the Asiatic side; but were never able to penetrate farther\nnorth than 700 33.', which was five leagues short of the point to\nwhich they had advanced the season before.\nAt one time, in attempting to penetrate to the north-westward,\nthe Discovery was in a very dangerous situation. She became\nso entangled by several large pieces of ice, that her way was\nstopped, and immediately dropping bodily to leeward, she fell\nbroadside foremost on the edge of a considerable body of ice;\nand having at the same time an open sea to windward, the surf\ncaused her to strike violently upon it. This mass at length\neither so far moved or broke, as to set them at liberty to make\nanother trial to escape; but, before the ship gathered way\nenough to be under command, she again fell to leeward on\nanother fragment; and the swell making it unsafe to lie to\nwindward, and finding no chance of getting clear, they pushed\ninto a small opening, furled their sails, and made fast with ice-\nhooks. A change of wind, however, taking place in the afternoon, the ice began to separate, and, setting all their sails, they\nforced a passage through it. The vessel had rubbed off a great\ndeal of the sheathing from her bows, and became very leaky\nfrom the strokes she received when she fell on the edge of\nthe ice.\nIn these high latitudes our navigators killed several seahorses, and also two white bears; the flesh of the latter afforded\na few excellent meals of fresh meat. It had indeed a strong\nfishy taste, but was in every respect superior to that of the seahorse, which, nevertheless, the sailors were again persuaded\nwithout much difficulty, to prefer to their salted provisions.\nFinding a farther advance to the northward, as well as a\nnearer approach to either continent, obstructed by a sea blocked\nup with ice, Captain Clerke at length determined to lose no\nmore time in the pursuit of what seemed utterly unattainable\nand to sail for Awatska Bay, to repair their damages, and before\nthe winter should set in to explore the coast of Japan on their\nway towards Europe. To the great joy, therefore, of every individual on board both ships, they turned their faces towards\n 3\u00a74\nAPPENDIX.\nhome; and the delight and satisfaction they experienced on the\noccasion, notwithstanding the tedious voyage they had to make,\nand the immense distance they had to run, were as freely entertained, and perhaps as fully enjoyed, as if they had been\nalready in sight of the Land's End.\nOn the 31st they repassed Beering's Straits. With respect\nto the practicability of a north-east or north-west passage into\nthe Pacific Ocean, through those straits, from the result of their\nattempts it appears that the north of the straits is clearer of\nice in August than in July, and perhaps in a part of September\nit may be still more free. But, after the equinox, the days\nshorten so fast that no farther thaw can be expected, and so\ngreat an effect cannot rationally be allowed to the warm weather\nin the first half of September as to imagine it capable of dispersing the ice from the most northern parts of the American\ncoast. But admitting this to be possible, it would be madness\nto attempt to run from the Icy Cape to the known parts of\nBaffin's Bay (a distance of four hundred and twenty leagues) in\nso short a time as that passage can be supposed to remain\nopen. Upon the Asiatic side there appears still less probability of success; for, though Deshneff, a Russian navigator,\nabout a century and a half ago, passed round the north-east\npoint of Asia, no voyager has yet been able to double Cape\nTaimura beyond the mouth of the Lena, which stretches to the\n7 8\u00b0 of latitude.\nCaptain Clerke's health now rapidly declined, and, on the\n17th of August, he was no longer able to get out of his bed.\nOn the 21 st they made the coast of Kamtschatka; and on the\nfollowing day, at nine in the morning, Captain Clerke died.1\n1 Captain Clerke departed this life in the thirty-eighth year of his age.\nHe was brought up to the navy from his earliest youth, and had been in\nseveral actions during the war which began in 1756. In the action between\nthe Bellona and the Courageux, being stationed in the mizen-top, he was\ncarried overboard with the mast; but was taken up without having received\nany hurt. He was a midshipman in the Dolphin, commanded by Captain\nByron, in her voyage round the world ; after which he served on the American station. In 1768 he made his second voyage round the world, in the\nEndeavour, as master's mate: and, in consequence of the death of Mr. Hicks,\nwhich happened on the 23rd of May, 1771, he returned home a lieutenant.\n APPENDIX.\n385\nHis disease was a consumption, which had evidently commenced before he left England, and of which he had lingered\nduring the whole voyage.\nOn the 24th the vessels anchored in the harbour of St. Peter\nand St. Paul, where the gentlemen on board were received by\ntheir Russian friends with the same cordiality as before. Captain Gore, upon whom the command of the expedition now\ndevolved, removed himself to the Resolution and appointed\nMr. King to the command of the Discovery. He sent off an\nexpress to the commander at Bolcheretsk, in which he requested\nto have sixteen head of black cattle. The eruption of the volcano, which had taken place at the time of the late departure\nof the vessels from Awatska, had done no damage, notwithstanding stones had fallen at the ostrog of the size of a goose's\negg-\nAttempts were now made to repair, as far as was practicable,\nthe damage the Discovery had sustained in the ice, and in removing the sheathing, eight feet of a plank in the wale were\nfound to be so very rotten as to make it necessary to shift it.\nThe carpenters were sent on shore in search of a tree large\nenough for the purpose : luckily they found a birch, which was\nthe only one of sufficient size in the whole neighbourhood of\nthe bay. The crews were employed in various necessary occupations : amongst which, four men were set apart to haul the\nseine for salmon, which were caught in great abundance and of\nHis third circumnavigation of the globe was in the Resolution, of which he\nwas appointed the second lieutenant; and he continued in that situation\ntill his return in 1775 ; soon after which he was promoted to the rank of\nmaster and commander. In what capacity he sailed with Captain Cook in\nthis last expedition need not be added. The consumption, of which Captain\nClerke died, had evidently commenced before he left England, and he\nlingered under it during the whole voyage. Though this very gradual decay\nhad long made him a melancholy object to his friends, nevertheless, they\nderived some consolation from the equanimity with which he bore his disorder, from the constant flow of good spirits maintained by him to his latest\nhour, and from his submitting to his fate with cheerful resignation. \"It\nwas, however, impossible,\" says Mr. King, \"not to feel a more than common degree of compassion for a person whose life had been a continued\nscene of those difficulties and hardships, to which a seaman's occupation is\nsubject, and under which he at last sunk.\"\u2014King's Voyage, pp. 280, 281.\nC C\n APPENDIX.\nexcellent quality. After supplying the immediate wants of\nboth ships, they salted down near a hogshead a day. The seahorse blubber, with which they had stored themselves during\ntheir expedition to the north, was boiled down for oil, now\nbecome a necessary article, their candles having been long\nsince all used.\nThe body of Captain Clerke was interred on Sunday, the\n29th, with all the solemnity and honours they could bestow,\nunder a tree in the valley on the north side of the harbour ; a\nspot which, the priest of Paratounea said, would be, as near as\nhe could guess, in the centre of the new church intended to be\nerected.\nOn the 3rd of September arrived an ensign from Bolcheretsk,\nwith a letter from Captain Shmalelf, the present commander,\nwho promised the cattle required, and that he would himself\npay them a visit immediately on the arrival of a sloop, which\nwas daily expected from Okotzk.\nOn the morning of the ioth a Russian galliot from Okotzk\nwas towed into the harbour. She had been thirty-five days on\nher passage, and had been seen from the lighthouse a fortnight\nbefore, beating up towards the mouth of the bay. There were\nfifty soldiers in her, with their wives and children and several\nother passengers; a sub-lieutenant, who came in her, now took\nthe command of the garrison, and from some cause or other,\nwhich the English could not learn, their old friend the sergeant,\nthe late commander of the place, fell into disgrace and was\nno longer suffered to sit down in the company of his own\nofficers.\nFrom the galliot our navigators got a small quantity of pitch,\ntar, cordage and twine, and a hundred and forty skins of flour,\ncontaining 13,782 lbs. English.\nThe Hospodin Ivaskin from Verchnei had been desired by\nMajor Behm to attend the English officers on their return to\nthe harbour, in order to be their interpreter. He now came.\nHe was an exile; and was of a considerable family in Russia;\nhis father was a general, and he himself, after having received\nhis education partly in France and partly in Germany, had been\npage to the Empress Elizabeth, and ensign in her guards. At\n APPENDIX. . 387\nthe age of sixteen he was knowted, had his nose slit, and was\nbanished, first to Siberia, and afterward to Kamtschatka, where\nhe had lived thirty-one years. He bore in his whole figure the\nstrongest marks of old age, though he had scarcely reached his\nfifty-fourth year. No one there knew the cause of his banishment, but they took it for granted that it must have been for\nsomething very atrocious, as two or three of the commanders\nof Kamtschatka had in vain endeavoured to get him recalled\nsince the present empress's reign. For the first twenty years\nhe had not tasted bread, nor been allowed subsistence of any\nkind, but had lived during that period among the Kamtschat-\ndales, on what his own activity and toil in the chase could procure him, Afterward, he had a small pension granted him.\nThis Major Behm by his intercession had caused to be increased to one hundred roubles a year, which is the common\npay of an ensign in all parts of the empress's dominions, except\nin this province, where the pay of all the officers is double.\nThis gentleman joined Captains Gore and King on a bear-\nhunting party on the 17 th, for two days; in which, first from\nthe party being too large, and the unavoidable noise that was\nthe consequence of it, and next, from the unfavourable weather\nafter they separated, they were wholly unsuccessful.\nOn the 22nd, the anniversary of his majesty's coronation,\nand when they were sitting down to as handsome a feast as their\nsituation would admit of, in honour of the day, the arrival of\nCaptain Shmalelf from Bolcheretsk was announced. He partook of their festivities, and set off on his return on the 25th.\nBefore his departure he reinstated the sergeant in the command\nof the place, and took with him the sub-lieutenant who had\nsuperseded him. Captain King accompanied Captain Shmalelf\nto the entrance of Awatska river, and on Sunday, the 26th,\nattended him to church at Paratounea. The church is of wood,\nand by far the best building in the country round about the\nbay. It is ornamented by many paintings, particularly with\ntwo pictures of St. Peter and St. Paul, presented by Beering,\nand which, in the real richness of their drapery, would carry off\nthe prize from the first of European performances ; for all the\nprincipal parts of it are made of thick plates of solid silver,\n 388 APPENDIX.\nfastened to the canvas and fashioned into the various foldings\nof the robes.\nThe next day another hunting party was set on foot under\nthe direction of the clerk of the parish, who was a celebrated\nbear hunter. The produce was a female bear, beyond the\ncommon size, which they shot in the water, and found dead\nthe next morning in the place to which she had been watched.\nThe mode of hunting these animals by the natives is as follows:\nWhen they come to the ground frequented by the bears, their\nfirst step is to look for their tracks; these are found in the\ngreatest numbers leading from the woods down to the lakes,\nand among the long sedgy grass and brakes by the edge of the\nwater. The place of ambuscade being determined on, the\nhunters next fix in the ground the crutches upon which their\nfirelocks are made to rest, pointing them in the direction they\nmean to shoot. This done, they kneel or lie down, and, with\ntheir bear-spears by their side, wait for the game. These precautions, which are chiefly taken in order to make sure of their\nmark, are, on several accounts, highly expedient. For, in the\nfirst place, ammunition is so dear in Kamtschatka that the\nprice of a bear will not purchase more of it than is sufficient to\nload a musket four or five times ; and, what is more material,\nif the bear be not rendered incapable of pursuit by the first\nshot, the consequences are often fatal. He immediately\nmakes towards the place whence the noise and smoke issue,\nand attacks his adversaries with great fury. It is impossible\nfor them to reload, as the animal is seldom at more than twelve\nor fifteen yards' distance when he is fired at; so that, if he does\nnot fall, they immediately put themselves in a posture to\nreceive him upon their spears, and their safety greatly depends\non their giving him a mortal stab as he first comes upon them.\nIf he parries the thrust (which bears, by the extraordinary\nstrength and agility of their paws are often enabled to do) and\nthereby breaks in upon his adversaries, the conflict becomes\nvery unequal, and it is well if the life of one of the party alone\nsuffice to pay the forfeit.\nOn the i st of October the cattle arrived from Verchnei, and\nthe 3rd, being the nameday of the empress, Captain Gore\n APPENDIX. 389\ninvited the priest of Paratounea, Ivaskin,^and the sergeant to\ndinner, and an entertainment was also provided for the inferior\nofficers of the garrison, for the toions of Paratounea and Petro-\npaulowska, and for the better sort of the Kamtschatdale inhabitants. The rest of the natives of every description were invited\nto partake with the ships' companies, who had a pound of good\nfat beef served up to each man, and what remained of their\nspirits was made into grog and divided amongst them.\nOn the 5th our navigators received from Bolcheretsk a fresh\npresent of tea, sugar, and tobacco. They were ready for sea,\nbut the weather prevented them from leaving the bay till the\n9th. Just before they weighed anchor the drummer of the\nmarines belonging to the Discovery deserted, having been last\nseen with a Kamtschatdale woman, to whom his messmates\nknew he had been much attached, and who had often been observed persuading him to stay behind. This man had been\nlong useless to them, from a swelling in his knee, which rendered him lame, but this made them the more unwilling to\nleave him behind to become a burden both to the Russians\nand himself. Some of the sailors were therefore sent to a well-\nknown haunt of his in the neighbourhood, where they found\nhim and his woman. On the return of the party with the deserter the vessels weighed, and came out of the bay.\nAwatska Bay has within its mouth a noble basin of twenty-\nfive miles in circuit, with the capacious harbours of Tareinska\nto the west, Rakoweena to the east, and the small one of St.\nPeter and St. Paul to the north. The last mentioned is a most\nconvenient little harbour. It will hold with ease half-a-dozen\nships moored head and stern, and is fit for giving them any\nkind of repairs. The south side is formed by a low sandy neck,\nexceedingly narrow, on which the ostrog is built. The deepest\nwater within is seven fathoms, and in every part over a muddy\nbottom. There is a watering-place at the head of the harbour.\nThe commerce of this country, as far as regards the exports,\nis entirely confined to furs, and carried on by a company of\nmerchants instituted by the empress. Besides these there are\nmany inferior traders (particularly Cossacks) scattered through\nthe country. Formerly this commerce was altogether carried\n 39Q\nAPPENDIX.\non by barter, but lately every arricle is bought and sold for\nready money only. Our sailors brought a great number of furs\nwith them from the coast of America, and were both astonished\nand delighted with the quantity of silver the merchants paid\ndown for them; but on finding neither ginshops to resort to,\nnor tobacco, nor anything else that they cared for to be had for\nmoney, the roubles soon became troublesome companions, and\nwere often to be seen kicked about the decks.\nThe articles of importation are principally European, several\nlikewise come from Siberia, Bucharea, the Calmucks, and\nChina. They consist of coarse woollen and linen cloths, yarn\nstockings, bonnets and gloves, thin Persian silks, cottons and\nnankeens, handkerchiefs, brass and copper pans, iron stoves,\nfiles, guns, powder and shot, hardware, looking-glasses, flour,\nsugar, tanned hides, &c. Though the merchants have a large\nprofit upon these imported goods, they have still a larger upon\nthe furs of Kiachta, upon the frontiers of China, which is the\ngreat market for them. The best sea-otter skins sell generally\nin Kamtschatka for about thirty roubles each. The Chinese\nmerchant at Kiachta purchases them at more than double that\nprice, and sells them again at Pekin at a great advance, whence\na farther profitable trade is made with some of them to Japan.\nIf, therefore, a skin is worth thirty roubles in Kamtschatka, to be\ntransported first to Okotzk, thence by land to Kiachta, a distance of 1,364 miles; thence to Pekin, 760 miles more; and\nafter that to be conveyed to Japan, what a prodigiously advantageous trade might be carried on direct to Japan, which is\nabout a fortnight or three weeks' sail from Kamtschatka.\nIt was now resolved, in consequence of the latitude given by\nthe instruction of the Board of Admiralty, to run along the\nKuriles, and to survey the eastern coasts of the Japanese\nislands, previous to returning homewards, and Captain Gore\ngave orders for Macao to be the place of rendezvous in case of\nseparation.\nThey coasted along the peninsula of Kamtschatka with\nvariable weather, and on the 12 th, at six in the afternoon, they\nsaw from the masthead Cape Lopatka, the southernmost extremity of the peninsula. This point of land, which is a low\n APPENDIX.\n39i\nflat cape, formed a marked object in the geography of the eastern\ncoast of Asia, and by an accurate observation and several good\nangles, they determined its precise situation to be in latitude\n510 o', and longitude 1560 45'. At the same time they saw,\ntoo, the first of the Kurile islands, called Shoomsha, and on the\nnext day they saw the second, Paramousir; the latter is the\nlargest of the Kuriles subject to Russia; but the gale increasing\nfrom the west, they were never able to approach it nearer than\nto observe its general aspect, which was very high land, almost\nentirely coverecl with snow, and to ascertain its situation, which\nwas found to be 1 o' west longitude from Lopatka, and its latitude 500 46' at the north, and 490 58' at the south end.\nOn the 14th and 15 th, the wind blowing steadily from the\nwestward, they were obliged to stand to the southward, and\nwere consequently hindered from seeing any more of the Kurile\nislands. In the situation they then found themselves, they were\nalmost surrounded by the supposed discoveries, of former navigators. To the southward and south-west were placed, in the\nFrench charts, a group of five islands, called the Three Sisters,\nZellany, and Zunasher. They were about ten leagues, according to the same maps, to the westward of the land of De Gama;\nand as the Company's Land, Staten Island, and the famous land\nof Jesso were also supposed to lie nearly in the same direction,\nthis course was deemed to deserve the preference, and they\nhauled round to the westward, the wind having shifted to the\nnorth. A succession of gales, however, and now and then a\nstorm, that reduced them to their courses, drove them too much\nto the southward, prevented them from falling in even with the\nsouthernmost of the Kurile islands, and obliged them at last\nto give up all further thoughts of discovery to the north of\nJapan.\nOn the 22 nd, the gale having abated, they let out the reefs\nof the topsails and made more sail. At noon they were in\nlatitude 400 58', and longitude 1480 17', and two small land\nbirds being taken on board, plainly indicated they could not be\nany great distance from the land; they therefore hauled up to\nthe west-north-west, in which direction the southernmost islands\nseen by Spanberg, and said to be inhabited by hairy men, lay\n 392\nAPPENDIX.\nat the distance of about fifty leagues. They saw several other\nsigns of land; but, on the 24th, the wind shifted to the north,\nand blew a fresh gale, so that they finally gave up all further\nsearch for islands to the north of Japan, and shaped their course\nwest-south-west, for the north part of that island.\nOn the 26th, at daybreak, they descried high land to the\nwestward, which proved to be Japan. The country consisted\nof a double range of mountains; it abounded with wood, and\nhad a pleasing variety of hills and dales. They saw the smoke\nof several towns, and many houses near the shore, in pleasant\nand cultivated situations. They stood off and on, according as\nthe weather permitted them, till the 28th in the afternoon, when\nthey lost sight of the land, and from its breaking off so suddenly,\nthey conjectured that what they had before seen was a cluster\nof islands, lying off the mainland of Japan. The next day they\nsaw land again, eleven leagues to the southward. The coast\nappeared straight and unbroken; towards the sea it was low,\nbut rose gradually into hills of a moderate height, whose tops\nwere tolerably even, and covered with wood.\nAt nine o'clock, the wind shifting to the southward, they\ntacked and stood off to the east, and soon after they saw a\nvessel close in with the land, standing along shore to the northward, and another in the offing, coming down before the wind.\nObjects of any kind, belonging to a country so famous and yet\nso little known, excited a general curiosity, and every soul on\nboard was upon deck in an instant to gaze at them. The vessel\nto windward passed ahead of them at the distance of about half\na mile. It would have been easy to have spoken with her; but\nperceiving, by her manoeuvres, that she was much frightened,\nCaptain Gore was not willing to augment her terrors, and\nthinking that they should have many better opportunities of\ncommunicating with the Japanese, suffered her to go off without\ninterruption. There appeared to be about six men on board,\nand, according to the best conjectures that could be formed,\nthe vessel was about forty tons burden. She had but one mast,\non which was hoisted a square sail, extended by a yard aloft,\nthe braces of which worked forward. Halfway down the sail\ncame three pieces of black cloth, at equal distances from each\n APPENDIX.\n393\nother. The vessel was higher at each end than in the midship,\nand from her appearance and form she did not appear to be\nable to sail otherwise than large.\nSoon after the wind increased so much that our navigators\nwere reduced to their courses; and the sea ran as high as any\none on board ever remembered to have seen it. If the Japanese\nvessels are, as Ksempfer describes them, open in the stern, it\nwould not have been possible for those they saw to have survived the fury of the storm; but as the appearance of the\nweather, all the preceding part of the day, foretold its coming,\nand one of the sloops had, notwithstanding, stood far out to sea,\nit was concluded they were perfectly capable of bearing a gale\nof wind.\nOur navigators were blown off the land by this gale, but on\nthe 30th they saw it again, at the distance of about fifteen\nleagues, appearing in detached parts, but it could not be determined whether they were small islands or parts of Japan.\nOn the 1 st of November they saw a number of Japanese\nvessels close in with the land, several seemingly engaged in\nfishing, and others standing along shore. They discovered to\nthe westward a remarkably high mountain, with a round top,\nrising far inland. As this was the most remarkable hill on the\ncoast, they wished to have settled its situation exactly; but\nonly having had a single view, they were obliged to be contented with such accuracy as their circumstances would allow.\nIts latitude was reckoned to be 350 20' and its longitude\n1400 26'.\nAs the Dutch charts make the coast of Japan extend about\nten leagues to the south-west of White Point (supposed to be\nthe southernmost land then in sight) our navigators stood off to\nthe eastward, to weather the point. At midnight they again\ntacked, expecting to fall in with the land to the southward, but\nwere surprised to find, in the morning, that during eight hours,\nin which they supposed they had made a course of nine leagues\nto the south-west, they had in reality been carried eight leagues\nin a direction diametrically opposite. Whence they calculated\nthat the current had set to the north-east by north, at the rate\nof at least five miles an hour.\n 394\n. APPENDIX.\nOn the 3rd of November they were again blown off the land\nby a heavy gale, and found themselves upwards of fifty leagues\noff, which circumstance, together with the extraordinary effect\nof the currents they had experienced, the late season of the\nyear, the unsettled state of the weather, and the little likelihood\nof any change for the better, made Captain Gore resolve to\nleave Japan altogether, and proceed in the voyage for China.\nOn the 4th and 5th our navigators, continuing their course\nto the south-east, passed great quantities of pumice-stone. These\nstones appeared to have been thrown into the sea by eruptions\nof various dates, as many of them were covered with barnacles,\nand others quite bare. . On the 13th they had a most violent\ngale from the northward. In the morning of the 13th, the wind\n. shifting to the north-west, brought with it fair weather; but\nthough they were, at that time, nearly in the situation given to\nthe island of San Juan, they saw no appearance of land. They\ncontinued to pass much pumice-stone; indeed the prodigious\nquantities of that substance which floated in the sea, between\nJapan and the Bashee Islands, seemed to indicate that some\ngreat volcanic convulsion must have happened in that part of\nthe Pacific Ocean.\nOn the 14th they discovered two islands, and on the next day\na third; but Captain Gore, finding that a boat could not land\nwithout some danger, from the great surf that broke on the\nshore, kept on his course to the westward. The middle island\nis about five miles long; the south point is a high barren hill,\npresenting an evident volcanic crater. The earth, rock, or sand,\nfor it was not easy to distinguish of which its surface was composed, exhibited various colours, and a considerable part was\nconjectured to be sulphur, and some of the officers on board\nthe Resolution thought they saw steams rising from the top of\nthe hill. From these circumstances Captain Gore gave it the\nname of Sulphur Island. A long narrow neck of land connects\nthe hill with the south end of the island, which spreads out\ninto a circumference of three or four leagues, and is of moderate\nheight. The north and south islands appeared to be single\nmountains of a considerable height. Sulphur Island is in latitude 240 84', longitude 1410 12'. The north island in latitude\n APPENDIX.\n395\n250 14', longitude 1410 io', and the south island in latitude\n240 22', and longitude 1410 20'.\nHence our navigators proceeded for the Bashee Islands,\nhoping to procure at them such a supply of refreshment as\nwould help to shorten their stay at Macao; but Captain Gore,\nbeing guided by the opinions of Commodore and Captain\nWallis, as to the situation of these islands, which differ materially from Dampier's, they were foiled in their endeavours to\nfind them, although, in the day time, the ships spread two or\nthree leagues from each other, and in the night, when under an\neasy sail.\nOn the 27th, being in longitude 1180 30', and having got to\nthe westward of the Bashees, according to Mr. Byron's account,\nour navigators hauled their wind to the north-west, hoping to\nweather the Prata shoals; but at four in the morning of the\n28th, the breakers were close under their lee; at daylight they\nsaw the island of Prata, and finding they could not weather the\nshoal, ran to leeward of it. As they passed the south side, they\nsaw two remarkable patches on the edge of the breakers, that\nlooked like wrecks. On the south-west side of the reef, and\nnear the south end of the island, they thought they saw openings in the reefs which promised safe anchorage.\nIn the forenoon of the 29th they passed several Chinese\nfishing boats, and the sea was covered with wrecks of boats\nthat had been lost, as they conjectured, in the late boisterous\nweather. They were in latitude 220 i', having run no miles\nsince the preceding noon.\nOn the 30th they ran along the Lema Islands, and got a *\nChinese pilot on board. In obedience to the instruction\ngiven to Captain Cook by the Admiralty, the captains now required of the officers and men of both ships to give up their\njournals and what other papers they had in their possession relative to the voyage, which was cheerfully complied with ; and\nat nine o'clock in the evening of the following day they anchored\nthree leagues from Macao.\nHere, upon sending on shore to negotiate for supplies of\nprovisions, &c, they first received intelligence of the occurrences in Europe during the protracted period of their absence.\n 396\nAPPENDIX.\nOn the 4th of December they stood into the Typa, and moored\nwith the stream-anchor and cable to the westward.\nCaptain King was sent up to Canton to expedite the supplies\nthat were wanted, and experienced every possible assistance\nfrom the supercargoes and gentlemen of the Company's factory\nthere. The purchase of the provisions and store wanted was\ncompleted on the 26th, and the whole stock was sent down on\nthe following day by a vessel which Captain Gore had engaged\nfor the purpose. Twenty sea-otter skins were sold at Canton\nby Captain King for eight hundred dollars. At the ships a\nbrisk trade was carried on in the same article by both officers\nand seamen. The sea-otter skins every day rose in value, and\na few prime skins, which were clean and well preserved, were\nsold for one hundred and twenty dollars each. The whole\namount of the value, in specie and goods, that was got for the\nfurs in both ships did not fall short of two thousand pounds\nsterling, and it was generally supposed that at least two-thirds\nof the quantity originally obtained from the Americans were\nspoiled or worn out, or had been given away or sold at Kamtschatka. In consequence hereof, the rage with which the seamen were possessed to return to Cook's River, and by another\ncargo of skins to make their fortunes, was at one time not far\nshort of mutiny. The numerous voyages that have since been\nundertaken for the prosecution of the trade here suggested\nhave rendered it familiar to the merchants both of Britain and\nof America; and, though it has not latterly been productive of\nadvantages equal to those which were realized by the first ad-\n* venturers, is still a branch of commerce that is successfully\npursued.\nThe barter which had been carrying on with the Chinese for\ntheir sea-otter skins produced a very whimsical change in the\ndress of the crews. On their arrival in the Typa, nothing\ncould exceed the ragged appearance both of the younger\nofficers and seamen; almost the whole of their original stock\nof European clothes having been long worn out or patched up\nwith skins, or the various manufactures they had met with in\nthe course of their discoveries. These were now again mixed\nand eked out with the gaudiest silks and cottons of China.\n APPENDIX.\nOn the nth of January two s\ntion ran off with a six-oared cut\nof. It was supposed that they\nd been seduced t\nfortune by returning\nvailing notion of making\nislands.\nOn account of the war between England and America, with\nFrance and Spain as her allies, of which they received intelligence at Canton, they put themselves in the best posture of\ndefence, the Resolution mounting sixteen guns and the Discovery ten. They had reason, however, to believe, from the\ngenerosity of their enemies, that these precautions were superfluous; being informed that instructions had been found on\nboard all the French ships of war captured in Europe directing\ntheir commanders, in case of falling in with the ships that sailed\nunder the command of Captain Cook, to suffer them to proceed\nwithout molestation; and the same orders were also said to\nhave been given by the American Congress to the vessels employed in their service. In return for these liberal concessions\nCaptain Gore resolved to refrain from availing himself of any\nopportunities of capture, and to preserve, throughout the remainder of the voyage, the strictest neutrality.\nOn the 12th of January, 1780, our navigators got under sail\nfrom Macao; on the roth they saw Pulo Sapata : and on the\n20th descried Pulo Condore, and anchored in the harbour at\nthe south-west end of the island. The town is situated at the east\nend, and here they procured eight buffaloes, with other refreshments. From the untractableness and prodigious strength of\nthe buffaloes, it was both a tedious and difficult operation to\nget them on board. The method of conducting them was by\npassing ropes through their nostrils and round their horns ; but,\nhaving been once enraged at the sight of our men, they became\nso furious that they sometimes broke the trees to which they\nwere often under the necessity of being tied : sometimes they\ntore asunder the cartilage of the nostril through which the ropes\nran, and got loose. On these occasions all the. exertions of\nthe men to recover them would have been ineffectual without\nthe assistance of some young boys, whom these animals would\npermit to approach them, and by whose little management\n 398 APPENDIX.\ntheir rage was soon appeased. A circumstance respecting\nthese animals, which was thought no less singular than their\ngentleness toward, and, as it should seem, affection for, little\nchildren, was that they had not been twenty-four hours on\nboard before they became the tamest of all creatures. Captain\nKing kept two of them, a male and a female, for a considerable\ntime, which became great favourites with he sailors ; and thinking that a breed of animals of such strength and size, some of\nthem weighing, when dressed, seven hundred pounds, would be\na valuable acquisition, intended to have brought them with him\nto England, but his intention was frustrated by an incurable\nhurt which one of them received at sea.\nOur navigators remained here till the 28th of January, when\nthey unmoored and proceeded on their homeward voyage,\npassing through the Straits of Banca and of Sunda without any\noccurrence worthy of particular remark. They saw two or\nthree Dutch ships in the Straits of Sunda. They watered at\nPrince's Island at the entrance of the Straits, and got a supply\nof fowls and turtle there.\nFrom the time of their entering the Straits of Banca, they\nbegan to experience the powerful effects of the pestilential climate, and malignant putrid fevers, with obstinate coughs and\ndysenteries, prevailed amongst the crews, happily, however,\nwithout one fatal termination.\nOn the 18th of February they left the Straits of Sunda; in\nthe night between the 25th and 26th they experienced a most\nviolent storm, during which almost every sail they had bent was\nsplit to rags, and the next day they were obliged to bend their\nlast suit of sails, and to knot and splice the rigging, their cordage\nbeing all expended.\nOn the 7th of April they saw the land of Africa, and on the\n-9th they fell in with an English East India packet that had left\nTable Bay three days before. On the evening of the 12th they\n-dropped anchor in False Bay, and the next morning stood into\nSimon's Bay.\nHaving completed their victualling, and furnished themselves\nwith the necessary supply of naval stores, our navigators sailed\nout of the bay on the 9th of May. On the 12th of June they\n THE MORAL\nAN ODE.\nBY MISS HELEN MARIA WILLIAMS.\nAIR Otaheite, fondly bless'd\nBy him, who long was doomed to brave\nThe fury of the polar wave,\nThat fiercely mounts the frozen rock\nWhere the harsh sea bird rears her nest,\nAnd learns the raging surge to mock\u2014\nThere, Night, that loves eternal storm,\nDeep and lengthen'd darkness throws,\nAnd untried Danger's doubtful form\nIts half seen horror shows !\nWhile Nature, with a look so wild,\nLeans on the cliffs in chaos piled;\nThat here, the awed, astonish'd mind\nForgets, in that o'erwhelming hour,\nWhen her rude hands the storms unbind,\nIn all the madness of her power;\nThat she who spreads the savage gloom,\nThat she can dress in melting grace,\nIn sportive Summer's lavish bloom,\nThe awful terrors of her face ;\nAnd wear the sweet perennial smile\nThat charms in Otaheite's isle.\nYet, amid her fragrant bowers,\nWhere Spring, whose dewy fingers strew\nO'er other lands some fleeting flowers,\nLives, in blossoms ever new ;\nWhence arose that shriek of pain ?\nWhence the tear that flows in vain ?\u2014\nDeath ! thy unrelenting hand\nTears some transient human band\u2014 \u2022\n The priest, when high the billow springs,\nFrom the wave unsullied, flings\nWaters pure, that, sprinkled near,\nSanctify the hallow'd bier :\nBut never may one drop profane\nThe relics with forbidden stain !\nNow around the funeral shrine,\nLed in mystic mazes, twine\nGarlands, where the plantain weaves\nWith the palm's luxuriant leaves ;\nAnd o'er each sacred knot is spread\nThe plant devoted to the dead.\nFive pale moons with trembling light\nShall gaze upon the lengthen'd rite;\nShall see distracted Beauty tear\nThe tresses of her flowing hair :\nThose shining locks, no longer dear,\nShe wildly scatters o'er the bier;\nAnd careless gives the frequent wound\nThat bathes in precious blood the ground.\nWhen along the western sky,\nDay's reflected colours die,\nAnd Twilight rules the doubtful hour\nEre slow-paced Night resumes her power;\nMark the cloud that lingers still\nDarkly on the hanging hill!\nThere the disembodied mind\nHears, upon the hollow wind,\nIn unequal cadence thrown,\nSorrow's oft-repeated moan:\u2014\nStill some human passions sway\nThe spirit late immersed in clay;\nStill the faithful sigh is dear,\nStill beloved the fruitless tear!\nFive waning moons, with wandering light,\nHave pass'd the shadowy bound of night,\nAnd mingled their departing ray\nWith the soft fires of early day;\nLet the last sad rite be paid\nGrateful to the conscious shade :\nLet the priest, with pious care,\nNow the wasted relics bear\nWhere the Morai's awful gloom\nShrouds the venerable tomb;\nLet the plantain lift its head,\nCherish'd emblem of the dead ;\n APPENDIX.\nSlow and solemn, o'er the grave,\nLet the twisted plumage wave,\nSymbol hallow'd, and divine,\nOf the god who guards the shrine\u2014\nHark !\u2014that shriek of strange'despair\nNever shall disturb the air,\nNever, never shall it rise\nBut for. Nature's broken ties!\u2014\nBright crescent! that with lucid smile\nGild'st the Morai's lofty pile,\nWhose broad lines of shadow^ throw\nA gloomy horror far below;\nWitness, O recording Moon!\nAll the rites are duly done;\nBe the faithful tribute o'er,\nThe hovering spirit asks no more !\nMortals, cease the pile to tread,\nLeave, to silence, leave the dead.\nBut where may she who loves to stray\nMid shadows of funereal gloom,\nAnd courts the sadness of the tomb,\nWhere may she seek that proud Morai,\nWhose dear memorial points the place\nWhere fell the friend of human race ?\nYe lonely Isles! on ocean's bound\nYe bloom'd through Time's long flight^unknown,\nTill Cook the untrack'd billow pass'd,\nTill he along the surges cast\nPhilanthropy's connecting zone,\nAnd spread her loveliest blessings round.\nNot like that murderous band he came,\nWho stain'd with blood the new-found West;\nNor as, with unrelenting breast,\nFrom Britain's free enlighten'd land,\nHer sons now seek Angola's strand,\nEach tie most sacred to unbind,\nTo load with chains a brother's frame,\nAnd plunge a dagger in the mind;\nMock the sharp anguish bleeding there\nOf Nature in her last despair !\nGreat Cook ! Ambition's lofty flame,\nSo oft directed to destroy,\nLed thee to circle with thy name,\nThe smile of love, and hope, and joy!\nThose fires that lend the dangerous blaze\nThe devious comet trails afar,\n APPENDIX.\nMight form the pure benignant rays\nThat gild the morning's gentle star\u2014\nSure, where the Hero's ashes rest,\nThe nations late emerged from night\nStill haste\u2014with love's unwearied care :\nThat spot in lavish flowers is dress'd,\nAnd fancy's dear inventive rite\nStill paid with fond observance there !\nAh no!\u2014around his fatal grave,\nNo lavish flowers were ever strew'd,\nNo votive gifts were ever laid\u2014\nHis blood a savage shore bedew'd!\nHis mangled limbs, one hasty prayer,\nOne pious tear by friendship paid,\nWere cast upon the raging wave!\nDeep in the wild abyss he lies,\nFar from the cherish'd scene of home ;\nFar, far from Her whose faithful sighs\nA husband's trackless course pursue;\nWhose tender fancy loves to roam\nWith him o'er lands and oceans new;\nAnd gilds with Hope's deluding form\nThe gloomy pathway of the storm.\nYet, Cook ! immortal wreaths are thine -\nWhile Albion's grateful toil shall raise\nThe marble tomb, the trophied bust,\nFor ages faithful to its trust;\nWhile, eager to record thy praise,\nShe bids the Muse of History twine\nThe chaplet of undying fame,\nAnd tell each polish'd land thy worth:\nThe ruder natives of the earth\nShall oft repeat thy honour'd name;\nWhile infants catch the frequent sound,\nAnd learn to lisp the oral tale;\nWhose fond remembrance shall prevail\nTill Time has reach'd his destin'd bound.\nCHISWICK PR]\n\u2014C. WHITTINGHAM, TOOKS COURT CHANCERY LANE,\n I Leicester Square, London,\nMay 1878.\nICKERS AND ICON'S\nEtgt\nOF\nILLUSTRATED, STANDARD, AND POPULAR\n\" THE NEW ART GIFT BOOK FOR THE SEASON\"\nUniform with \" Wey's Rome \" and \" Rousselet's India,\"\nSuper royal ^to, cloth elegant, full gilt side, price \u00a32, 12s. 6d.\nTHE RHINE, FROM ITS SOURCE TO THE SEA.\nTranslated by G. C. T. Bartley, from the German of Karl Stieler,\nH. Wachenhusen, and F. W. Hacklander,\nWITH FOUR HUNDRED AND TWENTY ILLUSTRATIONS\nBy R. Puttner, A. & O. Achenbach, A. Baur, C. F. Deiker, W. Diez,\nG. Franz, F. Keller, L. Knaus, L. Ritter, G. Schonleber,\nC. Scheuren, Th. Schutz, W. Simmler, B. Vautier,\nTh. Weber, R. Jordan, L. Willroider, and others.\n*#* The most stiperb book on \" The Rhine \" ever published.\nFrom the Art Journal, February 1, 1878.\n\" In truth, nothing seems to be omitted that could help to develop the scenery and life of the Rhine.\nOf the thousands of our countrymen who have been 'up the Rhine' few would not covet this volume.\"\nFrom the Daily News, November 13, 1877.\n\" This magnificent book, comprising no less than 425 illustrations beautifully executed and engraved.\n. . . The views extend to every variety of scenery. On the whole, this may be accounted the most complete, as it is probably the most costly, work on the subject of this famous river which has yet been\npublished.\"\nFrom the Times, December 3, 1877.\n\" As a tourist's guide it is very complete and artistic too.\"\nFrom the Scotsman, November 6, 1877.\n\" No pains has been spared with the \"typography, and it is not often, even in these days of exquisite\nprinting, to find wood engraving produced with so much delicacy and clearness. Of the character of\nthese engravings it would be difficult to speak too highly. The work is delightful reading, and it is as\ndelightful for its pictures. The book is indeed one that may well be coveted, and that when once got may\nbe highly prized.'\nFrom, ther Pall Mall Gazette, December 10, 1877.\n\"The drawings so profusely scattered over these pages are often of admirable quality. Altogether\nwe may doubt whether the Rhine has ever before been so magnificently illustrated or so minutely described.\"\nFrom the Saturday Review, December 22, 1877.\n\" We have very great pleasure in recommending this interesting itinerary, and these attractive and\npicturesque drawings which have real feeling and novelty, and refresh the eye and mind with memories oi\nthe free German Rhine.\"\n 4 Bickers and Son, I Leicester Square, London.\nA New and Complete Edition, cloth elegant, reduced from \u00a3$, 3.?. to \u00a32, 2s.\nElegantly bound in morocco, super elegant, \u00a34, 4s.\nINDIA AND ITS NATIVE PRINCES: Travels in Central India, and in the\nPresidencies of Bombay and Bengal. Dedicated by express permission to H.R.H.\nthe Prince of Wales. By Louis Rotjsselet. Carefully Revised and Edited by\nLieut.-Colonel C. Buckle, and containing 316 Illustrations and 6 Maps.\nFrom the Times, October 7, 1873.\n\" Nothing can be clearer than M. Rousselet's description of the countries and people he visited during\nthese five years, and we seem ourselves to be living among them, as they pass in his vivid pages in stately\nsplendour under our eyes; The book is superbly illustrated also, and with remarkable accuracy, for every\nface in it is a likeness which any Anglo-Indian will at once recognise We might quote many\nstriking extracts from M. Rousselet's work for the entertainment of our readers ; but we have said enough\nto justify us in recommending it warmly to their notice. In the magnificent collection of books which the\nPrince of Wales hasselected for presents to the princes, chiefs, and other distinguished natives of India,\nare fifty copies of this work. His Royal Highness's tour will closely follow M. Rousselet's route, and, no\ndoubt, will be followed in his volume by many in anticipation, and often again in illustration, of the Royal\nprogress.\"\nFrom the Graphic, October 16, 1875.\nI The gorgeous quarto, entitled ' India and its Native Princes,' is the most agreeable as well as the\nmost magnificent book of Indian Travel we have had for many years. It is no slight testimony to its\nmerits that fifty copies of it have been included in the presentation volumes specially provided for the Prince\nof Wales for distribution among native notables. It covers, to a great extent, the route which the Prince\nhimself will take in his journey through the East. But its chief attraction lies in its vivid pictures of scenes\nand phases of Indian life at the semi-independent native Courts, which, since the days of the old travellers,\nhave rarely been described at length, and which, indeed, only guests of M. Rousselet's exceptional qualifications would be permitted to examine at their leisure The illustrations (316 in all), whether of\nnative races, scenery, or buildings, are quite as good as the letterpress. We know, indeed, no book about\nIndia, where its architectural monuments, so often rather bizarre than^ attractive, are so effectively depicted, or where the artist has been more successful in choosing for his sketch the most advantageous\npoint of view.\"\nROME, BY FRANCIS WEY. With an Introduction by W. W. Story, Author\nof \" Roba di Roma.\" New Edition, beautifully illustrated with 346 large engravings\non wood by the most celebrated French Artists, a magnificent volume in super royal \"\n4to, cloth, reduced from \u00a32, 2s. to \u00a31, 6j. ; or, morocco, super elegant, gilt edges,\n. A3** 3*-\n\\* A few copies of the original Edition, cloth extra, \u00a33, y.\nEXAMPLES OF MODERN BRITISH ART. Forty Masterpieces by the most\ncelebrated Painters of the English School, from Hogarth to the present day. Reproduced by the Permanent Woodbury process. With Biographical Sketches of\nthe Artists. Size of Plates, 9^ in. by 7 in. Imperial 4to, cloth elegant, full gilt\nsides and edges, \u00a32, 2s.$ or elegantly bound in morocco, super extra, gilt edges,\n4 guineas.\nMUSEE FRANCAIS (THE). Fifty of the finest Examples of the Old Masters\nfrom this famous Collection. Reproduced in Permanent Woodburytype, with\nDescriptive Letterpress to each plate, printed on fine thick paper at the Chiswick\nPress. \u00a32, 2s.; or elegantly bound in mdrocco, super extra, with inlaid sides and\ngilt edges, \u00a34, 4*\nDRESDEN GALLERY (THE). Fifty of the finest Examples of the Old Masters\nin this famous Gallery. Reproduced in Permanent Woodburytype, with Descriptive\nLetterpress to each plate; printed on fine thick paper at the Chiswick Press.\nImperial 4to, cloth elegant, full gilt sides and edges, \u00a32, 2s.$ or elegantly bound in\nmorocco, inlaid, super extra, 4 guineas.\nBOYDELL GALLERY (THE). A Series of Ninety-eight Pictures illustrating the\nDramatic Works of Shakespeare. With Descriptive Letterpress to each Plate. A\nNew Edition. Imperial 4to, cloth elegant, reduced from \u00a33, 3s. to \u00a32, 2s.; or\nelegantly bound in morocco, super extra, 4 guineas.\n CONTEMPORARY ART. Thirty Etchings and Chromo-lithographs, after the\nOriginal Pictures by Eminent Artists of the present day, with Explanatory Text.\nSmall folio, cloth elegant, richly gilt, \u00a32, 2s., reduced to \u00a3l, 5-r.\nMILTON (JOHN), THE POETICAL WORKS OF. Printed in large type.\nWith Life by A. Chalmers, M.A., F.S.A. With Twenty-four Illustrations by\nJohn Martin in Permanent Woodburytype. A New 4to, Drawing Room Table\nEdition. Cloth elegant, \u00a31, is.; or morocco elegant, \u00a32, 2s,\nDitto, demy 8vo, cloth elegant, 12s. 6d.\nCHRISTIAN YEAR (THE). Thoughts in Verse for the Sundays and Holidays\nthroughout the Year. By John Keble. Exquisitely printed on toned paper, with\nelaborate borders round every page. Printed at the Chiswick Press. Small 4to,\ncloth extra, with Twenty-four Illustrations by Fr. Overbeck, Reproduced in Permanent Photography. 15^.\nDitto, antique calf, \u00a31, 10s.\nDitto, morocco elegant, \u00a32, 2s.\n\\* This charming series of illustrations to the Scriptures reminds one forcibly of the design and vigour\nof Raphael, and combined with the chaste typography of the Chiswick Press, must render it the\nfavourite edition.\n\u2014-\u2014 Another Edition, in fcap. 8vo, with Twelve Photographic Pictures by Fr.\nOverbeck. Selected from the 4to edition. Cloth gilt, 5^.\nDitto, calf antique, red edges, 12s.\nDitto, morocco extra, iSs.\n\u2014-- Another Edition, 32mo, cloth extra, is. 6d.; or with 6 Photographic Pictures,\nelegantly bound in cloth extra, gilt edges, 2s. 6d.\n\u2014 Edition de Luxe. Beautifully printed on superfine paper, with red lines.\nround each page, and illustrated with 40 exquisitely illuminated miniatures\ngold and colours, being exact facsimiles from Missal Manuscripts of the 14th and\n15th centuries. Cloth, \u00a31, lis. 6d.\nDitto, morocco, gilt edges, \u00a32, i$st\nHacrotr's. lOotine. on t&e 90ft\u00bbWe %e\u00ab$ anti tfie\n<2Eig!)teentf) Century\nImp. Svo., elegantly bound in Cloth, full gilt sides and leather back.\nTHE ARTS IN THE MIDDLE AGES AND AT THE PERIOD OF THE\nRENAISSANCE. By Paul Lacroix. 19 Chromo-lithographs and 400 Wood\nEngravings. \u00a31, lis. 6d. ; reducedt02u.net.\nMANNERS, CUSTOMS, AND DRESS DURING THE MIDDLE AGES.\nBy Paul Lacroix. Illustrated with 15 Chromo-lithographic Prints and upwards\nof 400 Engravings on Wood. \u00a31, lis. 6d.; reduced to 21 s. net.\nMILITARY AND RELIGIOUS LIFE IN THE MIDDLE AGES, AND\nAT THE PERIOD OF THE RENAISSANCE. By Paul Lacroix. 13\nChromo-lithographs and 400 Engravings on Wood. \u00a31, lis. 6d.; reduced to\n21s. net.\nTHE EIGHTEENTH CENTURY. Its Institutions, Customs, and Costumes.\nFrance, 1700-1789. By Paul Lacroix. Translated. Illustrated by 21 Chromolithographs and 351 Wood Engravings. \u00a32, 2s.; reduced to 21s. net.\nThe New Volume, completing the Work on the Middle Ages.\nSCIENCE AND LITERATURE IN THE MIDDLE AGES AND AT\nTHE PERIOD OF THE RENAISSANCE. With 13 Chromo-lithographs\nand 400 Engravings on Wood. \u00a31, 1 is. 6d.\n \"THE LEICESTER SQUARE EDITION\"\n7\"he most charming single volume edition of Shakespeare ever published.\nSHAKESPEARE'S COMPLETE WORKS.\nEdited by Charles and Mary Cowden Clarke.\nWith Portrait and 21 choice Illustrations from the | Boydell Gallery.\"\nCloth elegant, gilt edges, 15^.; or calf extra, gilt edges, \u00a31, Ss.\nMorocco, blocked, gilt edges, \u00a31, 16s.\nSHAKESPEARE\u2014THE BOYDELL TABLE EDITION. 2 vols. The\nabove text printed on thick superfine paper, with Sixty-six Illustrations. Cloth\nelegant, gilt edges, \u00a31, 1 is. 6d.\nA new illustrated Library Edition of Shakespeare, 4 vols, demy Bvo, cloth extra,\nprice 2 guineas.\nTHE BOYDELL SHAKESPEARE. The Complete Works of William Shakespeare. Edited, with a Scrupulous Revision of the text, by Charles and Mary\nCowden Clarke. With Glossary, &c. Illustrated with 66 Illustrations from the\n\" Boydell Gallery.\"\n*\u00ab* This is a new edition printed on fine paper, and will supply the want long felt of a handsome 8vo\nedition well printed with good type, and illustrated, in a compact form and at a moderate price.\nIt will form a capital Wedding or Christmas gift, and may be had elegantly bound in calf or\nmorocco.\nMIDSUMMER NIGHT'S DREAM (A). By William Shakespeare. Profusely illustrated with Wood Engravings executed in the highest style of art, from\ndesigns by Alfred Fredericks. Demy 4to, cloth, super elegant, bevelled boards\nand gilt edges, 15s.; reduced to Js. 6d. net.\nBAVARIAN HIGHLANDS (THE) AND SALZKAMMERGUT. Profusely\n. illustrated. Imp. 4to, cloth gilt, \u00a31, 5s. ; reduced to p. 6d. net.\nFRENCH AND SPANISH PAINTERS. Etchings on Steel from famous Pictures, with Critical and Biographical Notices of the Artists, 4to, cloth elegant,\n\u00a3l, lis. 6d. ; reduced to 12s. net.\nA Great Bargain.\nSELECTED PICTURES FROM THE GALLERIES AND PRIVATE\nCOLLECTIONS OF GREAT BRITAIN. A Series of 150 line Engravings\nfrom the best Artists, edited by S. C. Hall, Esq., F.S.A., &c. Proofs on India ,\npaper, imperial folio, each Plate printed with the greatest care, and accompanied by\na descriptive page of letterpress of corresponding size. Four volumes, in four neat\nportfolios, pub. at \u00a3$2, 10s.; now offered at Fifteen Guineas net.\nOr, Bound in Two volumes, half morocco, elegantly gilt, Eighteen Guineas net.\nOr, in whole morocco, super extra, Twenty-one Guineas net.\nA few copies of Artist's Proofs, atlas folio, also on India paper, and of which only a\n\u25a0few copies were printed, Four volumes as above, in four neat portfolios, pub. at\nj\u00a3io5 ; offered at Nineteen Guineas.\nOr, Bound in Two volumes, half morocco, elegantly gilt, Twenty-Four Guineas.\nThe few remaining copies are offered to effect a clearance at less than cost price.\nSERMON ON THE MOUNT (THE). Illuminated by W. & J. Audsley,\nArchitects'; Chromo-lithographed by W. R. Tymms. Folio, in emblematical cloth\nbinding, PI Is.\n List of Illustrated and Standard Modem Books.\n\"A BOOK FOR THE COUNTRY.\"\nOUR SUMMER MIGRANTS. An Account of the Migratory Birds which pass\nthe Summer in the British Islands. By J. E. Harting, F.L.S., F.Z.S., author of\n\" A Handbook of British Birds,\" a new edition of White's \"Selborne,\" &c, &c.\nIllustrated with 30 Illustrations on Wood, from Designs by Thomas Bewick.\nSecond and cheaper Edition, fcap. 8vo, cloth elegant, ti; or calf extra,\nI or. 6d.\nA Library Edition of the above, with all the illustrations. Demy 8vo, cloth, super\nextra, gilt edges, ior. 6d.\nGOLDSMITH (OLIVER), THE LIFE AND TIMES OF, by John Forster,\nFifth Edition, with Forty Woodcuts. Demy 8vo, cloth elegant, gilt edges, 7*. 6d.;\nor calf extra, 12s. 6d.\nNELSON, THE LIFE OF. By Robert Southey. Illustrated with 12 Plates\nby Westall and others, reproduced in Permanent Woodburytype. Facsimiles of\nNelson's Handwriting and Plan of Battle of the Nile. Cloth extra, gilt edges,\nJs. 6d.', or calf extra, 12.?. 6d.\nLAMB. TALES FROM SHAKESPEARE. By Charles and Mary Lamb.\nPrinted at the Chiswick Press, on superfine paper. Illustrated with 12 Plates from\nthe \" Boydell Gallery,\" reproduced in Permanent Woodburytype. New Edition,\ndemy 8vo, cloth extra, gilt edges, Js. 6d. ; or calf extra, I2J. 6d.\nThe new volume uniform with '' Lamb's Tales. \"\nTHE BEAUTIES OF SHAKESPEARE, by the Rev. William Dodd, LL.D.\nElegantly printed on fine paper. Illustrated with 12 plates, reproduced in Permanent\nWoodburytype. Demy 8vo, cloth extra, gilt edges, 7.?. 6d.; or calf extra, 12s. 6d.\n\"The Gem Pocket Edition.\"\nDODD'S BEAUTIES OF SHAKESPEARE. This exquisite little bijouh printed\non very fine cream-coloured paper, in the best manner of the Elzevir Press. 3J. 6d.;\nor bound in morocco, gilt edges, with tuck (like a pocketbook), $s.\n*** This edition will be kept elegantly bound in morocco, vellum, &c.\nTHE ADVENTURES OF MISS BROWN, MISS JONES, AND MISS\nROBINSON AT BIARRITZ AND IN THE PYRENEES. Imp. 410,\nboards, 10s. 6d.\nBOSH, by W.S. 4to, boards, ffl 6d.\nOBnglfef) (Pentleman'^ JLifirarg*\nDemy Svo, cloth extra {uniform binding), illustrated :\u2014\njOSWELL'S LIFE OF SAMUEL JOHNSON. With the Tours to\nWales and the Hebrides. A reprint of the first quarto edition, the text\ncarefully collated and restored ; all variations marked ; and the new notes\nembodying the latest information. The whole edited by Percy Fitzgerald,\nM.A., F.S.A. 3 vols, demy 8vo, cloth, 27s.\nD'ARBLAY'S (MADAME) DIARY AND LETTERS. Edited by her Niece,\nCharlotte Barret. A New Edition, illustrated by numerous fine Portraits\nengraved on Steel. 4 vols. 8vo, cloth extra, 36J.\nGOLDSMITH'S (OLIVER) LIFE AND TIMES. By John Forster. The\nIllustrated Library Edition. 2 vols, demy 8vo, cloth, 15.?.\nGRAMMONT (COUNT), MEMOIRS OF. By Anthony Hamilton. A\nNew Edition, with a Biographical Sketch of Count Hamilton, numerous Historical\nand Illustrative Notes by Sir Walter Scott, and 64 Copper-plate Portraits by\nEdward Scriven. 8vo, cloth extra,\"^.\n Bickers and Son, i Leicester Square, London.\nMAXWELL'S LIFE OF THE DUKE OF WELLINGTON. Three vols.\n8vo, with numerous highly finished Line and Wood Engravings by Eminent Artists.\nCloth extra, 22.y. 6d.\nMONTAGU'S (LADY MARY WORTLEY) LETTERS AND WORKS.\nEdited by Lord Wharncliffe. With important Additions and Corrections,\nderived from the Original Manuscripts, and a New Memoir. Two vols. 8vo, with\nfine Steel Portraits, cloth extra, iSs.\nROSCOE'S LIFE OF LORENZO DE MEDICI, called \"The Magnificent.\"\nA New and much improved Edition. Edited by his Son, Thomas Roscoe. Demy\n8vo, with Portraits and numerous Plates, cloth extra, 7^. 6d.\nROSCOE'S LIFE AND PONTIFICATE OF LEO THE TENTH.\nEdited by his Son, Thomas Roscoe, Two vols. 8vo, with numerous Plates, cloth\nextra, 15^,\nSAINT-SIMON (MEMOIRS OF THE DUKE OF), during the Reign of\nLouis the Fourteenth and the Regency. Translated from the French and edited by\nBayle St. John. A New Edition. Three vols. 8vo, cloth extra, 27.?.\nWALPOLE'S (HORACE) ANECDOTES OF PAINTING IN ENGLAND.\nWith some Account of the principal English Artists, and incidental Notices ot\nSculptors, Carvers, Enamellers, Architects, Medallists, Engravers, &c. With\nAdditions by Rev. James Dallaway. Edited, with Additional Notes by Ralph\nN. Wornum. Three* vols. 8vo, with upwards of 150 Portraits and Plates, cloth\nextra, \u00a31, Js.\nWALPOLE'S (HORACE) ENTIRE CORRESPONDENCE. Chronologically\narranged, with the Prefaces and Notes of Croker, Lord Dover, and others ; the\nNotes of all previous Editors, and Additional Notes by Peter Cunningham. Nine\nvols, 8vo, with numerous fine Portraits engraved on Steel, cloth extra, \u00a34, is.\n*#* The above offered in complete sets, 33 vols, uniformly bound.\nNet Price.\nCloth , *-, . Catalogue price ^14, Ss. od. , Offered at .\u00a311, os. od.\nHalf Calf , \u2022 . \u201e \u201e\u00a3i$,ios.od.\nCalf extra ,,,,,, \u201e ,, ^19, ior. od.\nTree marbled calf . , , , , , , . , . ^20, os. od.\nCfte Cfifetofcfe press. Reprints of \u00a9tantiarti autfi-m\nNO handsomer library books have ever issued from the press.\nEach Work is carefully edited, and collated with the early copies, and printed in the same\nstyle as those originally published by the late Mr. Pickering, and are\nuniform with Mitfords Milton, 8 vols.\nlUTLER'S (BISHOP) ANALOGY OF RELIGION. With Analytical\n' Index by the Rev. Edward Steere, LL.D. Cloth, gs.\n\u00ab The present edition has been furnished with an Index of the Texts of Scripture quoted,\nand an Index of Words and Things considerably fuller than any hitherto published.\n\u2014Editor's Preface.\nHERBERT'S POEMS AND REMAINS. With S. T. Coleridge's Notes, and\nLife of Izaak Walton. Revised, with Additional Notes, by Mr. J. Yeowell.\n2 vols. Cloth, 21s.\nTONSON'S (BEN) COMPLETE WORKS. With Notes, Critical and Explanatory,\nand a Biographical Memoir by W. Gifford, Esq. An exact reprint of the now\nscarce edition, with Introduction and Appendices by Lieut.-Colonel Cunningham,\n9 vols, medium 8vo, cloth* \u00a3$, $s.\n List of Illustrated and Standard Modern Books.\nMILTON'S WORKS IN PROSE AND VERSE. Edited by the Rev. J.,\nMitford. 8 vols, medium 8vo, j calf extra, \u00a3&, Ss. net. .\nAn entirely New Transcript of\"\" Pepy's Diary,\" by the\nRev. Mynors Bright, M.A.\nPEPYS, THE DIARY AND CORRESPONDENCE OF, from his MS. Cypher\nin the Pepysian Library, with a Life and Notes by Richard Lord Braybrooke ;\ndeciphered with Additional Notes by the Rev. Mynors Bright, M.A., President\nand Senior Fellow of Magdalene College, Cambridge. With Numerous Portraits\nfrom the collection in the Pepysian Library, printed in Permanent Woodburytype.\n6 vols, medium 8vo, cloth extra.\nIOO Copies, printed on large, fine Paper, for Subscribers only, at\u00a3i, lis. dd. per volume, net.\n\u25a0 *^* price f0 isfon-Subscribers, ^\"12, 12s. the set.\n\\* This edition of Pepys'fDiary contains one-third of additional Tnatter never before published, and\nwhich is perhaps more thoroughly characteristic of the Author than any that has hitherto\nappeared. Numbers of errors, which materially affect the sense of passages, are -in this new\ntranscript corrected, and a list of the principal of them will be published at the end of each\nvolume, to enable those interested to judge of the relative value of each edition. Lord Bray-\nbrooke's \"Additional Notes,\" printed in the sixth edition, have, by arrangement with Messrs.\nGeorge Bell & Son, been incorporated in this edition, together with Explanatory Notes by the\nRev. Mynors Bright.\nThe cloth binding is a facsimile of the bindings of the books in the Pepysian\nLibrary.\nRELIQUES OF ANCIENT ENGLISH POETRY, consisting of Old Heroic\nBallads, Songs, and other Pieces of our Earlier Poets, together with some few of\nlater date, by Thomas Percy, D.D., F.S.A. Edited, with a General Introduction, additional Prefaces, Notes, &c, by Henry B. Wheatley, F.S.A. 3 vols,\nmedium 8vo, cloth, 36.?.\n%* 25 Copies printed on fine large Paper, price, in half roxburghe, 4.2s. per vol,\nSPENSER'S COMPLETE WORKS. With Life, Notes, and Glossary, by John\nPayne Collier, Esq., F.S.A. 5 vols, medium 8vo. Published at^3,15^. Offered\nat 45j. net.\nTAYLOR'S (BISHOP JEREMY) RULE AND EXERCISES OF HOLY\nLIVING AND DYING. 2 vols, medium 8vo. Published at 21s.\nTAYLOR'S (BISHOP JEREMY) \"THE WORTHY COMMUNICANT.\"\nA Discourse of the Nature, Effects, and Blessings consequent on the Worthy receiving of the Lord's Supper. Pickering, 1853. Medium 8vo. Published at 10s. 6d.\nJSeto iLtftrarg dEtritions of \u00a9tanDarO 3utijor&\nIRNOLD'S (DR. THOMAS) HISTORY OF ROME. 3 vols, demy\nA 8vo, cloth, 36^.\nReprint of \" Murray's Library Edition.\"\nCOLUMBUS (CHRISTOPHER) LIFE AND VOYAGES OF. Together\nwith the Voyages of his Companions. By Washington Irving, 3 vols, demy\n8vo, cloth, 22s. 6d.\nFIELDING'S (HENRY) COMPLETE WORKS. With an Essay on his Life\nand Genius by Arthur Murphy. Re-edited by J. P. Browne, M.D. ii vols,\ndemy 8vo, half roxburghe, top edge gilt, ,\u00a35, 125-. 6d.\nFIELDING'S (HENRY) MISCELLANIES AND POEMS, forming Vol. XL\nof his complete Works. Half roxburghe, top edge gilt, Js. 6d.\nThese Poems and Miscellanies have never before appeared in a collected edition of his Works, and\nwill range with any library 8vo edition.\n 10 Bickers and Son, I Leicester Square, London.\nMILTON (JOHN), THE POETICAL WORKS OF. With a Life of the\nAuthor by the Rev. John Mitford. A fine Library Edition, printed on rich ribbed\npaper by Whittingham & Wilkins. 2 vols, demy 8vo, cloth, 2ls.\nThis is an exact reprint, on superior paper, of the 2 vols, of Poems in the 8 vol. edition of Milton's\nComplete Works.\nMILTON (JOHN) THE POETICAL WORKS OF. With a Life of the\nAuthor by A. Chalmers, M.A., F.S.A. 8vo, cloth, fs. 6d.\nN.B.\u2014This is on thinner paper than the 2 vol. edition above, but is printed from the same large and\nelegant type, but without the \" Mitford's Life of Milton.\"\nMOTLEY'S RISE OF THE DUTCH REPUBLIC. The Library Edition,\nuniform with the \" History of the Netherlands.\" 3 vols, demy 8vo, cloth, 3U. 6d.\nSHAKESPEARE'S PLAYS AND POEMS. Edited, with a Scrupulous Revision\nof the Text, but without Note or Comment, by Charles and Mary Cowden\nClarke. With an Introductory Essay and Copious Glossary. Four Library 8vo\nvols, cloth gilt,\u00a31, lis. 6d.\n*#* This splendid edition of Shakespeare's works is copyright, having been carefully revised and\namplified by Mr. and Mrs. Cowden Clarke. The Text is selected with great care, and is printed\nfrom a new font of ancient type on toned paper, forming four handsome volumes, bound in\ncloth extra, calf, calf extra, russia, or in the best morocco with appropriate tooling.\nioth Thousand.\nSHAKESPEARE. The Best One Volume Edition, with Essay and Glossary, by\nCharles and Mary Cowden Clarke. Large 8vo, beautifully printed and bound,\ncloth extra, 9^.\nSHERIDAN (RICHARD BRINSLEY), THE DRAMATIC WORKS OF.\nWith a Memoir of his Life by J. P. Browne, M.D., and Selections from his Life\nby Thomas Moore. 2 vols, demy 8vo, half roxburghe, gilt top, 21s.\nSHERIDAN. \"THE. POPULAR LARGE TYPE EDITION.\" The above\ntext, reprinted on thinner paper, forming one handsome volume, demy 8vo, cloth\nextra, Js. 6d.\nSMOLLET (TOBIAS, M.D.), THE WORKS OF. With Memoir of his Life.\nTo which is prefixed a view of the Commencement and Progress of Romance, by\nJohn Moore, M.D. A New edition. Edited by J. P. Browne, M.D. 8 vols,\ndemy 8vo, half roxburghe, gilt top, \u00a34, 4s.\nSTERNE (LAURENCE), THE WORKS OF. With a Life of the Author,\nwritten by Himself. A New Edition, with Appendix, containing several Unpublished Letters, &c. Edited by J. P. Browne, M.D. With Portrait of Sterne, Engraved on Steel for this Edition. 4 vols, demy 8vo, half roxburghe, top edge gilt,\n\u00a32, 2S.\nNew Library Edition of Lane's \"Arabian Nights.\"\nTHE THOUSAND AND ONE\" NIGHTS ; Commonly called The Arabian\nNights' Entertainment. A New Translation from the Arabic, with copious Notes\nby Edward William Lane, Author of \"The Modern Egyptians.\" Illustrated\nwith many hundred Engravings on Wood from original designs by William\nHarvey. A New Edition in 3 vols, demy 8vo, cloth gilt, price \u00a31, lis. 6d.\nSecond Edition, with Ten Letters not included in any previous Edition of the Work.\nWHITE. THE NATURAL HISTORY AND ANTIQUITIES OF SEL-\n\u2022 BORNE. By the Rev. Gilbert White,M. A. The Standard Edition by Bennett.\nThoroughly Revised, with Additional Notes, by James Edmund Harting, F.L.S.,\nF.Z.S., author of \"A Handbook of British Birds,\" \"The Ornithology of Shakespeare,\" &c. Illustrated with numerous Engravings by Thomas Bewick, Harvey,\nand others. Demy 8vo, cloth gilt, 10s. 6d.\n List of Illustrated and Standard Modem Books.\nCOWPER'S POETICAL WORKS, including his Translation of \"Homer.\"'\nEdited by Rev. H. F. Carey. Steel Plates, royal 8vo, cloth, gilt edges, 10s. 6d.;\nreduced to 6s.\n\" QBicto anD @on^ JpWortcal Library\"\nMOTLEY'S (JOHN LOTHROP) RISE OF THE DUTCH REPUBLIC.\nA New Edition, complete in I vol. medium 8vo, cloth, Js. 6d. pp. 920.\nDitto, half calf gilt, \\2s.\nDitto, calf extra, 15^.\nPRESCOTT'S (W. H.) HISTORY OF THE CONQUEST OF MEXICO.\nA New and Revised Edition, with the Author's latest Corrections and Additions.\nEdited by John Foster Kirk, i vol. medium 8vo, cloth extra, js. 6d.\nPRESCOTT'S (W. H.) HISTORY OF THE CONQUEST OF PERU.\nA New and Revised Edition, with the Author's latest Corrections and Additions.\nEdited by John Foster Kirk, i vol. medium 8vo. cloth extra, >]s. 6d.\nPRESCOTT'S (W. H.) HISTORY OF THE.REIGN OF FERDINAND\nAND ISABELLA. A New Edition. Edited by John Foster Kirk. 1 vol.\nmedium 8vo, cloth, 7.5-. 6d. (In the Press.)\n\\* Other Standard Works will be published at short intervals in this Series.\nOBooto of Reference, etc*\nlENTHAM'S BRITISH FLORA. Handbook of the British Flora. A\ndescription of the Flowering Plants and Ferns indigenous to or naturalised\nin the British Isles. For the Use of Beginners and Amateurs. By George\nBentham, F. R. S., President of the Linnean Society. With hundreds of\nIllustrations\" from original drawings by W. FlTCH. 2 vols. 8vo, cloth.\nReduced from \u00a33, 10s. to 30s. net.\nCHAFFERS' (WM.) MARKS AND MONOGRAMS ON POTTERY AND\nPORCELAIN of the Renaissance and Modern Periods, with Historical Notices of\neach Manufactory. Preceded by an Introductory Essay on the Vasa Fictilia of the\nGreek, Romano-British, and Mediaeval Eras, by William Chaffers, Author of\n\"Hall Marks on Gold and Silver Plate,\" \"The Keramic Gallery,\" &c. Sixth\nEdition, revised and considerably augmented, with 3000 Potters' Marks and Illustrations, and an Appendix containing an Account of Japanese Keramic Manufactures,\n&c. &c. Royal 8vo, cloth, 42s.\n6th Thousand.\nCHAFFERS. THE COLLECTOR'S HANDBOOK OF MARKS AND\nMONOGRAMS ON POTTERY AND PORCELAIN of the Renaissance\nand Modern Periods. With nearly 3000 Marks and a most valuable Index, by\nWilliam Chaffers. Fcap. 8vo, limp cloth, 6s.\n*#* This handbook will be of great service to those Collectors who in their travels have occasion to\nrefer momentarily to any work treating on the subject. A veritable Multum in Parvo.\nCHAFFERS' HALL MARKS ON GOLD AND SILVER PLATE, with\nTables of Date Letters used in all the Assay Offices of the United Kingdom, and\nmuch additional information. Royal 8vo, cloth, 12s. 6d.\n. *** This, edition contains a History of the Goldsmiths' Trade in France, with Extracts from the\nDecrees relating thereto, and engravings of the Standard and other Marks used in that country\nas well as in other Foreign State \u2022\n 12 Bickers and Son, I Leicester Square, London.\nCLARKE'S (MRS. COWDEN) COMPLETE CONCORDANCE TO\nSHAKESPEARE, being a verbal Index to all Passages in the Dramatic Works\nof the Poet. New and Revised Edition, large 8vo, half morocco, flexible back,\n\u00a31, i%s. net.\nFAIRBAIRN'S CRESTS OF THE FAMILIES OF GREAT BRITAIN\nAND IRELAND. Compiled from the best authorities, by James Fairbairn,\nand revised by Lawrence Butters. One Volume of Plates, containing nearly\n2000 Crests and Crowns of all Nations, Coronets, Regalia, Chaplets and Helmets,\nFlags of all Nations, Scrolls, Monograms, Reversed Initials, Arms of Cities, &c.\nTwo vols, royal 8vo, cloth, 42^.\nLATHAM (DR. R. G.), A DICTIONARY OF THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE, founded on that of Dr. S. Johnson, as edited by the Rev. H. J. Todd,\nwith numerous Emendations and Additions. Second Edition, 4 vols. 4to, half-\nbound morocco, flexible, 6 guineas net (published at \u00a37, cloth).\nAnother Edition, condensed in one large vol. royal 8vo, cloth, 24s.\nNEUMAN AND BARETTI'S SPANISH AND ENGLISH DICTIONARY.\nLast Edition. 2 vols. 8vo, cloth, \u00a31, 8s.\nTHE THEORY AND PRACTICE OF LINEAR PERSPECTIVE, applied\nto Landscapes, Interiors, and the Figure. For the Use of Artists, Art Students,\n&c. By V. Pellegrin. With a Sheet of 16 Figures. Cloth, is. 6d.\n^fecelianeotiieu\nf ECLUS' (ELISEE) THE EARTH. A descriptive History of the Phenomena of the Life of the Globe. Translated by the late B. B. Woodward,\nM.A., and edited by Henry Woodward, British Museum. Illustrated\nby 230 Maps inserted in the Text, and 24 Page Maps printed in colours.\n2 vols. 8vo, 15j.\nA New Edition in 1 vol. 8vo, cloth elegant, gilt edges, 15*.\nRECLUS' (ELISEE) THE OCEAN, ATMOSPHERE, AND LIFE. Being\nthe Second Series of-a Descriptive History of the Life of the Globe. Illustrated\nwith 250 Maps or Figures, and 27 Maps printed in colours. 2 vols, large demy\n8vo, 15 s.\nHUNTINGFORD. A PRACTICAL INTERPRETATION OF THE\nREVELATION OF ST. JOHN THE DIVINE, a revised Edition of the\n\"Voice of the Last Prophet.\" By the Rev. Edward Huntingford, D.C.L.\nCrown 8vo, cloth, 400 pp., $s.\nHUNTINGFORD. ADVICE TO SCHOOL-BOYS. Sermons on their Duties,\nTrials, and Temptations. By the Rev. Edward Huntingford, D.C.L. Crown\n8vo, cloth, 3s.\nReduced from 2ls. to 10s.\nBOOK OF COMMON PRAYER. With the Psalter, and with finely-executed\nwoodcut borders round every page, exactly copied from \" Queen Elizabeth's\nPrayer Book,\" and comprising Holbein's \"Dance of Death,\" Albert Durer's\n\"Life of Christ,\" &c. Crown 8vo, cloth uncut, 10s.\nDitto, cloth extra, 12s.\nDitto, calf antique, 16s.\nGRAY'S POETICAL WORKS. Illustrated by Birket Foster, handsomely\nprinted. i8mo, cloth, 3-r. 6d.\nBULWER'S (DOWAGER LADY) \"SHELLS FROM THE SANDS OF\nTIME.\" A Series of Essays, handsomely printed in crown 8vo, cloth extra, $s.\n a ILfet of JSeta Eemainlier&\nOFFERED AT GREATLY REDUCED NET PRICES.\njlDOLPHUS (JOHN). THE HISTORY OF ENGLAND DURING\nTHE REIGN OF GEORGE III. 7 vols. 8vo, cloth, \u00a34, i%s.; reduced to \u00a31, 15s.\nANDERIDA ; OR, THE BRITON AND THE SAXON, a.d. 491. 3 vols,\npost 8vo, cloth, \u00a31, lis. 6d.; reduced to 3s. 6d.\nBARHAM (REV. RICHARD HARRIS). THE LIFE AND LETTERS\nOF THE REV. R. H. BARHAM, author of \"The Ingoldsby Legends.\"\nWith a Selection from his Miscellaneous Poems. By his Son. 2 vols, crown 8vo,\n21s.; reduced to 6s.\nBOOTH'S METRICAL EPITAPHS, ANCIENT AND MODERN, from\nthe best Writers, with interesting notices of the Authors. Square i2mo, cloth, 5^.;\nreduced to 2s.\nBROUGHTON'S (RHODA) TALES FOR CHRISTMAS EVE. i2mo,\ncloth, $s.; reduced to 2s. 6d.\nCOCHRANE. FRANCIS THE FIRST, AND OTHER ' HISTORIC\nSTUDIES. By A. Bailie Cochrane. 2 vols, post 8vo, cloth, \u00a31, is.; reduced to 2s. 6d.\nCrown 8vo, cloth, 10s. 6d.;\nDASENT'S TALES FROM THE FJELD.\nduced to 4s.\nDYCE'S SHAKESPEARE. With Notes and copious Glossary. 3rd Edition.\nEdited by the late John Foster. Finely-engraved Droeshout and Stratford Portraits. 9 vols. 8vo, cloth. Published at ,\u00a34, 10s.; reduced to \u00a32, ljs. 6d. ;.or tree\ncalf extra, 5 guineas.\nBAKER (H. BARTON). FRENCH SOCIETY FROM THE FRONDE\nTO THE GREAT REVOLUTION. 2 vols. fcap. 8vo. Published at 21s.;\nreduced to 6s.\nDIBDIN'S (T. P.) BIBLIOMANIA, OR BOOK MADNESS : a Bibliographical Romance. A New Edition, with a Supplement, including a Key to the\nassumed Characters in the Drama, Portrait and numerous Illustrations. Roy. 8vo.\nHalf roxburghe. Pub. at 21s. ; reduced to I2.r. 6d\nFRESHFIELD'S (MRS. HENRY). A Summer Tour in the Grisons and Italian\nValleys of the Bernina. 2 Maps and 4 Coloured Illustrations. Fcap. 8vo. Pub.\nat 1 or. 6d. ; reduced to 3s. 6d.\nDIVINE EMBLEMS ; OR, TEMPORAL THINGS SPIRITUALISED.\nBy John Bunyan. i2mo, cloth, 3s. 6d.; reduced to 2s.\nDU CHAILLU'S STORIES OF THE GORILLA COUNTRY. Numerous\nIllustrations. i2mo, cloth, 6s.; reduced to 2s. 6d.\nFIGUIER.\u2014REPTILES AND BIRDS. Best Library Edition, 307 Illustrations,\ndemy 8vo, cloth, 14s.; reduced to $s.\nFITZGERALD'S (PERCY) ROMANCE OF THE STAGE. 2 vols. 8vo,\ncloth, \u00a31, 10s.; reduced to o.s.\n List of Illustrated and Standard Modern Books.\n15\nFORBES'S (ARCHIBALD) MY EXPERIENCES OF THE WAR BETWEEN FRANCE AND GERMANY. 2 vols, thick 8vo, cloth, \u00a31, n\nreduced to 15^.\nFLEMING'S HORSE-SHOES AND HORSE-SHOEING, their Origin, History, Uses, and Abuses. 210 Illustrations, thick 8vo, cloth, \u00a31, is.; reduced to\nioy. 6d.\nGELL AND GANDY'S POMPEIANA ; or, The Topography, Edifices, and\nOrnaments of Pompeii, with upwards of 100 Line Engravings by Goodall, Cooke,\nHeath, Pye, &c. Demy 8vo, cloth, extra gilt. Pub. at i%s. ; reduced to 10s.\nJESSE (J. HENEAGE) MEMOIRS OF CELEBRATED ETONIANS, including Henry Fielding, Horace Walpole, Thomas Gray, &c, &c. &c. 2 vols.\nDemy 8vo. Pub. at 28s. ; reduced to gs.\nLIFE AND TIMES OF OLIVER GOLDSMITH (THE). By John\nForster. Seventh Edition. \" Tauchnitz Edition.\" 2 vols, in 1, square i2mo,\ncloth, 6s.; reduced to 3s.\nLEICESTER SQUARE: its Associations and its Worthies, by Tom Taylor.\nPlans and Portraits, crown 8vo, cloth, 10s. 6d.; reduced to 3s. 6d.\nMETCALF'S HISTORY OF GERMAN LITERATURE. Crown 8vo, cloth,\n7-y. 6d. ; reduced to 3s. 6d.\nMILLER'S (THOMAS), MY FATHER'S GARDEN. 40 Illustrations, Crown\n8vo, cloth extra, 5.?.; reduced to 2s.\nNELSON'S (LORD) LETTERS AND DESPATCHES. 7 vols. 8vo, cloth,\n\u00a3$, 10s. ; reduced to^l, 11^. 6d.\nPAST DAYS IN INDIA ; or, Sporting Reminiscences of the Valley of the Soane\nand the Basin of Singrowlee. By a late Customs Officer, N.W. Provinces, India. -\nPost 8vo, cloth, ior. 6d. ; reduced to 3s.\nPEEL (SIR ROBERT) LIFE OF. By Lord Dalling. 8vo, cloth, 9 6d. ;\nreduced to 2s. 6d.\nPERCY'S RELIQUES OF ANCIENT ENGLISH POETRY. (Bohn's\nEdition.) 1 vol. royal 8vo, cloth, ior. 6d.; reduced to 3-y. 6d.\nPICKERING'S DIAMOND CLASSICS.\nHomeri Iliad et Odyssea, 2 vols, in 1, large paper, half roxburghe, 2is. : reduced\nto 8s. 6d. & '\nTasso, 2 vols, cloth, 12.?.; reduced to 4^.\nPetrarch \u201e 6s.; ,, 2s. 6d.\nDante, 2 vols. ,, 12s.; \u201e 4s.\nHorace ,, 6s.; ,, 2s.\nCicero \u201e 6s.; ,, 2s.\nPORTER'S (MAJOR WHITWORTH) HISTORY OF THE KNIGHTS\nOF MALTA ; OR, THE ORDER OFgTHE HOSPITAL OF ST. JOHN\nOF JERUSALEM. 2 vols. 8vo. cloth, \u00a31, 4s. ; reduced to 18s.\nREYNOLDS (SIR JOSHUA) ENGLISH CHILDREN. 15 Photographs. 4to,\ncloth elegant, \u00a31, gnj\nRODWELL'S BIRTH OF CHEMISTRY, with numerous Illustrations, V.6d.i\nreduced to is. 6d.\nSCOTT'S BIBLE. Last Edition, 6 vols. 4to, calf antique, red edges, 4 Guineas,\n Bickers and Sons List of Modern Books.\nSKERTCHLY'S (J. A.) DAHOMEY AS IT IS. Coloured Plates and Woodcuts. 8vo, cloth, 16s.; reduced to $s. 6d.\nTANDON. THE WORLD OF THE SEA. Translated from \"Le Monde de\nla Mer,\" by Mons. Moquin Tandon. Numerous Coloured Plates and Woodcuts.\nLarge 8vo, cloth gilt, \u00a3l, is. ; reduced to 9.?.\nTHORVALDSEN, HIS LIFE AND WORKS. By Eugene Plon. 39 Engravings on Steel and Wood, large 8vo, cloth, \u00a31, $s. j reduced to gs.\nWAGNER (RICHARD) AND THE MUSIC OF THE FUTURE. By\nFranz Hueffer. Crown 8vo, cloth, gs. ; reduced to 4s.\nWATTS'S (DR.) HYMNS FOR CHILDREN. Square 8vo. With 100 Engravings on Wood from designs by Artists of Celebrity. Cloth elegant, Js. 6d.;\nreduced to 5s. (First Impressions of these charming Illustrations.)\nWHEELER'S TRAVELS OF HERODOTUS. 2 vols, crown 8vo, cloth, 18*.;\nreduced to 6s.\nWHEELER'S GEOGRAPHY OF HERODOTUS. 8vo, plates, cloth, 18s.;\nreduced to i\nWHETHAM'S (BODDAM-) WESTERN WANDERINGS: a Record of\nTravel in the United States. 12 Full-page Illustrations, 8vo, cloth gilt, 15.?.;\nreduced to 4s.\nWILLOUGHBY. THE DIARY OF LADY WILLOUGHBY. Illustrative\nof Domestic Life during the Reign of Charles I. Imprinted and bound in the\nantique style, crown 8vo, \"js. 6d.; reduced to 3s.\nWINGFIELD'S UNDER THE PALMS IN ALGERIA AND TUNIS.\n2 vols, crown 8vo, cloth, \u00a31, is.; reduced to 4s. 6d.\nWOLF-HUNTING AND WILD SPORT IN LOWER BRITTANY. By\nthe Author of \"Paul Pendril,\" &c. &c. With Illustrations by. Colonel H. Hope\nCrealocke, C.B. 8vo, cloth, 12s.; reduced to 4s. 6d.\nBtstiit.\n*** All Books in this List may be had Elegantly Bound in\nHalf Calf or Full Calf and complete Catalogues will be forwarded\non application.\nMany of the Books in this List are offered at greatly reduced\n\" net prices\" and are not subject to the usual discount; but all others\nnot so marked may be obtained through any bookseller at the usual\n.discount, or will be supplied direct from the Publishers, Messrs.\nBickers & Son, I Leicester Square, London.\n e\nfji A , \u2122 ^ 7*Ue\u00a3<\n18-4-8\nr> 3**8\nO Q-b\n ","type":"literal","lang":"en"},{"value":"Different edition than one listed in Strathern and Edwards.
Other copies: http:\/\/www.worldcat.org\/oclc\/186709422","type":"literal","lang":"en"}],"http:\/\/www.europeana.eu\/schemas\/edm\/hasType":[{"value":"Books","type":"literal","lang":"en"},{"value":"Travel literature","type":"literal","lang":"en"}],"http:\/\/purl.org\/dc\/terms\/identifier":[{"value":"FC3821.249 .K43 1826","type":"literal","lang":"en"},{"value":"II-0295","type":"literal","lang":"en"}],"http:\/\/www.europeana.eu\/schemas\/edm\/isShownAt":[{"value":"10.14288\/1.0308194","type":"literal","lang":"en"}],"http:\/\/purl.org\/dc\/terms\/language":[{"value":"English","type":"literal","lang":"en"}],"http:\/\/www.europeana.eu\/schemas\/edm\/provider":[{"value":"Vancouver : University of British Columbia Library","type":"literal","lang":"en"}],"http:\/\/purl.org\/dc\/terms\/publisher":[{"value":"London : Bickers and Son","type":"literal","lang":"en"}],"http:\/\/purl.org\/dc\/terms\/rights":[{"value":"Images provided for research and reference use only. For permission to publish, copy, or otherwise distribute these images please contact\u00a0digital.initiatives@ubc.ca.","type":"literal","lang":"en"}],"http:\/\/purl.org\/dc\/terms\/source":[{"value":"Original Format: University of British Columbia. Library. Rare Books and Special Collections. FC3821.249 .K43 1826","type":"literal","lang":"en"}],"http:\/\/purl.org\/dc\/terms\/subject":[{"value":"Cook, James, 1728-1779","type":"literal","lang":"en"},{"value":"Voyages around the world","type":"literal","lang":"en"}],"http:\/\/purl.org\/dc\/terms\/title":[{"value":"A narrative of the voyages round the world, performed by Captain James Cook : with an account of his life, during the previous and intervening periods. With twelve illustrations reproduced in exact facsimile, from drawings made during the voyage","type":"literal","lang":"en"}],"http:\/\/purl.org\/dc\/terms\/type":[{"value":"Text","type":"literal","lang":"en"}]}}